I

I
I
I
' '

0 CODIGO CIVIL BRASILEIRO

EM INGLES

THE BRAZILIAN CIVIL CODE

IN ENGLISH

liiHWll~Hl~~Hlll~
54006002346486
~ -- - - -~
I
l
{
Leslie Rose

'!
I
lI 0 CODIGO CIVIL BRASILEIRO
EM INGLES

THE BRAZILIAN CIVIL CODE ·

IN ENGLISH

RENOVAR
Rio de Janeiro• Sao Paulo• Recife
2008
Todos os direitos reservados a
LIVRARIA E EDITORA RENOVAR LTDA.
MATRIZ: Rua da Assembleia, 10/2.421 - Centro - RJ
CEP: 20011-901 -Tel.: (21) 2531-2205 - Fax: (21) 2531-2135
FILIAL RJ: Tels.: (21) 2589-186312580-8596 - Fax: (21) 2589-1962
Prefacio
FILIAL SP: Tel.: (11) 3104-9951 - Fax: (11) 3105-0359
FILIAL PE: Tel.: (81) 3223-4988 - Fax: (81) 3223-1176
LIVRARIA CENTRO (RJ): Tels.: (21) 2531-131612531-1338 - Fax: (21) 2531-1873
LIVRARIA IPANEMA (RJ): Tel: (21) 2287-4080 - Fax: (21) 2287-4888 Ess.a obra e uma versao em ingJes do C6digo Civil. Apesar de suas pou-
cas letras, o artigo indefinido e muito significa:tivo, porque ele reflete a natu-
www.editorarenovar.com.br renovar@editorarenovar.com.br
reza da traduc;ao - tanto quanta o artigo, ela e indefinida.
SAC: 0800-221863
© 2008 by Livraria Editora Renovar Ltda. 0 significado de um texto nao e estatico, e muito menos unico. A subs-
tiincia do C6digo Civil, oriunda da tradic;ao jurfdica que os romanos inicia-
Conselho Editorial: ram, enraizada no sistema jurfdico brasileiro, muda a medida que as suas re-
Arnaldo Lopes Silssekind - Presidente gras sao aplicadas aos casos concretos que surgem na vida quotidiana dentro
Carlos Alberto Menezes Direito de uma sociedade que, ela tambem, se transforma.
Caio Tacito (in memoriam) Comunicar o significado de um texto e outro alvo diffcil de acertar. Esta
Luiz Emygdio F. da Rosa Jr. versao do C6digo, e 6bvio, tern como publico-alvo os leitores da lfngua ingle-
Celso de Albuquerque Mello (in memoriam)
sa. Esses leitores em potencial, porem, siio imensamente variados: alguns te-
Ricardo Lobo Torres
Ricardo Pereira Lira riio o ingles como lfngua materna; outtos teriio conhecimentos do portugues
ou de uma (ou mais) das outras lfnguas latinas; alguns seriio formados em Di-
Revisiio Tipogrtifica: da autora
reito, e destes, alguns na tradic;ao romano-germanica, e outros na tradic;ao an-
Capa: Carmen Guerrero glo-saxonica.
Editorai;iio Eletronica: TopTextos Edicr5es Graficas Ltda. 0 pr6prio meio de comunicac;ao, a lfngua, apresenta desafios. A forma
e a substiincia de conceitos e preceitos jurfdicos sao inseparaveis, e o portu-
N'? 0666 gues, como a tradic;ao jurfdica que inspirou 0 direito brasileiro, e originario
de Roma. Assim, a substiincia do C6digo Civil encontra sua expressiio natural
CIP-Brasil. Catalogacrao-na-fonte no idioma portugues.
Sindicato Nacional dos Editores de Livros, RJ.
· 0 vocabulario jurfdico do ing!Cs reflete a tradic;:ao da common law. Cer-
tamente, os conceitos da tradic;iio jurfdica romana ja se revestiram da lfngua
Rose, Leslie
R236c 0 C6digo Civil Brasileiro em ingJes/the brazilian Civil Code in en-
inglesa: no Quebec, em Louisiana, no direito eclesiastico, nas Filipinas, e, em
glish I Leslie Rose. - Rio de Janeiro: Renovar, 2008. certa medida, na Esc6cia. 0 pr6prio ingles importou boa parte do seu voca-
457p.; 23cm. bulario do Jatim, direta ou indiretamente. Mesmo assim, a traduc;ao para o in-
gles de textos jurfdicos de outras tradic;:oes corre varios perigos terminol6gi-
ISBN 978857147-667-7
cos. 0 mortgage equivale ahipoteca? Na pratica, OS dois sao garantias reais,
I. Direito Civil - Brasil. - I. Tftulo. everdade. Porem, o mortgagee produto do direito de real property (im6veis)
da Inglaterra e da proibic;ao contra a usura, e atras do vocabulo mortgage se
CDD- 346.81052
escondem os conceitos de estate e equity, estranhos a tradis;:ao romano-ger-
Proibida a reproduitlio (Lei 9.610/98) manica.
Impresso no Brasil Ao traduzir o C6digo, busquei respeitar a grande tradic;:ao romano-ger-
Printed in Brazil
manica, evitando o uso de termos que importam conceitos especfficos da
common law. Tambem procurei seguir a estrutura do texto em portugues, para
que os leitores possam sentir a formulac;ao do original, e espero que o formato
colunado !eve os leitores a comparar a tradw;;ao e o original. Deixei de obser-
var essas orienta96es auto-impostas quando delas resultava um texto manco
ou, pior, incompreensfvel.
Gostaria de reconhecer o quanto devo aos juristas que elaboraram o C6-
digo Civil de Louisiana ea versao em ing!es do C6digo Civil do Baixo Cana-
da e do C6digo Civil do Quebec. Essas obras forneceram uma solu9ao elegan-
te a muitas das dificuldades que encontrei ao traduzir o C6digo Civil brasi-
leiro.
Concluo essa breve introdu9ao reiterando que a versao em ingles do C6-
digo aqui apresentada e uma tradw;:ao: uma negocia9ao, um meio-termo e.
ainda assim, espero, um ato de comunica9ao, fie!, em grande parte, a sua fonte
e seus leitores.
Nenhuma das suas infidelidades, entretanto, pode ser atribufda as mui-
tas pessoas que contribufram, direta e indiretamente, a essa obra. Ofere90
muitos votos de agradecimento aos meus colegas no Barbosa, Miissnich &
Aragao Advogados, o meu Iaborat6rio experimental para a aprendizagem da
arte de tradu9ao. Agrade90, especialmente, a Chico Miissnich, que contratou
uma advogada canadense, gravida e recem-chegada no Rio, porque "as gra-
vidas raciocinam, nao e?" ea Bruno Lewicki, a eminencia parda por tras des-
ta obra. Tenho que mencionar, ainda, Daniel Levy, cuja habilidade coma pes-
quisador serviu para esclarecer varias duvidas hermeneuticas.
Agrade90 tambem aminha famflia brasileira e aos amigos que aqui en-
contrei.
Finalmente, agrade90 a meus pais, Alex e Mary-Lou Rose, advogado e
professora de ingles, que inspiraram um amor ao direito ea lfngua (e aceita-
ram a tarefa onerosa de revisar o texto da versao do C6digo), ea minha famf-
lia e amigos canadenses, pelo seu apoio e carinho, a distancia.
Dedico esta obraas minhas duas peritas em questoes relacionadas agra-
matica, estilo e pronuncia do portugues brasileiro coloquial, minhas filhas,
Naomi e Zoe Baranek.
Leslie Rose
setembro de 2007
codigoc ivil.ingles@gmail.com
Foreword
This work is a translation into English of the Civil Code. A is a small
word, but in its single letter it reflects the nature of translation: like the article,
translation is indefinite.
The meaning of a text is not a static or even a single thing. The meaning
of the articles of the Civil Code is a living thing, originating in a legal tradi-
tion that began with the Romans, rooted in the Brazilian legal system and
changing as its rules are applied to concrete situations that arise out of the
business of living in a society that itself changes.
Communicating the meaning of a text is even more of a moving target.
Obviously, this translation is aimed at readers of English. But those potential
readers are immensely varied: some will be native speakers of English; some
will be familiar with Portuguese or one (or more) of Portuguese's sister lan-
guages; some will have legal training; some will be familiar with the civil law
tradition; some with the common law.
And then there is language, the medium of communication. The con-
cepts and principles of the civil law are inseparable from their expression, and
Portuguese, like the civil law, finds its origins in Rome. The Napoleonic
Code, one of the main inspirations of the Brazilian Civil Code, was drafted in
French. In Portuguese, therefore, the substance of the Code finds a natural
form.
The legal vocabulary of English reflects the common law. There are, of
course, many instances where civil law concepts have found expression in
English: Quebec, Louisiana, ecclesiastical law, the Philippines and, to some
extent, Scotland are examples. English, the great borrower, has imported
much of its vocabulary from Latin, directly or indirectly. Still, translation
into English of legal texts from civil law sources presents many terminologi-
cal dangers. Is an hipoteca a mortgage'? True, both are real security. But the
mortgage grew out of the Jaw of real property in England and the prohibition
against usury, and behind the word mortgage are the concepts of estate and
equity, neither of which finds a comfortable home in the civil law.
In translating the Code, I have tried to respect the great civil law tradi-
tion by avoiding the use of terms that import specific common law notions. I
have also tried to follow the structure of each article's text, so that readers
will have a taste of the Portuguese original, and I hope that the side-by-side
format will encourage comparison between the translation and the original. I
have departed from both guidelines when the result would make the trans- SUMA.RIO TABLE OF CONTENTS
lated text overly awkward or worse, incomprehensible.
Here I must express my very great debt to the drafters of the Louisiana
Civil Code and the English versions of the Civil Code of Lower Canada and
the Quebec Civil Code. Those works often provided an elegant solution to the Pagina Page
many difficulties I encountered in translating the Brazilian Civil Code.
DECRETO-LEI N° 4.657, DECREE-LAW 4657
This translation is a translation: an intermediation, a negotiation, a com- O.F SEPTEMBER 4, 1942
DE 4 DE SETEMBRO DE 1942
promise and yet still, I hope, a meaningful communication, largely faithful to
both its source and its readers.
None of its infidelities can be attributed to the many people who con- Lei de Introdrn;ao ao C6digo Civil Law of'Introduction to the Brazilian
tributed, directly and indirectly, to this work. I owe a large vote of thanks to Brasileiro .......................................... l Civil Code ......................................... 1
my colleagues at Barbosa, Mi.issnich & Aragao Advogados, who unwittingly
served as an experimental school of translation. I thank, in particular, Chico .LEI N° 10.406, LAWl0,406
Mi.issnich, who offered a job to a newly pregnant Canadian lawyer recently DE 10 DE JANEIRO DE 2002 OF JANUARY 10, 2002
transplanted to Rio de Janeiro because" pregnant women think, don't they?",
0 C6digo Civil Brasileiro The Brazilian Civil Code
and Bruno Lewicki, the eminence grise behind this translation. I must also
mention Daniel Levy, who generously applied his research skills to clarify PARTEGERAL GENERAL PART
questions of interpretation. Livro I - Das Pessoas Book I - Persons
I also thank my Brazilian family and the friends I have found here.
Lastly, I thank.my parents, Alex and Mary-Lou Rose, lawyer and Eng- TiTULO I - Das Pessoas Naturais ............ 9 TITLE I - Natural Persons ....................... 9
Capitulo I - Da Personalidade e Chapter I - Personality
lish teacher, who inspired a love of the law and of language (and who took on
da Capacidade .................................... 9 and Capacity ...................................... 9
the task of proof-reading this translation), and my Canadian family and
Capftulo II - Dos Direitos da Perso- Chapter II - Personality
friends for their long-distance support and encouragement. nalidade ............................................ 12 Rights ............................................... 12
I dedicate this work to my two resident experts on all matters related to Capftulo III- Da Ausencia ................. 14 Chapter III - Absence ........................ 14
the grammar, style and pronunciation of colloquial Brazilian Portuguese, my Se<;ao I..,. Da Curadoria dos Bens do Section I - Curatorship of
daughters, Naomi and Zoe Baranek. Ausente .......................................... 14 the Property of Absentees ............. 14
Sei;ao II- Da Sucessao Provis6ria ... 15 Section II- Provisional Succession. 15
Leslie Rose Se<;iio III - Da Sucessao Definitiva .. 17 Section III - Definitive Succession . 17
september of 2007 TiTU LO II - Das Pessoas Juridic as ........ 18 TITLE II - Legal Persons ....................... 18
codigocivil.ingles@gmail.com Capitulo I - Disposigoes Gerais ......... 18 Chapter I - General Provisions .......... 18
Capftulo II - Das Associagoes ............ 22 Chapter II - Associations ................... 22
Capitulo III - Das Fundagoes ............. 25 Chapter III - Foundations .................. 25
TiTULO III - Do Domicflio ................... 27 TITLE III - Domicile ............................. 27

Uvro II - Dos Bens Book II - Property

TfTULO UNICO - Das Diferentes SOLE TITLE - The Different Classes of

Classes de Bens .................................. 29 Property .............................................. 29
Capitulo I - Dos Bens Considerados Chapter I - Property Considered in
em si Mesmos .................................. 29 and of Itself. ..................................... 29
 Section I - Immovable Property ...... 29
Section II - Movable Property ......... 29
Section III - Fungible and Consuma-
ble Property ................................... 30
Section IV - Divisible Property ....... 30
Section V - Singular and Collective
Property ......................................... 30
Chapter II - Things Considered in
Relation to Each Other..................... 31
Chapter III - Public Property ............. 32
Book III - Juridical Facts
TITLE I - Juridical Transactions ........... 33
Chapter I - General Provisions .......... 33
Chapter II - Representation ................ 34
Chapter III - Conditions, Terms and
Charges ............................................ 35
Chapter Iv - Defects of Juridical
Transactions ..................................... 38
Section I - Mistake and Ignorance ... 38
Section II - Wrongful Conduct.. ...... 39
Section III - Coercion ...................... 30
Section IV -State of Peril... ............. 41
Section V - Lesion ........................... 41
Section VI - Fraud Against
Creditors ........................................ 42
Chapter V - Invalidity of Juridical
Transactions ..................................... 43
TITLE II - Licit Juridical Acts ............... 47
TITLE III-Illicit Acts ........................... 47
TITLE IV - Prescription arid
Peremption ......................................... 47
Chapter I - Prescription ...................... 47
Section I-General Provisions ......... 47
Section II - Causes that Impede or
Suspend Prescription ..................... 48
Section !II.-
Causes that Interrupt
Prescnpt1on ................................... 49
Section IV - Prescriptive Periods .... 50
Chapter II - Peremption ..................... 53
TITLE V - Proof .................................... 53
Se9ao I - Dos Bens Im6veis ............ 29
Se9ao II - Dos Bens M6veis ............ 29
Se9ilo III - Dos Bens Fungfveis e
Consumfveis .................................. 30
Se9ilo IV - Dos Bens Divisfveis ...... 30
Se9ilo V - Dos Bens Singulares e
Coletivos ....................................... 30
Capftulo II - Dos Bens Reciproca-
mente Considerados ........................ 31
Capftulo III - Dos Bens Publicos ....... 32
Livro III - Dos Fatos Juridicos
TiTULO I- Do Neg6cio Jurfdico ........... 33
Capftulo I - Disposi96es Gerais ......... 33
Capftulo II - Da Representa9ilo ......... 34
Capftulo III - Da Condi9ilo, do Termo e
do Encargo ....................................... 35
Capftulo IV - Dos Defeitos do Neg6cio
Jurfdico ............................................ 38
Se9ilo I - Do Erro ou Ignorancia ...... 38
Se9ao II - Do Do lo .......................... 39
Se9ao III - Da Coa9ilo ..................... 40
Segao IV - Do Estado de Perigo ...... 41
Se9ilo V - Da Lesao ......................... 41
Se9ao VI - Da Fraude Contra
Credores ........................................ 42
Capftulo V - Da Invalidade do Neg6cio
Jurfdico ............................................ 43
TiTULO II - Dos Atos Jurfdicos Lfcitos .. 47
TfTULO III - Dos Atos Ilicitos .............. 47
TiTULO IV - Da Prescric;ilo e
da Decadericia .................................... 47
Capftulo I - Da Prescric;ilo ................. 47
Se9ilo I - Disposi96es Gerais ........... 47
Se9ao II - Das Causas que Impedem
ou Suspendem a Prescric;ao ........... 48
Sec;ao III - Das Causas que
Interrompem a Prescric;ao .............. 49
Sei;ilo IV - Dos Prazos da Prescric;ao .. 50
Capftulo II - Da Decadencia .............. 53
TiTULO V - Da Prova ........................... 53
PARTE ESPECIAL
Livro I - Do Direito das Obrigm;oes
TiTULO I - Das Modalidades das
Obrigac;oes ......................................... 59
Capftulo I - Das Obrigac;oes de Dar ... 59
Se91io T- Das Obriga96es de Dar Coi-
sa Certa .......................................... 59
Sec;ao II - Das Obrigac;oes de
Dar Coisa Incerta ........................... 60
Capftulo II - Das Obrigar;oes de Fazer. 61
Capftulo III - Das Obriga9oes de Nao
Fazer ................................................ 61
Capftulo IV - Das Obrigac;oes Alterna-
tivas .................................................. 62
Capftulo V - Das Obrigar;oes Divisf-
veis e Indivisfveis ............................. 63
Capftulo VI - Das Obriga96es
Solid:!rias ......................................... 64
Sec;iio I - Disposic;oes Gerais ........... 64
Sec;ao II - Da Solidaiiedade
Ativa .............................................. 65
Sec;ilo III- Da Solidariedade Passiva. 65
TfTULO II - Da Transmissao das
Obrigac;oes ......................................... 67
Capftulo I - Da Cessilo de Credito ..... 67
Capftulo IT - Da Assunc;ao de Dfvida .. 69 Chapter II - Assumption of Debt ....... 69
TiTULO III - Do Adimplemento e Extin-
9ao das Obrigac;oes ............................. 70
Capftulo I - Do Pagamento ................ 70 Chapter I - Payment. .......................... 70
Se9ilo I - De Quern Deve Pagar ....... 70
Se9ilo II - Daqueles a Quern se
Deve Pagar .................................... 71
Sec;ao III - Do Objeto do Pagamento
e sua Prova ..................................... 71
Sec;ilo IV - Do Lugar do Pagamento .. 73
Se9ao V-DoTempodoPagamento. 74
Capftulo II - Do Pagamento em
Consignac;ao .................................... 74
Capftulo III-Do Pagamento com Sub-
Rogac;:ao ........................................... 76
Capftulo IV - Da Imputa9ao do
Pagamento ....................................... 78
SPECIAL PART
Book I - The Law of Obligations
TITLE I - The Kinds of
Obligations ......................................... 59
Chapter I - Obligations to Give ......... 59
Section I - Obligations to Give a
Certain Thing ................................ 59
Section II - Obligations to
Give an Uncertain Thing ............... 50
Chapter II - Obligations to Do ........... 61
Chapter III - Obligations Not
to Do ................................................ 61
Chapter IV -Alternative
Obligations ...................................... 62
Chapter V - Divisible and Indivisible
Obligations ...................................... 63
Chapter VI - Solidary
Obligations ...................................... 64
Section f - General Provisions ........ 64
Section II - Solidarity Among
Creditors ........................................ 65
Section III - Solidarity among Debtors. 65
TITLE II - Transfer of
Obligations ......................................... 67
Chapter I - Assignment of Rights ...... 67
TITLE III - Performance and Extinction
of Obligations ..................................... 70
Section I - Who Must Pay ............... 70
Section II - Those to Whom
Payment Must Be Made ................ 71
Section III - What is to be Paid
and Proof of Payment .................... 71
Section IV - Place of Payment ........ 73
Section V -Time of Payment .......... 74
Chapter II - Payment by
Deposit. ............................................ 74
Chapter III - Payment with
Subrogation ..................................... 76
Chapter IV - Imputation of
Payment ........................................... 78
 Chapter V - Giving in Payment ......... 78 Capftulo V - Da Dac;:ao em Pagamento .. 78 Sec;:iio II - Das Clausulas Especiais Section II - Clauses Peculiar to
Chapter VI - Novation ....................... 79 Capftulo VI - Da Novac;:ao ................. 79 aCompra e Venda ....................... 104 Purchase and Sale ........................ 104
Chapter VII - Compensation ............. 80 Capftulo VII - Da Compensac;:iio ....... 80 Subsec;:iio I - Da Retroven- Subsection I - Sale with a Right
Chapter VIII - Confusion ................... 82 Capftulo VIII - Da Confusiio ............. 82 da ............................................... 104 of Redemption .......................... 104
Chapter IX - Remission of Capftulo IX - Da Remissiio das Subsec;:ao II - Da Venda a Contento Subsection II - Sales on Approval
Debts ................................................ 82 Dfvidas ............................................. 82 e da Sujeita a Prova ................... l 04 and Trial Sales .......................... 104
TITLE IV - Failure to Perform TiTULO IV - Do Inadimplemento das Subsec;:ao III - Da Preempc;:iio ou Subsection III - Preemption or
Obligations ........................·................. 83 Obrigac;:5es ......................................... 83 Preferencia ................................ 105 Preference ................................. I05
Chapter I - General Provisions .......... 83 Capftulo I - Disposic;:oes Gerais ......... 83 Subsec;:iio IV - Da Venda com Subsection IV - Sale with
Chapter II- Default.. .......................... 83 Capftulo II - Da Mora ........................ 83 Reserva de Domlnio .................. 106 Reservation of Ownership ........ 106
Chapter III - Losses and Damages ..... 85 Capftulo III - Das Perdas e Danos ..... 85 Subsec;:iio V - Da Venda Sabre Subsction V - Sale By
Documentos .............................. 107 Documents ................................ 107
Chapter IV - Legal Interest ................ 85 Capftulo IV - Dos Juros Legais ......... 85
Capftulo II - Da Troca ou Perrnuta .. I08 Chapter II - Barter or Exchange ....... 108
Chapter V - Penalty Clauses .............. 86 Capftulo V - Da Clausula Penal... ...... 86
Capftulo ill - Do Contrato Estimat6rio 109 Chapter III - Sale on Consignment .. 109
Chapter VI - Earnest or Down Capftulo VI - Das Arras ou
Payment ........................................... 87 Sinai ................................................. 87 Capftulo IV - Da Doac;:iio ................. 109 Chapter IV - Gifts ............................ 109
TITLE V - Contracts in General ............ 88 TfTULO V - Dos Contratos em Geral .... 88 Sec;;iio I - Disposic;;oes Gerais ......... 109 Section I - General Provisions ...... 109
Chapter I - General Provisions .......... 88 Capitulo I- Disposic;:5es Gerais ......... 88 Sec;;iio II - Da Revogac;;iio da Doac;;iio. 11 l Section II - Revocation of Gifts .... 111
Section I - Preliminary Provisions .. 88 Sec;:ao I - Preliminares ..................... 88 Capitulo V - Da Locac;:iio de Coisas. 113 Chapter V - Lea~e of Things ............ 113
Section II - Formation of Sec;:ao II - Da Formac;:ao dos Capftulo VI - Do Emprestimo ......... 116 Chapter VI-Loan ............................ 116
Contracts ....................................... 89 Contratos ....................................... 89 Sec;;iio I - Do Comoda- Section I -Loan for Use or
Section III - Stipulations in Favor of Sec;:ao III - Da Estipulac;:ao em 10 .................................................. 116 Commodatum .............................. 116
Third Parties .................................. 90 Favor de Terceiro .......................... 90 Sec;;ao II - Do Mlituo ...................... 117 Section II - Simple Loan or Mutuum . 1I 7
Section IV - Promises of Performance Sec;:ao IV - Da Promessa de Fato de Capftulo VII - Da Prestm;ao de Chapter VII - Provision of
by Another ..................................... 91 Terceiro ......................................... 91 Servic;;o ........................................... 118 Services .......................................... 118
Section V - Redhibitory Defects ..... 91 Sec;:ao V - Dos Vfcios Redibit6rios ... 91 Cap!tulo VIII - Da Emprei tada ........ 121 Chapter VIII -Contract ofEnterprise .. 121
Section VI- Eviction ....................... 93 Sec;:iio VI - Da Evicc;:ao .................... 93 Capftulo IX- Do Dep6sito ............... 125 Chapter IX- Deposit ....................... 125
Section VII - Aleatory Sec;:iio VII - Dos Contratos Sec;:iio I-Do Dep6sito Voluntario. 125 Section I- Voluntary Deposit ....... 125
Contracts ....................................... 94 Aleat6rios ..................................... 94 Sec;;ao II - Do Dep6sito Necessano . 128 Section II - Necessary Deposit.. .... 128
Section VIII - Preliminary Contn1cts .. 95 Sec;;ao Vill - Do Contrato Preliminar .. 95 Capltulo X- Do Mandato ................ 129 Chapter X - Mandate ....................... 129
Section IX - Contracts with a Sec;:ao IX - Do Contrato com Sec;;ao I - Disposic;:5es Gerais ......... 129 Section I- General Provisions ...... 129
Person to be Named ....................... 96 Pessoa a Declarar ....... ;.................. 96 Sec;:ao II - Das Obrigac;;oes do Section II - Obligations of
Chapter II -Extinction of Contracts .. 97 Capftulo II - Da Extinc;:ao do Contrato . 97 Mandatario .................................. 132 the Mandatary ............................. 132
Section I -Agreement to Terminate .. 97 Sec;:ao I -Do Distrato ....................... 97 Sec;:ao III - Das Obrigac;:5es do Section III - Obligations of the
Section II - Resolutory Clauses ....... 97 Sec;:ao II- Da Clausula Resolutiva .. 97 Mandante ..................................... 134 Mandator ..................................... 134
Section III-The Exception ofNon- Sec;:ao III - Da Excec;:ao de Contrato Sec;;aoIV-DaExtinc;:aodoMandato. 135 Section IV -Extinction of Mandate. 135
Perforrnance .................................. 98 Nao Cumprido ............................... 98 Sec;:ao V - Do Mandato Judicial... .. 137 Section V - Judicial Mandate ........ 137
Section IV - Dissolution for Sec;:ao IV - Da Resoluc;:ao por Capftulo XI - Da Comissao ............. 137 Chapter XI - Commission ................ 137
Excessive Onerousness ................. 98 Onerosidade Excessiva ................. 98 Capftulo XII - Da Agenda e Chapter XII - Agency and
TITLE VI - The Various Types of TfTULO VI- Das Varlas Especies de Distribui~iio ................................... 140 Distribution .................................... 140
Contracts ......................... «.................. 99 Contrato ............................................. 99 Capftulo XIII- Da Corretagem ........ 142 Chapter XIII - Brokerage ................ 142
Chapter I - Purchase and Sale ............ 99 Capftulo I - Da Compra e Venda ....... 99 Capftulo XIV -Do Transporte ......... 143 Chapter XIV - Carriage ................... 143
Section I- General Provisions ......... 99 Sec;:ao I- Disposic;:5es Gerais ........... 99 Sec;:iio I - Disposic;:oes Gerais ......... 143 Section I - General Provisions ...... 143
 Section II- Carriage of Persons .... 144
Section III-Carriage of Things .... 146
ChapterXV-Insurance ................... 149
Section I - General Provisions ....... 149
Section II - Damage Insuran,ce ...... 152
Section III - Insurance of Persons . 155
Chapter XVI - Constitution of
Annuiti.es ........................................ 158
Chapter XVII-Gaming and Wagering .159
Chapter XVIII - Personal Guardllties .. 160
Section I - General Provisions ....... 160
Section II - Effects of Personal
Guaranties ................................... 161
Section III - Extinction of Personal
Guaranties ................................... 163
Chapter XIX - Settlement ................ 164
Chapter XX- Submission Agreements 166
TITLE VII - Unilateral Acts ................ 166
Chapter I - Promise to
Reward ........................................... 166
Chapter II - Management of Affairs .. 167
Chapter III - Payment Not Owed ..... 170
Chapter IV - Enrichment without
Cause ............................................. 172
TITLE VIII - Debt Instruments ........... 172
Chapter I - General Provisions ........ 172
Chapter II - Bearer Instruments ....... 175
Chapter III - Instruments to Order ... 176
f 'hapter IV - Registered Securities .. 179
TITLE IX - Civil
Liability ............................................ 180
Chapter! - Obligation to Indemnify ... 180
Chapter II - Indemnification ............ 183
TITLE X- Creditors' Preferences and
Privileges .......................................... 185
Book II-The Law of Enterprises
TITLE I- Business Proprietors ............ 188 TiruLO I - Do Empresario .................. 188
Chapter I - Definition and Capitulo I - Da Caracterizagao e da
Registration .................................... 188
Inscrigao ........................................ 188
Chapter II - Capacity ....................... 190 Capftulo II - Da Capacidade ............ 190
S~iio II - Do Transporte de Pessoas. 144
S~iio III - Do Transporte de Coisas .. 146
Caprtulo XV - Do Seguro ................ 149
Segao I- Disposigoes Gerais ......... 149
Segiio II - Do Segura de Dano ....... 152
Segao III - Do Seguro de Pessoa ... 155
Capftulo XVI - Da Constituigiio de
Renda ............................................. 158
Capftulo XVIl - Do Jogo e da Aposta . 159
Capftulo XVIII- Da Fianga ............. 160
Segao I-Disposigoes Gerais ......... 160
Segao 11- Dos Efeitos da
Fianga .......................................... 161
Segao III - Da Extingao da
Fianga .......................................... 163
Capftulo XIX-Da Transagao .......... 164
Capftulo XX - Do Compromisso ..... 166
TfTULO VII- Dos Atos Unilaterais .... 166
Capftulo I - Da Promessa de
Recompensa ................................... 166
Capftulo II- Da Gestlio de Neg6cios ... 167
Capftulo III- Do Pagamento Indevido . 170
Capftulo IV - Do Enriquecimento Sem
Causa ............................................. 172
TfruLO VIII - Dos Tltulos de Credito .. 172
Capftulo I - Disposigoes Gerais ....... 172
Capftulo II - Do Tftulo ao Portador ... 175
Capftulo III - Do Tftulo aOrdem ..... 176
Capftulo IV Do Tftulo Nominativo . 179
TfTULO IX - Da Responsabilidade
Civil. ................................................. 180
CapltUlo I-Da Obrigagiio de Indeniz.ar .. 180
Capftulo II - Da Indenizai;;ao ........... 183
TiruLO X - Das Preferencias e
Privilegios Creditorios ..................... 185
Livro II - Do Direito de Empresa
TfTULO II - Da Sociedade ................... 192 TITLE II - Companies ......................... 192
Capftulo Unico - Disposig5es Gerais. I92 Sole Chapter - General Provisions .. 192
Subtitulo I - Da Sociedade Niio
Personificada ................................... I 93
Capltulo I- Da Sociedade em Comum 193 Chapter I - Partnership ..................... 193
Capftulo II - Da Sociedade em
Canta de Participagilo .................... I94
Subtftulo II - Da Sociedade
Personificada .................................... 195
Capftulo I - Da Sociedade
Simples .......................................... 195
Segao I - Do Contrato
Social ........................................... 195
Segiio II - Dos Direitos e Obrigagoes
dos Socios .................................... 198
Segiio III - Da Administragiio ........ 199
Sei;;ao IV - Das Relagoes com
Terceiros ..................................... 203
Sec;ao V - Da Resolugiio da Socieda-
de em Relagao a um Socio ........... 204
Segao VI - Da Dissolugao ............. 205
Capftulo II - Da Sociedade em Nome
Coletivo ......................................... 207
Capftulo III - Da Sociedade em
Comandita Simples ........................ 208
Capltulo IV - Da Sociedade
Limitada ......................................... 210
Segao I - Disposig5es Preliminares ... 210
Segao II - Das Quotas .................... 210
Segiio III - Da Administragiio ........ 212
Segao IV - Do Conselho Fiscal ..... 213
Segiio V - Das Deliberag5es dos
StScios .......................................... 216
Sec;lio VI - Do Alimento e da
Redugiio do Capital ..................... 220
Segao VII - Da Resolugiio da Sociedade
em Relagiio a S6cios Minoritarios ... 222
Segao VIII - Da Dissolugao ........... 222
Capltulo V - Da Sociedade Anonima. 222 Chapter V - Corporations ................ 222
Seglio Unica - Da Caracterizaglio .. 222
Capftulo VI - Da Sociedade em
Comandita por Ai;oes .................... 223
Subtitle 1- Companies without Legal
Personality ....................................... 193
Chapter II - Undeclared
Partnership ..................................... 194
Subtitle II -Companies with Legal
Personality ....................................... 195
Chapter I - Simple Companies
(General Partnership) ..................... I 95
Section I -The Partnership
Agreement ................................... 195
Section II - The Rights and
Obligations of the Partners .......... 198
Section II - Administration ........... 199
Section IV - Relations with Third
Parties .......................................... 203
Section V - Dissociation from the
Partnership .................................. 204
Section VI - Dissolution ................ 205
Chapter II - Partnership under a Firm
Name .............................................. 207
Chapter III - Limited
Partnership ..................................... 208
Chapter IV - Limited Liability
Partnership ..................................... 210
Section I - Preliminary Provisions .. 210
Section II - Quotas ........................ 210
Section III -Administration .......... 212
Section IV - Fiscal Council ........... 213
Section V - Resolutions of the
Partners ........................................ 216
Section VI - Increase and Reduction
of Capital ..................................... 220
Section VII - Expulsion of
Minority Partners ........................ 222
Section VIII - Dissolution ............. 222
Sole Section - Definition ............... 222
Chapter VI - Joint Stock
Companies ..................................... 223
 Chapter VII - Capftulo VII - Da Sociedade Capftulo II - Da Aquisigao da Proprie- Chapter II -Acquisition of Ownership
Cooperatives ................................. 223 Cooperativa ................................... 223 dade Im6vel ................................... 259 oflmmovable Property .................. 259
Chapter VIII - Related Capltulo VIII - Das Sociedades Segao I - Da Usucapiao ................. 259 Section I- Usucapion .................... 259
Companies ..................................... 225 Coligadas ....................................... 225 Segao II - Da Aquisigao pelo Registro Section II - Acquisition by Registration
Chapter IX - Liquidation of Capftulo IX - Da Liquidagiio da do Tftulo ...................................... 260 oflnstruments of Title .................. 260
Companies ..................................... 226 Sociedade ....................................... 226 Segao III - Da Aquisigao por Section III - Acquisition by
Chapter X- Transformation, Merger, Capltulo X - Da Transformagiio, da Acessao ....................................... 261 Accession .................................... 261
Consolidation and Split of Incorporagiio, da Fusao e da Cisiio Subsegao I - Das Ilha5 ................. 261 Subsection I-Islands .................. 261
Companies ..................................... 229 das Sociedades ............................... 229 Subsegao II - Da Aluviiio ............ 262 Subsection II - Alluvion ............. 262
Chapter XI - Companies Requiring Capftulo XI - Da Sociedade Subsegao III - Da Avulsao .......... 262 Subsection III - Avulsion ............ 262
Authorization ................................. 232 Dependente de Autorizagiio ........... 232
Subsegao IV - Do Alveo Aban- Subsection IV - Dereliction of
Section I - General Provisions ....... 232 Segao I- Disposigoes Gerais ......... 232 Alveus ....................................... 262
donado ....................................... 262
Section II - National Companies ... 233 Segao II - Da Sociedade Nacional .. 233 Subsegao V - Das Construgoes e Subsection V - Buildings and
Section III - Foreign Companies ... 234 Segao Ill - Da Sociedade Estrnngeira 234 Plantagoes ................................. 263 Plantations ................................ 263
TITLE III - Establishments .................. 238 TfTULO HI-Do Estabelecimento ....... 238 Capftulo III - Da Aquisigao da Proprie- Chapter III - Acquisition of Ownership
Sole Chapter- General Provisions ... 238 Capftulo Unico- Disposig6es Gerais .. 238 dade M6vel .................................... 264 of Movable Property ...................... 264
TITLE IV - Complementary TiTULO JV - Dos Instit~tos Segao I- Da Usucapiao ................. 264 Section I - Usucapion .................... 264
Institutes .......................................... 239 Complementares .............................. 239 Segao II-Da Ocupagao ................. 265 Section II - Occupation .................. 265
Chapter I~ Registration ................... 239 Capftulo I - Do Registro ................. 239 Segao III - Do Achado do Tesouro .. 265 Section III- Finding of Treasure ... 265
Chapter II-Business Name ............. 241 Capftulo II Do Nome Empresmial .. 241 Segao IV - Da Tradigao ................. 265 Section IV - Delivery .................... 265
Chapter III - Delegates .................... 244 Capftulo III - Dos Prepostos ............ 244 Segao V - Da Especificagao .......... 266 Section V - Specification .............. 266
Section I - General Provisions ....... 244 Segao I- Disposigoes Gerais ......... 244 Segao VI - Da Confusao, da Comis- Section VI - Confusion, Commixture
Section II - Managers .................... 244 Segiio II - Do Gerente .................... 244 sao e da Adjungao ........................ 267 and Adjunction ............................ 267
Section III - Bookkeepers and other Segiio III - Do Contabilista eoutros Capftulo JV - Da Perda da Propriedade 267 Chapter IV - Loss of Ownership ...... 267
Assistants ..................................... 245 Auxiliares ................................... 245 Capftulo V - Dos Direitos de Chapter V - Rights of
Chapter IV - Bookkeeping ............... 246 Capftulo IV - Da Escrituragao ........ 246 Vizinhanga ..................................... 268 Vicinage ......................................... 268
Ser,;:ao I- Do Uso Anormal da Section I - Abnormal Use of
Book Ill -The Law of Things Livro Ill - Do Direito das Coisas Propriedade ................................. 268 Property ....................................... 268
Segao II - Das Arvores Limitrofes ... 269 Section II - Boundary Trees .......... 269
TITLE I - Possession ........................... 251 TfTULO I - Da posse ........................... 251
Segao III- Da Passagem Forgada .. 270 Section III - Forced Passage .......... 270
Chapter I - Possession and its Capftulo I - Da Posse e sua
Classification ................................. 251 Classificagao .................................. 25 l Segao IV - Da Passagem de Cabos e Section JV - Passage of Cables and
Tubulag5es .................................. 270 Pipes ............................................ 270
Chapter II - Acquisition of Possession. 252 Capftulo II - Da Aquisigao da Posse .. 252
Segao V - Das Aguas ..................... 271 Section V -Waters ........................ 271
Chapter III - Effects of Possession .. 253 Capitulo III- Dos Efeitos da Posse .. 253
Segao VI - Dos Limites entre Predios e Section VI- Boundaries between
Chapter IV - Loss of Possession ...... 255 Capftulo IV - Da Perda da Posse ..... 255
do Direito de Tapagem .................. 273 Properties and the Right of Enclosure 273
TITLE II-Real Rights ......................... 255 TITULO II- Dos Direitos Reais .......... 255
Segao VII - Do Direito de Construir .. 274 Section VII-The Right to Build ... 274
Sole Chapter - General Capftulo Unico - Disposigoes
Provisions ...................................... 255 Capftulo VI- Do Condomfnio Geral . 277 Chapter VI - General Co-ownership .. 277
Gerais, ............................................ 255
Segiio I - Do Condomfnio Voluntario 277 Section I- Voluntary Co-ownership. 277
TITLE III - Ownership ........................ 256 TITULO III - Da Propriedade .............. 256
Subsegao I - Dos Direitos e Deveres Subsection I - The Rights and
Chapter.I - Ownership in General.... 256 Capftulo I - Da Propriedade em Geml . 256
dos Condominos ....................... 277 Duties of Co-owners ................. 277
Section I - Preliminary Provisions ... 256 Segao I-Disposig6es Preliminares ... 256 Subsegao II - Da Administragao do Subsection II - Administration of
Section II - Found Things .............. 257 Segao II - Da Descoberta ............... 257 Condominio .............................. 280 Co-ownership ........................... 280

------ --- -------- ----------------------

 Section IT - Necessary Co-ownership. 280
Chapter VIl- Co-ownership of Buil-
dings (Condominiums) .................. 281
Section I - General Provisions ....... 281
Section II -Administration of the
Condominium ............................. 287
Section ill - Extinction of
Co-ownership .............................. 289
Chapter VIII- Terminable
Ownership ...................................... 290
Chapter IX - Fiduciary
Ownership ...................................... 290
TITLE IV - Superficies ........................ 292
TITLE V - Servitudes ......................... : 293
Chapter I - Constitution of
Servitudes ...................................... 293
Chapter II - Exercise of
Servitudes ...................................... 294
Chapter III - Extinction of
Servitudes ...................................... 295
TITLE VI- Usufruct. ........................... 296
Chapter I - General Provisions ........ 296
Chapter II - Rights of the
Usufru~tuary .................................. 297
Chapter III - Duties of the
Usufructuary .................................. 298
Chapter IV - Extinction ofUsufruct.. 300
TITLE VII-Right of Use .................... 301
TITLE VIII- Habitation ...................... 301
TITLE IX - Right of a
Promissor-Buyer .............................. 302
TITLE X - Pledge, Hypothec and
Antichresis ....................................... 302
Chapter I....: General Provisions ........ 302
Chapter II- Pledge ........................... 305
Section I - Constitution of Pledges .. 305
Section II - Rights of Pledge
Creditors ...................................... 306
Section III - Obligations of Pledge
Creditors ...................................... 307
Section IV - Extinction of Pledge . 307
Section V - Rural Pledge ............... 308
Ser;ao IT - Do Condomfnio Necess.1rio 280
Capftulo VII - Do Condomfnio
Edilfcio .......................................... 281
Sei;ao I - Disposii;oes Gerais ......... 281
Sei;ao II - Da Administrac;ao do
Condomfnio ................................ 287
Ser;ao III - Da Extini;ao do
Condomfnio ................................ 289
Capftulo VIII- Da Propriedade
Resoh1vel ....................................... 290
Capftulo IX - Da Propriedade
Fiduciaria ....................................... 290
TiTULO IV -Da Superffcie ................. 292
TiTULO V - Das Servidoes ................. 293
Capftulo I - Da Constituigao das
Servidoes ....................................... 293
Capftulo II - Do Exercfcio das
Servidoes ....................................... 294
Capftulo III - Da Extinc;ao das
Servidoes ....................................... 295
TtrULO VI - Do Usufruto ................... 296
Capftulo I - Disposic;oes Gerais ....... 296
Capftulo II - Dos Direitos do
UsufrutUario ................................... 297
Capftulo ill -: Dos Deveres do
Usufrutuiirio ...•............................... 298
Capftulo IV - Da Extin<;iio do Usufiuto .. 300
TtruLO VII- Do Uso ......................... 301
TfTULO VI~I - Da Habitac;ao .............. 30 l
TfTULO IX - Do Direito do Prornitente
Comprador ....................................... 302
TfTULO X - Do Penhor, da Hipoteca e da
Anticrese .......................................... 302
Capftulo I - Disposii;oes Gerais ....... 302
Capftulo II - Do Penhor ................... 305
Ser;ao I - Da Constituic;ao do Penhor. 305
Sec;ao II - Dos Direitos do Credor
Pignoratfcio ................................. 306
Se~ao III -: J?as Obrigac;oes do Credor
P1gnoratic10 ................................. 307
Se<;iio IV - Da Extinc;ao do Penhor .. 307
Sec;ao V - Do Penhor Rural ........... 308
Subser;ao I - Disposi<;oes Gerais. 308 Subsection I - General Provisions. 308
Subser;ao II - Do Penhor Agricola .. 309 Subsection IT-Agricultural Pledge. 309
Subser;ao ill - Do Penhor Pecufuio. 309 Subsection ill - Pledge of Livestock . 309
Ser;ao VI - Do Penhor Industrial e Section VI - Industrial and
Mercantil ..................................... 310 Mercantile Pledge ....................... 310
Ser;ao VII - Do Penhor de Direitos e Section VII - Pledge of Rights and
Tftulos de Credito ........................ 311 Debt Instruments ......................... 311
Ser;ao Vill ;-Do Penhor de Vefculos . 313 Section Vill - Pledge of Vehicles .... 313
Sec;ao IX - Do Penhor Legal... ....... 314 Section IX - Legal Pledge ............. 314
Capftulo III - Da Hipoteca ............... 315 Chapter III - Hypothec..................... 315
Ser;ao 1- Disposi9oes Gerais ......... 315 Section I - General Provisions ...... 315
Se9ao II - Da Hipoteca Legal ........ 320 Section 11 - Legal Hypothec .......... 320
Sei;ao III - bo Registro da Section III - Registration of
Hipoteca ...................................... 321 Hypothecs ................................... 321
Ser;ao IV - Da Extin9ao da Section IV - Extinction of
Hipoteca ...................................... 322 Hypothecs ................................... 322
Ser;ao V - Da Hipoteca de Vias Section V - Hypothec of
Ferreas ......................................... 323 Railways ...................................... 323
Capftulo IV - Da Anticrese .............. 324 Chapter IV - Antichresis .................. 324
Livro IV - Do Direito de Familia Book IV - Family Law
TITULO I - Do Direito Pessoa! ............ 325 TITLE I - The Law Governing Persons. 325
Subtftulo I - Do Casamento ................ 325 Subtitle I - Marriage ........................... 325
Capftulo I~ Disposi96es Gerais ....... 325 Chapter I - Gen.era! Provisions ........ 325
Capftulo II - Da Capacidade para o Chapter II - Capacity to
Casamento ..................................... 326 Marry ............................................. 326
Capftulo III - Dos Impedimentos ..... 327 Chapter III - Impediments ............... 327
Capftulo IV-Das causas suspensivas .. 328 Chapter IV - Suspensive Causes ...... 328
Capftulo V - Do Processo de Chapter V - Proceedings for Obtaining
Habilitac;ao para o Casamento ....... 329 License to Marry ............................ 329
Capitulo VI - Da Celebrai;ao do Chapter VI - Solemnization of
Casamento ..................................... 330 Marriage ......... ;.............................. 330
Capftulo VII- Das Provas do Chapter VII - Proof of
Casamento ..................................... 334 Marriage ........................................ 334
Capftulo VIII - Da Invalidade do Chapter VIII - Invalidity of
Casamento ..................................... 335 Marriage ........................................ 335
Capftulo IX - Da Eficacia do Chapter IX - Effects of
Casamento ..................................... 340 Marriage ........................................ 340
Capftulo X- Da Dissolur;ao da Chapter X - Dissolution of Conjugal
Sociedade e do Vfnculo Conjugal.. 341 Society and Conjugal Bonds .......... 341
Capftulo XI - Da Prote91io da Pessoa Chapter XI - Protection of the
dos Filhos ....................................... 345 Persons of Children ....................... 345

Subtitle II - The Degrees of
Kinship ............................................. 346
Chapter I - General Provisions ........ 346
Chapter II - Filiation ........................ 347
Chapter III - Acknowledgment of
Children ......................................... 349
Chapter IV - Adoption ..................... 350
Chapter V - Family Authority ......... 352
Section I-General Provisions ....... 352
Section II -The Exercise of Family
Authority ..................................... 353
Section III - Suspension and
Extinction of Family Authority ... 354
TITLE II - The Law Governing
Property .... ,; ...................................... 355
Subtitle I-The Regime of Property
between Spouses .............................. 355
Chapter I - General Provisions ........ 355
Chapter II - Prenuptial Agreements ... 359
Chapter III - The Regime of Partial
Community .................................... 359
Chapter IV - The Regime of Universal
Community .................................... 361
Chapter V -The Regime of Sharing of
Acquests ......................................... 362
Chapter VI - The Regime of Separation
of Property ...................................... 365
Subtitle II - Usufruct and Administration
of the Property of Minor
Children ............................................ 365
Subtitle III - Support .......................... 367
Subtitle IV - Family Property ............. 369
TITLE III..,.. Stable Union ..................... 372
TITLE IV - Tutorship and Curatorship. 373
Chapter I-Tutorship ....................... 373
Section I-Tutors ........................... 373
Section II - Those Incapable of
Exercising Tutorship ................... 375
Section III- Excuse of Tutors ....... 375
Section IV -The Exercise of
Tutorship ..................................... 376
Section V - The Property of the Pupil. 379
Subtftulo II - Das Relas;oes de
Parentesco ........................................ 346
Capftulo I - Disposis;oes Gerais ....... 346
Capftulo II - Da Filias;iio .................. 347
Capftulo III - Do Reconhecimento
dos Filhos ....................................... 349
Capftulo IV - Da Ados;ao ................. 350
Capftulo V - Do Poder Familiar ...... 352
Ses;iio I - Disposis;oes Gerais ......... 352
Ses;iio II - Do Exercfcio do Poder
Familiar ....................................... 353
Ses;iio III - Da Suspensiio e
Extins;iio do Poder Familiar ......... 354
TfTULO II - Do Direito
Patrimonial ....................................... 355
Subtftulo I - Do Regime de Bens
entre os Conjuges ............................. 355
Capftulo I - Disposis;oes Gerais ....... 355
Capftulo TI - Do Pacto Antenupcial ... 359
Capftulo III - Do Regime de
Comunhao Parcial ......................... 359
Capftulo IV - Do Regime de
Comunhiio Universal ..................... 361
Capftulo V - Do Regime de
Participas;iio Final nos Aqilestos .... 362
Capftulo VI - Do Regime de Separac;ao
de Bens .......................................... 365
Subtftulo II - Do Usufruto e da
Administrac;iio dos Bens de Filhos
Menores ........................................... 365
Subtftulo III - Dos Alimentos ............ 367
Subtftulo IV - Do Bern de Fanu1ia ..... 369
TfTULO III- Da Uniao Estavel ........... 372
TfTULO IV - Da Tutela e da Curatela ... 373
Capftulo I- Da Tutela ...................... 373
Sec;ao I-Dos Tutores .................... 373
Ses;ao II - Dos Incapazes de
Exercer a Tutela .......................... 375
Ses;ao III-Da Escusados Tutores .. 375
Ses;ao IV - Do Exercfcio
da Tutela ...................................... 376
Ses;ao V - Dos Bens do Tutelado ... 379
Ses;ao Vl-Da Presta<riio de Contas . 381 Section VI -Rendering of Accounts . 381
Ses;ao VII - Da Cessa9l10 da Section VII - Termination of
Tutela ........................................... 382 Tutorship ..................................... 382
Capitulo II - Da Curatela ................. 382 Chapter II - Curatorship .................. 382
Se9iio I - Dos Interditos ................. 382 Section I - Interdicted Persons ...... 382
Ses;ao TI- Da Curatela do Nascituro Section II-Curatorship of the Unborn
e do Enfermo ou Portador de and oflnfirm Persons and Persons
Deficiencia Ffsica ........................ 384 with Physical Disabilities .............. 384
Ses;iio III - Do Exercfcio da Section III-The.Exercise of
Curatela ....................................... 385 Curatorship .................................. 385
Livro V - Do Direito das Sucessoes Book V - The Law of Successions
TfTULO I - Da Sucessao em Geral ...... 385 TITLE I - Successions in General... ..... 385
Capfttilo I - Disposis;oes Gerais ....... 385 Chapter I - General Provisions ........ 385
Capftulo II - Da Herans;a e de sua Chapter II - The Inheritance and its
Administras;ao ................................ 386 Administration ............................... 386
Capftulo III-Da Vocas;iio Hereditaria. 388 Chapter III - Heirship ...................... 388
Capftulo IV - Da Aceita9l10 e Renuncia Chapter IV - Acceptance and
da Herans;a ..................................... 390 Renunciation of Inheritances ......... 390
Capftulo V - Dos Exclufdos da Chapter V - Those Excluded from
Sucessao ......................................... 392 the Succession ............................... 392
Capftulo VI - Da Herans;a Jacente ... 393 Chapter VI - Vacant Inheritances .... 393
Capitulo VII- Da petis;iio de herancta ... 394 Chapter VII - Claim to Inheritance .. 394
TiTULO II- Da Sucessiio Legftima ..... 395 TITLE II - Legal Succession ............... 395
Capftulo I- Da Ordem da Vocai,ao Chapter I - The Order of
Hereditaria ..................................... 395 Heirship ......................................... 395
Capftulo II - Dos Herdeiros Chapter II - Necessary
Necessarios .................................... 398 Heirs .............................................. 398
Capftulo III - Do Direito de C~apter III - The Right of
Representas;iio ................................ 399 Representation ............................... 399
TfTULO III - Da Sucessiio TITLE III - Testate
Testamentaria ................................... 400 Succession ........................................ 400
Capftulo I- Do Testamento em Geral .. 400 Chapter I - Testaments in General ... 400
Capftulo II - Da Capacidade Chapter II - The Capacity to Make a
de Testar......................................... 400 Testament ...................................... 400
Capftulo III - Das Forrnas Ordinarias Chapter III - The Ordinary Forms
do Testamento ................................ 400 of Testaments ................................. 400
Ses;ao I - Disposis;oes Gerais ......... 400 Section I - General Provisions ...... 400
Ses;iio II - Do Testamento Publico. 401 Section II - Public Testaments ...... 401
Ses;ao III- Do Testamento Cerrado. 402 Section III - Sealed Testaments ..... 402
Ses;ao IV - Testamento Particular.. 403 Section IV - Private Testaments .... 403
Capftulo IV - Dos Codicilos ............ 404 Chapter IV - Codicils ....................... 404
 DECRETO-LEI 4.657/42 Art. 1-2

Chapter V - Special Capftulo V - Dos Testamentos Decreto-Lei n° 4.657, Decree-Law 4657 of

Testaments ..................................... 405 Especiais ........................................ 405 de 4 de setembro de 1942 September 4, 1942
Section I -General Provisions ....... 405 Seitlio I - Disposiitoes Gerais ......... 405
Seqiio II - Do Testamento Mantimo Lei de Introdu1;ao ao Law oflntroduction to
Section Il - Maritime and
Aeronautic Testaments ................ 405 e do Testamento Aeronautico ...... 405 C6digo Civil Brasileiro the Brazilian Civil Code
Section III - Military Testaments .. 406 Se9lio Ill - Do Testamento Militar... 406 0 Presidente da Rep(1blica, usando da The President of the Republic, using the
Chapter VI- Testamentary Capftulo VI - Das Disposi9oes atribuic,:ao que !he confere o artigo 180 powers conferred on him by article 180 of
Dispositions ................................... 407 Testamentfirias ............................... 407 da Constituiirao, decreta: the Constitution, decrees:
Chapter VII-' Legacies.; .................. 410 Capftulo VII - Dos Leg ados ............ 410 Art.1 •Salvo disposi1;1io contraria, a lei Art. 1. Saving provision to the contrary,
Section 1- General Provisions:...... 410 Se9ao I - DisposiitBes Gerais ......... 410 come~:a a vigorar em todo o pais qua- legislation comes into force in the entire
Section II - The Effects of Legacies Seqiio II - Dos Efei tos do Leg ado e renta e cinco dias depois de oficialmen- country forty-five days after officially
and their Payment.. ...................... 412 do seu Pagamento ........................ 412 te publicada. published.
Section III - The Lapse of Se9iio III - Da Caducidade dos § I 0 Nos Estados, estrangeiros, a obri- § 1. In foreign States, the binding effect of
Legacies ....................................... 414 Legados ....................................... 414 gatoricdade da lei brasileira, quando Brazilian legislation, if admitted, begins
Chapter VIII - The Right of Accretion Capftulo VIII - Do Direito de Acrescer admitida, se inicia tres meses depois de three months after officially published.
between Heirs and Legatees .......... 415 entre Herdeiros e Legatfirios .......... 415 oficialmente publicada.
Chapter IX - Substitutions ............... 417 Capftulo IX- Substitui9Bes ............. 417 § 2° A vigencia das leis, que os Gover- § 2. The coming into force of legislation
Section I -Vulgar and Reciprocal Seitiio I- Da Substituiqlio Vulgar e nos Estaduais elaborem por autoriza~ao that the State Governments make by
Substitution ................................. 417 da Recfproca ................................ 417 do Governo Federal, depende da apro- authorization of the Federal Government
Section II - Fideicommissary Seitiio II - Da Substitui9iio va1;ao deste e come9a no prazo que a le- depends on the approval of the latter and
Substitution ................................. 417 Fideicomissfiria ........................... 417 gislm,;ao estadual fixar. commences within the time period that the
Chapter X - Disinheritance .............. 419 Capftulo X - Da Deserda9ao ............ 419 state legislation has fixed.
Chapter XI - The Reduction of Capftulo XI - Da Redrn;ao das § 3° Se, antes de entrar a lei em vigor, § 3. If, prior to the legislation coming into
Testamentary Dispositions ............ 420 Disposi91'ies Testamentfirias .......... 420 ocorrer nova publica~l'io de seu tcxto, force, a new publication of its text occurs to
Chapter XII - Revocation of Capftulo XII - Da Revoga9iio do dcstinada a correc,:ao, o prazo deste arti- correct it, .the time period in this article and
Testaments ..................................... 421 Testamento .................................... 421 go e dos paragrafos anteriores come9a- the preceding paragraphs shall begin to run
Chapter XIII:... The Overturning of Capftulo XIII - Do Rompimento do ra acorrer da nova publica9ao. from the new publication.
Testaments ............ ;........................ 422 Testamento ..... ;.............................. 422 § 4° As corre9iies a texto de lei ja em vi- § 4. Corrections to the text of legislation
ChapterXIV - Testamentary Capftulo XIV - Do Testamen- gor consideram-se lei nova. already in force are considered to be new
Executors ..........................:............ 422 teiro ................................................ 422 legislation.
TITLE IV - Inventory and Partition ..... 424 TfruLo IV -Do Inventario e daPartilha. 424
Chapter I- Inventory ....................... 424 Capftulo I - Do Inventfirio ............... 424
a
Art. 2° Nao se destinando vigencia Art. 2. Unless intended to have temporary
temporaria, a lei.tern vigor ate que outra effect, legislation shall be in force until
Chapter II - Concealed Property ...... 424 Capftulo II - Dos Sonegados ............ 424 a modifique ou revogue. other legislation modifies or revokes it.
Chapter III - Payment of Capftulo III - Do Pagamento das
Debts .............................................. 425 Dfvidas ........................................... 425 § 1° A lei posterior revoga a anterior § 1. Subsequent legislation revokes earlier
quando expressamente o declare, quan- legislation when it expressly so declares,
Chapter IV - Collation ..................... 427 Capftulo IV - Da Colait1io ................ 427 when it is incompatible with the earlier or
do seja com ela incompatfvel ou quan-
Chapter V - Partition ........................ 429 Capftulo V - Da Partilha .................. 429 do regule inteiramente a materia de que when it entirely regulates the matter dealt
Chapter VI - Security for Shares in Capftulo VI - Da Garantia dos tratava a lei anterior. with by the earlier legislation.
the Illheritance ............................... 431 Quinhoes Hereditfirios ................... 431
Chapter VII -Annulment of Partition 431 Capftulo VII-DaAnulactiio daPartilha 431 § 2° A lei nova, que estabele\;a disposi- § 2. New legislation that establishes general
1;iies gerais ou especiais a par das ja or special provisions on a par with existing
Complementary Book- Final and Livro Complementar - Das Disposi- existentes, nao revoga nem modifica a legislation neither revokes nor modifies the
Transitional Provisions....................432 qi'ies Finais e Transitorias ................ .432 lei anterior. earlier legislation.
Art. 3-7 DECREE-LAW 4657/42
§ 3. Saving provision to the contrary,
revoked legislation is not restored because
the revoking legislation has lost effect.
Art. 3. No person is excused from obeying the
law by alleging that he does not know of it.
Art. 4. When the legislation is silent, the judge
shall decide the case according to analogy,
customs and the general principles of law.
Art. 5. In applying legislation, the judge
shall attend to the social ends to which it is
directed and to the requirements of the
common good.
Art. 6. Legislation in force shall have
immediate and general effect, respecting,
however, perfected legal transactions,
acquired rights and res judicata. (As
amended by Law 3238 of August l, 1957)
§ 1. A legal transaction consummated
under the legislation in force at the time it
was effected is deemed to be perfected.
(Paragraph included by Law 3238 of
August 1, 1957)
§ 2. Rights are considered to be acquired
rights when the holder, or someone on his
behalf, may exercise them, such as rights
which have a pre-fixed term, or a
pre-established condition that cannot be
altered at another person's discretion, for the
commencement of their exercise. (Paragraph
included by Law 3238 of August 1, 1957)
§ 3. A judicial decision against which there
is no recourse is known as res judicata.
(Paragraph included by Law 3238 of
August 1, 1957) · Lei n° 3.238, de 1°.8.1957)
Art. 7. The law of the country in which a
person is domiciled determines the rules
regarding the beginning and end of
personality, name, capacity and family rights.
§ 1. When a marriage is made in Brazil,
Brazilian legislation shall apply with
respect to absolute impediments and the
formalities of solemnization.
2 3
§ 3° Salvo disposic.:ao em contrario, a lei
revogada nao se restaura porter a lei re-
vogadora perdido a vigencia.
Art. 3° Ninguem se escusa de cumprir a
lei, alegando que nao a conhece.
Art. 4° Quando a lei for omissa, o juiz
decidira o caso de acordo com a analo-
gia, os costumes e os principios gerais
dedireito.
Art. s• Na aplicac.:ao da lei, o juiz aten-
dcra aos fins sociais a que ela se dirige
e as exigencias do bem comum.
Art. 6° A Lei em vigor tera efeito ime-
diato e geral, respeitados o ato jurfdico
perfeito, o direito adquirido e a coisa
julgada. (Redac.:ao dada pela Lei n°
3.238, de 1°.8.1957)
§ 1° Reputa-se ato jurfdico perfeito o ja
consumado segundo a lei vigente ao
tempo em que se efetuou. (Paragrafo
inclufdo pela Lei n° 3.238, de
1°.8.1957)
§ 2° Consideram-se adquiridos assim os
direitos que o seu titular, ou alguem por
ele, possa exercer, como aquetes cujo
comei;:o do exercfcio tenha termo pre-
fixo, ou condii;:ao pre-estabelecida inal-
teravel, a arbftrio de outrem. (Paragrafo
incluido pela Lei n° 3.238, de
1°.8.1957)
§ 3° Chama-se coisa julgada ou caso
julgado a decisao judicial de que ja nao
caiba recurso. (Paragrafo inclufdo pela
Art. 7° A lei do pais em que domicilia-
da a pessoa determina as regras sobre o
comec.:o e o fim da personalidade, o
nome, a capacidade e os direitos de fa-
milia.
§ I 0 Realizando-se o casamento no Bra-
sil, sera aplicada a lei brasileira quanto
aos impedimentos dirimentes e for- as
malidades da celebrairao.
DECRETO-LEI 4.657/42
§ 2° 0 casamento de estrangciros pode-
ra celebrar-se perante autoridades di-
plomaticas ou consulares do pafs de
ambos os nubcntes. (Rcdal,!iio dada pela
Lei n° 3.238, de 1°.8.1957)
§ 3° Tendo os nubentes domicilio diver-
so, reg era os casos de invalidade do ma-
trimonio a lei do primeiro domicilio
conjugal.
§ 4° 0 regime de bens, legal ou conven-
cional, obedece a lei do pafs em que ti-
verem os nubentes domicilio, e, se cste
for diverso, a do primciro domicilio
conjugal.
§ 5° - O estrangeiro casado. que se natu-
ralizar brasileiro, pode, mediante ex-
pressa anuencia de Sell conjuge, reque-
rer ao juiz, no ato de cntrega do decreto
de naturaliza1;ao, se apostile ao mesmo
a adoc.:ao do regime de comunbiio par-
cial de bens, respeitados os direitos de
terceiros e dada esta adoi;ao ao compe-
tente registro. (Reda\'.l'io dada pela Lei
n° 6.515, de 26. li.1977)
§ 6° - O div6rcio realizado no estrangei-
ro, se um ou ambos os conjuges forcm
brasileiros, s6 sera reconhecido no Bra-
sil de pois de tres anos da data da senten-
.;a, salvo se houver sido antecedida de
separarao judicial por igual prazo, ca.~o
em que a homologac.:ao produzira efeito
imediato, obedecidas as condi~oes es-
tabelecidas para a cficacia das senten-
~as estrangeiras no Pals. 0 Supremo
Tribunal Federal, na forma de seu regi-
mento interno, pod era reexaminar, a re-
querimento do interessado, decisaes ja
proferidas em pedidos de homologa~ao
de sentenc.:as estrangeiras de div6rcio de
brasileiros, a fim de que passem a pro-
duzir todos os efeitos legais. (Redai;:ao
dada pelaLei n° 6.515, de 26.12.1977)
Art. 7
§ 2. The marriage of foreigners may be
solemnized before the diplomatic or
consular authorities of the country of both
the future spouses. (As amended by Law
3238 of August 1, 1957)
§ 3. If the future spouses have different
domiciles, the law of their first conjugal
domicile shall govern the cases of
invalidity of the marriage.
§ 4. The property regime, whether legal or
contractual. shall be subject to the law of
the country in which the future spouses
have their domicile and, if their domicile
was in different countries, to the law of
their first conjugal domicile.
§ 5. A married foreigner who becomes
Brazilian by naturalization may, with the
express consent of his or her spouse,
petition the judge, in the act of delivery of
the decree of naturalization, that adoption
of the regime of partial community of
property be noted in the decree, subject to
the rights of third parties and submission of
the adoption of the regime to the
appropriate registry. (As amended by Law
6515 of December 26, 1977)
§ 6. A divorce made abroad, if one or both
of the spouses are Brazilian, shall only be
recognized in Brazil after the expiry of
three years from the date of the judgment,
unless the divorce was preceded by judicial
separation for an equal period of time, in
which case homologation shall produce
immediate effects, subject to the conditions
established for the effect of foreign
judgments in Brazil. The Supreme Federal
Tribunal, in accordance with its internal
regulations, may re-examine, on
application by an interested party,
decisions already issued in petitions for
homologation of foreign judgments of
divorce of Brazilians, in order that they
produce all legal effects. (As amended by
Law 6515 of December 26, 1977)
Art. 8-10 DECREE-LAW 4657/42
§ 7. Except in the case of abandonment, the
domicile of the head of the family extends
to the other spouse and to the
unemancipated children, and that of the
tutor or curator to incapable persons under
his care.
§ 8. When a person does not have a
domicile, he is deemed to have his domicile
at the place of his residence or at the place
where he is found.
Art. 8. The law of the country where
property is located shall apply to
characterize the property and to govern
relations concerning it.
§ 1. The law of the country in which the
owner is domiciled shall apply with respect
to the movable property that he brings with
him or that is intended to be transported to
other places.
§ 2. Pledge is governed by the law of the
domieile of the person in whose possession
the pledged thing is found.
Art. 9. The law of the country in which
obligations are constituted shall apply to
characterize and govern the obligations.
§ l. If an ooligation is intended to be
performed in Brazil and it depends on some
essential form, that form shall be observed,
admitting the peculiarities of foreign law
with respect to the extrinsic requirements
of the act.
§ 2. An obligation resulting from a contract
is. deemed to have been constituted in the
place in which the proponent resides.
Art. 10. Succession by reason of death or
absence is governed by the law of the
country in which the deceased or absent
person was domiciled, regardless of the
nature and situation of the property.
4 5
§ 7° Salvo o caso de abandono, o domi-
cilio do chefe da familia estende-se ao
outro conjuge e aos filhos nao emanci-
pados, e o do tutor ou curador aos inca-
pazes sob sua guarda.
§ 8° Quando a pessoa nao tiver domicf-
Jio, considerar-se-a domiciliada no lu-
gar de sua residcnciapu naquele em quc
se encontre.
Art. 8° Para qualiftcar os bens e regular
as rela~oes a eles concernentes, aplicar-
se-:.i a lei do pals em,'que estiverem si-
tuados.
§ 1° Aplicar-se-a a lei do pals em que
for domiciliado o propriet<lrio, quanta
aos bens moveis que ele trouxer ou se
destinarem a transporte para outros lu-
gares.
§ 2° 0 penhor regula-se pela lei do do-
micilio que tiver a pessoa, em cuja pos-
se se encontre a coisa apenhada.
Art. 9° Para qualificar e reger as obriga-
~oes, aplicar-se-a a lei do pals em que se
constituirem.
§ 1° Destinando-se a obriga\;1iO a ser
executada no Brasil e dependendo de
forma essencial, sera esta observada,
admitidas as peculiaridades da lei es-
trangeira quanto aos requisitos extrfn-
secos do ato.
§ 2° A obrigai;;iio resultante do contrato
reputa-se constituida no lugar em que
residir o proponente.
Art. 10. A sucessiio por morte ou por
ausericia obedece a lei do pafs em que
domiciliado o defunto ou o desapareci-
do, qualquer que seja a natureza e a si-
tua~ao dos hens.
DECRETO-LEI 4.657/42
§ I 0 A succssiio de hens de estrangeiros,
situados no Pais, ser•'i regulada pela lei
brasileira em beneffcio do conjuge ou
dos filhos brasileiros, ou de quern os
rcpresente, sempre que ntio !hes seja
mais favonl.vel a lei pessoal do de cujus.
(Redac.;ao dada pela Lei n° 9.047, de
18.5.1995)
§ 2° A lei do domicilio do herdciro ou
legat:.irio regula a capacidade para sm::e-
der.
Art. 11. As organizar,:oes destinadas a
fins de intcresse coktivo, como as so-
ciedades e as fundm;:oes. obedecem alei
do Estado em que se constitu irem.
§ 1° Nao poderiio, entretanto. ter no
Brasil filiais, agendas ou estabeleci-
me.ntos antes de serem os atos constitu-
tivos aprovados pelo Governo brasilei-
ro, ficando sujeitas alei brasileira.
§ 2° Os Govemos estrangeiros, bem
como as organiza\;6es de qualquer na-
tureza, quc eles tenham constituido. di-
rijam ou hajam investido de fun96es
publicas, nao poderao adquirir no Bra-
sil bens im6veis ou susceptiveis de de-
saproprim;:iio.
§ 3° Os Governos estrangeiros podem
adquirir a propriedade dos predios ne-
a
cess:.irios sede dos representantes di-
plomaticos ou dos agentes consulares.
An. 12. E competente a autorida<le ju-
dici:.iria brasileira, quando for 0 reu do-
miciliado no Brasil ou aqui tiver de ser
cumprida a obriga~ao.
a
§ I 0 S6 .autoridade judiciftria brasilei-
ra compete conhecer das a\:6es, relati-
vas a im6veis situados no Brasil.
Art.11-12
§ 1. The succession of property of
foreigners. located in Brazil, shall be
governed by Brazilian legislation, to the
benefit of the Brazilian spouse and
children, or the person who represents
them, whenever the personal law of the
deceased is not morefavorable to them. (As
amended by Law 9047 of May 18, 1995)
§ 2. The law of the domicile of the heir or
legatee shall govern his capacity to
succeed.
Art. 11. Organizations intended for
purposes of collective interest, such as
associations and foundations, are subject to
the law of the State in which they were
constituted.
§ 1. Such organizations may not, however,
have branches, agencies or establishments
in Brazil before their constituting acts are
approved by the Brazilian Government,
and the branches, agencies or
establishments shall be subject to Brazilian
law.
§ 2. Foreign governments, as well as
organizations of any nature that such
governments may constitute, direct or
invest with public functions, may not
acquire in Brazil property that is
immovable or susceptible to expropriation.
§ 3. Foreign governments may acquire
ownership of buildings necessary to house
the seat of their diplomatic representatives
or consular agents.
Art. 12. The Brazilian judicial authority
has jurisdiction when the defendant is
domiciled in Brazil or the obligation is to be
performed here.
§ l. Only the Brazilian judicial authority
has jurisdiction over actions related to
immovables situated in Brazil.
Art. 13-16 DECREE-LAW 4657/42 6
7 DECRbiO-LEI 4.657/42 Art. 17-19

§ 2. The Brazilian judicial authority shall § 2° A autoridade judiciaria brasileira

fulfill, upon grant of the exequatur and in
accordance with the form established by
Brazilian legislation, the measures
requested by competent foreign authorities,
in accordance with the law of the foreign
authority with respect to the object of the
measures.
Art. 13. Proof of facts occurring in a
foreign country is governed by the law
there in force, with respect to the burden of
proof and the means of producing it, but
Brazilian courts shall not admit evidence
that is unknown to Brazilian law.
Art. 14. If he does not know the foreign
law, the judge may demand from the party
who invoked it evidence of its text and
whether it is irt effect.
Art. 15. A judgment issued outside Brazil
that meets the following requirements shall
be executed in Brazil:
a) it was issued by a competent judge;
b) the parties were given notice to appearor
the failure to appear was legally verified;
c) the judgment has become final and is
vested with all the formalities necessary for
execution in the place in which it was
issued;
d) it has been translated by an authorized
interpreter;
e) it has been homologated by the Supreme
Federal Tribunal.
Sole paragraph. Judgments that are merely
declaratory of the state of persons do not
depend on homologation.
cumprira, concedido o exequatllr e se-
gundo a forma estabelecida pele lei bra-
sileira, as diligencias deprecadas por
autoridade estrangeira competente, ob-
servando a lei desta, quanto ao objeto
das diligencias.
Art.13. A prova dos fatos ocorridos em
pafs estrangeiro rege-se pela lei que
nele vigorar, quanto ao onus e aos
mcios de produzir-se, niio admitindo os
tribunais brasileiros provas que a lei
brasileira desconhei,:a.
Art. 14. Nao conhecendo a lei estran-
geira, podera o juiz exigir de quern a in-
voca prov a do texto e da vigencia.
Art. 15. Sera executada no Brasil a sen-
tenr;a proferida no estrangeiro, que reu-
na os seguintes requisitos:
a) haver sido proferida por juiz compe-
tente;
b) terem sido os partes citadas ou haver-
a
se legalmente verificado revelia:
c) ter passado em julgado e estar reves-
tida das forrnalidades necessarias para a
execur;ao no Ingar em que, foi proferi-
da;
d) estar traduzida por interprete autori-
zado;
e) ter sido homologada pelo Supremo
Tribunal Federal.
Paragrafo iinico. Nao dependem de ho-
mologa\!ao as senteni,:as meramente
declarat6rias do estado das pessoas.
Art. 17. As leis, atos e sentern;:as de ou-
tro pafs, hem corno quaisquer declara-
9oes de vontade, niio teriio eficacia no
Brasil, quando ofenderem a soberania
nacional, a ordem piiblica e os bons
costumes.
Art. 18. Tratando-se de brasileiros, sao
competentes as autoridades consularcs
brasileiras para !hes celebrar o casa-
mento e os mais atos de Registro Civil e
de tabelionato, inclusive o registro de
nascimento e de 6bito dos filhos de bra-
sileiro ou brasileira nascido no pafs da
sede do Consulado. (Reda1;ao dada pela
Lei n° 3.238, de 1°.8.1957)
Arr. 19. Reputam-se viilidos todos os
atos indicados no artigo anterior e cele-
brados pelos consules brasileiros mt vi-
gencia do Decreto-Jei 11° 4.657, de 4 de
setembro de 1942, desde que satisfa-
i;am todos os requisitos legais. (Incluf-
do pela Lei n° 3.238, de I 0 .8. 1957)
Paragrafo iinico. No caso em que ace-
lebrar;ao <lesses atos tiver sido recusada
pelas autoridades consulares, com fun-
damento no artigo 18 do mesmo Decre-
e
to-lei, ao interessado facultado reno-
var o pedido dentro em 90 (noventa)
dias contados da data da publicai;ao
desta lei. (Inclufdo pela Lei n° 3.238, de
I 0 .8.l 957)
Rio de Janeiro, 4 de setembro de 1942,
121° da Independencia e 54° da Repu-
blica.
GETULIO VARGAS
Alexandre Marcondes Fi/ho
Oswaldo Aranha.
Art. 17. The law, acts and judgments of
another country, and any declarations of
will, shall not have effect in Brazil when
they offend national sovereignty, public
order or good conduct.
Art. 18. In the case of Brazilians, the
Brazilian consular authorities are
competent to solemnize their marriage and
other acts recorded in the Civil Register or
by notaries, including the registration of the
birth and death of the children of a Brazilian
born in the country of the Consulate's seat.
(As amended by Law 3238 of August 1,
1957)
Art. 19. All the acts indicated in the
preceding article that were solemnized by
Brazilian consuls since Decree-Law 4657
of September 4, 1942 has been in force are
deemed to be valid, provided they satisfy
all legal requirements. (Included by Law
3238 of August 1, 1957)
Sole paragraph. In cases where the
solemnization of such acts was refused by
consular authorities on the basis of article
18 of the said Decree-Law, the interested
party may renew his request within 90
(ninety) days from the da.tc of publication
of this law. (Paragraph included by Law
3238 of August I, 1957)
Rio de Janeiro, September4, l 942, the 12l't
year of Independence and the 541" of the
Republic.
GETULIO VARGAS
Alexandre Marcondes Filho
Oswaldo Aranha.

Art. 16. When, within the terms of the
preceding articles, foreign law is to be
applied, the provisions of such law shall be
considered, without taking into account any
remission made to other law.
Art. 16. Quando, nos termos dos arti-
gos precedentes, se houver de aplicar a
lei estrangeira, ter-se-a em vista a dis-
posi~iio desta, sem considerar-se qual-
quer remissao por ela feita a outra lei.
9 CODI GO CIVIL BILINOUE
LEI N° 10.406, DE 10 DE
JA..NEIRO DE 2002
Institui o C6digo Civil
0 PRESIDENTE DA REPUBLICA
Fa90 saber que o Congresso Nacional
decreta e eu sanciono a seguinte Lei:
PARTEGERAL
Livro I - Das Pessoas
Titulo I - Das Pessoas Naturais
Capitulo I - Da Personalidade c da
Capacidadc
Art. 1. Toda pessoa ecapaz de direitos
e deveres na ordem civil.
Art. 2. A personalidade civil da pessoa
comc9a do nascimento com vida; mas a
lei p5e a salvo, desde a concep1;lio, os
direitos do nascituro.
Art. 3. Sao absolutamente incapazes de
exercer pessoalmente os atos da vida ci-
vil:
I - os menores de dezesseis anos;
II - os que, por enfermidade ou defi-
ciencia mental, nao tiverem o necessa-
rio discemimento para a pratica desses
atos;
III - os que, mesmo por causa transit6-
ria, nao puderem exprimir sua vontade.
Art. 4. Sao incapazes, relativamente a
certos atos, ou lt maneira de os exercer:
I - os maiores de dezesseis e menores de
dezoito anos;
!I - OS ebrios habituais, OS viciados em
t6x icos, e os que, por deficicncia men-
tal, tenham o discemimento reduzido;
Art. 1-4
LAW 10,406 OF
JANUARY 10, 2002
Institutes the Civil Code
THE PRESIDENT OF Tiffi REPUBLIC
I hereby make it known that the National
Congress has decreed and I have sanctioned
the following Law:
GENERAL PART
Book I - Persons
Title I - Natural Persons
Chapter I - Personality
and Capacity
Art. 1. Every person is capable of having
rights and duties within the civil order.
Art. 2. The civil personality of a person
begins with live birth; but the law
safeguards, from conception, the rights of
the unborn.
Art. 3. The following persons are
absolutely incapable of performing
personally the acts of civil life:
I - minors of less than sixteen years of age;
II - those who, by reason of infirmity or
mental deficiency, do not have the
discernment necessary to perform those
acts;
III - those who, even for transitory causes,
cannot express their will.
Art. 4. The following persons are incapable
with respect to certain acts or the manner of
pe1forming them:
I - those of more than sixteen years of age
but less than eighteen years of age;
II - habitual inebriates, addicts of toxic
substances, and those whose discernment is
reduced by reason of mental deficiency;
Art. 5-7 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
III - exceptional persons without complete
mental development;
IV - prodigals.
Sole paragraph. The capacity of indians
shall be governed by special legislation.
Art. 5. Minority ends on completion of
eighteen years of age, at which time a
person becomes capable of perfonning all
the acts of civil life.
Sole paragraph. Incapacity ceases, for
minors:
I - by grant of emancipation by the parents,
or by one of them in the absence of the
other, by public instrument, without need
for judicial homologation, or by decision of
a judge after hearing the tutor, if the minor
has completed sixteen years of age;
II - by marriage;
III - by exercise of a permanent position in
the public service;
IV - by award of a degree in a course of
higher learning;
V - by the setting up of a civil or
commercial establishment, or by the
existence of employment, if by reason of
them the minor, having completed sixteen
years of age, is able to support himself.
Art. 6. The existence of a natural person
terminates upon death; death is presumed
with respect to absentees in the cases in
which the law authorizes the opening of
definitive successions.
Art. 7. Presumed death may be declared,
without absence being decreed:
I - if the death of one who was in
life-threatening danger is extremely
probable;
JO
III - os excepcionais, sem desenvolvi-
mento mental completo;
IV - os pr6digos.
Paragrafo unico. A capacidade dos fn-
dios sera regulada par legislai;ao espe-
cial.
Art. 5. A menoridade cessa aos dezoilo
anos completos, quando a pcssoa fica
habilitada a pratica de todos OS atOS <la
vidacivil.
Paragrafo iinico. Cessani, para os me-
nores, a incapacidade:
I - pela concessi'io dos pais, ou de um
deles na falta do outro, mediante instru-
mento piiblico, independentemente de
homologai;ao judicial, au por sentem;a
do juiz, ouvido o tutor, se o menor tiver
dezesseis anos completos;
II - pelo casamento;
IfI - pelo exercfcio de emprego publico
efetivo;
IV - pela cola~ao de grau em cmso de
ensino superior;
V - pelo estabelecimento civil ou co-
mercial, ou pela existencia de rela~ao
de emprego, desde que, em fun~iio de-
Ies, o menor com dezesseis anos com-
pletos tenha cconomia pr6pria.
Art. 6. A existencia da pessoa natural
termina com a morte; presume-se esta,
quanto aos ausentes, nos casos em que
a lei autoriza a abertura de sucessao de-
finitiva.
Art. 7. Pode ser declarada a morte prc-
sumida, sem decreta~ao de ausencia:
I - se for extremamente provavel a mor-
te de quern estava em perigo de vida;
11 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
II - se alguem, desaparecido em campa-
nha ou feito prisioneiro, nao for encon-
trado ate dais anos ap6s o termino da
guerra.
Paragrafo unico. A declarac;:iio da morte
prcsumida, nesses casos, somente po-
dera ser requerida dcpois de esgotadas
as buscas e averigual,!5es, devendo a
sentenc;:a fixar a data provavel do faleci-
mento.
Art. 8. Se do is au mais indivfduos fale-
cerem na mesma ocasiiio, nao se poden-
do averiguar se algum dos comorientes
precedeu aos outros, presumir-se-ao si-
multaneamente mortos.
Art. 9. Serao registrados em registro
publico:
I- os nascimentos, casamentos e 6bitos;
II - a emancipar;ao par outorga dos pais
ou por sentenc;:a do juiz;
III - a interdi9ao por incapacidade abso-
luta ou relativa;
IV - a sentenc;:a declarat6ria de ausencia
e de morte presumida.
Art.10. Far-se-a averbac;:ao em registro
publico:
I - das sentem;:as que decretarem a nuli-
dade ou anular;ao do casamento, o di-
v6rcio, a separac;:ao judicial e o restabe-
lecimento da sociedade conjugal;
II - dos atos judiciais ou extrajudiciais
que declararem ou reconhecerem a fi-
Iia1;flo;
III dos atos judiciais ou extrajudiciais
de adoc;:ao.
Art. 8-10
II - if someone who disappeared on
campaign or was taken. prisoner is not
found within two years after the end of the
war.
Sole paragraph. In these cases, a
declaration of presumed death may only be
requested after the searches and
investigations have been exhausted; the
judgment shall fix the probable date of
death.
Art. 8. If two or more individuals die on the
same occasion and it cannot be determined
if one of them predeceased the others, they
shall be presumed to have died
simultaneously.
Art. 9. There shall be registered in the
public registers:
I - births, marriages and deaths;
II - emancipation by grant of the parents or
by decision of a judge;
III - interdiction by reason of absolute or
relative incapacity;
IV - declaratory judgment of absence or of
presumed death.
Art. 10. There shall be noted in the margin
of public registers:
I - judgments that decree the nullity or
annulwent of marriage, divorce, judicial
separation or the reestablishment of
conjugal society;
II - judicial and extrajudicial acts that
declare or acknowledge filiation;
III - judicial and extrajudicial acts of
adoption.
Art. I 1-15 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter II - Personality Rights
Art. 11. With the exception of the cases
provided for by law, personality rights
cannot be transmitted or renounced and
their exercise cannot be voluntarily limited.
Art. 12, Anyone may demand that a threat
or injury to his personality rights cease, and
may claim losses and damages, without
prejudice to other sanctions provided for by
law.
Sole paragraph. In cases of death, the
surviving spouse, any relative in direct line,
and any 'Collateral relative to the fourth
degree, are legitimate parties to apply for
the measure provided for in this article.
Art. 13. Except for reasons of medical
necessity, acts ofdisposition of one's own
body are prohibited, when the disposition
would result in a permanent reduction of
physical integrity or would be contrary to
good conduct.
Sole paragraph. The acts contemplated in
this article shall be permitted for the
purposes of transplant, in the form
established by special legislation.
Art.14. Gratuitous disposition of the whole
or a part of one's own body for scientific or
altruistic purposes, with effect after one's
death, is valid.
Sole paragraph. The act of disposition may
be freely revoked at any time.
Art.15.No one may be compelled to
submit to medical treatment or surgical
intervention that presents a life-threatening
risk.
12
Capitulo II - Dos Direitos da
Personalidade
Art.11. Com excer;:ao dos casos previs-
tos em lei, os direitos da personalidade
silo intransmissfveis e irrenunciaveis,
nao podendo o seu exercicio sofrer li-
initar;:ao voluntaria.
Art. 12. Pode-se exigir que cesse a
amear;:a, ou a lesao, a direito da perso-
nalidade, e reclamar perdas e danos,
sem prejufzo de outras sanr;:oes previs-
tas em lei.
Pariigrafo tlnico. Em se tratando de
morto, tera legitimar;:ao para requerer a
medida prevista neste artigo o conjuge
sobrevivente, ou qualquer parente em
linha reta, ou colateral ate o quarto
grau.
Art. 13. Salvo por exigencia medica, e
defeso o ato de disposir;:ao do pr6prio
corpo, quando importar diminuir;:ao
permanente da integridade ffsica, ou
contrariar os hons costumes.
Pariigrafo tlnico. 0 ato previsto neste
artigo seni admitido para fins de trans-
plante, na forma estabelecida em lei es-
pecial.
Art.14. Eviilida, com objetivo cientifi-
co, ou altrufstico, a disposir;:ao gratuita
do pr6prio corpo, no todo ou em parte,
para depois da morte.
Paragrafo tlnico. 0 ato de disposi<;ao
pode ser livremente revogado a qual-
quer tempo.
Art.15.Ninguempodeserconstrangi-
do a submeter-se, com risco de vida, a
tratamento medico ou a interven\:ao ci-
n1rgica.
13 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Art. 16. Toda pessoa tern dircito ao
no me, nele comprcend idos o prenome e
o sobrenome.
Art. 17. 0 no me da pessoa nao pode ser
empregado por outrem em publica1;iies
ou representa1,:iies quc a exponham ao
desprczo publico, ainda quando nao
haja inten1,:ao difamat6ria.
Art. 18. Sem autorizm;ao, nao se pode
usar o nome alheio em propaganda co-
mercial.
Art. 19. 0 pseudonimo adotado para
atividades Hcitas goza da prote~ao que
se da ao nome.
Art. 20. Salvo se autorizadas, ou sc ne-
cessarias 11 administra~ao da justi<;:a ou
a manutenc;ao da onlem publica, a di-
vulgm;ao de escritos, a transmissao da
palavra, ou a publica~ao, a exposii,;ao
ou a utilizrn;ao da imagem de uma pes-
soa poderao ser proibidas, a scu reque-
rimento e sem prejufzo da indeniza1tao
que couber, se lhe atingirem a honra, a
b.oa fama ou a respeitabilidade, ou se se
dcstinarem a fins comerciais.
Pariigrafo tlnico. Em se tratando de
morto ou de ausente, sao partes legiti-
mas para requerer essa prote\:ao o cfm-
juge, os ascendentes ou os descen-
dentcs.
Art. 21. A vida pri vada da pessoa natu-
ral cinvioliivel, e o juiz, arequerimento
do interessado, adotara as providencias
necessarias para impedir ou fazer ccs-
sar ato contrario a esta norma.
Art. 16-21
Art. 16. Every person has the right to a
name that includes a first name and a
surname.
Art. 17. The name of a person may not be
used by others in publications or
representations that expose the person to
public scorn, even if there is no defamatory
intent.
Art. 18. The name of another person may
not be used in commercial advertising
without authorization.
Art. 19. A pseudonym adopted for licit
activities enjoys the same protection given
to a name.
Art. 20. Except if authorized, or necessary
for the administration of justice or the
maintenance of public order, divulgation of
writings, transmission of speech, and
publication, exhibition or use of the image
of a person may be prohibited, on
application by the person and without
prejudice to any indemnification to which
he may be entitled, if they affect the honor,
the good reputation or the respectability of
the person, or are intended for commercial
,., I
purposes.
1'
Sole paragraph. In cases of death or
absence, the spouse, the ascendants and the
descendents of the persons are.legitimate
patties to apply for this protection.
Art. 21. The private life of a natural person
is inviolable, and the judge, on application
by the interested party, shall adopt such
measures as may be necessary to prevent or
cause to cease any act contrary to this
provision.
 Art 22-25 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter III - Absence
Section I - Curatorship of
the Property of Absentees
Art. 22. If a person has disappeared from
his domicile and there is no intelligence of
him, and he has not left a representative or
attorney to administer his property, the
judge, on application by any interested
party or by the Public Ministry, shall
declare the person's absence and appoint a
curator to the person.
Art. 23. A person's absence shall also be
declared and a curator appointed if the
absentee has left a mandatary who does not
want to, or cannot, perform or continue to
perform the mandate, or if the mandatary' s
powers are insufficient.
Art. 24. The judge who appoints the curator
shall fix his powers and obligations in
accordance with the circumstances,
observing, to the extent applicable, the
provisions with re!lpect to tutors and
curators.
Art. 25. The absentee's spouse, if not
judicially separated, or separated in fact for
more than two years prior to the declaration
of absence, shall be the absentee's legal
curator.
§ 1. If there is no spouse, the curatorship of
the property of the absentee shall fall to the ·
parents or the descendents, in that order,
provided there is no impediment to them
exercising the charge.
§2. Among the descendents, the nearer
precede the more remote.
§3. In the absence of the above-mentioned
persons, the judge shall choose the c.urator.
14
Capitulo III - Da Ausencia
Se~lio I- Da Curadoria
dos Bens do Ausente
Art. 22. Desaparecendo uma pessoa do
seu domicfiio sem dela haver notfcia, se
nao houver deixado representante OU
procurador a quern caiha administrar-
lhe os hens, o juiz, a requerimento de
qualquer interessado ou do Ministerio
Puhlico, declarara a ausencia, e no-
mear-lhe-a curador.
Art. 23. Tamhem se declarara a auscn-
cia, e se nomeara curador, quando o au-
sente deixar mandatario que nao queira
ou nao possa exercer ou continuar o
mandato, ou se os seus poderes forem
insuficientes.
Art. 24. 0 juiz, que nomear o curador,
fixar-lhe-ii os poderes e ohrigac;oes,
conforme as circunstiincias, ohservan-
do, no que for apliciivel, o disposto a
respeito dos tutores e curadores.
Art. 25. 0 conjuge do ausente, sempre
que nao esteja separ.ido judicialmente,
ou de fato por mais de dois anos antes
da declarac;ao da ausencia. serii o seu le-
gftimo curador.
§ 1° Em falta do conjuge, a curadoria
dos hens do ausente incumhe aos pais
ou aos descendentes, nesta ordem, nao
havendo impedimento que os iniha de
exercer o cargo.
§ 2° Entre os descendentes, os mais pr6-
ximos precedem os mais remotos.
§ 3° Na falta das pessoas mencionadas,
compete ao juiz a escolha do curador.
15 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Se~o II - Da Sucessao
Provis6ria
Art. 26. Decorrido um ano da arrecada-
~ao dos hens do ausente, ou, se ele dei-
xou representante ou procurador, em se
.passando tres. anos, poderao os interes~
sados requerer que se declare a ausen-
cia e se ahra provisoriamente a suces-
sao.
Art. 27. Para o efeito previsto no artigo
anterior, somente se consideram inte-
ressados:
I - o conjuge nao separado judicialmen-
te;
II - os herdeiros presumidos, legftimos
ou testamentarios;
III - os que tiverem sohre os hens do au-
sente direito dependente de sua morte;
IV - os credores de ohrigmroes vencidas
e nao pagas.
Art. 28. A .senten~a que determinar a
abertura da sucessao provis6ria £6 pro-
duzira efeito cento e oitenta dias depois
de publicada pela imprensa; mas, logo
que passe em julgado, proceder-se-ii a the press; however, immediately after the
ahertura do testamento, se houver, e ao
inventario e partilha dos hens, como se
o ausente fosse falecido.
§ I 0 Findo o prazo a que se refere o art.
26, e nao havendo interessados na su-
cessao provis6ria, cumpre ao Ministe-
rio PUhlico requere-la ao jufzo compe-
tente.
Art. 26-28
Section II - Provisional
Succession
Art. 26. Upon expiry of one year after the
curator has taken the absentee's property
into his possession, or, if the absentee has
left a r.epresentative or attorney, after t~r~~
ye~r~ have passed, the interested parties
may apply for a declaration of the person's
absence and for a provisional opening of
the succession.
Art. 27. For the effects of the preceding
article, only the following shall be
considered to be interested parties:
I - a spouse who has not been judicially
separated;
II - the presumed heirs, either legal or
testamentary;
HI - those who hold a right over the
property of the absentee that depends on his
death;
IV - the creditors of due and unpaid
obligations.
Ar~. 28. The,judgment t.h.at decJar~s the
prcv!sionaLopening of the success,ion shall
produce effects only one hundred and
eighty days after it has been published in
judgment has become final, the testament,
if any, shall be opened and the inventory
and partition of the property shall be made,
as if the absentee had died.
§ 1. Upon expiry of the time period referred
to in art. 26, if there are no parties interested
in the provisional succession, the Public
Ministry shall apply to the competent
forum for the opening of the provisional
succession.
Art. 29-32 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. If no heir or interested party appears to
apply for the inventory within thirty days
after the judgment that ordered the opening
of the provisional succession became final,
the absentee's property shall pass into the
keeping and administration of a curator in
the manner established in arts. 1819 to
1823.
Art. 29. Prior to partition, the judge, if he
finds it to be appropriate, shall order
movable property subject to deterioration
or loss to be converted into immovable
property or debt instruments guaranteed by
the Union.
Art. 30. In order to be put in possession of
the absentee's property, the heirs shall give
security for the restitution of the property,
by means of pledges and hypothecs equal to
their respective shares.
§ 1, Anyone who has the right to provisional
possession but cannot give the security
required by this article shall be excluded
and the property to which he is entitled shall
be kept under the administration of the
curator or of another heir designated by the
judge, wbo gives such security.
§2. The ascendants, descendents and
spouse, once their status as heirs is proved,
may enter into possession of the absentee's
property, without need to give security.
Art. 31. Except for alienation by
expropriation, the absentee's immovable
property may only be alienated or
hypothecated when the judge so orders, in
order to avoid its ruin.
Art. 32. Once in possession of the property,
the provisional successors shall represent
the absentee, such that pending actions
shall be against them, as shall any future
actions that may be brought against the
absentee.
16
§ 2° Nao comparecendo herdeiro ou in-
teressado para requerer 0 inventario me
rrinta dias depois de passar em julg,1tlo
a sentem;a que mandar abrir a succssilo
provis6ria, proccder-se-a aarrccada1;ao
dos hens do ausente pela forma estabe-
lecida nos arts. 1.819 a 1.823.
Art. 29. Antes da partilha, o juiz, quan-
do julgar conveniente. ordcnar:i a con-
versao dos hens m6veis, sujeilos a dcte-
riora~ilo ou a extravio, em im6veis ou
cm titulos garantidos pela Uniao.
Art. 30. Os herdeiros, para se imitirem
na posse dos bens do ausente, darao ga-
rantias da restituii;ao deles, mediante
penhores ou hipotecas equivalentes aos
quinhties respectivos.
§ 1° Aquele que tiver direito a posse
provis6ria, mas nlio puder prestar a ga-
rantia exigida neste artigo, seni excluf-
do, mantendo-se os hens que !he de-
viam caber sob a admihistra1;ao do cu-
rador, ou de outro herdeiro designado
pclo juiz, e que preste essa garantia.
§ 2° Os ascendentes, os descendentes c
o conjuge, uma vez provada a sua qua-
lidade de herdeiros, poderao. inde-
pendentemente de garantia. entrar na
posse dos hens do ausentc.
Art. 31. Os im6veis do ausente s6 se
poderao alienar, nao sendo por desa-
proprial,'ilo, ou hipotecar, quando o or-
dene o juiz, para !hes evitar a rufna.
Art. 32. Empossao nos bens, os suces-
sores provis6rios ficarao represemando
ativa e passivamente o ausentc, de
modo que contra eles correriio as at;:oes
pendentes e as que de futuro aquele fo-
rem movidas.
17 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Art. 33. 0 descendente, ascendente ou
conjuge que for sucessor provis6rio do
ausente, farii seus todos os frutos e ren-
dimentos dos bens que a este couberem;
os outros sucessores, porem, deveri:io
capitalizar metade desses frutos e ren-
dimentos, segundo o disposto no art.
29, de acordo com o representante do
Ministerio PUblico, e prestar anualmen-
te contas ao juiz competente.
Paragrafo unico. Seo ausente aparecer,
e ficar provado quc a ausencia foi vo-
lunHlria e injustificada, perderii ele, em
favor do sucessor, sua parte nos frutos e
rendimentos.
Art. 34. 0 excluido, segundo o art. 30,
da posse provis6ria poderii, justifican-
do falta de meios, requerer lhe seja en-
tregue metade dos rendimentos do qui-
nhao que !he tocaria.
Art. 35. Se durante a posse provis6ria
se provar a epoca exata do falecimento
do ausente, considerar-se-a, nessa data,
aberta a sucessao em favor dos herdei-
ros, que o eram aquele tempo.
Art. 36. Seo ausente aparecer, ou se !he
provar a existehcia, depois de estabele-
cida a posse provis6ria, cessarlio para
logo as vantagens dos sucessores nela
imitidos, ficando, todavia, obrigados a
tomar as medidas assecurat6rias preci-
sas, ate a entrega dos bens a seil dono.
Set;iio III- Da Sucessiio Definitiva
Art. 37. Dez anos depois de passada em
julgado a sentem;a que concede a aber-
tura da sucessao provis6ria, poderao os
interessados requerer a sucessao defini-
tiva e o levantame11to das cam;oes pres-
tadas.
Art. 33-37
Art. 33. A descendent, ascendant or spouse
who is a provisional successor of the
absentee shall have for his own all the fruits
and income of the property to which he is
entitled; the other successors, however,
must capitalize one half of such fruits and
income, pursuant to the provisions of art. 29
and in agreement with the Public
Ministry's representative, and shall render
accounts annually to the competent judge.
Sole paragraph. If the absentee appears and
it is proved that his absence was voluntary
and unjustified, he shall lose his share of the
fruits and income to the successor.
Art. 34. Anyone excluded, according to art.
30, from provisional possession may, upon
establishing his lack of means, apply for
one half of the income from the share that
wouldfall to him.
Art. 35. If the exact time of the absentee's
death is proved during provisional
possession, the succession shall be deemed
to have opened in favor of those who were
heirs at the time of death.
Art. 36. If the absentee appears or if his
existence is proved after provisional
possession is established, all the
advantages of the successors in provisional
possession shall immediately cease, but the
successors shall be obliged to take such
measures as may be necessary to keep the
property secure until it is delivered to its
owner.
Section ill - Definitive Succession
Art. 37. Ten years after the judgment that
granted provisional opening of the
succession became final, the interested
parties may apply for definitive succession
and release of the security given.
 Art. 33-40 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 38. Definitive succession may also be
applied for if it is proved that the absentee
is at least eighty years of age and that five
years have passed since the last intelligence
of him.
Art. 39. If the absentee, or any of his
ascendants or descendents,. return within
the ten years following .the opening of the
definitive succession, he or they shall have
only the property that then exists, in the
state that it is found, or the property that
replaced it, or the price that the heirs or
other interested parties received for
property alienated after that time.
Sole paragraph. If within the ten years
referred to in this article, the absentee does
not return and no interested party applies
for definitive sue.cession, the property of
the absentee in the keeping of the curator
shall pass into the dominion of the
Municipality or the Federal District, if
located within their respective boundaries,
and shall become part of the dominion of
the Union, if situated in federal territory.
Title II - Legal Persons
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 40. Legal persons are formed under
public law, internal or external, or private
law.
Art. 41. The following are internal public
law legal persons:
I - the Union;
II - the States, the Federal District and the
Territories;
Ill - the Municipalities;
IV - autonomous state entities, including
public associations; (As amended by Law
11,127 of2005)
18
Art. 38. Pode-se requerer a sucessao
definitiva, tambem, provando-se que o
ausente conta oitenta anos de idade, e
que de cinco datam as ultimas noticias
de le.
Art. 39. Regressando o ausente nos dez
a
anos seguintes abertura da sucess1ib
definitiva, ou algum de seus descen-
dentes ou ascendentes, aquele ou estes
haverao s6 os bens existentes no estado
em que se acharem, os sub-rogados em
seu lugar, ou o pre~o que os herdeiros e
demais interessados houverem recebi-
do pelos bens alienados depois daquele
tempo.
Paragrafo unico. Se, nos dez anos a que
se refere este artigo, o ausente. nao re-
gressar, e nenhum interessado promo-
ver a sucessao definitiva, os bens arre-
cadados passarao ao dominio do Muni-
cfpio ou do Distrito Federal, se localiza-
dos nas respectivas circunscri~iies, in-
corporando-se ao domfnio da Uniiio,
quando situados em territ6rio federal.
Titulo II- Das Pessoas Juridicas
Capitulo I - Disposii;oes Gerais
Art. 40. As pessoas jurfdicas siio de di-
reito publico, interno ou externo, e de
direito privado.
Art. 41. Sao pessoasjurfdicas de direito
publico intemo:
I-a Uniao;
II - os Estados, o Distrito Federal e os
Tc;rrit6rios;
III - os Municfpios;
IV - as autarquias, inclusive as associa-
~iies publicas; (Reda1;1io dada pela Lei
n• 11.l 07, de 2005)
19 CODlGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
v - as demais entidades de carater pu-
blico criadas por lei.
Paragrafo unico. Salvo disposi1;1io em
contrario, as pessoasjurfdicas de direi-
to publico, a que se tenha dado estrutura
de direito privado, rcgem-se, no que
couber, quanto ao seu funcionamento,
pelas nonnas deste C6digo.
Art. 42. Sao pessoas jurfdicas de direito
publico externo os Estados estrangciros
e todas as pessoas que forem regidas
pelo direito internacional publico.
Art. 43. As pessoas jurfdicas de direito
publico interno sao civilmente respon-
saveis por atos dos seus agentes que
ncssa qualidade causem danos a tercci-
ros, ressalvado direito regressivo con-
tra os causadores do dano, se houvcr,
por parte destes, culpa ou dolo.
Art.44. Sao pessoas jurfdicas de direito
privado:
I - as associa~iies;
II - as sociedades;
III - as funda1;iies;
IV - as organizw;oes religios:rn; (lncluf-
do pela Lei n° 10.825, de 22.12.2003)
V - os partidos politicos. (Incluido pela
Lei n° 10.825, de 22.12.2003)
§ J0 Sao livres a criat;ao, a organiza~1io,
a estrutura~ao interna e o funcionamen-
to das organiza<;:iies religiosas, sendo
vedado ao
poder publico negar-lhes re-
conhecimento ou registro dos atos
constitutivos e necessarios ao seu fun-
cionamento. (Inclufdo pela Lei 11°
10.825. de 22.12.2003)
Art 42-44
V - other entities of public character
created by law.
Sole paragraph. Saving provision to the
contrary, the functioning of public law
legal persons to which a private law
structure has been given is governed, to the
extent applicable, by the rules of this Code.
Art. 42. Foreign States and all persons
governed by international public law are
external public law legal persons.
Art. 43. Internal public law legal persons
are civilly liable for the acts of their agents
who in that capacity cause damage to third
parties, reserving the legal person's right of
recourse against those who caused the
damage, if there is fault or wrongful
conduct on their part.
Art. 44. The following are private law legal
persons:
I - associations;
II - companies;
III - foundations;
IV - religious organizations; (Added by
Law 10,825 of22/12/2003);
V - political parties. (Added by Law 10,825
of 22/1212003)
§ 1. The creation, organization, internal
structure and functioning of religious
organizations is free, and the government is
prohibited from denying religious
organizations recognition or registration of
their constituting instruments and the
instruments necessary to their functioning.
(Added by Law 10,825 of22/12/2003)
Art. 45-46 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. The provisions concerning associations
apply, in a supplementary manner, to the
companies governed by Book II of the
Special Part of this Code. (Added by Law
10,825 of 22112/2003)
§3. Political parties shall be organized and
shall function pursuant to the provisions of
specific legislation. (Added by Law 10,825
of22/12/2003) · Lein" I 0.825, de 22.12.2003)
Art. 45. The legal existence of private law
legal persons begins with the recording of
their constituting instrument in the
appropriate register, preceded, if necess£lry,
by the authorization or approval of the
Executive Branch of Government; all
alterations to the constituting instrument
shall be entered in the register.
Sole paragraph. The right to annul the
constitution of private law legal persons for
defect in their constituting instrument
lapses in three years from publication of the
registration of the constituting instrument.
Art. 46. The register shall state:
I - the name, the purposes, the seat of
administration, the period of duration and
the corporate assets, if any;
II- the name and particulars of the founders
or incorporating members and the officers;
III - the manner in which the legal person is
administered and represented, both in legal
proceedings and otherwise;
IV - whether the constituting instrument
may be amended with respect to the
administration of the legal person, and in
what manner;
V - whether the members are secondarily
liable or not for the obligations of the legal
person;
20
§ 2° As disposi1;oes conccmemes as-as
socia1;oes aplicam-se subsidiariarnente
as sociedades que sao objeto do Livro II
da Paite Especial deste C6digo. (Inclui-
do pela Lei n° I 0.825, de 22.12.2003)
§ 3° Os partidos politicos serao organi-
zados e funcionarao conforme o dis-
posto em lei especffica. (lnclufdo pela
Art. 45. Corne\:a a existcncia legal das
pessoas jurfdicas de direito privado
corn a inscrii;ao do ato constitutivo no
respectivo registro, precedida. quando
necessario, de autoriza\'.ao ou aprova-
\'.iio do Poder Executivo, averbai1do-se
no registro todas as alterm;:oes por que
passar o ato constitutivo.
Paragrafo unico. Decai em tres anos o
direito de anular a constitui9ao das pes-
soas jurfdica.~ de direito privado, por
defeito do ato respectivo, contado o
prazo da publica\'.iiO de sua inscri9ao no
registro.
Art. 46. 0 registro declarara:
I - a denornina\'.ao, os fins, a sede, o
tempo de dura9ao e o fundo social,
quando houver;
II - o nome e a individualiza9ao dos
fundadores ou instituidores, e dos dire-
tores;
III - o modo por que se adrninistra e re-
presenth, ativa e passivamente, judicial
e extrajudicialrnente;
IV - se o ato constitutivo e reforrnavel
a
no tocante administrai;ao, e de que
rnodo;
V - se os rnernbros respondern, ou nao,
subsidiariarnente, pelas obrigm;oes so-
ciais;
21 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
VI - as condi1;oes de extim;ao da pessoa
jurfdica c o destino do scu patrimonio,
ncsse caso.
Art. 47. Obrigarn a pessoa jurfdica os
atos dos adrninistradores, exercidos nos
limites.de seus poderes definidos no ato
constitutivo.
Art. 48. Se a pessoajuridica liver adrni-
nistragao coletiva, as decisoes se toma-
rao pela maioria de votos dos presentes.
salvo se o ato constitutivo dispuser de
modo diverso.
Paragrafo unico. Decai em tres anos o
direito de anular as decisoes a que sere-
fere este artigo, 4uando violarern a lei
ou estatuto, ou forern eivadas de erro,
do lo, sirnulw;ao ou fraude.
Art. 49. Se a adrninistra\'.iio da pessoa
jurfdica vier a faltar, o juiz, a re4ueri·
mento de qualquer interessado, no-
rnear-lhe-a adrninistrador provis6rio.
Art. 50. Em caso de abuso da persona"
lidade juridica, caracterizado pelo des-
vio de finalidade, ou pcla confusao pa-
trimonial, pode o juiz decidir, a requeri-
rnento da parte, ou do Ministerio Publi-
co quando !he couber intervir no pro-
cesso, que os efeitos de certas e dcter-
minadas rela1;oes de obrigai;oes scjarn
estendidos aos bens particulares dos ad-
rninistradores ou s6cios da pessoa jurf-
dica.
Art. 51. Nos casos de dissolw;ao da
pessoa jurfdica ou cassada a autoriza-
i;ao paraseu funcionarnento, elasubsis-
tira para os fins de Jiquida.;;ao, ate que
esta sc conclua.
§I ° Far-se-a, no registro omle a pessoa
jurfdica estiver inscrita, a averba~ao de
sua dissolu\'.iiO.
Art. 47-51
VI - the conditions on which the legal
person may be extinguished and the
disposition of its patrimony. in that case.
Art. 47. The acts of the legal person's
administrators, performed within the limits
of the powers defined in its constituting
instrument, bind the legal person.
Art. 48. If the legal person has a collective
administration, decisions shall be taken by
a majority of the votes of those present,
unless the constituting instrument
otherwise provides.
Sole paragraph. The right to annul
decisions referred to in this article, when
they violate the law or the corporate statute
or are vitiated by mistake, wrongful
conduct, simulation or fraud, lapses in three
years.
Art. 49. If the administration of a legal
person becomes vacant, the judge, on
application by any interested party, shall
name a provisional administrator.
Art. 50. In cases of abuse of legal
personality, characterized by a departure
from the purpose of the legal person or by
confusion of patrimonies, the judge may
decide, on application by the party or by the
Public Ministry, when that ministry has the
power or duty to intervene in the
proceeding, that the effects of certain
defined obligations be extended to the
private property of the administrators or
members of the legal person.
Art. 51. In cases of dissolution of a legal
person, or when its authorization to operate
is cancelled, it shall subsist for purposes of
liquidation, until its liquidation is
concluded.
§ 1. The dissolution of the legal person shall
be entered in the margin of the register in
which the legal person is recorded.
Art. 52-54 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. Other private law legal persons are
governed, to the extent applicable, by the
provisions for liquidation of partnerships
and companies.
§3. Upon conclusion of liquidation, the
registration of the legal person shall be
cancelled.
Art. 52. Legal persons enjoy, to the extent
applicable, the protection given to rights of
personality.
Chapter II - Associations
Art. 53. Associations are constituted by the
organization of persons who unite for
non-economic purposes.
Sole paragraph. There are no reciprocal
rights and obligations between the
members of an association.
Art. 54. On pain of nullity, the corporate
statute of associations shall contain:
I - the name, the purposes and seat of
administration of the association;
II - the requirements for admission,
withdrawal and expulsion of members of
the association;
III - the rights and duties of the members of
the association;
IV - the sources of funds for the
maintenance of the association;
V - the manner in which the deliberative
bodies of the association shall be
constituted and shall function; (As
amended by Law 11,127 of2005)
VI - the conditions for amendment of the
association's corporate statute and for the
association's dissolution;
VII - the form of administrative
management and the manner in which the
management's accounts shall be approved.
(Added by Law 11, 127 of 2005).
22
§2° As disposi9oes para a liquida1:ao
das sociedades aplicam-se, no que cou-
ber, as demais pessoas jurfdicas de di-
reito privado.
§3° Encerrada a liquida9ao, promover-
se-a o cancelamento da inscri9iio da
pessoajurfdica.
Art. 52. Aplica-se as pessoas jurfdicas,
no que couber, a prote1:ao dos direitos
da personalidade.
Capitulo II- Das Associa9oes
Art. 53. Constituem-se as associai;:oes
pela uniiio de pessoas que se organizcm
para fins nao economicos.
Paragrafo ilnico. Nao h:i, entre os asso-
ciados, direitos e obrigw;:oes recfpro-
cos.
Art. 54. Sob pena de nulidade, o estatu-
to das a~socia~oes contera:
I - a denomina~ao, os fins ea sede da as-
socia~ao;
II - os requisitos para a admissao, de-
missao e exclusao dos associados;
III - os direitos e deveres dos associa-
dos;
IV - as fontes de recursos para sua ma-
nutem;:ao;
V -o modo de constituii;:ao e de funcio-
namento dos 6rgaos deliberativos; (Re-
dai;:ao dada pela Lein" 11.127, de 2005)
VI - as condi~oes para a alterar;ao das
disposii;:oes estatutarias e para a disso-
lu~ao;
VII - a forma de gestao administrativa
e de aprova1:ao das respectivas contas.
(Inclufdo pela Lei n° 11.127, de 2005)
23 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 55. Os associados devem ter iguais
direitos, mas o estatuto podera instituir
categorias com vantagens especiais.
Art. 56. A qualidade de associado e in-
transmissfvel, se o estatuto nao dispu-
ser o contrario.
Paragrafo (mico. Se o associado for ti-
tular de quota ou fra1:ao ideal do patri-
monio da associa~ao, a transferencia
daquela nao importara, de per si, na
atribuii;:ao da qualidade de associado ao
adquirente ou ao herdeiro, salvo dispo-
si~ao di versa do estatuto.
Art. 57. A exclusao do associado s6 e Art. 57. The exclusion of a member of an
admissfvel havendo justa causa, assim
reconhecida em procedimento que as-
segure direito de defesa e de recurso.
nos tcrmos previstos no estatuto. (Re-
da~ao dada pelaLei 11° 11.127, de 2005)
Paragrafo unico. (Revogado pela Lei 11°
11.127, de 2005)
Art. 58. Nenhum associado podera ser
irnpedido de exercer direito ou furn;ao
que lhe tenha sido legitimamente con-
ferido, a nao ser nos casos e pela forrna
previstos na lei ou no estatuto.
Art. 59. Compete privativamente a as-
sembleia geral: (Reda~ao dada pela Lei
11° 11.127, de 2005)
J-destituirosadministradores;(Reda-
\'.ITO dada pelaLei n° 11.127. de 2005) . amended by Law l l, 127 of 2005)
II - alterar o estatuto. (Redai;:ao dada
pela Lei 11° 11 .. 127, de 2005)
An. 55-59
Art. 55. Members of an association shall
have equal rights, but the association's
corporate statute may establish categories
with special advantages.
Art. 56. Membership in an association is
intransmissible, unless the association's
corporate statute otherwise provides.
Sole paragraph. If a member of an
association is the owner of a share or a
fractional undivided interest of the
association's patrimony, the transferof that
share or interest does not, per se, make the
acquiror or heir a member of the
association, unless the association's
corporate statute otherwise provides.
association is permitted only if there is just
cause, recognized through a procedure that
ensures the right of defense and the right to
appeal, on terms set out in the corporate
statute. (Amended by Law 11, 127 of 2005)
Sole paragraph. (Repealed by Law 11,127
of2005)
Art. 58. No member of an association may
be prevented from exercising a right or
function that was legitimately conferred
upon him, except in the cases and in the
manner provided for by law or in the
association's corporate statute.
Art. 59. The general assembly of an
association shall have exclusive powers to:
(As amended by Law 11,127 of2005)
I - remove the administrators; (As
II - amend the corporate statute. (As
amended by Law 11,127 of2005)
Art. 60-61 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. A resolution passed at an
assembly especially called for the purpose
is required to approve the resolutions
referred to in items I and II above; the
quorum and majority required for approval,
as well as the criteria for election of
administrators shall be those established in
the corporate statute. (As amended by Law
l l,127 of2005)
Art. 60. The deliberative bodies shall be
called in the manner provided for in the
corporate statute, and one-fifth of the
members of the association shall be
guaranteed the right to cause a call to be
made. (As amended by Law 11,127 of
2005)
Art. 61. Upon dissolution of the
association, the remainder of its net
patrimony, after deduction, as the case may
be, of the shares or fractional undivided
interests referred to in the sole paragraph of
a.rt. 56, shall be given to the not-for-profit
entity designated in the corporate statute or,
if the corporate statute is silent, to a
municipal, state or federal institution with
identical or like purposes, by resolution of
the members of the association.
§ 1. If provision is made in the corporate
statute or, where the corporate statute is
silent, if approved by resoltition of the
members, the contributions made by the
members to the association's patrimony,
adjusted for inflation, may be reimbursed to
them prior to the disposition of the
remainder of the association's patrimony in
the manner referred to in this article.
§2. If there is no institution of the kind
referred to in this article in the
Municipality, State, Federal District or
Territory in which'the association has its
seat of administration, the remainder of the
association's patrimony shall devolve upon
the Treasury of the State, Federal District or
Union.
24
Panigrafo iinico. Para as deliberm;oes a
que se referem os incisos I e II deste ar-
tigo e exigido deliberm;:ao da assem-
bleia especialmentc convocada para
esse fim, cujo quonnn sera o estabeleei-
do no estatuto, bem como os c.Titerios de
clcii;;lio dos administradorcs. (Redrn;ao
dada pela Lei 11° 11.127, de 2005)
Art. 60. A convoca1:ao dos 6rglios deli-
berativos far-se-ii. na forma do estaturo.
garantido a 1/5 (um quinto) dos asso-
ciados o direito de promove-Ja. (Reda-
i,;ao dada pelaLei n° 11.127, de 2005)
Art. 61. Dissolvida a associar;ao, o re-
manescente do seu patrimonio lfquido,
depois de deduzidas, se for o caso. as
quotas ou fra\;oes ideais referidas no
paragrafo iinico do arr. 56, ser:i destina-
do a entidade de fins nao economicos
designada no estatuto, ou, omisso esre,
por deliberagiio dos associados, ainsti-
tuii;:ao municipal, estadual ou federal,
de fins identicos ou semelhantes.
§ 1° Por clii.usula do cstatuto ou, no seu
silencio, por dcliberai;:ao dos associa-
dos. podem cstes, antes da destinm;:ilo
do rcmanescente referida neste artigo,
receber cm restituii;:ao, atual izado o rcs-
pectivo valor, as contribuii;:oes quc ti-
verem prcstado ao patrimonio da asso-
ciai;:ao.
§2° Nao existindo no Municipio, no Es-
tado, no Distrito Federal ou no Territ6-
rio, cm que a associai;;ao tiver sede, ins-
tituii;:ao nas condh;oes indicadas neste
artigo, o que remanescer do seu patri-
miinio se devolvera aFazenda do Esta-
do, do Distrito Federal ou da Uniao.
25 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Capitulo III - Das Fundai;;oes
Art. 62. Para criar uma fundas;ao, o seu
instituidor fara, por escritura piiblica ou
testamento, dotai,;ao especial de bens li-
vres, especificando o fim a que se desti-
na. e declarando, se quiscr, a maneira de
administrii.-Ja.
Paragrafo iinico. A funda1:ao somente
poderii. constituir-se para fins religio-
sos, morais, culturais ou de assistencia.
Art. 63. Quando insuficientes para
constituir a funda1:1io, os hens a ela des-
tinados serao, se de outro modo nlio dis-
pnser o instituidor. incorporados em
outra fundas;ao que se proponha a fim
igual ou scmelhante.
Art. 64. Constitufda a fundai;:ao por ne-
g6cio jurfdico entre vivos, o instituidor
e obrigado a transferir-lhe a proprieda-
de, ou outro direito real, sobre os bens
dotados, e, se nao o fizer, serilo registra-
dos, em name dela, por mandado judi-
cial.
Art. 65. Aqueles a quem o instituidor
cometer a aplicai;:ao do patrimonio, em
tendo ciencia do encargo, formularao
logo, de acordo com as suas bases (art.
62), o estatuto da fundai;;ao projetada,
submetcndo-o, em seguida. a aprova-
s;ao da autoridade compctente, com re-
curso ao juiz.
Parii.grafo unico. Se o estatuto nao for
elaborado no prazo assinado pelo insti-
tuidor, ou, nao havendo prazo, em cen-
to e oitenta dias, a incumbencia caberii.
ao Ministerio Piiblico.
Art. 62-65
Chapter III - Foundations
Art. 62. To create a foundation, its founder
shall make, by public writing or testament,
a special endowment of unencumbered
property, specifying the purpose for which
the property is intended and declaring, ifhe
so wishes, the manner in which the
foundation is to be administered.
Sole paragraph. A foundation may be
constituted only for religious, moral or
cultural purposes or for the purpose of
giving aid.
Art. 63. If the property is insufficient to
constitute the foundation, it shall be
incorporated into another foundation that
has the same or a similar purpose, unless
the founder otherwise provides.
Art. 64. When the foundation is constituted
by an inter vivos juridical transaction, the
founder is obi igated to transfer to the
foundation ownership of, or another real
right in, the endowed property and if he
fails to do so, the property shall be
registered in the name of the foundation by
judicial order.
Art. 65~ Those to whom the founder has
committed the investment of the
foundation's patrimony, on becoming
aware of their charge, shall immediately
draw up a statute for the proposed
foundation, in accordance with its basic
principles (art. 62), and shall then submit
the statute for approval by the competent
authority, subject to appeal to a judge.
Sole paragraph. If the statute is not drawn
up within the time period established by the
founder, or, if there is no time period,
within one hundred and eighty days, the
Public Ministry shall be charged with
drafting the statute.
 Art. 66-69 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 66. The supervision of foundations
shall be carried out by the Public Ministry
of the State in which they are situated.
§ 1. Foundations operating in the Federal
District or in Territories shall be supervised
by the Federal Public Ministry.
§2. If foundations operate in more than one
State, the Public Ministry for each State
shall supervise activities in that state.
Art.c67. In order to amend the statute of the
foundation, the change must:
I - be approved by resolution adopted by
2/3 (two-thirds) of those competent to
manage and represent the foundation;
II - not be contrary to or negate the
foundation's purpose;
III - be approved by the appropriate agency
of the ~ublic Ministry and, if that agency
refuses its approval, a judge may grant it, on
application by the interested party.
Art. 68. When the amendment has not been
approved by unanimous vote, the
administrators of the foundation, when
submitting the statute to the agency of the
Public Ministry, shall request that notice be
given to the defeated minority, to contest it,
if they wish, within 10 (ten) days.
Art. 69. If the intended purpose of the
foundation becomes illicit, impossible or
without use, or if its term of duration
expires, the agency of the Public Ministry,
or any interested party, may initiate the
procedures for its extinction; unless the
foundation's constituting instrument or
statute otherwise provides, the
. foundation's patrimony shall be
incorporated into that of another
foundation designated by the judge, which
has the same or a similar purpose.
26
Art. 66. Velani pelas funda\:oes o Mi-
nisterio Publico do Estado onde situa-
das.
§I 0 Se funcionarem no Distrito Federal,
ou em Territ6rio, cabeni o cncargo ao
Ministerio Publico Federal.
§2° Sc estendcrem a atividade por mais
de um Estado, cabera o cncargo, em
cada um dcles, ao respectivo Ministerio
Publico.
Art. 67. Para que se possa alterar o es-
e
tatuto da funda\:fiO mister que a refor-
ma;
1- seja deliberada por 2/3 (do is te1ws)
dos competentes para gerir e reprc-
sentar a funda\_:iio;
II - nlio contrarie ou desvirtue o fim
desta;
lll-seja aprovada pelo 6rgao do Minis-
terio Publico, e, caso este a dcnegue,
podcni o juiz supri-la, a rcquerimento
do interessado.
Art, 68. Quando a altera1tlio nao houver
sido aprovada por vota\;iiO uniinime, os
administradorcs da funda\'.fio, ao sub-
meterem o estatuto ao 6rglio do Minis-
terio Publico, requererao que se de
a
ciencia minoria vencida para impug-
na-la, se quiser, em 10 (dez) dias.
Art. 69. Tornando-se ilfcita, impassi-
ve! ou in:util a finalidade a quc visa a
funda1.:ao, ou vencido o prazo de sua
existencia, o 6rgao do Ministerio Publi-
co, ou qualquer interessado, !he promo-
vera a extin~ao, incorporando-se o seu
patrim6nio, salvo disposi~lio em con-
triirio no ato constitutivo, ou no estatu-
to, em outra funda~lio, designada pelo
juiz, que se proponha a fim igual ou se-
melhante
27 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Titulo Ill - Do Domicilio
Art. 70. 0 domicflio da pessoa natural
e o lugar onde ela estabelece a sua resi-
dencia com iinimo definitivo.
Art. 71. Se, porem, a pessoa natural ti-
ver diversas residencias, onde, alterna-
damente. viva. considerar-se-a domici-
lio seu qualquer delas.
Art. 72. Etambem domicilio da pessoa
natural, quanto as
rela\;oes concernen-
a
tes profissao, 0 lugar mide esta e exer-
cida.
Paragrafo unico. Se a pessoa exercitar
profissao emlugares di versos, cada um
deles constituira domicflio para as rela-
\:Oes que !he corresponderem.
Art. 73. Ter-se-a por domicflio da pes-
soa natural, que nao tenha residencia
habitual, o lugar onde for encontrada.
Art. 74. Muda-se o domicflio, transfe-
rindo a residencia, com a inten~ao ma-
nifesta de o mudar.
Paragrafo unico. A prova da inten\:fio
resultara'do que declarar a pessoa as
municipalidades dos Jugares, que dei-
xa. e para onde vai, ou, se tais declara-
i;oes nao fizer, da pr6pria mudani;a,
com as circunstiincias que a acompa-
nharem.
Art. 75. Quanto as pessoas jurfdica.~. o
domicilioe:
I - da Unifio, o Distrito Federal;
II - dos Estados e Territ6rios, as respec-
tivas capitais;
III - do Municipio, o lugar onde funcio-
ne a administrll\:ao municipal;
Art. 70-75
Title III - Domicile
Art. 70. The domicile of a natural person is
the place where he establishes his
residence, with the intention of making it
such~
Art. 70. If, however, a natural person has
various residences where he lives
alternately, any of them may be considered
to be his domicile.
Art. 72. The place where a natural person
exercises a profession is also his domicile,
with respect to relations concerning his
profession.
Sole paragraph. If a person exercises a
profession in various places, each place
constitutes a domicile for the relations in
that place.
Art. 73. The domicile of a natural person
who does not have a habitual residence
shall be deemed to be the place where he is
found.
Art. 74. Domicile is changed when
residence is transferred with the manifest
intention of changing domicile.
Sole paragraph. Proof of intention results
from that which the person declares to the
municipalities that he leaves and to which
he goes or, if he does not make such
declarations, from the change itself, in the
circumstances in which it occurs.
Art. 75. The domicile of legal persons is:
I - of the Union, the Federal District;
II - of the States and Territories, their
respective capitals;
III - of a Municipality, the place where the
municipal administration functions;
Art. 76-77 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
IV - of other legal persons, the place where
their respective managements and
administrations function, or the place
where they have elected a special domicile
in their corporate statute or constituting
instrument.
§ 1. If a legal person has various
establishments in different places, each of
them shall be considered to be the domicile
of the legal person for the acts performed in
that place.
§2. If the seat of administration or
management is located outside Brazil, the
domicile of the legal person, with respect to
obligations contracted by each of its
agencies, shall be deemed to be the place in
Brazil in which the agency is established.
Art. 76. The domicile of incapable persons,
public servants, military personnel, sailors
and prisoners is fixed by law.
Sole paragraph. The domicile of an
incapable person is that of his
representative or assistant; that of a public
servant, the place in which he performs his
functions on a permanent basis; that of
military personnel, wherever they serve
and, if they belong to the Navy or the Air
Force, the headquarters of the command to
which they are immediately subordinate;
that of a sailor, the place where the ship is
registered; and that bf a prisoner, the place
where he serves his sentence.
Art. 77. A claim against a Brazilian
diplomatic agent who, being cited abroad,
alleges extraterritoriality without
designating where in Brazil he has his
domicile, may be brought in the Federal
District or at the place within Brazilian
territory in which he last had his domicile.
28
IV - das demais pessoas jurfdicas, o lu-
gar onde funcionarem as respectivas di-
retorias e administrai;oes, ou onde e!e-
gerem domicflio especial no seu estam-
to ou atos constitutivos.
§ 1° Ten do a pessoaj urfdica diversos es-
tahelecimentos em lugares diferentes,
cada um deles sera considerado <lomicf-
lio para os atos nele praticados.
§2° Se a administra\!ao, ou diretoria, ri-
ver a sede no estrangeiro, haver-se-a
por <lomicflio da pessoajurfdica, no to-
cante as ohrigai;:oes contraidas por cada
uma das suas agencias, o lugar do esta-
helecimento, sito no Brasil, a que ela
corresponder.
Art. 76. Tern domicflio necessario o in-
capaz, o servidor puhlico, o militar, o
maritimo e o preso.
Paragrafo unico. 0 domicflio do inca-
paz e o do seu representante ou assis-
teute; o do servidor puhlico, o Jugar em
que exercerpermanentemenre suas fun-
i;oes; o do militar, onde servir, e, sendo
da Marinha ou da Aeronautica, a sede
do comando a que se encontrar imedia-
tamente subordinado; o do maritimo,
onde o navio estiver matriculado; e o
preso, o Jugar em quc cumprir a sentcn-
i;a.
Art. 77. 0 agente diplomatico do Bra-
sil, que, citado no estrangeiro, alegar
extraterritorialidade sem designer on<le
tern, no pafs, o seu domicflio, poden\ ser
demandado no Distrito Federal ou no
ultimo ponto do territorio brasileiro
onde o teve.
29 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Art. 78. Nos contratos escritos, pode-
rao os contratantes especificar domicf-
lio onde se exercitem e cumpram os di-
reitos e obriga\;iies dcles resultantes.
Livro II - Dos Bens
Titulo Unico - Das Diferentes
Classes de Ben~
Capftulo I - Dos Bens Considerados
emsiMesmos
Sci;ao I - Dos Bens Imovcis
Art. 79. Sao hens imoveis o solo e tudo
quanto se !he incorporar natural ou arti-
ficialmente.
Art. 80. Consideram-se imoveis para
os efeitos legais:
I - os direitos reais sohre imoveis e as
ai;oes que os asseguram;
II - o direito asucessiio aberta.
Art. 81. Nao perdem o carater de im6-
veis:
I - as cdifica1;6es que. scparadas do
solo, mas conservando a sua unidade,
forem removidas para outro local;
II - os materiais provisoriamente sepa-
rados de um predio, para nele se reem-
pregarem.
Sei;iio II - Dos Bens M6veis
Art. 82. Sao moveis os hens stlscetiveis
de movimento proprio, ou <le remo~ao
por fon,;a alheia, sem altera~ao da suhs-
til.ncia ou da destina~ao ecouomico-so-
cial.
Art. 83. Consideram-se moveis para OS
efeitos legais:
I - as energias que tenham valor econo-
mico;
Art. 78-83
Art. 78. In written contracts, the
contracting parties may specify a domicile
where the rights and obligations resulting
from the contract are to be exercised and
performed.
Book II - Property
Sole Title - The Different Classes of
Property
Chapter I - Property Considered in
and of Itself
Section I - Immovable Property
Art. 79. Land and all that is incorporated
inro it, either naturally or artificially, is
immovable property.
Art. 80. The following are considered to be
immovable property for all legal effects:
I - real rights in immovable property and
the actions on such real rights;
II - the right to an open succession.
Art. 81. The following do not lose the
character of immovable property:
I - constructions that are separated from the
land but, maintaining their integrity, are
moved to another location;
II - materials that are temporarily separated
from a building in order to be used in it
again.
Section II - Movable Property
Art. 82. Things that are capable of
movement by themselves or that can be
removed by extrinsic force, without
altering their substance or their
socio-economic purpose, are movable
property.
Art. 83. The following are considered to be
movable property for all legal effects:
I - energy that has economic value;
 Art. 84-90 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - real rights in movable objects and
actions on such real rights;
ill - personal rights that are patrimonial in
character and actions on such rights.
Art. 84. While they are not used, materials
intended to be used in a construction remain
movable property; materials resulting from
the demolition of a building regain that
quality.
Section ill - F~ngible and Consumable
Property
Art. 85. Movables that can be replaced by
others of the same kind, quality and
quantity are fungible.
Art. 86. Movable property whose use
brings about immediate destruction of its
substance is consumable; movable
property destined for alienation is also
considered to be consumable.
Section IV - Divisible Property
Art. 87. Divisible property is that which
may be divided into parts without alteration
of its substance, considerable reduction of
its value or detriment to the use for which it
is destined.
Art. 88. Property that is divisible by nature
may become indivisible by determination
of law or by the will of the parties.
Section V - Singular and Collective
Property
Art. 89. Things that, although grouped
together, are considered de per si,
independently· of the others, are singular
items of property.
Art. 90. A plurality of singular things
belonging to the same person, which have a
sole purpose, constitute a universality in
fact.
30
II - os direitos reais sobre objeros m6-
veis e as ~fies correspondentes;
III - OS direitos pessoais de carater patri-
monial e respectivas ai;:oes.
Art. 84. Os materiais destinados aalgu-
ma construi;:lio, enquanto nao forem
empregados, conservam sua qualidade
de m6veis; readquirem essa qualidade
os provenientes da demolii;:ao de algum
predio.
Sei;iio ID - Dos Bens Fungiveis e
Consumiveis
Art. 85. Sao fungiveis os m6veis que
podem substituir-se por outros dames-
ma especie, qualidade e quantidade.
Art. 86. Sao consumfveis os hens m6-
veis cujo uso importa destrui~ao ime-
diata da pr6pria substiincia, sendo tam-
bem COnsideradOS tais OS destinados a
aliena~lio.
Sci;iio IV - Dos Bens Divisivcis
Art. 87. Bens divisfveis slio os que se
podem fracionar sem altera~iio na sua
substiincia, diminui~iio consideravel de
valor, ou prejufzo do uso a que se desti-
nam.
Art. 88. Os hens naturalmente divisi-
veis podem tornar-se indivisiveis por
determina~ao da lei ou por vontade das
partes.
Sci;iio V - Dos Bens Singulares e
Coletivos
Art. 89. Sao singulares os hens que,
embora reunidos. se consideram de per
si , independentemente dos demais.
Art. 90. Constitui universalidade de
fato a pluralidade de hens singulares
que, pertinentes a mesma pessoa, te-
nham destina~ao unitaria.
31 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE
Paragrafo unico. Os hens que formam
essa universalidade podem ser objeto
de rela~oes jurldicas pr6prias.
Art. 91. Constitui universalidade de di-
reito o complexo de rela~oes jurfdicas,
de uma pessoa, dotadas de valor econo-
mico.
Capitulo II- Dos Bens
Reciprocamente Considerados
Art. 92. Principal e o hem que existe
sobre si, abstrata ou concretamente;
acess6rio, aquele cuja existencia supoe
a do principal.
Art. 93. Sao perten~as os hens que, nlio
constituindo partes integrantes, se des-
tinam, de modo duradouro, ao uso, ao
servii;o ou ao aformoseamento de ou-
tro.
Art. 94. Os neg6cios juridicos que di-
zem respeito ao hem principal nao
abrangem as perteni;as, salvo se o con-
trario resultar da lei, da manifesta~ao de
vontade, ou das circunstiincias do caso.
Art. 95. Apesar de ainda nao separados
do hem principal, os frutos e produtos
podem ser ohjeto de neg6cio juridico.
Art. 96. As benfeitorias podem ser vo-
luptuarias, uteis OU necessarias.
§1° Sao voluptuarias as de mero deleite
ou recreio, que nao aumentam o uso ha-
bitual do hem, ainda que o tornem mais
agradavel ou sejam de elevado valor.
§2° Sao uteis as que aumentam OU faci-
litam o uso do hem.
§3° Sao necessarias as que tern por fim
conservar o hem ou evitar que se dete-
riore.
Art. 91-.96
Sole paragraph. The things that form the
universality may be the object of distinct
legal relations.
Art. 91. The complex of a person's legal
relations, which are endowed with
economic value, constitute a universality in
law.
.Chapter II - Things Considered In
Relation To Each Other
Art. 92. A thing that exists by itself, either
abstractly or concretely, is a principal
thing; a thing that presupposes the
existence of a principal thing is an
accessory.
Art. 93. Things that, although they are not
integral parts of another thing, are destined
on a lasting basis for the use, service or
beautification of that other thing are
appurtenances.
Art. 94. Juridical transactions that relate to
the principal thing do not include its
appurtenances, unless Uie contrary results
from the law, the expression of the parties'
will or the circumstances of the case.
Art. 95. Although not yet separated from
the principal thing, fruits and products may
be the object of juridical transactions.
Art. 96. Improvements may be voluntary,
useful or necessary.
§ 1. Improvements that are merely pleasing
or recreational and that do not augment the
habitual use of the thing, even though they
may be of great value or make the thing
more agreeable, are voluntary
improvements.
§2. Improvements that augment or
facilitate the use of the thing are useful
improvements.
§3. Improvements that are made to preserve
the thing or prevent its deterioration are
necessary improvements.
Art. 98-102 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 97. Betterments or additions that occur
to the thing without the intervention of the
owner, possessor or holder are not
considered to be improvements.
Chapter III - Public Property
Art. 98. Things under national dominion
that belong to internal public law legal
persons are public property; all other things
are private property, regardless of the
person to whom they belong.
Art. 99. The following are public property:
I - things for the common use of the people,
such as rivers, seas, roads, streets and
squares;
II - things for special use, such as buildings
and lands destined for the service or
establishment of the federal, state,
territorial or municipal administrations,
including the property of their autonomous
state entities;
III - doman.ial property, which constitutes
the patrimony of public law legal persons,
as the object of real or personal rights
belonging to any of those entities.
Sole paragraph. Unless the law otherwise
provides, things belonging to public law
legal persons that have been given a private
law structure are domanial property.
Art. 100. Public property for the common
use of the people or for special use is
inalienable for so long as it is so qualified,
in the form determined by law.
Art.101. State-owned public property may
be alienated, subject to the requirements
imposed by law.
Art. 102. Public property is not subject to
usucapion.
32
Art. 97. Nao se consideram benfeito-
rias os melhoramentos ou acrescimos
sobrevindos ao bem sern a intervern,:ao
do proprietario, possuidor ou detentor.
Capitulo Ill - Dos Bens Publicos
Art. 98. Sao publicos os bens do domf-
nio nacional pertencentes as pessoas ju-
rfdicas de direito publico intemo; todos
os outros siio particulares, seja qual for
a pessoa a que pertencerem.
Art. 99. Sao bens publicos:
I - os de uso comum do povo, tais como
rios, mares, estradas, ruas e pra1tas;
II os de uso especial, tais como ediff-
cios ou terrenos destinados a servi<;:o ou
estabelecimento da administrm;iio fede-
ral, estadual, territorial ou municipal,
inclusive os de suas autarquias;
III - os dominicais, que constituem o
patrimonio das pessoas jurfdicas de di-
reito publico, como objeto de direito
pessoal, ou real, de cada uma dessas en-
tidades.
Paragrafo unico. Nao dispondo a lei em
contrario, consideram-se dominicais os
bens pertencentes as pessoas jurfdicas
de direito publico a que se tenha dado
estrutura de direito privado.
Art. 100. Os bens publicos de uso co-
mum do povo e os de uso especial sao
inalienaveis, enquanto conservarem a
sua qualificar;ao, na forma que a lei de-
terminar.
Art. 101. Os bens publicos dominicais
podem ser alienados, obscrvadas as
exigencias da lei.
Art. 102. Os bens publicos nao estao
sujeitos a usucapiao.
33 CODIGO CIVIL BrLINGUE
Art.103. O uso comum dos bens publi-
cos pode ser gratuito ou retribuido, con-
forme for estabelecido Iegalmente pela
entidade a cuja administra\;aO pertence-
rem.
Livro lli - Dos Fatos Juridicos
Titulo I- Do Negocio Juridico
Capitulo I - Disposi1;oes Gerais
Art.104. A validade do neg6cio jurfdi-
co requer:
I - agente capaz;
II - objeto Ifcito, possfvel, determinado
ou determinavel;
III - forma prescrita ou nao defesa em
lei.
Art. 105. A incapacidade relativa de
uma das partes nao pode ser invocada
pela outra em beneffcio pr6prio, nem
aproveita aos co-interessados capazes,
salvo se, neste caso, for indivisivel o
objeto do direito ou da obrigai,:ao co-
mum.
Art. 106. A impossibilidade inicial do
objeto nao invalida o neg6cio jurfdico
se for relativa, ou se cessar antes de rea-
lizada a condic;ao a que ele estiver su-
bordinado.
Art. 107. A validadc da declara~ao de
vontade nao dependera de forma espe-
cial, senao quando a lei expressamente
aexigir.
Art. 108. Nao dispondo a lei em contra-
e
rio, a escritura publica essencial a va-
lidade dos neg6cios jurfdicos que visem
a constitui\:iio, transferencia, modifica-
<;:ao ou renuncia de direitos reais sobre
im6veis de valor superior a trinta vezes
o maior salario minirno vigente no Pais.
Art. 103-108
Art. 103. Common use of public property
may be gratuitous or paid, as may be legally
determined by the entity having the
administration of the property.
Book III - Juridical Facts
Title I -Juridical Transactions
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 104. The requirements for the validity
of a juridical transaction are:
I - a capable agent;
II - a licit, possible and determined or
determinable object;
III - a form that is prescribed or not
prohibited by law.
Art. 105. The relative incapacity of one of
the parties cannot be invoked by the other
to his own benefit, and does not benefit
capable persons who share the relatively
incapable party's interest unless the object
of the common right or obligation is
indivisible.
Art. 106. The initial impossibility of the
object does not invalidate the juridical
transaction if the impossibility is relative or
if it ceases before fulfillment of the
condition to which the juridical transaction
is subordinated.
Art. 107. The validity of a declaration of
will does not depend on any special form,
unless the law expressly so requires.
Art.108. If the law does not otherwise
provide, a public writing is essential to the
validity of juridical transactions that are
intended to constitute, transfer, modify or
waive real rights in immovable property
having a value that is greater than thirty
times the highest minimum salary then in
effect in Brazil.
Art. 109-117 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 109. In juridical transactions
containing a clause that establishes that the
transaction shall not be valid without a
public instrument, the public instrument
forms part of the substance of the act.
Art. 110. An expression of will subsists
even if its author has, in his mind, made a
reservation to the effect that he does not
want what. he has expressed, unless the
recipient had knowledge of that
reservation.
Art.111. Silence implies consent, when the
circumstances or usage so authorize, and
there is no requirement for an express
declaration of will.
Art. 112. In declarations of will, more heed
shall be given to the intention revealed
through the declaration than to the literal
meaning of the language.
Art. 113. Juridical transactions shall be
interpreted in conformity with good faith
and the practice of the place in which they
are made.
Art. 114. Beneficent juridical transactions
and waivers are interpreted strictly.
Chapter II.- Representation
Art. 115. Powers of representation are
conferred by law or by the interested party.
Art. 116. Expressions of will by the
representative, made within the limits of his
powers, produce effects in relation to the
principal.
Art. 117. A juridical transaction entered
into by the representative with himself, in
his own interest or on behalf of another, is
voidable unless permitted by law or the
principal.
34
Art. 109. No neg6cio jurfdico celebra-
do com a ch'iusula de nao val er sem ins-
trumento publico, este e da substancia
do ato.
Art. 110. A manifestac;:ao de vontade
subsiste ainda que o seu autor haja feito
a reserva mental de nao querer o que
manifestou, salvo se dela o destinatario
tinha conhecimento.
Art. 111. O silencio importa anuencia,
quando as circunstiincias ou os usos o
autorizarem, e nao for necessaria a de-
clarac;:ao de vontade expressa.
Art. 112. Nas declarac;:oes de vontade
se atendera mais a intenc;:iio nelas con-
substanciada do que ao sentido literal
da linguagem.
Art.113. Os neg6cios jurfdicos devem
ser interpretados conforme a boa-fee os
usos do lugar de sua celebrac;:ao.
Art. 114. Os neg6cios jurfdicos benefi-
cos e a renuncia interpretam-se estrita-
mente.
Capitulo II - Da Representac;:ao
Art. 115. Os poderes de representm;ao
conferem-se por lei ou pelo interessa-
do.
Art. 116. A manifestac;:ao de vontade
pelo representante, nos limites de seus
poderes, produz efeitos em relm;ao ao
representado.
Art. 117. Salvo se o permitir a lei ou o
representado, eanulavel o neg6cio jurf·
dico que o representante, no seu inte-
resse ou por conta de outrem, celebrar
consigo niesmo.
35 CODIGO CIVIL BILINOUE
Paragrafo unico. Para esse efeito, tem-
se como celebrado pelo representante o
neg6cio realizado por aquele em quern
os poderes houvercm sido subestabele-
cidos.
Art. 118. 0 representante e obrigado a
provar as pessoas, com quern tratar em
nome do representado, a sua qualidade
e a extensao de seus poderes, sob pena
de, ni'io o fazendo, responder pelos atos
que a estes excederem.
Art.119. Eanulavel o neg6cio concluf-
do pelo representante em conflito de in-
teresses com o representado, se tal fato
era ou devia ser do conhecimento de
quern com aquele tratou.
Paragrafo unico. E de cento e oitenta
dias, a contar da conclusi'io do neg6cio
ou da cessa9ao da incapacidade, o pra-
zo de decadencia para pleitear-se a anu-
la~ao prevista neste artigo.
Art. 120. Os requisitos e os efeitos da
representac;:ao legal sao os estabeleci-
dos nas normas respectivas; os da re-
presentai;i'io voluntaria sao os da Parte
Especial deste C6digo.
Capitulo III - Da Condi~iio, do
Termo e do Encargo
Art. 121. Considera-se condi9ao a
clausula que, derivando exclusivamen-
te da vontade das partes, subordina o
efeito do neg6cio jurldico a evento fu-
turo e incerto.
Art. 122. Sao lfcitas, em geral, todas as
a a
condic;:oes nao contrarias lei, ordem
publica ou aos bons costumes; entre as
condi1.:oes defesas se incluem as que
privarem de todo efeito o negocio juri-
dico, ou o sujeitarem ao puro arbftrio de
uma das partes.
Art. 118-122
Sole paragraph. For the purposes of this
article, a transaction entered into by a
person to whom the powers have been
delegated is taken to have been entered into
by the representative.
Art. 118. The representative is obligated to
prove his capacity and the extent of his
powers to those with whom he deals in the
name of the principal, on pain of being
liable for the acts that exceed his powers if
he does not do so.
Art. 119. A transaction concluded by the
representative in conflict with the interests
of the principal is voidable if that fact was
known or ought to have been known to the
person with whom the representative dealt.
Sole paragraph. The peremptive period for
the claim for annulment contemplated in
this article is one hundred and eighty days
from conclusion of the transaction or
cessation of incapacity.
Art. 120. The requirements and effects of
legal representation are those established
under the relevant Jaw; those of voluntary
representation are those established in the
Special Part of this Code.
Chapter III - Conditions,
Terms and Charges
Art. 121. A clause that derives exclusively
from the will of the parties and that
subordinates the effect of a juridical
transaction to a future and uncertain event
is a condition.
Art. 122. In general, all conditions not
contrary to law, public order or good
conduct are licit; conditions that deprive a
juridical transaction of all effect or subject
it to the pure discretion of one of the parties
are included among prohibited conditions.
Art. 123-128 BILINGUAL CIVlL CODE
Art. 123. The following invalidate the
juridical transactions subject to them:
I - suspensive conditions that are
physically or legally impossible;
II - illicit conditions or conditions that
consist in the doing of something illicit;
III - incomprehensible or contradictory
conditions.
Art. 124. Resolutory conditions that are
impossible and conditions that consist of
not doing an impossible thing are deemed
not to exist.
Art. 125. If the efficacy of a juridical
transaction is subject to a suspensive
condition, the right contemplated by the
transaction is not acquired until the
condition is fulfilled.
Art.126. If someone disposes of something
subject to a suspensive condition and while
the condition is pending makes new
dispositions as to the thing, the new
dispositions shall be without effect once the
condition is folfilled, if they are
incompatible with it.
Art. 127. If a condition is resolutory, the
juridical transaction shall produce effects
for so long as the condition is not fulfilled;
the right established by the juridical
transaction may be exercised from the time
the tr;msaction was entered into.
Art. 128. If the resolutory condition is
fulfilled, the right that was subject to it is
extinguished for all effects; but if the
condition was attached to a transaction
requiring continuous or periodic
performance, the fulfillment of the
condition, saving provision to the contrary,
does not affect acts that have already been
performed, provided that such acts are
compatible with .the nature of the pending
condition and conform to the dictates of
good faith.
36
Art.123. Invalidam os neg6cios juridi-
cos que !hes sao subordinados:
I - as condi1;6es ffsica ou juridicamente
impossfveis, quando suspensivas;
II - as condil(iies ilfcitas, ou de fazer coi-
sa ilicita;
III - as condi\;t'ies incompreensfveis ou
contrad it6rias.
Art. 124. Tem-se por inexistentes as
condir;oes impossfveis, quando resolu-
tivas, e as de nao fazer coisa impossi-
vel.
Art. 125. Subordinando-se a eficacia
do neg6cio jurfdico a condi\;1iO suspen-
siva, enquanto esta se nao verificar, nao
se tera adquirido o direito, a que ele
visa.
Art. 126. Se alguem dispuser de uma
coisa sob condi\;1iO suspensiva, e, pen-
dente esta, fizer quanta aquela novas
disposii,;oes, estas nao tcrao valor, reali-
zada a condii;:ao, se com ela forem in-
compatfveis.
Art. 127. Se for resolutiva a condii,;ao,
enquanto esta se nuo realizar, vigorar:i o
neg6cio jurfdico, podendo exercer-se
desde a conclusao deste o direito por ele
estabelecido.
Art. 128. Sobrevindo a condi\;1iO reso-
ll1tiva, extingue-se, para todos os efei-
tos, o direito a que ela se opoe: mas, se
aposta a um neg6cio de execu\(1io conti-
nuada ou peri6dica, a sua realiza\(ao,
salvo disposi\:lio em contrario, nao tern
eficiicia quanta aos atos ja praticados,
desde que compatfveis com a nanireza
da condii,;ao pendente e conforme aos
ditames de boa-fe.
37 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGOE
Art. 129. Reputa-se verificada, quanto
aos efeitos juridicos, a contii\:i'io cujo
implemento for maliciosamente obsta-
do pela parte a quern dcsfavorecer, con-
siderando-se, ao contrario, nao verifi-
cada a condii;ao mal iciosamente levada
a efeito por aquele a quern aproveita o
seu implemento.
Art. 130. Ao titular do direito eventual,
nos casos de condi~ao suspensivaou re-
e
solutiva, permitido praticar OS atos
destinados a conserva-Jo.
Art. 131. 0 termo inicial suspende o
exercfcio, mas nao a aquisi\;1io do direi-
to.
Art. 132. Salvo disposii,;ao legal ou
convencional em contrario, computam-
se os prazos, excluido o dia do come\:o;
e inclufdo o do vencimento.
§I 0 Se o dia do vencimento cair em fe-
riado, considerar-se-a prorrogado o
prazo ate o seguinte <lia util.
§2° Meado considera-se, em qualquer
mes, 0 scu decimo quinto dia.
§3° Os prazos de meses e anos expiram
no dia de igual numero do de inicio, ou
no imediato, se faltar exata correspon-
dencia,
§4° Os prazos fixados por horn contar-
se-ao de minuto a minuto.
Art. 133. Nos testamentos, presume-se
o prazo em favor do herdeiro. e, nos
contratos, cm proveito do devedor, sal-
vo, quanto a esses, se do teor do instru-
mento, ou das circunstancias, resultar
que se estabeleceu a beneficio do cre-
dor, ou de ambos os contratantes.
Art. 129-133
Art. 129. A condition is deemed to have
been fulfilled, for all legal effects, when its
fulfillment is maliciously impeded by the
party it disadvantages; likewise, a
condition is deemed not to have been
fulfilled when it is maliciously
accomplished by the party who benefits by
its fulfillment.
Art. 130. The holder of a conditional right,
in cases of suspensive and resolutory
conditions, is permitted to perform acts
intended to preserve the right.
Art. 131. An initial term suspends the
exercise, but not the acquisition, of a right.
Art. 132. Unless otherwise provided for by
law or by contract, periods of time are
counted by excluding the day they
commence and including the day they
expire.
§ l. If the day of expiry falls on a holiday,
the time period is deemed to have been
extended to the following business day.
§2. The middle of any month is deemed to
be its 15th day.
§3. Time periods in months and years
expire on the day that has the same number
as the day on which the time period
commenced, or on the next following day,
if there is no day with the same number.
§4. Time periods fixed in hours are counted
minute by minute.
Art. 133. In testaments, a time period is
presumed to be in favor of the heir, and in
contracts, in favor of the debtor unless, in
the case of contracts, it follows from the
contents of the instrument or the
circumstances that the time period was
established to the benefit of the creditor or
of both the contracting parties.
Art. 134-139 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 134. Performance of inter vivos
juridical transactions without a term is
immediately enforceable, unless
performance is to be made in another place
or is dependent on time.
Art. 135. To the extent compatible, the
provisions relating to suspensive and
resolutory conditions apply to initial and
final terms.
1\.rt. 136. A charge does not suspend either
the acquisition or the exercise of a right,
unless it is expressly imposed on the
juridical transaction by the stipulating party
as a suspensive condition.
Art.137. An illicit or impossible charge is
deemed not to have been written, unless it
constitutes the determining motive for a
gift, in which case it invalidates the
juridical transaction.
Chapter IV - Defects of Juridical
Transactions
Section I - Mistake and Ignorance
Art. 138. Juridical transactions are
voidable when the declarations of will
emanate from a substantial mistake that
could have been perceived by a normally
diligent person, given the circumstances of
the transaction.
Art. 139. Mistake is substantial when:
I - it goes to the nature of the transaction,
the principal object of the declaration of
will or one of the essential qualities of that
object;
II - it concerns the identity or essential
quality of the person to whom the
declaration of will refers, if the mistake has
influenced the declaration of will in a
relevant way;
38
Art. 134. Os neg6cios jurfdicos entre
vivos, sem prazo, sao exeqilfveis desde
logo, salvo se a execm;.:ao tiver de ser
feita em lugar diverso ou depender de
tempo.
Art. 135. Ao termo inicial e final apli-
cam-se, no que couber, as disposii;:oes
a
relativas condiirao suspensiva e reso-
lutiva.
Art. 136. 0 encargo nao suspende a
aquisii;:ao nem o exercfcio do direito,
salvo quando expressamente imposto
no neg6cio jurfdico, pelo disponente,
como condii,;ao suspensiva.
Art. 137. Considera-se nao escrito o
encargo ilfcito ou impossfvel, salvo se
constituir o motivo determinante da li-
beralidade, caso em que se invalida o
neg6cio jurfdico.
Capitulo IV - Dos Defeitos do
Neg6cio Juridico
Sei;:ao I - Do Erro ou Ignorancia
Art.138. Sao anulaveis os neg6cios ju-
ridicos, quando as declara\:6es de von-
tade emanarem de erro substancial que
poderia ser percebido por pessoa de di-
ligencia normal, em face das circuns-
tlincias do neg6cio.
Art. 139. 0 erro esubstancial quando:
a
I - interessa natureza do neg6cio, ao
objeto principal da declarm;:ao, ou a al-
guma das qualidades a ele essenciais;
II - conceme a identidade OU a qualida-
de essencial da pessoa a quern se refira
a declarai;:ao de vontade, desde que te-
nha influfdo nesta de modo relevante;
39 CODIGO CIVlL BILiNGOE
III - sendo de direito e nao implicando
a
recusa aplicai;ao da lei, for o motivo
unico OU principal do neg6cio jurfdico.
Art. 140. 0 falso motivo s6 vicia a de-
clarm;:ao de vontade quando expresso
como razao determinante.
Art. 141. A transmissao erronea da
vontade por meios interpostos e anula-
vel nos mesmos casos em que o e a de-
clarm,;ao direta.
Art. 142. 0 erro de indicai;:ao da pessoa
ou da coisa, a que se referir a declarai;:ao
de vontade, nao viciara o neg6cio quan-
do, por seu contexto e pelas circunstan-
cias, se puder identificar a coisa ou pes-
soa cogitada.
Art. 143. 0 erro de calculo apenas au-
toriza a retificar;ao da declaras;ao de
vontade.
Art.144. 0 erro nao prejudica a valida-
de do neg6cio jurfdico quando a pessoa,
a quern a manifesta;;:ao de vontade se
dirige, se oferecer para executa-la na
conformidade da vontade real do mani-
festante.
Ser;ao II - Do Dolo
Art. 145. Sao os neg6cios jurfdicos
anulaveis pot dolo, quando este for a
suacausa.
Art. 146. 0 dolo acidental s6 obriga a Art. 146. Adventitious wrongful conduct
satisfagao das perdas e danos, e e aci-
dental quando, a seu despeito, o neg6-
cio seria realizado, embora por outro
modo.
Art. 140-146
III - it is the sole or principal motive for the
juridical transaction, if it is a mistake as to
the law but does not imply a refusal to apply
the law.
Art.140. A mistaken motive only vitiates a
declaration of will when it is expressly
stated as a determining reason for the
juridical transaction.
Art. 141. Mistaken transmission of will by
interposed means is voidable in the same
cases as direct declarations of will.
Art. 142. Mistake in the indication the
person or thing to which the declaration of
will refers does not vitiate the transaction
when the intended thing or person can be
identified from the context and the
circumstances.
Art.143. Mistake in calculation authorizes
only rectification of the declaration of will.
Art. 144. Mistake does not affect the
validity of the juridical transaction when
the person to whom the expression of will
was directed offers to perform the
transaction in conformity with the real will
of the declarant.
Section II - Wrongful Conduct
Art. 145. Juridical transactions are
voidable for wrongful conduct, when the
wrongful conduct was the cause of the
transaction.
gives rise only to the obligation to pay
losses and damages; wrongful conduct is
adventitious when the transaction would be
made despite it, although in another
manner.
Art. 147-152 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.147. In bilateral juridical transactions,
the intentional silence of one of the parties
with respectto a fact or quality of which the
other party is ignorant constitutes a
wrongful omission if it is proved that
without the omission the transaction would
not have been entered into.
Art.148. A juridical transaction can also be
annulled for a third party's wrongful
conduct, if the party advantaged by the
wrongful conduct knew or ought to have
known of it; otherwise, even though the
juridical transaction subsists, the third party
is liable for all the losses and damages of
the party whom he deceived.
Art.149. The wrongful conduct of the legal
representative of one of the parties only
makes the prineipal civilly liable for the
amount of the advantage that he 6btained;
if, however, the wrongful conduct was that
of a contractual representative, the
principal is solidarily liable with him for
losses and damages.
Art.150. If both the parties act wrongfully,
neither of them may allege the wrongful
conduct to annul the transaction or to claim
indemnification.
Section III - Coercion
Art. 151. In order to vitiate a declaration of
will, coercion must be such as to instill in
the victim a founded fear of immiiient and
considerable injury to his person, his family
or his property.
Sole paragraph. If the coercion relates to a
person who does not belong to the victim's
family, the judge shall decide if there was
coercion, based on the circumstances.
Art. 152. In appreciating the coercion, the
sex, age, condition, health and
temperament of the victim and all other
circumstances that might influence the
gravity of the coercion shall be taken into
account.
40
Art.147. Nos neg6cios jurfdicos bilme-
rais, o silencio intencional de uma das
partes a respeito de fato ou qualidade
que a outra parte haja ignorado, consti-
tui omissao dolosa, provando-se que
sem ela o neg6cio nao se teria celebra-
do.
Art. 148. Pode tambem ser anulado o
neg6cio jurfdico por dolo de tercciro, se
a parte a quern aproveite delc livcssc ou
devesse ter conhecimento; em caso
contrario, ainda que subsista o neg6cio
jurfdico. o terceiro respondeni por to-
das as perdas e danos da parte a quern
ludibriou.
Art.149. 0 dolo do representante legal
de uma das partes s6 obriga o repre-
sentado a responder civilmente ate a
importiincia do proveito que teve; se,
porem, o dolo for do representante con-
vencional, o representado responded
solidariamente com ele por perdas e da-
nos.
Art. 150. Se ambas as partes procede-
rem com dolo, nenhuma pode aleg<i-lo
para anular o neg6cio, ou reclamar in-
deniza~ao.
Se~ao III- Da Coa~ao
Art. 151. A coa~ao, para viciar a decla-
rm;:ao da vontade, ha de ser tal que incu-
ta ao paciente fundado temor de dano
iminente e consideravel a sua pessoa, a
sua famflia, ou aos scus hens.
Paragrafo unico. Se disser respeito a
pessoa nao pertencente afamflia do pa-
ciente, o juiz, com base nas circunstiin-
cias, decidira se houve coai;ao.
Art. 152. No apreciar a coai;ao, ter-se-
1io em conta o sexo, a idade, a condi~ao,
a saude, o temperamcnto do pacieme e
todas as demais circunstiincia~ que pos-
sam influir na gravidade dela.
41 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 153. Nao se considera com,;ao a
ame<l\;a do exercfcio normal de um di-
reito, nem o simples temor reverenciaL
Art. 154. Vicia o neg6cio juridico a
coac;ao exercida por terceiro, se dela ti-
vesse ou devesse ter conhecimento a
parte a que aproveite, e esta responded
solidariamente com aquele por perdus e
danos.
Art. 155. Subsistini o neg6cio jurfdico,
se a coa9ao decorrer de terceiro, sem
que a parte a que aproveite dela tivesse
ou devesse ter conhecimento: mas o au-
tor da coai;ao respondera por todas as
perdas e danos que houver causado ao
coacto.
Sei,;ao IV - Do Estado de Perigo
Art. 156. Configura-se o estado de pe-
rigo quando alguem, premido da neces-
sidade de salvar-se, ou a pessoa de sua
famflia, de grave dano conhecido pela
outra parte. assume obriga~ao excessi-
vamente onerosa.
Paragrafo unico. Tratando-se de pessoa
nao pertencente afamflia do declarante,
o juiz decidira segundo as circunstfm-
cia~.
Se~ao V - Da Lesao
Art. 157. Ocorre a lesao quando uma
pessoa, sob premente necessidade, ou
por inexperiencia, se obriga a presta~iio
manifestamente desproporcional ao va-
lor da prestai,;ao oposta.
§ l Aprecia-se a despropon;:ao das pres-
ta95es segundo os valorcs vigentes ao
tempo em que foi celebrado o neg6cio
juridico.
§2 Nao se decretara a anulai;iio do ne-
g6cio, se for oferecido suplemento sun-
ciente, ou se a parte favorecida concor-
dar com a redui;ao do proveito.
Art 153-157
Art. 153. Neither the threat of the normal
exercise of a right nor simple reverential
fear is considered to be coercion.
Art. 154. Coercion exercised by a third
party vitiates a juridical transaction, if the
coercion was known or ought to have been
known to the party whom it advantages,
and that party shall be solidarily liablewith
the third party for losses and damagef>.
Art. 155. If the coercion originates from a
third party, without the party whom it
advantages knowing or having any duty to
know of the coercion, the juridical
transaction will subsist; but the coercer will
be liable for all the losses and damages that
he causes to the victim.
Section IV - State of Peril
Art. 156. A state of peril exists when a
person, impressed with the need to save
himself or a person in his family from grave
injury known to the other party, assumes an
excessively onerous obligation.
Sole paragraph. If the state of peril
concerns a person who does not belong to
the declarant's family, the judge shall
decide according to the circumstances.
Section V - Lesion
Art. 157. Lesion occurs when a person, in
pressing need or through lack of
experience, assumes an obligation that is
manifestly disproportionate to the value of
its counterpart.
§ 1. The disproportion between the
obligations is determined at the values they
had at the time the juridical transaction was
entered into.
§2. The annulment of the transaction shall
not be declared if a sufficient supplement is
offered or if the favored party agrees to a
reduction of his advantage.
Art. 158-162 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Section VI - Fraud Against
Creditors
Art. 158. Transactions for the gratuitous
transmission of property or remission of
debt, if carried out by a debtor who is
already insolvent or is reduced to
insolvency by such transactions, even
though he is ignorant of the fact, may be
annulled by ordinary creditors, if their
rights are injured.
§ l. Creditors whose security becomes
insufficient have the same right.
§2. Only those who were creditors at the
time the acts were carried out may claim
their annulment.
Art. 159. The insolvent debtor's onerous
contracts are also voidable, if his
insolvency is notorious or if there is reason
for the other contracting party to have
known of it.
Art. 160~ If an acquiror of the insolvent
debtor's property has not yet paid its price
and the price is approximately the current
price, the acquiror may free himself of his
obligation by depositing the price into
court, with citation of all interested parties.
Sole paragraph. If the price is less, the
acquiror, t<;> keep the property, may deposit
the price that corresponds to its real value.
Art. 161. In the cases contemplated in arts.
158 and 159, action may be brought against
the insolvent debtor, the person with whom
he entered into the contract which is
considered to be fraudulent or third-party
acquirors who have acted in bad faith.
Art. 162. An ordinary creditor who
receives payment of a debt not yet due from
an insolvent debtor is obligated to restore
that which he received, to the benefit of the
mass for which the creditors will compete.
42
Sei;iio VI - Da Fraude Contra
Credo res
Art. 158. Os neg6cios de transmissao
gratuita de hens ou remissiio de divida,
se os praticar o devedor ja insolvente,
OU por eles reduzido ainsoJvencia, ain-
da quando o ignore, poderiio ser an.ula-
dos pelos credores quirografarios,
como lesivos dos seus direitos.
§ l Igual direito assiste aos credores
cuja garantia se tornar insuficiente.
§2 S6 os credores que ja o eram ao tem-
po daqueles atos podem pleitear a anu-
la\!iio deles.
Art. 159. Serao igualmente anulaveis
os contratos onerosos do devedor insol-
vente, quando a insolvencia for not6ria,
ou houver motivo para ser conhecida do
outro contratante.
Art. 160. Se o adquirente dos hens do
devedor insolvente ainda nao tiver pago
o pre1fo e este for, aproximadamente, o
corrente, desohrigar-se-a depositando-
o emjufzo, corn acita~ao de todos os in-
teressados.
Paragrafo unico. Se inferior, o adqui-
rente, para conservar os hens, podera
depositar o pre~o que lhes corresponda
ao valor real.
Art. 161. A a1fao, nos casos dos arts.
158 e 159, poderaser inteiltadacontrao
devedor insolvente, a pessoa que com
ele celehrou a estipula~ao considermla
fraudulenta, ou terceiros adquirentes
que hajam procedido de ma-fe.
Art. 162. 0 credor quirografario, que
receher do devedor insolvente o paga-
mento da dfvida ainda nao vencida, fi-
cara ohrigado a repor, em proveito do
acervo sabre que se tenha de efetuar o
concurso de credores, aquilo que rece-
heu.
43 COD!GO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 163. Presumem-se fraudat6rias
dos direitos dos outros credores as ga-
rantias de dividas que o devedor insol-
vente tiver dado a algum credor.
Art.164. Presumem-se, porem, de boa-
fe e valem os neg6cios ordinarios indis-
pensaveis a manutern;;ao de esrabeleci-
mento mercantil, rural, ou industrial, ou
asubsistcncia do devcdor e de sua famf-
lia.
Art. 165. Anulados os neg6cios frau-
dulentos, a vantagem resultante revcr-
tera em proveito do acervo sohre que se
tenha de efetuar o concurso de credo-
res.
Paragrafo unico. Se esses neg6cios ti-
nham por unico objeto atribuir direitos
preferenciais, mediante hipoteca, pe-
nhor ou anticrese, sua invalidade im-
portara somente na anula~ao da prefe-
rencia ajustada.
Capltulo V - Da Invalidade do
Ncgocio Juridico
Art. 166. E nulo o neg6cio jurfdico
quando:
I - celehrado por pessoa absolutamente
incapaz;
II for ilfcito, impossivel ou indetermi-
navel o seu ohjeto;
III - o motivo determinante, comurn a
amhas as partes, for ilfcito;
IV - niio revestir a forma prescrita em lei;
V - for pretedda alguma solenidai:le que
a lei considere essencial para a sua vali-
dade;
VI tiver por ohjetivo fraudar lei impe-
rativa;
VII - a lei taxativamente o declarar
nulo, ou. proihir-lhe a pratica, sem co-
minar san.,ao.
Art. 163-166
Art. 163. Security for debts given by an
insolvent debtor to one creditor is
presumed to defraud the other creditors'
rights.
Art. 164. However, ordinary transactions
that are indispensable to the maintenance of
a commercial, rural or industrial
establishment or to the subsistence of the
debtor or his family are presumed to be in
good faith and are valid.
Art. 165. Upon annulment of fraudulent
transactions, the resulting advantage shall
revert to the mass for which the creditors
will compete.
Sole paragraph. If the sole object of the
transactions was to attribute preferential
rights, through hypothec, pledge or
antichresis, their invalidity shall bring
about only the annulment of the agreed
preference.
Chapter V - Invalidity of Juridical
Transactions ·
Art. 166. A juridical transaction is null
when:
I - it is entered into by an absolutely
incapable person;
II - its object is illicit, impossible or cannot
be determined;
III - the common determining motive of
both parties is illicit;
IV - it is not made in the form prescribed by
law;
V - a solemnity that the law considers
essential to its validity is omitted;
VI - its purpose is to defraud imperative
law;
VII - the law expressly declares it to be null
or prohibits the transaction, without
imposing any sanction.
Art. 167-170 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.167. A simulated juridical transaction
is null, but what was disguised will subsist
if it is valid in substance and in form.
§ 1. There is simulation in juridical
transactions when:
I - they appear to confer or transmit rights
to persons other than those to whom the
rights are really conferred or transmitted;
II - they contain a declaration, confession,
condition or clause that is untrue;
III - private instruments are predated or
postdated.
§2. The rights of good faith third parties in
relation to the contracting parties to a
simulated juridical transaction are
safeguarded.
Art. 168. The nullities referred to in the
preceding articles may be alleged by any
interested party, or by the Public Ministry,
when it has the power or duty to intervene.
Sole paragraph. The nullities must be
pronounced by the judge when he has
cognizance of the juridical transaction or of
its effects and finds that the nullities are
proved. The judge is not permitted to cure
the nullities, even at the request of the
parties.
Art. 169. A null juridical transaction is not
susceptible of confirmation and is not cured
by the passage of time.
Art. 170. If, however, the null juridical
transaction contains the requirements of
another, the other transaction will subsist if
the purpose contemplated by the parties
permits the supposition that they would
have so intended, if they had foreseen the
nullity.
44
Art. 167. Enulo o neg6cio jurfdico si-
mulado, mas subsistira o que se dissi-
mulou, se valido for na substlincia e na
forma.
§ I 0 Havera simulai;:ao nos neg6cios ju-
rfdicos quando:
I - aparentarem conferir ou transmitir
direitos a pessoas diversas daquelas as
quais realmente se conferem, ou trans-
mitem;
II - contiverem declarai;:ao, confissao,
condii;:ii.o ou clausula nii.o verdadeira;
III - os instrumentos particulares forem
antedatados, ou p6s-datados.
§2° Ressalvam-se os direitos de tercei-
ros de boa-fe em face dos contraentes
do neg6cio jurfdico simulado.
Art.168. As nulidades dos artigos ante-
cedentes podem ser alegadas por qual-
quer interessado, ou pelo Ministerio
PUblico, quando !be couber intervir.
Paragrafo t'.inico. As nulidades devem
ser pronunciadas pelo juiz, quando co-
nhecer do neg6cio jurfdico ou dos seus
efeitos e as encontrar provadas, nao lhe
sendo permitido supri-las, ainda que a
requerimento das partes.
Art.169. 0 neg6cio jurfdico nulo nao e
suscetfvel de confirmai;:ii.o, nem conva-
lesce pelo decurso do tempo.
Art. 170. Se, porem, o negocio jurfdico
nulo contiver os requisitos de outro,
subsistira este quandooo fim a que visa-
vam as partes permitir supor que o te-
riam querido, se houvessem previsto a
nulidade.
45 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 171. Alem dos casos expressa-
mente declarados na lei, e anulavcl o
neg6cio jurfdico:
I - por incapacidade relativa do agente;
II - por vfcio resultante de e1m, dolo,
coa\,'.ao, estado de perigo, lesao ou frau-
de contra credores.
Art. 172. O negocio anulavel pode scr
confirma<lo pelas partes. salvo dircito
de terceiro.
Art. 173. 0 aro de confirmai;:ao devc
canter a substlincia do neg6cio celebra-
do ea vontade expressa de mante-lo.
Art.174. E escusada a confirmagao ex-
pressa, quando o neg6cio ja foi cumpri-
do em parte pelo devedor, cienle do vf-
cio que o inquinava.
Art. 175. A confirmai;ao expressa, ou a
execw,;ao voluntiiria de negocio anula-
vel, nos termos dos arts. 172 a 174, im-
port a a extini;:ao de todas as ai;:oes, ou
excei;oes, de que contra ele dispusesse
o devcdor.
Art. 176. Quando a anulabilidade do
ato resultar da falta de autorizm;:ao de
terceiro, sera validado se este a der pos-
tcriormente.
Art. 177. A anulabilidade nao tern efei-
to.antes de julgada porsemeni;a, ncm se
pronuncia de offcio; so os interessados
a podem alegar, e aproveita exclusiva-
mente aos que a alegarem, salvo o caso
de solidariedade ou indivisibilidade.
Art.178. Ede quatro anos o prazo de
decadencia para pleitear-se a anulai;ao
do neg6cio jurfdico, contado:
I - no caso de coai;ao, do dia em que ela
cessar;
Art. 171-178
Art.171. In addition to the cases expressly
provided for by law, a juridical transaction
is voidable:
I - by reason of the relative incapacity of
the agent;
II - by reason of defect resulting from
mistake, wrongful conduct, coercion, state
of peril, lesion or fraud against creditors.
Art. 172. A voidable transaction may be
confirmed by the parties, saving the rights
of third parties.
Art. 173. The act of confirmation must
contain the substance of the transaction
entered into and an express declaration of
the will to maintain it.
Art. 174. Express confirmation is
dispensed with when the transaction has
already been performed in part by the
debtor, knowing of the defect that taints it.
Art. 175. Express confirmation or
voluntary performance of a voidable
transaction, within the terms of arts. 172 to
174, brings about the extinguishment of all
actions and exceptions that the debtor had
on or against it.
Art. 176. When the voidability of the act
results from the absence of authorization by
a third party, the act shall be valid if
authorization is given later.
Art. 177. Voidability has no effect before it
is declared by judgment and is not
pronounced ex officio; only the interested
parties may allege it and it benefits
exclusively those who allege it, except in
cases of solidarity or indivisibility.
Art.178; The peremptive period for a claim
for annulment of a juridical transaction is
four years from:
I- in the case of coercion, the day on which
it ceases;

Art. 179-184 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - in the case of mistake, wrongful
conduct, fraud against creditors, state of
peril or lesion, the day on which the
transaction was made;
III - in the case of acts by incapable
persons, the day on which the incapacity
ceases.
Art. 179. When tlie law provides that a
given act is voidable, without establishing
the period of time within which annulment
must be claimed, the time period shall be
two years from the date on which the act
was concluded.
Art. 180. A minor between sixteen and
eighteen years of age cannot invoke his age
to exempt himself from an obligation if he
wrongfully concealed his age when the
other party inquired or if, in the act of
assuming the obligation, he declared
himself to be a major.
Art. 181. No one may claim that which he
paid to an incapable person by reason of an
annulled obligation unless he proves that
the amount paid profited the incapable
person.
Art. 182. Upon annulment of a juridical
transaction, the p11rties shall be restored to
the state in which they found themselves
prior to the transaction; if it is impossible to
restore them to that. state, they shall be
indernnified by payment of the equivalent.
Art. 183. The invalidity of an instrument
does not cause the juridical transaction to
be invalid if the transaction can be proved
by some other means.
Art 184. Provided that the intention of the
parties is respected, partial invalidity of a
juridical transaction does not affect the
valid part, if it can be separated; the
!nvalidity of the principal obligation results
m that of the accessory obligations, but the
invalidity of the accessory obligations does
not result in that of the principal obligation.
46
II - no de erro, do lo, fraude contra cre-
dores, estado de perigo ou lesiio, do dia
em que se realizou o neg6cio jurfdico;
III - no de atos de incapazes, do dia cm
que cessar a incapacidade.
Art. 179. Quando a lei dispuser que de-
terminado ato eanulavel, sem estabele-
cer prazo para pleitear-se a anulai;:iio,
sera este de dois anos, a contar da data
da conclusiio do ato.
Art. 180. 0 menor, entre dezesseis e
dezoito anos, nao pode, para eximir-se
de uma obrigar;ao, invocar a sua idade
se dolosamente a ocultou quando inqui-
rido pela outra parte, ou se, no ato de
obrigar-se, declarou-se maior.
Art. 181. Ninguem pode reclamar o
que, por uma obrigar;ao anulada, pagou
a um incapaz, se nao provar que rever-
teu em proveito dele a importancia
paga.
Art. 182. Ailulado o neg6cio jurfdico,
restituir-se-iio as partes ao estado em
que antes dele se achavam, e, niio sendo
possfvel restitui-las, seriio indenizadas
com o equivalente.
Art. 183. A invalidade do instrumento
nao induz a do neg6cio juridico sempre
que este puder provar-se por outro
meio.
Art. 184. Respeitada a intenyiio das
partes, a invalidade parcial de um neg6-
cio jurfdico nao o prejudicara na parte
vfilida, se esta for separavel; a invalida-
de da obrigayiio principal implica a das
obrigayoes acess6rias, mas a destas niio
induz a da obrigayiid principal.
47 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Titulo II- Dos Atos Juridicos
Llcitos
Art.185. Aos atos jurfdicos lfcitos, que
nao sejam neg6cios jurfdicos, aplicam-
se, no que couber, as disposi\:iies do Ti-
tulo anterior.
Titulo ill - Dos Atos Ilicitos
Art. 186. Aquele que, por ayiio ou
omissiio voluntaria, negligencia ou im-
prudehcia, violar direito e causar dano a
outrem, ainda que exclusivamente mo-
ral, comete ato ilfcito.
Art.187. Tambem comete ato ilfcito o
titular de um direito que, ao exerce-lo,
excede manifestamente os limites im-
postos pelo seu fim economico ou so-
cial, pela boa-fe ou pelos hons costu-
mes.
Art.188. Nao constituem atos ilfcitos:
I - os praticados em legftima defesa ou
no exercicio regular de um direito reco-
nhecido;
II - a deteriorayiio ou destrui\:iio da coi-
sa alheia, ou a lesao a pessoa, a fim de
remover perigo iminente.
Titulo IV - Da l'rescri~ao e da
Decadencia
Capituio I - Da l'rescrirrao
Se~iio I- Disposi~oes Gerais
Art. 189. Violado o direito, nasce para
o titular a pretensiio, a qua! se extingue,
pela prescri~ao, nos prazos a que alu-
dem os arts. 205 e 206.
Art. 190. A excer;ao prescreve no mes-
mo prazo em que a pretensiio.
Art. 185-190
Title II - Licit Juridical
Acts
Art. 185. J'o the extent compatible, the
provisions of the preceding Title apply to
licit juridical acts that are not juridical
transactions.
Title III - Illicit Acts
Art.186. A person who, by voluntary act or
omission, negligence or imprudence,
violates rights and causes damage to
another, even though the damage is
exclusively moral, commits an illicit act.
Art.187. The holder of a right also
commits an illicit act if, in exercising it, he
manifestly exceeds the limits imposed by
its economic or social .purpose, by good
faith or by good conduct.
Art. 188. The following do not constitute
illicit acts:
I - acts performed in legitimate defense or
in the lawful exercise of a recognized right;
II - the deterioration or destruction of
another's property, or injury to persons, in
order to remove an imminent danger.
Title IV - Prescription and Peremption
Chapter I - Prescription
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 189. The violation of a right creates a
claim in the holder of the right, which is
extinguished by prescription, on expiry of
the time periods referred to in arts. 205 and
206.
Art. 190. Exceptions prescribe in the same
period of time as the claim.
Art. 191-198 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 191. Waiver of prescription may be
express or tacit and is valid, without
prejudice to third parties, only if done after
prescription has accrued; tacit waiver is
that which is presumed from acts by the
interested party that are incompatible with
prescription.
Art. 192. Prescriptive petibds may not be
altered by agreement of the parties.
Art. 193. Prescription may be alleged at
any level of jurisdiction by the party whom
it benefits.
Art. 194. The judge may not supply, ex
officio, an allegation of prescription, e~cept
in favor of a person who is absolutely
incapable.
Art. 195. Relatively incapable persons and
legal persons have an action against their
assistants or legal representatives who give
cause for prescription to occur or who do
not allege it opportunely.
Art. 196, Prescription that commences
againstone person continues to run against
his successor.
Section II - Causes that Impede or
Suspend Prescription
Art. 197. Prescription does not run:
I-between spouses, while conjugal society
exists;
II - between ascendants and descendents,
while parental authority exists;
III - between pupils or wards and their
tutors or curators, during the tutorship or
curatorship.
Art. 198. Prescription also does not run:
I - against the incapable persons referred to
in art. 3;
48
Art. 191. A renuncia da prescri<;ao
pode ser expressa ou tacita, e s6 valera.
sendo feita, sem prejufzo de terceiro,
depois que a prescrii;;ao se consumar;
tacita e a rem1ncia quando se presume
de fatos do interessado, incompatfveis
com a prescrii;;ao.
Art. 192. Os prazos de prescrir;ao nao
podem ser alterados por acordo das par-
tes.
Art.193. A prescrii;;ao pode ser alegada
em qualquer grau de jurisdii;;lio, pela
parte a quern aproveita.
Art.194. 0 juiz nao pode suprir, de ofi-
cio, a alegai;;iio de prescrii;ao, salvo se
favorecer a absolutamente incapaz.
Art. 195. Os relativamente incapazes e
as pessoas jurfdicas tern ai;;ao contra os
seus assistentes ou representantcs le-
gais, que derem causa a prescri~ao, OU
nao a alegarem oportunamente.
Art. 196. A prescrigao iniciada contra
uma pessoa continua a correr contra o
seu sucessor.
Sei;lio II - Das Causas que
Impedem ou Suspendem a
Prescrii;Jio
Art. 197. Nao corre a prescrii;;ao:
I - entre os conjuges, na constancia da
sociedade conjugal;
II - entre ascendentes e descendentes,
durante o poder familiar;
III - entre tutelados ou curatelados e
seus tutores ou curadores, durante a tu-
tela ou curatela.
Art. 198. Tambem nao corre a prescri-
i;;ao:
I - contra os incapazes de que trata o art.
3";
49 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
II - contra os ausentes do Pals em servi-
90 pt1blico da Uniao, dos Estados ou
dos Municfpios;
III - contra os que se acharem servindo
nas Forgas Armadas, em tempo de
guerra.
Art. 199. Nao corre igualmente a pres-
crii;;ao:
I - pendendo condi\:aO suspensiva;
II - nao estando vencido o prazo;
III - pendendo agao de eviq:ao.
Art. 200. Quando a ai;;ao se originar de
fato que deva ser apurado no jufzo cri-
minal, nao correra a prescrii;:ao antes da
respectiva sente1wa definitiva.
Art. 201. Suspensa a prescrii;;ao em fa-
vor de um dos credores solidarios, s6
aproveitam os outros se a obrigm,:ao for
indivisfvel.
Se1;iio III -Das Causas <1ue
Interrompem a Prescrii;:iio
Art. 202. A interrup((ao da prescrii;;ao,
que somente podera ocorrer uma vez,
dar-se-a:
I - por despacho do juiz, mesmo incom-
petente, que ordenar a citai;:ao, se o inte-
ressado a promover no prazo e na forma
da lei processual ;,
II - por protesto, nas condigoes do inci-
so antecedente;
III - por protesto cambial:
IV - pela apresentai;;ao do tftulo de cre-
dito em jufzo de inventario ou em con-
curso de credores;
Art. 199-202
II - against persons absent from Brazil in
the public service of the Union, the States
or the Municipalities;
III - against those who find themselves
serving in the Armed Forces, in time of war.
Art. 199. Likewise, prescription does not
run:
I - while a suspensive condition is pending;
II - before the relevant period of time has
expired;
III - while an action for eviction is pending.
Art. 200. When an action originates in an
event that should be determined in the
criminal courts, prescription does not run
before final judgment by the criminal
courts.
Art. 201. If prescription is suspended in
favor of one solidary creditor, the others
benefit from the suspension only if the
obligation is indivisible.
Section III - Causes that Interrupt
Prescription
Art. 202. Prescription is interrupted; once
only:
I- by a judge's order for citation, even ifthe
judge does not have jurisdiction, if the
interested party caused citation to occur
within the time period and in the form
required under procedural law;
II - by protest, in the circumstances
described in the preceding item;
III - by protest on a bill of exchange;
IV - by presentment of a debt instrument in
judicial inventory proceedings or in a
concourse of creditors;
Art. 203-206 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
V - by any judicial act that puts the debtor
into default;
VI - by any unequivocal act, even if
extrajudicial, that implies acknowledgement
of the right by the debtor.
Art. 203. Prescription may be interrupted
by any interested party.
Art. 204. Interruption of prescription by
one creditor does not benefit the others;
likewise, interruption effected against a
co-debtor, or his heir, does not operate
against the other co-obligees.
§ 1. Interruption by one solidary creditor
benefits the others; and interruption
effected against one solidary debtor
extends to the other debtors and their heirs.
§2. Interruption effected against one of the
heirs of a solidary debtor does not operate
against the other heirs or.debtors, except
with respect to indivisible rights and
obligations.
§ 3. Interruption effected against the
principal debtor operates against the
guarantor.
Section IV - Prescriptive Periods
Art. 205. Prescription occurs in ten years,
unless the law has fixed a lesser period.
Art. 206. The following are subject to
prescription:
§ L In one year:
I - claims by innkeepers or suppliers of
victuals for consumption in the
establishment in which they were supplied,
for payment of accommodation or food and
drink;
50
V - por qualquer ato judicial que cons-
titua em mora o devedor;
VI - por qualquer ato incqufvoco, ainda
que extrajudicial, que importe reconhe-
cimento do direito pelo devedor.
Art 203. A prescrii;:iio pode ser inter-
rompida por qualquer interessado.
Art. 204. A interrupl(iio da prescrii;iio
por um credor nao aproveita aos outros;
semelhantemente, a interrupi;:ao opera-
da contra o co-devedor, ou seu herdei-
ro, nao prejudica aos demais coobriga-
dos.
§ l A interrupi;:ao por um dos credores
0 res da justh;:a, serventuarios judiciais.
solidarios aproveita aos outros; assim
como a interrupi;:ao efetuada contra o
devedor solidario envolve os demais e
seus herdeiros.
§ 2° A interrupi,:ao operada contra um
dos herdeiros do devedor solidario nilo
prejudica os outros herdeiros ou deve-
dores, senao quando se trate de obriga-
i;oes e direitos indivisfveis.
§ 3° A interrupi,:ilo produzida contra o
principal devedor prejudica o fiador.
Sei,;iio IV - Dos Prazos da Prescrii,;ao
Art. 205. A prescrii,;ao ocorre em dez
anos. quando a lei niio !he haja fixado
prazo menor.
Art. 206. Prescreve:
§ 1° Em um ano:
I - a pretensao dos hospedeiros ou for-
necedores de vfveres destinados a con-
sumo no pr6prio estabelecimento, para
o pagamento da hospedagem ou dos ali-
mentos;
51 CODIGO CIVIL BlLINGUE
II - a pretensao do segurado contra o se-
gurador, ou a desre contra aquele, con-
rado o prazo:
a) para o segurado, no caso de seguro de
responsabilidadc civil, da data em que e
citado para responder aa1.:ao de indcni-
za9ao proposta pelo terceiro prejudica-
do, ou da data que a cste indeniza, com
a anuencia do segurador;
b) quanto aos demais seguros, da cien-
cia do fato gcrador da pretensao;
III - a pretensao dos tabeliaes, auxilia-
arbitros e peritos, pela percepi,:ao de
emolumentos. custas e honorarios;
IV - a pretensao contra os pcritos, pela
avalim;ao dos bens que entraram para a
forma9ao do capital de sociedade ano-
nima, contado da publicm;ao da ata da
assembleia que aprovar o laudo;
V - a pretensao dos credores nao pagos
contra os s6cios ou acionistas cos liqui-
d antes, contado o prazo da publica~ao
da ata de encernunento da liquidar;ao da
sociedadc.
§ 2° Em do is anos, a pretensi.io para ha-
ver presta~oes alimentares, a partir da
data em que sc vcncerem.
§ 3° Em tres anos:
I - a pretensao relativa a alugueis de
predios urbanos ou n1sticos;
II - a pretensao para receber prestai;iies
vencidas de rendas temporarias ou vita-
Hcias;
III - a pretensao para haver juros, divi-
dendos ou quaisquer prestar;oes acess6-
rias, pagaveis, cm perfodos nao maiores
de um ano, com capitalizagao ou sem
ela;
Art. 206
II - claims by insureds against insurers, or
by insurers against insureds, counted:
a) for the insured, in the case of insurance
for civil liability, from the date on which he
is cited to answer an action for
indemnification brought by an injured third
party or the date on which he indemnifies
such third party, with the consent of the
insurer;
b) for other types of insurance, from
knowledge of the event giving rise to the
claim;
III - claims by notaries, court officials,
court servants, arbiters and experts, for
payment of emoluments, costs and fees;
IV - claims against experts for t11eir
evaluation of assets that were used to form
the capital of a corporation, counted from
the date of publication of the minutes of the
assembly that approved the expert report;
V claims by unpaid creditors against
partners or shareholders and liquidators,
counted from the date of publication of the
minutes recording the conclusion of the
company's liquidation.
§2. In two years, claims for payment of
alimentary obligations, counted from the
date on which payment was due.
§3. In three years:
I - claims for rent of urban or rural
immovable properties;
II - claims for overdue payment of
temporary or life incomes;
III - claims for payment of interest,
dividends or any accessory payment
payable at intervals not greater than one
year, compounded or not;
Art. 206 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
IV - claims for restitution for unjust
enrichment;
V - claims for reparation under the civil
law;
VI - claims for recovery of profits or
dividends received in bad faith, with the
time period running from the date on which
the distribution was approved by
resolution;
VII - claims against the following persons
for violation of a law or corporate statute,
with the time period being counted:
a) against founders, from publication of the
constituting acts of the corporation;
b) against administrators or members of the
fiscnl council, from presentation to the
members of the company of the balance
sheet for the year in which the violation
occurred or from the meeting or general
assembly at which the violation ought to
have become known;
c) against liquidators, from the first
half-yearly assembly subsequent to the
violation;
VIII - claims for payment of a debt
instrument, counted from the maturity date,
subject to the provisions of special
legislation;
IX - claims by beneficiaries against
insurers, or by injured third parties, in the
case of mandatory civil liability insurance.
§4. In four years, claims respecting
tutorship, counted from the date the
accounts were approved.
§5. In five years:
I - claims for collection of liquid debts set
out in public or private instruments;
52
IV - a pretensao de ressarcimento de en-
riquecimento sem causa;
V - a pretensao de repara\!fio civil;
VI - a pretensao de restitui\!UO dos lu-
cros ou dividendos recebidos de riui-te,
correndo o prazo da data em que foi de-
liberada a distribui9ao;
VII - a pretensao contra as pessoas em
seguida indicadas por viola9ao da lei ou
do estatuto, contado o prazo:
a) para os fundadores, da publicai;iio
dos atos constitutivos da sociedade
anonima;
b) para os administradores, ou fiscais,
da apresenta1;ao, aos s6cios, do balani;o
referente ao exercfcio em que a viola-
\:UO tenha sido praticada, ou da reuniao
ou assembleia geral que dela deva to-
mar conhecimento;
c) para os liquidantes, da primeira as-
a
sembleia semestral posterior viola-
1;ao;
Vlll - a pretensao para haver o paga-
mento de tftulo de credito, a contar do.
vencimento, ressalvadas as disposi1;oes
de lei especial;
IX - a pretensao do beneficiario contra
o segurador, e a do terceiro prejudica~
do, no caso de seguro de responsabiliJ
dade civil obrigat6rio.
§ 4° Em quatro anos, a pretensiio relati-'
va atutela, a contar da data da
r;ao das contas.
§ 5° Em cinco anos:
I - a pretensao de cobranr;a de dfvidas li-
quid as constantes de instrumento piibli-
co ou particular;
53 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
II - a pretensao dos profissionais libe-
rais em geral, procuradores judiciais,
curadores e professores pelos seus ho-
norarios, eontado o prazo da conclusiio
dos servii,;os, da cessai,;ao dos respecti-
vos contratos ou mandato;
Ill - a pretensao do vencedor para haver
do vencido o que despendeu emjuizo.
Capftulo Il - Da Decadencia
Art. 207. Salvo disposir;ao legal em
contrario, nao se aplicam a decadencia
as normas que impedem, suspendem ou
interrompem a prescri~ao.
Art. 208. Aplica-se adecadencia o dis-
posto nos arts. 195 e l 98, inciso I.
Art. 209. E nula a reniincia adecaden-
cia fixada em lei.
Art. 210. Deve o juiz, de oficio, conhe-
ccr da decadencia, quando cstabclecida
porlei.
Art. 211. Se a decadencia for conven-
cional, a parte a quern aproveita pode
alegii-la em qualquer grau de jurisdi-
~ao, mas o juiz nao pode suprir a alega-
<;iio.
Titulo V - Da Prov a
Art. 212. Salvo o neg6cio a que se im-
poe forma especial, o fato juridico pode
..
;,:
'
ser provado mediante:
'!_
I - confissiio;
II - documento;
Ill - tcstemunha;
IV - presum;ao;
V - perfcia.
Art. 213. Nao tem cficacia a confissiio
se provem de quern nao e capaz de dis-
por do direito a que se referem os fatos
confessados.
Art. 207-213
II - claims by members of the liberal
professions in general, attorneys-at-law,
curators and teachers for their honoraria,
counted from the conclusion of the services
or cessation of their contract or mandate;
Ill - claims by successful parties against
the losing parties for legal expenses.
Chapter II - Peremption
Art. 207. Unless otherwise provided for by
law, the rules that prevent, suspend or
interrupt prescription do not apply to
peremptiOn.
Art. 208. The provisions of arts. 195 and
198 (I) apply to peremption.
Art. 209. Waiver of peremption fixed by
law is null.
Art. 210. The judge shall take cognizance
of peremption ex officio when it is
established by law.
Art. 211. If peremption is established by
agreement, the party whom it benefits may
allege it at any level of jurisdiction, but the
judge may not supply the allegation.
Title V - Proof
Art. 212. Save for transactions on which a
special form is imposed, a juridical fact
may be proved by:
I - confession;
II - documents;
III - witnesses;
IV - presumption;
V - expert evidence.
Art. 213. A confession by a person who
does not have the capacity to dispose of the
right to which the confessed facts refer has
no effect.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 214-215
Sole paragraph. If a confession is mad~ ~y
a representative, it is effective only w1thm
the limits of the representative's power to
bind the principal.
Art. 214. A confession is irrevocable but it
may be annulled if it resulted from mistake
of fact or coercion.
Art. 215. A public writing, drawn up in the
books of a notary, is an authentic document
and makes full proof.
§ 1. Unless the Jaw imposes other
requirements, a public writing must
contain:
I- the date and place at which it was made;
II -certification of the identity and capacity
of the parties and of the number of persons
present for the execution of the act, i~ their
own behalf or as representatives,
intervening parties or witnesses;
III - the name, nationality, civil status,
profession, domicile and residence of the
parties and the other pers?ns pre.sen~ fo~ the
execution of the act, with an md1cat10n,
when necessary, of their matrimonial
regime, their spouse and their filiation;
IV - a clear declaration of the .will of the
parties and of the intervening parties;.
V - reference to compliance with the legal
and tax requirements inherent to the
legitimacy of the act;
VI - a declaration that the writing was read
in the presence of the parties and other
persons present, or that all read it;
VII - the signature of the parties and of the
other persons present for the execution of
the act, together with the signature of the
notary or his legal substitute, concluding
the act.
54
Pariigrafo fmico. Se feita a confissao
por um representante, somente eeficaz
nos limites em que este pode vincular o
representado.
Art. 214. A confissao e irrevogavel,
mas pode ser anulada se decorreu de
erro de fato ou de coai;:ao.
Art. 215. A escritura pt1hlica, lavrada
em notas de tabeliao, e documento do-
tado de fe pt1hlica, fazendo prova plena.
§ 1° Salvo quando exigidos por lei ou-
tros requisitos, a escritura pt1hlica deve
conter:
I - data e local de sua realiza<;:ao;
II - reconhecimento da identidade e ca-
pacidade das partes e de quantos hajam
comparecido ao ato, por si, como repre-
sentantes, intervenientes ou testemu-
nhas;
III - nome, nacionalidade, estado civil,
profissao, domicflio e residencia das
partes e demais comparecentes, com a
indica9iio. quando necessario, do regi-
me de hens do casamento, nome do ou-
tro conjuge e filia9ao;
IV - manifestai;:ao clara da vontade das
partes e dos intervenientes;
V - referenda ao cumprimento das cxi-
gencias legais e fiscais inerentes alegi-
timidade do ato;
VI - declara9ao de ter sido Iida na pre-
senc;a das partes e demais comparecen-
tes, ou de que todos a leram:
VII - assinatura das partes e dos demais
comparecentes, hem como a do tabeliao
ou sen substituto legal, encerrando o
ato.
55 CODIGO CIVIL BJLlNGUE
§2° Se algum comparecente nao pudcr
ou nilo souber escrever, outra pessoa
capaz assinara por ele, a seu rogo.
§3° A escrirura sera redigida na lfngua
nacional.
§4° Se qualquer dos comparccentes niio
souber a lingua nacional e o taheliao
niio entender o idioma em que se cx-
pressa, devera comparecer tradutor pt1-
hlico paraservirde intcrprete, ou, niio o
havendo na localidade, outra pessoa ca-
paz que, a jufzo do taheliiio, tenha ido-
neidade e conhecimento hastantes.
§5° Se algum dos comparecentes niio
for conhecido do tabeliao, nem puder
identificar-se por documento, deveri.io
participar do ato pelo menos duas teste-
munhas que o conhe\:am e atestem sua
identidade.
Art. 216. Farao a mesma prova que os
originais as certid5es textuais de qual-
quer pei;:ajudicial, do protocolo das au-
diencias, ou de outro qualquer livro a
cargo do escrivi.io, sendo extrafdas por
ele, ou sob a sua vigilancia, e por ele
subscritas, assim como os traslados de
autos, quando por outro escrivao con-
sertados.
Art. 217. Terao a mesma for~a prohan-
te os traslados e a~ certidoes, extrafdos
por taheliiio ou oficial de registro, de
instmmentos ou documentos lani;ados
em suas notas.
Art. 218. Os traslados e as certidoes
considerar-se-ao instrumentos pt1hli-
cos, se os originais se houverem produ-
zido emju{zo como prova de algum ato.
Art. 216-218
§2. If a person present for the execution of
the act cannot or docs not know how to
write, another capable person may sign for
him, at his request.
§3. The writing shall be drawn up in the
national language.
§4. If any of the persons present for the
execution of the act does not know the
national language and the notary does not
understand the language that the person
speaks, a public translator shall be present
to serve as an interpreter, or, if there is none
in the locality, another capable person who,
in the notary's judgment, is sufficiently fit
and knowledgeable to so serve.
§5. If a person present for the execution of
the act is not known to the notary, and
cannot identify himself with documents, at
least two witnesses who know the person
and attest to his identity must take part in
the execution of the act.
Art. 216. Certified copies of the text of any
procedural document in judicial
proceedings, of the record of hearings or of
any other book in the charge of the clerk of
the court shall make the same proof as the
original, if such copies are extracted by
him, or under his supervision, and signed
by him; so do transcriptions of the record of
judicial proceedings, if verified against the
original by another clerk.
Art. 217. Transcriptions and certificates,
extracted by a notary or registry official, of
instruments or documents drawn up in their
books shall have the same probative force.
Art. 218. Transcriptions and certificates
shall be considered to be public instruments
ifthe originals have been produced in court
as evidence of some act.
Art 219-223 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 219. Declarations contained in signed
documents are presumed to be true with
respect to the signatories.
Sole paragraph. However, statements that
are not directly related to the principal
provisions or to the legitimacy of the parties
do not exempt those interested in
establishing the truth of such statements
from the burden of proving them.
Art. 220. The consent or authorization of
another, which is required for the validity
of an act, shall be proved in the same
manner as the act itself, and shall be
contained, whenever possible, in the same
instrument.
Art. 221. A private instrument, made and
signed, or merely signed, by someone who
has the free disposition and administration
of his property proves contractual
obligations in any amount; but its effects,
like those of assignment, do not operate
with respect to third parties before the
instrument is recorded in a public register.
Sole paragraph. Proof of a private
instrument may be supplied by other legal
evidence.
Art. 222. A telegram, when its authenticity
is contested, makes proof after verification
against the signed original.
Art. 223. A photocopy of a document,
verified by a notary, is proof of declarations
of will, but if its authenticity is impugned,
the original must be exhibited.
Sole paragraph. Evidence does not make
good the absence of a debt instrument or of
an original document in those cases in
which the law or the circumstances make
the exercise of the right conditional upon its
exhibition.
56
Art. 219. As declara9oes constantes de
documentos assinados presumem-se
verdadeiras em relai;ao aos signatarios.
Paragrafo unico. Nao tendo rela;;ao di-
reta, porem, com as disposi~oes princi-
pais ou com a legitimidade das parles,
as declarai;oes enunciativas nao exi-
mem os interessados em sua veracidade
do onus de prova-las.
Art. 220. A anuencia ou a autorizm;:ao
de outrem, necessaria avalidade de um
ato, provar-se-a do mesmo modo que
este, e constara, sempre quc se possa,
do pr6prio instmmento.
Art. 221. 0 instrumcnto particular, fei-
to e assinado, ou somente assinado por
quem esteja na livre disposii;ao e admi-
nistrai;ao de seus bens, prova as obriga-
i;oes convencionais de qualquer valor;
mas os seus efeito~. bem como os da
cessao, niio se operam, arespeito deter-
ceiros, antes de registrado no registro
publico.
Paragrafo unico. A prov a do instrumen-
to particular pode suprir-se pelas outras
de carater legal.
Art. 222. 0 telegrama, quando !he for
contestada a autenticidade, faz prova
mediante conferencia com o original
assinado.
Art. 223. A c6pia fotografica de docu-
mento, conferida por tabeliiio de notas,
valera como prova de declara9iio da
vontade, mas, impugnada sua autentici-
dade, devera ser exibido o original.
Paragrafo unico. A prova nao supre a
ausencia do titulo de credito, ou do ori-
ginal, nos casos em que a lei ou as cir-
cunstancias condicionarem o exerdcio
do direito asua exibii;ao.
57 c6omo CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 224. Os documentos redigidos em
lingua estrangeira serao traduzidos para
o portugues para ter efeitos Jegais no
Pais.
Art. 225. As reprodui;oes fotognlficas,
cinematogriificas, os registros fonogra-
ficos e, em geral, quaisquer outras rc-
produ~oes mecanicas ou eletrilnicas de
fatos ou de coisas fazem prova plena
destes, se a parte, contra quem forem
exibidos, niio lhes impugnar a exatidao.
Art. 226. Os livros e fichas dos empre-
sarios e sociedades provam contra as
pessoas a que pertencem, e, em seu fa~
vor, quando, escriturados sem vicio ex-
trfnseco ou intrinseco, forem confirma-
dos por outros subsfdios.
Paragrafo unico. A provaresultante dos
livros e fichas nao e bastante nos casos
em que a lei exige escritura publica, ou
escrito particular revestido de requisi-
tos especiais, e pode ser ilidida pela
comprova~ao da falsidade ou inexati-
dao dos lan9amentos.
Art. 227. Salvo os casos expressos, a
prova exclusivamente testemunhal so
se admite nos neg6cios jurfdicos cujo
valor nao ultrapasse o decuplo do maior
sal{rrio mfnimo vigente no Pais ao tem-
po em que foram celebrados.
Paragrafo unico. Qualquer que seja o
valor do neg6cio jurfdico, a prova teste-
munhal e admissivel como subsidiaria
ou complementar da prova por escrito.
Art. 228. Nao podem ser admitidos
como testemunhas:
I - os menores de dezesseis anos;
Art. 224-228
Art. 224. Documents drafted in a foreign
language shall be translated into
Portuguese in order to produce legal effects
in Brazil.
Art. 225. Photographic and cinematographic
reproductions, phonographic recordings
and, in general, any other mechanical or
electronic reproductions of facts or things
make full proof of such facts and things if
the party against whom they are produced
does not contest their accuracy.
Art. 226. The books and records of
business proprietors, partnerships and
companies make proof against the persons
to whom they belong and make proof in
their favor if they have been kept without
external or internal defect and are
confirmed by supporting evidence.
Sole paragraph. Evidence supplied by
books and records is not sufficient in those
cases in which the law requires a public
writing, or a private writing attended by
special requirements, and may be refuted
by proving the falsity or inaccuracy of the
entries.
Art. 227. Except in cases expressly
provided for, proof solely by testimony is
only admitted in juridical transactions
whose value does not exceed an amount
that is ten times the greatest minimum
monthly salary in effect in Brazil at the time
the transaction was entered into.
Sole paragraph. Regardless of the value of
the juridical transaction, testimony is
admissible to support or complement
written evidence.
Art. 228. The following persons may not be
admitted as witnesses:
I - those who are less than eighteen years of
age;

Art. 229-232 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II -.those who, by reason of infirmity or
mental retardation, do not have
discernment sufficient for the performance
of acts of civil life;
III - the blind and the deaf, when
knowledge of the fact that is sought to be
proved depends on the senses that they
lack;
IV - those who have an interest in the
dispute, intimate friends and capital
enemies of the parties;
V - the spouse, ascendants, descendants
and collateral relatives, to the third degree,
by consanguinity or by marriage, of any of
the parties.
Art. 229. No one may be obligated to
testify regarding facts:
I - which, by his status or profession, he
must keep secret;
II - regarding which he cannot answer
without dishonoring himself, his spouse, a
relative in a degree recognized for the
purposes of succession, or an intimate
friend;
III - that expose him, or the persons
referred to in the preceding item, to
life-threatening danger, to legal action or to
immediate patrimonial loss.
Art. 230. Presumptions other than legal
presumptions are not admitted in cases in
which the law excludes proof by testimony.
Art. 231. A person who refuses to submit to
a required medical examination may not
benefit from his refusal.
Art. 232. A refusal to submit to an expert
medical examination ordered by the judge
may supply the proof that was to be
obtained by means of the examination.
58
II - aqueles que, por enfermidade ou re-
tard amen to mental, nao tiverem dis-
cernimento para a pr:itica dos atos da
vidacivil;
III - os cegos e surdos, quando a ciencia
do fato que se quer provar dependa dos
sentidos que !hes faltam;
IV - o interessado no litigio, o amigo fn-
timo ou o inimigo capital das partcs;
V - os conjuges, os ascendentcs, os de-
scendentes e os colaterais, ate o terceiro
grau de alguma das partes, por consan-
gilinidade, ou afinidade.
Art. 229. Ninguem pode ser obrigado a
depor sobre fato:
I - a cujo respeito, por estado ou profis-
sao, deva guardar segredo;
II - a que nao possa responder sem de-
sonra pr6pria, de seu conjuge. parente
em grau sucessivel, ou amigo fntimo;
III - que 0 exponha, OU as pessoas refe-
ridas no inciso antecedente, a perigo de
vida, de demanda, ou de dano patrimo-
nial imediato.
Art. 230. As presurn;oes, que nao as le-
gais, nao se admitem nos casos em que
a lei exclui a prova testemunhal.
Art. 231. Aquele que se nega a subme-
ter-se a exame medico necessiirio niio
poder:i aproveitar-se de sua recusa.
Art. 232. A recusa apericia medica or-
denada pelo juiz poder:i suprir a prova
que se pretendia obter com o exarne.
59 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
P ARTE ESPECIAL
Livro I - Do Direito das Obrigal,!iies
Titulo I - Das Modalidades das
Obriga~iies
Capitulo I - Das Obrigal,!iies de Dar
Sel,!iio I - Das Obriga1;iies de Dar
Coisa Certa
Art. 233. A obrigai;ao de dar coisa certa
abrange os acess6rios dela embora niio
mencionados, salvo se o contr:irio re-
sultar do tftulo ou das circunstancias do
caso.
Art. 234. Se, no caso do artigo antece-
dente, a coisa se perder, sem culpa do
devedor, antes da tradic,;ao, ou pendente
a condii;:ao suspensiva, flea resolvida a
obrigai;:ao para ambas as partes; se a
perda resultar de culpa do devedor, res-
ponder:i este pelo equivalente e mais
perdas e danos.
Art. 235. Deteriorada a coisa, niio sen-
do o devedor culpado, poder:i o credor
resolver a obrigai;:ao, ou aceitar a coisa,
abatido de seu prei;:o o valor que per-
deu.
Art. 236. Sendo culpado o devedor, po-
der:i o credor exigir o equivalente, ou
aceitar a coisa no estado em que se
acha, com direito a reclamar, em um ou
em outro caso, indeniza~ao das perdas e
danos.
Art. 237. Ate a tradii;:iio pertence ao de-
vedor a coisa, com os seus melhora-
mentos e acrescidos, pelos quais poderii
exigir aumento no pre~o; se o credor
.nao anuir, podera o devedor resolver a
obriga1;ao.
Paragrafo unico. Os frutos percebidos
sao do devedor, cabendo ao credor os
pendentes.
Art. 233-237
SPECIAL PART
Book I - The Law of Obligations
Title I-The Kinds of Obligations
Chapter I - Obligations to Give
Section I - Obligations to Give a
Certain Thing
Art. 233. An obligation to give a certain
thing encompasses all the thing's
accessories, even though they are not
mentioned, unless the contrary results from
the title of the obligation or the
circumstances of the case.
Art. 234. If, in the case contemplated in the
preceding article, the thing is lost through
no fault of the debtor's before it is delivered
or while a suspensive condition is pending,
the obligation is dissolved for both parties;
if the loss results from the debtor's fault, he
is liable for its equivalent, and for losses
and damage.
Art. 235. If the thing deteriorates, and the
debtor is not at fault, the creditor may
dissolve the obligation or accept the thing,
with the value that it lost being deducted
from its price.
Art. 236. If the debtor is at fault, the
creditor may demand an equivalent, or
accept the thing in the state it is found, with
the right to claim, in either case,
indemnification for losses and damage.
Art. 237. Until delivery the thing belongs
to the debtor, with its improvements and
accretions, for which he may demand an
increase in the price; if the creditor does not
agree, the debtor may dissolve the
obligation.
Sole paragraph. Gathered fruits are the
debtor's; ungathered fruits the creditor's.
Art. 238-244 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 238. If the obligation is to restitute a
certain thing, and the thing, through no fault
of the debtor's, is lost before delivery, the
creditor shall suffer the loss and the
obligation shall be dissolved, without
prejudice to the parties' rights up to the day
the thing was lost. ·
Art. 239. If the thing is lost throitgh the
debtor's fault, he shall be liable for an
equivalent, and losses and damage.
Art. 240. If the thing tb be restituted
deteriorates without fault of the debtor, the
creditor shall receive it as it is, without any
right to indemnification; if it deteriorates
through the debtor's fault, the provisions of
art. 239 shall apply.
Art. 241. If, in the case contemplated in art.
238, a betterment or addition to the thing
occurs without expense or work on the part
of the debtor, the creditor shall profit
therefrom and shall have no obligation to
indemnify the debtor.
Art. 242. If the debtor put work or expense
into the betterment or addition, the case
shall be governed by the rules of this Code
applicable to improvements made by a
possessor in good faith or in bad faith.
Sole paragraph. Likewise, the provisions of
this Code concerning a possessor in good
faith or in bad faith shall apply to gathered
fruits.
Section II - Obligations to Give an
Uncertain Thing
Art. 243. An uncertain thing shall be
indicated at least by kind and quantity.
Art. 244. In the case of things determined
by kind and quantity, the choice of the thing
belongs to the debtor, if the contrary does
not result from the title of the obligation; he
may not give a worse thing nor is he obliged
to give a better.
60
Art. 238. Se a obrigac;fto for de restituir
coisa certa, e esta, sem culpa do deve-
dor, se perder antes da tradil(ao, sofrera
o credor a perda, e a obrigac;ao se resol-
vera, ressalvados os seus direitos ate o
dia da perda.
Art. 239. Se a coisa se perder por culpa
do devedor, respondera este pelo equi-
valente, mais perdas e danos.
Art. 240. Se a coisa restituivel se detc-
riorar sem culpa do devedor, recebe-la-
a o credor, ta! qua! se ache, sem direito
a indenizar;:fto; se por culpa do devedor.
observar-se-a o disposto no art. 239.
Art. 241. Se, no caso do art. 238, sobre-
vier melhoramento ou acrescimo acoi-
sa. sem despesa ou trabalho do devedor,
lucrara o credor, desobrigado de inde-
nizar;:ao.
Art. 242. Se para o melhoramento, ou
aumento, empregou o devedor trabalho
ou dispendio, o caso se regulara pelas
normas deste C6digo atinentes as ben-
feitcirias realizadas pelo possuidor de
boa-fe OU de ma-fe.
Paragrafo unico. Quanto aos frutos per-
ceb idos, observar-se-a, do mesmo
modo, o disposto neste C6digo, acerca
do pOSSUidor de boa-fe OU de ma-fe.
Sei;iio II -Das Obrigai;oes de Dar
Coisa Incerta
Art. 243. A coisa inc~rtasera indicada, ao
menos, pelo genero e pela quantidade.
Art. 244. Nas coisas determinadas pelo
genero e pela quantidade, a escolha per-
tence ao devedor, se o contrario nfto re-
sultar do tftulo da obrigar;:ao; mas nfto
podera dar a coisa pior, nem sera obri-
gado a prestar a melhor.
61 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 245. Cientificado da escolha o ere-
ctor, vigorara o disposto na Sei;ao ante-
cedente.
Art. 246. Antes da escolha, nfto podera
o devedor alegar perda ou deteriorar;:ao
da coisa, ainda que por forr;:a maior ou
caso fortuito.
Capitulo II- Das Obriga\;iies de Fazer
Art. 247. lncorre na obrigai;ao de inde-
nizar perdas e danos o devedor que re-
cusar a prestar;:ao a cle s6 imposn1, ou s6
por ele exeqiifvel.
Art. 248. Se a prestai;ao do fato tomar-
se impossivel sem culpa do devedor, re-
solver-se-a a obrigar;:ao; se por culpa
dele, respondera por perdas e danos.
Art. 249. Seo fato puder ser executado
por terceiro, sera livre ao credor man-
da-lo executar a custa do devedor, ha-
vendo recusa ou mora deste, sem pre-
jufzo da indenizai;ao cabivel.
Paragrafo unico. Em caso de urgencia,
pode o credor, independentemente de au-
torizai;fto judicial, executar ou mandar
executar o fato, sendo depois ressarcido.
Capitulo III - Das Obrigac;oes de
NiioFazer
Art. 250. Extingue-se a obrigai;ao de
nao fazer, desde que, sem culpa do de-
vedor, se !he torne impossfvel abster-se
do ato, que se obrigou a nfto praticar.
Art. 251. Praticado pelo devedor o ato,
a cuja abstenr;:ao se obrigara, o credor
pode exigir dele que o desfar;:a, sob
pena de se desfazer asua custa, rcssar-
cindo o culpado perdas e danos.
Art. 245-251
Art. 245. Once the creditor is notified of the
choice, the provisions of the preceding
Section shall apply.
Art. 246. Before the choice is made, the
debtor may not allege loss or deterioration
of the thing, even by reason of force
majeure or fortuitous event.
Chapter II - Obligations to Do
Art. 247. A debtor who refuses to perform an
obligation that is imposed on him alone, or that
is performable only by him, incurs the
obligation to indemnify for losses and damage.
Art. 248. If performance in fact becomes
impossible, through no fault of the debtor's,
the obligation is dissolved; but if it
becomes impossible by his fault, he is liable
for losses and damage.
Art. 249. If a third party can perform the
obligation, the creditor shall be free to have
the third party perform the obligation at the
debtor's cost, where the debtor refuses to
perform or does not perform on time,
without prejudice to any indemnification to
which the creditor may be entitled.
Sole paragraph. In urgent cases, the creditor
may, even without judicial authorization,
perform the obligation or have it performed,
and later be compensated by the debtor.
Chapter III - Obligations
Notto Do
Art. 250. An obligation not to do is
extinguished when, without the debtor's
fault, it becomes impossible for him to
refrain from the act that he has obligated
himself not to perform.
Art. 251. If the debtor performs the act t11at
he obligated himself to refrain from
performing, the creditor may require thathe
undo the act, on pain of having the act
undone at his expense, with the party at
fault paying compensation for losses and
damage.
Art. 252-254 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. In urgent cases, thecreditor
may, even without judicial authorization,
undo the act or have it undone, without
prejudice to the compensation owed.
Chapter IV - Alternative
Obligations
Art. 252. In alternative obligations, the
choice is the debtor's, if not otherwise
stipulated.
§ 1. The debtor may not oblige the creditor
to receive part of one obligation and part of
another.
§2. When the obligation is to be performed
periodically, the choice may be exercised
for each period.
§3: When more than one party may choose,
and they cannot reach. unanimous
agreement, the judge shall decide, once the
period of time he has assigned for the
parties to deliberate upon their choice has
expired.
§4. If the title of the obligation gives the
choice to a third party, and he does not want
to exercise it, or cannot, the judge shall
make the choice, if there is no agreement
between the parties.
Art. 253. If the object of one of the two
alternative obligations is impossible or
illegal or if one of the obligations becomes
unperformable, the debt subsists with
respect to the other.
Art. 254. If, through the debtor's fault,
none of the obligations can be performed,
and the creditor did not have the choice of
the obligations, the debtor shall be
obligated to pay the value of the last
obligation to become impossible, together
with the losses and damage arising out of
the case.
62
Paragrafo unico. Em caso de urgencia,
podera o credor desfazer ou mandar
desfazer, independentemente de antori-
zai;:ao judicial, sem prejnfzo do ressar-
cimento devido.
Capftulo IV - Das Obriga~iies
Alternativas
Art. 252. Nas obrigai;:oes alternativas, a
escolhacabe ao devedor, se outra coisa
nao se estipulou.
§ I 0 Nao pode o devedor obrigar o ere-
ctor a receber parte em uma presta9ao e
parte em outra
§2° Quando a obrigai;:ao for de presta-
9oes peri6dicas, a faculdade de op.;ao
podera ser exercida em cada perfodo.
§3° No caso de pluralidade de optantes,
nao havendo acordo unanime entre
eles, decidira o juiz, findo o prazo por
este assinado para a delibera.;ao.
§4° Seo tftulo deferir a op9ao a terceiro,
e este niio quiser, ou niio puder exerce-
la, cabera ao juiz a escolha se nao hou-
ver acordo entre as partes.
Art. 253. Se uma das duas prestai;:oes
nao puder ser objeto de obriga91io ou se
tornada inexeqlifvel, subsistira o debito
quanta aoutra.
Art. 254. Se, par culp.a do devedor, nao
se puder cumprir nenhuma das presta-
90es, niio competindo ao credor a esco-
lha, ficara aquele obrigado a pagar o va-
lor da que por ultimo se impossibilitou,
mais as perdas e danos que o caso deter-
minar.
63 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 255. Quando a escolha couber ao
credor e uma das presta\!oes tornar-se
impossivel por culpa do devedor, o ere-
ctor tera direito de exigir a presta91io
subsistente ou o valor da outra, com
perdas e danos; se, por culpa do deve-
dor, ambas as presta9oes se tornarem
inexeqlifveis, podera o credor reclamar
o valor de qualquer d~s duas, alem da
indenizayao por perdas e danos.
Art. 256. Se todas as prestm;:oes se tor-
narem impossfveis sem culpa do deve-
dor, extinguir-se-a a obriga9iio.
Callitulo V - Das Obrigai;iies
Divisiveis e Indivisiveis
Art. 257. Havendo mais de um devedor
ou mais de um credor em obriga9iio di-
visive!, esta presume-Se dividida em
tantas obrigai;:oes, iguais e distintas,
quantos os credores ou devedores.
Art. 258. A obriga9ao e indivisfvel
quando a presta1;ao tern por objeto uma
coisa ou um fato nao suscetfveis de di-
visiio, por sua natureza, por motivo de
ordem economica, ou dada a raziio de-
terminante do neg6cio jurfdico.
Art. 259. Se, havendo dois ou mais de-
vedores, a prestaqiio niio for divisfvel,
cada um sera obrigado pela dfvida toda.
Paragrafo unico. 0 devedor, que paga a
dfvida, sub-roga-se no direito do credor
em rela9iio aos outros coobrigados.
Art. 260. Se a pluralidade for dos cre-
dores, podera cada um destes exigir a
dfvida inteira; mas o devedor ou deve-
dores se desobrigarao, pagando;
I - a todos conjuntamente;
II - a um, dando este caw;:ao de ratifica-
9ao dos outros credores.
Art. 255-260
Art. 255. When the creditor has the choice
of which obligation shall be performed and
one of them becomes impossible through
the debtor's fault, the creditor shall have the
right to require either performance of the
surviving obligation or payment of the
value of the other, with losses and damage;
if, through the debtor's fault, both
obligations become impossible to perform,
the creditor may claim the value of either of
them, together with indemnification for
losses and damage.
Art. 256. If all the obligations become
impossible to perform, without the debtor's
fault, the obligation is extinguished.
Chapter V - Divisible and Indivisible
Obligations
Art. 257. If there is more than one debtor or
more than one creditor to a divisible
obligation, the obligation is presumed to be
divided into as many equal and distinct
obligations as there are creditors or debtors.
Art. 258. An obligation is indivisible when
it has as its object a thing or an act that is not
susceptible of division, by its nature, for
reasons of an economic order or given the
determining reason for the juridical
transaction.
Art. 259. If there are two or more debtors
and the obligation is not divisible, each
debtor is obligated for the whole debt.
Sole paragraph. The debtor who pays the
debt is subrogated in the creditor's right in
relation to the other debtors.
Art. 260. If there is more than one creditor,
each of them may demand the entire debt;
but the debtor or debtors shall be freed of
the obligation by paying:
I - to all of them jointly;
II - to one of them, with the creditor giving
security for ratification by the other creditors.
Art. 261-265 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 261. If only one of the creditors
receives performance of the entire
obligation, each of the other creditors has
the right to demand from him, in money, the
share in the whole to which he is entitled.
Art. 262. If one of the creditors remits the
debt, the obligation is not extinguished with
respect to the other creditors; but they may
only demand performance of the obligation
after discounting the share of the remitting
creditor.
Sole paragraph. The same rule applies in
the case of settlement, novatipn,
compensation or confusion.
Art. 263. An obligation that is resolved into
losses and damage ceases to be indivisible.
§ 1. If, for the purposes of this article, there
is fault on the part of all the debtors, each of
them shall be liabie for an equal share.
§2. If only one of them is at fault, the others
ate exonerated and the one at fault alone is
liable for losses and damage.
Chapter VI-Solidary
Obligations
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 264. An obligation is solidary when
there is more than one creditor, or more
than one debtor, each with the right to, or
the obligation for, the whole debt.
Art. 265. Solidarity is not presumed; it
results from the law or the will of the
parties.
Art. 266. A solidaty obligation may be pure
and simple with respect to one of the
co-creditors or co-debtors, and conditional,
or with a term, or payable in a different
place for the other.
64
Art. 261. Se um s6 dos credores receber
a prestai;;ao por inteiro, a cada um dos
outros assistira o direito de exigir dele
em dinheiro a parte que !he caiba no to-
tal.
Art. 262. Se um dos credores remitir a
dfvida, a obrigm;ao nao ficara extinta
para com os outros; mas estes s6 a po-
derao exigir, descontada a quota do cre-
dor remitente.
Paragrafo t'.inico. 0 mesmo criterio sc
observara no caso de transai;ao, nova-
i;;ao, compensa1;ao ou confusao.
Art. 263. Perde a qualidade de indivis(-
vel a obriga\!ao que se resolver em per-
das e danos.
§I 0 Se, para efeito do disposto ncste ar-
tigo, houver culpa de todos os devedo-
res, responderao todos por partes
iguais.
§2° Se for de um s6 a cul pa, ficarao exo-
nerados os outros, respondendo s6 csse
pelas perdas e danos.
Capitulo VI - Das Obriga\!iies
Solidarias
Se~o I - Disposi\!iies Gerais
Art. 264. Ha solidariedade, quando na
mesma obrigai;;ao concorre mais de um
credor, ou mais de um devedor, cada
um com direito, ou obrigado, a dfvida
toda.
Art. 265. A solidariedade ni'io se presu-
me; resultadalei ouda vontade das par-
tes.
Art. 266. A obrigai;;ao solidaria pode
ser pura e simples para um dos co-cre-
dores ou co-devedores, e condicional,
ou a prazo, ou pagavel em Iugar dife-
rente, para o outro.
65 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Se\!i'io II - Da Solidariedade Ativa
Art. 267. Cada um dos credores solida-
rios tern direito a exigir do devedor o
cumprimento da prestai;;ao por inteiro.
Art. 268. Enquanto alguns dos credo-
res solidiirios nao demandarem o deve-
dor comum, a qualquer daqueles pode-
ra este pagar.
Art. 269. 0 pagamento feito a um dos
credores solidiirios extingue a divida
ate o montante do que foi pago.
Art. 270. Se um dos credores solidiirios
falecer deixando herdeiros, cada um
dcstes s6 tera direito a exigir e receber a
quota do credito que corresponder ao
seu quinhao hereditario, salvo se aobri-
gai;;ao for indivisfvel.
Art. 271. Convertendo-se a prestas;ao
em perdas c danos, subsiste, para todos
os efeitos, a solidariedade.
Art. 272. 0 credor que tiver remitido a
dfvida ou recebido o pagamento respon-
dera aos outros pela parte que !hes caiba.
Art. 273. A um dos credores solidarios
nao pode o devedor opor as exce\!6es
pessoais oponfveis aos outros.
Art. 274. 0 julgamento contrario a um
dos credores solidarios nii.o atinge os
demais; .o julgamento favoravel apro-
veita-Ihes, a menos que se funde em ex-
cei;ao pessoal ao credor que o obteve.
Se\!ao III - Da Solidariedade Passiva
Art. 275. 0 credor tern direito a exigir
e receber de um ou de alguns dos deve-
dores, parcial ou totalmente, a dfvida
comum; se o pagamento tiver sido par-
cial, todos os demais devedores conti-
nuam obrigados solidariamente pelo
resto.
Art. 267-275
Section II- Solidarity Among Creditors
Art. 267. Each one of solidary creditors has
the right to demand performance of the
entire obligation from the debtor.
Art. 268. For so long as some of the
solidary creditors do not demarid
performance of the common debtor, he may
pay any of them.
Art. 269. Payment made to one of the
solidary creditors extinguishes the debt to
the extent of the amount paid.
Art. 270. If one of the solidary creditors
dies, leaving heirs, each of the heirs has
only the right to receive that part of the debt
that corresponds to his share in the
succession, unless the obligation is
indivisible.
Art. 271. If performance of the obligation
is converted into losses and damage,
solidarity subsists, for all effects.
Art. 272. A creditor who has remitted the
debt or received payment is liable to the
others for their share.
Art. 273. The debtor may not assert against
one of the solidary creditors personal
exceptions that may be asserted against the
others.
Art. 274. Judgment against one of the
solidary creditors does not affect the others;
but judgment in his favor benefits them,
unless it is based on an exception that is
personal to the creditor who obtained
judgment.
Section Ill - Solidarity among Debtors
Art. 275. A creditor has the right to demand
and receive from one or more of the
debtors, in whole or in part, the common
debt; if payment is made in part, .all the
other debtors continue to be solidarily
obligated for the rest.
 Art. 276-282 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. The bringing of action by
the creditor against one or more of the
debtors does not imply a waiver of
solidarity.
Art. 276. If one of the debtors dies, leaving
heirs, none of the heirs is obligated to pay
anything but the part that corresponds to his
share in the succession, unless the
obligation is indivisible; but all the heirs
together shall be considered to be a solidary
debtor with respect to the other debtors.
Art. 277. Partial payment made by one of
the debtors, and remission of debt obtained
by him, do not benefit the other debtors,
except to the extent of the amount paid or
remitted.
Art. 278. Any additional clause, condition
or obligation stipulated between one of the
solidary debtors and the creditor cannot
worsen the position of the other solidary
debtors without their consent.
Art. 219. If performance becomes
impossible through the fault of one of the
solidary debtors, the burden of paying the
equivalent subsistsJor all of them; but only
the debtor at fault is liable for losses and
damage.
Art. 280. All the debtors are liable for
late-payment interest, even if action is
brought against only one of them; but the
debtor at fa).llt is liable to the others for the
additional obligation.
Art. 281. The debtor of whom performance
is demanded may assert against the creditor
exceptions that are personal to him and
those that are common to all; but he does
not benefit from exceptions that are
personal to another co-debtor.
Art. 282. A creditor may waive solidarity
in favor of one, some or all of the debtors.
66
Paragrafo unico. Nao importara renun-
cia da solidariedade a propositura de
a~ao pelo erector contra um ou alguns
dos devedores.
Art. 276, Se um dos devedores solid:.lrios
falecer deixando herdeiros, nenhum des-
tes sera obrigado a pagar senao a quota
que corresporider ao'seu quinhao heredi-
tario, salvo sea obriga~iio for indivislvel;
mas lodos reunidos serao considerados
como um devedor solidario em rel~ao
aos demais devedores.
Art.277. 0 pagamento parcial feito por
um dos devedores e a remissao por ele
obtida nao aproveitam aos outros deve-
dores. senao ate a concorrencia da
quantia paga ou relevada
Art. 278. Qualquer clausula, condi\:lio
ou obrigai;ao adicional, estipulada en-
tre um dos devedores solidarios e o cre-
dor, nao podera agravar a posi9ao dos
outros sem consentimento destes.
Art. 279. Impossibilitando-se a prcsta-
i;ao por culpa de um dos devedorcs so-
lidarios, subsiste parn todos o encargo
de pagar o equivalente; mas pelas per-
das e danos s6 responde o culpado.
Art. 280. Todos os devedores respon-
dem pelos juros da mora, ainda que a
ai;ao tenha sido proposta somente con-
tra um; mas o culpado responde aos ou-
tros pela obrigm;:ao acrescida.
Art. 281. 0 devedor demandado pode
opor ao erector as excei;oes que !he fo-
rem pessoais e as comuns a todos; nao
!he aproveitando as exce\:oes pessoais a
outro co-devedor.
Art. 282. 0 credor pode renunciar aso-
lidariedade em favor de um, de alguns
ou de todos os devedores.
67 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. Se o erector exonerar
da solidariedade um ou mais devedo-
res, subsistini a dos demais.
Art. 283. o devedor que satisfez a divi-
da por inteiro tern direito a exigir de
cada um dos co-devedores a sua quota,
dividindo-se igualmente por todos a do
insolvente, se 0 houver, presumindo-se
iguais, no debito, as partes de todos os
co-devedores.
Art. 284. No caso de rateio entre os co-
devedores. contribuiriio tambem os
exonerados da solidariedade pelo ere-
ctor, pela parte que na obriga<;ao incum-
bia ao insolvente.
Art. 28 5, Se a divida solidaria interes-
sar exclusivamente a um dos devedo-
res, respondera este por toda ela para
com aquele que pagar.
Titulo II- Da Transmissiio das
Obrigac,;oes
Capitulo I_ Da Cessiio de Credito
Art. 286. o credor pode ceder o seu
credito, sea isso niio se opuser a nature-
za da obrigac;ao, a lei, ou a conven\:ao
com 0 devedor; a cJausula proibitiva da
cessao niio podera ser oposta ao cessio-
nario de boa-fe, se nao constar do ins-
tmmento da obrigai;ao.
Art. 287. Salvo disposii;ao em contra-
rio, na cessiio de um credito abrangem-
se todos os seus acess6rios.
Art. 288. Eineficaz, em relar;ao a tercei-
ros a transmissao de nm credito, se niio
cel~brar-se mediante instrumento publi-
co, ou instmmento particular revestido
da~ solenidades do§ l do art. 654.
0
Art. 289. o cessionario de credito hipo-
tecario tern o direito de fazer averbar a
cessao no registro do im6vel.
Art. 283-289
Sole paragraph. If the creditor exempts ?ne
or more debtors from solidarity, it subsists
with respect to the others.
Art. 283. A debtor who satisfies the entire
debt has the right to deman.d from each of
the co-debtors his share, with t_he sh.a~e of
an insolvent debtor, if any, bemg d1v1ded
equally among them; the shares of all the
co-debtors are presumed to be equal.
Art. 284. In the case of division of an
insolvent debtor's share among the
co-debtors, those who have been exempted
from solidarity by the creditor shall also
contribute.
Art. 285. If the solidary debt is in the
exclusive interest of one of the debtors, he
shall be liable for the entire debt to the
debtor who paid it.
Title II - Transfer
of Obligations
Chapter I-Assignment of Rights
Art. 286. A creditor may assign his right, if
the nature of the obligation, the law or the
agreement with the debtor does not ?~P?se
such assignment; a clause proh1.b1tmg
assignment cannot be asserted agamst ~n
assignee in good faith, i~ it i~ not set out m
the instrument of the obhgat10n.
Art. 287. Saving provision to the contra1!',
the assignment of a right includes all its
accessories.
Art. 288. Assignment of a right. is
ineffective with respect to third parties
unless it was made by public inst:ument or
by private instrument ~ccompam~d by the
formalities referred to m art. 654 § l.
Art. 289. The assignee of an hyp~thecary
debt has the right to have the ass1gi:rnent
entered in the immovable property register..
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 290-296
Art. 290. An assignment of a right does not
have effect against the debtor until he has
been notified; but a debtor who, by public
or private writing, declares himself to be
aware of the assignment is deemed to have
been notified.
Art. 291. If various assignments of the
same right are made, the assignment that is
completed with delivery of the title to the
assigned right prevails.
Art. 292. A debtor is released from his
obligation if, before he knows of the
assignment, he pays the original creditor or,
in the case of more than one assignment
being notified to him, he pays the assignee
who presents to him, along with the title of
the assignment, the title of the assigned
obligation; when the assigned right is set
out i.n a public writing, priority of
notification shall prevail.
Art. 293. Whether or not the debtor knows
of the assignment, the assignee may
perform acts to preserve the assigned right.
Art. 294. A debtor may assert against the
assignee the exceptions available to him, as
well as those which, at the time he became
aware of the assignment, he had against the
assignor.
Art. 295. In an assignment by onerous title,
the assignor is liable to the assignee for the
existence of the right at the time he assigned
it, even if he does not make himself liable
therefor; he has. the same liability in
assignments by gratuitous title, if he acted
in bad faith.
Art. 296. Unless otherwise stipulated, an
assignor is not liable for the solvency of the
debtor.
68
Art. 290. A cessao do credito nao tem
eficacia em relac;ao ao devedor, senao
quando a este notificada; mas por noti-
ficado se tern o devedor que, em escrito
publico ou particular, se declarou ciente
da cessao feita.
Art. 291. Ocorrendo varias cessoes do
mesmo credito, prevalece a que se com-
pletar com a tradii;:ao do titulo do credi-
to cedido.
Art. 292. Fica desobrigado o devedor
que. antes de ter conhecimento da ces-
sao, paga ao credor primitivo, ou quc,
no caso de mais de uma cessao notifica-
da, paga ao cessionario que lhe apre-
senta, com o tftulo de cessao, o da obri-
gac;:ao cedida; quando 0 Credito Constar
de escritura publica, prevalecera a prio-
ridade da notifica~ab.
Art. 293. Independentemente do co-
nhecimento da cessao pelo devedor,
pode o cessionflrio exercer os atos con-
servatorios do direito cedido.
Art. 294. 0 devedor pode opor ao ces-
sionario as exce\;Bes que !he competi-
rem, bem como as que, no momento em
que veio a ter conhecimento da cessilo,
tinha contra o cedente.
Art. 295.iNa ccssilo por titulo oneroso,
o ccdente, ainda que nao se responsabi-
lize, fica responsavel ao cessionario
pela existencia do credito ao tempo cm
que the cedeu; a mesma responsabilida-
de !he cube nas cessoes por titulo gra-
tuito, se liver procedido de ma-fe.
Art. 296. Salvo estipulai;:ao em contr[1-
rio, o cedente nao responde pela sol-
vencia do devedor.
69 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
Art. 297. 0 cedente, responsavel ao
cessionario pela solvencia do devedor,
nlio responde por mais do que daquele
recebeu, com os respectivos juros; mas
tern de ressarcir-lhe as despesas daces-
sao e as que o cessionflrio houver feito
com a cobran\:a.
Art. 298. 0 credito, uma vez penhora-
do, nao pode mais ser transferido pelo
credor que tiver conhecimento da pe-
nhora; mas o devedor que o pagar, nfio
tendo notifica~ao dela, fica exonerado,
subsistindo somente contra o credor os
direitos de terceiro.
Capitulo II - Da Assuni;:iio de Divida
Art. 299. Efacultado a terceiro assumir
a obrigac;:iio do devedor, com o consen-
timento expresso do credor, ficando
exonerado o devedor primitivo, salvo
se aquele, ao tempo da assunc;:ao, era in-
solvente e o credor o ignorava.
Paragrafo unico. Qualquer das partes
pode assinar prazo ao credor para que
consinta na assu119ao da dfvida, inter-
pretando-se o seu silencio como recusa.
Art. 300. Salvo assentimento expresso
do devedor primitivo, consideram-se
extintas, a partir da assum;ao da dfvida,
as garantias especiais por ele origina-
riamente dadas ao credor.
Art. 301. Se a substituii;ao do devedor
vier a ser anulada, restaura-se o debito,
com todas as suas garantias, salvo as
garantias prestadas por terceiros, exce-
to se este conhecia o vfcio que inquina-
va a obrigai;:ao.
Art. 302. 0 novo devedor niio pode
opor ao credor as exce~oes pessoais que
competiam ao devedor primitivo.
Art. 297-302
Art. 297. An assignor who is liable to the
assignee for the debtor's solvency is not
liable for more than he received from the
assignee, with interest thereon; but the
assignor must compensate him for
expenses in connection with the
assignment and forthose he incurred in
order to collect.
Art. 298. Once subject to a judicial lien, a
right may not be assigned by a creditor who
is aware of it; but if the debtor pays the debt,
without notice of the lien, he is released,
and the rights of the third party subsist only
against the creditor.
Chapter II -Assumption of Debt
Art. 299. A third party may assume a
debtor's obligation, with the express
consent of the creditor, and the original
debtor is released, unless the party who
assumed the debt was insolvent and the
creditor was unaware of his insolvency.
Sole paragraph. Any of the parties may give
a period of time to the creditor for him to
consent to the assumption of the debt; his
silence shall be interpreted as refusal.
Art. 300. Unless the original debtor
expressly consents, the special security
originally given by him to the creditor is
considered to have been extinguished upon
assumption of the debt.
Art. 301. If the substitution of the debtor is
annulled, the debt is restored, with all its
security, except the security given by third
parties, unless the third party knew of the
vice that tainted the obligation.
Art. 302. The new debtor may not assert
against the creditor the personal exceptions
that the original debtor had.
Art. 303-307 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 303. The acquiror of an hypothecated
immovable may assume responsibility for
payment of the secured debt; if the creditor,
after notification, does not contest the
transfer of the debt, consent will be
understood to have been given.
Title III - Performance and Extinction
of Obligations
Chapter I - Payment
Section I - Who Must Pay
Art. 304. Anyone interested in the
extinction of the debt may pay it and, if the
creditor opposes payment, may take
measures that are conducive to the debtor's
discharge.
Sole paragraph. An uninterested third party
has the same right, if he pays in the name
and on behalf of the debtor, unless the
debtor opposes payment.
Art. 305. An uninterested third party, who
pays a debt in his own name, has the right to
reimbursement of that which he paid; but he
is not subrogated in the creditor's rights.
Sole paragraph. If he pays before the debt is
due, lie has the right to reimbursement only
after tht< due date.
Art. 306. Payment made by a third party, if
the debtor is not aware of the payment or
opposes it, does not obligate the debtor to
reimburse the payor, if he had means to
defeat an action on the debt. ·
Art. 307. Payment that consists in transfer
of property is effective only if it is made by
a person who could alienate the thing given
in payment,
Sole paragraph. If a fungible thing is given
in payment, no claim may be made against
a creditor who, in good faith, received and
consumed it, even if the payor did not have
the right to alienate the thing.
70
Art. 303. 0 adquirente de imovel hipo-
tecado pode tomar a seu cargo o paga-
mento do credito garantido; se o credor,
notificado, nao impugnar em trinta tlias
a transferencia do debito, emcnder-se-a
dado o assentimento.
Titulo ill - Do Adirnpiernento e
Extin~ao das Obriga~1ies
Capitulo I - Do Pagarnento
Se~o I - De Quern Deve Pagar
Art. 304. Qualquer interessado na ex-
tin~iio da divida pode paga-la, usando,
se o credor se opuser, dos meios condu-
centes aexonenu;ao do devedor.
Par{1grafo iinico. Jgual direito cabe ao
terceiro nao interessado, se o fizer em
a
nome e conta do devedor, salvo opo-
sic,:ao deste.
Art. 305. 0 terceiro nao interessado,
que paga a dfvida em seu pr6prio nome,
tern direito a reembolsar-se do que pa-
gar; mas nao se sub-raga nos direitos do
credor.
Paragrafo unico. Se pagar antes de ven-
cida adfvida, so tera direito ao reemhol-
so no vencimento.
Art. 306. 0 pagamento feito por tercei-
ro, com desconhecimento ou oposic,:ao
do devedor, nao obriga a reembolsar
aquele que pagou, se o devedor tinha
meios para ilidir a ac,:ao.
Art. 307. So tern eficacia o pagamento
que importar transmissiio da proprieda-
de, quando feito por quern possa alienar
o objcto em que ele consistiu.
Paragrafo iinico. Se se der em paga-
mento coisa fungivel, niio se podera
mais reclamar do credor que, de boa-fe,
a recebeu e consumiu, ainda que o sol-
vente nao tivesse o direito de aliemi-Ia.
71 CODJGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Sec,:ao II - Daqueles a Quern se
DevePagar
Art. 308. 0 pagamento deve ser feito
ao credor ou a quern de direito o repre-
sente. sob pena de so valer depois de
por ele ratificado, ou tanto quanto re-
verter em seu proveito.
Art. 309. 0 pagamento feito de boa-fe
ao credor putativo e valido, ainda pro-
vado depois que nao era credor.
Art. 310. Nao vale o pagamento ciente-
mente feito ao cretlor incapaz de quitar,
se o devedor nao provar que em benefi-
cio dele efetivamente reverteu.
Art. 311. Considera-se autorizado a re-
ceber o pagamento o portador da quita-
i;;ao, salvo se as circunstfincias contra-
riarem a presun9iio dai resultante.
Art. 312. Seo devedor pagar ao cretlor,
apesar de intimado da penhora feita so-
bre o credito, ou da impugnac;iio a ele
oposta por terceiros, o pagamento nao
valera contra estes, que poderao cons-
uanger o devedor a pagar de novo, fi-
cando-lhe ressalvado o regresso contra
o credor.
Se~o III -Do Objeto do
Pagarncnto e sua Prova
Art. 313. 0 credor nao e obrigado a re-
ceber prestai;;iio diversa da que !he e de-
vida, ainda que mais valiosa.
Art. 314. Ainda que a obriga\;ao tenha
por objeto presta1;ao divisive!, niio pode
o credor ser obrigado a receber, nem o
devedor a pagar, por partes, se assim
nao se ajustou.
Art. 315. As dividas em dinheiro deve-
riio ser pagas no vencimento, em moeda
corrente e pelo valor nominal, salvo o
disposto nos artigos subseqiientes.
Art. 308-315
Section II - Those to Whom Payment
Must Be Made
Art. 308. Payment must be made to the
creditor or to the person who represents
him, on pain of payment being valid only
after it is ratified by him orto the extent that
it benefits him.
Art. 309. Payment made in good faith to a
putative creditor is valid, even though it is
later proved that he was not the creditor.
Art. 310. Payment that is knowingly made
to a creditor who is incapable of giving
acquittance is not valid, if the debtor does
not prove that it effectively benefited the
creditor.
Art. 311. The bearer of the acquittance is
considered to be authorized to receive
payment, unless the circumstances are
contrary to such a presumption.
Art. 312. If the debtor pays the creditor
after having been notified that the debt has
been made subject to a judicial lien, or that
it has been contested by third parties,
payment will not be valid against the third
pa1ties, who may compel the debtor to pay
again, although a right of recourse against
the creditor is reserved to the debtor.
Section III - What is to be Paid and
Proof of Payment
Art. 313. The creditor is not obligated to
receive something other than that which he
is owed, even if it is more valuable.
Art. 314. Even if the obligation is divisible,
the creditor cannot be obligated to receive,
nor the debtor to pay, in parts, if it has not
been so agreed.
Art. 315. Debts in money shall be paid
when due, in national currency and at the
nominal value, subject to the provisions of
the following articles.

Art. 316-322 BILINGUAL CfVIL CODE
Art. 316. It is licit to agree that successive
installments shall increase progressively.
Art. 317. When, for reasons that could not
be foreseen, the value of the obligation
owed and its value when it is performed
becomes manifestly disproportionate, the
judge may correct it, at the request of the
party, in such a way as to ensure, as far as
possible, the real value of the obligation.
Art. 318. Agreements for payment in gold
or in foreign currency are null, as are
agreements to cotnpensate for the
difference between the value of foreign
currency and that of national currency,
except in the cases provided for in special
legislation.
Art. 319. A debtor who pays has the right to
an acquittance in due form, and may retain
payment until it is given to him.
Art. 320. An acquittance, which may
always be given by private instrument,
shall designate the amount and the type of
the debt that has been paid, the name of the
debtor, Of the person who paid Oil his
behalf, the time and the place of payment,
and shall contain the signature of the
creditor or his representative.
Sole paragraph. Even without the
requirements established in this article, an
acquittance shall be valid if from its terms
or the circumstances it can be concluded
that the debt has been paid.
Art. 321. In the case of debts whose
acquittance consists in the return of the debt
instrument, if the debt instrument has been
lost, the debtor may retain payment and
demand a declaration by the creditor that
makes the lost instrument unusable.
Art. 322. When payment is made in
periodic installments, acquittance given for
the last establishes, until proof to the
contrary, a presumption that the earlier
installments have been paid.
72
Art. 316. Elfcito convencionar o aumen-
to progressivo de presta96es sucessivas.
Art. 317. Quando, por motivos impre-
visfveis, sobrevier despropor9ao mani-
festa entre o valor da presta9ao devida e
o do momenta de sua execu~ao, pod era
o juiz corrigi-lo, a pedida da parre, de
modo que assegure, quanta possivel. o
valor real da prestai;:ao.
Art. 318. Sao nulas as conven1;6es de
pagamento em ouro ou em moeda cs-
trangeira, bem como para compcnsar a
diferen~a entre o valor desta e o da
moeda nacional, excetuados os casos
previstos na legislm;:ao especial.
Art. 319. 0 devedor que paga tem di-
reito a quita~ao regular, e pode reter o
pagamento, enquanto nao lhe seja dada.
Art. 320. A quitm;:ao, que sempre pode-
ni ser dada por instrumento particular,
designara o valor e a especie da divida
quitada, o nome do devcdor, ou quern
por este pagou, o tempo e o lugar do pa-
gamento, com a assiuatura do credor,
ou do seu representante.
Paragrafo unico. Ainda sem os requisi-
tes estabelecidos neste artigo valera a
quitai;:ao, se de seus termos ou das cir-
cunstfincias resultar haver sido paga n
divida.
Art. 321. Nos debitos, cuja quita~ao
consistana devolu~ao do tftulo, perdido
este, poderii o devedor exigir, retemlo o
pagamento, declara~fio do credor que
inutilize o tltulo desaparecido.
Art. 322. Quando o pagamento for em
quotas peri6dicas, a quita~ao da ultima
estabelece, ate prava em contrario, a
presum;:ao de estarem solvidas as ante-
riores.
CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
73
Art. 323. Sendo a quitai;:ao do capital
sem reserva dos juros, estes presumem-
se pagos.
Art. 324. A entrega do tftulo ao deve-
dor finna a prcsunr,;ao do pagamento.
Paragrafo uhico. Ficara sem efeito a
quitm;ao assim operada se o credor pro-
var, em sessenta dias, a falta do paga-
mento.
Art. 325. PresU:mem-se a cargo do de-
vedor as despesas com o pagamento ea
quita\:ao; se ocorrer aumento por fato
do credor, suportar{t este a despesa
acrescida.
Art. 326. Se o pagamento se houver de
fazer por medida, ou peso, entender-se-
:i, no silencio das partes, que aceitaram
os do lugar da execw;ao.
Sei;Jio IV - Do J,ugar do Pagamento
Art. 327. Efetuar-se-a o pagamcnto no
domicilio do devedor, salvo sc as partes
convencionarem diversamente, ou se o
contrario resultar da lei, da natureza da
obriga\:ao ou das circunstancias.
Paragrafo unico. Designados dois OU
mais lugares, cabe ao credor escolher
entre eles.
Art. 328. Se o pagamento consistir na
tradii.:ao de um im6vel, ou em presta~o­
es relativas a im6vel, far-se-a no lugar
onde situado o hem.
Art. 329. Ocorrendo motivo grave para
que se nao efetue o pagamento no lugar
determinado, podera o devedor faze-lo
em outro, sem prejufzo para o crcdor.
Art. 323-329
Art. 323. If acquittance is given for the
capital amount without reservation for
interest, interest is presumed to have been
paid.
Art. 324. Delivery of the debt instrument to
the debtor creates a presumption of
payment.
Sole paragraph. Acquittance so made shall
be without effect if the creditor proves,
within sixty days, the lack of payment.
Art. 325. Expenses associated with
payment and acquittance are presumed to
be the debtor's; if they are increased by an
act of the creditor, he shall bear the
additional expense.
Art. 326. If payment is to be made by
measure or by weight, the silence of the
parties shall be understood to mean that
they accept those of the place of
petformance.
Section IV - Place of Payment
Art. 327. Payment shall be made in the
debtor's domicile, unless the parties
otherwise agree, or the contrary results
from law, the nature of the obligation or the
circumstances.
Sole paragraph. If two or more places are
designated, the creditor has the choice
among them.
Art. 328. If payment consists in transfer of
an immovable property, or in something
related to an immovable property, it shall
be made at the place where the property is
located.
Art. 329. If there is serious reason for not
making payment in the place that has been
determined, the debtor may make it in
another, without prejudice to the creditor.
Art. 330-334 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 330. Payment that is repeatedly made
in another place causes a presumption that
the creditor has waived the place of
payment provided for in the contract.
Section V - Time of Payment
Art. 331. Unless the law otherwise
provides, if no time for payment has been
agreed, the creditor may demand it
immediately.
Art. 332. Conditional obligations are
perfooned on the date that the condition is
fulfilled; the creditor has the burden of
proving that the debtor was aware that the
condition was fulfilled.
Art. 333. The creditor has the right to
collect the debt before the due date
stipulated in the contract or fixed by this
Code:
I - in the case of the debtor's bankruptcy, or
of a concourse of creditors;
II - if the property that was hypothecated or
pledged becomes subject to a judicial lien
in an execution by another creditor;
III - if the security for the debt, either
personal or real, ceases to be or becomes
insufficient, and the debtor, after
notification, refuses to reinforce it.
Sole paragraph. In the cases provided for in
this article, if there is solidary liability
among the debtors, the debt shall not be
deemed to be due with respect to the other
debtors.
Chapter II - Payment by
Deposit
Art. 334. Judicial deposit, or deposit in a
banking establishment, of the thing due, in
the cases and in the manner provided for by
law, is considered to be payment and
extinguishes the obligation.
74
Art. 330. 0 pagamento reiteradamente
feito em outro local faz presumir renun-
cia do credor relativamente ao previsto
no contrato.
Se~o V - Do Tempo do Pagamento
Art. 331. Salvo disposic;ao legal cm
contriirio. nao tendo sido ajustada epo-
ca para o pagamento, pode o credor exi-
gi-Io imediatamente.
Art. 332. As obrigacroes condicionais
cumprem-se na data do implemento da
condic;iio, cabendo ao credor a prov a de
que deste teve ciencia o devedor.
Art. 333. Ao credor assistirii o direito
de cobrar a dfvida antes de vencido o
prazo estipulado no contrato ou marca-
do neste C6digo:
I- no caso de falencia do devedor, ou de
concurso de credores;
II - se os bens, hipotecados ou empe-
nhados, forem penhorados em execu-
c;ao por outro credor;
III - se cessarem, ou se se tomarem i11-
suficientes, as garantias do debito, fide-
juss6rias, ou reais, e o devedor, i11tima-
do, se negar a reforc;ii-las.
Pariigrafo unico. Nos casos deste arti-
go, se houver, 110 debito, solidariedade
passiva, nao se reputarii vencido quanta
aos outros devedores solventes.
Capitulo II - Do Pagamento em
Consigna~o
Art. 334. Co11sidera-se pagame11to, e
extingue a obrigac;ao, o dep6sito judi-
cial ou em estabelecimento banciirio da
coisa devida, nos casos e forma legais.
75 CODIGO CIVJL BILINGUE
Art. 335. A consig11a~iio tern lugar:
I - se o credor nao puder, ou, sem justa
causa, recusar receber o pagamento, ou
dar quita\'.iio na devida forma;
II - se o credor nao for, nem mandar re-
ceber a coisa no Iugar, tempo e condi-
1;ao devidos;
III - se o credor for incapaz de receber,
for desco11hecido, declarado ausente,
ou residir em lugar incerto ou de acesso
perigoso ou dificil;
IV - se ocorrer duvida sabre quern deva
legitimamente receber o objeto do pa-
gamento;
V - se pender litfgio sobre o objeto do
pagamento.
Art. 336. Para que a co11signa~ao tenha
for9a de pagamento, serii mister con-
corram, em relai;,:iio as pessoas, ao obje-
to, modo e tempo, todos os requisitos
sem OS quais nao evaJido 0 pagamento.
Art. 337. 0 dep6sito requerer-se-ii 110
lugar do pagamento, cessa11do, ta11to
que se efetue, para o depositante, os ju-
ros da dfvida e os riscos, salvo se forjul-
gado improcedente.
Art. 338. Enquanto o credor 11ao decla-
rar que aceita o dep6sito, ou 11iio o im-
pugnar, poderii o devedor requerer o le-
va11tamen to, pagando as respectivas
despesas, e subsisti11do a obriga\:iio
para todas as conseqilencias de direito.
Art. 339. Julgado procede11te o dep6si-
to, 0 devedor jii nao poderii levantii-lo,
embora o credor consinta, senao de
acordo com os outros devedores e fia-
dores.
Art. 335-339
Art. 335. Deposit may be made:
I - if the creditor cannot, or without just
cause refuses, to receive payment or give
acquittance in due form;
II - if the creditor is not present to receive
the thing, and does not send someone to
receive it, at the place and time and on the
conditions that he should;
III - if the creditor is incapable of receiving
payment, is unknown, has been declared
absent or resides in a place that is uncertain
or of dangerous or difficult access;
IV - if there is doubt as to who should
legitimately receive the thing to be paid;
V - if the thing to be paid is the subject of
pending litigation.
Art. 336. In order for deposit to be valid as
payment, all the requirements without
which payment would not be valid, with
respect to persons, the thing to be paid, the
manner of payment and the time of
payment, must be met.
Art. 337. Deposit shall be applied for in the
place where payment is due; as soon as
deposit is made, interest on the debt and the
risk of the debt cease for the depositor,
unless the deposit is adjudged invalid.
Art. 338. Until the creditor declares that he
accepts the deposit, or contests it, the debtor
may request the withdrawal of the deposit,
paying the associated expenses, and the
obligation then subsists for all purposes and
effects of the law.
Art. 339. Once the deposit is adjudged
valid, the debtor may no longer withdraw
the deposit, even if the creditor consents,
unless the other debtors and the guarantors
also agree.
Art. 340-346 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 340. A creditor who, after contesting
or accepting the deposit, acquiesces in
withdrawal, losses the preference and the
security that he had ~ith respect to the thing
deposited, and the co-debtors and
guarantors who did not agree to the
withdrawal are immediately relieved of
their obligation.
Art. 341. If the thing owed is a certain
immovable 01; object that must be delivered
in the p\ace it is located, the debtor may cite
the creditor to come (lnd receive it, or to
send someone else to receive it, on pain of
deposit of the thing.
Art.. 342. If the choice of an indeterminate
thing belongs to the creditor, he shall be
cited to do so, on pain of losing his right to
choose and deposit of the thing chosen by
the debtor; once the debtor has chosen, the
procedure es tab I ished in the preceding
article shall apply.
Art. 343. The expenses relatedto deposit, if
it is a~judged valiq, shall be borne by the
creditor; if the deposit is adjudged invalid,
they shall be borne by the qebtor.
Art. 344. The debtor of an obligation that is
being litigated may exonerate himself by
deposit, but if, having knowledge of the
litigation, he pays any of the claimant
creditors, he shall assume the risk of such
payment.
Art. 345. If the debt becomes due in the
course of litigation between creditors, each
of whom claims to exclude the others, any
of them may demand deposit of the debt.
Chapter III - Payment with
.Subrogation
Art. 346. Subrogation occurs by operation
of law in favor of:
I - a creditor who pays the debt of a
common debtor;
76
Art. 340. 0 crcdor que, dcpois de con-
testar a tide ou aceitar o dep6sito,
aquiescer no levantamento, perdcra a
preferencia ea garantia que lhe compe-
tiam com respeito a coisa consignada,
ficando para logo desobrigados os co-
devedores e fiadores que n1io tcnham.
anufdo.
Art. 341. Se a coisa devida for im6vcl
ou corpo certo que deva ser entregue no
mesmo lugar onde estii, podera o deve-
dor citar o credor P.ara vir ou mandar re-
cebe-la, sob pena de ser depositada.
Art. 342. Se a escolha da coisa indeter-
minada competir ao credor, sera ele ci-
tado para esse fim, sob comina9ao de
perder o direito e de ser depositada a
coisa que o devedor escolher; feita a es-
co lha pelo devedor, proceder-se-a
como no artigo antecedente.
Art. 343. As despesas com o dep6sito,
quando julgado procedente, correrao a
conta do credor, e, no caso contrario, a
conta do devedor.
Art. 344. 0 devedor de obriga\:ao liti-
giosa exonerar-se-ii mediante consig-
nay1io, mas, se pagar a qualquer dos
pretendidos credores. tendo conheci-
mento do litfgio, assumira o risco do pa-
gamento.
Art. 345. Se a dfvida se veneer, pen-
dendo litfgio entre credores que se pre-
tendem mutuamente excluir, podera
qualquer deles requerer a consigna~ao.
Capitulo III - Do Pagameuto com
Sub-Rogayao
Art. 346. A sub-roga~ao opera-se. de
pleno direito, em favor:
I - do credor que paga a dfvida do dcve-
dor comum;
77 CODIGO CIVIL BfLlNGUE
II - do adquirente do im6vel hipoteca-
do, que paga a credor hipotecario, bem
como do tcrceiro que cfeliva o paga-
mento para nao ser privado de dircito
sabre im6vel;
III - do terceiro interessado. que paga a
dfvida pela qua! eraou podia ser obriga-
do, no todo Ott em parte.
Art. 347. A sub-rogai;ao e convencio-
nal:
f - quando 0 Cl'edor fCcebe 0 pagamento
de terceiro e expressamente lhe transfe-
re todos os seus direitos;
II - quando terceira pessoa empresta ao
devedor a quantia precisa para solver a
dfvida, sob a condi\;fio expressa de ficar
o mutuante sub-rogado nos direitos do
credor satisfcito.
Art. 348. Na hip6tese do inciso I do ar-
tigo anrecedente, vigorara o disposto
quanto acessao do credito.
Art. 349. A sub-roga1;ao transfere ao
novo credor todos os direitos, a1;oes,
privilegios e garantias do primitivo, em
a
rcla~1io dfvida, contra 0 devedor prin-
cipal e os fiadores.
Art. 350. Na sub-roga~1io legal o sub-
rogado n1io podcra exercer os direitos e
as a~oes do credor, senao ate a soma
que river desembolsado para desobri-
gar o devedor.
Art. 351. 0 credor originilrio, s6 em
parte reembolsado, tera preferencia ao
sub-rogado, na cobram;a da divida res-
tante, se os bens do devedor n1io chega-
rem parasaldar inteiramente o que a um
e outro devcr.
Art. 347-351
II - the acquiror of an hypothecated
immovable property who pays the
hypothecary creditor, and a third party who
makes payment in order not to be deprived
of his right over the immovable property;
III - ah interested third party, who pays a
debt for which he is or could be obligated,
in whole or in part.
Art. 347. Subrogation occurs by
agreement:
I - when the creditor receives payment
from a third party and expressly transfers to
him all his rights;
II - when a third paity loans the debtor the
sum necessary to acquit the debt, on the
express condition that the lender shall be
subrogated in the rights of the satisfied
creditor.
Art. 348. In the case contemplated in item
I of the preceding article, the provisions
concerning assignment of rights shall
apply.
Art. 349. Subrogation transfers to the new
creditor all the original creditor's rights,
actions, privileges and security in relation
to the debt as against the principal debtor
and the guarantors.
Art. 350. In legal subrogation, the subrogee
may not exercise the rights and actions of
the creditor except to the amount that he
had to disburse to free the debtor from the
obligation.
Art. 351. An original creditor who is
reimbursed only in part has preference over
the subrogee in collecting the remaining
debt, if the debtor's property is insufficient
to pay in full what the debtor owes to each
of them.
Art. 352-358 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter IV - Imputation
of Payment
Art. 352. A person who owes two or more
debts of the same nature to a single creditor
has the right to indicate for which of them
he offers payment, if all are liquid and due.
Art. 353. If the debtor has not declared to
which of the liquid and due debts he wants
to impute payment, and he accepts an
acquittance for one of them, he shall not
have the right to complain of the imputation
made by the creditor, unless he prove~ that
the creditor committed violence or
wrongful conduct.
Art. 354. If there is both capital and interest
to be paid 1 payment shall be imputed first to
interest due and then to capital, unless
otherwise stipulated or the creditor gives an
acquittance for the capital.
Art. 355. If the debtor does not make tlie
indication referred to in art. 352, and the
acquittance is silent as to the debt to which
payment was imputed, payment shall be
imputed first t() liqµid and due debts. If all
the debts are liquid and due at the same
time, paymeffi" sh.ail be im~uted to the most
onerous.
Chapter V - Giving in
Payment
Art. 356. The creditor may consent to
receive in payment something other than
that which is owed.
Art. 357. Once the price of the thing given
in payment has been determined, the
relationship between the parties shall be
governed by the rules applying to contracts
of sale.
Art. 358. If a debt instrument is the thing
given in payment, the transfer of it brings
about an assignment.
78
Capitulo IV-Da lmputa~o do
Pagamento
Art. 352. A pessoaobrigada por do is ou
mais debitos da mesma natureza. a um
s6 erector, tern o direito de indicar a qual
deles oferece pagamento, se todos fo-
rem lfquidos e vencidos.
Art. 353. Nao tendo d devedor declara-
do em qual das dfvidas Hquidas e venci-
das quer imputar o pagarnento, se acei-
tar a quita~ao de uma delas, nao tern di-
reito a reclarnar contra a imputa~ao fei-
ta pelo erector, salvo provando haverele
cometido violencia ou dolo.
Art. 354. Havendo capital e juros, o pa-
garnento imputar-se-a prirneiro nos ju-
ros vencidos, e depois no capi~al, salvo
estipula~ao em contrario, ou se o erector
passar a quita~ao por conta do capital.
Art. 355. Seo devedor nao fizer a indi-
ca~ao do art. 352, ea qui~ao for omis-
sa quanto ll. impu~ao, esta se fara nas
dfvidas lfquidas e vencidas em primeiro
Jugar. Se as dfvidas forem todas lfqui-
das e vencidas ao rnesmo tempo, a im-
puta~ao far-se-a na mais onerosa.
CapftuloY - Da Da~o em
Pagamento
Art. 356. 0 erector pode consentir em
receber presta~ao diversa da que !he e
devida.
Art. 357. Determinado o pre~o da coisa
dada em pagarnento, as rela~oes entre
as partes regular-se-ao pelas norrnas do
contrato de corripra e venda.
Art. 358. Se for tftulo de credito a coisa
dada em pagamento, a transferencia im-
portara em cessao.
~·
79 CODIG.O CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 359. Seo erector for evicto da coisa
recebida em pagamento,.resrabelecer-
se-a a obrig~ao prirrtitiva, ficandd sem
efeito a quita~ao dada, ressalvados os
direitos de terceiros.
Capltulo VI - Da Nova~o
Art. 360. Da-se a nov~ao:
I - quando o devedor contrai com o ere-
ctor nova dfvida para extinguir e substi-
tuir a anterior;
II - quando novo devedor sucede ao an-
tigo, ficando este quite coin o credor;
III - quando, em virtude de obriga~ao
nova, outro credor e substitufdo ao anti-
go, ficando o devedor quiie com este.
Art. 361. Nao havendo iinimo de novar,
expresso ou tacito mas inequfvoco, a
segunda obriga~ao confirmasimples-
rnente a primeira.
Art. ·362. A nova~iio por substitui~ao
do devedor pode ser efetuada inde-
pendentemente de consentimento des-
te.
Art. 363. Se o novo devedor for insol-
vente, nao tern o erector, que o aceitou,
~1io regtessiva contra o primeiro, salvo
se este obteve por ma-fe a substitui~ao.
Art. 364. A nov~aci extingue os aces-
s6rios e garantias da dfvida, sempre que
nao houver estipula~ao em contrano.
Nao aproveitara, contlldo, ao credor
ressalvar o penhot, a hipoteca ou a anti-
crese, se os hens dados em garantia per-
tencerem a terceiro que nao foi parte na
nova~iio.
·-:J
/:t_; .
Art. 359-364
Art. 359. If the creditor is evicted from the
thing received in payment, the original
obligation shall revive, and the acquittance
given shall be without effect, saving the
rights of third parties.
Chapter VI-Novation
Art. 360. Novation occurs:
I - when the debtor contracts a new debt
with the creditor in order to extinguish and
replace an earlier debt;
II -: when a new debtor succeeds a former
debtor, and the latter is acquitted of his debt
to the creditor;
III - when, by virtue of a new obligation,
another creditor is substituted for the
former creditor, and the d~btor is acquitted
of his debt to the former.
Art. 361. If thereis no int.ention to novate,
which may be either express or tacit but
must be unequivocal, the second obligation
simply confirms the first.
Art. 362. Novation by substitution of the
debtor may be made even without his
consent.
Art. 363. If the new debtor is insolvent, the
creditor who accepted him does not have a
right of recourse against the first debtor,
unless the first debtor obtained the
substitution in bad faith.
Art.. 364. Novation extinguishes the
accessories of, and security for, the debt,
unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.
However, the creditor's reservation of any
pledge, hypothec or antichresis will not
benefit him ifthe property given as security
belongs to a third party who was not party
to the novation.
 Art. 365-373 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 365. If novation is made between a
creditor and one of two or more solidary
debtors, the preferences of, and security
for, the novated debt affect only the
property of the debtor who contracted the
hew obligation; the other solidary debtors
are thereby exonerated.
Art. 366. Novation made with the principal
debtor withou.t the consent of the guarantor
results in the guarantor's exoneration.
Art. 367. With the exception of obligations
that are simply voidable, null or extinct
obligations cannot be novated.
Chapter VII - Compensation
Art. 368. If two persons are at the same
time each other's debtor and creditor, the
two obligations are extinguished to the
extent that one compensates the other.
Art. 369. Compensation occurs between
debts that are liquid and due and for
fungible things.
Art. 370. Even when the fungible things
owed under two obligations are of the same
kind; compensation will not occur if they
?iffer in quality, when quality is specified
m the contract.
Art. 371. A debtor can only compensate
against tQe creditpr what the creditor owes
him; but a guarantor may compensate his
debt against a debt owed by his creditor to
the guaranteed debtor.
Art. 372. Grace periods, even when
consecrated by general use, do not prevent
compensation.
Art. 373. A difference in the cause of the
debts does not prevent compensation
except:
I - if the debt arises from dispossession,
theft or robbery;
80
Art. 365. Operada a novac;:iio entre o
credor e um dos devedores solidairios,
somente sobre os hens do que contrair a
nova obrigac;:ao subsistem as preferen-
cias e garantias do credito novado. Os
outros devedores solidarios ficam por
esse fato exonerados.
Art. 366. Importa exonerairao do fiador
a nova<;:ao feita sem seu consenso com
o devcdor principal.
Art. 367. Salvo as obrigai;fies simples-
mente anulaveis, nao podem ser objcto
de nova~ao obriga9oes nulas ou extin-
tas.
Capitulo VII - Da Compcnsa1;iio
Art. 368. Se duas pessoas forem ao
mesmo tempo credor e devedor uma da
outra, as duas obrigai;oes extinguem-
se, ate onde se compensarem.
Art. 369. A compensac;ao efetua-se en-
tre dfvidas liquidas, vencid;L<; c de coi-
sas fungfveis.
Art. 370. Embora sejam do mesmo ge-
nera as coisas fungiveis, objeto das
duas presta1:oes, niio se compensariio,
verificando-se que diferem na qualida-
de, quando especificada no contrato.
Art. 371. 0 devedor somente pode
compensar com o credor o que este !he
dever; mas o fiador pode compensar
suadfvidacom adeseu credorao afian-
c;ado.
Art. 372. Os prazos de favor, embora
consagrados pelo uso geral. nao obstan1
a compensac;:ao.
Art. 373. A diferen1:a de causa nas divi-
das nao impede a compensa<;:ao, exceto:
I - se provier de esbulho, furto ou rou-
bo;
81 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
II - se uma se originar de comodato, de-
posito ou alimentos;
Ill - se uma for de coisa nao suscetivel
de penhora.
Art. 374. (Revogado pela Lei n°
10.677, de 22.5.2003)
Art. 375. Nao baveni compensa1;ao
quando as partes, por mutuo acordo, a
exclufrem, ou no caso de rentlncia pre-
via de uma delas.
Art. 376. Obrigando-se por terceiro
uma pessoa, nao pode compensar essa
dfvida com a que o credor dele !he <le-
ver.
Art. 377. 0 devedor que, notificado,
nada opoe a cessao que o credor faz a
terceiros dos seus direitos, niio pode
opor ao cessionario a compensac;:iio,
que antes dacessao teria podido opor ao
cedente. Se. porem, a cessao !he nao ti-
ver sido notificada, podera opor ao ces-
sionario compensai;ao do credito que
antes tinha contra o cedente.
Art. 378. Quando as duas dfvidas nao
sao pagaveis no mesmo lugar, nao se
podem compensar sem deduc;:ao das
despesas necessarias aoperai;ao.
Art. 379. Sendo a mesma pessoa obri-
gada por varias dividas compensaveis,
serao observadas, no compensa-las, as
regras estabelecidas quanto a imputa-
~ao do pagamento.
Art. 380. Nao se ad mite a compensai;:ao
em prejufzo de direito de .terceiro. 0 de-
vedor que se tome credor do seu credor,
depois de penhorado 0 credito deste,
nao pode opor ao exeqtiente a comper:-
sai;iio, de que contra o pr6prio credor
disporia.
Art. 374-380
II - if one of the debts originates in a loan
for use, deposit or alimentary obligations;
III - if one of the debts is for a thing not
subject to seizure.
Art. 374. (Revoked by Law 10,677 of
22/05/2003)
Art. 375. Compensation shall not occur
when the parties, by mutual agreement,
exclude it or in the case of prior waiver by
one of them.
Art. 376. If a person obligates himself to
the benefit of a third party, he cannot
compensate the debt against a debt owed by
the creditor to the third party.
Art. 377. A debtor who, after notification,
does not oppose the creditor's assignment
of his rights to third parties, cannot oppose
the assignee's claim by using the
compensation of debts that he could have
made against the assignor. If, however, the
assignment was not notified to the debtor,
he may oppose the assignee's claim on the
basis of the compensation of debts that
could have been made against the assignor.
Art. 378. When the two debts are not
payable in the same place, they cannot be
compensated without deduction of the
expenses necessary to the transaction.
Art. 379. If the same person owes various
debts subject to compensation, the
compensation shall be governed by the
rules established for imputation of
payment.
Art. 380. Compensatio·1 to the prejudice of
the rights of third parties is not admitted. A
debtor who becomes a creditor of his
creditor after the debt owed to the creditor
has become subject to a judicial lien cannot
oppose the execution creditor's claim by
using the compensation that the debtor
might have made against the creditor
himself.
 Art. 381-388 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter VIII - Confusion
Art'. 381. When the qualities of debtor and
creditor are united in the same person, the
obligation is extinguished.
Art. 382. Confusion can occur with respect
to the whole of the debt, or only part of it.
Art. 383. Confusion that occurs in the
person of a solidary creditor or debtor
extinguishes the obligation only to the
extent of the person's share in the debt, and
solidarity subsists as to the remainder.
Art. 384. When confusion ceases, the
earlier obligation revives, together with all
its accessories.
Chapter IX - Remission
of Debts
Art. 385, Remission of a debt, if accepted
by the debtor, extinguishes the obligation,
but without prejudice to third parties.
Art. 386. The voluntary return of the title of
an obligation, when it is a private writing,
proves the discharge of the debtor and his
co-obligors, if the creditor has capacity to
alienate an'd the debtor has capacity to
acquire.
Art. 387. Voluntary restitution of a pledged
thing proves the creditor's release of the
real security, not the extinction of the debt.
Art. 388. Remission granted to one of the
co~debtors extinguishes his share of the
debt such that, even if the creditor reserves
solidary liability against the others, he
cannot claim the debt without deducting the
remitted share ..
82
Capitulo VIII - Da Confusiio
Art. 381. Extingue-se a obriga\:iiO, des-
de que na mesma pessoa se confundam
as qualidades de credor e devedor.
Art. 382. A confusiio pode verificar-se
arespeito de todaadfvida, ou s6 de par-
te dela.
Art. 383. A confusao operada na pes-
soa do credor ou devedor solidiirio s6
extingue a obriga~ao ate a concorrencia
da respectiva parte no credito, ou na df-
vida, subsistindo quanto ao mais a soli-
dariedade.
Art. 384. Cessando a confusao, para
logo se restabelece, com todos os seus
acess6rios, a obriga~iio anterior.
Capitulo IX - Da Remissiio das
Dfvidas
Art. 385. A remissiio da dfvida, aceita
pelo devedor, extingue a obriga\:iio,
mas sem prejufzo de terceiro.
Art. 386. A devolu\:iio voluntiiria do tf-
tulo da obriga~ao, quando por escrito
particular, prova desonera9iio do deve-
dor e seus co-obrigados, se o credor for
capaz de alienar, e o devedor capaz de
adquirir.
Art. 387. A restitui\:i'iO voluntiiria do
objeto empenhado prova a rem1ncia do
credor agarantia real, nao a extin~ao da
dfvida.
Art. 388; A remissao concedida a um
dos co-devedores extingue a dfvida na
parte a ele correspondente; de modo
que, ainda reservando o credor a solida-
riedade contra os outros, jii !hes nao
pode cobrar o debito sem dedu9iio da
parte remitida.
83 CODIGO CIVIL BlLINGOE
Titulo IV - Do Inadimplemento das
Obrigai,;iies
Capitulo I - Disposii,;oes Gerais
Art. 389. Nao cumprida a obriga'<ao,
responde o devedor por perdas e danos,
mais juros c atualiza<;iio monetiiria se-
gundo Indices oficiais regularmente es-
tabelecidos, e honoriirios de advogado.
Art. 390. Nas obriga\:oes negativas o
devedor chavido por inadimplente des-
de o dia em que executou o ato de que
se devia abster.
Art. 391. Pelo inadimplemento das
obrigm;:oes respondem todos os bens do
devedor.
Art. 392. Nos contratos bcneficos, res-
ponde por simples culpa o contratante,
a quern o contrato aproveite, e por dolo
aquele a quern niio favore9a. Nos con-
tratos onerosos, responde cada uma das
partes por culpa, salvo as exce<;oes pre-
vistas em lei.
Art. 393. 0 devedor niio responde pe-
los prejufzos resultantes de caso fortui-
to ou fon;:a maior, se expressamente
nao se houver por eles responsabiliza-
do.
Pariigrafo unico. 0 caso fortuito OU de
fon;a maior verifica-se no fato necessa-
rio, cujos efeitos nao era possfvel evitar
ou impedir.
Capitulo II- Da Mora
Art. 394. Considera-se em mora o de-
vedor que niio efetuar o pagamento e o
credor que.niio quiser recebe-lo no tem-
po, lugar e forma que a lei ou a conven-
9iio estabelecer.
Art. 395. Responde o devedor pelos
prejufzos a que sua morn der causa,
maisjuros, atualizac;ao dos valores mo-
netarios segundo indices oficiais regu-
larmente estabelecidos, e honorarios de
advogado.
Art. 389-395
Title V - Failure to Perform
Obligations
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 389. If an obligation is not performed,
the debtor is liable for losses and damage,
together with interest and inflation
adjustment according to duly established
official indices, as well as attorney's fees.
Art. 390. In negative obligations, the
debtor is taken to be in breach from the day
that he performed the act from which he
should have abstained.
Art. 391. All the debtor's property is liable
for his failure to perform his obligations.
Art. 392. In gratuitous contracts, the
contracting party benefited by the contract
is liable for simple fault; the party not
benefited is liable for wrongful conduct. In
onerous contracts, each of the parties is
liable for his fault, excepted in the cases
provided for by law.
Art. 393. The debtor is not liable for losses
resulting from a fortuitous event or force
majeure, unless he has expressly made
himself liable therefor.
Sole paragraph. A fortuitous event or force
majeure is an inevitable event, the effects
of which were not possible to avoid or
prevent.
Chapter II - Default
Art. 394. A debtor who does not make
payment, and a creditor who will not
receive payment, at the time and place and
in the form that the law or their agreement
establishes is considered to be in default.
Art. 395. The debtor is liable for the losses
that his default causes, together with
interest and inflation adjustment according
to duly established official indices, as well
as attorney's fees.
Art. 396-401 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. If, due to default,
performance becomes useless to the
creditor, the creditor may reject it and
demand satisfaction of losses and damage
sustained.
Art. 396. If no act or omission is imputable
to the debtor, he is not considered to be in
default. · emmora.
Art. 397. Failure to perform a positive and
liquid obligation at its term puts the debtor
in default by operation of law.
Sole paragraph. If there is no term, the
debtor is put in default by judicial
interpellation or extrajudicial notice.
Art. 398. In obligations arising from an
illicit act, the debtor is deemed to be in
default from the moment he committed the
act.
Art. 399. A debtor in default is liable for
impossibility of performance, even though
the impossibility results from a fortuitous
event or force majeure, if it occurs during
the delay in performance, unless he proves
absence of fault, or that the damage would
have been sustained even if the obligation
had been performed on time.
Art. 400, The creditor's default releases a
debtor who is free of wrongful conduct
from liability for preservation of the thing,
obligates the creditor to reimburse the
expenses made in preserving it, and
subjects the creditor to receiving the thing
at the valuation most favorable to the
debtor, if its value varies between the day
established for payment and the day on
which payment is effected.
Art. 401. Default is purged:
I - by the debtor, when he offers
performance together with the amount of
losses arising from the day the offer is
made;
84
Paragrafo unico. Se a presta1;ao, devido
a mora, se tornar inutil ao erector, este
podera enjeita-la, e exigir a satisfai;iio
das perdas e danos.
Art. 396. Nao havendo fato ou omissao
imputavel ao devedor, niio incorre este
Art. 397. 0 inadimplemento da obriga-
\;llO, positiva e liquida. no seu rermo,
constitui de plcno direito em mora ode-
vedor.
Paragrafo unico. Nao havendo termo, a
morase constitui mediante interpela;;fto
judicial ou extrajudicial.
Art. 398. Nas obriga\;OCS provenientes
de ato ilfcito, considera-sc o devedor
em mora, desde que o praticou.
Art. 399. 0 devedor em mora responde
pela impossibilidade da presta1;fto, em-
bora essa impossibilidade resulte de
caso fortuito ou de for1;a maior, se estes
ocorrerem durantc o atraso; salvo se
provar isengfto de culpa, ou que o dano
sobreviria ainda quando a obriga\(iio
fosse oportunamente desempenhada.
Art. 400. A mora do credor subtrai o
a
devedor isento de dolo responsabili-
dade pela conserva1;ao da coisa, obriga
o erector a ressarcir as despesas empre-
gadas em conserva-la, e sujeita-o a re-
cebe-la pela estimayao mais favoravel
ao devedor, se o seu valor oscilar entre
o dia estabelecido para o pagamento e o
da sua efctivai;ao.
Art. 401. Purga-se a mora:
l - por parte do devedor, oferecendo
este a pres!a~ao mais a importancia dos
prejuizos decorrentes do dia da oferta;
85 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
II - por partc do erector, oferecendo-se
este a receber o pagamcnto e sujeitan-
do-sc aos efeiros da mora ate a mesma
data.
Capitulo III - Das Pcrdas c Danos
Art. 402. Salvo as exce\;oes exprcssa-
mente prcvistas em lei, as perdas e da-
nos devidas ao credor abrangcm, alcm
do quc ele efotivamente perdeu. o que
razoavelmemc deixou de lucrar.
Art. 403. Ainda quc a inexecw;ao re-
sulte de dolo do devcdor, as perdas e
danos s6 incluem os prejufzos efetivos
cos lucros cessantes por efeito dcla di-
reto e imediato, sem prejuizo do dispos-
to na lei processual.
Art. 404. As perdas e danos, nas obri-
gai;:oes de pagamento em dinheiro, se-
rfto pagas com atualiza1;ao monelaria
segundo Indices oficiais regularmente
estabelecidos, abrangcndo juros, custas
e honorarios de advogado, sem prejulzo
da pena convencional.
Padgrafo iinico. Provado que os juros
da mora nao cobrem o prejufzo, e nao
havcndo pena convencional, pode o
juiz conceder ao erector indeniza~fto su-
plementar.
Art. 405. Contam-se os juros de mora
dcsde a cita1;ao inicial.
Capitulo IV - Dos Juros Legais
Art. 406. Quando os juros morat6rios
nao forem convencionados, ou,o forem
sem taxa estipulada. ou quando provie-
rem de dctermina~ao da lei, serao fixa-
dos segundo a taxa quc estiver em vigor
para a mora do pagamento de impostos
a
devidos Fazenda Nacional.
Art 402-406
II - by the creditor, when he offers to
receive performance and subjects himself
to the effect<; of the delay, up to the date of
his offer.
Chapter III - Losses and Damages
Art. 402. Except where otherwise
expressly provided for by law, the losses
and damages owed to the creditor cover, in
addition to what he effectively lost, that
which he reasonably failed to profit.
Art. 403. Even where non-performance
results from the debtor's wrongful conduct,
losses and damages only include effective
losses and lost profit that are the direct and
immediate effect of non-performance,
without prejudice to the provisions of the
legislation governing procedure.
Art. 404. In obligations for payment in
money, losses and damages shall be
adjusted for inflation according to duly
established official indices, and shall
encompass interest, costs and attorney's
fees, without prejudice to contractual
penalties.
Sole paragraph. If it is proved that
late-payment interest does not cover the
loss, and there is no contractual penalty, the
judge may grant supplementary
indemnification to the creditor.
Art. 405~ Late-payment interest accrues
from the initial citation.
Chapter IV - Legal Interest
Art. 406. When late-payment interest has
not been agreed to, or has been agreed to but
the rate has not been stipulated, or when it
arises by law, it shall be fixed at the rate that
is then in effect for late payment of taxes
owed to the National Treasury.
Art. 407-413 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE 86 87 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGOE Art. 414-418

Art. 407. Even if loss is not alleged, the · Art. 407. Ainda que se nao alegue pre- Art. 414. Sendo indivisfvel a obriga- Art. 414. If the obligation is indivisible, all
debtor is obligated to pay late-payment juizo, eobrigado 0 devedor aosjuros da 9ao, todos os devedores, caindo em fal- the debtors incur the penalty if one of them
interest accruing both on debts in money mora que se contariio assim as d!vidas ta um deles, incorrerao na pena; mas is at fault; but the penalty may be demanded
and on other kinds of obligations, once a em dinheiro, como as prestas;oes de ou- esta s6 se podera demandar integral- in full only from the debtor at fault, with
pecuniary value has been fixed by judicial tra natureza. uma vcz que !hes esteja fi- mente do culpado, respondendo cada each of the others being liable only for his
decision, expert appraisal or agreement xado o valor pecuniario por senten1;a um dos outros somente pela sua quota. share.
between the parties. judicial, arbitramento, ou acordo entre
as partes. Paragrafo unico. Aos nao culpados fica Sole paragraph. The debtors who are not at
reservada a as;ao regressiva contra aquele fault have a right ofrecourse against the one
Chapter V - Penalty Clauses Capitulo V - Da CUiusula Penal que deu causa aaplicai;;ao da pena. who caused the penalty to apply.
Art. 408. A debtor incurs the penalty Art. 408. lncorre de pleno direito ode- Art. 415. Quando a obrigas;ao for divisi- Art. 415. When the obligation is divisible,
provided for in the contract by operation of vedor na clausula penal, desde que, cul- ve!, s6 incorre na penao devedor ou o her- only the debtor who breaches it, or his heir,
law if, by his fault, he fails to perform the posamente, deixe de cumprir a obriga- deiro do devedor que a infringir, e propor- incurs the penalty, in proportion to his share
obligation or puts himself in default. s;ao ou se constitua em mora. cionalmeme asua parte na obrigar,:ao. in the obligation.
Art. 409. A penalty clause stipulated Art. 409. A clausula penal estipulada Art. 416. Para exigira penaconvencio- Art. 416. lt is not necessary that the creditor
together with the obligation, or in a later conjuntamente com a obrigm;ao, ou em nal, nao e necessario que o credor ale- allege loss in order to demand a contractual
instrument, may refer to a complete failure a
ato posterior, pode referir-se inexecu- gue prejufzo. penalty.
to perform the oblig11tion, or to failure to a
~iio completa da obriga~ao. de alguma
perform some special clause, or simply to clausuJa especial OU simpJesmente a
Paragrafo unico. Ainda que o prejufzo Sole paragraph. Even if the loss exceeds the
exceda ao previsto na clausula penal, nao amount provided for in the penalty clause, the
delay in performance. mora.
pode o credor exigir indenizas;ao suple- creditor may not demand supplementary
Art. 410. When a penalty clause is Art. 410. Quando se estipular a clausu- mentar se assim niio foi coiwencionado. indemnification if it was not agreed to. If it
stipulated for the case of complete failure to la penal para o caso de total inadimple- Seo tiver sido, a pena vale como minima was, the penalty serves as a minimum
perform the obligation, the penalty shall be mento da obrigm;:ao, esta converter-se- da indeniza9ao, competindo ao credor indemnification, and it is for the creditor to
. converted into an alternative, to the a em altemativa a beneffcio do credor. provar o prejufzo excedente. prove loss in excess of that amount.
creditor's benefit. Capitulo VI - Das Arras ou Sinai Chapter VI- Earnest or Down Payment
Art. 411. When a penalty clause is Art. 411. Quando se estipular a clausu- Art. 417. Se,,por ocasiao da conclusiio Art. 417. If at the time a contract is entered
stipulated for the case of delay in la penal para o caso de mora, ou em se- do conttato, uma parte der aoutra, a ti- into, one of the parties gives to the other, as
performance, or as special security for a gurans;a especial de ourra clausula de- tulo de arras, dinheiro ou outro hem earnest, money or other movable property,
certain other clause, the creditor may, at his terminada, tera o credor o arbitrio de move!, deverao as arras, em caso de and the contract is performed, the earnest
discretion, demand satisfaction of the exigir a satisfar;ao da pena cominada, execus;ilo. ser restituidas ou computa- must either be returned or counted toward
penalty imposed, together with juntamente com o desempenho da obri- das na prestai;iio devida, se do mesmo performance, if the earnest is the same kind
performance of the principal obligation. gai;;ao principal. genera da principal. .of thing as the principal obligation.
Art. 412. The value of the sanction Art. 412. 0 valor da comina~ao impos- Art. 418. Se a parte que deu as arras nilo Art. 418. If the party that gave earnest does
imposed ih a penalty clause may not exceed ta na clausula penal nao pode exceder o executar o contrato, podera a outra te-lo not perform the contract, the other party
the value of the principal obligation. da obriga~ao principal. por desfeito, retendo-as; se a inexecu- may take the contract to be undone and
i;ao for de quern recebeu as arras, pode- retain the earnest; if it is the party who
Art. 413. A penalty must be reduced by the Art. 413. A penalidade deve serreduzi- ra quern as deu haver o contrato por received the earnest who fails to perform,
judge, on an equitable basis, if the principal da eqilitativamente pelo juiz se a obri- desfeito, e exigir sua devolus;ao mais o the party who gave the earnest may take the
obligation has been performed in part, or if gai;:ao principal tiver sido cumprida em equivalente, com atualizai;:ao monetaria contract to be undone and demand the
the amount of the penalty is manifestly parte, ou se o montante da penalidade segundo indices oficiais regularmente r.eturn of the earnest, plus an equal amount,
excessive, considering the nature and for manifestamente excessivo, tendo-se estabelecidos, juros e honoraries de ad- as well as adjustment for inflation
purpose of the transaction. em vistaanatureza e afinalidade done- vogado. according to duly established official
g6cio. indices, interest and attorney's fees.
Art 419-426 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 419. The innocent party may apply for
supplementary indemnification, if he
proves a greater loss, with the earnest
serving as a minimum amount. The
innocent party may also demand
performance ofthe contract, as well as
losses and damages, with the earnest
serving as a minimum amount of
indemnification.
Art. 420. If a right to recede is not
stipulated in the contract for either party,
the earnest or down payment has a solely
indemnificatory function. In such a case,
the party who gave the earnest loses it to the
other; and the party who received it must
give it back, plus an equal amount. In both
cases there is no right to supplementary
indemnification.
Title V - Contracts in General
Chapter I - General Provisions
Section I..., Preliminary provisions
Art. 421. The freedom to contract shall be
exercised by virtue, and within the limits, of
the sociai function of contracts.
Art. 422. The contracting parties are bound
to observe the principles of probity and
good faith, both in entering into the contract
and in its performance.
Art, 423. When there are ambiguous or
contradictory clauses in a contract of
adhesion, the interpretation most favorable
to the adhering party shall be adopted.
Art. 424. In contracts of adhesion, clauses
that !';tipulate that the adhering party has
waived, in advance, rights arising out of the
nature of the transaction are nul.
Art. 425. It is licit for parties to enter into
atypical contracts, subject to the general
rules established in this Code.
Art. 426. The inheritance of a living person
may not be the object of a contract.
88
Art. 419. A parte inoccnte pode pedir
indeniza9ao suplementar, se provar
maior prejuizo, valendo as arras corno
taxa minima. Pode. tambem, a parte
inocente exigir a execu9ao do contrato,
com as perdas edanos, valendo as arras
coma o minima da indenizw;ao.
Art. 420. Sc no contrato for estipulado
o dircito de arrependimento para qual-
quer das partes, as arras ou sinal teriio
fun~ao µnicamente indcnizat6ria. Nes-
te caso, quern as deu perde-las-a em bc-
neficio da outra. parte: e quern as recc-
beu devolve-las-a, mais o equivalente.
Em ambos os casos niio havenidireim a
indeniza<;ao suplementar.
Titulo V - Dos Contratos em Geral
Capitulo I - Disposi<;1ies Gerais
Se<;iia I - Preliminares
Art. 421. A I iberdade de contratar ser:i
exercida em razao e nos limites da fun-
9ao social do contrato.
Art. 422. Os coiltratantes sao obrigados
·a guardar, assim na conclusiio do con-
trato, con1o em sua execu~iio, os princf-
pios de probidade e boa-fe.
Art. 423. Quando houver no contrato
de adesao clausulas arnbfguas ou con-
tradit6rias, dever-se-aadotar a interpre-
ta9ao mais favoravel ao aderente.
Art. 424. Nos contratos de adcsao, silo
nulas as clausulas que estipulem a re-
nuncia antecipada do aderente a direito
resultante da natureza do neg6cio.
Art. 425. E licito as partes estipular
contratos atipicos, observadas as nor-
mas gerais fixadas neste C6digo.
Art. 426. Nao pode ser objeto de con-
trato a heran9a de pessoa viva.
89 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Se<;iio II - Da Forma1;iio dos
Contratos
Art. 427. A proposta de contrato obriga
o proponente, se o contrario nao resul-
tar dos termos dela, da natureza do ne-
g6cio, ou das circunstiincias do caso.
Art. 428. Deixa de ser obrigat6ria a
proposta:
I - se, feita sem prazo a pessoa prcsente,
nao foi irnediatamente aceita Conside-
ra-se tambem presente a pessoa que
contrata por telefone ou por meio de co-
munica~ao semelhante;
II - se, feita sem prazo a pessoa ausente,
tiver decorrido tempo suficiente para
chegar a resposta ao conhecimento do
proponente;
III - se. feita a pessoa ausente, nao tiver
si<lo expedida a resposta dentro do pra-
zo dado;
IV - se, antes dela, ou simultaneamente,
chegar ao conhecimento da outra parte
a retratagao do proponente.
Art. 429. A oferta ao publico equivale
a proposta quando encerra os requisitos
esscnciais ao contrato, salvo se o con-
trario resultar das circunstiincias ou dos
usos.
Paragrafo unico. Pode revogar-se a
oferta pela mesma via de sua divulga-
~ao, desde que ressal vada esta faculda-
de na oferta realizada.
Art. 430. Se a aceita~lio, por circuns-
tancia imprevista, chegar tarde ao co-
nhecimento do proponente, este comu-
nid-lo-a imediatamente ao aceitante,
sob pena de responder por perdas e da-
nos.
Art. 427-430
Section II - Formation of
Contracts
Art. 427. An offer to contract obligates the
offeror, unless the contrary results from the
terms of the offer, the nature of the
transaction or the circumstances of the
case.
Art. 428. The offer ceases to be binding:
I- if it was made without a term to a person
then present and was. not immediately
accepted. A person who contracts by
telephone or similar means of
communication is considered to be present;
II - if it was made without a term to an
absent person and sufficient time has
passed for an answer to arrive and become
known to the offeror;
Ill if it was made to an absent person and
an answer was not sent within the time
period given;
IV - if the offerer's retraction becomes
known to the other party before or
simultaneously with the offer.
Art. 429. A public offer is equivalent to an
offer to contract if it contains the
requirements essential to the contract,
unless the contrary results from the
circumstances or usage.
Sole paragraph. A public offer may be
revoked by the same means it was
.published, provided that that right was
reserved in the offer that was made.
Art. 430. If, for unforeseen circumstances,
acceptance becomes known to the offerer
late, he must communicate that fact
immediately to the accepting party, on pain
of liability for losses and damage.
Art. 431-436 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 431. Acceptance given outside the
term for acceptance or with additions,
restrictions or modifications, constitutes a
new offer.
Art. 432. If the transaction is one which
customarily is not expressly accepted, or if
the offerer has waived express acceptance,
the contract is deemed to be concluded if
refusal does not arrive ih time.
Art. 433. Acceptance is considered not to
exist if the accepting party's retraction
becomes known to the offerer before or
simultaneously with the acceptance.
Art. 434. Contracts between absent parties
are perfected from the time acceptance is
sent except:
I - in the case contemplated in the
preceding article;
II - if the offerer has undertaken to wait for
an answer;
III- if the acceptance does not arrive within
the agreed time period.
Art. 435. The contract is deemed to have
been entered into in the place in which it
was offered.
Section III - Stipulations in Favor of
Third Parties
Art. 436. A person who makes a stipulation
in favor of a third party may demand
performance of the obligation.
Sole paragraph. The third party in whose
favor the obligation was stipulated is also
permitted to demand performance,
although he is subject to the conditions and
rules of the contract, if he consents to it, and
the stipulating party does not change the
favored party within the terms of art. 438.
90
Art. 431. A aceitar;ao fora do prazo,
com adir;oes, restrir;oes, ou modifica-
r;oes, importara nova proposta.
Art. 432. Se o neg6cio for daqueles em
que nao seja costume a aceitar;ao ex-
pressa, ou o proponente a tiver dispen-
sado, reputar-se-a conclufdo o contrato,
nao chegando a tempo a recusa.
Art. 433. Considera-se inexistente a
aceitm;:ao, se antes dela ou com ela chc-
gar ao proponente a retratar;ao do acei-
tante.
Art. 434. Os contratos entre ausentes
tomam-se perfeitos desde que a aceita-
r;ao eexpedida, exceto:
I - no caso do artigo antecedente;
II - se o proponente se houver compro-
metido a esperar resposta;
III - se ela niio chegar no prazo conven-
cionado.
Art. 435. Reputar-se-a celebrado o
contrato no lugar em que foi proposto.
Se1;ao ID- Da Estipula1;ao em
Favor de Terceiro
Art. 436. 0 que estipula em favor de
terceiro pode exigir o cumprimento da
obrigar;ao.
Paragrafo unico. Ao terceiro, em favor
de quern se estipulou a obrigac;:ao, tam-
bem epermitido exigi-la, ficando. toda-
via, sujeitoas condir;oes e normas do
contrato, se a ele anuir, e o estipulante
nao o inovar nos termos do art. 438.
91 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGOE
Art. 437. Se ao terceiro, em favor de
quern se fez o contrato, se deixar o di-
reito de reclamar-lhe a execu!(fio, nao
podera o estipulante exonerar o deve-
dor.
Art. 438. 0 estipulante pode reservar-
se o direito de substituir o terceiro de-
signado no contrato, independentemen-
te da sua anuencia e dado outro contra-
tante.
Paragrafo unico. A substituii;:ao pode
ser feita por ato entre vivos ou por dis-
posir;ao de iiltima vontade.
Se1;ao IV - Da Promessa de
Fato de Tcrceiro
Art. 439. Aquele que tiver prometido
fato de terceiro respondera por perdas e
danos, quando este o nao executar.
Paragrafo unico. Tai responsabilidade
nao existira se o terceiro for o cfinjuge
do promitente, depe11dehdo da stia
anuencia o ato a ser praticado, e desde
que, pelo regime do casamento, a inde-
nizai;:ao, de algum modo, venha a recair
sobre os seus hens.
Art. 440. Nenhuma obriga!(iiO havera
para quern se comprometer por outrem.
se este, depois de se ter obrigado, faltar
aprestar;ao.
Se~o V - Dos Vicios Rcdibltorios
Art. 441. A coisa recebida em virtude
de contrato comutativo pode ser enjei-
tada por vfcios ou defeitos ocnltos, que
a tomem impr6pria ao USO a que edes-
tinada, ou lhe diminuam o valor.
Paragrafo unico. E aplicavel a disposi-
r;ao deste artigo as doai;:oes onerosas.
Art. 442. Em vez de rejeitar a coisa, re-
dibindo o contrato (art. 441 ), pode o ad-
quirente reclamar abatimento no prer;o.
Art. 437-442
Art. 437. If the right to claim performance
from the debtor is left to the third party in
whose favor the contract was made, the
stipulating party may not exonerate the
debtor.
Art. 438. The stipulating party may reserve
to himself the right to substitute the third
party designated in the contract, even
without the consent of the third party and
the other contracting party.
Sole paragraph. The substitution may be
made by inter vivos act or by disposition of
last will.
Section IV - Promises of
Performance by Another
Art. 439. A person who has promised that a
third party will perform a certain act is
liable for losses and damage if the third
party does not perform it
Sole paragraph. The liability will not exist
where the third party is the spouse of the
promissor, and the transaction depends on
the spouse's consent, if, under the
matrimonial regime, the indemnification in
some way would affect the spouse's
property.
Art. 440. A person who promises for
another will have no obligation if the other,
after having obligated himself, fails to
perform.
Section V - Redhibitory Defects
Art. 441. A thing received by virtue of a
commutative contract may be rejected for
latent defects or vices that make the thing
unfit for the use for which it was intended
or that diminish its value.
Sole paragraph. The provision in this article
is applicable to onerous gifts.
Art. 442. Instead of rejecting the thing with
redhibition of the contract (art. 441), the
acquiror may claim a reduction in price.
Art. 443-446 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art 443. If the alienor knows of the vice or
defect in the thing, he shall restitute what he
received with losses and damages; if he did
not know of it, he shall restitute only the
amount received, plus the expenses of the
contract.
Art. 444. The alien or's liability subsists
even if the thing perishes iil the alienee's
possession, if it perishes becallse of a latent
defect that existed at the time of deliv~ry.
Art. 445. The acquiror loses the right to
obtain redhibition or a reduction in price in
thirty days, if the thing is moveable, and in
one year, if it is immovable, in both cases
from effective delivery; if it was already in
the acquiror's possession, the tim.~ is
counted from the date of alienation and is
reduced by half.
§ 1. When the defect, by its nature, could
only be known .later, the time is counted
from the moment at which the acqµiror
became aware pf it, for a period of no more
than op~ hµndred and eighty days, in the
case of movable property, and of no more
th~n one year, for immovable property.
§ 2. In the sale of animals, the term of
guarantees for latent defects shall be those
established by special legislation or, if none
exists, by local practice; the provisions of
the preceding paragraph shall apply if there
are no rules governing the matter.
Art. 446, The time periods referred to in the
preceding article shall not.run while a
guarantee clause is in effect; but the
acquiror must inform the alienor of the
defect within the thirty days following its
discovery, on pain of peremption.
92
Art. 443. Se o alienante conhecia o vi-
cio ou defeito da coisa, restituini o que
recebeu com perdas e danos; se o nao
conhecia, tao-somente restituira o valor
recebido, mais as despesas do contrato.
Art. 444. A responsabilidade do alie-
nahte subsiste ainda que a coisa perei.;a
em poder do alienatarici; se perecer por
'vfcio oculto, ja existente ao tempo da
tradii,;ao.
Art. 445. 0 adquirente decai do direito
de obter a redibi\!iio ou abatimento no
pret;o no prazo de trinta dias se a coisa
for move!, e de um ano se for im6vel,
contado da entrega efetiva; se ja estava
na posse, o prazo conta-se da aliena\(iio,
reduzido ametade.
§ 1° Quando o vfcio, por sua natureza,
s6 puder ser conhecido.mais tarde, o
prazo contar-se-a do momento em que
dele tiver ciencia, ate 0 prazo maximo
de cento e oitenta dias, em se tratando
de bens moveis; e de um ano, para os
im6veis.
§ 2° Tratando-se de venda de animais,
os prazos de garantia por vfcios ocultos
seriio os estabelecidos em lei especial,
ou, na falta desta, pelos usos locais,
aplicando-se o disposto no paragrafo
antecedente se niio houver regras disci-
plinando a materia
Art. 446. Nao correriio os prazos do ar-
tigo antecedente na constancia de clau-
sula de garantia; mas o adquirente deve
denunciar o defeito ao alienante nos
trinta dias seguintes ao seu descobri-
mento, sob pena de decadencia.
93 CODIGO CIVIL BILTNGUE
Se\!iio VI- Da Evic~o
Art. 447. Nos contratos onerosos, o
alienante responde pela evic1;iio. Sub-
siste esta garantia ainda que a aquisi~ao
se tenha realizado em hasta publica.
Art. 448, Podem as partes, par clausula
expressa, refori;:ar, diminuir ·qu excluir
a responsabilidade pela evic\!iio.
Art. 449. Nao obstante a clausula que
exclui a garantia contra a eviq:ao, se
esta se.der, tern direito o evicto a recc-
ber o pre\(O que pagou pela coisa evicta,
se niio soube do risco da evic<,:iio, au,
dele informado, niio o assumiu.
Art. 450. Salvo estipula<(iio em contra-
rio, tern direito o evicto, alem da resti-
tui9iio integral do pre\!o ou das quantias
que pagou:
I - a indeniza\!aO dos frutos que tiver
sido obrigado a restituir;
ll - a indeniZa\!aO pelas despesas dos
contratos e pelos prejufzos que direta-
mente resultarem da evic9iio;
III - as custas judiciais e aos honorarios
do advogado par ele constitufdo.
Paragrafo unico. 0 prei.;o, seja a evic-
i;ao total OU parcia[, Sera 0 do valor da
coisa, na epoca em que se evenceu, e
proporcional ao desfalque sofrido, no
caso de eviq:iio parcial.
Art. 451. Subsiste para o alienante esta
obrigai;:iio, ainda que a coisa alienada
esteja deteriorada, exceto havendo dolo
do adquirente.
Art. 452. Seo adquirente tiver auferido
vantagens das deteriorar;oes, e niio tiver
sido condenado a indeniza-las, o valor
das vantagens sera deduzido da quantia
que !he houver de dar o alienante.
Art. 447-452
Section VI - Eviction
Art. 447. In onerous contracts, the alienor
is liable for eviction. This guarantee
subsists even when the acquisition was
made at a public auction.
Art. 448. The parties may, by express
provision, strengthen, reduce or exclude
liability for eviction.
Art. 449. Notwithstanding any clause that
excludes the guarantee against eviction, if
eviction occurs, the evicted party has the
right to receive the price that he paid for the
thing from which he was evicted, if he did
not know of the risk of eviction or, if
infonned of it, did not assume the risk.
Art. 450. Unless otherwise stipulated, the
evicted party has the right, in addition to
full restitution of the price or amounts that
he paid:
I - to indemnification for the fruits that he
was obliged to restitute;
II - to indemnification for the expenses of
the contracts and the losses that resulted
directly from the eviction;
III - to judicial costs and to the fees of the
attorney he appointed.
Sole paragraph. Regardless of whether the
eviction is total or partial, the price shall be the
value of the thing at the time eviction occurred,
and shall be proportional to the dispossession
suffered, in the case of partial eviction.
Art. 451. The alienor' s obligation subsists
even if the thing has deteriorated, unless
there is wrongful conduct on the part of the
acquiror.
Art. 452. If the acquiror has gained
advantages from the deterioration, and has
not been adjudged liable to indemnify
them, the value of the advantages shall be
deducted from the amount that the alienor
must give him.
 Art. 453-458 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 453. Necessary or useful improvements
which have not been awarded to tlie person
who suffered the eviction, shall be paid for by
the alienor.
Art. 454. If improvements awarded to the
person who suffered eviction were made by
the alienor, their value shall be taken into
account in determining the restitution
owed.
Art. 455. If the eviction is partial but
considerable, the evicted party may opt for
rescission of the contract and restitution of
the part of the price corresponding to the
dispossession he suffered. If it is not
considerable, he has only the right to
indemnification.
Art. 456. In order to exercise the right
arising out of eviction, the acquiror shall
give notice of the dispute to the immediate
alienor, or to any of the earlier alienors, at
the tirn~ and in the manner determined by
procedural legislation.
Sole paragraph. If the alienor does not
respond to the notification of the dispute,
and the eviction is manifestly well founded,
the acquiror may choose not to contest it or
not to use any recourses that may be
available.
Art. 457. The acquiror may not make any
claim based on eviction if he knew the thing
belonged to another or was subject to
litigation. · quanta aforma, devc canter todos OS
Se~ao VII -Aleatory
Contracts
Art. 458. If a contract is aleatory, because
it relates to future things or events, and one
of the contracting parties has assumed the
risk that such things or events will not come
to be, the other party shall have the right to
receive in full that which was promised to
him, provided there is no fault or wrongful
conduct on his part, even if nothing of what
was agreed comes to be.
94
Art. 453. As benfeitorias necess<frias
OU Uteis, niio abonadas ao que sofreu a
evici;;ao, seriio pagas pelo alicnante.
Art. 454. Se as benfeitorias abonadas
ao que sofreu a evici;;ao tiverem sido
feitas pelo alienante, o valor delas sera
levado em conta na restiiuii;:ao devida.
Art. 455. Se parcial, mas consideravel,
for a evicc;:ao, podera o evicto optar en-
tre a rescisao do contrato ea restituic;:ao
da parte do prec;:o correspondente ao
desfalque sofrido. Se niio for considera-
vel, cabera somente direito a indeniza-
~iio.
Art. 456. Para poder exercitar o direito
que da eviq:ao !he resulta, o adquirente
notificara do litfgio o alienante imedia-
to, ou qualquer dos anteriores. quando c
coma !he determinarem as leis do pro-
cesso.
Paragrafo unico. Nao atendendo o alie-
nante a denunciac;:ao da lide, e sendo
manifesta a procedencia da evicr;ao,
pode o adquirente deixar de oferecer
contestac;:iio, ou usar de recursos.
Art. 457. Nao pode o adquirente de-
mandarpela evic~ifo, se sabia que a coi-
sa era alheia ou litigiosa.
Se~ao VII -Dos Contratos
Aleat6rios
Art. 458. Se o contrato for aleat6rio,
por dizer respeito a coisas ou fatos futu-
ros, cujo risco de niio virem a existirum
dos contratantes assuma, tera o outro
direito de receber integralmente o que
!he foi prometido, desde que de sua par-
te nao tenha havido dolo ou culpa, ain-
da que nada do aven~ado venha a exis-
tir.
95 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE
Art. 459. Se for aleat6rio, por serem
objeto dele coisas futuras, tomando o
adquirente a si o risco de virem a existir
em qualqucr quantidade, tera tambem
direito o alienante a todo o prei;;o, desde
que de sua parte niio tiver concorrido
culpa, ainda que a coisa venha a existir
em quantidade inferior aesperada.
Paragrafo unico. Mas, se da coisa nada
vier a existir, al ienar;ao nao haveril, e o
alienantc restituirii o prei;:o recebido.
Art. 460. Se for aleat6rio o contrato,
por se referir a coisas existentes, mas
cxpostas a risco, assumido pelo adqui-
rente, tera igualmente dfreito o aliemm-
te a todo o pre~o. posto que a coisa ja
nao existisse, em parte, ou de todo, no
dia do contrato.
Art. 461. A al ienar;ao aleat6ria a que se
refere o artigo antecedente podera ser
anulada coma dolosa pelo prejudicado,
se provar que o outro contratante nao
ignorava a consuma~ao do risco, a que
no contrato se cons!derava exposta a
coisa
SC\;UO VIII.- Do Contrato
Preliminar
Art. 462. 0 contrato preliminar, exceto
requisitos essenciais ao contrato a ser
celebrado.
Art. 463. Conclufdo o contrato prelimi-
nar, com observfincia do disposto no ar-
tigo antecedente, e desde que dele nao
conste cliiusula de arrependimento,
qualquer das partes tera o direito de exi-
gir a celebrai;ao do definitivo, assinan-
do prazo a outra para que 0 efetive.
Art. 459-463
Art. 459. If the contract is aleatory because
it relates to future things, and the acquiror
assumes the risk that they will come into
being in any quantity whatsoever, the
alienor shall also have the right to the whole
price, provided there is no fault on his part,
even if the thing comes into being in a
quantity less than expected.
Sole paragraph. However, if nothing of the
thing comes into being, the alienation shall
not take place, and the alienor shall restitute
the price he received.
Art. 460. If the contract is aleatory because
it refers to existing things that are exposed
to risk, and that risk is assumed by the
acquiror, the alienor shall likewise have the
right to the whole price, if the thing no
longer existed, in whole or in part, on the
day of the contract.
Art. 461. The aleatory alienation referred
to in the preceding article may be annulled
by the injured party as wrongful, if he
proves that the other party was not unaware
that the risk considered in the contract had
materialized.
Section VIII - Preliminary
Contracts
Art. 462. Except as to form, a preliminary
contract must contain all the requirements
that are essential for the contract to be
entered into.
Art. 463. Once the preliminary contract has
been concluded in accordance with the
provisions of the preceding article, and
provided that it does not contain a clause
allowing the parties to recede, either of the
parties has the right to demand that the
definitive contract be entered into,
assigning a period of time for the other
party to do so.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 464-469
Sole paragraph. The preliminary contract
shall be taken to the competent registry for
registration.
Art. 464. Upon expiry of the time period, a
judge may, on application by the interested
party, issue a decision that takes the place
of the non-performing party's consent and
make the preliminary contract definitive,
unless the nature of the obligation is
contrary to such a measure.
Art. 465. If the stipulating party does not
perform the preliminary contract, the other
party may consider it to be undone, and
claim losses and damages.
Art. 466. If the promise to contract is
unilateral, the creditor, on pain of the
promise losing effect, shall make. known
his intention withiri the time period set out
in the promise or, if there is no time period,
within such time period as the debtor may
reasonably assign.
Section IX - Contracts with a
Person to be Named
Art. 467. At the time a contract is
concluded, one of the parties may reserve to
himself the option of naming a person who
shall acquire the rights and assume the
obligations arising out of the contract.
Art. 468. The nomination must be
communicated to the other party within a
period of five days from the conclusion of
the contract, if another time period has not
been stipulated.
Sole paragraph. Acceptance by the named
person shall not l;ie effective if it does not
take the same form that the parties used for
the contract.
Art. 469. A person named in accordance
with the preceding articles acquires the
rights and assumes the obligations arising
out of the contract, from the moment the
contract was entered into.
96
Paragrafo iinico. 0 contrato preliminar
devera ser levado ao registro competente.
Art. 464. Esgotado o prazo, podera o
juiz, a pedil:lo do interessado, snprir a
vontade da parte inadimplente, confe-
rindo carater definitivo ao contrato pre-
liminar, salvo sea isto se opuser a natu-
reza da obrigai;:ao.
Art. 465. Se o estipulante nao der exe-
CU\:ao ao contrato preliminar, poder{t a
outra parte considera-lo desfeito, e pe-
dir perdas e danos.
Art. 466. Se a promessa de contrato for
unilateral, o credor, sob pena de ficar a
mesma sem efeito, devera manifestar-
se no prazo nela previsto, ou, inexistin-
do este, no que !he for razoavelmente
assinado pelo devedor.
Se~iio IX - Do Contrato com Pessoa
aDeclarar
Art. 467. No momenta da conclusao do
contrato, pode uma das partes reservar-
se a faculdade de indicar a pessoa que
deve adquirir os direitos e assumir as
obrig~oes dele decorrentes.
Art. 468. Essa indica1.=ao deve ser co-
a
municada outra parte no prazo de cin-
co dias da conclusao do contrato, se ou-
tro nao liver sido estipulado.
Paragrafo unico. A aceitai;:ao da pessoa
nomeada nao sera eficaz se nao se re-
vestir da rnesma forma que as partes
usaram para o contrato.
Art. 469. A pessoa, nomeada de con-
formidade com ()s artigos antecedentcs,
adquire os direitos e assume as obriga-
\:Oes decorrentes do contrato, a partir do
momenta em que este foi celebrado.
97 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 470. 0 contrato sera eficaz somen-
te entre os contratantes originarios:
l, se nao houver indica~ao de pessoa,
ou se o nomeado se recusar a aceita-la;
Il - sea pessoa nomeada era insolvente,
e a outra pessoa o desconhecia no mo-
menta da indica,.ao.
Art. 471. Se a pessoa a nomear era in-
capaz ou insolvente no momenta da no-
meai.:ao, o contrato produzira seus efei-
tos entre os contratantes originarios.
Capitulo II - Da Extin~iio do
Contra to
Se~iio I - Do Distrato
Art. 472. 0 distrato faz-se pela mesma
forma exigida para o contrato.
Art. 473. A resilit,:ao unilateral, nos ca-
sos em que a lei expressa ou implicita·
mente o permita, opera mediante de-
a
n(mcia notificada outra parte.
Paragrafo unico. Se, porem, dada a na-
tureza do contrato, uma das partes hou-
ver feito investimentos consideraveis
para asua execugao, adenuncia unilate-
ral so produzira efeito depois de trans-
corrido prazo compativel com a nature-
za e o vulto dos investimentos.
Se1;ao II - Da Cl:iusula Resolutiva
Art. 474. A clausula resolutiva expres-
sa opera de pleno direito; a tacita de-
pende de interpela\:ao judicial.
Art. 475. A parte lesada pelo inadimple-
mento pode pedir a resolu\:ao do contrato,
se nao preferirexigir-lhe o cumprimento,
cabendo, em qualquer dos casos, indeni-
za~ao por perdas e danos.
Art. 470-475
Art. 470. The contract shall be effective
only between the original contracting
parties:
I - if no person has been named, or the
named person refuses to accept the
nomination;
II - if the named person is insolvent, and the
other person did not know of the insolvency
at the time of the nomination.
Art. 471. If the person to be named is
incapable or insolvent at the time of
nomination, the contract will produce its
effects between the original contracting
parties.
Chapter II - Extinction
of Contracts
Section I - Agreement to Terminate
Art. 472. An agreement to terminate is
made in the same form required for the
contract.
Art. 473. Unilateral termination, in the
cases in which the law expressly or
implicitly permits it, is made by notice
given to the other party.
Sole paragraph. If, however, given the
nature of the contract, one of the parties has
made considerable investments for its
performance, unilateral notice of
termination will only produce effects after
a period of time compatible with the nature
and extent of the investments has run.
Section II - Resolutory Clauses
Art. 474. An express resolutory clause
takes effect by operation of law; a tacit
clause depends on judicial interpellation.
Art. 475. A party injured by
non-performance may apply for dissolution
of the contract, if he does not prefer to
demand performance of it, and in either
case the injured party has the right to
indemnification for losses and damage.
 Art. 476-480 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Section III - The Exception of
Non-Performance
Art. 476. In bilateral contracts, neither of
the parties may demand performance of the
other party's obligation before performing
his own.
Art. 477. If, after the contract has been
concluded, one of the contracting parties
surfers a reduction in his patrimony that is
capable of compromising or making
doubtful the performance of his obligation,
the other party may refuse to perform his
own obligation, until the first party satisfies
his obligation or gives security sufficient to
satisfy it.
Section IV - Dissolution for Excessive
Onerousness
Art. 478. In contracts with continuing or
deferred performance, if the obligation of
one of the parties becomes excessively
onerous, with extreme advantage for the
other, by virtue of extraordinary or
unforeseeable events, the debtor may apply
for dissolution of the contract. The effects
of the judgment that declares dissolution
shall be retroactive to the date of citation.
Art. 479, Dissolution may be avoided, if
the defendant offers to modify the
conditions of the contract, on an equitable
basis.
Art. 480. If only one of the parties has
obligations under the contract, that party
may petition that his obligations be
reduced, or that the manner of performing
them be altered, so as to avoid excessive
onerousness.
98
Se1;iio ID - Da Exce1;iio de Contrato
Niio Cumprido
Art. 476. Nos contratos bilaterais, ne-
nhum dos contratantes, antes de cum-
prida asuaobriga1;ao, pode exigiro im-
plemento dado outro.
Art. 477. Se, depois de conclufdo o
contrato, sobrevier a uma das partes
contratantes diminui\;iio em seu pmri-
moQio capaz de compromcter ou tornar
duvidosa a presta\;iiO pcla qua! se obri-
gou, pode a outra recusar-se apresta9iio
que !he incumbe, ate que aquela satisfa-
1;a a que lhe compete ou de garantia bas-
tante de satisfaze-la.
Se!;iio IV - Da Resolu\;iiO por
Onerosidade Excessiva
Art. 478. Nos contratos de execu\;iiO
continuada ou diferida, se a presta\;iiO
de uma das partes se tornar excessiva-
mente onerosa, com extrema vantagem
para a outra, em virtude de aconteci-
mentos extraordinarios e imprevisfveis,
podera o devedor pedir a resolu1;iio do
contrato. Os efeitos da senten~a que a
a
decretar retroagirao data da cita1;ao.
Art. 479. A resolu~ao podera ser evita-
da, oferecendo-se o reu a modificar
eqiiitativamente as condi~oes do con-
trato.
Art. 480. Se no contrato as obriga\;iies
couberem a apenas uma das partes, po-
deni ela pleitear que a sua presta~ao seja
reduzida, ou alterado o modo de execu-
ta-la, a fim de evitar a onerosidadc ex-
cessiva.
99 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Titulo VI - Das V arias Especies cle
Contra to
Capitulo I - Da Compra e Venda
Se!;iio I - Disposii;iies Gerais
Art. 481. Pelo contrato de compra e
venda, um dos contratantes se obriga a
transferir o domfnio de certa coisa, e o
outro, a pagar-lhe certo pre~o em di-
nheiro.
Art. 482. A compra e venda, quando
pura, considerar-se-a obrigat6ria e per-
feita, desde que as partes acordarcm no
objeto e no pre\;O.
Art. 483. A compra e venda pode ter
por objeto coisa atual ou futura. Neste
caso, ficara sem efeito o contrato se esta
nao vier a existir, salvo se a intenl,".ao
das partes era de concluir contrato alea-
t6rio.
a
Art. 484. Se a venda se realizar vista
de amostras, prot6tipos ou modelos. en-
tender-se-a que o vendedor assegura ter
a coisa as qualidades que a elas corres-
pondem.
Paragrafo unico. Prevalece a amostra, o
prot6tipo ou o modelo, se houver con-
tradil,,:ao ou diforen1;a com a maneira
pela qua! se descreveu a coisa no con-
trato.
Art. 485. A fixa1;1io do pre\:o pode ser
deixada ao arbftrio de terceiro, que os
contratantes logo designarem ou pro-
meterem designar. Se o terceiro nao
aceitar a incumbencia, ficara sem efeito
o contrato, salvo quando acordarem os
contratantes designar outra pessoa.
Art. 486. Tambem se podera deixar a
a
fiXa\:UO do pre1;0 taxa de mercado OU
de balsa, em certo e determinado dia e
Ingar.
Art. 481-486
Title VI - The Various Types of
Contracts
Chapter I - Purchase and Sale
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 481. By a contract of purchase and
sale, one of the contracting parties obligates
himself to transfer ownership of a certain
thing and the other, to pay him a certain
price in money.
Art. 482. A pure purchase and sale is
considered to be binding and perfected,
provided the parties have agreed on the
thing to be sold and the price.
Art. 483. A purchase and sale may relate to
an existing or a future thing. In the latter
case, the contract becomes without effect if
the thing does not come into being, unless
the parties' intention was to conclude an
aleatory contract.
Art. 484. If the sale is made by display of
samples, prototypes or models, the seller is
taken to guarantee that the thing has the
same qualities as the samples, prototypes or
models.
Sole paragraph. The sample, prototype or
model shall prevail, if there is any
contradiction or difference between it and
the manner in which the thing is described
in the contract.
Art. 485. The fixing of the price may be left
to the judgment of a third party whom the
contracting parties designate immediately
or promise to designate.· If the third party
does not accept the task, the contract
becomes without effect, unless the
contracting parties agree to designate
another person.
Art. 486. The fixing of the price may also
be left to the rate of the market or the stock
exchange, at a certain and determined day
and place.
Art. 487-492 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 487. It is licit for the parties to fix the
price based on indices or parameters,
provided they can be objectively
determined.
Art. 488. If the sale is agreed but neither the
price nor criteria to determine the price are
fixed, and there is no official table of prices,
the parties are understood to have agreed to
the current·price under the seller's habitual
sales.
Sole paragraph. In the absence of
agreement, because various prices exist, the
average shall prevail.
Art. 489. A contract of purchase and sale is
nul when the fixing of the price is left to the
discretion of one of the parties exclusively.
Art. 490. Unless there is a clause to the
contrary, the expenses of drawing up the
contract and registering it are borne by the
buyer, and those of delivery are borne by
the selier.
Art. 491. If the sale is not made on credit,
the seller is not obligated to deliver the
thing before receiving the price.
Art. 492. Until the moment of delivery, the
risks of the tlling are borne by the seller, and
those of the price are borne by the buyer.
§ 1. Nevertheless, fortuitous events that
occur in the act of counting, marking or
designating things that commonly are
received by counting, weighing, measuring
or designating and that have already been
put at the buyer's disposal shall be borne by
him.
§ 2. The risks of the above-mentioned
things shall also be borne by the buyer ifhe
is in default in receiving them, when they
have been put at his disposal at the time and
place and in the manner agreed.
100
Art. 487. E lfcito as partes fixar 0 pre~o
em fun91io de Indices ou par1imetros,
dcsde que suscetiveis de objetiva deter-
mina~1io.
Art. 488. Convencionada a venda sem
fixa91io de prei,:o ou de criterios para a
sua detennina91io, se n1io houver tabe-
lamento oficial, entende-se que as par-
tes se sujeitararn ao prer;;o corrente nas
vendas habituais do vendedor.
Par.igrafo unico. Nafaltade acordo, por
ter havido diversidade de pre1;0; preva-
lecera 0 terrno rnedio.
Art. 489. Nulo e o contrato de compra
e venda, quando se deixa ao arbitrio ex-
clusivo de urna das partes a fixm;1io do
prer,;o.
Art. 490. Salvo clausula em contrario,
ficar1io as despesas de escritura e regis-
tro a cargo do comprador, e a cargo do
vendedor as da tradi1;1io.
Art. 491. Nao sendo a venda a credito,
o vendedor nao e obrigado a entregar a
coisa antes de recebcr o prei;:o.
Art. 492. Ate o momento da tradi~1io,
os riscos da coisa correm por conta do
vendedor, e os do prei;:o por conta do
comprador.
§ 1° Todavia, os casos forn1itos, ocor-
rentes no ato de contar, rnarcar ou assi-
nalar coisas, que cornumente sc rcce-
bem, contando, pesando, medindo ou
assinalando, e que ja tiverem sido pos-
tas adisposi~1io do comprador, correrao
por conta deste.
§ 2° Correrao tambem por conta do
comprador os riscos das referidas coi-
sas, se estiver em mora de as receber,
quando postas asua disposii,:1io no tem-
po, lugar e pelo modo ajustados.
101 CODIGO C£VIL BlLfNGUE
Art. 493, A tradii,:1io da coisa vendida,
na falta de estipulai;:iio exprcssa, dar-se-
a no lugar onde ela se encontrava, ao
tempo da venda.
Art. 494. Se a coisa for expcdida para
lugar diverso, por ordcm do compra-
dor, por sua conta correrao os riscos,
uma vez entregue a quern haja de trans-
porta-la, salvo se das instrw;oes dele se
afastar o vendcdor.
Art. 495. N1io obstante o prazo ajustado
para o pagamento, se imtes da tradi<;ao
o comprador cair em insolvencia, pode-
r:i o vcndedor sobrcstar na entrega da
coisa, ate quc o comprador !he de cau-
i;ao de pagar no tempo ajustado.
Art. 496. E anulavel a venda de ascen-
dente a descendentc, salvo sc os outros
descendentes e o ciinjugc do alienante
expressamente houverem consentido.
Paragrafo unico. Em ambos os casos,
dispensa-sc o conscntimento do ciinju-
ge sc o regime de bens for o da separa-
\'.iio obrigatoria.
Art. 497. Sob pena de nulidadc, n1io po-
dem ser comprados, ainda quc em hasta
public a:
I - pelos tutores, curadores, testamen-
teiros e adrninistradores, os bens con-
fiados aSUa guarda OU admifiistra~ao;
II - pelos servidores publicos, em gcral,
os bens ou direitos da pessoa jurfdica a
que servirem, ou qlte estejarn sob sua
administrai;ao direta ou indireta;
Ill - pelos julzes, sccrctarios de tribu-
nais, arbitradores, peritos c outros ser-
ventuarios ou auxiliares da justi\!a, os
hens ou direitos sobrc quc se litigar em
tribunal, jufzo ou conselho, no lugar
onde servirem, ou a que se cstendcr a
sua autoriClade;
Art. 493-497
Art. 493. Delivery of the thing sold, in the
absence of express stipulation otherwise, is
made at the place when the thing is found,
at the time of the sale.
Art. 494. If the thing is sent to another
place, at the buyer's order, he shall bear the
risks once the thing is delivered to the
person who is to transport it, unless the
seller departs from the buyer's instructions.
Art. 495. Notwithstanding the time period
agreed for payment, if the buyer becomes
insolvent before delivery, the seller may
suspend delivery of the thing until the buyer
has given him security for payment at the
agreed time.
Art. 496. A sale by an ascendent to a
descendent is voidable unless the other
descendrnts and the alienor' s spouse have
expressly consented to it.
Sole paragraph. In both cases, the consent
of the spouse is dispensed with if the
matrimonial property regime is that of
mandatory separation.
Art. 497. On pain of nullity, the following
may not be purchased, even at a judicial
sale:
I - by tutors, curators, testamentary executors
and administrators, property entrusted to
their keeping or administration;
II - by public servants in general, the
property or rights of the legal person they
serve, or that are under their direct or
indirect administration;
III - by judges, secretaries of tribunals,
arbitrators, judicially-appointed experts or
other servants or officials of the judicial
system, the property and rights under
dispute before a tribunal, court or council in
the place where they serve or over which
they have authority;
Art. 498-500 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
IV -by auctioneers and their representatives,
the property which they are charged with
selling.
Sole paragraph. The prohibitions of this
article extend to assignments of debt.
Art. 498. The prohibition contained in item
III of the preceding article does not include
cases of purchase and sale or assignment
between co-heirs, or in payment Of debt, or
for security of property that already
belonged to the persons designated in that
item.
Art. 499. Purchase and sale between
spouses is licit with respect to property
e.xcluded from the matrimonial community.
Art. 500. In the sale of an immovable
property, if the price is stipulated by the
measure of its dimensions or if the area of
the property is determined and, in either
case, the area does not correspond to the
dimensions given, the buyer has the right to
demand that the area be made good or, if
that is not possible, the right to claim
dissolution of the contract or a proportional
reduction of the price.
§ 1. It is presumed that the reference to the
dimensions of the property was intended to
be merely indicative when the difference is
no greater than one-twentieth of the total
stated area, saving the buyer's right to
prove that, in such circumstances, he would
not have entered into the transaction.
§ 2, If there is an excess rather than a lack,
and the seller prov.es th.at he had reason to
be unaware of the exact measurements of
the area sold, the buyer must choose
between paying the price corresponding to
the excess and returning the excess area.
§ 3. The area shall not be made good, nor
shall any excess be returned, if the property
was sold as a.certain and distinct thing, with
the reference to its dimensions being
merely indicative, even if it is not expressly
stated that the sale was ad corpus.
102 103 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE Art. 501-504
IV - pelos leiloeiros e seus prepostos, os Art. 501. Decai do direito de propor as Art. 501. The right of a seller or a bl.lyer to
hens de cuja venda estejarn encarrega- a~oes previstas no artigo antecedente o bring the actions contemplated in the
dos. vendedor ou o comprador que nao o fi- preceding article is perempted if the action
Paragrafo unico. As proibi~oes deste zer no prazo de um ano, a contar do re- is not brought within one year from
artigo estendem-se a cessao de credito. gistro do tftulo. registration of title.
Art. 498. A proibi~ao contida no indso Paragrafo unico. Se houver atraso na Sole paragraph. If there is a delay in taking
III do artigo ahtecedente, nao com-
imissao de posse no im6vel, atribufvel possession of the immovable property
preende os casos de compra e venda ou
ao alienante, a partir dela fluira o prazo attributable to the aliener, the peremptive
cessao entre co-herdeiros, ou em paga-
mento de dfvida, ou para garantia de
de decadencia. period shall run from the taking of
hens ja pertencentes a pessoas designa- possession.
das no referido inciso. Art. 502. 0 vendedor, salvo convern;ao Art. 502. Unless it is otherwise agreed, the
Art. 499. E lfdta a compra e venda en- em contrario, responde portodos os de- seller is liable for all the debts that
tre conjuges, com relm;:ao a hens excluf- bitos que gravern a coisa ate o momenta encumber the thing up to the moment of
dos da comunhao. da tradi\;lio. delivery.
Art.500. Se, na vendadeum im6vel, se Art. 503. Nas coisas vendidas conjun- Art. 503. Where things are sold together, a
estipular o pre~o por rnedida de exten-
tamente, o defeito oculto de uma nao hidden defect in one of them does not
sao, ou se determinar a respectiva area,
autoriza a rejeic,;ao de todas. authorize the rejection of all.
e esta nao corresponder, em qualquer
dos casos, as dimensoes dad as, ·o com- Art. 504. Nao pode um condomino em Art. 504. A co-owner of an indivisible
prador tera o direito de exigir o comple- coisa indivisfvel venderasuaparte aes- thing may not sell his share to a stranger if
mento da area, e, nao sendo isso possf- tranhos, se outro consorte a quiser. tan- another co-owner wants it, at the same price
vel, o de reclamar a resolu\;aO do con-
to por tanto. 0 condomino, a quern nao and on the same conditions. A co-owner
trato ou abatimento proporcional ao
se der eonhecimento da venda, podera, who was not informed of the sale may,
pre~o.
depositaudo o pre~o. haver para si a upon depositing the price, have for himself
§ 1° Presume-Se que a referenda as di- parte vendida a estranhos, se o requerer the share sold to strangers, if he demands it
mensoes foi simplesmente enunciadva,
no prazo de cento e oitenta dias, sob within a period of one hundred and eighty
quando a diferen9a encontrada nao ex-
pena de decadencia. days, on pain of peremption.
eeder de urn vigesirno da area total
enundada, ressalvado ao cornprador o Paragrafo unico. Sendo muitos os con- Sole paragraph. If there are many
direito de provar que, em tais circuns- dominos, preferira o que tiver benfeito- co-owners, the one who has made
tilndas, nao teria realizado o neg6cio.
rias de maior valor e, na falta de benfei- improvements of greatest value shall be
§ 2° Se em vez de falta houver excesso, torias, ode quinhao rnaior. Se as partes preferred and, if no improvements have
e o vendedor provar que tinha motivos forern iguais, haverao a parte vendida been made, the one who has the greatest
para ignorar a medida exata da area os comproprietarios, que a quiserem, share. If the shares are equal, the co-owners
vendida, cabera ao comprador, a sua es-
depositando previarnente o pre<;o. who want the share that was sold shall have
colha, completar o valor corresponden-
te ao pre1<0 ou devolver o excesso.
it, after first depositing the price.
§ 3° Nao havera complemento de area,
nem devolu1<ao de excesso, se o irn6vel
for vendido eomo coisa certa e discri-
minada. tendo sido apenas enunciativa
a referenda as suas dimensoes, ainda
que nao conste, de modo expresso, ter
sido a venda ad corpus.
Art. 505-509 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Section II - Clauses Peculiar to
Purchase and Sale
Subsection I - Sale with a Right of
Redemption
Art. 505. The seller of an immovable thing
may reserve to himself the right to recover
it within a peremptive period of no more
than three years, restituting the price
received and reimbursing the expenses of
the buyer, including expenses which,
during the redemption period, were made
with the seller's authorization or to carry
out necessary improvements.
Art. 506. If the buyer refuses to receive the
amounts to which he is entitled, the seller,
in order to exercise his right of redemption,
shall deposit the amounts into court.
Sole paragraph. If the judicial deposit is
determined to be insufficient, the seller
shall not be reinstated in ownership of the
thing unless and until the buyer has been
paid in full.
Art. 507. The right of redemption, which is
assignable and transmissible to heirs and
legatees, may be exercised against a third
party acquiror.
Art. 508. If two or more persons have a
right of redemption over the same
immovable, and only one exercises the
right, the buyer may give notice to the
others to agree to the exercise of the right,
and the redemption shall operate in favor of
the one who has made the deposit, provided
that it is for the full amount owed.
Subsection II - Sales on Approval and
Trial Sales
Art. 509. A sale on approval by the buyer is
understood to be made under a suspensive
condition, even if the thing is delivered to
him; and the sale is not deemed to be
perfected until the acquiror has given his
approval.
104
Sc~iio II - Das Clausulas Especiais a
Compra e Venda
Subse~iio I - Da Retrovenda
Art. 505. 0 vendedor de coisa im6vel
pode reservar-se o direito de recobra-la
no prazo maximo de decadencia de tres
anos, restituindo o prego recebido e
reembolsando as despesas do compra-
dor, inclusive as que, durante o perfodo
de resgate, se efetuaram com a sua au-
toriza~ao escrita, ou para a realizagao
de benfeitorias necessarias.
Art. 506. Se o comprador se recusar a
receber as quantias a que faz jus, o ven-
dedor, para exercer o direito de resgate,
as depositarajudicialmente.
Panigrafo unico. Verificada a insufi-
ciencia do dep6sito judicial, nao sera o
vendedor restiiufdo no <lominio da coi-
sa, ate e enquanto nao for integralmente
pago o comprador.
Art. 507. 0 direito de retrato, que eces-
sfvel c transmissive! a herdeiros e lega-
tarios, poderii ser exercido contra o ter-
ceiro adquirente.
Art. 508. Se a duas ou mais pessoas
couber o direito de retrato sobre o mes-
mo im6vel, e s6 uma o exercer, podera
o comprador intimar as outras para nele
acordarem, prevalecendo o pacto em
favor de quern haja efetuado o dep6sito,
contanto que seja integral.
Subse~iio Il - Da Venda a Contento
e da Sujeita a Prova
Art. 509. A venda feita a contento do
comprador entende-se realizada sob
condi9ao suspensiva, ainda que a coisa
!he tenha sido entregue; e nao se reputa-
ra perfeita, enquanto 0 adquirente nao
manifestar seu agrado.
105 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 510. Tambem a venda sujeita a
prova presume-se feita sob a condii;ao
suspensiva de que a coisa tenha as qua-
lidades asseguradas pelo vendedor e
seja idonea para o fim a que se destina.
Art. 511. Em ambos os casos, as obri-
gagoes do comprador, que recebeu, sob
condii;ao suspensiva, a coisa comprada,
sao as de tnero comodatario, enquanto
nao manifeste aceita-la.
Art. 512. Nao havcndo prazo estipula-
do para a declarai;ao do compra<lor, o
vendedor terii direito de intima-lo, judi-
cial ou extrajudicialmente, para que o
fai;a em prazo improrrogavel.
Subse9iio Ill - Da Preemp~iio ou
Prcferencia
Art. 513. A preempi;ao, ou preferencia,
impoe ao comprador a obrigai;ao de
oferecer ao vendedor a coisa que aquele
vai vender, ou dar em pagamento, para
que este use de seu direito de prela1;ao
na compra, tanto por tanto.
Paragrafo iinico. 0 prazo para exercer o
direito de preferencia nao podera exce-
der a cento e oitenta dias, sea coisa for
m6vel, ou a dois anos, se im6vel.
Art. 514. O vendedor pode tamoem
exercer o seu direito de prelac;ao, inti-
mando o comprador, quando lhe cons-
tar que este vai vender a coisa.
Art. 515. Aquele que exe.rce a preferen-
cia estfi. sob pena de a perder, obrigado
a pagar, em condic;oes iguais, o pre\:O
encontrado, ou o ajustado.
Art. 516. Inexistindo prazo estipulado,
o direito de preemp~ao caducara, se a
coisa for m6vel, nao se exercendo nos
tres dias, e, se for im6vel, nao se exer-
cendo nos sessenta dias subseqilentes a
data em que o comprador tiver notifica-
do o vendedor.
Art. 510-516
Art. 510. A sale on trial .is also presumed to
be made under a suspensive condition. that
the thing has the qualities declared by the
seller and that it is suitable for the purpose
for which it is intended.
Art. 511. In both cases, the obligations of
the buyer who received the thing bought
under a suspensive condition are those of a
mere borrower for use until he expresses his
acceptance of the thing.
Art. 512. If no period of time has been
stipulated for the buyer's declaration, the
seller shall have the right to give him
notice, either judicial or extrajudicial, to do
so within a strict time period.
Subsection Ill - Preemption or
Preference
Art. 513. Preemption, or preference,
imposes on a buyer the obligation to offer
to his seller the thing that the buyer is going
to sell, or give in payment, so that the seller
may use his right of preference to purchase
the thing, at the same price and on the same
terms and conditions.
Sole paragraph. The time period for
exercise of the right of preference may not
exceed one hundred and eighty days, if the
thing is movable, and two years, if
immovable.
Art. 514. The seller may also exercise his
right of preference, on giving notice to the
buyer, when it appears to him that the buyer
is going to sell the thing.
Art. 515. A person who exercises the
preference is bound, on pain of losing the
preference, to pay the price found or agreed
upon, on the same terms and conditions.
Art. 516. If there is no time period
stipulated, the right of preemption shall
lapse if not exercised within three days, if
the thing is movable, or within sixty days, if
the thing is immovable, from the date on
which the buyer notifies the seller.
Art. 517-523 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 517. When the right of preemption is
stipulated in favor of two or more
individuals in common, it may be exercised
only with respect to the thing as a whole. If
one of the persons concerned loses or does
not exercise his right, the others may use it
in the aforesaid manner.
Art. 518. The buyer shall be liable for
losses and damage if he alienates the thing
without having informed the seller of the
price and advantages that were offered to
him for the thing. The acquiror shall be
solidarily liable, if he acted in bad faith.
Art. 519. If a thing that has been
expropriated for the purposes of public
necessity or utility, or in the public interest,
is not used for the purpose for which it was
expropriated, the expropriated owner shall
have a right of preference over the thing, for
its current price.
Art. 520. A right of preference may not be
assigned and does not pass to heirs.
Subsection IV - Sale with Reservation
of Ownership
Art. 521. In the sale of an immovable thing,
the seller rn&y reserve ownership of the
thing to himself until the price is paid in
full.
Art. 522. A clause for reservation of
ownership shall be stipulated in writing and
must be registered in the buyer's domicile
to be valid against third parties.
Art. 523. A thing that is not susceptible of
exact description, so as to distinguish it
from others of like kind, cannot be the
object of a sale with reservation of
ownership. In case of doubt, the question
shall be decided in favor of the good faith
third-party acquiror.
106
Art. 517. Quando o direito de preemp-
~ao for estipulado a favor de dois ou
rnais indivfduos em comum. s6 pode
a
ser exercido em relai;ao coisa no seu
todo. Se alguma das pessoas, a quern
ele toque, perder ou nao exercer o seu
direito, poderao as demais utiliza-lo na
forma sobredita.
Art. 518. Respondera por perdas e da-
nos o comprador, se alienar a coisa sem
ter dado ao vendedor ciencia do pre~o e
das vantagens que por ela !he oferecem.
Respondera solidariamenle o adquiren-
te, se liver procedido de ma-fe.
Art. 519. Se a coisa expropriada para
fins de necessidade ou u1ilidade piibli-
ca, ou por interesse social, nao liver o
destino para que se desapropriou, ou
nao for ulilizada em obras ou servii;:os
publicos, cabera ao expropriado direi10
de preferencia, pelo pre\'.o alual da coi-
sa.
Art. 520. 0 direito de prefere_ncia nao
se pode ceder nern passa aos herdeiros.
Subse~oIV - Da Venda com
Reserva de Dominio
Art. 521. Na venda de coisa m6vel,
pode o vendedor reservar para si a pro-
priedade, ate que o pre~o esteja inlc-
gralmenle pago.
Art. 522. A clausula de reserva de do-
mfnio sera estipulada por escrito e de-
pende de registro no domicllio do com-
prador para valer contra terceiros.
Art. 523. Nao pode ser objeto de venda
com reserva de dominio a coisa insus-
cetfvel de caracteriza\'.'aO perfeita, para
estrema-la de oulras congeneres. Na
duvida, decide-se a favor do terceiro
adquirente de boa-fe.
1()7 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 524. A transferencia de propriedade
ao comprador da-se no momenta em que
o pre~o es1eja integralmenle pago. Toda-
via. pelos riscos da coisa responde o com-
prador, a partir de quando lhe foi entregue.
Art. 525. 0 vendedor somenle podera
executar a clausula: de reserva de do,mf-
nio ap6s constituir o comprador em
rnora. mediante protesto do lftulo ou in-
terpela\'.ao judicial.
Art. 526. Verificada a mora do compra-
dor, podera o vendedor mover contra
ele a competente a\:iiO de cobrani;:a das
presla\'.5es vencidas e vincendas e o
mais que !he for devido; ou podera re-
cuperar a posse da coisa vendida.
Art. 527. Na segunda hip6tese do arti-
go anlecedente, e facultado ao vende-
dor reter as presta~5es pagas ate o ne-
cessario para cobrir a depreciai;:ao da
coisa, as despesas feitas e o rnais que de
direito !he for devido. 0 excedenle sera
devolvido ao comprador; e o que fallar
!he sera cobrado, ludo na forma da lei
processual.
Art. 528. Seo vendedor receber o paga-
a
mento vista, ou, posteriormente, me-
diante financiamcnlo de instituii;ao do
mercado de capitais, a esta cabera exer-
cer os direilos e a\'.oes decorrenles do
contrato, a beneffcio de qualquer outro.
A opera\'.iio financeira e a respectiva
ciencia do comprador constariio do re-
gis1ro do contrato.
Subse\'.ao V - Da Venda Sohre
Documentos
Art. 529. Na venda sobre documentos,
a tradi\'.ao da coisa esubstitufda pela en-
trega do seu titulo representativo e dos
outros documentos exigidos pelo con-
trato ou, no silencio deste, pelos usos.
Art. 524-529
Art. 524. Transfer of ownership to the
buyer occurs at the moment the price is paid
in full. However, the buyer is liable for the
risks of the thing from the time it was
delivered to him.
Art. 525. The seller may only enforce the
clause for reservation of ownership after
putting the buyer in default, by means of
protest of title or judicial interpellation.
Art. 526. Once the buyer's default is
ascertained, the seller may bring the
appropriate action against him for
collection of installments due and falling
due and of all else that is owed to him; or he
may recover possession of the thing sold.
Art. 527. In the latter case referred to in the
preceding article, the seller may retain the
installments paid, up to the amount
necessary to cover the depreciation of the
thing, expens~ incurred and all else that is
properly owed to him. The excess shall be
returned to the buyer and any shortfall shall
be collected from him, all in the manner
provided for under procedural law.
Art. 528. If the seller receives payment at
sight or at a later time, by means of
financing from an institution operating in
the capital market, the institution shall be
entitled to exercise the rights and actions
arising out of the contract, to the benefit of
any other. The financial transaction and the
related acknowledgement of the buyer shall
be set out in the record of the contract's
registration.
Subsction V - Sale By
Documents
Art. 529. In a sale by documents, delivery
of the thing is replaced by delivery of the
title that represents the thing and the other
documents required under the contract or,
where the contract is silent, the documents
required by usage.
Art. 530-533 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. If the documentation is in
order, the buyer may not refuse to pay on
the pretext of a defect in the quality or state
of the thing sold, unless the defect had
already been proved.
Art. 530. Unless the contract otherwise
provides, payment must be made on the
date and at the place for delivery of the
documents.
Art. 531. If an insurance policy covering
the risks of transport is among the
documents delivered to the buyer, those
risks are bofl1e by the buyer unless, at the
time the contract was concluded, the seller
was aware that the thing was lost or
damaged.
Art. 532. If the contract stipulates that
payment shall be made through a banking
establishment, the banking establishment
shall make payment against delivery of the
docum!!nts, with no obligation to verify the
thing sold, for which it has no liability.
Sole paragraph ..In this case, only after the
banking establishment has refused to make
payment may the ~eller claim it. directly
from th.e buyer.
Chapter II - Barter or Exchange
Art. 533. The provisions related to
P.Urchase and sale shall apply to barter, with
the following modifications:
I - unless the contract provides otherwise,
each of the contracting parties shall pay for
half of the expenses for the instrument of
the barter;
II - a barter of things of unequal value made
between ascendents and descendents is
voidable unless it is made with the consent
of the other descendents and the spouse of
the alienor.
108
Paragrafo unico. Achando-se a docu-
mentai;:ao em ordem. niio pode o com-
prador recusar o pagamento, a pretexto
de defeito de qualidade ou do estado da
coisa vendida, sa\vo se o defeito ja hou~
ver sido comprovado.
Art: 530. Nao havendo estipulai;:ao em
contrario, o pagamento deve ser efetua-
do na data e no lugar da entrega dos do-
cumentos.
Art. 531. Se entre os documentos entre-
gues ao comprador figurar ap61ice de
seguro que cuhra os riscos do transpor-
te, correm estes a conta do comprador,
salvo se. ao ser conclufdo o contrato, ti-
vesse o vendedor ciencia da perda ou
avaria da coisa.
Art. 532. Estipulado o pagamento por
intermedio de estahelecimento hanca-
rio, cahera a este efetua-lo contra a en-
trega dos documentos, sem ohriga~iio
de.verificar a coisa vendida, pela qual
niio responde.
Paragrafo unico. Nesse caso, somente
ap6s a recusa do estahelecimento han-
cario a efetuar 0 pagamento, podera 0
vendedor pretende-lo, diretamente do
comprador.
Capltulo II - Da Troca ou Permuta
Art. 533. Aplicam-se a troca as disposi-
i;:oes referentes a compra e venda, com
as seguintes modifica~oes:
I - salvo disposi'<iio em contrario, cada
um dos contratantes pagara par metade
as despesas com o instrumento da troca;
II - e anulavel a troca de valores desi-
guais entre ascendentes e descendentes,
sem consentimento dos outros descen-
dentes e do conjuge do alienante.
!09 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Capitulo III -Do Coutrato
Estimat6rio
Art. 534. Pelo contrato estimat6rio, o
consignante entrega hens m6veis ao
consignatario, que fica autorizado a
vende-los, pagando aquele o prei;:o
ajustado, salvo se preferir, no prazo es-
tahelecido, restituir-Ihe a coisa consig-
nada.
Art. 535. 0 consignatario niio se exo-
nera da obriga<;iio de pagar o prei;o, se a
restitui~iio da coisa, em sua integridade,
se tornar impossfvel, ainda que por fato
a ele niio imputaveL
Art. 536. A coisa consignada nao pode
ser ohjeto de penhora ou seqilestro pe-
los credores do consignatario, enqtlanto
niio pago integralmente o pre<;o.
Art. 537. 0 consignante niio pode dis-
por da coisa antes de lhe ser restitufda
ou de !he ser comunicada a restitui~iio.
Capitulo IV - Da Doai,;lio
Se~o I - Disposii,;iies Gerais
Art. 538. Considera-se doa9iio o con-
trato em que uina pessoa, por liberali-
dade, transfere do seu patrimonio hens
oit vantagens para o de outra.
Art. 539. 0 doador pode fixar prazo ao
donatario, para declarar se aceita ou niio
a liheralidade. Desde que o donatario,
ciente do prazo, nao faira, dentro dele, a
declarairao, entender-se-a que aceitou,
se a doa1;ao nao for sujeita a encargo.
Art. 540. A doa~iio feita em contempla-
<;iio do merecimento do donatario nao
perde 0 carater de liheralidade, coma
nao o perde a doai;:ao remunerat6ria, ou
a gravada, no excedente ao valor dos
servii;os remunerados ou ao encargo
impasto.
Art. 534-540
Chapter III - Sale on
Consignment
Art. 534. By a contract for sale on
consignment, the consignor delivers
movable property to the consignee, who is
authorized to sell it, paying the agreed price
to the consignor, unless the consignee
prefers to return the consigned thing to the
consignor within the time period
established.
Art. 535. The consignee is not relieved of
the obligation to pay the price if return of
the thing, whole and entire, becomes
impossible, even though the impossiblity
cannot be imputed to him.
Art. 536. The consigned thing cannot be
attached or seized by the creditors of the
consignee before the price has been paid in
full.
Art. 537. The consignor may not dispose of
the thing before it has been returned to him
or its return has been communicated to him.
Chapter IV - Gifts
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 538. A contract in which one person,
out of liberality, transfers property or
advantages from his patrimony to that of
another is considered to be a gift.
Art. 539. The donor may fix a period of
time for the donee to declare whether he
accepts the gift or not. If the donee, being
aware of the time period, does not make the
declaration within the period, he is
understood to have accepted the gift, if it is
not subject to a charge.
Art. 540. A gift made in contemplation of
the donee' s merit does not lose the quality
of liberality, and neither does a
remunerative gift, or an encumbered gift,
with respect to its value in excess of the
remunerated services or the charge
imposed.

Art. 541-548 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 541. A gift shall be made by public
writing or by private instrument.
Sole paragraph. An oral gift is valid if it
concerns movable property of small value
and is immediately followed by delivery of
the thing given.
Art. 542. Gifts made to the unborn are valid
if the gift is accepted by its legal
representative.
Art. 543. If the donee is absolutely
incapable, acceptance of the gift is waived,
provided it is a pure gift.
Art. 544. Gifts from ascendants to
descendents or from one spouse to another
are an advance of what they are entitled to
by inheritance.
Art. 545. A gift in the form of assistance
paid periodically to the beneficiary is
extinguished on the death of the donor,
unless he otherwise disposes, but the gift
may not extend beyond the life of the
donee.
Art. 546. A gift made in contemplation of a
future marriage with \! certain and
determin;;tte person, whether between the
future spouses themselves or from a third
party to one of th(!m, to both of them or to
the children that may be born to them,
cannot be impugned for lack of acceptance
and shall only be without effect if the
marriage does not occur.
Art. 547. A donor may stipulate that the
things given shall return to his patrimony if
he survives the donee.
Sole paragraph. A reversionary clause in
favor of a third party is not valid.
Art. 548. A gift of all the donor's property
without reserving a part, or income
sufficient for the donor's subsistence, is
null.
110
Art. 541. A doai;ao far-se-a par escritu-
ra publica au instrumento particular.
Paragrafo unico. A doai;ao verbal sera
valida, se, versando sabre bens m6veis
e de pequeno valor, se !he seguir incon-
tinenti a tradii;iio.
Art. 542. A doai;ao feita ao nascituro
valerii., sendo aceita pelo seu repre-
sentante legal.
Art. 543. Se o donatario for absoluta-
mente incapaz, dispensa-se a aceitai;iio,
desde que se trate de doai;ao pura.
Art. 544. A doai;ao de ascendentes a
descendentes, ou de um cfinjuge a ou-
tro, importa adiantamento do que !hes
cabe par herani;a.
Art. 545. A doai;ao em forma de sub-
ven9iio peri6dica ao beneficiado extin-
gue-se morrendo o doador, salvo se este
outra coisa dispuser, mas niio podeni
ultrapassar a vida do donatario.
Art. 546. A doai;ao feita em contempla-
i;ao de casamento futuro com certa e de-
terminada pessoa, quer pelos nubentes
entre si, quer por terceiro a um deles, a
ambos, au aos filhos que, de futuro,
houverem um do outro, nao pode ser
impugnada por falta de aceitai;ao, e s6
ficarii. sem efeito se o casamento nao se
realizar.
Art. 547. 0 doador pode estipular que
os hens doados voltem'ao seu patrimfi-
nio, se sobreviver ao donatii.rio.
Parii.grafo unico. Nao prevalece clausu-
la de reversiio em favor de terceiro.
Art. 548. E nula a doai;ao de todos os
bens sem reserva de parte, ou renda su-
ficiente para a subsistencia do doador.
111 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 549. Nula e tambem a doai;ao
a a
quanta parte que exceder de que 0
doador, no momenta da liberalidade,
poderia dispor em testamento.
Art. 550. Adoairao do cfinjuge adultero
ao seu cumplice pode ser anulada pelo
outro cfinjuge, ou por seus herdeiros
necessarios, ate do is anos depois de dis-
solvida a sociedade conjugal.
Art. 551. Salvo declara1;ao em contra-
rio, a doa9iio em comum a mais de uma
pessoa entende-se distribufda entre elas
por igual.
Paragrafo unico. Se OS donatarios, em
tal caso, forem marido e mulher, subsis-
tira na totalidade a doai;ao para o cfinju-
ge sobrevivo.
Art. 552. 0 doador nao eobrigado a pa-
gar juros morat6rios, nem e sujeito as
conseqilencias da eviq:iio ou do vfcio
redibit6rio. Nas doa~oes para casamen-
to com certa e determinada pessoa, o
doador ficara sujeito a evfci;:ao, salvo
convem;;ao em contrario.
Art. 553. 0 donatario e obrigado a
cumprir os encargos da doai;:ao, caso
forem a beneffcio do doador, de tercei-
ro, au do interesse geral.
Paragrafo unico. Se desta ultima espe-
cie for o encargo, o Ministerio Pt1blico
poderii. exigir sua execui;:ao, depois da
morte do doador, se este nao tiver feito.
Art. 554. A doa9ao a entidade futura
caducarii se, em do is anos, esta nao es-
tiver constitufda regularmente.
Sei;:ao II- Da Revogai;:ao da Doai;iio
Art. 555. A doairao pode ser revogada
por ingratidao do donatario, ou par ine-
xecui;ao do encargo.
Art. 549-555
Art. 549. That part of a gift that exceeds
what the donor could dispose of by
testament at the time the gift was made is
also null.
Art. 550. A gift from an adulterous spouse
to his accomplice may be annulled by the
other spouse, or by his necessary heirs, up
to two years after the conjugal society is
dissolved.
Art. 551. Saving declaration to the
contrary, a gift in common to more than one
person is understood to be distributed
among them equally.
Sole paragraph. In such a case, if the donees
are husband and wife, the whole of the gift
will subsist to the benefit of the surviving
spouse.
Art. 552. The donor is not obligated to pay
late-payment interest, nor is he subject to
the consequences of eviction or redhibitory
vices. In gifts for marriage with a certain
and determinate person, the donor is
subject to eviction, unless it is otherwise
agreed.
Art. 553. The donee is obligated to fulfill
the charges of the gift, if they are to the
benefit of the donor, a third party or the
general interest.
Sole paragraph. If the charge is of the latter
type, the Public Ministry may demand its
performance, after the death of the donor, if
the donor has not done so.
Art. 554. A gift to a future entity shall lapse
if the entity is not regularly constituted
within two years.
Section II - Revocation of Gifts
Art. 555. A gift may be revoked for
ingratitude of the donee or for failure to
perform the charge.
Art. 556-561 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 556. The right to revoke a gift for the
ingratitude of the donee cannot be waived
in advance.
Art. 557. Gifts may be revoked for
ingratitude:
I - if the donee made an attempt on the life
of the donor or committed the crime of
homicide withthe intent to kill against him;
II - if the donee committed a physical
offense against the donor;
III - if the donee seriously injured the donor
or slandered him;
IV - if, though able to furnish it, the donee
refused the donor needed sustenance.
Art. 558. Revocation may also occur when
the person offended, in the cases
contemplated in the preceding article, is the
spouse, ascendant, descendent, even if
adopted, or sibling of the donor.
Art •. 559. Revocation for any of these
reasons must be claimed within one year
from the time the donor becomes aware of
the act that authorizes the revocation, and
that it was the donee who committed the
act,
Art. 560. The right to revoke a gift is not
transmitted to the heirs of the donor, nor
does it prejudice those of the donee. But the
heirs of the donor may pursue an action
begun by the donor, and continue it against
the heirs of the donee, if he dies after Jhe
action is brought.
Art. 561. When homicide with intent to kill
is committed against the donor, the action
may be brought by his heirs, unless the
donor had forgiven the donee.
I 12
Art. 556. Nao se pode renunciar anteci-
padarnente o direito de revogar a libcra-
lidade por ingratidao do donatario.
Art. 557. Podem ser revogadas por in-
gratidao as doa1;6es:
I - se o donatario atentou contra a vida
do doador ou cometeu crime de homici-
dio doloso contra ele;
II - se cometeu contra ele ofonsa fisica;
III - se o injuriou gravemente ou o calu-
niou;
IV - se, podendo ministra-Jos, recusou
ao doador os alimentos de que este ne-
cessitava.
Art. 558. Pode ocorrer tambem a revo-
gac;:ao quando o ofendido, nos casos do
artigo anterior, for. o conjuge, ascen-
dente, descendente, ainda que adotivo,
ou irmao do doador.
Art. 559. A revogac;:ao por qualquer
desses motivos devera ser pleiteada
dentro de llm ano, a contar de quando
chegue ao conhecimento do dciador o
fato que a autorizar, e de ter sido o do-
natario o seu autor.
Art. 560. 0 direito de revogar a doai;:ao
nao se transmite aos herdeiros do doa-
dor, nem prejudica OS do donatario.
Mas aqueles podem prosseguir na ai;ao
iniciada pelo doador, continuando-a
contra os herdeiros do donatario, se este
falecer depois de ajuizada a lide.
Art. 561. No caso de homicidio doloso
do doador, a ac;:ao cabera aos seus her-
deiros, exceto se aquele houver perdoa-
do.
113 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 562. A doai;;ao onerosa pode ser re-
vogada por inexecw,:ao do encargo, se o
donatario incorrer em morn. Nao ha-
vendo prazo para o cumprimento, o
doador podera notificar judicialmente o
donatario, assinando-lhe prazo razoa-
a
vel para que cumpra obriga1;ao assu-
n1ida.
Art. 563. A revogai;;ao por ingratidao
nao prejudica os direitos adquiridos por
terceiros, nem obriga o donatario a res-
tituir os frutos percebidos antes da cita-
1;ao valida; mas sujeita-o a pagar os
posteriores, e, quando nao possa resti-
tuir em especie as coisas doadas, a inde-
niza-la pelo meio termo do seu valor.
Art. 564. Nao se revogam por ingrati-
dao:
I - as dom;oes puramente remunerat6-
rias;
II - as oneradas com encargo ja cumpri-
do;
III as que se fizerem em cumprimento
de obrigac;:ao natural;
IV - as feitas para determinado casa-
mento.
Capitulo V - Da Locac;:ao de Coisas
Art. 565. Na Iocac;:ao de coisas, uma das
partes se obriga a ceder it outra, por
tempo.determinado OU naO, 0 USO e
gozo de coisa nao fungfvel, mediante
certa retribuic;:ao.
Art. 566. 0 locador e obrigado:
I - a entregar ao locatario a coisa aluga-
da, com suas pertenc;:as, em estado de
servir ao uso a que se destina, e a man-
te-la nesse estado, pelo tempo do con-
trato, salvo clausula expressa em con-
trario;
Art. 562-566
Art. 562. An onerous gift may be revoked
for non-performance of the charge, if the
donee is late in fulfilling it. If there is no
time period for fulfilling the charge, the
donor may give judicial notification to the
donee, assigning to him a reasonable period
of time in which to fulfill the obligation he
assumed.
Art. 563, Revocation for ingratitude does
not prejudice the rights acquired by third
parties, nor does it obligate the donee to
restitute fruits gathered before valid
citation; but it does subject him to pay
subsequent fruits to the donor and, if he
cannot restitute the things given to him in
kind, to pay indemnification equal to the
thing's average value.
Art. 564. The following may not be
revoked for ingratitude:
I - gifts that are purely remunerative;
II - onerous gifts whose charge has been
fulfilled;
III - gifts that are made in fulfillment of a
natural obligation;
IV - gifts made for a certain marriage.
Chapter V - Lease of Things
Art. 565. In a lease of things, one of the
parties obligates himself to grant to the
other, for a period of time, either certain or
not, the use and enjoyment of a
non-fungible thing, in exchange for a
certain compensation.
Art. 566. The lessor is obligated:
I - to deliver the leased thing to the lessee,
with its appurtenances, in such a state that it
will serve for the use for which it is
intended, and to maintain it in that state for
the duration of the contract, unless there is
an express provision to the contrary;
Aft, 567-570 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - to guarantee to the lessee, during the
duration of the contract, peaceful use of the
thing.
Art. 567. If during the lease the leased thing
deteriorates without fault on the part of the
lessee, the lessee shall be entitled to ask for
a proportional reduction in the rent, or to
terminate the contract, if the thing no longer
serves the purpose for which it was
intended.
Art. 568. The lessor shall safeguard the
lessee from disturbances by third parties
who have or claim to have rights over the
leased thing, and shall be liable for the
thing's vices or defects existing prior to the
lease.
Art. 569. The lessee is obligated:
I - to make use of the leased thing for the
purposes that were agreed or that are
presumed, according to the nature of the
thing and the circumstances, andto care for
it as if it were his own;
II~ topay the rent punctually at the agreed
times and, in the absence of agreement
between the ,parties, according to the
custom of the place;
m - to bring to the knowledge of the lessor
any disturbances by third parties, which are
claimed to be founded in the law;
IV - to return the thing at the end of the
lease, in the state in which he received it,
saving natural deterioration resulting from
normal use.
Art. 570. If the lessee uses the thing in a
manner other than that agreed or for which
the thing is intended, or if the thing is
damaged by reason of the lessee's misuse,
the lessor may demand losses and damages,
as well as rescinding the contract.
114
II - a garantir-lhe, durante o tempo do
contrato, o uso pacffico da coisa.
Art. 567. Se, durante a locar;:ao, se dete-
riorar a coisa alugada, sem culpa do lo-
catario, a este cabera pedir redur;:ao pro-
porcional do aluguel, ou resolvero con-
trato, casojanao sirvaacoisa parao fim
a que se destinava.
Art. 568. 0 locador resguardara o loca-
tario dos embarar;:os e turbar;:oes de ter-
ceiros, que tenham ou pretendam ter di-
reitos sobre a coisa alugada, e respon-
dera pelos seus vfcios, ou defeitos, <m-
teriores alocar;:ao.
Art. 569. 0 locatario eobrigado:
I - a servir-se da coisa alugada para os
usos convencionados ou presumidos,
conforme a natureza dela e as circuns-
tii.ncias, bem como trata-la com o mes-
mo cuidado como se sua fosse;
II - a pagar pontualmente o aluguel nos
prazos ajustados, e, em falta de ajuste,
segundo o costume do lugar;
III - a le var ao conhecimento do locador
as turbar;:oes de terceiros, que se preten-
dam fundadas em direito;
IV - a restituir a coisa, finda a locar;:ao,
no estado em que a recebeu, salvas as
deteriorar;:oes naturais ao uso regular.
Art. 570. Se o locatario empregar a coi-
sa em uso diverso do ajustado, ou do a
que se destina, ou se ela se danificar por
abuso do locatario, podera o locador,
alem de rescindir o contrato, exigir per-
das edanos.
115 CODIOO CIVIL BILfNOUE
Art. 571. Havendo prazo estipulado a
dura\:ii.O do contrato, antes do venci-
mento nii.o podera o locador reaver a
coisa alugada. senii.o ressarcindo ao lo-
catario. as perdas e danos rcsultantes,
nem o locatario devolve-la ao locador,
senii.o pagando, proporcionalmente, a
multa prevista no contrato.
Paragrafo unico. 0 locatario gozara do
direito de retenr;:ii.o, enquanto nii.o for
ressarcido.
Art. 572. Se a obrigar;:ao de pagar o alu-
guel pelo tempo que faltar constituir in-
denizm;:ao excessiva, seni facultado ao
juiz fixa-la cm bases razoavcis.
Art. 573. A locar;:ao por tempo determi-
nado cessa de pleno direito findo o pra-
zo estipulado, independentemente de
notificar;:ao ou aviso.
Art. 574. Se, findo o prazo, o locatario
continuar na posse da coisa alugada,
sem oposir;:ao do locador, presumir-se-
a prorrogada a loca~ao pelo mesmo alu-
guel, mas sem prazo determinado.
Art. 575. Se, notificado o Iocatario, nao
restituir a coisa, pagara, enquanto a ti-
ver em seu poder, o aluguel que o loca-
dor arbitrar, e respondera pelo dano que
ela venha a sofrer, embora proveniente
de caso fortuito.
Paragrafo linico. Seo aluguel arbitrado
for manifestamente excessivo, podera o
juiz reduzi-lo, mas tendo sempre em
contao seu carater de penalidade.
Art. 576. Se a coisa for alienada duran-
te a loca~ao, o adquirente nao ficara
obrigado a respeitar o contrato, se nele
nao for consignada a clausula da sua vi-
gencia no caso de alienar;:ao, e ni'io cons-
tar de registro.
Art. 571-576
Art. 571. If a period of time is stipulated for
the duration of the contract, the lessor may
not have the leased thing back before the
contract's expiry unless he compensates
the lessee for losses and damage resulting
therefrom, nor may the lessee return it to
the lessor unless he pays, proportionately,
the fine provided for in the contract.
Sole paragraph. The lessee has the right to
retain the thing until he has been
compensated.
Art. 572. If an obligation to pay the rent for
the unexpired portion of the contract
constitutes excessive indemnification, the
judge may fix the obligation on reasonable
grounds.
Art. 573. A lease for a definite period of
time ceases by operation of law at the end
of the stipulated period, without need for
notification or notice.
Art. 574. If after the end of the period, the
lessee continues in possession of the leased
thing, without opposition by the lessor, the
lease is presumed to be extended at the
same rent, but for an indefinite period of
time.
Art. 575. If after having been notified, the
lessee does not return the thing, he shall pay
such rent as the lessor may determine, for
so long as he has the thing in his power, and
shall be liable for any damage that the thing
may suffer, even if it arises from a
fortuitous event.
Sole paragraph. If the rent determined by
the lessor is excessive, the judge may
reduce it, taking into account its nature as a
penalty.
Art. 576. If the thing is alienated during the
lease, the acquiror is not obligated to
respect the contract, if the contract does not
provide that it shall remain in effect in the
case of alienation and the contract is not
registered.
Art. 577-581 BILlNGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. The register referred to in this article is
the register of Titles and Documents of the
domicile of the lessor, when the thing is
movable; it is the Register of Immovables
of the relevant district, when the thing is
immovable.
§ 2. Where immovables are concerned,
even in cases where the lessor is not
obligated to respect the contract, he cannot
remove the lessee except after a period of
ninety days from the date of notification.
Art. 577. If the lessor or the lessee dies, a
lease for a definite period of time passes to
his heirs.
Art. 578. Unless otherwise provided for,
the lessee has the right to retain the thing in
the case of necessary improvements, and
also in the case of useful improvements, if
the latter have been made with the express
consent of.the lessor.
Chapter VI - Loan
Section I "'."Loan for Use or
Commodatum
Art. 579. A loan for use is a gratuitous loan
of non-fungible things. It is perfected with
delivery of the thing loaned.
Art. 5SO. Tuto~s, curators and, in general,
all administrators of others' property may
not make a loan for use of property
confided to their keeping without special
authorization.
Art. 581. If the loan for use does not have
an agreed duration, it shall be presumed
that the loan is for the time necessary for the
use granted; the lender may not, except in
cases of unforeseen and urgent necessity,
recognized by a judge, suspend the use and
enjoyment of the thing loaned before the
end of the agreed duration or the duration
determined by reason of the granted use.
116
§ l 0 0 registro a que se refere este artigo
sera o de Tltulos e Documentos do do-
micilio do locador, quando a coisa for
move!; e sera o Registro de Im6vcis da
respectiva circunscrir,;ao, quando im6-
vel.
§ 2° Em se tratando de im6vel, e ainda
no caso em que o locador niio esteja
obrigado a respeitar o contrato, niio po-
dera ele despedir o Jocatario, seniio ob-
servado o prazo de noventa dias ap6s a
notificar,;ao.
Art. 577. Morrendo o Jocador ou o lo-
catario, transfere-se aos seus herdeiros
a Jocm;ao por tempo determinado.
Art. 578. Salvo disposir,;ao em contra-
rio, o Jocatario goza do direito de reten-
1;ao, no caso de benfeitorias necessa-
rias, ou no de benfeitorias uteis, se estas
houverem sido feitas com expresso
consentimento do Jocador.
Capitulo VI- Do Emprestimo
Set;iio I - Do Comodato
Art. 579. 0 comodato e o emprestimo
gratuito de coisas nao fungfveis. Per-
faz-se com a tradi1;ao do objeto.
Art. 580. Os tutores, curadores e em
geral todos os administradores de bens
alheios nao poderfio dar em comodato.
sem autoriz~1io especial, os bens con-
fiados asua guarda.
Art. 581. Se o comodato nfio tiver pra-
zo convencional, presumir-se-lhe-a o
necessario para o uso concedido; niio
podendo o comodante, salvo necessida-
de imprevista e urgente, reconhecida
pelo juiz, suspender o uso e gozo da
coisa emprestada, antes de findo o pra-
zo convencional, ou o que se determine
pelo uso outorgado.
117 CODIGO CIVIL BILINOUE
Art. 582. 0 comodatario e obrigado a
conservar. como se sua pr6pria fora, a
coisa emprestada, nao podendo usa-la
senao de acordo com o contrato ou a na-
tureza dela. sob pena de responder por
perdas e danos. 0 comodatario consti-
tuido em mora, alem de por eta respon-
der, pagara, ate restituf-la, o aluguel da
coisa que for arbitrado pelo comodante.
Art. 583. Se, cmTendo risco o objeto do
comodato juntamente com outros do
comodatario, antepuser este a salva~fio
dos seus abandonando o do comodantc,
respondera pelo dano ocorrido, ainda
que se possa atribuir a ca5o fortuito, ou
fon;a maior.
Art. 584. 0 comodatl'irio nfio poderaja-
mais recobrar do comodante as despe-
sas feitas com o uso e gozo da coisa em-
prestada
Art. 585. Se dua~ ou mais pessoas fo-
rem simultaneamente comodatarias de
uma coisa, ficarao solidariamente res-
ponsaveis para com o comodante.
Set;iio Il -Do Mutuo
Art. 586. 0 mutuo e o emprestimo de
coisas fungfveis. 0 mutmirio e obriga-
do a restituir ao mutuante o que de le re-
cebeu em coisa do mesmo genero, cjua-
lidade e quantidade.
Art. 587. Este emprestimo transfere o
dominio da coisa emprestada ao mutua-
rio, por cuja coma correm todos os ris-
cos dela desde a tradir,;ao.
Art. 588. 0 mutuo feito a pessoa me-
nor, sem previa autorizar,;ao daquele
sob cuja guarda estiver, nao pode ser
reavido nem do mutuario, nem de seus
fl adores.
Art. 589. Cessa a disposi\:iio do artigo
antecedente:
Art. 582-589
Art. 582. The borrower is obligated to
preserve the thing loaned as if it were his
own, and may not use it except in
accordance with the contract or its nature,
on pain of liability for losses and damage. A
borrower who is put in default, in addition to
being liable for the thing, shall pay rent for
the thing in an amount determined by the
lender, until he restores it.
Art. 583. If the thing loaned for use is at
risk together with other things belonging to
the borrower, and the borrower saves his
things first, abandoning the lender's, he
shall be liable for the damage that occurs,
even if it can be attributed to a fortuitous
event or force majeure.
Art. 584. The borrower may never claim
from the lender expenses incurred in the use
and enjoyment of the thing loaned.
Art. 585. If two or more persons are
simultaneously borrowers of a thing, they
shall be solidarily liable to the lender.
Section II - Simple Loan or Mutuum
Art. 586. A simple loan is the loan of
fungible things. The borrower is obligated
to restore to the lender that which he
received from him, in things of the same
kind, quality and quantity.
Art. 587. A simple loan transfers dominion
of the thing loaned to the borrower, who
bears all the risks to the thing from the time
of delivery.
Art. 588. A simple loan made to a minor,
without prior authorization by the person in
whose care he is, cannot be recovered either
from the borrower or from his guarantors.
Art. 589. The preceding article ceases to
apply:
Art, 590-593 BILINGUAL QIVIL CODE
I - if the person whose authorization the
borrower needed to contract the loan later
ratifies it;
II - if the minor, in the absence of that
person, found himself obligated to contract
the loan for his habitual sustenance;
III - if the min or has property earned by his
work, but in such a case, collection by the
creditor may not exceed the extent of such
property;
IV - if the loan operated to the benefit of the
minor;
V - if the minor obtained the loan
maliciously.
Art. 590. The lender may demand security
for the return of the thing loaned, if before
maturity of the Joan the borrower suffers a
notorious change in his economic
circumstances.
Art. 591. If the Joan is intended for
economic purposes, interest is presumed to
be owed, and such interest may not exceed
the rate referred to in art. 406, on pain of
reduction, with annual compounding being
permitted. · anual.
Art. 592. If none has been expressly
agreed, the term of the loan shall be:·
I - until the next harvest, if the loan is of
agricultural products, either for
consumption or for sowing;
II - at least. thirty days, if the loan is of
money;
III - for such time as the borrower may
declare, if the Joan is of other fungible
things.
Chapter VII - Provision of
Services
Art. 593. Provision of services that is not
subject to employment legislation or to
special legislation shall be governed by the
provisions of this Chapter.
118
I - se a pessoa, de cuja autorizm;ao ne-
cessitava o mutuario para contrair o
emprestimo, o ratificar posteriormente;
IT - se o menor, estando ausente essa pes-
soa, se viu obrigado a contrair o empresti-
mo para os seus alimentos hahituais;
III - se o menor tiver bens ganhos com
o seu trabalho. Mas, em ta! caso, a exe-
cw;ao do credor nao !hes podera ultra-
passar as for\:as;
IV - se o emprestimo reverteu em bene-
ffcio do menor;
V - se o menor obteve o emprestimo
maliciosamente.
Art. 590. 0 mutuante pode exigir ga-
rantia da restitui\:aO, se antes do venci-
mento o mutuario sofrer notoria mu-
danr,:a em sua situm;ao economica.
Art. 591. Destinando-se o mutuo a fins
economicos, presumem-se devidos ju-
ros, os quais, sob pena de redur,:ao, nao
poderao exceder a taxa a que se refere o
art. 406, permitida a capitalizar,:ao
Art. 592. Nao se tendo convencionado
expressamente, 0 prazo do mutuo sera:
I- ate a pro xi ma colheita, se o mutuo for
de produtos agrfcolas, assim para o
consumo, como para semeadura;
II - de trinta dias, pelo menos, se for de
dinheiro;
III - do espar,:o de tempo que declarar o
mutuante, se for de qualquer outra coisa
fungfvel.
Capitulo VII - Da Presta~o de
Scrvir,:o
Art. 593. A prestar,:ao de servir,:o, que
as
niio estiver sujeita leis trabaJhistas OU
a lei especial, reger-se-a pelas disposi-
r,:oes deste Capftulo.
119 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 594. Toda a especie de servi1;0 ou
trabalho lfcito, material ou imaterial,
pode ser contrntada mcdiante retribui-
r;ao.
Art. 595. No contrato de prestai;:ao de
servii;o, quando qualquer das partes
nao souber ler, nem escrever, o instru-
mento podeni ser assinado a rogo e
subscrito por duas testemunhas.
Art. 596. Nao se tendo estipulado, nem
chegado a acordo as partes, fixar-se-a
por arbitramento a retribuii;;ao, segundo
o costume do lugar, o tempo de servii;o
e sua qualidade.
Art. 597. A retribuir,:ao pagar-se-a de-
pois de prestado o servir,:o, se, por con-
ven9iio, ou costume, nao houver de ser
adiantada, ou paga em prestar,:oes.
Art. 598. A prestairao de servii,;o nao se
podera convencionar por mais de qua-
tro anos, embora o contrato tenha por
causa o pagamento de dfvida de quern o
presta, ou se destine aexecur,:ao de certa
e determinada obra. Neste caso, decor-
ridos quatro anos, dar-se-a por findo o
contrato, ainda que nao concluida a
obra.
Art. 599. Nao havendo prazo estipula-
do, nem se podendo inferir da natureza
do contrato, ou do costume do lugar,
qualquer das partes, a seu arbitrio, me-
diante previo aviso, pode resolver o
contrato.
Pariigrafo unico. Dar-se-a o aviso:
I - com antecedencia de oito dias, se o
salario se houver fixado por tempo de
um mes, ou mais;
II - com antecipar,:ao de quatro dias, se o
salario se tiver ajustado por semana, ou
quinzena;
Art. 594-599
Art. 594. Licit services and work of all
kinds, either tangible or intangible, may be
contracted in exchange for compensation.
Art. 595. In a contract for provision of
services, when one of the parties does not
know how to read and write, the instrument
may be signed by another at his request,
together with two witnesses.
Art. 596. If the compensation is not
stipulated and the parties do not reach
agreement, the compensation shall be fixed
by expert appraisal, according to the
custom of the place, the length of the
service and its quality.
Art. 597. The compensation shall be paid
after the service is provided unless by
agreement or by custom it is paid in
advance or in installments.
Art. 598. A contract for provision of
services may not be for more than four
years, even if the contract is made in
payment of a debt owed by the one who
provides the services, or is intended for the
execution of a certain and determinate
work. In the latter case, after four years
have run, the contract is taken to have
expired, even if the work is not concluded.
Art. 599. If the duration is not stipulated
and cannot be inferred from the nature of
the contract or the custom of the place,
either of the parties may, at his discretion,
terminate the contract by prior notice.
Sole paragraph. Notice shall be given:
I - eight days in advance, if the salary is
fixed by month or some longer period;
II - four days in advance, if the salary is
agreed to on a weekly or biweekly basis;
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 600-605
III the day before, if the contract was
made less than seven days earlier.
Art. 600. The time that the service
provider, through his own fault, failed to
provide services is not counted in the
duration of the contract.
Art. 601. If a service provider is not
contracted for a certain and determinate
job, he is deemed to have obligated himself
to perform any and all services compatible
with his powers and condition.
Art. 602~ If a service provider is contracted
for a definite period of time, or for a certain
work, he may not absent himself or resign
without just cause before the time has run or
the work is completed.
Sole paragraph. If the service provider
resigns without just cause, he shall have the
right to accrued compensation, but shall be
liable for losses and damage. The same
shall occur if he is dismissed for just cause.
Art. 603. If the service provider is
dismissed without just cause, the other
party sh.all be obligated to pay him the
whole of the compensation accrued, and
half of the compensation that he would
receive from that time to the expiry of the
legal term of the contract.
Art. 604. At the end of the contract, the
service provider has the right to require
from the other parfy a declaration that the
contract has terminated. Be has the same
right if he is dismissed without just cause,
or if he has good reason to leave service.
Art: 605. The person to whom the services
are provided may not transfer the right to
the agreed services to another person, nor
may the service provider, without the
approval of the other party, have the
services provided by a substitute.
120
Ill- de vespera, quando SC tenhacontra-
tado por menos de setc dias.
Art. 600. Nao se conta no prazo do con-
trato o tempo em que o prestador de ser-
vi~o. por culpa sua, deixou de servir.
Art. 60I. Nao sendo o prestador de ser-
viiro contratado para certo e determina-
do trabalho, entender-se-a que se obri-
gou atodo e qualquer servi~o compati-
vel com as suas fon;:as e condi((oes.
Art. 602. 0 prcstador de servi90 con-
tratado por tempo certo, ou por obra de-
terminada, nao se pode ausentar. ou
despedir, sem justa causa, antes de
preenchido o tempo, ou conclufda a
obra.
Paragrafo unico. Se se despedir sem
a
justa causa, tera direito retribuii;;ao
vencida. mas respondera por perdas e
danos. 0 mesmo dar-se-a, se despedido
por justa causa.
Art. 603. Se o prestador de servii;o for
despedido sem justa causa, a outrn parte
sera obrigada a pagar-lhe por inteiro a
retribuii;ao vencida, e por metade a que
!he tocaria de entao ao termo legal do
contrato,
Art. 604. Findo o contrato, o prestador
de servit;o tern direito a exigir da outra
parte a declara9ao de que o contrato
esta findo. Igual direito !he cabe, se for
despedido sem justa causa, ou se tiver
havido motivo justo paradeixar o servi-
i;;o.
Art. 605. Nern aquele a quern os servi-
c;:os sao prestados, podera transferir a
outrem o direito aos servi9os ajustados,
nem o prestador de servi~os, sem apra-
zimento da outra parte, dar substituto
que os preste.
121 c6moo CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 606. Seo servii;;o for prestado por
quern nao possua tftulo de habilitai;ao,
ou nao satisfai;;a requisitos outros esta-
belecidos em lei, nao podera quern os
prestou eobrar a retribui9ao normal-
mente correspondente ao trabalho exe-
cutado. Mas se deste resultar beneffcio
para a outra parte, o juiz atribuira a
quern o prestou uma compensai;;ao ra-
zoavel, desde que tenha agido com boa-
fe.
Panigrafo iinico. Nao se aplica a segun-
da parte deste artigo, quando a proibi-
i;ao da prestai;ao de scrvit;o resultar de
lei de ordem publica.
Art. 607. 0 contrato de prestai;ao de
servi~o acaba com a morte de qualquer
das partes. Termina. ainda, pelo escoa-
mento do prazo, pela conclusao da
obra, pela rescisao do contrato median-
te aviso previo, por inadimplemento de
qualquer das partes ou pela impossibili-
dade da continuai;:ao do contrato, moti-
vada por fon;;a maior.
Art. 608. Aquele que aliciar pessoas
obrigadas em contrato escrito a prestar
servii;o a outrem pagara a este a impor-
tfmcia que ao prestador de servii;:o, pelo
ajuste desfeito, houvesse de caber du-
rante do is anos.
Art. 609. A alienar;ao do predio agrfco-
1a, onde a presta9ao dos servir;os se
opera, n1io importa a rescisao do contra-
to, salvo ao prestador opi;;lio entre con-
tinua-lo com o adquirente da proprieda-
de ou com o primitivo contratante.
Capltulo VIII - Da Empreitada
Art. 610. 0 empreiteiro de uma obra
pode contribuir para ela s6 com seu tra-
balho ou com ele e os materiais.
Art. 606-610
Art. 606. If the service is provided by
someone who does not hold the proper
accreditation or does not satisfy other
requirements established by law, the one
who provided the services cannot charge
the compensation that would normally
correspond to the work performed.
However, if benefit results to the other
party from that work, the judge may
attribute a reasonable compensation to the
one who provided the services, provided
that he acted in good faith.
Sole paragraph. The second part of this
article does not apply when the prohibition
against the provision of services arises out
of a rule of public order.
Art. 607. A contract for provision of
services ends with the death of either of the
parties. It also tenninates upon expiry of its
duration, upon conclusion of the work, by
rescission on prior notice and by
impossibility of continuing with the
contract by reason of force majeure.
Art. 608. Anyone who entices away
persons obligated under a written contract
to provide services to another shall pay to
the latter the amount to which the service
prpvider would have been entitled under
the broken agreement over a period of two
years.
Art. 609. The alienation of an agricultural
property on which services are provided
does not result in the rescission of the
contract, and the service provider may opt
between continuing the contract with the
acquiror of the property or with the original
contracting party.
Chapter VIII- Contract of Enterprise
Art. 610. The contractor for a work may
contribute only his labor to the work, or
both his labor and materials.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 611-614
§ 1. The obligation to furnish materials is
not presumed: it results from the law or the
will of the parties.
§ 2. A contract for preparation of the
designs or plans for a project does not imply
the obligation to execute them or to inspect
the carrying out of the designs or plans.
Art. 611. When the contractor furnishes
materials, the contractor bears the risks
until delivery of the work, to the approval
of the one who ordered it, if he is not in
default in receiving the work. But if he is in
default, he bears the risk<>.
Art. 612. If the contractor furnishes only
labor, all risks for which he is not at fault
are borne by the owner.
Art. 613. If the contract of enterprise is for
labor only (art. 610), and the thing perishes
prior to delivery, without default in
receiving it on the part of the owner and
without fault on the part of the contractor,
the contractor shall lose his compensation,
if he does not prove that the loss resulted
from it defect in the materials and that he
complained of their quantity or quality in a
timely fashion.
Art. 614. If the work consists of distinct
parts, or is by its nature a work that is
determined by measurement, the contractor
shall have the right to have the work
inspected and accepted by measure, or
according to the parts into which it is
divided, and may demand payment in
proportion to the part of the work that has
been carried out.
§ l . All that has been paid for is presumed
to have been inspected and accepted.
122
§ 1° A obriga\!ao de fornecer os mate-
riais nao se presume; resultada lei ou da
vontade das partes.
§ 2° 0 contrato para elaborai;ao de um
projeto nao implica a obrigayao de exe-
cuta-lo, ou de fiscalizar-lhe a execu91io.
Art. 611. Quando o empreiteiro forne-
ce os materiais, correm por sua conta os
riscos ate o momenta da entrega da
obra, a contento de quern a encomen-
dou, se este nao estiver em mora de re-
ceber. Masse estiver, por sua conta cor-
rerao os riscos.
Art. 612. Se o empreiteiro so forneccu
mao-de-obra, todos os riscos em quc
nao tiver culpa correrao por conta do
dono.
Art. 613. Sendo a empreitada unica-
mente de Javor (art. 610), se acoisa pe-
recer antes de entregue, sem mora do
dono nem culpa do empreiteiro, este
perdera a retribuii;ao, se nao provar que
a perda resultou de defeito dos mate-
riais e que em tempo reclamara contra a
sua quantidade ou qualidade.
Art. 614. Se a obra constar de partes
distintas, ou for de natureza das que se
determinam por medida, o empreiteiro
tera direito a que tambem se verifique
por medida, ou segundo as partes em
que se dividir, podendo exigir o paga-
mento na propor~ao da obra executada.
§ 1° Tudo o que se pagou presurne-se
verificado.
123 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
§ 2° 0 que se mcdiu presume-se verifi-
cado se, em trinta dias, a contar dame-
di~ao. nao forem denunciados os vfcios
ou defeitos pelo dono da obra ou por
quern estiver incumbido da sua fiscali-
zas;iio.
Art. 615. Concluida a obra de acordo
com o ajuste, ou o costume do lugar, o
dono e obrigado a recebe-la. Podera,
porem, rejeita-la, se o empreiteiro se
afastou das instru~i:ies recebidas e dos
pianos dados, ou das regras tecnicas em
trabalhos de ta! natureza.
Art. 616. No caso da segunda parte do
artigo antecedente, pode quern cnco-
mendou a obra. em vez de enjeita-la, re-
cebe-la com abatirnento no pres;o.
Art. 617. 0 empreiteiro e obrigado a
pagar os materiais que recebeu, se por
imperfcia ou ncgligencia os inutilizar.
Art. 618. Nos contratos de empreitada
de edificios ou outras construi;i:ies con-
sideraveis, o empreiteiro de materiais e
execus;iio respondera, durante o. prazo
irredutivel de cinco anos, pela solidez e
segurani;a do trabalho, assim em razao
dos materiais, como do solo.
Paragrafo unico. Decaira do direito as-
segtirado neste artigo o dono da obra
que nao propuser a a~ao contra o em-
preiteiro, nos cento e oitenta dias se-
guintes ao aparecimento do vicio ou de-
feito.
Art. 619. Salvo estipula~ao em contra-
rio, o empreiteiro que se incumbir de
executarumaobra, segundo piano acei-
to por quern a encomendou, nao ten1 di-
reito a exigir acrescimo no pre\:O, ainda
que sejam introduzidas modifica\:ocs
no projeto, a nao ser que estas resultem
de instrui;:oes escritas do dono da obra.
Art. 615-619
§ 2. That which has been measured is
presumed to have been accepted if, within
thirty days from the measurement, no
notice of vices or defects has been given by
the owner of the work or by the person who
was responsible for its inspection.
Art. 615. Once the work has been
concluded in accordanc.e with the
agreement, or the custom of the place, the
owner is obligated to receive it. He may
reject it, however, if the contractor departed
from the instructions he received and the
plans he was given, or from the technical
rules applicable to works of that nature.
Art. 616. In the case contemplated in the
second part of the preceding article, the
person who ordered the work may, instead
of rejecting it, receive it with a reduction in
the price.
Art. 617. The contractor is obligated to pay
for the materials that he received, if by lack
of skill or negligence he renders them
unusable.
Art. 618. In contracts of enterprise for
buildings and other sizeable constructions,
a contractor for materials and execution is
liable for the solidity and the safety of the
work, in function of both the materials and
the soil, for a period of five years, which
may not be reduced.
Sole paragraph. The right given in this
article shall lapse if the owner of the work
does not bring action against the contractor
within the one hundred and eighty days
following the appearance of the vice or
defect.
Art. 619. Unless otherwise stipulated, a
contractor who undertakes to carry out a
work, according to a plan accepted by the
one who ordered the work, shall not have
the right to demand an increase in the price,
even if modifications are made to the plan,
unless the modifications result from written
instructions given by the owner of the
work.
Art. 620-623 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. Even if written
authorization was not given, the owner of
the work is obligated to pay the contractor
for increases and additions, in the amount
determined by expert appraisal, if the
owner was always present at the work, by
reason of continual visits, and could not
have been unaware of what was occurring,
but never protested.
Art. 620. tf there is a reduction in the cost
of materials or labor greater than one-tenth
of the overall agreed price, the overall price
may be revised, on application by the
owner of the work, so. as to give h}m the
benefit of the difference determined on
revision.
Art. 621. The owner of the work may not
introdqce modifications to the plan he
approved without the consent of the author
of the plan, even where the execution of the
plan is confided to third parties, unless, for
supervening causes or technical reasons,
execution of the plan in its original form is
proved to be inconvenient or excessively
onerous.
Sole paragraph. The prohibition contained
in this article does not apply to minor
alternations, provided always that the
esthetic unity of the planned work is
safeguarded.
Art. 622. If execution of the work is
confided to third parties, the liability of the
author of the plans for the work, provided
he does not assume the conduct and
inspection of the work, is limited to damage
resulting from defects contemplated in art.
618 and its sole paragraph.
Art. 623. Even after construction has
begun, the owner of the work Il,lay suspend
it, provided he pays the contractor expen~es
and profits corresponding to the services
already performed, together with a
reasonable indemnification, calculated as a
function of what the contractor would have
earned, if the work had been completed.
124
Paragrafo unico. Ainda que nao tenha
havido autorizai;:ao escrita, o dono da
obra e obrigado a pagar ao empreiteiro
os aumentos e acrescimos, segundo o
que for arbitrado, se, sempre presente a
obra, por continuadas visitas, nao podia
ignorar o que se estava passando, e nun-
ca protestou.
Art. 620. Se ocorrerdiminui~ao no pre-
\:O do material ou <la mao-de-obrasupe-
rior a um decimo do prei;:o global con-
vencionado, podera este ser revisto, a
pedido do dono da obra, para que se !he
assegure a diferem;:a apurada.
Art. 621. Sem ariuencia de seu autor.
nao pode o proprietario da obra intro-
duzir modifica~oes no projeto por ele
aprovado, ainda que a execuc;:ao seja
confiada a terceiros, a ni'io ser que, por
motivos supervenientes ou razoes de
ordem tecnica, fique comprovada a in-
conveniencia ou a excessiva onerosida-
de de execwrao do projetp em sua forma
originaria.
Paragrafo unico. A proibic;:ao deste arti-
go nao abrange altera~oes de pouca
monta, ressalvada sempre a unidade es-
tetica da obra projetada.
Art. 622. Se a execui;:ao <la obra for
confiada a terceiros. a responsabilidade
do autor do projeto·respectivo, desde
que nao assuma a direc;:ao ou fiscaliza-
i;:ao daquela, ficara limitada aos danos
resultantes de defeitos previstos no art
618 e seu paragrafo unico.
Art. 623. Mesmo ap6s iniciada a cons-
trm;;ao, pode o dono da obra suspende-
la, desde que pague ao empreiteiro as
despesas e lucros relativos aos serviyos
ja feitos, mais indeniza~ao razoavel,
calculada em funyao do que ele teria ga-
nho, se conclulda·a obra.
125 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 624. Suspensa a execu\:aO da em-
preitada sem justa causa, responde o
empreiteiro por perdas e danos.
Art. 625. Podera o empreiteiro suspen-
der aobra:
I - por culpa do dono, ou por rnotivo de
fori;:a maior;
II - quando, no decorrer dos servii;:os, se
manifestarem dificu!dades imprevisf-
veis de execl!l;:ao, resultantes de causas
geol6gicas ou hfdricas, ou outras seme-
lhantes, de modo que tome a empreita-
da excessivamente onerosa, e o dono <la
obra se opuser ao reajuste do pre~o ine-
rente ao projeto por ele elaborado, ob-
servados os prec;:os;
III - se as modificai;:oes exigidas pelo
dono da obra, por seu vulto e natureza,
forem desproporcionais ao projeto
aprovado, ainda que o dono se disponha
a arcar com o acrescimo de pre~o.
Art. 626. Nao se extingue o contrato de
empreitada pela morte de qualquer <las
partes, salvo se ajustado em considera-
~ao as qualidades pessoais do emprei-
teiro.
Capitulo IX - Do Dep6sito
Se~ao I - Do Dep6sito Voluntario
Art. 627. Pelo contrato de dep6sito re-
cebe o depositario um objeto move!,
paraguardar, ate que o depositante ore-
clame.
Art. 628. 0 contrato de dep6sito egra-
tuito, exceto se houver conven~ao em
contrario, se resultante de atividade ne-
gocial ou se o depositario o praticar por
profissao.
Paragrafo unico. Se o dep6sito for one-
roso e a retribui~ao do depositario ni'io
constar de lei, nem resultar de ajuste,
sera determinada pelos usos do lugar, e,
na falta destes, por arbitramento.
Art. 624-628
Art. 624. If execution of the work is
suspended by the contractor without just
cause, he is liable for losses and damage.
Art. 625. The contractor may suspend the
work:
I - for fault on the part of the owner, or by
reason offorce majeure;
II - when in the course of the services
unforeseeable difficulties in executing the
work become apparent, resulting from
geological, hydrological or similar causes,
such that the enterprise becomes
excessively onerous, and the owner of the
work refuses to adjust the price inherent in
the plan he prepared, in view of the costs;
III - if the modifications required by the
owner of the work, by reason of their size or
nature, are disproportionate to the approved
plan, even if the owner offers to pay the
increase in the price.
Art. 626. A contract of enterprise is not
extinguished by the death of either of the
parties, unless it was made in consideration
of the contractor's personal qualities.
Chapter IX- Deposit
Section I - Voluntary Deposit
Art. 627. In a contract of deposit, the
depositary receives a movable object for
keeping until the depositor claims it.
Art. 628. The contract of deposit is
gratuitous unless the contrary has been
agreed, the deposit results from business
activities or the depositary performs the
service by profession.
Sole paragraph. If the deposit is onerous
and the remuneration of the depositary is
not set by legislation and does not result
from agreement, it shall be determined by
the practice of the place and, in its absence,
by expert appraisal.
Art. 629-635 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 629. In the keeping and preservation of
the thing deposited, the depositary is
obligated to use the care and diligence he
customarily uses with his own property,
and to return the thing, with all its fruits and
additions, when the depositor so demands.
Art. 630. If the thing deposited was
delivered closed, pasted shut, or sealed, it
shall be maintained in that state.
Art. 631. Saving provision to the contrary,
the thing shall be returned at the place in
which it was kept. The expenses of the
return shall be the depositor's.
Art. 632. If a thing has been deposited in
the interest of a third party, and the
depositary has been made aware of this fact
by the depositor, the depositary cannot
exonerate himself by returning the thing to
the depositor, without the consent of the
interested third party.
Art. 633. Even if the contract fixes a term
for return of the thing, the depositary shall
deliver the thing deposited immediately on
demand, unless he has the right of retention
referred to in art. 644, the object is
judicially embargoed, execution
proceedings involving the object are
pending and the depositary has been
notified of them, cir there is good reason to
suspect that the thing was wrongfully
obtained.
Art~ 634. In the last case contemplated in
the preceding article, the depositary shall
request that the thing be delivered over to
the Public Deposit, giving the reasons for
his suspicions.
Art 635. The depositary also has the option
of requesting the judicial deposit of the
thing when, for a plausible reason, he
cannot keep it and the depositor does bot
wantto receive it.
126
Art. 629. 0 depositario eobrigado a tcr
na guard a e conserva\;UO da coisa depo-
sitada o cuidado e diligencia que costu-
ma com o que !he pertence, bem como
a restitui-la, com todos os frutos c
acrescidos, quando o exija o deposi-
tante.
Art. 630. Se o dep6sito se entregou fe-
chaao, colado, selado, ou lacrado, nesse
mesmo estado se mantera.
Art. 631. Salvo disposi\!1'io em conrra-
rio, arestituiirao dacoisadevedar-se no
lugar em que tiver de ser guardada. As
despesas de restituii;:ao corrcm por con-
ta do depositante.
Art. 632. Se a coisa houver sido depo-
sitada no interesse de terceiro, e o depo-
sitario tiver sido cientificado deste fato
pelo depositante, niio podera ele exone-
rar-se restituindo a coisa a este, sem
consentimento daquele.
Art. 633. Aindaque o contrato fixe pra-
zo arestitui<;ao, o depositiirio entregara
o dep6sito logo que se !he exija, salvo
se tivero direito de retenirao a que sere-
fere o art. 644, se o objeto for judicial-
mente embargado, se sobre ele pender
execuirao, notificada ao depositario, ou
se houver inotivo razoavel de suspeitar
que a coisa foi dolosamente obtida.
Art. 634. No caso do artigo anteceden-
te, iiltima parte, o depositario, expondo
o fundamento da suspeita, requerera
que se recolha o objeto ao Dep6sito Pli·
blico.
Art. 635. Ao depositario serii faculta-
do, outrossim, requerer dep6sito judi·
cial da coisa, quando, por motivo plau-
sfvel, nao a possa guardar, e o deposi·
tante nao queira recebe-la.
127 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 636. 0 depositario, que por for\'.a
maior houver perdido a coisa deposita-
da e recebido outra em seu lugar, e ob-
rigado a entregar a segunda ao deposi-
tante, e ceder-lhe. !IS a\;6es que no caso
tiver contra o teral;lro responsavel pela
restitui\;iiO da primeira.
Art. 637. 0 herdeiro do depositario,
que de boa-fe vendeu a coisa deposita-
da, eobrigado a assistir o depositante na
reivindica~ao, e a restituir ao compra-
dor o prei;:o recebido.
Art. 638. Salvo os ca.~os previstos nos
arts. 633 e 634. nao podera o deposita-
rio furtar-se a restitUi\;iiO do deposito,
alegando nao pertencer a coisa ao depo-
sitante, ou opondo compensairao, exce-
to se noutro dep6sito se fundar.
Art. 639. Sendo dois ou mais deposi-
tantes, e divisive! a coisa, a cad a um so
entregara o depositario a respectiva
parte, salvo se houver entre eles solida-
riedade.
Art. 640. Sob pena de responder par
perdas e danos, nfio podera o deposita-
rio, sem licenp expressa do depositan-
te, servir-se da coisa depositada, nem a
dar em dep6sito a outrem.
Paragrafo iinico. Seo depositario, devi-
damente autorizado, confiar a coisa em
dep6sito a terceiro, sera responsavel se
agiu com culpa na escolha deste.
Art. 641. Se o depositario se tomar in-
capaz. a pessoa que !he assumir a admi-
nistra\!1'io dos bens diligenciara imedia-
tamente restituir a coisa depositada e,
nao querendo OU llUO podendo 0 deposi-
tante recebe-la, recolhe-la-a ao Dep6si-
to Publico ou promovera nomeai;ao de
outro depositario.
Art. 636-641
Art. 636. A depositary who, by force
majeure, has lost the deposited thing and
received another in its place, is obligated to
deliver the latter to the depositor, and to
assign to him all the tights of action he may
have against the third party who is
responsible for restitution of the original
thing.
Art. 637. The heir of a depositary, who in
good faith sold the deposited thing, is
obligated to assist the depositor in
demanding the return of the thing, and to
restitute to the buyer the price he received.
Art. 638. Except in the cases provided for
in arts. 633 and 634, a depositary may not
avoid returning the thing by alleging that it
does not belong to the depositor or by
claiming compensation of debts, unless the
compensation is based on another deposit.
Art. 639. If there are two or more
depositors and the thing is divisible, the
depositary shall deliver to each his
respective share, unless they are solidary
depositors.
Art. 640. On pain of liability for losses and
damage, the depositary may not use the
thing deposited or deposit it with another,
without the express permission of the
depositor.
Sole paragraph. If the depositary, being
duly authorized, confides the thing in
deposit to a third party, he will be liable if
he was at fault in the choice of the third
party.
Art. 641. If the depositary becomes
incapable, the person who assumes the
administration of his property shall take
steps immediately to return the deposited
thing, and if the depositor does not want to,
or cannot, receive it, he shall deliver it over
to the Public Deposit or cause another
depositary to be appointed.
Art. 642-648 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 642. The depositary is not liable for
cases of force majeure, but in order for the
excuse to be valid, he must prove that it was
a case of force majeure.
Art. 643. The depositor is obligated to pay
the depositary for expens~s incurred in
keeping the thing and for the losses that
resulted from the deposit.
Art. 644. The depositary may retain the
thing deposited until he is paid the
remuneration due or the net amount of
expenses or losses referred to in the
preceding article; he must prove such losses
or expenses immediately.
Sole paragraph. If such debts, expenses or
losses are not sufficiently proved, or are not
liquid, the depositary may demand
appropriate security from the depositor or,
in the absence of security, the removal of
the thing to the Public Deposit, until their
liquid a.mount is determined.
Art. 645. The deposit of fungible things, in
which the depositary undertakes to return
objects of the same kind, quality and
quantity, shall be governed by the
provisions concerning loans.
Art. 646. Voluntary deposit is proved by
writing.
Section II - Necessary Deposit
Art. 647. Necessary deposit is:
I - that which is made in the performance of
a legal obligation;
II - that which is made in the event of some
calamity, such as fire, flood, shipwreck or
pillage.
Art. 648. The deposit referred to in item I
of the preceding a.rticle shall be governed
by the provisions of the applicable
legislation, and, where such legislation is
silent or contains lacunae, by the provisions
concerning voluntary deposit.
128
Art. 642. 0 depositario nao responde
pelos casos de forr;:a maior; mas, para
que !he valha a escusa, tera de prova-
los.
Art. 643. 0 depositante e obrigado a
pagar ao depositario as despesas feitas
com a coisa, e os prejufzos que do dep6-
sito provierem.
Art. 644.·0 depositlirio podera reter o
dep6sito ate que se !he pague a retribui-
r;:ao devida, o lfquido valor das despe-
sas, ou dos prejufzos a que se refere o
artigo anterior, provando imediatamen-
te esses prejufzos ou essas despesas.
Paragrafo unico. Se essas dfvidas. des-
pesas OU prejufzos nao forem provados
suficientemente, ou forem illquidos, o
depositario podera exigir cam;:ao ido-
nea do depositante ou, na falta desta, a
remor;:ao da coisa para o Deposito Pu-
blico, ate que se liquidem.
Art. 645. 0 deposito de coisas fungf-
veis, em que o depositario se obrigue a
restituir objetos do mesmo genero, qua-
lidade e quantidade, regular-se-a pelo
disposto acerca do mutuo.
Art. 646. 0 deposito voluntario provar-
se-a por escrito.
Se\;i}o II- Do Dep6sito Necessiirio
Art. 647. Edep6sito necessario:
I - o que se faz em desempenho de obri-
ga~ao legal;
II - o que se efetua por ocasiao de algu-
ma calamidade, como o incendio, a
inunda1<iio, o naufragio ou o saque.
Art. 648. 0 deposito a que se refere o
inciso I do artigo antecedente, regercse-
a pela disposir;:iio da respectiva lei, e, no
silencio ou deficiencia dela, pelas con-
cementes ao deposito voluntario.
129 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. As disposii;oes deste
artigo aplicam-se aos dep6sitos previs-
tos no inciso U do artigo antecedente,
podendo estes certificarem-se por qual-
quer meio de prova.
Art. 649. Aos depositos previstos no
artigo antecedente e equiparado o das
bagagens dos viajantes ou h6spedes nas
hospedarias onde estiverem.
Paragrafo unico. Os hospedeiros res-
ponderao como depositarios, assim
como pelos furtos e roubos que perpe-
trarem as pessoas emptegadas ou admi-
tidas nos seus estabelecimentos.
Art. 650. Cessa, nos casos do artigo an-
tecedente, a responsabilidade dos hos-
pedeiros, se provarem que os fatos pre-
judicials aos viajantes ou hospedes nao
podiam ter sldo evitados.
Art. 651. 0 dep6sito necessario nao se
presume gratuito. Na hip6tese do art.
649, a remunerar;:ao pelo dep6sito esta
inclufda no pre1to da hospedagem.
Art. 652• Seja o dep6sito voluntario ou
necessario, o depositario que nao o res-
tituir quando exigido sera compelido a
faze-lo mediante prisao nao excedente
a um ano, e ressarcir os prejufzos.
Capitulo X - Do Mandato
Se~iio I - Disposi~oes Gerais
Art. 653. Opera-se o mandato quando
alguem recebe de outrem poderes para,
em seu nome, praticar atos ou adminis-
trar interesses. A procurar;:ao eo instru-
mento do mandato.
Art. 654. Todas as pessoas capazes sao
aptas para dar procurar;:lio mediante ins-
trumento particular, que valera desde
que tenha a assinatura do outorgante.
Art. 649-654
Sole paragraph. The provisions of this
article apply to the deposits contemplated
in item II of the preceding article, which
may be proved by any type of evidence.
Art. 649. The baggage of travelers or of
.guests in lodgings is equated to the deposits
contemplated in the preceding article.
Sole paragraph. Innkeepers are liable as
depositaries, and are liable also for theft
and robbery perpetrated by persons
employed at, or admitted to, their
establishments.
Art. 650. Innkeepers' liability under the
preceding article ceases if it is proved that
the events that injured the travelers or
guests could not have been avoided.
Art. 651. Necessary deposit is not
presumed to be gratuitous. In the case
contemplated in art. 649, remuneration for
the deposit is included in the price of
lodging.
Art. 652. Regardless of whether the deposit
is voluntary or necessary, a depositary who
does not return the thing when required
shall be compelled to do so, through
imprisonment for not more than one year,
and to compensate losses.
Chapter X - Mandate
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 653. Mandate occurs when someone
receives powers from another to perform
acts or manage interests in his name. A
procuration is the instrument of a mandate.
Art. 654. All capable persons have the
ability to give a procuration by private
instrument, which shall be valid provided
that it contains the grantor's signature.
Art. 655-661 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ I. The private instrument must contain
the designation of the place where it was
made, the description of the grantor and the
grantee, the date and the purpose of the
grant, together with the designation and
extent of the powers conferred.
§ 2. A third party with whom the mandatary
deals may require that the grantor's
signature of the procuration be certified.
Art. 655. Even where a mandate is granted
by public instrument, delegation may be
made by private instrument.
Art. 656. A mandate may be express or
tacit, oral or written.
.Art. 657. The grant of a mandate is subject
to the form r(!quired by law for the act to be
performed. Oral mandate is not permitted
when the act to be performed must be made
in writing.
Art. 658. A mandate is presumed to be
gratuitous when no remuneration is
stipulated, unless its purpose is one dealt
with by the mandatary by reason of his
office ot a lucrative profession.
Sole paragraph, If the mandate is onerous,
the mandatary shall be entitled to the
remuneration provided for by law or in the
contract. If the law and the contract are
silent, the remuneration shall be
determined by the practice of the place or,
in its absence, by expert appraisal.
Art. 659. Acceptance of a mandate may be
tacit, and results from beginning
performance of the mandate.
Art. 660. A mandate may be special to one
or more defined transactions, or general, for
all the mandator' s business.
Art. 661. A mandate in general terms
confers only powers of administration.
130
§ 1° 0 instrumento particular deve can-
ter a indicar;ao do lugar onde foi passa-
do, a qualificar;ao do outorgante e do
outorgado, a data e o objetivo da outor-
ga com a designa1:ao c a extensao dos
poderes conferidos.
§ 2° O terceiro com quern o mandatario
tratar podera exigir que a procura\:ao
craga a firma reconhecida.
Art. 655. Ainda quando se outargue
mandato por instrumento publico, pode
substabelecer-se mediante instrumento
particular.
Art. 656. 0 mandato pode ser expresso
ou tiicito, verbal ou escrito.
Art. 657. A outorga do mandato esta
sujeita aformaexigida por l.ei para() ato
a ser praticado. Nao. se admite mandato
verbal quando o ato deva ser celebrado
por escrito.
Art. 658. 0 mandato presume-se gra-
tuito quando nao houver sido estipulada
retribuir;ao, exceto se o seu objeto cor-
responder ao daqueles que o mandatii-
rio trata por oficio ml profissao lucrati-
va.
Pariigrafo unico. Se o mandato for one-
roso, cabera ao mandatario a retribui-
r;ao previstaem lei ou no contrato. Sen-
do estes omissos, sera ela determinada
pelos usos do lugar, ou, na falta dcstes.
por arbitramento.
Art. 659. A aceitar;ao do mandato pode
ser tacita, e resulta do comeiro de execu-
r;ao.
Art. 660. 0 mandato pode ser especial
a um ou mais neg6cios determinada-
mente, ou geral a todos os do mandante.
Art. 661. 0 mandato em termos gerais
so confere poderes de administrac;ao.
131 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
§ I 0 Para alicnar, hipotecar. transigir,
ou praticar outros quaisquer atos que
exorbitem da administrar;ao ordinaria,
depende a procurm;:ao de poderes espe-
ciais e expressos.
§ 2° 0 poder de transigir nilo importa o
de firmarcompromisso.
Art. 662. Os atos praticados por quern
nao tenha mandato, ou o tenha sem po-
deres suficientes, sao ineficazes em re-
Ia\'.aO aquele em cujo nome foram prati-
cados, salvo se este os ratificar.
Paragrafo unico. A ratificai,;ao ha de ser
expressa, ou rcsullar de ato inequfvoco,
e retroagira adata do ato .
Art. 663. Sempre que o mandattirio es-
ti pul ar neg6cios expressamente em
nome do mandante. sera este o iinico
responsavel; ficarii, po rem, o mandata-
rio pessoalmente obrigado, se agir no
seu pr6prio nome, ainda que o neg6cio
seja de conta do mandante.
Art. 664. 0 mandatario tern o direito de
reter, do objeto da operairao que !he foi
cometida, quanta baste para pagamento
de tudo que !he for devido em conse-
qiicncia do mandato.
Art. 665. 0 mandatario que exceder os
poderes do mandato, ou proceder con-
tra eles, sera considerado mero gestor
de neg6cios, enquanto o mandante !he
nao ratificar os atos.
Art. 666. 0 maior de dezesseis e menor
de dezoito anos nao emancipado pode
ser mandatario, mas o mandante nao
tern ac;ao contra ele senao de conformi-
dade com as regras gerais, aplicaveis as
obrigll\:oes contrafdas por menores.
Art. 662-666
§ 1. For alienation, hypothecation,
settlement and the performance of other
acts that fall outside ordinary
administration, the procuration must
contain special and express powers.
§ 2. The power to settle does not imply the
power to sign a submission agreement.
Art. 662. Acts performed by one who does
not have a mandate or who has insufficient
powers are ineffective with respect to the
person in whose name they were
performed, unless he ratifies them.
Sole paragraph. Ratification must be
express, or result from an unequivocal act,
and shall have retroactive effect to the date
of the act.
Art. 663. Whenever a mandatary stipulates
transactions expressly in the name of the
mandator, the latter shall be solely liable;
however, the mandatary shall be personally
obligated if he acts in his own name, even if
the transaction is made on behalf of the
mandator.
Art. 664. A mandatary has the right to
retain, from the property entrusted to him,
an amount sufficient to pay all that is due to
him by reason of the mandate.
Art. 665. A mandatary who exceeds the
powers of the mandate, or who proceeds
contrary to them, shall be considered to be
a mere volunteer agent unless and until the
mandator ratifies his acts.
Art. 666. An unemanicipated person of
more than sixteen but less than eighteen
years of age may be a mandatary, but the
mandator has no action against him except
in conformity with the general rules
applicable to obligations contracted by
minors.
Art. 667-669 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
SectiQn II - Obligations of the
Mandatary
Art. 667. A mandatary is obligated to apply
all his habitual diligence in the
performance of the mandate, and to
inde111pify any loss caused by his fault or by
the fi+ult of the person to whom, wjthout
authorization, he delegated powers that he
ought to exercise.personally.
§ I. If, notwithstanding the mandator's
prohibition, the mandatary causes himself
to be substituted in the mandate, he shall be
liable to his rriandator for the losses
occurring under the. management of the
substitute, even though such losses result
from a fortuitous event, unless he proves
that the event would have occurred even if
there had been no delegation.
§ 2. If powers to delegate exist, the damage
caused by'the delegate can only be imputed
to the mandatary if he acted with fault in the
choice of the delegate or in the instructions
given to the latter.
§ 3. If the prohibition against delegation is
set out in the procuration, the acts
performed by the delegate do hot bind the
mandator, unless they ate expressly
ratified, in which case the ratification shall
be retroactive to the date of the act.
§ 4. If the procuration is silent as to
delegation, the procurator shall .be liable
only if the delegate acts with fault.
Art. 668. A mandatary is obligated to
render account of his administration to the
mandator, and to transfer to the mandator
all advantages of any kind arising out of the
mandate, regardless of how the advantages
were obtained.
Art. 669. A mandatary may not
compensate the losses that he caused
against the benefits that he obtained for his
mandator.
132
Sei;ao II - Das Obrigm;oes do
Mandatario
Art. 667. 0 mandatario e obrigado a
aplicar toda sua diligencia habitual na
execm;iio do mandato, e a indenizar
qualquer prejufzo causado por culpa
sua ou daquele a quern substabelecer,
sem autorizai;iio, poderes que devia
exercer pessoalmente.
§ 1° Se, nao obstante proibi\:ao do man-
dante, o mandatario se fizer substituir
na execm;ao do mandato, respondera ao
seu constituinte pelos prejufzos ocorri-
dos sob a gerencia do substituto, embo-
ra provenientes de caso fortuito, salvo
provando que o caso teria sobrevindo,
aindaque nao tivesse havido substabe-
lecimento.
§ 2° Havendo poderes de substabelecer,
s6 seriio imputaveis ao mandatario os
danos causados pelo substabelecido, se
tiver agido com culpa na escolha deste
ou nas instrui;oes dadas a ele.
§ 3° Se a proibi\:1iO de substabelecer
constar da procura1;1io, os atos pratica-
dos pelo substabelecido niio obrigam o
mandante, salvo ratifica\:ao expressa,
que retroagira adata do ato.
§ 4° Sendo omissa a proc1ir~1io quanto
ao substabelecimento, o procurador
sera responsavel se o substabelecido
proceder culposamente.
Art. 668. 0 mandatatio e obrigado a
dar contas de suagerenciaao mandante,
transferindo-lhe as vantagens prove-
nientes do mandato, por qualquer tftulo
que seja.
Art. 669. 0 mandatario nao pode com-
pensar os prejufzos a que deu causa
com os proveitos que, por outro !ado,
tenha granjeado ao seu constituinte.
133 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 670. Pelas somas que devia entre-
gar ao mandante ou recebeu para despe-
sa, mas empregou em proveito seu, pa-
gara o manciatario juros, desde o mo-
mento em que abusou.
Art. 671. Se o mandatario, tendo fun-
dos ou credito do mandante, comprar,
em nome pr6prio, algo que devera com-
prar para o mandante, porter sido ex-
pressamente designado no mandato,
tera este ai;iio para obriga-lo a entrega
da coisa comprada.
Art. 672. Sendo dois ou mais os man-
datarios nomeados no mesmo instru-
mento, qualquer deles podera exercer
os poderes outorgados, se nao forem
expressamente declarados conjuntos,
nem especlficamente designados para
atos diferentes, ou subordinados a atos
sucessivos. Se os mandatarios forem
declarados conjuntos, niio tera eficacia
o ato praticado sem interferencia de to-
dos, salvo havendo ratificai;ao, que re-
troagira adata do ato.
Art. 673. 0 terceiro que, depois de co-
nhecer os poderes do mandatario, com
ele celebrar neg6cio jurfdico exorbitan-
te do mandato, nao tern a\;1iO contra o
mandatario, salvo se este !he prometeu
ratifica;;iio do mandante ou se respon-
sabilizou pessoalmente.
Art. 674. Embora ciente da morte, in-
terdi\:iiO ou mudarn;a de estado do man-
dante, deve o mandatario concluir one-
g6cio ja come1;ado, se houver perigo na
demora.
Art. 670-674
Art. 670. A mandatary shall pay interest on
sums that he should have delivered to the
mandator or that he received to cover
expenses but instead used to his own
benefit, from the moment he misused them.
Art. 671. If a mandatary, having received
funds or credit from the mandator, buys in
his own name something that he should
have bought for the mandator because it
was expressly designated in the mandate,
the mandator shall have a right of action to
obligate the mandatary to deliver the thing
bought.
Art. 672. If two or more mandataries are
named in the same instrument, either of
them may exercise the powers granted, if
they were not expressly declared to be joint
mandataries, nor specifically designated
for different acts, nor subordina:ted to
successive acts. If the mandataries are
declared to be joint, an act performed
without the participation of all the
mandataries shall not be effective, unless it
is ratified, in which case the ratification
shall be retroactive to the date of the act.
Art. 673. A third party who, after becoming
aware of the mandatary's powers, enters
into a juridical transaction with him that
exceeds the mandate, has no action against
the mandatary, unless the latter promised
the third party that the mandator would
ratify the transaction, or personally
assumed liability for the transaction.
Art. 674. Even though aware of the death,
interdiction or change in the status of the
mandator, the mandatary shall conclude a
transaction that has been begun, if there is
risk in delay.
Art. 675-680 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Section III - Obligations of the
Manda tor
Art. 675. The mandator is obligated to
satisfy all the obligations contracted by the
mandatary in conformity with the mandate
granted, and to advance the amount of
expenses needed to perform the mandate,
when the mandatary requests. it of him.
Art. 676. The mandator is obligated to pay
the mandatary the agreed remuneration and
the expenses of performing the mandate,
even if the transaction does not bring about
the expected effect, unless the mandatary is
at fault.
Art. 677. Interest runs on sums advanced
by the mandatary for the performance of the
mandate, from the date of disbursement.
Art. 678. The mandator is likewise
obligated to compensate the mandatary for
losses that he may suffer in the perfonnance
of the mandate, whenever they do not result
from his fault or from exceeqing his
powers.
Art. 679. Even if the mandatary acts
contrary to the mandator' s instructions, if
he does not exceed the J imits of the
mandate, the mandator will be obligated to
those with whom his procurator contracted;
but he will have an action against the
procurator for the losses and damage
resulting from the failure to observe his
instructions.
Art. 680. If a mandate was granted by two
or more persons, for a common transaction,
each person shall be solidarily liable to the
mandatary for all the commitments and
effects arising out of the mandate, although
he has a right of recourse against the other
mandators for the amounts that he pays.
134
Se1?1io III - Das Obrigal?oes do
Mandante
Art. 675. 0 mandante e obrigado a sa-
tisfazer todas as obriga~oes contrafdas
pclo mandatario, na conformidade do
maildato conferido, e adiantar a impor-
tlincia das despesas nccess:irias a exe-
cu~ao dele, quando o mandatario lho
pedir.
Art. 676. E obrigado o mandante a pa-
gar ao mandat:irio a remunerairao ajus-
tada e as despesas da execu~ao do man-
dato, ainda que o neg6cio nao surta o
esperado efeito, salvo tendo o mandata-
rio culpa.
Art. 677. As somas adiantadas pelo
mandatario, para a execu~ao do manda-
to, vencem juros desde a data do desem-
bolso.
Art. 678. E igualmeme obrigado o
mandante a ressarcir ao mandatario as
perdas que este sofrer com a execu1;ao
do mandato, sempre que nao resultem
de culpa sua ou de excesso de poderes.
Art. 679. Ainda que o mandatario con-
trarie as instrw;:oes do mandante, se ni'io
exceder os limites do mandato, ficara o
mandante obrigado para com aqueles
com quern o seu procurador contratou;
mas tera contra este afi'io pelas perdas e
danos resultantes da inobservancia das
instru96es.
Art. 680. Se o mandato for outorgado
por duas ou mais pessoas, e para neg6-
cio comum, cada uma ficara solidaria-
mente responsavel ao mandatario por
todos os compromissos e efeitos do
mandato, salvo direito regressivo, pelas
quantias que pagar, contra os outros
mandantes.
L
135 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. ()81. 0 mandatario tern sob re a coi-
sa de que tenha a posse em virtude do
mandato, direito de retenc;ao, ate se
reembolsar do que no desempenho do
encargo despendeu.
Sc1?1io IV - Da Extin1?1iO do Mandato
Art. 682. Cessa o mandato:
I - pela revogac;ao ou pela rem:incia;
II - pela morte ou interdi1;ao de uma das
partes;
III - pela mudanc;a de estado que inabi-
lite o mandante a conferir os poderes,
ou o mandatario para os exercer;
IV - pelo termino do prazo ou pela con-
clusao do neg6cio.
Art. ()83. Quando o mandato contiver a
clausula de irrevogabilidade e o man-
dante o revogar, pagara perdas e danos.
Art. 684. Quando a clausula de irrevo-
gabilidade for condi~ao de um neg6cio
bilateral, ou tiver sido estipulada no ex-
clusivo interesse do mandatario, arevo-
ga~ao do mandato sera ineficaz.
Art. 685. Conferido o mandato com a
clausula "em causa pr6pria", a sua revo-
ga1;ao nao tera eficacia, nem se extin-
guira pela morte de qualquer das partes,
ficando o mandatario dispensado de
prestar contas, e podendo transferir
para si os bens m6veis ou im6veis obje-
to do mandato, obedecidas as formali-
dades legais.
Art. 686. A revoga1;i'io do mandato, no-
tificada somente ao mandatario, nao se
pode opor aos terceiros que, ignorando-
a, de boa-fe com ele trataram; mas fi-
cam sat vas ao constituinte as a~oes que
no caso !he possam caber contra o pro-
curador.
Art. 681-686
Art. 681. The mandatary has a right of
retention over a. thing that came into his
possession by reason of the mandate, until
he is reimbursed for that which he
expended in the performance of the
mandate.
Section IV - Extinction of Mandate
Art. 682. A mandate ceases:
I - upon revocation or resignation;
II - upon death or interdiction of one of the
patties;
III - upon a change in status that
disqualifies the mandator from conferring
powers, or the mandatary from exercising
them;
IV - upon expiry of the term of the mandate
or upon conclusion of the transaction.
Art. 683. When a mandate contains a
clause stipulating that it is irrevocable and
tht:< mandator revokes it, he shall pay for
losses and damage.
Art. 684. When a clause stipulating
irrevocability is a condition of a bilateral
transaction, or was stipulated in the
mandatary's exclusive interest, revocation
of the mandate shall be ineffective.
Art. 685. If a mandate contains a clause
stipulating that the powers are to be
exercised in the mandatary's own interest,
its revocation will have no effect, nor will it
be extinguished by the death of either of the
parties; the mandatary is released from
rendering account and may transfer to
himself the movable or immovable
property contemplated by the mandate, if
the legal fonnalities are complied with.
Art. 686. Revocation of a mandate, if
notified only to the mandatary, cannot be
asserted against third parties who, unaware
of the revocation, dealt with the mandatary
in good faith; but any actions that the
mandator may have against the procurator
are reserved.
Art. 687-691 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. A mandate that contains
powers to fulfill or confirm transactions in
progress, to which the mandate is related, is
irrevocable.
Art. 687. A mandate shall be deemed to
have been revoked upon communication to
.the mandatary of the appointment of
another mandatary for the same
transaction.
Art. 688. Resignation of a mandate by the
mandatary shall be communicated to the
mandator who, if he is injured by the
inopportunity of providing for a
replacement, or tbe lack of time to do so,
shall be indemnified by the mandatary,
unless tbe latter proves that considerable
loss would result if he continued in the
mandate, and that he did not have the power
to delegate the mandate.
Art. 689. Acts agreed to by the mandatary,
ih the name of the mandator, with third
parties contracting in good faith are valid
with respect to the third parties, if the
mandatary was in ignorance of the
mandator' s death or the extinction of the
mandate for a:ny other reason.
Art. 690. If a mandatary dies while a
transaction committed to him is pending,
his h~irs, upon becoming aware of the
mandate, shall give notice to tbe mandator
and make such arrangements in his interest
as the circumstances may require.
Art. 691. In the case referred to in the
preceding article, the heirs shall limit
themselves to conservatory measures, or
continue pending transactions that cannot
be delayed without risk; and the heirs'
services, within this limit, shall be
governed by the same rules to which the
services of the mandatary are subject.
136
Panigrafo unico. E irrevogavel .o man-
dato que conteriha poderes de cumpri-
mento ou confirma9ao de neg6cios en-
cetados, aos quais se ache vinculado.
Art. 687. Tanto que for comunicada ao
mandatario a nomeai;:ao de outro, para o
mesmo negocio, considerar-se-a revo-
gado o mandato anterior.
Art. 688. A renuncia do mandato sera
comunicada ao mandante, que, se for
prejudicado pela sua inoportunidade,
ou pela falta de tempo, a fim de prover
a substitui9ao do procurador, seni inde-
nizado pelo mandatario, salvo se este
provar que niio podia continuar no
mandato sem prejufzo consideravel, e
que niio lhe era dado substabelecer.
Art. 689, Sao validos, a respeito dos
contratantes de boa-fe, os atos com es-
tes ajustados em nome do mandante
pelo mandatiirio, enquanto este ignorar
a morte daquele ou a extin9iio do man-
dato, por qualquer outra causa.
Art. 690. Se falecer o mandatiirio, pen-
dente o negocio a ele cometido, os her-
deiros, tendo ciencia do mandato, avi-
sarao o mandante, e providenciarao a
bem dele, como as circunstancias exigi-
rem.
Art. 691. Os herdeiros, no caso do arti-
go antecedente, devem Jimitar-se as
medidas conservatorias, ou continuar
os neg6cios pendentes que se nao pos-
sam demorar sem perigo, regulando-se
os seus servi~os dentro desse limite. pe-
las mesmas normas a que os do manda-
tario estiio sujeitos.
137 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE
Se!;iiO V - Do Mandato Judicial
Art. 692. 0 mandato judicial fica su-
bordinado as normas que !he dizem res-
peito, constantes da legislai;:ao proces-
sual. e, supletivamente, as estabeleci-
das neste C6digo.
Capftulo XI- Da Comissao
Art. 693. 0 contrato de comissao tern
por objeto a aquisii;:ao ou a venda de
bens pelo comissario, em seu pr6prio
nome, a conta do comitente.
Art. 694. 0 comiss{irio flea diretarnen-
te obrigado para com as pessoas com
quern contratar, sem que estas tenham
ai;,:ao contra o comitente, nem este con-
tra elas, salvo se o comissario ceder
seus direitos a qualquer das partes.
Art. 695. 0 comissario e obrigado a
agir de conformidade com as ordens e
instrui;,:oes do comitente, devendo, na
falta destas, niio podendo pedi-las a
tempo, proceder segundo os usos em
casos semelhantes.
Panigrafo unico. Ter-se-ao por justifi-
cados os atos do comissiirio, se deles
houver resultado vantagem para o co-
mitente; e ainda no caso em que, nao
admitindo demora a realizai;:ao do ne-
g6cio, o comissario agiu de acordo com
OS USOS.
Art. 696. No desempenho das snas in-
cumbencias o comissario e obrigado a
agir com cuidado e diligencia, nao s6
para evitar qualquer prejufzo ao comi-
tente, mas ainda para !he proporcionar
o lucro que razoavelmente se podia es-
perar do neg6cio.
Paragrafo unico. Respondera o comis-
siirio, salvo motivo de fori;:a maior, por
qualquer prejufzo que, por ai;:ao ou
omissao, ocasionar ao comitente.
Art. 692-696
Section V -Judicial Mandate
Art. 692. Judicial mandate shall be subject
to the rules concerning it set out in
procedural legislation and, in a
supplementary fashion, to those established
in this Code.
Chapter XI - Commission
Art. 693. A contract of commission has as
its purpose the acquisition or sale of
property by the commission agent, in his
own name, on the principal' s account.
Art. 694. A commission agent becomes
directly obligated to the persons with
whom he contracts; they have no right of
action against the principal, nor he against
them, unless the commission agent assigns
his rights to either of the parties.
Art. 695. A commission agent is bound to
act in conformity with the principal' s
orders and instructions and, in their
absence, if he cannot request instructions in
time, he must proceed according to
customary practice in similar cases.
Sole paragraph. Acts of the commission
agent shall be deemed to be justified if
advantage to the principal results from
them, even in cases where the commission
agent acted according to customary
practice because the transaction could not
be delayed.
Art. 696. In the performance of his duties,
a commission agent is bound to act with
care and diligence, not only to avoid any
loss to the principal, but also to provide him
with the profit that could reasonably be
expected from the transaction.
Sole paragraph. Except in cases ofjorce
majeure, the commission agent shall be
liable for any loss that, by act or omission,
he causes to the principal.
 Art. 697-702 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 697. A commission agent is not liable
for the insolvency of the persons with
whom he deals, except where he is at fault
and in the case contemplated in the
following article.
Art. 698. If the commission contract
contains a del credere clause, the
commission agent shall be solidarily liable
with the persons with whom he deals in the
name of the principal, and in that case,
unless otherwise stipulated, the
commission agent has the right to a higher
remuneration, to compensate him for the
onus assumed.
Art~ 699. A commission agent is presumed
to be authorized to grant extensions of the
time period for payment, in conformity
with the practice of place where the
transaction was made, if the principal has
not given instructions to the contrary.
Art. 700. If the principal has given
instructions prohibiting extension of time
periods for payment, or if an extension was
granted contrary to local practice, the
principal may demand that the commission
agent pay immediately or be liable for the
consequences of the extension granted; the
same procedure shall apply if the
commission agent does not give. the
principal notice of the time periods granted
and of the beneficiaries of such time
periods.
Art. 701. If the remuneration due to the
commission agent is not stipulated, it shall
be appraised according to the current
practice of the place.
Art. 702. In case of death of a commission
agent, ot when, by reason offorce majeure,
he cannot conclude the transaction,
remuneration proportionate to the work
performed shall be owed by the principal.
138
Art. 697. 0 comissario nao respondc
pela insolvencia das pessoas com quern
tratar. exceto em caso de culpa e no do
artigo seguinte.
Art. 698. Se do contrato de comissao
constar a clausula del credere, respon-
dera o comissario solidariamente com
as pessoas com que houver tratado em
nome do comitente, caso em que. salvo
estipulai;:ao em contnirio. a comissario
tern direito a remunerai;:ao mais eleva-
da, para compensar o onus assumido.
Art. 699. Presume-se o comissario au-
torizado a conceder dilai;:ao do prazo
para pagamento, na conformidade dos
usos do lugar onde se realizar o nego-
cio, se nao hmlver instrm;:oes diversas
do comitente.
Arl. 700. Se houver instru~oes do co-
mitente proibindo prorrogai;:ao de pra-
zos para pagamento, au se esta nao for
conforme as usos Iocais, podera o co-
mitente exigir que a comissario pague
incontinenti ou responda pelas conse-
qliencias da dilai;:ao concedida, proce-
aendo-se de igual modo sea comissario
nao der ciencia ao comitente dos prazos
concedidos e de quern e seu beneficia-
rio.
Art. 701. Nao estipulada a remunera-
i;:ao devida ao comissario, sera ela arbi-
trada segundo os usos correntes no lu-
gar.
Art. 702. No caso de morte do comissa-
rio, ou. quando, por motivo de fon;a
maior, nao puder concluir a neg6cio,
sera devida pelo comitente uma remu-
nera~ao proporcional aos trabalhos rea-
1izados.
139 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE
Art. 703. Ainda que tenha dado motivo
a dispensa. tera 0 comissario direito a
ser remunerado pelos servi~os uteis
prestados ao comitente, ressalvado a
este o direito de exigir daquele as pre-
juizos sofridos.
Art. 704. Salvo disposii;ao em contra-
rio, pode o comitente, a qualquer tem-
po, alterar as instrm;oes dadas ao co-
missario, entendendo-se par elas rcgi-
dos tarnbem as ncgocios pendcntes.
Art. 705. Seo comissario for despedido
sem justa,eausa, tera direito a ser remu-
nerado pelos trabalhos prestados, bem
coma a ser ressarcido pelas perdas e da-
nos resultantes de sua dispensa.
Art. 706. 0 comitente e o comissario
sao obrigados a pagar juros um ao ou-
tro; o primeiro pelo que o comissario
houver adiantado para cumprimento de
suas ordens; e o segundo pcla mora na
entrega dos fundos que pertencerem ao
comitente.
Art. 707. 0 credito do comissario, rela-
tivo a comissoes e despesas feitas, goza
de privilegio geral, no caso de falencia
ou insolvencia do comitente.
Art. 708. Para reembolso das despesas
feitas, bem como para recebimento das
comissoes devidas, tern o comissario
direito de retern,;ao sabre as hens e valo-
res em seu poder em· virtude da comis-
sao.
Art. 709. Sao aplicaveis acomissao, no
que couber, as regras sabre mandato.
Art. 703-709
Art. 703. Even if a commission agent has
given cause for his dismissal, he has the
right to be remunerated for useful services
rendered to the principal, and the principal
has the right to demand from the
commission agent the losses suffered.
Art. 704. Saving provision to the contrary,
a principal may at any time alter the
instructions given to the commission agent,
and the altered instructions shall be
understood to govern pending transactions.
Art. 705. If a commission agent is
dismissed without just cause, he shall have
the right to be remunerated for the work he
performed and to be compensated for the
losses and damage resulting from his
dismissal.
Art. 706. A principal and a commission
agent are obligated to pay interest to each
other; the first by reason of advances made
by the commission agent to carry out his
orders; and the second by reason of delay in
delivering funds that belong to the
principal.
Art. 707. The debt held by a commission
agent with respect to commissions and
expenses enjoys a general privilege in the
case of bankruptcy or insolvency of the
principal.
Art. 708. A commission agent has a right of
retention over property and amounts in his
power by virtue of the commission, for
reimbursement of incurred expenses.
Art. 709. To the extent compatible, the
rules on mandate apply to commission.
Art; 710-715 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter XII -Agency and
Distribution
Art. 710. In a con tract of agency. one
person assumes, on a non-occasional basis,
:-Vithout any relationship of dependency and
m exchange for remuneration tne
obligation to promote, on benalf of an~ther,
certain transactions witnin a given zone;
distribution exists when tne agent has tne
tiling to be traded at nis disposal.
Sole paragrapn. Tne principal may confer
powers on the agent so tnat he may
conclude contracts on behalf of tne
principal.
Art. 711. Unless otnerwise agreed a
principal may not appoint more than o'ne
agent at the same time, in the same zone and
wiili ilie same charge; nor may the agent
assume ilie. charge of doing business of the
same kind on behalf of other principals
within the same zone.
Art. 712. An agent must act with all
diligence in performing that which was
entrusted to him, and attend to instructions
received from the principal.
Art. 713. Unless otnerwise stipulated, all
expenses incurred in connection wiili ilie
agency or distribution are.borne by the
agent or distributor.
Art. 714 •. Unless otherwise agreed, an
agent or distributor shall have a right to
remuneration for all transactions concluded
within his zone, even if tney were made
wiiliout his intervention.
Art. 715. An agent or distributor has a right
to indemnification if the principal, without
just cause, ceases to meet orders or so
reduces supply that continuation of the
contract becomes uneconomic.
140
Capftulo XII - Da Agenda e
Distribui1;iio
Art. 710. Pelo contrato de agencia. uma
pessoa assume. em carater nao eventual
e sem vfnculos de dependencia, a obri-
gai;:iio de promover. a conta de outra,
mediante retribuii;:ao, a realizas;iio de
certos neg6cios, em zctna determinada,
caracterizando-se a distribui!(iio quan-
do o agente tiver asua disposii;:ao a coi-
sa a ser negociada.
Paragrafo (mica. 0 proponente pode
conferir po deres ao agente para que este
o represente na conclusiio dos contra-
tos.
Art. 711. Salvo ajuste, o proponente
niio pode constituir, ao mesmo tempo.
mais de um agente. na mesma zona,
com identica incumbencia; nem pode o
agente assumir o encargo de nela tratar
de neg6cios do mesmo genero, aconta
de outros proponentes.
Art. 712. 0 agente, no desempenho que
!he foi cometido, deve agir com toda di-
Jigencia, atendo-se as instru9oes recebi-
das do proponente.
Art. 713. Salvo estipulai;:iio diversa, to-
das as despesas com a agencia ou distri-
buir;iio correm a cargo do agente ou dis-
tribuidor.
Art. 714. Salvo ajuste, o agente ou dis-
tribuidor tera direito a remunerar;ao
correspondente aos neg6cios concluf-
dos dentro de sua zona, ainda que sem a
sua interferencia.
Art. 715. 0 agente ou distribuidor tern
direito aindeniza9ao se 0 proponente,
sem justa causa, cessar o atendimento
das propostas au reduzi-Jo tanto que se
torna antieconomica a continuar;iio do
contrato.
141 COD!GO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 716. A remuneral(aO sera devida
ao agente tambem quando o neg6cio
deixar de ser rcalizado porfato imputa-
vel ao proponente.
Art. 717. Ainda que dispensado por
justa causa, tera o agente direito a ser
remunerado pelos servh;os iiteis presta-
dos ao proponente, sem embargo de ha-
ver este perdas e danos pelos prejuizos
sofridos.
Art. 718. Se a dispensa se der sem cul-
pa do agente, tera ele direilo a remune-
ra9ao ate entiio devida, inclusive sobre
os neg6cios pendentes, alem das inde-
niza9oes previstas em lei especial.
Art. 719. Se o agente nao puder conti-
nuar o trabalho por motivo de for1;a
maior, tera direito a remunerar;ao cor-
respondente aos servi1;os realizados,
cabendo esse direito aos herdeiros no
caso de morte.
Art. 720. Se o contrato for par tempo
indeterminado, qualquer das partes po-
dera resolve-lo, mediante aviso previo
de noventa dias, desde que transcorrido
prazo compatfvel com a natureza e o
vulto do investimento exigido do agen-
te.
Paragrafo iinico. No caso de divergen-
cia entre as partes, o juiz decidira da ra-
zoabilidade do prazo e do valor devido.
Art. 721, Aplicam-se ao contrato de
agencia e distribui\;iiO, no que couber,
as regras concernentes ao mandato e a
comissao e as constantes de lei especial.
Art. 716-721
Art. 716. Remuneration will also be owed
to the agent wnen a transaction fails to be
concluded for a reason imputable to the
principal.
Art. 717. Even if dismissed for just cause,
an agent shall have the right to be
remunerated for useful services rendered to
the principal, witnout prejudice to the
principal's right to losses and damages for
injury suffered.
Art. 718. If dismissal occurs wiiliout fault
on the part of the agent, he shall have the
right to remuneration then due to him,
including remuneration for pending
transactions, in addition to the
indemnification provided for under special
legislation.
Art. 719. If an agent cannot continue
working by reason of force majeure, he
shall nave tne rignt to remuneration
corresponding to services rendered; the
heirs have this right in the case of the
agent's death.
Art. 720. If the contract is for an undefined
term, either of the parties may terminate it
on ninety days' notice, provided tnat a
period of time has passed iliat is compatible
with the nature and size of ilie investinent
required of the agent.
Sole paragraph. In case of disagreement
between the parties, ilie judge shall decide
on the reasonability of tne period of time
and of tne amount owed.
Art. 721. To the extent compatible, the
rules concerning mandate and commission
and those contained in special legislation
shall apply to the contract of agency and
distribution.
Art. 722-726 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE 142 143 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE Art. 727-733

Chapter XIII - Brokerage Capitulo XIII- Da Corretagem Art. 727. Se, por niio haver prazo deter- Art. 727. Where no period of time is fixed,
Art. 722. By a contract of brokerage, one
minado, o dono do neg6cio dispensar o if the client dismisses the broker, and the
Art. 722. Pelo contrato de corretagem,
corretor, e o negocio se realizar poste- transaction is later made, as the fruit of the
person, who is not related to a second uma pessoa, nao ligada a outra em vir-
riormente, como fruto da sua media~ao, broker's mediation, the brokerage fee shall
person by virtue of mandate, provision of tude de mandato, de presta.,ao de servi-
a corretagem !he sera devida; igual so- be due to him; the same solution shall be
services or any dependent relationship, i;:os ou por qualquer rela1;ao de depen-
lu~ao se adotara se o negocio se realizar adopted if the transaction is made after
undertakes to obtain for the second person dencia, obriga-se a obter para a se§unda ap6s a decorrencia do prazo contratual, expiry of the term of the contract, but
one or more transactions, in accordance um ou mais neg6cios, conforme as ins- mas por efeito dos trabalhos do corre- through the effects of the broker's work.
with instructions receiyed. trur;iies recebidas. tor.
Art. 723. A broker is bound to carry out the Art. 723. 0 corretor e obrigado a exe- Art. 728. Seo neg6cio se concluir com Art. 728. If the transaction is concluded
mediation with the diligence and prudence cutar a mediai;:ao com a di!igencia e a intermedia9ao de mais de um corretor, with the intermediation of more than one
that the transaction requires, spontaneously prudencia que o neg6cio requer, pres- a remunerayao sera paga a todos em broker, the remuneration shall be paid to
giving to the client all information on the tando ao cliente, espontaneamente, to- partes iguais, salvo ajuste em contrario. them in equal parts, saving agreement to the
status of the transactions; he must also, on das as informar;iies sobre o andamento contrary.
pain of liability for losses and damage, give . dos neg6cios; deve, ainda, sob pena de
Art. 729. Os preceitos sobre correta- Art. 729. The precepts regarding brokerage
the client all the clarifications that are responder por perdas e danos, prestar
gem constantes deste C6digo nao ex- contained in this Code do not exclude the
within his power regarding the security or ao cliente todos os esclarecimentos que cluem a aplica\:ao de outras normas da application of other rules contained in
risk of the transaction, changes in value and estiverem ao seu alcance, acerca da se- legisla~ao especial. special legislation.
all else that could influence the results of guran;;:a ou risco do negocio, das altera-
the matter entrusted to the broker. r;oes de valores e do mais que possa in- Capltulo XIV - Do Transporte Chapter XIV - Carriage
fluir nos resultados da incumbencia. Set;iio I - Disposi~oes Gerais Section I - General Provisions
Art. 724. A broker's remuneration, if not Art. 724. A remunera\=ao do corretor, Art. 730. Pelo contrato de transporte al- Art. 730. By a contract of carriage; one
fixed by law or agreed between the parties, se nao estiver fixadaem lei, nem ajusta- guem se obriga, mediante retribui~ao, a person undertakes, in exchange for
shall be appraised according to the nature of da entre as partes, sera arbitrada segun- transportar, de um lugar para outro, remuneration, to transport persons or things
the transaction and local practice. do a natureza do negocio e os usos lo- pessoas ou coisas. from one place to another.
cais.
Art. 731. 0 transporte exercido em vir- Art. 731. Carriage performed by virtue of
Art. 725. Remuneration is due to the broker Art. 725. A remunera.,ao e devida ao tude de ai.ltoriza~ao, permissao ou con- authorization, permission or concession is
once he has achieved the res.ult corretor uma vez que tenha conseguido cessao, rege-se pelas normas regula- governed by regulations and by the
contemplated in the mediation contract, or o resultado previsto no contrato de me- mentares e pelo que for estabelecido provisions thereof, without prejudice to the
if the result is not achieved because the dia;;:ao, ou ainda que este nao se efetive naqueles atos, sem prejufzo do disposto provisions of this Code.
parties receded from the transaction. em virtude de arrependimento das par- neste Codigo.
tes. Art. 732. Aos contratos de transporte, Art. 732. The rules contained in special
Art. 726. If the transaction is. initiated and Art. 726. Iniciado e conclufdo o neg6- em geral, sao aplicaveis, quando cou- legislation and in international treaties and
concluded directly between the parties, no cio diretamente entre as partes, nenbu-
ber, desde que nao contrariem as dispo- conventions apply, to the extent
remuneration shall be due to the broker; but ma remunera9ao sera devida ao corre-
sii,;iies deste C6digo, os preceitos cons- compatible, to contracts of carriage in
if the brokerage is agreed to on an exclusive tantes da legisla;;:ao especial e de trata- general, provided such rules are not
tor; mas se, por escrito, for ajustada a
dos e conven;;:oes internacionais. contrary to the provisions of this Code.
basis, in writing, the broker shall have the corretagem com exclusividade, tera o
right to full remuneration, even if the a
corretor direito remunera~ao integral, Art. 733. Nos contratos de transporte Art. 733. In contracts for connecting
transaction was made without his ainda que realizado o neg6cio sem a sua cumulativo, cada transportador se obri- carriage, each carrier undertakes to perform
mediation, unless his inertia or idleness is media\=ao, salvo se comprovada sua ga a cumprir o contrato relativamente the contract with respect to his route, and is
proved. inercia ou ociosidade. ao respectivo percurso, respondendo responsible for damage caused to persons
pelos danos nele causados a pessoas e and things along that route.
coisas.
Art 734-738 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ l, Damage resulting from delay in, or
interruption of, the journey shall be
determined in relation to the whole of the
route.
§ 2. If one of the carriers is replaced over the
course of the route, solidary liability will
extend to the substitute carrier.
Section II- Carriage of Persons
Art. 734. A carrier is liable for damage
caused to the persons transported and to
their baggage, except by reason of force
majeure, and any clause excluding liability
is null.
Sole paragraph. It is licit for the carrier to
require that the value of baggage be
declared in order to fix a limit on
indemnification.
Art. 735. The contractual liability of a
carrier for an accident involving a
passenger is not excluded by reason of a
third party's fault, against whom the carrier
has a right of rec~urse.
Art. 736. Carriage performed gratuitously,
out of friendship or courtesy, is not
governed by the rules applicable to
conP:acts of carriage.
Sole paragraph. Carriage is not considered
to be gratuitous when, although there is no
remuneration, the carrier receives indirect
advantages.
Art. 737. A carrier is subject to the
established schedules. and itineraries, on
pain of liability for losses and damage,
except in cases of force majeure.
Art. 738. Passengers shall comply with the
rules established by the carrier, set out on
the ticket or placed where they may be seen
by users, and refrain from all acts that could
cause discomfort or injury to other
passengers, damage the vehicle or hinder or
impede the normal performance of the
service.
144
§ I 0 0 drum, resultante do atraso ou da
interrup;;:ao da viagem, seni determina-
do em razao da totalidade do percurso.
§ 2° Se houver substitui;;:ao de algum
dos transportadores no decorrer do per-
curso, a responsabilidade solidaria es-
tender-se-a ao substituto.
Se1;lio II - Do Transporte de Pcssoas
Art. 734. 0 transportador responde pe-
los danos causados as pessoas transpor-
tadas e suas bagagens, salvo motivo de
for1;a maior, sendo nula qualquer clau-
sula excludente da responsabilidade.
Paragrafo unico. E lfcito ao transporta-
dor exigir a declara;;:ao do valor da ba-
gagem a fim de fixar o Ii mite da indeni-
za1;ao.
Art. 735. A responsabilidade contra-
tual do transportador por acidcnte com
0 passageiro n1io e elidida por culpa de
terceiro, contra o qua! tern ar;ao regres- ,
siva.
Art. 736. Nao se subordina as norrnas
do contrato de transporte o feito gratui-
tamente, por amizade ou cortesia.
Paragrafo unico. Nao se considera gra-
tuilo o transporte quando, embora feito
sem remuncra;;:ao, o transportador au-
ferir vantagens indiretas.
Art. 737. 0 transportador esta sujeiw
aos horarios e itinerarios previstos, sob
pena de responder por pcrdas e danos,
salvo motivo de forr,:a maior.
Art. 738. A pessoa transportada dcve
sujeitar-se as normas estabelecidas pelo
transportador, constantes no bilhetc ou
afixadas avista dos usuarios, abstcndo-
se de quaisquer atos que causem inco-
modo ou prejuizo aos passageiros, danifi-
quem o vefculo, ou dificultem ou impe-
r,:am a execu;;:ao normal do servii;:o.
145 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. Se o prejufzo sofrido
peta pessoa transportada for atribuivel a
transgressao de normas e instru;;:oes re-
gulamentarcs, o juiz reduzira eqilitati-
vamente a indeniza\;iiO, na medida em
que a vftima houver concorrido para a
ocorrencia do dano.
Art. 739. 0 transportador nao pode re-
cusar passageiros, salvo os casos pre-
vistos nos regulamentos, ou se as con-
dirroes de higiene OU de saude do inte-
ressado o justificarem.
Art. 740. 0 passageiro tern direito a
rescindir o contrato de transporte antes
de iniciada a viagem, sendo-lhe devida
a restitui1;ao do valor da passagem, des-
de que feita a comunica;;:ao ao transpor-
tador em tempo de ser renegociada.
§ I 0 Ao passageiro e facultado desistir do
transporte, mesmo depois de iniciada a
viagem, scndo-lhe devidaarestituir,:ao do
valor corrcspondente ao trecho nao utili-
zado, desde que prov ado que oulra pessoa
haja sido transpori:ada em scu lugar.
§ 2° Nao tera direito ao reembolso do
valor da passagem 0 usuario que deixar
de embarcar, salvo se provado que ou-
tra pessoa foi transportada em seu In-
gar, caso em que !he sera restitufdo o
valor do bilhete nao utilizado.
§ 3° Nas hip6teses previstas neste arti-
go, o transportador tera direito de reter
ate cinco por cento da importancia a ser
restitufda ao passageiro, a tftulo de mul-
ta compensat6ria.
Art. 741. Interrompendo-se a viagem
por qualquer motivo alheio avontade do
trru1sportador, ainda que em conseqi.ien-
cia de evento imprevisfvel, fica ele obri-
gado a concluir o transporte contratado
em outro veiculo da mcsma categoria, ou.
com a anuencia do passageiro, por moda-
lidade diferente, a sua custa, correndo
tambem por si.ta corita as despesas de
estada e alimentm;ao do usuario, duran-
te a espera de novo transporte.
Art. 738-741
Sole paragraph. If the injury suffered by a
passenger is attributable to transgression of
regulatory rules and instructions, the judge
may reduce the indemnification, on an
equitable ):>asis, to the extent that the victim
contributed to the occurrence of the
damage.'
Art. 739. A carrier may not refuse to carry
passengers except in the cases provided for
in the regulations, or if the hygienic
condition or health of the interested person
justifies the refusal.
Art. 740. A passenger has the right to
rescind the contract of carriage before the
journey begins, and to have the fare
refunded to him, provided he advises the
catTier in sufficient time for the passage to
be sold to another.
§ l . A passenger has the right to abandon
the contract of carriage, even after the
journey has begun, in which case a refund
corresponding to the unused portion of the
fare is owed to him, if it is proved that
another person was transported in his place.
§ 2. A user who fails to embark does not
have the right to reimbursement of the fare,
unless it is proved that another person was
transported in his place, in which case the
amount of the unused ticket shall be
refunded to him.
§ 3. In the cases provided for in this article,
the carrier shall have the right to retain up
to five percent of the amount to be refunded
to the passenger, as a compensatory fine.
Art. 7 41. If the journey is interrupted for any
reason beyond the carrier's control, even if it
is the consequence of an unforeseeable event,
the carrier is obligated to conclude the
carriage contracted in.another vehicle of the
same class or, with the consent of the
passenger, by another means, at the
carrier's cost; the carrier shall also bear the
expense of the user's bed and board while
he waits for new transportation.
Art. 742-747 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 742. Once the carriage has been
performed, the carrier has a right of
retention over the passenger's baggage and
other personal objects, as security for the
amount of the fare that was not paid before
or during the journey.
Section III - Carriage of Things
Art. 743, A thing delivered to a carrier must
be described by its nature, value, weight
and quantity, and by such other
characteristics as may be necessary avoid
confusion with other things, and the
consignee must be designated at least by
name and address.
Art. 744. On receiving the thing, the carrier
shall issue a bill of lading setting out the
information that identifies the thing, in
accordance with the provisions of the
relevant special legislation.
Sole paragraph. The carrier may require
that the consignor deliver to him, duly
signed; a detailed statement of the things to
be transported, in two counterparts, one of
which, duly authenticated by him. shall be
an integral part of the bill of lading.
Art. 745. In case of inaccurate or false
description in the document referred to in
the preceding article, the carrier shall be
indemnified for any loss he may suffer. The
action for such indemnification must be
brought within one hundred and twenty
days from the event; on pain of peremption.
Art. 746. A carrier may refuse a thing that
is improperly packed, or that could put the
health of people at risk or damage the
vehicle and other property.
Art. 747. A carrier must refuse a thing that
is not permitted to be transported or sold or
that is unaccompanied by the documents
required by legislatioh or regulation.
146
Art. 742. 0 transportador, uma vez
executado o transporte, tem direito de
retenr,:ao sobre a bagagem de passagei-
ro e outros objetos pessoais deste, para
garantir-se do pagamento do valor da
passagem que nao tiver sido feito no
infcio ou durante o percurso.
Se1;iio III""'" Do Transporte de Coisas
Art. 743. A coisa, entregi1e ao transpor-
tador, deve estar caractei'izada pela sua
natureza, valor, peso e quantidade, e o
mais que for necessario para que nao se
confunda com outras, devendo o desti-
natario ser indicado ao menos pelo
no me e enderei;:o.
Art. 744. Ao receber a coisa, o trans-
portador emitira conhecimento com a
men\:ao dos dados que a identifiquem.
obedecido o disposto em lei especial.
Paragrafo unico. 0 transportador pode-
ra exigir que o remetente !he entregue,
devidamente assinada, a rela91io discri-
minada das coisas a serem tmnsportadas,
em duas vias, umadas quais, poreledevi-
damente autenticada, ficara fazendo par-
te integrante do conhecimento.
Art. 745. Em caso de informa900 inexata
ou falsa descrii;:ao no documenio a que sc
refere 0 artigo antecedente, sera 0 trans-
portador indenizado pelo prejufzo que so-
frer, devendo a a~o respectiva ser ajuiza-
da no prazo de cento e vinte dias, a contar
daquele ato, sob pena de decadencia.
Art. 746. Podera o transportador recu-
sar a coisa cuja embalagem seja inade-
quada, hem como a que possa por em
risco a saude <las pessoas, OU danificar 0
vefculo e outros hens.
Art. 747. 0 transportador devera obri-
gatoriamente recusar a coisa cujo trans-
porte ou comercializa~ao nao sejam
permitidos, ou que venha desacompa-
nhada dos documentos exigidos par lei
ou regulamento.
147 CODIGO CIVIL BlLlNGUE
Art. 748. Ate a entrega da coisa, pode o
remetente desistir do tmnsporte e pedi-
la de vol ta, ou ordenar seja entregue a
outro destinatario, pagando, em ambos
os casos, os acrescimos de despesa de-
correntes da contra-ordem, mais as per-
das e drnms que houver.
Art. 749. 0 transportador conduzira a
coisa ao seu destino, tomando todas as
cautclas necessarias para mantc-la em
born estado e entrega-la no prazo ajus-
tado ou previsto.
Art. 750. A responsabilidade do tmns-
portador, Iimitada ao valor constante do
conhecimento, comei;:a no momenta
em que ele, ou seus prepostos, recebem
a coisa; termina quando e entregue ao
destinatario, ou depositada em jufzo, se
aquele nii.o for encontrado.
Art. 751. A coisa, depositada ou guar-
dada nos armazens do transportador,
em virtude de contrato de transporte,
rege-se, no que couber, pelas disposi-
i;oes relativas a dep6sito.
Art. 752. Desembarcadas as mercado-
rias, 0 transportador nfio e obrigado a
dar aviso ao destinatario, se assim nao
foi convencionado, dependendo tam-
bem de ajuste a entrega a domicflio, e
devem constar do conhecimento de em-
barque as clausulas de aviso ou de en-
trega a domicflio.
Art. 753. Seo transporte nao puder ser
feito ou sofrer longa interrupi;ao, o
transportador solicitara, incontinenti,
instru9oes ao remetente, e zelara pela
coisa, par cujo perecimento ou deterio-
ra1:ao respond era, salvo for~a maior.
Art. 748-753
Art. 748. Until the thing is delivered, the
consignor may decide not to have the thing
transported and ask for it back, or order it to
be delivered to another consignee, and in
both cases the consignor shall pay the
additional expenses arising out of the
countermand, together with any losses and
damage.
Art. 749. The carrier shall carry the thing to
its destination, taking all precautions
necessary to keep it in good condition and
to deliver it at the agreed or expected time.
Art. 750. The carrier's liability, which is
limited to the value stated on the bill of
lading, commences at the moment at which
he, or his representatives, receive the thing;
it terminates when the thing is delivered to
the consignee, or deposited into court, if the
consignee is not found.
Art. 751. A thing that is deposited or stored
in the warehouses of the carrier, by virtue of
a contract of carriage, is covered, to the
extent applicable, by the provisions
concerning deposit.
Art. 752. Once the merchandise has been
unloaded, the carrier is not obligated to give
notice to the consignee, unless it was
agreed that he should; home delivery also
depends on agreement between the parties;
and the clauses providing for notice to the
consignee and home delivery must be set
out on the bill of lading.
Art. 753. If the carriage cannot be
performed or if it is interrupted for a long
period of time, the carrier shall
immediately ask for instructions from the
consignor and shall safeguard the thing; the
carrier shall be liable if it perishes or
deteriorates, except in cases of force
majeure.
 Art. 754-755 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. If the obstacle to carriage persists for
reasons that cannot be imputed to the
carrier, and the consignor does not give
i1,1structions, the carrier may deposit the
thing into court or sell it, in conformity with
the legislation and regulations or with local
practice, and deposit the amount for which
it was sold.
§ 2. If the carrier is liable for the obstacle,
he niay deposit the thing, at his own risk,
but he may only sell it if it is perishable.
§ 3. In both cases, the carrier must infonn
the consignor that the deposit or sale has
been made.
§ 4. If the carrier keeps the thing deposited
in his own warehouses, he shall continue to
be liable for its safekeeping and
preservation; however; remuneration shall
be due to him for his custody of the thing,
which may be agreed upon by contract or
estaolished in accordance with the
practices adopted in each system of
carriage.
Art. 754. Merchandise must be delivered to
the consignee, or to the person who
presents the endorsed bill of lading, and the
person who receives the merchandise must
inspect it and submit any claims, on pain of
peremption of his rights.
Sole paragraph. In the case of partial loss or
damage that cannot be perceived at first
sight, the consignee retains his action
against the carrier, provided that he makes
a complaint within ten days of delivery.
Art. 755. If there is doubt as to who is the
consignee, the carrier must deposit the
merchandise into court, if it is not possible
for him to obtain instructions from the
consignor; if delay could cause
deterioration of the thing, the carrier shall
sell it and deposit the balance into court.
148
§ 1° Perdurando o impedimento, sem
motivo imputavel ao transportador e
sem manifesta9ao do remetente, podera
aquele depositar a coisa em jufzo, ou
vende-la, obedecidos os preceitos le-
gais e regulamentares, ou os usos lo-
cais, depositando o valor.
§ 2° Seo impedimento for responsabili-
dade do transportador, este podera de-
positar a coisa, por sua conta e risco,
mas so podera vende-la se perecfvcl.
§ 3° Em ambos os casos, o transporta-
dor deve informar o remetente da efeti-
va~ao do deposito ou da venda.
§ 4° Seo transportador mantiver a coisa
depositada em seus proprios armazens,
continuara a responder pela sua guarda
e conserva9ao, sendo-lhe devida, po-
rem, uma remunera9ao pela cust6dia, a
qua! podera ser contratualmente ajusta-
da ou se conformara aos usos adotados
em cad a sistema de transpo rte.
Art. 754. As mercadorias devem ser
entregucs ao destinatario, ou a quern
apresentar o conhecimento endossado,
devendo aquele que as receber conferi-
las e apresentar as reclamai;oes que ti-
ver, sob pena de decadencia dos direi-
tos.
Paragrafo unico. No caso de perda par-
cial OU de avaria nao perceptfvef a pri-
meira vista, o destinatario conserva a
sua m,;ao contra o transportador, desde
que denuncie o dano em dez di as a con-
tar da entrega.
Art. 755. Havendo duvida acerca de
quern seja o destinatario, o transporta-
dor deve depositar a mercadoria em juf-
zo, se nao !he for possfvel obter instru-
<;oes do remetente; se a demora puder
ocasionar a deteriora1;ao da coisa, o
transportador devera vende-Ja, deposi-
tando o saldo em jufzo.
149 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 756. No caso de transporte cumu-
lativo, todos os transportadores respon-
dem solidariamente pelo dano causado
perante o remetente, ressalvada a apu-
ra9ao final da responsabilidade entre
eles. de modo que o ressarcimento re-
caia, por inteiro, ou proporcionalmente.
naquele ou naqueles em cujo percurso
houver ocorrido o dano.
Capitulo XV - Do Seguro
Ses;Jio I - Disposii,;iies Gerais
Art. 757. Pelo contrato de seguro, o se-
gurador se obriga, mediante o paga-
mento do prcmio, a garantir interesse
legftimo do segurado, relativo a pessoa
ou a coisa, contra riscos predetermina-
dos.
Pariigrafo uni co. Somcnte pode ser par-
te, no contrato de seguro, como segura-
dor, entidade para ta! fim Jegalmente
autorizada.
Art. 758. 0 contrato de seguro prova-
se com a exibi11ao da ap6lice ou do bi-
lhete do seguro, e, na falta deles, por do-
cumento comprobat6rio do pagamento
do respcctivo premio.
Art. 759. A emissao da apolice deverii
ser prccedida de proposta escrita com a
declara~ao dos elementos essenciais do
imeresse a ser garantido e do risco.
Art. 760. A apolice ou o bilhete de se-
guro serao nominativos, aordem ou ao
portador, e mencionarao os riscos assu-
midos, o infcio e o fim de sua validade,
o limite da garantia e o premio devido.
e, quando for o caso, o nome do segura-
do e ci do beneficiario.
Paragrafo unico. No seguro de pessoas,
a ap6lice ou o bilhete nao podem ser ao
portador.
Art. 756-760
Art. 756. In the case of connecting
carriage, all the carriers are solidarily liable
to the consignor for damage caused, subject
to the final determination of liability as
between them, such that the compensation
shall be borne in full, or proportionately, by
the one, or by those, on whose route the
damage occurred.
Chapter XV - Insurance
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 757. In a contract of insurance, the
insurer unde1takes, against payment of the
premium, to guarantee legitimate interests
of the insured with respect to persons or
things against predetermined risks.
Sole paragraph. Only a legally authorized
entity may be party to an insurance contract
as the insurer.
Art. 758. An insurance contract is proved
by exhibition of the insurance policy or
note or, in their absence, by a document
evidencing payment of the insurance
premium.
Art. 759. The issuing of the policy shall be
preceded by a written application stating
the essential elements of both the interest to
be guaranteed and the risk.
Art. 760. The insurance policy or note shall
be nominative, in order form or in bearer
form, and shall mention the assumed risks,
the beginning and the end of the period of
validity, the limits of the guarantee, the
premium due and, if applicable, the name of
the insured and of the beneficiary.
Sole paragraph. In insurance of persons, the
policy or note may not be in bearer form.
Art. 761-766 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 761. When a risk is assumed under
co-insurance, the policy shall designate the
insurer which will administer the contract
and represent the others, for all the effects
of the policy.
Art. 762. A contract guaranteeing a risk
arising out of a wrongful act by the insured,
the beneficiary or the representative of
either shall be null.
Art. 763. An insured who is in default in
payment of the premium shall not have a
right to indemnification if the insured event
occurs before the default is cured.
Art. 764. Unless special provision is made,
the fact that the risk for which the insurance
was taken did not materialize does not
exempt the insured from paying the
premium.
Art. 765. In making and in performing the
contract, the insured and the insurer are
bound to keep the strictest good faith and
truthfulness, with respect to both the object
of the contract and the circumstances and
declarations concerning the contract's
object.
Art. 766. If the insured himself or his
representative makes inaccurate statements
or omits circumstances that could influence
acceptance of the application or the
premium rate, he shall lose the right to the
guarantee, in addition to being obligated to
pay the premium due.
Sole paragraph. If the inaccuracy or
omission in the statements does not result
from the insured's bad faith, the insurer
shall have the right to dissolve the contract
or to collect, even after occurrence of the
insured event, the difference in the
premium.
150
Art. 761. Quando o risco for assumido
em co-seguro, a ap6lice indicara o se-
gurador que administrara o contrato e
representara os demais, para todos os
seus efeitos.
Art. 762. Nulo sera o contrato para ga-
rantia de risco proveniente de ato dolo-
so do segurado. do bcneficiario, ou de
reprcsentantc de um ou de outro.
Art. 763. Nao tcrii direito a indenizm;ao
o segurado que estivet em mora no pa-
gamento do premio, se ocorrer o sinis-
tro antes de sua purga~ao.
Art. 764. Salvo disposi;;ao especial, o
fato de se nao ter verificado o risco, em
previsao do qua! se faz o seguro, nao
exime o segurado de pagar o premio.
Art. 765. 0 segurado e o segurador sao
obrigados a guardar na conclusao e na
execu;;ao do contrato, a mais estrita
boa-fe e veracidade, tanto a respeito do
objeto como das circunstancias e decla-
raqoes a ele concementes.
Art. 766. Se o segurado, por si ou por
seu representante, fizcr declara1rocs
inexatas ou omitir circunstfincias que
possam influir na aceitaqao da proposta
ou na taxa do premio, perderii o direito
a garantia, alem de ficar obrigado ao
premio vencido.
Pariigrafo t1nico. Se a inexatidao ou
omissao nas declarayoes nao resultar de
mii-fe do segurado, o segurador tera di-
reito a resolver o contrato, ou a cobrar,
mesmo ap6s o sinistro, a diferern;;a do
premio.
151 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 767. No seguro aconta de outrem,
o segurador pode opor ao scgurado
quaisquer defesas que tenha contra o
estipulante, por descumprimento das
normas de conclusao do contrato, ou de
pagamento do premio.
Art. 768. 0 segurado perdcrii o direito
a garantia se agravar intencionalmente
o risco objeto do contrato.
Art. 769. 0 segurado e obrigado a co-
municar ao segurador, logo que saiba,
todo incidente suscetfvel de agravar
consideravelmente o risco coberto, sob
a
pena de perder 0 direito garantia, se
provar que silenciou de mii-fc.
§ 1° 0 segurador. desde que o faya nos
quinze dias seguintes ao recebimcnto
do aviso da agravrn;ao do risco sem cul-
pa do segurado, podera dar-lhe ciencia,
por escrito, de sua decisao de resolver o
contrato.
§ 2° A resoluyao s6 serii eficaz trinta
dias ap6s a notificaqao, devendo scr
restitufda pelo segurador a diferenqa do
premio.
Art. 770. Salvo disposit,:1io em contra-
rio, a diminuiqao do risco no curso do
contrato nao acarreta a redm;:ao do pre-
mio estipulado; mas, se a redw;ao do
risco for consideravel, o segurado po-
derii exigir a revisao do premio, ou a re-
solw;,:ao do contrato.
Art. 771. Sob pena de perder o direito a
indenizm;;ao. o segurado participara o
sinistro ao segurador, logo que o saiba,
e tomara as providencias imediatas para
minorar-lhe as conseqiiencias.
Paragrafo t1nico. Correm aconta do se-
gurador, ate o Jimite fixado no contrato,
as despesas de salvamento conseqilente
ao sinistro.
Art. 767-771
Art. 767. In insurance on behalf of another,
the insurer may asse1t against the insured
any defenses that it may have against the
applicant for failure to comply with the
rules regarding the making of the contract
or the payment of the premium.
Art. 768. The insured shall lose the right to
the guanmtee if he intentionally aggravates
the risk covered by the contract.
Art. 769. The insured is obligated to
communicate to the insurer any incident that
could considerably aggravate the covered
risk, as soon as he learns of it, on pain of
losing the right to the guarantee, if it is proved
that he remained silent in bad faith.
§ 1. The insurer may give the insured
notice, in writing, of its decision to dissolve
the contract, if it does so within. fifteen days
after receiving notice of aggravation of the
risk through no fault of the insured.
§ 2. The dissolution shall only take effect
thirty days after notification, and the
insurer shall reimburse to the insured the
difference in the premium.
Art. 770. Saving provision to the contrary,
a reduction of the risk in the course of the
contract does not bring with it a reduction
of the stipulated premium; however, if the
reduction of the risk was considerable, the
insured may demand revision of the
premium or dissolution of the contract.
Art. 771. On pain of losing the right to
indemnification, the insured shall inform
the insurer of the loss, as soon as he learns
of it, and shall take immediate measures to
diminish the consequences of the loss to the
insurer.
Sole paragraph. Salvage costs resulting
from the loss are borne by the insurer, up to
the limit stipulated in the contract.
Art. 772-779 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 772. Delay by the insurer in paying for
the loss subjects it to payment of an
adjustment for inflation in accordance with
official, regularly established indices,
without prejudice to late-payment interest.
Art. 773. An insurer which, at the time the
contract is made, knows that the risk for
which the insured intends to obtain
coverage has passed and nevertheless
issues the policy, shall pay double the
stipulated premium.
Art. 774. Tacit renewal of the contract for
the same period of validity, by means of an
express contractual clause, cannot occur
more than once.
Art. 775, The authorized agents of the
insurer are presumed to be its
representatives for all acts related to the
contracts that they brokered.
Art. 776. The insurer is bound to pay the
loss resulting from the assumed risk in
money, unless the contract provides for
replacement of the thing.
Art. 777. The provisions of this Chapter
apply, to the extent compatible, to
insurance governed by specific legislation.
Section II....;. Damage Insurance
Art. 778. In damage insurance, the
promised guarantee cannot exceed the
value of the insured interest at the time the
contract is made, on pain of application of
the provisions of art. 766, and without
prejudice to any criminal action that may
apply.
Art. 779. The insured risk shall cover all
resulting or consequent loss, as well as
damage caused to avoid the loss, diminish
the damage, or save the thing.
152
Art. 772. A mora do segurador em pa-
gar o sinistro obriga a amalizat;ao mo-
netaria da indeniza<;ao devida segundo
Indices oficiais regularmente estabele-
cidos, sem prejufzo dos juros morat6-
rios.
Art. 773. 0 segurador que, ao tempo do
contrato, sabe estar passado o risco de
que o segurado se pretendc cobrir, e,
nao obstante, cxpede a ap61ice, pagara
em dobro o premio estipulado.
Art. 774. A recondw;:ao tacita do con-
trato pelo mesmo prazo. mediante ex-
pressa clausula contratual, nao podera
operar mais de uma vez.
Art. 775. Os agentes autorizados dose-
gurador presumem-se seus repre-
sentantes para todos os atos relativos
aos contratos que agenciarem.
Art. 776. 0 segurador eobrigado a pa-
garem dinheiro o prejufzo resultante do
risco assumido, salvo se convenciona-
da a reposi<;ao da coisa.
Art. 777. 0 disposto no presente Capf-
tulo aplica-se, no que couber, aos segu-
ros regidos por leis pr6prias.
Se~o II- Do Seguro de Dano
Art. 778. Nos seguros de dano, a garan-
tia prometida nao pode ultrapassar ova-
lor do interesse segurado no. momento
da conclusi'io do contrato, sob pena do
disposto no an. 766, e sem prejuizo da
a\:ao penal que no caso couber.
Art. 779. 0 risco do seguro compreen-
dera todos os prejufzos resultantes ou
conseqiientes, como sejam os estragos
ocasionados para evitar o sinistro. mi-
norar o dano, ou salvar a coisa.
153 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 780. A vigencia da garantia, no se-
guro de coisas transportadas, comei;,:a
no momento em que sao pelo transpor-
tador recebidas, e cessa com a sua en-
trega ao destinatario.
Art. 781. A indenizairao nao pode ultra-
passar o valor do interesse segurado no
momento do sinistro, e, em hip6tcse al-
guma, 0 limite maximo da garantia fi-
xado na ap61ice, salvo em caso de mora
do segurador.
Art. 782. 0 segurado que, na vigencia
do contrato, pretender obter novo segu-
ro' sobre o mesmo interesse, e contra o
mesmo risco junto a outro segurador,
deve previamente comunicar sua inten-
1;ao por escrito ao primeiro, ind icando a
soma por que pretende segurar-se, a fim
de se comprovar a obediencia ao dis-
posto no art. 778.
Art. 783. Salvo disposi~ao em contra-
rio, o seguro de um interesse por menos
do que valha acarreta a redm;:ao propor-
cional da indenizat;ao, no caso de sinis-
tro parcial.
Art. 784. Nao se inclui na garantia o si-
nistro provocado por vfcio intrinseco
da coisa segurada, nao declarado pelo
segurado.
Paragrafo iinico. Entende-se por vfcio
intrfnseco o defeito pr6prio da coisa,
que se nao encontra norrnalmente em
outras da mesma especie.
Art. 785. Salvo disposi\'!ao em contr:i-
rio, admite-se a transferencia do contra-
to a terceiro com a aliena1:ao ou cessao
do interesse segurado.
§ I 0 Se o instrumento contratual e no-
minati vo, a transferencia s6 produz
efeitos em rela1;ao ao segurador me-
diante aviso escrito assinado pelo ce-
dente e pelo cessionario.
Art. 780-785
Art. 780. In insurance of goods in transit,
the guarantee comes into effect at the
moment at which the goods are received by
the carrier, and ends on delivery to the
consignee.
Art. 781. The indemnification may not be
greater than the value of the insured interest
at the time of the insured event and in no
case may it be greater than the limit on
coverage fixed in the policy, save in cases
of delay by the insurer.
Art. 782. An insured who, during the term
of the contract, intends to insure the same
interest against the same risk with another
insurer, must communicate his intention in
writing to the first insurer, stating the
amount of insurance he intends to obtain,
for the purposes of evidencing compliance
with the provisions of art. 778.
Art. 783. Saving provision to the contrary,
insuring an interest for less than its value
results in proportionate reduction of the
indemnification in the case of partial loss.
Art. 784. A loss brought on by an intrinsic
defect in the insured thing, which has not
been declared by the insured, is not
included in the guarantee.
Sole paragraph. An intrinsic defect is a
defect of the thing itself that is not normally
found in others of the same kind.
Art. 785. Saving provision to the contrary,
transfer of the contract to a third party,
along with alienation or assignment of the
insured interest, is permitted.
§ 1. If the contractual instrument is made in
the name of the insured, the transfer only
produces effects against the insurer upon
written notice signed by the assignor and
the assignee.
Art. 786-787 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 2. A policy or note made to order is
transferred only by endorsement to a named
endorsee, dated and signed by the endorser
and the endorsee.
Art. 786. Upon payment of the
indemnification, the insurer is subrogated,
up to the amount of the indemnification
paid, in the rights and actions that the
insured has against the person who caused
the damage.
§ 1. Except in cases of wrongful conduct,
subrogation does not take place if the
damage was caused by the insured' s spouse
or his descendents or ascendents by blood
or marriage.
§ 2. Any act by the insured that diminishes
or extillguishes the rights referred to in this
article, to the prejudice of the insurer, is
without effect.
Art: 787. In civil liability insurance, the
insurer guarantees payment of losses and
damages owed by the insured to third
parties.
§ 1. As soon as the insured becomes aware
of the consequences of one of his acts,
which could .result in liability included in
the coverage, he shall communicate that
fact to the insurer.
§ 2. The insured is prohibited from
acknowledging liability, admitting a claim,
settling with an injured third party or
indemnifying him directly without the
express consent. of the insurer.
§ 3. If an action is brought against the
insured, he shall give notice of it to the
insurer.
§ 4. The insured' s liability to the third party
subsists if the insurer is insolvent.
154
§ 2° A apolice OU o bilhete aordem so
se transfere por endosso em preto, <lata-
do e assinado pelo endossante e pelo
endossatario.
Art. 786. Paga a indeniza1;ao, o segura-
dor sub-roga-se, nos limites do valor
respectivo, nos direitos e a1;oes que
competirem ao segurado contra o au tor
do dano.
§ 1° Salvo dolo. a sub-rogat,;ao nao tern
lugar se o dano foi causado pelo c6nju-
ge do segurado, seus <lescen<lentes ou
ascen<lentes. consangtifneos ou afins.
§ 2° E ineficaz qualquer ato do segura-
do que diminua ou extinga; em prejuizo
do segurador, os direitos a que se refere
este artigo.
Art. 787. No seguro de responsabilida-
de civil, o segurador garante o paga-
mento de perdas e <lanos <levi<los pelo
segurado a terceiro.
§ I 0 Tao logo saiba o segurado <las con-
seqiiencias de ato seu, suscetfvel de !he
acarretar a responsabilidade inclulda na
garantia, comunicara o fato ao segura-
dor.
§ 2° E defeso ao segurado reconhecer
sua responsabilidade ou cohfessar a
ar;ao, bem coma transigir com o tercei-
ro prejudicado, ou indeniza-lo direta-
mente, sem anuencia expressa do segu-
ra<lor.
§ 3° Intenta<la a ar;iio contra o segurado,
dara este ciencia da lide ao segurador.
§ 4° Subsistini a responsabilidade do
segurado perante o terceiro, se o segu-
ra<lor for insolvente.
155 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 788. Nos seguros de responsabi!i-
dade legalmente obrigat6rios, a indeni-
zar;iio por sinistro sera paga pelo segu-
rador diretamente ao terceiro prejudi-
cado.
Paragrafo unico. Demandado em at,;ao
direta pe!a vftima do dano, o segurador
nao podera opor a exce1;ao de contrato
nao cumprido pelo segura<lo, sem pro-
mover a cita1;ao deste para integrar o
contraditorio.
Sel,'.5.o ill - Do Seguro de Pessoa
Art. 789. Nos seguros de pessoas, o ca-
pital segurado e livremente estipulado
pelo proponente, que pode contratar
mais de um seguro sabre o mesmo inte-
resse, com o mesmo ou diversos segu-
radores.
Art. 790. No seguro sobre a vida de ou-
tros, 0 proponente e,obrigado a decla-
rar, sob pena de.falsidade, o seu interes-
se pela preserva~ao da vida do segu-
rado.
Paragrafo unico. Ate prova em contra-
rio, presume-se o interesse, quando o
segurado e conjuge, ascendente OU de-
scendente do propbnente.
Art. 791. Seo segurado nao renunciar a
faculdade, ou se o seguro nao tiver
coma causa declarada a garantia de al-
guma obriga\!iio, e lfcita a substituir;ao
do beneficiario, por ato entre vivas ou
de ultima vontade.
Paragrafo unico. 0 segurador, que nao
for cientificado oportunamente da
substituii;ao., desobrigar-se-a pagando
o capital segurado ao antigo benefi-
ciario.
Art. 788-791
Art. 788. In liability insurance that is
mandatory by law, the indemnification for
loss shall be paid by the insurer directly to
the injured third party.
Sole paragraph. If action is brought directly
against the insurer by the victim of the
damage, the insurer may not assert the
exception of non-performance of the
contract by the insured, unless it causes the
insured to be cited to join the proceeding.
Section III - Insurance of Persons
Art. 789. In insurance of persons, the
insured amount is freely stipulated by the
applicant, who may contract more than one
insurance for the same interest, with one or
more insurers.
Art. 790. In insurance of the life of others,
the applicant is bound to state, subject to the
penalties applicable to false declarations,
his interest in preserving the life of the
insured.
Sole paragraph. Until the contrary is
proved, his interest is presumed when the
insured is the spouse, an ascendent or a
descendent of the applicant.
Art. 791. Substitution of the beneficiary by
inter vivas act or by act of last will is licit,
unless the insured has waived the option, or
the declared purpose of the insurance is to
guarantee some obligation.
Sole paragraph. An insurer which has not
been notified of the substitution in a timely
fashion is released from its obligation by
paying the insured amount to the former
beneficiary.
 Art. 792-797 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 792. If the person or beneficiary has
not been indicated, or if for any reason the
indication that has been made does not
prevail, one half of the insured amount shall
be paid to the spouse of the insured, if he
has not been judicially separated, and the
rest to the heirs of the insured, according to
the order of heirship.
Sole paragraph. In the absence of the
persons indicated in this article, the
beneficiaries shall be those who prove that
the death of the insured deprived them of
the necessary means of subsistence.
Art. 793. The appointment of a companion
as beneficiary is valid, if at the time of the
contrac't the insured was judicially
separated or was already separated in fact.
Art. 794. In life insurance and, in cases of
death, in personal accident insurance, the
insured amount is not subject to the debts of
the insured and is not considered to be an
inheritance, for all the effects of law.
Art. 795. In insurance of persons, any
settlement for a reduced payment of the
insured amount is null.
Art. 796. In.life insurance, the premium
shall be agreed for a limited period or for
the whole life of the insured.
Sole paragraph. In eitl~er case, in individual
insurance, the insurer does not have an
action to collect premiums that have fallen
due; the failure to pay premiums at the
times provided for will result in either
dissolution of the contract, with restitution
of the reserve that has been formed, or
reduction of the insured amount in
proportion to the premium paid, as may be
stipulated in the contract.
Art. 797. In life insurance, it is licit to
stipulate, for the case of death, a grace
period during which the insurer is not liable
for occurrence of the insured event.
156
Art. 792. Na falta de indicar.;ao da pes-
soa ou beneficiario, ou se por qualquer
motivo nao prevalecer a que for feita, o
capital segurado sera pago por metade
ao conjuge nao separado judicialmente,
e o restante aos herdeiros do segurado,
obedecida a ordem da voca~ao heredi-
taria.
Paragrafo unico. Na falta das pessoas
indicadas neste artigo, serao beneficia-
rios os que provarem que a morte do se-
gurado os privou dos meios necessarios
asubsistencia
Art. 793. Evalid a a institui~ao do com-
panheiro com9 beneficiario, se ao tem-
po do contrato o segurado era separado
judicialmente, ou ja se encontrava sepa-
rado de fato.
Art. 794. No seguro de vida ou de aci-
dentes pessoais para o caso de morte, o
capital estipulado nao esta sujeito as df-
vidas do segurado, nem se considera
heranc;:a para todos os efeitos de direito.
Art. 795. E nula, no seguro de pessoa,
qualquer transac;:ao para pagamento re-
duzido do capital segurado.
Art. 796. 0 premio, no seguro de vida,
sera conveniado par prazo limitado, ou
par toda a vida do segurado.
Paragrafo unico. Em qualquer hip6tese,
no seguro individual, o segurador nao
tera ~ao para cobrar o premio vencido,
cuja falta de pagamento, nos prazos
previstos, acarretara, conforme se esti-
pular, a resolur.;ao do contrato, com a
restitui~ao da reserva ja formada, au a
reduc;:ao do capital garantido proporcio-
nalmente ao premio pago.
Art. 797. No seguro de vida parao caso
de morte, elfcito estipular-se um prazo de
carencia, durante o qua! o segurador nao
responde pela ocorrencia do sinistro.
157 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. No caso deste artigo o
segurador eobrigado a devolver ao be-
neficiario o montante da reserva tecnica
jaformada.
Art. 798. O beneficiario nao tern direito
ao capital cstipulado quando o segura-
do se suicida nos primeiros do is anos de
vigencia inicial do contrato, ou da sua
recondw;:ao depois de suspenso, obser-
vado 0 disposto n.o parag,afo unico do
artigo antecedente.
Paragrafo unico. Ressalvada a hip6tese
prevista neste artigo, e nula a clausula
contratual que exclui o pagamento do
capital por suicfdio do segurado.
Art. 799. 0 seguradornao pode eximir-
se ao pagamento do seguro, ainda que
da ap61 ice conste a restric;:ao, se a morte
ou a incapacidade do segurado provier
da utilizar.;ao de meio de transporte
mais arriscado, da presta1rao de servic;:o
militar, da pratica de esporte, ou de alas
de humanidade em auxflio de outrem.
Art. 800. Nos seguros de pessoas, o se-
gurador nao pode sub-rogar-se nos di-
reitos e ~1ies do segurado, ou do bene-
ficiario, contra o causador do sinisfro.
Art. 801. 0 seguro de pessoas pode ser
estipulado por pessoa natural ou jurfdi-
ca em proveito de grupo que a ela, de
qualquer modo, se vincule.
§ 1° O estipulante nao representa o se-
gurador perante 0 grupo segurado, e e0
unico responsavel, para com o segura-
dor, pelo cumprimento de todas as obri-
gal(oes contratuais.
§ 2° A modificac;:ao da ap61ice em vigor
dependera da anuencia expressa de se-
gurados que representem tres quartos
do grupo.
Art. 798-801
Sole paragraph. In the case contemplated in
this article, the insurer is bound to return to
the beneficiary the amount of the technical
reserve that has been formed.
Art. 798. The beneficiary does not have the
right to the insured amount when the
insured commits suicide within the first
two years of the initial term of validity of
the contract, or of its reinstatement after
suspension, subject to the provisions of the
sole paragraph of the preceding article.
Sole paragraph. Saving the case provided
for in this article, a contractual clause that
excludes payment of the insured amount on
suicide of the insured is null.
Art. 799. The insurer may not avoid
payment of the insurance if the death or
incapacity of the insured results from the
use of a riskier means of transportation,
military service, the practice of sports or
humane acts performed to assist another,
even if the policy contains a restriction to
that effect.
Art. 800. In insurance of persons, the
insurer may not be subrogated in the rights
and actions of the insured or of the
beneficiary against the person who caused
the loss.
Art. 801. Insurance of persons may be
contracted by a natural or legal person to
the benefit of a group to which the person is
in any way related.
§ I. The policyholder does not represent the
insurer before the insured group and is the
sole person liable to the insurer for
fulfillment of all contractual obligations.
§ 2. Modification of a policy in effect
depends upon the express consent of
insureds representing three quarters of the
group.
Art. 802-809 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 802. The provisions of this Section do
not apply to coverage for reimbursement of
hospital or medical treatment expenses, or
for payment of the insured's mourning and
funeral expenses.
Chapter XVI -Constitution of
Annuities
Art. 803. By a contract of constitution of
annuity, one person may gratuitously
obligate himself to pay a periodic amount to
another.
Art. 804. The contract may also be
onerous, with movable or immovable
property being delivered to the person who
undertakes to make payment in favor of the
creditor or of third parties.
Art. 805. If the contract is onerous, the
creditor may, at the time the contract is
made, demand that the debtor of the annuity
give him real or personal security.
Art. 806. A contract of constitution of
annuity shall be made for a certain term or
for life; it may exceed the 1ife of the debtor
but not that of the creditor, regardless of
whether the creditor is a party to the
contract or a third party.
Art. 807. A contract of constitution of
annuify requires a public writing.
Art. 808. The constitution df an annuity is
null if it is made in favor of a person already
dead or one who, within the following
thirty days, dies of a condition from which
he suffered at the time the contract was
made.
Art. 809. The property given in
compensation for the annuity falls, from the
moment of delivery, .under the ownership
of the person who undertook to pay the
annuity.
158
Art. 802. Nao se compreende nas dis-
posiyoes desta Seyiio a garantia do
reembolso de despesas hospitalares ou
de tratamento medico. nem o custeio
das despesas de Juto e de funeral do se-
gurado.
Capitulo XVI- Da Constitui~ao de
Renda
Art. 803. Pode uma pessoa, pelo con-
trato de constituir;iio de renda, obrigar-
se para com outra a uma prestar;ao pe-
ri6dica, a tftulo gratuito.
Art. 804. 0 contrato pode ser tarnbem a
tft\Jlo oneroso, entregando-se hens m6-
a
veis OU im6veis pessoa que se obriga
a satisfazer as prestar;oes a favor do cre-
dor ou de terceiros.
Art. 805. Sendo o contrato a tftulo one-
roso, pode o credor, ao contratar, exigir
que o rendeiro !he preste garantia real,
ou fidejuss6ria.
Art. 806. 0 contrato de constituir;iio de
renda sera feito a prazo certo. ou por
vida, podendo ultrapassar a vida do de-
vedor mas niio a do credor, seja ele o
contratante, seja terceiro.
Art. 807. 0 contrato de constitui~ao de
renda requer escritura piiblica.
Art. 808. Enula a constituir;ao de renda
em favor de pessoaja falecida, ou que,
nos trinta dias seguintes, vier a falecer
de molestia que ja sofria, quando foi ce-
lebrado o contrato.
Art. 809. Os hens dados em compensa-
yiio da renda caem, desde a tradir;iio, no
domfnio da pessoa ql.le por aquela se
obrigou. ·
159 CODIGO CIVIL BILJNGOE
Art. 810. Se o rendeiro, ou censuario,
deixar de cumprir a obrigar;iio estipula-
da, podera o credor da renda aciona-Jo,
tanto para que !he pague as prestar;oes
atrasadas como para que !he de garan-
tias das futuras, sob pena de rescisiio do
contrato.
Art. 811. 0 credor adquire o direito a
renda dia a dia, se a presta1;iio nao hou-
ver de ser paga adiantada, no comer;o
de cada \Jm dos perfodos prefixos.
Art. 812. Quando a renda for constituf-
da em beneffcio de duas ou mais pes-
soas, sem determinar;iio da parte de
cada uma, entende-se que os seus direi-
tos sao iguais; e, salvo estipula~fio di-
versa, niio adquirirfio os sobrevivos di-
reito aparte dos que morrerem.
Art. 813. A renda constitufda por tftulo
gratuito pode, por ato do instituidor, fi-
car isenta de todas as execur;oes pen~
dentes e futuras.
Paragrafo iinico. A iseni;iio prevista
neste artigo prevalece de pleno direito
em favor dos montepios e pensoes ali-
mentlcias.
Capitulo XVII-Do Jogo e cla
Aposta
Art. 814. As dfvidas de jogo ou de
aposta nao obrigam a pagamento; mas
nao se pode recobrar a quantia, que vo-
luntariamente se pagou, salvo se foi ga-
nha por dolo, ou se o perdente e menor
ou interdito.
§ 1° Estende-se esta disposir;ao a qual-
quer contrato que encubra ou envolva
reconhecimento, novac;:ao ou fiani;:a de
divida de jogo; mas a nulidade resultan-
te niio pode ser oposta ao terceiro de
boa-fe.
Art. 810-814
Art. 810. If the debtor fails to fulfill the
obligation stipulated, the creditor of the
annuity may take action against him, both
to cause him to pay late installments and to
give the creditor security for future
installments, on pain of rescission of the
contract.
Art. 811. If the installments are not to be
paid in advance, at the beginning of each of
the pre-determined periods, the creditor
acquires the right to income under the
annuity day by day.
Art. 812. When the annuity is constituted in
favor of two or more persons, without
establishing the share of each, their rights
are understood to be equal; and, unless
otherwise stipulated, the survivors do not
acquire the right to the share of those who
die.
Art. 813. An annuity constituted
gratuitously may, by act of the institutor, be
exempted from all pending and future
executions.
Sole paragraph. The exemption provided
for in this article prevails as of law in favor
of anmiities from pension and assistance
funds and alimentary pensions.
Chapter XVII - Gaming and Wagering
Art. 814. Gaming and wagering debts do
not create. an obligation to pay; but amounts
paid voluntarily cannot be recovered unless
they were won by fraud or the loser is a
minor or an interdicted person.
§ 1. This provision extends to any contract
that covers or involves the
acknowledgement, novation or personal
guaranty of gaming debts; but the resulting
nullity may not be asserted againsta good
faith third party.
 Art 815-820
BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 2 ·.The rule ~ontained in this article
apphes, ~v~n with respect to gaming that is
not i:iroh1b1ted, with the sole exception of
gammg and wagers that are permitted by
law.
§~-Prizes offered or promised to the
~mner of a competition of a sporting
mtelle~tual o~ artistic nature are als~
excepted, provided the interested parties
comp!Y with the legal and regulatory
prov1S1ons.
Art. 815. Reimbursement cannot be
demanded of that which was loaned for a
gam~ or wager, in the act of wagering or
gammg.
Art. 8l6. The provisions of arts. 814 and
815 do not apply to contracts concerning
stock exchange securities, commodities or
valua~les, which stipulate settlement
exclusivc;Iy at the difference between the
agreed pnce and the quoted price at the time
of settlement. .·
Art. 8l7. ~drawing of lots to resolve
controversies or to divide things held in
co~~on is considered to be a system of
partition or a process of settlement, as the
case maybe.
Chapter XVIII - Personal Guaranties
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 818. By a contract of personal
guar~nty, a person undertakes to satisfy the
creditor of an obligation assumed by the
debtm:, in the event the debtor does not
fulfill 1t.
A:rt. 8~9. A personal guaranty must be
given m writing, and does not admit of
broad interpretation.
A~t. 820. A personal guaranty may be
stipulated even without the consent of the
debtor or against his will.
160
§ 2° 0 preceito contido neste artigo tern
aplica~ao, ainda que se trate de jogo nao
proibido, s6 se excetuando os jogos e
apostas legalmente permitidos.
§ ~· Excetuam-se, igualmente, os pre-
m10s oferecidos ou prometidos para o
vencedor em competii;:ao de natureza
esportiva, intelectual ou artfstica, desde
que os interessados se submetam iis
prescrii;:oes legais e regulamentares.
Art. 815. Nao se pode ex igir reembolso
do que se emprestou parajogo ou apos-
ta, no ato de apostar ou jogar.
Art. 816. As disposi~oes dos arts. 814 e
815 nao se aplicam aos contratos sobre
tftulos de balsa, mercadorias ou valo-
res, em que se estipulem a liquida~ao
exclusivamente pela difereni;:a entre o
pre~o ajustado ea cotai;:ao que eles tive-
rem no vencimento do ajuste.
Art. 817. 0 sorteio para dirimir questo-
es ou dividir coisas comuns considera-·
se sistema de partilha ou processo de
transac;ao, conforme o caso.
Capitulo XVIfi - Da Fian\!a
Se\!lio I - Disposi\!i'ies Gerais
Art. 818. Pelo contrato de fiani;:a, uma
pessoa garante satisfazer ao credor uma
obrigai;:ao assumida pelo devedor, caso
este niio a cumpra.
Art. 819. A fian~a dar-se-a por escrito,
e naoadmite interpreta1rao extensiva.
Art. 820. Pode-se estipular a fiam;:a.
ainda que sem consentimento do deve-
dor ou contra a sua vontade.
161 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 821. As d!vidas futuras podem ser
objeto de fian~a; mas o fiador, neste
caso, nao sera demandado senao depois
que se fizer certa e lfquida a obrigac;ao
do principal devedor.
Art. 822. Nao sendo limitada, a fianc;a
compreendera todos os acessorios da
dfvida principal, inclusive as despesas
judiciais, desde a citac;ao do fiador.
Art. 823. A fianga pode ser de valor in-
ferior ao da obrigai;:ao principal e con-
trafda em condi~iies menos onerosas, e,
quando exceder o valor da dfvida, ou
for mais oherosa que ela, nao valera se-
nao ate ao limite da obrigac;ao afian-
~ada.
Art. 824. As obriga~oes nulas nao sao
suscetfveis de fiam;:a, exceto se a nuli-
dade resultar apenas de incapacidade
pessoal do devedor.
Paragrafo unico. A excei;:ao estabeleci-
da neste artigo nao abrange o caso de
mutuo feito a menor.
Art. 825. Quando alguem houver de
oferecer fiador. o credor nao pode ser
obrigado a aceita-lo se nao for pessoa
idonea, domiciliada no municfpio onde
tenha de prestar a fiarn;:a, e niio possua
hens suficientes para cumprir a obriga-
i;:iio.
Art. 826. Seo fiador se tomar insolvcn-
te ou incapaz, podera o credor exigir
que seja substitufdo.
Sei;ao II- Dos Efeitos
daFiani;a
Art. 827. 0 fiador demandado pelo pa-
gamento da dfvida tern direito a exigir,
ate a contestac;iio da lide, que sejam pri-
meiro executados os hens do devedor. ·
Art. 821-827
Art. 821. Future debts may be the object of
a personal guaranty; but in this case, no
demand may be made against the guarantor
until the principal debtor's obligation has
become certain and liquid.
Art. 822. Unless it is limited, a personal
guaranty covers all the accessories of the
principal debt, including judicial expenses,
from the time the guarantor is cited.
Art. 823. A personal guaranty may be for
an amount that is less than the principal
obligation, and contracted on less onerous
conditions; when it is for an amount greater
than the debt, or more onerous than the
debt, it is valid only to the extent of the
guaranteed obligation.
Art. 824. Null obligations cannot be
guaranteed, except where the nullity results
solely from the personal incapacity of the
debtor.
Sole paragraph. The exception established
in this article does not cover the case of
loans made to minors.
Art. 825. When someone must offer a
guarantor, the creditor cannot be obligated
to accept him if he is not a suitable person,
domiciled in the municipality where the
personal guaranty is to be given, and does
not possess property sufficient to fulfill the
obligation.
Art. 826. If the guarantor becomes
insolvent or incapable, the creditor may
require that he be replaced.
Section II - Effects of Personal
Guaranties
Art. 827. A guarantor against whom a
demand to pay the debt has been made has
the right to require, at any time before
contesting the merits of the case, that
execution first be made against the debtor's
property.

.Art 828-832 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. A guarantor who alleges
the benefit of discussion to which this
article refers must name property of the
debtor, situated in the same municipality
and free and clear of encumbrances,
sufficient to discharge the debt.
Art. 828. The benefit of discussion does not
avail a guarantor:
I - if he expressly waives it;
II - if he has bound himself as principal
pay or or as solidary debtor;
m - if the debtor is insolvent or bankrupt.
- Art. 829. A personal guaranty given jointly
by more than one person for a single debt
implies an undertaking of solidary liability
between them, iHhey do not expressly
reserve the benefit of division.
Sole paragraph: If the benefit is stipulated,
each guarantor is liable solely for his
proportionate share in the payment.
Art. 830. Each guarantor may fix in the
contract the share of the debt for which he
takes responsibility, and in that case he is
not liable for anything more.
Art. 831. A guarantor who pays the whole
of the debt is subrogated in the rights of the
creditor; but he may only demand from the
other guarantors their respective shares.
Sole paragraph. The share of an insolvent
guarantor is distributed among the others.
Art. 832. The debtor is also liable to the
guarantor for all losses and damages that
the guarantor may pay, and for those that he
suffers by reason of the personal guaranty.
162
Paragrafo iinico. 0 fiador que alegar o
beneffcio de ordem, a que se refere este
artigo, deve nomear bens do devcdor,
sitos no mesmo municfpio, livres e de-
sembargados, quantos bastem para sol-
ver o debito.
Art. 828. Nao aproveita este beneficio
aofiador:
I - se ele o renunciou expressamente;
II - se se obrigou coma principal paga-
dor, ou devedor solidiirio;
III - se o devedor for insolvente,ou fa-
lido.
Art. 829. A fianQa conjuntamente pres-
tada a um s6 debito par mais de uma
pessoa importa o compromisso de soli-
dariedade entre elas, se declaradamente
nao se reservarem o beneffcio de divi-
sao.
Paragrafo iinico. Estipulado este bene-
ficio, cada fiador responde unicamente
pela parte que, em proporQiio, lbe cou-
ber no pagamento.
Art. 830. Cada fiador pode fixar no
contrato a parte da divida que toma sob
sua responsabilidade, caso em que nao
sera por mais obrigado.
Art. 831. 0 fiador que pagar integral-
mente a dfvida fica sub-rogado nos di-
reitos do credor; mas s6 podera deman-
dar a cada um dos outros fiadores pela
respectiva quota.
Paragrafo (mica. A parte do fiador in-
solvente distribuir-se-a pelos outros.
Art. 832. 0 devedor responde tambem
perante o fiador por todas as perdas e
danos que este pagar, e pelos que sofrer
em razao da fianQa.
C6DIG0 CIVIL BILINGUE
163
Art. 833. 0 fiador tern direito aos juros
do desembolso pela taxa estipulada na
obriga~ao principal, e, nao have.ndo
ta.xa convencionada, aosjuros Jegais da
mora.
Art. 834. Quando o credor, s~n: j~sta
causa, demorar a execu~ao uucrnda
contra o devedor, podera o fiador pro-
mover-lhe o andamento.
Art. 835• o fiador podera exone:ar.-se
da fiam,;a que river assinado sem l11mta-
9ao de tempo, sempre que !he conv.1er,
ficando ohrigado por todos os efe:tos
da fian9a, durante sessenta dias apos a
notifica<;ao do credor.
Art. 836. A obriga<;ao do fiado~ ~assa
aos herdeiros; mas a responsabthd~de
da fiarn;a se Iimita ao tempo decorndo
ate a morte do fiador, e nao pode ultra-
passar as forQaS da heran<;a.
Sei;lio m - Da Extini;ao
daFiani;a
Art. 837. 0 fiador pode opor ao credor
as exce<;oes que !he forem pessoais, e as
cxtintiva.~ da obriga<;iio que com~etem
ao devedor principal, se nao provierem
simplesmente de incapacidade pessoal.
salvo o caso do mutuo feito a pessoa
men or.
Art. 838. 0 fiador, ainda que solidario,
ficara desobrigado:
I • se, sem consentimento seu, o credor
conceder morat6ria ao devedor;
II - se, par fato do credor, for ~m~ossi­
vel a sub-rogagao nos seus d1re1tos e
preferencias;
III - se o credor, em pagamento da dfvi-
da aceitar amigavelmente do devedor
obJeto diverso do que est~ era obrigado
a !he dar, ainda que depots venha a per-
de-lo por evici;:ao.
Art. 833-838
Art. 833. A guarantor has the right to
interest on the amount disburs~d a~ the rat.e
stipnlated in the principal obbgat10n or, if
no rate has been agreed, at the legal rate of
interest for late payment.
Art. 834. When the cr~dit?r: ~ithout ~ust
cause, delays the execut10n m1ttated ag~mst
the debtor, the guarantor may cause it to
proceed.
Art. 835. A guarantor may release himself
.at an time from a person~l &uar.ant)'. th~t he
has ~gned without any hm1tat1on m time,
although he remains bound by ~II the
effects of the personal gua:a!1tY ~urm& the
sixty days following not1f1cat1on of the
creditor.
Art. 836. The guara~t~:>r' s obligation passes
to his heirs; but liab1hty un~er theyersonal
guaranty is limited to the time pnor to tli~
death of the guaran~or and may not excee
the size of the inheritance.
Section III - Extinction of Personal
Guaranties
Art. 837. A guarantor may. assert against
the creditor any except10ns th~t are
personal to him, as well as the excep~1ons. of
the principal debtor that &o to. extmgmsh
the debt, if they do not ar~se slffiply from
personal incapacity, savmg the case of
simple loans made to minor persons.
Art. 838. The guarantor, eve~ if ~olidarily
liable, is released from his obhgat10n:
I - if, without his consent, the creditor
grants a moratorium to the debto:- . .
II - if, by an act of the creditor, it ts
·m ossible for the guarantor to be
~u6rogated in the creditor's rights and
privileges;
III - if the creditor amicably accepts from
the debtor, in payment of the debt,
something other than the .debtor was bound
to give, even if the c_re~1tor later loses the
thing by reason of ev1ct1on.
 Art. 840-844 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 839. If the benefit of discussion has
been claimed and, the execution being
delayed, the debtor becomes insolvent, the
guarantor who claimed the benefit will be
released if he proves that the property he
indicated was, at the time it was attached,
sufficient to discharge the guaranteed debt.
Chapter XIX - Settlement
Art. 840. It is licit for interested parties to
prevent or terminate litigation through
mutual concessions.
Art. 841. Settlement is permitted only with
respect to private patrimonial rights.
Art. 842. Settlement shall be made by
public writing, for obligations that the law
requires to take that form, or by private
instrument, where the law permits the
obligation to be made by private writing. If
the settlement affects rights contested in
court, it shall be made by public writing, or
by an instrument in the record of the
proceeding, signed by the settling parties
and homcilogated by the judge.
Art. 843. A settlement is interpreted
restrictively. Rights are not transmitted by
a settlement, merely declared or
acknowledged.
Art. 844. A settlement does not avail or
prejudice anyone but those who are party to
it, even though it relates to an indivisible
thing.
§ 1. If the settlement is made between the
creditor and debtor, the guarantor is
released.
§ 2. If the settlement is made between one
joint creditor and the debtor, it extinguishes
the debtor's obligation to the other
creditors.,
§ 3. If the settlement is made between one
solidary debtor and the creditor, it
extinguishes the debt in relation to the
co-debtors.
164
Art. 839. Se for invocado o beneficio
da excussao e o devedor, retardando-se
a execu\'.i'iO, cair em insolvencia, ficarii
exonerado o fiador que o invocou, se
provar que os hens por ele indicados
eram, ao tempo da penhora, suficientes
para a solu\'.i'io da dfvida afiam;ada.
Capitulo XIX- Da Transa1;iio
Art. 840. E lfcito aos interessados pre-
venirem ou terminarem o litfgio me-
diante concessoes mutuas.
Art. 841. So quanta a direitos patrimo-
niais de cariiter privado se permite a
transa\'.ao.
Art. 842. A transm;ao far-se-ii por es-
critura publica, nas obriga\'.oes em que
a lei o exige, ou por instrumento parti-
cular, nas em que ela o admite; se recair
sobre direitos contestados em jufzo,
serii feita por escritura publica, ou por
termo nos autos, assinado pelos transi-
gentes e homologado pelo juiz.
Art. 843. A transa~ao interpreta-se res-
tritivamente, e por ela nao se transmi-
tem, apenas se declaram ou reconhe-
cem direitos,
Art. 844. A transar;ao niio aproveita,
nem prejudica senao aos que nela inter-
vierem, ainda que diga respeito a coisa
indivisfveL
§ 1° Se for conclufda entre o credor e o
devedor, desobrigarii o fiador.
§ 2° Se entre um dos credores solid:irios
e o devedor, extingue a obrigai,:ao deste
para com os outros credores.
§ 3° Se entre um dos devedores solidii-
rios e seu credor, extingue a dfvida em
rela1.:ao aos co-devedores.
165 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 845. Dada a evic\'.aO da coisa re-
nunciada por um dos transigentes, ou
por ele transferida aoutra parte, nao re-
vive a obrigai;:ao extinta pela transac;ao;
mas ao evicto cabe o direito de reclamar
perdas e danos.
Paragrafo unico. Se um dos transigen-
tes adquirir, depois da transa1;ao, novo
direito sobre a coisa renunciada ou
transferida, a transac;ao feita nao o ini-
birii de exerce-lo.
Art. 846. A transar;ao concernente a
obrigm;;oes resultantes de delito nao ex-
tingue a ai;ao penal piiblica.
Art. 847. E admissivel, na transar;ao, a
pena convencional.
Art. 848. Sendo nu la qualquer da~ cliiu-
sulas da transar;ao, nula serii esta.
Pariigrafo unico. Quando a transar;ao
versar sabre diversos direitos contes-
tados, independcntes entre si, o fato de
nao prevalecer em rela~ao a um nao
prejudicar:i os demais.
Art. 849. A transac;ao s6 se anula por
dolo, coat:ao, ou erro essencial quanta a
pessoa ou coisacontroversa
Pariigrafo unico. A transar;ao niio se
anula por erro de direito a respeito das
questoes que foram objeto de contro-
versia entre as partes.
Art. 850. E nula a transa~ao a respeito
do litfgio decidido por senten\'.a passada
em julgado, se dela nao tin ha ciencia al-
gum dos transatores, ou quando, por tf-
ttilo ulteriormente descoberto, se verifi-
car que nenhum deles tinha direito sa-
bre o objeto da transa\'.ao.
Art. 845-850
Art. 845. In case of eviction from a thing
that has been relinquished by one of the
parties to a settlement or transferred by him
to another party, the obligation
extinguished by the settlement does not
revive; but the evicted party has the right to
claim losses and damages.
Sole paragraph. If one of the parties to the
settlement acquires, after the settlement, a
new right to the thing relinquished or
transferred, the settlement that was made
does not prevent him from exercising it.
Art. 846. A settlement concerning
obligations resulting from delict does not
extinguish a public penal action.
Art. 847. A contractual penalty is
admissible in s.ettlements.
Art. 848. If any of the clauses of a
settlement is null, the settlement shall be
null.
Sole paragraph. When the settlement
concerns various contested rights, each
independent of the others, the fact that the
settlement does not prevail in relation to
one of the rights shall not prejudice the
others.
Art. 849. A settlement is annulled only for
wrongful conduct, coercion or essential
mistake as to the person or thing in
controversy.
Sole paragraph. The settlement is not
annulled for mistake of law as to the
questions that were in controversy between
the parties.
Art. 850. A settlement with respect to a
dispute that has been decided by final
judgment is null, if any of the parties to the
settlement was not aware of the judgment;
a settlement is also null if it is later
discovered that none of the parties had any
right over the matter that was settled.
Art. 851-856 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter XX - Submission Agreements
Art. 851. Judicial or extrajudicial
submission agreements are permitted for
the purpose of resolving litigation between
persons who are able to contract.
Art. 852. A submission agreement is
prohibited for the resolution of questions of
state, personal family tights ahd other
questions that are not strictly patrimonial in
character.
Art. 853. Arbitration clauses are permitted
in contracts, for the purpose of resolving
controversies through arbitration, in the
manner established in special legislation.
Title VII - Unilateral Acts
Chapter I - Promise
to Reward
Art. 854. A person who, by public
announcements, undertakes to reward or
pay a gratification to anyone who meets a
certain condition or performs a certain
service contracts an obligation to fulfill his
promise.
Art. 855. Anyone who, within the terms of
the preceding article, does the service or
satisfies the condition, even without
interest in the promise, may demand the
stipulated reward.
Art. 856, The promissor may revoke the
promise before the service is performed or
the condition met, provided that he does so
with the same publicity; but if a period of
time bas been assigned for the performance
of the task, the promissor is deemed to have
waived the right to withdraw the offer
during that period oftime.
Sole paragraph. If a candidate in good faith
has incurred expenses, he shall have the
right to reimbursement.
166
Capftulo XX -Do Compromisso
Art. 851. E admitido compromisso, ju-
dicial ou extrajudic\al. para resolver li-
tfgios entre pessoas que podem contra-
tar.
Art. 852. E vedado compromisso para
solrn;:ao de questoes de estado, de direito
pessoal de familia e de outras que nao te-
nham carater estritamente patrimonial.
Art. 853. Admite-se nos contratos a
cliiusula compromiss6ria, para resolver
divergencias mediante jufzo arbitral, na
forma estabefocida em lei especial.
Titulo VII- Dos Atos Unilaterais
Capitulo I - Da Promessa de
Recompensa
Art. 854. Aquele que, por anuncios pu-
blicos, se comprometer a recompensar,
ou gratificar, a quern preencha certa
condi9ao, ou desempenhe certo servi-
~o, contrai obrigai;:ao de cumprir o pro-
metido.
Art. 855. Quern quer que, nos termos
do artigo antecedente, fizer o servi~o.
ou satisfizer a condi9ao, ainda que nao
pelo interesse da promessa, poderii exi-
gir a recompensa estipulada.
Art. 856. Antes de prestado o servi<;o
ou preenchida a condi~ao, pode o pro-
mitente revogar a promessa, contanto
que o fa~a com a mes ma publicidade; se
houver assinado prazo a execu~ao da
tarefa, entender-se-ii que renuncia o ar-
bftrio de retirar, durante ele, a oferta.
Paragrafo unico. 0 candidato de boa-fe,
que houver feito despesas, tera direito a
reembolso.
167 COD1GO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 857. Seo ato contemplado na pro-
messa for praticado por mais de um in-
divftluo, tera direito a recompensa o
que primeiro o executou.
Art. 858. Sendo simultanea a execu-
~ao, a cada um tocara quinhiio iguar na
recompensa; se esta nao for divisive!,
conferir-se-a por sorteio, e o que obti-
ver a coisa dara ao outro o valor de seu
quiuhao.
Art. 859. Nos concursos que se abrirem
com promessa publica de recompensa,
e condi9ao essencial, para valerem, a fi-
xa~ao de um prazo, observadas tambem
as disposi~oes dos pariigrafos seguin-
tes.
§ 1° A decisao da pessoa nomeada, nos
anuncios, Como juiz, obriga OS interes-
sados.
§ 2° Em falta de pessoa designada para
julgar 0 merito dos trabalhos que se
apresentarem, entender-se-a que o pro-
mitente se reservou essa fun9ao.
§ 3° Se OS trabalhos tiverem merito
igual, proceder-se-a de acordo com os
arts. 857 e 858.
Art. 860. As obras premiadas, nos con-
cursos de que trata o artigo antecedente,
so ficarao pertencendo ao promitente,
se assim for estipulado na publicai;:ao
da promessa.
Capitulo II- Da Gestlio de Neg6cios
Art. 861. Aquele que, sem autoriza~ao
do interessado, intervem na gestao de
neg6cio alheio, dirigi-lo-ii segundo o
interesse ea vontade presumivel de seu
dono, ficando responsavel a este e as
pessoas com que tratar.
Art. 857-861
Art. 857. If the act contemplated in the
promise is performed by more than one
individual, the first to perform the act shall
have the right to the reward.
Art. 858. If performance is simultaneous,
each shall have an equal share of the
reward; if the reward is not divisible, it shall
be conferred by drawing oflots, and he who
obtains the thing shall give the other the
value of his share.
Art. 859. The fixing of a period of time is
an essential condition to the validity of
competitions that are opened with a public
promise of reward, which shall also be
subject to the provisions of
the following
paragraphs.
§ 1. The decision of the person named as
judge in the announcements binds the
interested parties.
§ 2. In the absence of a person designated to
judge the merit of the works that are
presented, the promissor shall be deemed to
have reserved that function to himself.
§ 3. If the works have equal merit, the
procedure set out in arts. 857 and 858 shall
apply.
Art. 860. In the competitions contemplated
in the preceding article, prize-winning
works shall belong to the promissor only if
it so stipulated in the public announcement
of the promise.
Chapter II - Management of Affairs
Art. 861. Anyone who, without the
authorization of the interested party,
involves himself in the management of
another's affairs, conducting them
according to the presumed interest and
intention of the owner, is liable to the owner
and to the third parties with whom he deals.
Art. 862-867 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 862. If the management was initiated
against the interested party's manifest or
presumable will, the manager shall be
liable even for fortuitous events, if he does
not prove that they would have occurred
even if he had abstained from managing the
affairs.
Art. 863. In the case of the preceding
article, if the losses resulting from the
management exceed the benefits, the owher
of the affairs may demand that the manager
restore the things to their earlier state, or
indemnify him for the difference.
Art. 864. To the extent possible, the
manager shall advise the owner of the
management he assumed, and await the
owner's response, if there is no risk in
waiting.
Art. 865. For so long as the owner fails to
make provision for the management of his
affairs, the manager shall oversee the
affairs until they are completed; and if the
owner should die during the management,
the manager shall await the instructions of
the heirs. without, however, failing to take
such measures as the case demands.
Art. 866. The manager shall apply all his
habitual diligence in the administration of
the affairs and shall reimburse the owner
for loss resulting from any fault in his
management.
Art. 867. If the manager replaces himself
with another, he shall be liable for the
replacement's fault, even if the
replacement is a suitable person, without
prejudice to any action that he, or the owner
of the affairs, may have against the
replacement.
Sole paragraph. If there is more than one
manager, their liability shall be solidary.
168
Art. 862. Se a gestao foi iniciada contra
a vontade manifesta ou presumfvel do
interessado, respondera o gestor ate pe-
los casos fortuitos, nao provando quc
teriam sobrevindo, ainda quando se
houvesse abatido.
Art. 863. No caso do artigo antecedcn-
te, se os prejufzos da gcstao excedercm
o seu proveito, podera o dono do neg6-
cio exigir que o gestor restinia as coisas
ao estado anterior, ou o indenize da di-
feren1;a.
Art. 864. Tanto que se possa, comuni-
cara o gestor ao dono do neg6cio ages-
tao que assumiu, aguardando-lhe a res-
posta, se da espera nao resultar perigo.
Art. 865. Enquanto o dono nao provi-
denciar, velara o gestor pelo neg6cio,
ate o Jevar a cabo, esperando, se aquele
falecer durante a gestlio, as instru~oes
dos herdeiros, sem se descuidar, entre-
tanto, das medidas que o caso reclame.
Art. 866. 0 gestor envidara toda sua di-
ligencia habitual na administra1;ao do
neg6cio, ressarcindo ao dono o prejuizo
resultante de qualquer culpa na gestiio.
Art. 867. Seo gestor se fizer substituir
por outrem, respondera pelas faltas do
substituto, ainda que seja pessoa ido-
nea, sem prejufzo da a~ao que a ele, ou
ao dono do neg6cio, contra ela possa
caber.
Paragrafo iinico. Havendo mais de um
gestor, solidaria sera a sua responsabili-
dade.
169 CODIGO CIVIL BILINOUE
Art. 868. 0 gestor responde pelo caso
fortuito quando fizer operac;oes arrisca-
das, ainda que o dono costumasse faze-
las, ou quando preterir interesse deste
em proveito de interesses seus.
Panigrafo unico. Querendo o dono
aproveitar-se da gestao, sera obrigado a
indenizar o gestor das despesas neces-
sarias, que liver feito, e dos prejufzos,
que por motivo da gestiio, houver so-
frido.
Art. 869. Seo neg6cio forutilmente ad-
ministrado, cumprira ao dono as obri-
gai;oes contrafdas em seu nome, reem-
bolsando ao gestor as despesas necessa-
rias OU Uteis que bouver feito, com OS
juros legais, desde o desembolso, res-
pondendo ainda pelos prejufzos que
este houver sofrido por causa da gestao.
§ I 0 A utilidade, ou necessidade, da
despesa, apreciar-se-a nao pelo resulta-
do obtido, mas segundo as circunstan-
cias da ocasilio em que se fizerem.
§ 2° Vigorao disposto neste artigo, ain-
da quando o gestor. em erro quanto ao
dono do neg6cio, der a outra pessoa as
contas da gestlio.
Art. 870. Aplica-se a disposit,;ao do ar-
tigo antecedente, quando a gestao se
proponha a acudir a prejuizos iminen-
tes, ou redunde em proveito do dono do
neg6cio ou da coisa; mas a indenizai,:iio
ao gestor nao excedera, em importan-
cia, as vantagens obtidas com a gestiio.
Art. 871. Quando alguem, na ausencia
do individuo obrigado a alimentos, por
ele os prestar a quern se devem, poder-
lhes-a reaver do devedor a importiincia,
ainda que este niio ratifique o ato.
Art. 868-871
Art. 868. The manager is liable for
fortuitous events if he makes risky
transactions, even if the owner customarily
made such transactions, or if he neglects the
owner's interest to the benefit of his own.
Sole paragraph. If the owner wishes to avail
himself of the management, he shall be
obligated to indemnify the manager for the
necessary expenses he has made and for the
losses he has suffered by reason of the
management.
Art. 869. If the affair was usefully
managed, the owner shall fulfill the
obligations contracted in his name; he shall
reimburse the manager for any necessary or
useful expenditures he may have made,
together with legal interest from the time of
disbursement, and shall be liable for the
losses that the manager suffered by reason
of the management.
§ 1. The usefulness or necessity of
expenditures shall be assessed not by the
result obtained but according to the
circumstances at the time they were made.
§ 2. The provisions of this article shall
apply even when the manager, under
mistake as to the owner of the affairs, gives
another person the accounts of his
management.
Art. 870. The provisions of the preceding
article apply when the management is
intended to attend to imminent loss or
redounds to the benefit of the owner of the
affair or the thing; but the amount of the
indemnification to the manager shall not
exceed the advantages obtained through the
management.
Art. 871. When someone, in the absence of
an individual who has an alimentary
obligation, gives support to th~ person to
whom the obligation is owed, he may
recover the amount from the debtor of the
alimentary obligation, even if the latter
does not ratify the act.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 872-877
Art. 872. Burial expenses proportionate to
local use and the condition of the deceased
that are made by a third party may be
claimed from any person who had the
obligation to support the deceased, even if
the latter left no property.
Sate paragraph. The provisions of .this and
the preceding article cease to apply upon
proof that the manager incurred the
expenses with the simple intention to do.
good.
Art. 873. Pure and simple ratification .by
th~ owner of the managed affair is
retroactive to the day on which the
management began and produces all the
effects of a mandate.
Art. 874. If the owner of the affair or the
thing disapproves the management,
considering it to be contrary to his interests,
the provisions of arts. 862 and 863 shall
apply, subject to arts. 869 and 870.
Art. 875. If the other's affairs are
connected with those of the manager, such
that they cannot be managed separately, the
manager shall be deemed to be the partner
of the one whose interests he conducts
together with his own.
Sole paragraph. In the case contemplated in
this article, the person on whose behalf the
manager inter\;'ened is bound only to the
extent of the advantages gained.
Chapter III ..... Payment
Not Owed
Art. 876. Every person who receives a
thing that was not owed is obligated to
restitute it; a person who receives payment
of a conditional debt before the condition is
fulfilled also has this obligation.
Art. 877. A person who voluntarily paid
what was not owed has the burden of
proving that he did so by mistake.
170
Art. 872. Nas despesas do enterro, pro-
porcionadas aos usos locais e a condi-
c;ao do falecido, feitas por terceiro, po-
dem ser cobradas da pessoa que teria a
obriga9ao de alimentar a que veio a fa-
lecer, ainda mesmo que esta nao tenha
deixado hens.
Paragrafo unico. Cessa o disposto ncste
attigo e no antecedente, em se provan-
do que o gestor fez essas despesas com
o simples intento de bem-fazer.
Art. 873. A ratificac;ao pura e simples
do dono do neg6cio rctroage ao dia do
comec;o da gestao, e produz todos os
efeitos do mandato.
Art. 874. Se o dono do neg6cio, ou da
coisa, desaprovar a gestao, consideran-
do-a contraria aos seus interesses, vigo-
rara o disposto nos atts. 862 e 863, sal-
vo o estabelecido nos arts. 869 e 870.
Art. 875. Se os neg6cios alheios forem
conexos ao do gestor, de ta! arte que se
niio possam gerir sep;,iradamente, ha-
ver-se·a o gestor por sllcio daquele cu-
jos interesses agenciar de envolta com
os seus.
Paragrafo unico. No caso deste artigo,
aquele em cujo beneficio interveio o
gestor s6 e obrigado na razao das vanta-
gens que lograr.
Capitulo III- Do Pagamento
Indevido
Art. 876. Todo aquele que recebeu o
que !he nao era devido flea obrigado a
restituir; obriga9ao que incumbe aquele
que recebe dfvida condicional antes de
cumprida a condic;ao.
Art. 877. Aquele que voluntariamente
pagou o indevido incumbe a prova de
te-lo feito por erro.
17l COD1GO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 878. Aos frutos, acessoes, benfei-
torias e deteriora9oes sobrevindas a
coisa dada em pagamento indevido,
aplica-se o disposto neste C6digo sobre
O possuidor de boa-fe OU de ma-fe, con-
formc o caso.
Art. 879. Se aquele que indevidamente
recebeu um im6vel o tiver alienado em
boa-fe, por tftulo oneroso, responde so-
mente pela quantia recebida; mas, se
agiu de mii-fe, alemclo valor do im6vel,
responde por perdas e danos.
Paragrafo unico. Seo i move! foi aliena-
do por tftulo gratuito, ou se, alienado
por titulo oneroso, o.terceiro adquirente
agiu de mii-fe, cabe ao que pagou por
erro o direito de reivindica1;ao.
Art. 880. Fica isento fle restituir paga-
mento ihdevido aquel~ que, recebendo-
o como parte de dfvida verdadeira, inu-
tilizou o tftulo, deixou prescrever a pre-
tensao ou abriu miio das garantias que
asseguravam seu direito; mas aquele
que pagou dispoe de ac;ao regressiva
contra o verdadeiro devedor e seu fia-
dor.
Art. 881. Seo pagamento..indevido ti-
ver consistido no desempenho de obri-
gm;iio de fazer ou para eximir-se da ob-
riga~iio de nao fazer, aquele que rece-
beu a presta~ao flea na obriga9ao de in-
denizat o que a cumpriu, na medida do
lucro obti<lo.
Art. 882. Nao se pode repetir o que se
pagou para solver dfvida prescrita, ou
cumprir obrigar,:ao judicialmente inexi-
givel.
Art. 878-882
Art. 878. The provisions of this Code on
possessors in good faith or bad faith, as the
case may be, apply to the fruits, accretions,
improvements and deterioration of a thing
given in payment but not owed.
Art. 879. If a person who received an
immovable property that was not owed to
him alienates it in good faith, by onerous
title, he is liable only for the amount
received; but if he acted in bad faith, he is
liable not only for the value of the
immovable property but also for losses and
damages.
Sole paragraph. If the immovable property
was alienated by gratuitous title; or if,
although the immovable was alienated by
onerous title, the third party acquirer acted
in bad faith, the one who paid by mistake
has the right to demand the return of the
immovable property.
Art. 880. A person who received, as part of
a true debt, payment that was not owed and,
consequently, destroyed the title to the
debt, allowed his claim to prescribe or
released the security for his right is
exempted from the obligation to restore the
unowed payment; but the one who paid has
a right of recourse against the true debtor
and his guarantor.
Art. 881. If an unowed payment consisted
in the performance of an obligation to do or
was made to obtain release from an
obligation not to do, the one who received
payment is bound to indemnify the person
who fulfilled the obligation, to the extent of
the profit obtained.
Art. 882. That which was paid to discharge
a prescribed debt or to fulfill a judicially
unenforceable obligation cannot be
recovered.
Art. 883-888 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 883. A person who gave. something to
obtain an end that is illicit, immoral or
prohibited by law shall not have the right to
recover it.
Sole paragraph. In the case contemplated in
this article, that which was given shall
revert in favor of a local charitable
establishment, chosen at the judge's
discretion.
Chapter IV - Enrichment without
Cause
Art. 884. Anyone who, without just cause,
is enriched at another's expense is bound to
restitute the undue gain, adjusted for
inflation.
Sole paragraph. If the enrichment results
from receiving a determinate thing, the one
who received it is bound to return it; if the
thing no long exists, restitution shall be
made by payment of the value of the thing
at the time it was demanded.
Art. 885. Restitution is owed not only when
there was no cause to justify the enrichment
but also when the cause ceases to exist.
Art. 886. Restitution by reason of
en;richment shall not apply if the law
cpnfei;s on the jnjur~d party other means to
obtain reparation for the loss suffered.
Title VIII - Debt Instruments
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 887'. A debt instrument, the document
required for the exercise of the literal and
independent right contained in it, produces
effects only when it meets the requirements
imposed by law.
Art. 888. Omission as to any legal
requirement, which impairs the validity of
the writing as a debt instrument, does not
result in the invalidity of the legal
transaction that gave rise to the debt
instrument.
172
a
Art. 883. Nao tera dircito repeti-;:ao
aquele que deu alguma coisa para obter
fim ilfcito, imoral, ou proibido por lei.
Paragrafo unico. No caso deste artigo, o
que se deu revertera em favor de estabe-
lecimento local de beneficencia, acrite-
rio dojuiz.
Capftulo IV - Do Enriquecimento
SemCausa
Art. 884. Aquele que, sem justa causa,
se enriquecer acusta de outrem, sera
obrigado a restituir o indevidamente
auferido, feita a atualiza\:aO dos valores
monetarios.
Panigrafo unico. Se o enriquecimento
tiver por objeto coisa determinada,
e
quern a recebeu obrigado a restituf-la,
e, se a coisa nao mais subsistir, a resti-
tuiyiio se fara pelo valor do bem na epo-
ca em que foi exigido.
Art. 885. A restitui~ao e devida, nao s6
quando nao tenha havido causa que jus-
tifique o enriquecimento, mas tambem
se csta deixou de existir.
Art. 886. Nao cabera a restitui~ao por
enriquecimento, se a lei conferir ao lc-
sado outros meios para se ressarcir do
prejufzo sofrido.
Tftulo VIlI - Dos Titulos de Credito
Capitulo I - Disposi1;oes Gerais
Art. 887. 0 tftulo de credito, documen-
to necessario ao exercfcio do direito li-
teral e autonomo nele contido, somente
produz efeito quando preencha os req-
uisitos da lei.
Art. 888. A omissao de qualquer requi-
sito legal, que tire ao escrito a sua vali-
dade coma tftulo de credito, nao impli-
ca a invalidade do neg6cio jurfdico que
!he deu origem.
173 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Art. 889. Deve o iftulo de credito can-
ter a data da emissao, a indica~ao preci-
sa dos direitos que confere, ea assinatu-
ra do emitente.
§ i 0 Ea vista o tftulo de credito que nao
contenha indicai;iio de vencimento.
§ 2° Considera-se Ingar de emissao e de
pagamento, quando nao indicado no tf-
n!lo, o domicflio do emitente.
§ 3° O titulo podera ser emitido a partir
dos caracteres criados em computador
ou meio tecnico cquivalcnte e que cons-
tem da escritura~ao do emitente, obser-
vados os requisitos mfnimos previstos
neste artigo.
Art. 890. Consideram-se nao escritas
no tftulo acl:iusuladejuros, a proibitiva
de endosso, a excludente de responsa-
bilidade pelo pagamento ou por despe-
sas, a que dispense a observancia deter-
mos e formalidade prescritas, e a que,
alem dos limites fixados em lei, exclua
ou restrinja direitos e obrigac;oes.
Art. 891. 0 tltulo de credito, incomple-
to ao tempo da emissao, deve ser preen-
chido de conformidade com os ajustes
realizados.
Paragrafo unico. 0 descumprimento
dos ajustes previstos neste artigo pelos
que deles participaram, niio constitui
motivo de oposil;:ao ao terceiro porta-
dor, salvo se.este, ao adquirir o tftulo, ti-
ver agido de ma-fe.
Art. 892. Aquele que, sem ter poderes,
ou excedendo os que tern, lanc;a a sua
assinatura em tftulo de credito, como
mandatario ou representante de outrem,
fica pessoalmente obrigado, e; pagando
o tftulo, tern ele os mesnios direitos que
teria o suposto mandante ou repre-
sentado.
Art. 889-892
Art. 889. A debt instrument must contain
the date of issue, a precise indication of the
rights that it confers and the signature of the
issuer.
§ I. A debt instrument that does not indicate
when it matures is payable at sight.
§ 2. The place of issue and the place of
payment, if not indicated in the instrument,
are deemed to be the domicile of the issuer.
§ 3. The instrument may be issued using
characters that are created in a computer or
equivalent technical means and that are
contained in the issuer's accounting books,
subject to the minimum requirements
provided for in this article.
Art. 890. Any clause providing for interest,
prohibiting endorsement, excluding
liability for payment or expenses, waiving
compliance with prescribed terms and
formalities or excluding or restricting
rights and obligations beyond the limits
fixed by law is deemed not to have been
written in the instrument.
Art. 891. A debt instrument that is
incomplete at the time of issue must be
completed in conformity with the
agreement made by the parties.
Sole paragraph. Breach of the agreement
referred to in this article by those who were
party to it cannot be asserted against a third
party bearer unless the latter acted in bad
faith in acquiring the instrument.
Art. 892. Anyone who, without power to
do so or exceeding the powers he has, puts
his signature to a debt instrument as
another's mandatary or representative is
personally bound, and on paying the
instrument he has the same rights that the
supposed mandator or represented party
would have.
 Art. 893-899 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 893. The transfer of a debt instrument
results in the transfer of all the rights
inherent to it.
Art. 894. The bearer of an instrument
representing commodities has the right to
transfer the instrument in conformity with
the rules that govern its circulation, or to
receive the merchandise witho.ut any
formality other than the delivery of the duly
acquitted instrument.
Art. 895. While the debt instrument is in
circulation, only the instrument may be
given as security or be subject to judicial
measures, and riot, separate from the
instrument, the rights or merchandise that it
represents. · senta.
Art. 896. A debt instrument may not be
claimed from a bearer who acquired it in
good faith and in conformity with the rules
that govern its circulation.
Art. 897. Payment of a debt instrument that
contains an bbligation to pay a specified
sum inay be guaranteed by aval.
Sole paragraph. Partial a val is prohibited.
Art. 898. Aval rqus.t be given on the back or
the face of the instrument itself.
§ 1. The simple signature of the aval
guarantor on the face of the instrument is
sufficient to make the aval valid.
§ 2. A cancelled aval is deemed to not have
been written.
Art. 899. An aval guarantor is equated to
the person whose name he indicates; if he
indicates none, to the issuer or ultimate
debtor.
174
Art. 893. A transferencia do titulo de
Credito imp!ica a de todos OS direitos
que !he sao inerentes.
Art. 894. 0 portador de tftulo re-
presentativo de mercadoria tern o direi-
to de transferi-lo, de conformidade com
as normas que regulam a sua circu-
lagao, ou de receber aquela indepen-
dentemente de quaisquer formalidades,
alem da entrega do tftulo devidamente
quitado.
Art. 895. Enquanto o tftulo de credito
estiver em circulagao, s6 ele podera ser
dado em garantia, ou serobjeto de me-
didas judiciais, e nao, separadamente.
os direitos ou mercadorias que repre-
Art. 896. 0 tftulo de Credito nao pode
ser reivindicado do portador que o ad-
quiriu de boa-fee na conformidade das
normas que disciplinam a sua circula-
g1io.
Art. 897. 0 pagamento de tftulo de cre-
dito, que contenha obriga~ao de pagar
soma determinada, pode ser garantido
por aval.
Paragrafo unico. E vedado o aval par-
cial.
Art. 898. 0 aval deve ser dado no verso
ou no anverso do pr6prio tftulo.
§ 1° Para a validade do a val, dado no an-
verso do tftulo, e suficiente a simples
assinatura do avalista.
§ 2° Considera-se nao escrito o aval
cancel ado.
Art. 899. 0 avalista equipara-se aquele
cujo nome indicar; na falta de indica-
Q1io, ao emitente ou devedor final.
175 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
§ 1 Pagan do o tftulo, tern o avalista agao
de regresso contra o seu avalizado e de•
mais coobrigados anteriores.
§ 2° Subsiste a responsabilidade do ava-
lista, ainda que nula a obtiga"lio daque-
le a quern se equipara, a menos que a
nulidade decorra de vfcio de forma.
Art. 900. 0 aval posterior ao venci-
mento produz os mesmos efeitos do an-
teriormente dado.
Art. 901. Fica validamente desonerado
o devedor que paga tftulo de credito ao
legftimo portador, ho vencimento, se:m
oposii,:1io, salvo se agiu de ma-fe.
Paragrafo unico. Pagando, pode o de-
vedor exigir do credor, alem da entrega
do tftulo, quita"ao regular.
Art. 902. Nao e o credor obrigado a re-
ceber o pagamento antes do vencimen-
to do tftulo, e aquele que o paga, antes
do vencimento, fica responsavel pela
validade do pagamento.
§ I 0 No vencimento, nao pode o credor
recusar pagamento, ainda que parcial.
§ 2° No caso de pagamento parcial, em
que se nao opera a tradii;:ao do tftulo,
alcm da quita~ao em separado, outra
devera ser firmada no pr6prio tftulo.
Art. 903. Salvo disposi~ao diversa em
lei especial, regem-se os tftulos de cre-
dito pelo disposto neste C6digo.
Capitulo II - Do Titulo ao Portador
Art. 904. !). transferencia de tftulo ao
portador se (az por simples tradi~ao.
Art. 900-904
§ 1. Having paid the instrument, the aval
guarantor has a right of recourse against the
beneficiary of the aval guaranty and the
other prior co-obligees.
§ 2. The aval guarantor continues to be
liable, even if the obligation of the person to
whom the aval guarantor is equated is null,
unless the nullity arises from a defect of
form.
Art. 900. Aval given after maturity
produces the same effects as one given
prior to maturity.
Art. 901. A debtor who pays a debt
instrument to the lawful bearer on the date
of maturity, without opposition, is validly
discharged, unless he acted in bad faith.
Sole paragraph. Upon payment, the debtor
may demand from the creditor, in addition
to the instrument, an acquittance in proper
form.
Art. 902. The creditor is not obligated to
receive payment before the instrument
matures, and anyone who pays prior to
maturity is liable for the validity of the
payment.
§ 1. On maturity, the creditor may not
refuse payment, even if it is partial.
§ 2. In the case of partial payment where the
instrument is not delivered, an acquittance
shall be signed on the instrument itself, in
addition to the acquittance given
separately.
Art. 903. Unless otherwise provided for in
special legislation, debt instruments shall
be governed by the provisions of this Code.
Chapter II - Bearer Instruments
Art. 904. Transfer of a bearer instrument is
made by simple delivery.
Art. 905-910 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 905. The possessor of a bearer
instrument has the right to the payment
indicated in it, upon simple presentation of
the instrument to the debtor.
Sole paragraph. Payment is owed even if
the instrument entered into circulation
against the issuer's will.
Art. 906. The debtor may only assert
against the bearer exceptions based on
personal rights or on the nullity of his
obligation.
Art. 907. A bearer instrument issued
without authorization under special
legislation is null.
Art. 908. The possessor of a torn yet
identifiable instrum~nt has the right to
obtain a replacement from the issuer,
against restitution of the first instrument
and payment of expenses.
Art. 909. An owner who loses or misplaces
an instrument, or who is unjustly
dispossessed of it, may obtain a new
instrument in court, and prevent the capital
and earnings from being paid to any other
person.
Sole paragraph. Payment made before
becoming aware of the action referred to in
this article discharges the debtor, unless it is
proven that he knew of the fact.
Chapter III - Instruments to Order
Art. 910. An endorsement must be made on
the back or the face of the instrument itself.
§ 1. The endorser may designate the
endotsee, and the simple signature of the
endorser is sufficient for the validity of an
endorsement given on the back of the
instrument.
§ 2. Transfer by endorsement is completed
by delivery of the instrument.
176
Art. 905. 0 possuidor de tftulo ao por-
tador tern direito a prestai,;iio nele indi-
cada, mediante a sua simples apresenta-
i,;ao ao devedor.
Paragrafo unico. A prestm;:ao e devida
ainda que o tftulo tenha entrado em cir-
culai,;iio contra a vontade do emitente.
Art. 906. 0 devedor s6 podera opor ao
portador exce~iio fundada em direito
pessoal, ou em nulidade de sua obri-
gai,;ao.
Art. 907. E nulo o tftulo ao portador
emitido sem autoriza~iio de lei especial.
Art. 908. 0 possuidor de tftulo dilace-
rado, porem identificavel, tern direito a
obter do emitente a substituii,;ao do an-
terior, mediante a restituii,;ao do primei-
ro e o pagamento das despesas.
Art. 909. 0 proprietario, que perder ou
extraviar t!tulo, ou for injustamente de-
sapossado dele, poderil obter novo tftu-
lo em jufzo, bem como impedir sejam
pagos a outrem capital e rendimentos.
Paragrafo unico. 0 pagamento, feito
antes de ter ciencia da ai;:ao referida
neste artigo, exonera o devedor, salvo
se se provar que ele tinha conhecimento
do fato.
Capitulo III - Do Tituio a Ordcm
Art. 910. 0 endosso deve ser lan~ado
pelo endossante no verso ou anverso do
pr6prio tftulo.
§ 1• Pode o endossante designar o en-
dossatiirio, e para v.alidade do endosso,
dado no verso do tftulo, e suficiente a
simples assinatura do endossante.
§ 2° A transferencia por endosso com-
pleta-se com a tradi\;iio do tftulo.
177 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
§ 3° Considera-se niio escrito o endosso
cancelado, total ou parcialmente.
Ar.t. 911. Considera-se legftimo pos-
suidor o portador do tftulo aordem com
serie regular e ininterrupta de endossos,
ainda que o ultimo seja em branco.
Paragrafo unico. Aquele que paga o tf-
tulo esta obrigado a verificar a regulari-
dade da serie de endossos, mas nao a
autenticidade das assinaturas.
Art. 912. Considera-se nao escrita no
endosso qualquer condii;:ao a que o su-
bordine o endossante.
Panigrafo unico. E nulo 0 endosso par-
ciaL
Art. 913. 0 endossatiirio de endosso
em branco pode muda-lo para endosso
.em preto, completando-o com o seu
nome ou de terceiro; pode endossar no-
vamente o tftulo, em branco ou em pre-
to; ou pode transferi-lo sem novo en-
dosso.
Art. 914. Ressalvada clausula expressa
em contrario, constante do endosso,
nao responde o endossante pelo cum-
primento da presta{!ao constante do tf-
tulo.
§ I 0 Assumindo responsabilidade pelo
pagamento, o endossante se to ma deve-
dor solidario.
§ 2° Pagando o titulo, tern o endossante
a1;ao de regresso contra os coobrigados
anteriores.
Art. 915. 0 devedor, a!em das excego-
es. fundadas nas relagoes pessoais que
tiver com o portador, s6 poderiopor a
este as exce~oes relativas aforma do tf-
tulo e ao seu conteudo literal, afalsida-
de da pr6pria assinatura, adefeito de ca-
pacidade ou de representai,;ao no mo-
mento da subscrii;:ao, e afalta de requi-
sito necessario ao exercfcio da a~ao.
Art 911-915
§ 3~ An endorsement cancelled in whole or
in part is deemed not to have been written.
Art. 911. The bearer of an instrument with
a regular and uninterrupted series of
endorsements is deemed to be the lawful
possessor, even if the last endorsement is
blank.
Sole paragraph. The person who pays the
instrument is obligated to verify the
regularity of the series of endorsements, but
not the authenticity of the signatures.
Art. 912. Any condition to which the
endorser subjects the endorsement is
deemed not to have been written.
Sole paragraph. A partial endorsement is
null.
Art. 913. The endorsee of a blank
endorsement may complete it with his
name or that of a third party; he may
endorse the instrument again,jn blank or to
a named endorsee; or he may transfer the
instrument without a new endorsement.
Art. 914. Unless the endorsement
expressly states the contrary, the endorser
is not liable for making the payment set out
in the instrument.
§ 1. If he assumes liability for payment, the
endorser becomes a solidary debtor.
§ 2. Having paid the instrument, the
endorser has a right of recourse against the
prior co-obligees.
Art. 915. Aside from exceptions based on
the personal relationship that he has with
the bearer, the debtor may only assert
against the bearer exceptions related to the
form of the instrument, its literal contents,
the falsity of his own signature, a defect in
his capacity or representation at the time of
signature and the absence of a necessary
prerequisite to bring the action.
Art. 916-920 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 916. Exceptions based on the debtor's
relationship with prior bearers may only be
asserted against the bearer if he, on
acquiring the instrument, acted in bad faith.
Art. 917. A provision that constitutes a
mandate, contained in the endorsement,
confers on, the endorsee the exercise of the
rights inherent to the instrument, saving
expressly stated restrictions.
§ 1. The endorsee of a mandate-endorsement
may only endorse the instrument again in the
capacity of procurator, with the same powers
that he received.
§ 2. The efficacy of the mandate-endorsement
is not Jost with the death or supervening
incapacity of the endorser.
§ 3. The debtor may assert against the
endorsee of a mandate-endorsement only
those exceptions that he has against the
endorser.
Art. 918 .. A provision that constitutes a
pledge, contained in the endorsement,
confers on the endorsee the exercise of the
rights inherent to the instrument.
§ 1. The endorsee of a pledge-endorsement
may only endorse the instrument again in
the capaeity of procurator.
§ 2. The debtor may not assert against the
endorsee of a pledge-endorsement the
exceptions that he had against the endorser,
unless the endorsee acted in bad faith.
Art. 919. Acquisition of an instrument to
order by means other than endorsement has
the effect of a civil assignment.
Art, 920. An endorsement given after
maturity produces the same effects as one
given prior to maturity.
178
Art. 916. As exce1roes, fundadas em re-
lai;:ao do devedor eom os portadores
precedentes, somente poderao ser por
ele opostas ao portador, se este, ao ad-
quirir o tftulo, tiver agido de mii-fe.
Art. 917. A chiusula constitutiva de
mandato, lans;ada no endosso, confere
ao endossatiirio o exercfcio dos direitos
inerentes ao titulo, salvo restrii;:ao ex-
pressamente estatufda.
§ 1° 0 endossatiirio de endosso-manda-
to so pode endossar novamente o tftulo
na qualidade de procurador. com os
mesmos poderes que recebeu.
§ 2" Com a morte ou a superveniente in-
capacidade do endossante, nao perde
eficiicia o endosso-mandato.
§ 3° Pode o devedor opor ao endossatii-
rio de endosso-mandato somente·as ex-
ce~iles que river contra o endossante.
Art. 918. A cliiusula constitutiva de pe-
nhor, lan1rada no endosso, confere ao
endossatiirio o exercfcio dos direitos
inerentes ao titulo.
§ 1° 0 endossatiirio de endosso-penhor
s6 pode endossar novamente o tftulo na
qualidade de procurador.
§ 2° Nao pode o devedor opor ao endos-
satiirio de endosso-penhor as exce~oes
que tinha contra o endossante, salvo se
aquele tiver agido de mii-fe.
Art. 919. A aquisis;ao de titulo a ordem,
por meio diverso do endosso, tern efeiro
de cessao civil.
Art. 920. 0 endosso posterior ao venci-
mento produz os mesmos efeitos do an-
terior.
179 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Capitulo IV - Do Titulo Nominativo
Art. 921. Etltulo nominativo o emitido
em favor de pessoa cujo nome conste
no registro do emitente.
Art. 922. Transfere-se o tltulo nomina-
ti vo mediante termo, em registro do
emitente, assinado pelo proprietiirio e
pelo adquirente.
Art. 923. 0 tftulo nominativo tambem
pode ser transferido por endosso que
contenha o nome do endossattirio.
§ l 0 A transferencia mediante endosso
so tern eficiicia perante o emitente, uma
vez feita a competente averbai;ao em
seu registro, podendo o emitente exigir
do endossatiirio que comprove a auten-
ticidade da assinatura do endossante.
§ 2° 0 endossatiirio. legitimado por se-
rie regular e ininterrupta de endossos,
tern o direito de obter a averba9ao no re-
gistro do emitente, comprovada a au-
tenticidade das assinaturas de todos os
endossantes.
§ 3° Caso o tltulo original contenha o
nome do primitivo proprietiirio, tern di-
reito o adquireme a obter do emitente
novo tftulo, em seu nome, devendo a
emissao do novo tftulo constar no regis-
tro do emitente.
Art. 924. Ressalvada proibii;ao legal,
pode o tftulo nominativo ser transfor-
mado em a ordem ou ao portador, ape-
dido do proprietiirio ea sua custa.
Art. 925. Fica desonerado de responsa-
bilidade o emitente que de boa-fe fizer
a transferencia pelos modos indicados
nos artigos antecedentes.
Art. 921-925
Chapter IV - Registered Securities
Art. 921. A registered security is one that is
issued in favor of a person whose name is
contained in the issuer's register.
Art. 922. A registered security is
transferred by means of an entry in the
issuer's register, signed by the owner and
the acquirer.
Art. 923. A registered sec;urity may also be
transferred by endorsement containing the
name of the endorsee on the security
document.
§ 1. Transfer by means of endorsement
shall be effective vis-a-vis the issuer only
after the appropriate entry is made in its
register, and the issuer may require that the
endorsee prove the authenticity of the
endorser's signature.
§ 2. The lawful endorsee under a regular
and uninterrupted series of endorsements
has the right to have the transfer entered in
the issuer's register, upon proof of the
authenticity of the signatures of all the
endorsers.
§ 3. If the original document contains the
name of the original owner, the acquirer has
the right to obtain a new document in his
name from the issuer, and the issuing of the
new document shall be set out in the
issuer's register.
Art. 924. Unless prohibited by law, a
registered security document may be
transformed into a bearer instrument or an
instrument to order, at the request of the
owner and at his expense.
Art. 925. An issuer who in good faith
transfers an instrument in the manner
indicated in the preceding articles is
released from liability.
 Art, 926-930 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 926. Any juridical transaction or
judicial measure involving a registered
security only produces effects against the
issuer and third parties after the proper
entry is made in the issuer's register,
Title IX - Civil
Liability
Chapter I - Obligation
to Indemnify
Art. 927. Anyone who, through an illicit
act (arts. 186 and 187), causes damage to
another is obligated to repair it.
Sole paragraph. The obligation to repair the
damage will exist, regardless of fault, in the
cases specified by law or w.hen the activity
normally carried out by the person who
caused the damage entails, by its nature,
risk to the rights of others.
Art. 928. An incapable person is
responsible for the injury he causes, if the
persons responsible for him are not liable
for the injury or do not have sufficient
means to repair it.
Sole paragraph. The indemnification
contemplflted in this article, which shall be
equitable, shall not take place if it deprives
the incapable person or those who depend
on him of the neces.sities of life.
Art. 929. If the injured person, or, in the
case contemplated in item II of art. 188, the
owner of the thing, is not at fault for the
danger, he shall have the right to
indemnification for the loss that he
suffered.
Art. 930. In the case contemplated in item
II of art. I 88, if the danger occurred by
reason of the fault of a third party, the
person who caused the damage shall have a
right of recourse against the third party, to
recover the amount that he paid in
compensation to the injured party.
180
Art. 926. Qualquer neg6cio ou medida
judicial, que tenha por objem o tftulo,
so produz efeito perante o emitente ou
terceiros, uma vez feita a competente
averba~ao no registro do emitente.
Titulo IX-Da Rcsponsabilidade
Civil
Capitulo I - Da Obriga\;iio de
Indenizar
Art. 927. Aquele que, por ato ilfcito
(arts. I 86 e 187), causardano a outrem,
fica obrigado a reparii-lo.
Paragrafo unico. Haveni obrigai,:iio de
reparar o dm10, independentemente de
culpa, nos casos especificados em lei,
ou quando a atividade normalmente de-
scnvolvida pelo autor dodano implicar,
por sua natureza, risco para os direitos
deoutrem.
Art. 928. 0 incapaz responde pelos
prejufzos que causar, seas pessoas por
ele responsaveis nao tiverem obriga~ao
de faze-Jo OU nao dispuserem de meios
suficientes.
Paragrafo iinico. A indcniza~ao previs-
ta neste artigo, que deveni ser. cqiiitati-
va, nao terii lugar se privar do necessa-
rio o incapaz ou as pessoas que dele de-
pendem.
Art. 929. Se a pessoa lesada, ou o dona
da coisa, no caso do inciso II do art.
188, niio forem culpados do perigo, as-
sistir-lhes-a direito ii indenizar;ao do
prejufzo que sofrerarn;
Art. 930. No caso do inciso II do arr.
188, se o perigo ocorrer par culpa de
terceiro, contra este teni o autor do dano
agao regressiva para haver a importfin-
cia que tiver ressarcido ao lesado.
181 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. A mesma ai;ao com-
petira contra aquele em defesa de quern
se causou o dano (art. 188, inciso I).
Art. 931. Rcssalvados outros casos
previstos em lei especial, os empresa-
rios individuais e as empresas respon-
dem independentemente de culpa pelos
danos causados pelos produtos postos
cm circulagiio.
Art. 932. Sao tambem responsaveis
pela reparagiio civil:
r - os pais, pelos filhos menores que es-
ti verem sob sua autoridade e em sua
companhia;
II - o tutor e o curador, pelos pupilos e
curatelados. que se acharem nas mes-
mas condic;oes;
Il[ - O empregador OU comitente, por
seus empregados. servigais e prepostos.
no exercfcio do trabalho que !hes com-
petir, OU em razfio deJe;
IV - os donas de hoteis, hospedarias,
casas ou estabelecimentos onde se al-
bergue por dinheiro, mesmo para fins
de educai;:ao, pelos seus h6spedes, mo-
radores e educandos;
V - os que gratuitamente houverem par-
ticipado nos produtos do crime, ate a
concorrente quantia.
Art. 933. As pessoas indicadas nos in-
cisos I a V do artigo antecedente, ainda
,que nao haja culpa de sua parte, respon-
derao pelos atos praticados pelos tercei-
ros ali referidos.
Art. 934. Aquele que ressarcir o dano
causado por outrem pode reaver o que
houver pago daquele por quern pagou,
salvo se o causador do dano for de-
scendente seu, absoluta ou relativa-
mente incapaz.
Art. 931-934
Sole paragraph. The same action lies
against the person in whose defense the
damage was caused (art. 188, item I).
Art. 931. Saving other cases provided for in
special legislation, sole proprietors and
companies are liable for the damage caused
by the products put into the market,
regardless of foul t.
Art. 932. The following are also liable for
civil reparation:
I - parents, for ~inor c.hildr~n who ar~
under their authonty and m the1r company,
II - tutors and curators, for their pupils and
wards in the same conditions as those
described in item I above;
III - employers and principals, fo~ their
employees, servants and agents tn the
performance of the work given to them, or
by reason of that work;
IV - owners of hotels, guesthouses, houses
or establishments where lodging is given in
exchange for money, even for educational
purposes, for their guests, lodgers and
students;
V - those who gratuitously shared in the
fruits of a crime, to the extent of their share.
Art. 933. Even if there is no fault on the part
of the persons indicated in items I ~o IV of
the preceding article, they shall be liable for
the acts performed by the third parties
referred to therein.
Art. 934. Anyone who pays compensation
for damage caused by another may recov~r
what he paid from the one for whom he paid
it, unless the person who caused the
damage is one of his descendents, and
suffers from absolute or relative incapacity.
Art. 935~941 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 935. Civil liability is independent
from criminal liability; the existence of the
act and the identity of the perpetrator
cannot be questioned further when those
questions have been decided in the criminal
courts.
Art. 936. The owner, or holder, of an
animal shall repair the damage caused by it,
if he does not prove the fault of the victim
or force majeure.
Art. 937. The owner of a building or
.construction is liable for damage that
results from its ruin, i.f it occurs for lack of
repairs that were manifestly needed.
Art. 938. Anyone who inhabits a building,
or part of it, is liable for the damage arising
from things that fall from it or are thrown
from it to an improper place.
Art. 939. A creditor who makes a demand
against the debtor before the debt matures,
except in those cases permitted by law,
shall be obligated to wait the amount of
time remaining to maturity, to discount the
corresponding interest, even if it has been
stipulated, and to pay double the amount of
the costs.
Art.. 940. Anyone who demands payment
of a debt already paid, in whole or in part,
without excepting the amounts received, or
who asks more than is due, shall be
obligated to pay fo the debtor, in the first
case, twice what he claimed arid, in the
second, the equivalent of what he claimed
from him, unless prescription has occurred.
Art. 941. The penalties provided for in arts.
939 and 940 do not apply when the claimant
withdraws the action before the claim is
contested, reserving to the defendant the
right to have indemnification for any loss
that he proves he has suffered.
182
Art. 935. A responsabilidade civil e in-
dependehte da criminal, nao se poden-
do questionar mais sobre a existencia
do fato, ou sobre quern seja o seu autor,
quando estas questoes se acharem deci-
didas no jufzo criminal.
Art. 936. 0 dono, ou detentor, do ani-
mal ressarcira o dano por este causado,
se nao provar culpa da vftima ou fon,;a
maior.
Art. 937. 0 dono de ediffcio ou cons-
tru~ao responde pelos danos que resul-
tarem de sua rufna, se esta provier de
falta de reparos, cuja necessidade fosse
manifesta.
Art. 938. Aquele que habitar predio, ou
parte dele, responde pelo dano prove-
niente das coisas que dele cafrem ou fo-
rem lan1:adas em lugar indevido.
Art. 939. 0 credor que demandar ode-
vedor antes de vencida a dfvida, fora
dos casos em que a lei o permita, ficara
obrigado a esperar o tempo que faltava
para o vencimento, a descontar os juros
correspondentes, embora estipulados, e
a pagar as custas em dobro.
Art. 940. Aquele que demandar por df-
vida ja paga, no todo ou em parte, sem
ressalvar as quantias recebidas ou pedir
mais do que for devido, ficara obrigado
a pagar ao devedor, no primeiro caso, o
dobro do que houver cobrado e, no se-
gundo, o equivalente do que dele exigir,
salvo se houver prescri~ao.
Art. 94L As penas previstas nos arts.
939 e 940 nao se aplicarao quando o au-
tor desistir da a9ao antes de contestada
a lide, salvo ao reu o direito de haver in-
deniza\;ao por algum prejuizo que pro-
ve ter sofrido.
183 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 942. Os bens do responsavel pela
ofensa ou viola~ao do direito de outrem
ficam sujeitos areparagao do dano cau-
sado; e, sea ofensa tiver mais de um au-
tor, todos responderao solidariamente
pela repara9ao.
Panigrafo unico. Sao solidariamente
responsaveis com os autores os co-au-
tores e as pessoas designadas no art.
932.
Art. 943. 0 direito de exigir repara9ao
e a obriga9ao de prcsta-la transmitem-
se com a heran~a.
Capltulo II - Da Iildenizagao
Art. 944. A indeniza~ao mede-se pela
extensao do dano.
Paragrafo unico. Se houver excessiva
despropon;:ao entre a gravidade da cul-
pa e o dano, podera o juiz reduzir, eqUi-
tativamente, a indeniza~ao.
Art. 945. Se a vftima tiver concorrido
culposamente para o evento danoso, a
sua indeniza1:ao sera fixada tendo-se
em conta a gravidade de sua culpa em
confronto com a do autor do dano.
Art. 946. Se a obriga9ao for indetermi-
nada, e nao houver na lei ou no contrato
disposi~ao fixando a indenizar,:ao devi-
da pelo inadimplente, apurar-se-a o va-
lor das perdas e danos na forma que a lei
processual determinar.
Art. 947. Seo devedor nao puder cum-
prir a presta~ao na especie ajustada,
substituir-se-a pelo seu valor, em moe-
da corrente.
Art. 948. No caso de homicfdio, a inde-
niza9ao consiste, sem excluir outras re-
para~i:ies:
Art. 942-948
Art. 942. The property of the person
responsible for an offense or violation of
another's right is liable for reparation of the
damage caused; if more than one person
committed the offense, all shall be
solidarily liable for reparation.
Sole paragraph. All those who committed
the offense are solidarily liable; the persons
designated in art. 932 are also solidarily
liable with those who committed the
offense.
Art. 943. The right to demand reparation
and the obligation to make it are
transmitted with the inheritance.
Chapter II - Indemnification
Art. 944. Indemnification is measured by
the extent of the damage.
Sole paragraph. If the disproportion between
the seriousness of the fault and the damage is
excessive, the judge may reduce, in an
equitable manner, the indemnification.
Art. 945. If the victim, by his fault,
contributed to the damaging event, the
seriousness of his fault in comparison with
that of the person who caused the damage
shall be taken into account in fixing his
indemnification.
Art. 946. If an obligation is indeterminate,
and neither the law nor the contract
contains a provision fixing the
indemnification owed by the
non-performing party, the amount of losses
and damages shall be ascertained in the
manner determined by procedural law.
Art. 947. If the debtor cannot perform the
obligation in the kind agreed, performance
shall be replaced by its value in lawful
currency.
Art. 948. In the case of homicide,
indemnification consists, without
excluding other reparation, of:
Art. 949-952 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I - payment of expenses incurred in the
victim's treatment, his funeral and the
family's mourning;
II - payment of support to the persons to
whom the deceased owed it, taking into
account the probable duration of the
victim's life.
Art. 949. In the case of injury or other
offense to health, the offender shall
indemnify the offended person for the
expenses of treatment and loss of profit
until the end of convalescence, in addition
to any other loss that the offended person
proves he has suffered.
Art. 950. If a deficiency results from the
offense, by reason of which the offended
person cannot exercise his office or
profession, or which diminishes his
capacity to work, the indemnification shall
include a pension corresponding to the
amount of work for which he has become
incapacitated, or to the loss of capacity that
he has suffered, in addition to the expenses
of treatment and loss of profits until the end
of convalescence.
Sole paragraph. The injured person, if he
prefers, may demand that the
indemnification be assessed and paid in a
lump sum.
Art. 951. The provisions of arts. 948, 949
and 950 apply even in the case of
indemnification owed by one who, in the
exercise of a professional activity, by
negligence, imprudence or lack of skill
causes the death of a patient or aggravates
his ailment, causing him injury or
incapacitating him for work.
Art. 952. In the case of wrongful
possession or disturbance of another's
property, in addition to restitution of the
thing, the indemnification shall co.nsist in
paying the value of deterioration of the
thing and the value owed for loss of profit;
in the absence of the thing, its equivalent
shall be reimbursed to the injured party.
184
I - no pagamento das despesas com o
tratamento da vftima, seu funeral e o
luto da famflia;
II - na prestai;ao de alimentos as pes-
soas a quern o morto os devia, levando-
se em conta a durai;ao provavel da vida
da vftima.
Art. 949. No caso de lesao ou outra
ofensa a saiide, 0 ofensor indenizara 0
ofendido das despesas do tratamento e
dos lucros cessanres ate ao fim da con-
valescenl,!a. alem de algum outro prejuf-
zo que o ofendido prove haver sofrido.
Art. 950. Se da ofensa resultar defeito
pelo qual o ofendido nao possa exercer
o seu offcio ou profissao, ou se !he di-
minua a capacidade de trabalho, a inde-
nizai;ao, alem das despesas do trata-
mento e lucros cessantes ate ao fitn da
convalescem;a, incluira pensao corres-
pondente a importancia do trabalho
para que se inabilitou, ou da deprecia-
i;ao que ele sofreu.
Paragrafo iinico. 0 prejudicado. se pre-
ferir, podera exigir que a indeniza~ao
seja arbitrada e paga de uma s6 vez.
Art. 951. 0 disposto nos arts. 948, 949
e 950 aplica-se ainda no caso de indeni-
zac,:ao devida por aquele que, no exercf-
cio de atividade profissional, por negli-
gencia, imprudencia ou imperfcia, cau-
sar a morte do paciente, agravar-lhe o
ma!, causar-lhe lesao, ou inabilita-lo
para o trabalho.
Art. 952. Havendo usurpai;ao ou esbu-
lho do alheio, alem da restituic,:ao da
coisa, a indeniza9ao consistira em pa-
gar o valor das suas deteriorlll,!oes e o
devido a titulo de lucros cessantes; fal-
tando a coisa, dever-se-a reembolsar o
seu equivalente ao prejudicado:
185 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo iinico. Para se restituir o
equivalente, quando nao exista a pr6-
pria coisa, estimar-se-a ela pelo sen pre-
\;O ordinario e pelo de afeil,!ao, contanto
que este uao se avantaje aquele.
Art. 953. A indeniza{:1io par injiiria, di-
famac,:ao ou caliinia consistira na repa-
rac,:ao do dano quedelas resulte ao ofen-
dido.
Paragrafo iinico. Seo ofendido nao pu-
der provar prejuizo material, cabera ao
juiz fixar, eqUitativamente, o valor da
indenizac,:ao, na conformidade das cir-
cunstancias do caso.
Art. !)54. A indenizac,:ao por ofensa a li-
berdade pessoal consistira no pagamen-
to das perdas e danos que sobrevierem
ao ofendido, e se este nao puder provar
prejufzo. tern aplicai;:ao o disposto no
paragrafo iinico do artigo antecedente.
Paragrafo iinico. Consideram-se ofen-
sivos da liberdade pessoal:
I - o carcere privado;
II - a prislio por queixa ou denuncia fal-
sa e de ma-fe;
III - a prisao ilegal.
TiTULO X - Das Preferencias e
Privilegios Credit6rios
Art. 955. Procede-se adeclarac,:iio de in-
solvencia toda vez que as dividas exce-
dam aimportancia dos hens do devedor.
Art. 956. A discussao entre os credores
pode versar quer sob re a preferencia en-
tre eles disputada, quer sobre a nulida-
de, simula<riio, fraude, ou falsidade das
dfvidas e contratos.
Art. 953-956
Sole paragraph. For restitution of the
equivalent, when the thing itself does not
exist, the thing shall be assessed at its
ordinary price and for its sentimental value,
provided that the latter does not exceed the
former.
Art. 953. Indemnification for libel,
defamation or slander shall consist in
reparation of the damage that results
therefrom to the injured offended party.
Sole paragraph. If the injured party cannot
prove material damage, the judge shall
have the power to fix, in an equitable
manner, the amount of the indemnification,
in conformity with the circumstances of the
case.
Art. 954. Indemnification for an offense to
personal liberty shall consist in the
payment of the losses and damage suffered
by the injured party, and if he cannot prove
loss, the provisions of the sole paragraph of
the preceding article shall apply.
Sole paragraph. The following are
considered to be offenses against personal
liberty:
I - false imprisonment;
II - imprisonment on a complaint or
denunciation that is false or in bad faith;
III - illegal imprisonment.
TITLE X - Creditors' Preferences and
Privileges
Art. 955. Insolvency shall be declared
whenever a debtor's debts exceed the
amount of his property.
Art. 956. Discussion among creditors may
concern either the preference they dispute
or the nullity, simulation, fraud or falsity of
debts and contracts.
Art. 957-964 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 957. If there is no legal entitlement to
preference, creditors shall have equal rights
over the property of their common debtor.
Art. 958. Privileges and real rights confer
legal entitlement to preference.
Art. 959. Hypothecary and privileged
creditors maintain their respective rights:
I - over the amount paid under insurance of
the thing encumbered with the hypothec or
privilege, or over the indemnification
owed, if there is a party responsible for the
loss of or damage to the thing;
II - over the amount of the indemnification,
if the thing subject to the hypothec or
privilege is expropriated.
Art. 960. In the cases referred to in the
preceding article, the debtor of the
insurance ot the indemnification is released
if he pays without opposition by the
hypothecary or privileged creditors.
AJ"t. 961. A real claim has preference over
any type of personal claim; a privileged
personal claim over a simple claim; and a
special privilege over a general privilege.
Art. 962. When two or more creditors of
the same class of special privilege contend
for the same property, and each has the
same entitlement, the product of the sale of
the property shall be shared among them in
proportion to their respective claims, if it is
not enough for full payment of all.
Art. 963. A special privilege encompasses
only the property made subject by express
provision of law to payment of the claim
benefited by the privilege; a general
privilege encompasses all that property not
subject to real claims or special privileges.
Art. 964. The following have a special
privilege:
186
Art. 957. Nao havendo titulo legal a
prefercncia, teriio os credores igual di-
reito sohre os hens do devedor comum.
Art. 958. Os tftulos legais de preferen-
cia si'io os privilegios e os direitos reais.
Art. 959. Conservam seus respectivos
direitos os credores, hipotecarios ou
privilegiados:
I - sobre o prei;:o do seguro da coisa gra-
vada com hipoteca ou privilegio, ou so-
hre a indeniza"iio devida, havendo res-
ponsavel pela perda ou danific~iio da
coisa;
II - sobre o valor da indeniza\:i'iO, sc a
coisa ohrigada a hipoteca ou privilegio
for desnpropriada.
Art. 960. Nos casos a que se refere oar-
tigo antecedente, o devedor do seguro,
ou da indeniza~i'io, exonera-se pagando
sem oposi1;i'io dos credores hipotecarios
ou privilegiados.
Art. 961. 0 credito real prefere ao pes-
soal de qualquer especie; o credito pes-
soal privilegiado, ao simples; e o privi-
legio especial, ao geral.
Art. 962. Quando concorrerem aos
mesmos hens, e por titulo igual, do is ou
mais credores da mesma classe espe-
cialmente privilegiados, havera entre
eles rateio proporcional ao valor dos
respectivos creditos, se 0 produto nao
hastar para o pagamento integral de lo-
dos.
Art. 963. 0 privilegio especial s6 com-
preende os hens sujeitos, por expressa
disposii;:ao de lei, ao pagamento do cre-
dito que ele favorece; e o geral, todos os
he1is ni'io sujeitos a credito real nem a
privilegio especial.
Art 964. Tern privilegio especial:
187 CODIGO CIVIL BIL{NGOE
I - sohre a coisa arrecadnda e 1quidada,
o credor de custas e despesas judiciais
feitas com a arrecada<;iio e liquidm;ao;
II - sohre a coisa salvada, o credor por
despesas de salvamento;
Ill - sohre a coisa heneficiada, o credor
por henfeitorias necessarias OU uteis;
IV - sobre os predios rusticos ou urba-
nos, fahricas, oficinas, ou quaisquer ou-
tras construi;:oes, o credor de mnteriais,
dinheiro, ou servi~os para a suaedifica-
i;:ao, reconstrut;iio, ou melhoramento;
V - sohre os frutos agricolas, o credor
por sementes, instrumentos e servii;:os a
cultura, ou acolheita;
VI - sobre as alfaias e utensilios de uso
domestico, nos predios n1sticos ou ur-
banos, 0 credor de alugueis, quanto as
prestai;:oes do ano corrente e do ante-
rior;
VII - sobre os exemplares da ohra exis-
tente na massa do editor, o autor dela,
ou seus legltimos represe.ntantes, pelo
credito fundado contra aquele no con-
trato·dn edii;;iio;
VIII - sohre o produto da colheita, para
a qua! houver concorrido com o seu tra-
halho, e precipuamente a quaisquer ou-
tros creditos, ainda que reais, o traha-
a
lhador agrfcola, quanto dfvida dos
seus salarios.
Art. 965~ Goza de privilegio geral, na
ordem seguinte, sohre os bens do deve-
dor:
I - o cr~dito por despesa de seu funeral,
feito segundo a condii;:ao do morto e o
costume do lugar;
II - o credito por custas judiciais, ou por
despesas com a arrecada<;:i'io e liquida-
1;iio da massa;
Art. 965
I - over things attached and liquidated, a
creditor for judicial costs and expenses
incmTed in the attachment and liquidation;
II - over things salvaged, a creditor for the
expense of salvaging them;
III - over things improved, a creditor for
necessary or useful improvement<;;
IV - over rural or urban buildings,
factories, workshops or any other
construction, a creditor for materials,
money or services used in their erection,
reconstruction or improvement;
V - over agricultural fruits, a creditor for
seeds, instruments and services used in
cultivation or harvesting;
VI - over furnishings and utensils for
domestic use, in rural or urban buildings, a
creditor for rent, with respect to
installments falling due in the current year
and the year before;
VII - over copies of a work existing in the
mass of a publisher's property, the author
of the work or his lawful representatives,
for claims against the publisher based on
the publication contract;
VIII - over the product of the harvest, to
which he contributed with his labor, and
before any other creditors, even if real, an
agricultural worker, for the amount of
salary owed.
Art. 965. The following enjoy a general
privilege over the debtor's property, in the
order set out below:
I - claims for expenses incurred in the
debtor's funeral, in accordance with the
condition of the deceased and the customs
of the place;
II - claims for judicial costs, or the
expenses incurred in attaching and
liquidating the mass of property;
Art. 966-967 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
HI - claims for expenses incurred in the
mourning of the surviving spouse and
children of the deceased debtor, if the
expenses were moderate;
IV -claims for expenses incurred by reason
of the illness of which the debtor died,
within the six months preceding his death;
V - claims for disbursements necessary to
maintain the deceased debtor and his
family, in the three months prior to his
death;
VI - claims for taxes due to the Public
Treasury, in the current year and in the year
before;
VII - claims for the salaries of employees
in the domestic service of the deceased, in
his last si;i<. months of life;
VIII - other claims having a general
privilege.
Book II- The Law of Enterprises
Title l- Business Proprietors
Chapter I .... Definition and
Registration
Art~ 9.66. Anyone who engages, on a
professional· basis, in organized economic
activity for the production or trade of goods
or services is a business proprietor.
Sole paragraph. A person who exercises an
intellectual profession of a scientific,
literary or artistic nature, even in
conjunction with assistants or
collaborators, is not a business proprietor
unless the exercise of that profession
constitutes an element of a business.
Art. 967. Before commencing business, a
business proprietor must be registered in
the Public Register of Mercantile
Enterprises for the seat of administration of
his enterprise.
188
III -.o credito por despesas com o luto
do cilnjuge sobrevivo e dos filhos do
devedor falecido, se foram moderadas;
IV - o credito por despesas co.ma doen-
i;a de que faleceu o devedor. no semes-
tre anterior asua morte;
V - o credito pelos gastos necesslirios a
manten~a do devedor falecidd e sua fa-
milia, no trimestre anterior ao faleci-
mento;
VI - o credito pelos impastos devidos a
Fazenda Publica, no ano corrente e no
anterior;
Vil- o credito pelos salarios dos empre-
gados do servii;o domestico do deve-
dor, nos seus derradeiros seis meses de
Vida;
VIII - OS demais creditos de privilegio
geral.
Livro II - Do Direito de Empresa
Titulo I - Do Empresario
Capitulo I- Da Caracteriza~iio e da
lnscrii;iio
Art; 966. Considera-se empresiirio quem
exerce profissionalmente atividade eco-
nilmica organizada para a prodw;ao ou a
circulai;:ao de bens ou de servii;os.
Paragrafo unico. Nao se considera em-
preslirio quern exerce profisslio intelec-
tual, de natureza cientifica, literliria ou
artfstica, ainda com o concurso de auxi-
liares ou colaboradores, salvo se o exer-
cfcio da profisslio constituir elemento
deempresa.
Art. 967. E obrigat6ria a inscrii;ao do
empreslirio no Registro Publico de Em-
presas Mercantis da respectiva sede,
antes do infcio de sua atividade.
189 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 968. A inscrii;ao do empresario
far-se-a mediante requerimento que
comenha:
I - o seu nome, nacionatidade, domicf-
lio, estado civil e, se casado, o regime
de bens;
II - a firma, com a respectiva assinatura
aut6grafa;
III - o capital;
IV - o objeto ea sede daempresa.
§ 1° Com as indica~oes estabelecidas
neste artigo, a inscrii;ao sera tomada por
termo.no livro pr6prio do Registro PU-
blico de Empresas Mercantis. e obede-
cerii a m'.imero de ordem contfnuo para
todos os empresarios inscritos.
§ 2° A margem da inscrii;ao, e com as
mesmas formalidades. serao averbadas
quaisquer modificai;oes nela ocorrentes.
Art. 969. 0 empresario que instituir su-
cursal, filial ou agencia, em lugar sujei-
to ajurisdii;ao de outro Registro Publi-
co de Empresas Mercantis, neste deve-
ra tambem inscreve-la, com a.prova da
inscri9ao originaria.
Paragrafo unico. Em qualquer caso, a
.. constituii;ao do estabelecimento secun-
dario devera ser averbada no Registro
Pliblico de Empresas Mercantis dares-
pectiva sede.
Art. 970. A lei assegurara tratamento
favorecido, diferenciado e simplificado
ao empresario rural e ao pequeno em-
presario, quanta a inscri~ao e aos efei-
tos daf decorrentes.
Art. 968-970
Art. 968. Registration of a business
proprietor shall be made by application
containing:
I - the business proprietor's name,
nationality, domicile, civil status and, if
married, the marital property regime;
II - the name under which the business
proprietor will do business, with the
business proprietor's original signature;
Ill - the capital of the enterprise;
IV - the purpose of the enterprise and the
seat of its administration.
§ 1. The business proprietor shall be
registered by entry of the information
established in this article in the book of
business proprietorships kept in the Public
Register of Mercantile Enterprises, in
which all registered business proprietors
shall be numbered sequentially.
§2. Any changes in the registration shall be
annotated in the margin of the entry, with
the same formalities.
Art. 969. A business proprietor who creates
a branch, office or agency in a place under
the jurisdiction of another Public Register
of Mercantile Enterprises shall register the
branch, office or agency in that Register,
with proof of the original registration.
Sole paragraph. In any case, the
constitution of the secondary business
establishment shall also be annotated in the
Public Register of Mercantile Enterprises
of the principal place of business.
Art. 970. The law shall grant favored,
differentiated and simplified treatment to
rural and small business proprietors with
respect to registration and the effects
thereof.
Art. 971-974 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 971. A business proprietor whose
enterprise is principally rural may, Sl.lbject
to the formalities referred to in art. 968,
apply for registration in the Public Register
of Mercantile Enterprises for the seat of
administration of his enterprise and, in that
case, the business proprietor shall, for all
purposes, be treated as a business
proprietor subject to registration.
Chapter Il - Capacity
Art. 972. Any person who has full
enjoyment of civil capacity and is under no
legal impediment tnay do business as a
business proprietor.
Art. 973. A person who is under a legal
impediment to engaging in business shall
be Hable for the obligations he contracts, if
the person nonetheless does so.
Art. 974. A perscm who is legally incapable
may, through a representative o.r wi.th his
legal assistant, continue a business
enterprise carried on by the person while
capable, by his parents, or, where the
business is inherited, by the deceased.
§ 1. The cases provided for in this article
shall be subject to judicial authorization,
after examination of the circumstances,
risks and convenience of continuing the
business enterprise. The authorization may
be revoked by the judge after hearing the
parents, tutors or Iega:l representatives of
the minor or interdicted person, without
prejudice to rights acquired by third parties.
§2. The property that the incapable person
possessed at the time of the succession or
declaration of incapacity shall not be
subject to the risks of the business
enterprise, provided that it does not form
part of the assets of the enterprise, and a
statement to that effect shall be contained in
the order granting the authorization.
190
Art. 971. 0 empresario, cuja atividade
rural constitua sua principal profissao,
pode, observadas as formalidades de
que tratam o art. 968 e seus paragrafos,
requerer inscri1<lio no Registro PU bl ico
de Empresas Mercantis da respectiva
sede, caso em que, depois de inscrito,
ficara equiparado, para todos os cfeitos,
ao empresario sujeito a registro.
Capitulo II- Da Capacidade
Art. 972. Podem exercer a atividade de
empresario os que estiverem em pleno
gozo da capacidade civil e nlio forem
legalmente impedidos.
Art. 973. A pessoa legalmente impedi-
da de exercer atividade pr6pria de em-
presario, se a exercer, respondera pelas
obriga1<6es contrafdas.
Art. 974. Podera o incapaz, por meio de
representante ou devidamente assisti-
do, continuar a empresa antes exercida
por eJe enquanto capaz, por seus·pais OU
pelo autor de herat\1<a.
§ 1° Nos casos deste artigo, precedera
autofiza1<lio judicial, ap6s e~ame das
circunstancias e dos riscos da:l:tppresa,
bem como da conveniencia ettj conti-
nua-la, podendo a autorizar;a0ifr.'" revo-
gada pelo juiz, ouvidos os pailftutores
ou representantes legais do !TfUOr ou
do interdito, sem prejufzo dos~tlireitos
adquiridos por terceiros.
§ 2° Nao ficam sujeitos ao resultado da
empresa os bens que o incapaz ja pos-
suia, ao tempo da sucessao ou da inter-
dir;ao, desde que estranhos ao acervo
daquela, devendo tais fatos constar do
alvara que conceder a autorizai;lio.
191 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 975. Se o representante ou assis-
tente do incapaz for pessoa que, por dis-
posii;lio de lei, nlio puder exercer ativi-
dade de empresario, nomeara, com a
aprova1<lio do juiz, um ou mais geren-
tes.
§ 1° Do mesmo modo sera nomeado ge-
rente em todos os casos em que o juiz
entender ser conveniente.
§ 2° A aprovar;ao do juiz nao exime o
representante ou assistente do men or ou
do interdito da responsabilidade pelos
atos dos gerentes nomeados.
Art. 976. A prova da emancipar;lio e da
autoriza1<ao do incapaz, nos casos do
art. 974, ea de eventual revoga~lio des-
ta, serlio inscritas ou averbadas no Re-
gistro PUblico de Empresas Mercantis.
Paragrafo unico. 0 uso da nova firma
cabenl. conforme o caso, ao gerente; ou
ao representante do incapaz; ou a este,
quando puder ser autorizado.
Art. 977. Faculta-se aos conjuges con-
tratar sociedade, entre si ou com tercei-
ros, desde que n:io tenham casado no
regime da comunhiio universal de bens,
ou no da separa\:lio obrigat6ria.
Art. 978. 0 empresario casado pode,
sem necessidade de outorga conjugal,
qualquer que seja o regime de bens,
alienar os im6veis que integrem o patri-
. monio da empresa ou grava-los de onus
real.
Art. 979. Alem de no Registro Civil,
serlio arquivados e averbados, no Re-
gistro Publico de Empresas Mercantis,
os pactos e declarrn;:oes antenupciais do
empresario, o tftulo de doac;lio, heran~a,
ou legado, de bens clausulados de inco-
municabilidade ou inalienabilidade.
Art. 975-979
Art. 975. If the representative or assistant
of the incapable person is one who by law
cannot engage in business, he shall appoint,
with the approval of the judge, one or more
managers.
§ 1. A manager shall also be appointed in all
those cases in which the judge finds it
convenient.
§2. Approval by the judge does not exclude
the representative or assistant of the minor
or interdicted person. from liability for the
acts of the appointed mangers.
Art. 976. Proof of termination of
incapacity, of authorization, in the cases
provided for in art. 974, and of revocation
of such authorization shall be entered in the
Public Register of Mercantile Enterprises.
Sole paragraph. The manager, the
representative of the incapable person or
the incapable person himself,· if so
authorized, has powers to act in the new
firm name of the business enterprise.
Art. 977. Spouses may enter into contracts
of association between themselves or with
third parties, provided that they are not
married under the regime of total
community of property or of mandatory
separation of property.
Art. 978. A married business proprietor
may, without need for spousal consent and
regardless of the marital property regime,
alienate or encumber real property that
forms part of the patrimony of the
enterprise.
Art. 979. A business proprietor's
prenuptial agreements and declarations,
title to gifts, inheritances and legacies, and
title to property subject to clauses of
inalienability or exclusion from
community of property shall be entered in
the Public Register of Mercantile
Enterprises as well as in the Civil Register.
Art. 980-983 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 980. A judgment that decrees or
homologates the judicial separation of a
business proprietor or the instrument of
reconciliation does not produce effects
against third parties before it has been filed
and entered in the Public Register of
Mercantile Enterprises.
Title II - _Companies
Sole Chapter - General Provisions
Ari. 981. Persons who contract reciprocal
obligations to contribute goods or services
in order to carry on economic activities and
to share among themselves the results·of
such activities enter into a contract of
association.
Soleparagraph. The activities may be
restricted to carrying out one or more
defined transactions.
Art. 982. Except where otherwise
expressly established, a company that has
as its purpose 'activities characteristic of
business proprietors who are subject to
registration (art. 967) is a business
company; all others are simple companies.
Sole paragraph. Regardless of its purpose, a
corporation fs a business company and a
cooperative is a simple company.
Art. 983. A business company shall take
one of the forms governed by arts. 1039 to
1092; a simple company may take one of
the forms of business companies, but if it
does not, it shall be subject to the provisions
specific to general partnerships.
Sole paragraph. The provisions concerning
undeclared partnerships and cooperatives
and those set outin special legislation that
imposes a given form of organization for
certain activities apply notwithstanding art.
983 above.
192
Art. 980. A senten~a que decretar ou
homologar a separa~iio judicial do em-
presario e o ato de reconcilim;ao nao
podem ser opostos a terceiros, antes de
arquivados e averhados no Registro Pli-
hlico de Empresas Mercantis.
Titulo II - Da Sociedade
Capflulo Unico - Disposi~ocs Gcrais
Art. 981. Celehram contrato de socie-
dade as pessoas que reciprocamente se
ohrigam a contrihuir, com hens on ser-
vi~os, para o exercicio de atividade eco-
nomica e a partilha, entre si, dos resul-
tados.
Paragrafo unico. A atividade pode res-
tringir-se a realiza\!iio de um ou mais
neg6cios determinados.
Art. 982. Salvo as exce~ocs expressas,
considera-se empresaria a sociedade
que tern por ohjeto o exercicio de ativi-
dade pr6pria de empresario sujeito a re-
gistro (art. 967); e, simples, as demais.
Paragrafo unico. lndependentemente
de seu ohjeto, considera-se empresaria
a sociedade por ai;:oes; e, simples, a
cooperativa.
Art. 983. A sociedade empresaria deve
constituir-se segundo um dos tipos re-
gulados nos arts. 1.039 a 1.092; a socic-
dade simples pode constituir-se de con~
formidade com um <lesses tipos, e, nao
o fazendo, suhordina-se as normas que
lhe siio pr6prias.
Paragrafo unico. Ressalvam-se as dis-
posii;:oes concernentes a sociedade em
conta de participa9iio e a cooperativa,
hem como as constantes de leis espe-
ciais que, para o exercfcio de certas ati-
vidades, imponham a constitui9iio da
sociedade segundo determinado tipo.
193 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 984. A sociedade que tenha por
ohjeto o exercfcio de atividade pr6pria
de empresario rural e seja constittifda,
ou transformada, de acordo com um
dos tipos de sociedade empresaria,
pode, com as formalidades do art. 968,
requerer inscri~iio no Registro Puhlico
de Empresas Mercantis da sua sede,
caso em que, depois de inscrita, ficara
equiparada, para todos OS efeitos, aSO·
ciedade empresaria.
Paragrafo unico. Emhoraja constituida
a sociedade segundo um daqueles tipos,
o pedido de inscriqao se suhordinara,
no que for aplicavel, as normas que re-
gem a transforma9ao.
Art. 985. A sociedade adquire persona-
lidade juridica com a inscri~ao, nore-
gistro pr6prio e na forma da lei, dos
seus atos constitutivos (arts. 45 e
1.150).
Subtitulo I-Da Sociedade Nao
Personificada
Capftulo I- Da Sociedade em
Com um
Art. 986. Enquanto niio inscritos os
atos constitutivos, reger~se-a a socieda-
de, exceto por a9oes em organizm.;ao,
pelo disposto neste Capftulo, ohserva-
das, suhsidiariamente e no que com ele
forem compatfveis, as normas da socie-
dade simples.
Art. 987. Os s6cios, nas rela\!iies entre
si ou com terceiros, somente por escrito
podem provar a existencia da socieda-
de, mas os terceiros podem prova-Ja de
qualquer modo.
Art. 988. Os hens e dfvidas sociais
constituem patrimiinio especial, do
qua! os s6cios sao titulares em comum.
Art. 984-988
Art. 984. A company that has as its purpose
activities characteristic of a business
proprietor of a rural enterprise and is
constituted as, or transformed into, one of
the forms of business company may,
subject to the formalities established in art.
968, apply for registration in the Public
Register of Mercantile Enterprises for the
seat of its administration and, after
registration, the company shall be treated as
a business company for all purposes.
Sole paragraph. Even where the rural
company has been constituted in the form
of a business company, the application for
registration shall be subject, to the extent
applicable, to the provisions governing
transformation of companies.
Art. 985. A company acquires legal
personality upon registration, in the
appropriate register and in the form
required by law, of its constituting
instrument<; (arts. 45 and 1150).
Subtitle I · Companies without Legal
Personality
Chapter I - Partnership
Art. 986. Until their constituting
instruments are registered, all companies,
with the exception of corporations under
incorporation, are governed by the
provisions of this Chapter, supplemented
by the rules governing general
partnership$, to the extent compatible.
Art. 987. The partners, in their
relationships among themselves or with
third parties, may prove the existence of the
partnership only by written documents, but
third parties may prove it by any means.
Art. 988. The property and debts of a
partnership constitute a special patrimony
owned in common by the partners.
Art. 989-993 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE 194 195 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE Art. 994-997

Art. 989. Obligations arising out of act<; of
management performed by any of the
partners may be satisfied out of the property
of the partnership, unless there is an express
agreement limiting the partners' powers,
which shall be effective against third
parties only if they know or ought to kriow
of the agreement.
Art. 990, All. the partners have solidary,
unlimited liability for the obligations of the
partnership and a partner who contracts on
behalf of the partnership· is excluded from
the benefit of order established in art. 1024.
Chapter II - Undeclared
Partnership
Art. 991. In an undeclared partnership, the
activity that is the purpose of the
partnership is carried on solely by the active
partner, in his own ·name and at his own,
exclusive liability, while the other partners
share in the profits of the activity.
Sole paragraph. The active partner binds
only. himself to third parties; an undeclared
partner binds himself exclusively to the
active partner, under th.e terms of the
partnership agreement. · cial.
Art. 992. The creation of an undeclared
partnership qoes not require any formality
and may be proved by any means permitted
bylaw.
Art. 993. The partnership agreement
proquces effects only among the partners
and registration of the partnership
agreement does not confer legal
personality.
Sole paragraph. Without prejudice to the
undeclared partner's right to inspect the
management of the partnership's business,
an undeclared partner may not take part in
dealings between the active partner and
third parties, on pain of assuming solidary
liability with the active partner for the
ooligations in which the undeclared partner
took part.
Art. 989. Os bens sociais respondem
pelos atos de gestao praticados por
qualquer dos socios, salvo pacto ex-
presso limitativo de poderes, que so-
mente tera eficacia contra o terceiro que
o conhec;:a ou deva conhecer.
Art. 990. Todos os socios respondem
solidariae ilimitadamente pelas obriga-
i;oes sociais, exclufdo do beneficio de
ordem, previsto no art. 1.024, aquele
que contratou pela sociedade.
Capitulo JI - Da Sociedade em
Conta de Participac;:iio
Art. 991. Na sociedade em conta de
participai;ao, a atividade constitutiva do
objeto social e exercida unicamente
pelo socio ostensivo, etn seu nome indi-
vidual e sob sua propriae exclusiva res-
ponsabilidade, participando os demais
dos resultados correspondentes.
Panigrafo unico. Obriga-se perante ter-
ceiro tao-somente o socio ostensivo; e,
exclusivamente.perante este, 0 socio
participante, nos termos do contrato so-
Art. 992. A constitui~ao da sociedade
em conta de participa~ao independe de
qualquer formalidade e pode provar-se
por todos os meios de direito.
Art. 993. 0 contrato social produz efei-
to somente entre os socios, e a eventual
inscric;:ao de seu instrumento em qua!-,
quer registro nao confere personalidade
jurfdica asociedade.
Paragrafo unico. Sem prejufzo do direi-
to de fiscalizar a gestao dos neg6cios
sociais, o socio participante nao pode
tomar parte nas relai;oes do socio osten-
sivo com terceiros, sob pena de respon-
der solidariamente com este pelas obri-
ga~oes em que intervier.
Art. 994. A contribui!.;ao do socio par-
ticipante constitui, com a do socio os-
tensivo, patrimonio especial, objeto da
conta de participai;ao relativa aos nego- active partner, and represents the interest of
cios socials.
§ 1° A especializm;ao patrimonial so-
mente produz efeitos em relac;:ao aos so- special patrimony has effect only among
cios.
§ 2° A falencia do socio ostensivo acar-
reta a dissolm,;ao da sociedade e aliqui- causes the dissolution of the partnership and
dai,;ao da 'respectiva conta, cujo saldo
constituira credito quirografario.
§ 3° Falindo o s6cio participante, o con- §3. Upon bankruptcy of an undeclared
trato social fica sujeito as normas que
regulam os efeitos da falencia nos con-
tratos bilaterais do falido.
Art. 995. Salvo estipula9ao em contra-
rio, 0 socio ostensivo nao pode admitir
novo socio sem o consentimento ex-
presso dos demais.
Art. 996. Aplica-se a sociedade em
conta de participac,:ao, subsidiariamente
e no que com ela for compatfvel, o dis-
posto para a sociedade simples, e a sua
Iiquidar;ao rege-se pelas norrnas relati- undeclared partnerships shall be governed
vas aprestm;ao de contas, na forma da
lei processual.
Paragrafo unico. Havendo mais de um
socio ostensivo, as respectivas contas
serao prestadas e julgadas no mesmo
processo.
Subtitulo II- Da Socicdade
Personificada
Capitulo I - Da Sociedade Simples
Sei;ao I - Do Contrato Social
Art. 997. A sociedade constitui-se me-
diante contrato escrito, particular ou
publico, que, alem de clausulas estipu-
ladas pelas partes, mencionara:
Art. 994. The contribution of property
made by an undeclared partner constitutes a
special patrimony, separate from that of the
the undeclared partner in the business of the
partnership.
§I. The creation of an undeclared partner's
the members of the partnership.
§2. The bankruptcy of the active partner
the liquidation of the partners' interests; any
balance owed shall constitute an ordinary,
unsecured debt against the active partner.
partner, the partnership agreement shall be
subject to the rules that govern the effects of
bankruptcy on bilateral contracts entered
into by the bankrupt undeclared partner.
Art. 995. Unless otherwise stipulated, the
active partner may not admit new partners
to the partnership without the express
consent of the existing partners.
Art. 996. The provisions governing general
partnerships shall apply, to the extent
compatible and in a supplementary manner,
to undeclared partnerships. Liquidation of
by the rules applicable under procedural
law to the rendering of accounts.
Sole paragraph. If there is more than one
active partner, their respective accounts
shall be rendered and judged in the same
proceeding. ·
Subtitle II - Companies with Legal
Personality
Chapter I - Simple Companies
(General Partnership)
Section I - Tbe Partnership Agreement
Art. 997. A general partnership is created by
means of a private or public written
agreement, which, in addition to other
provisions established by the parties, shall
set out:
Art 998 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I - the name, nationality. civil status.
profession and residence of the partners, if
they are natural persons, or their firm or
corporate name, nationality and seat of
administration, if they are legal persons;
II~ the name, purpose and term of duration
11 - denominai;ao, ohjeto, sede e prazo
of the partnership, and the seat of its da sociedade;
administration; · competent authority, if required.
III - the capital of the partnership,
expressed in national currency, which may
include any type of property that can be
valued in money;
IV - the quota of each partner in the capital
of the partnership and the manner of paying
in that quota;
V - a description of the services to be
rendered by any partner whose contribution
to the capital of the partnership consists of
services;
VI - the natural persons who have the
administration of the partnership and their
powers and areas of responsibility;
VII - the share of each partner in profits and
losses;
VIII - whether the partners have, or not,
secondary liability for the obligations of the
partnership.
Sole paragraph. Any separate agreement
that is contrary to the provisions of the
partnership agreement is ineffective
against third parties.
Art. 998. Within the 30 days following the
creation of the partnership, the partnership
shall apply for registration of the
partnership agreement in the Civil Register
of Legal Persons for the place in which the
seat of its administration is located.
196
I - nome, nacionalidade, estado civil,
profissao e residencia dos s6cios, se
pessoas naturais, ea firmaou adenomi-
nai;:ao, nacionalidade e sede dos s6cios,
se jurldicas;
III - capital da sociedade, expresso em
moeda corrente, podendo compreender
qualquer especie de hens, suscetiveis de
avaliai;ao pecuniaria;
IV - a quota de cada s6cio no capital so-
cial, e o modo de realiza-la;
V - as prestai;:oes a que se ohriga o s6-
cio, cuj a contrihuii;:ao consist a em ser-
vi,.os;
VI - as pessoas naturais incumhidas da
administrai;ao da sociedade, e seus po-
deres e atrihuii;oes;
VII - aparticipai;:ao de cada s6cio nos
lucros e nas perdas;
VIlI - Se OS s6cios respondem, OU nao,
sl.ihsidiariamente, pelas ohrigai;:oes so-
ciais.
Paragrafo unico. E ineficaz em rela~iio
a terceiros qualquer pacto separado,
contrario ao disposto no instrumento do
contrato.
Art. 998. Nos trinta dias suhseqUentes
a sua constituii;:iio, a sociedade devera
requerer a inscri~ao do contrato social
no Registro Civil das Pessoas Jurfdicas
do local de sua sede.
197 CODIGO CIVIL BlLlNGUE
§ I0 0 pedido de inscrii;iio seni acompa-
nhado do instrumento autenticado do
contrato, e. se algum socio nele houver
sido representado porprocurador, o da
respectiva procura\:i'iO, hem coma, se
for o caso, da prova de autoriza;;:iio da
autoridade compctente.
§ 2° Com todas as indicavoes enumcra-
das no artigo antecedente, scra a inscri-
i;ao tomada por termo no livro de rcgis-
tro pr6prio, e ohedeceni a numero de
ordem continua para todas as socieda-
des inscritas.
Art. 999. As modificai;;oes do contrato
social, que tenham por objeto materia
indicada no art. 997, dependem do con-
senti mento de todos os s6cios; as de-
mais podem ser decididas por maioria
ahsoluta de votos. se o contrato nao de-
terminar a necessidade de deliheragao
unanime.
Paragrafo unico. Qualquer modificai;:ao
do contrato social sera averhada. cum-
prindo-se as formalidades previstas no
anigo antecedente.
Art. 1.000. A sociedade simples que
instituir sucursal, filial ou agencia na
circunscriviio de outro Registro Civil
das Pessoas Jurfdicas, neste deverli
tamhem inscreve-la, com a prova da
inscri~iio originaria.
Paragrafo unico. Em qualquer caso, a
constituii;ao da sucursal, filial ou agen-
da devera ser averhada no Registro Ci-
vil da respectiva sede.
Art. 999-1.000
§ 1. The application for registration shall be
accompanied by a certified copy of the
instrument of partnership agreement and, if
any partner executed the partnership
agreement through a procurator, a certified
copy of the instrument of procuration,
together with proof of authorization by the
§2. With the information listed in the
preceding article, registration shall be made
by an entry in the book kept for that
purpose, in which all registered
partnerships shall be numbered
sequentially.
Art. 999. Any changes to the partnership
agreement, dealing with matters set out in
art. 997, require the consent of all the
partners; other changes may be decided by
an absolute majority of votes, if the
partnership agreement does not provide
that unanimity is required.
Sole paragraph. Any changes to the
partnership agreement shall be annotated in
the margin of the entry in the register, with
the formalities provided for in the
preceding article.
Art. 1000. A general partnership that
creates a branch, office or agency in a place
within the jurisdiction of another Civil
Register ofLegal Persons shall register the
branch, office or agency in that Register,
with proof of the original registration.
Sole paragraph. In any case, the creation of
the branch, office or agency shall be
annotated in the Civil Register for the seat
of the partnership's administration.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1.001- Ul04
Section II - The Rights and Obligations
of the Partners
Art. 1001. The obligations of the partners
begin immediately upon execution of the
partnership agreement, if no other date is
fixed therein, and end when the liabilities of
the partnership are extinguished upon its
liquidation.
Art. 1002. No partner may be replaced in
the exercise of his powers and duties
without the consent of the other partners,
expressed in an amendment to the
partnership agreement.
Art. 1003. Assignment of a partnership
quota, in whole or in part, without an
amendment to that effect to the partnership
agreement and without the consent of the
other partners sqall not have effect against
the other partners or the partnership.
Sole paragraph. For a period of two years
from the date on which the amendment to
the partnership agreement was annotated in
the Civil Register, the assignor is solidarily
liable with the assignee to the partnership
and third parties for the obligations that the
assignor had as partner.
Art. 1004. The partners are bound to make
the contributions established in the
partnership agreement in the manner and at
the time established therein and any partner
who fails to do so within 30 days from
notice given by the partnership shall be
liable to the partnership for damages
resulting from the delay in making the
contribution.
Sole paragraph. When a contribution is
overdue, a majority of the partners may
decide, in lieu of damages, to expel the
defaulting partner or to reduce his quota to
the value already contributed and, in both
cases, the provisions of art. 1031§1 shall
apply.
198
Sei;iio II - Dos Direitos e Obrigar;oes
dosS6cios
Art. 1.001. As obrigar;oes dos s6cios
comer;am imediatamente com o contra-
to, se este niio fixar outra data, e termi-
nam quando, iiquidada a sociedade, se
extinguirem as responsabilidades so-
ciais.
Art. 1.002. 0 socio niiu pude ser subs-
titufdo no exercfcio das suas fun9oes,
sem o consentimento dos demais s6-
cios, expresso em modificar;iio do con-
trato social.
Art. 1.003. A cessiiu total ou parcial de
quota, sem a correspondente modifica-
irao do. cuntrato social com o consenti-
mento dos demais s6cios, niio tera efi-
cacia quanto a estes e asociedade.
Paragrafo unico. Ate dois anos depois
de averbada a modifica1;ao do contrato,
responde o cedente solidariamente com
o cessiunario, perante a sociedade e ter-
ceiros, pelas obrigai;oes que tinha comu
socio.
Art. 1.004. Os s6cios siio obrigados, na
forma e prazo previstos, as contribui-
<;6es estabelecidas no contrato social, e
aquele que deixar de faze-lo, nus trinta
di as seguintes au danotificar;iio pela su-
ciedade, respondera perante esta pelo
dano emergente da mora.
Paragrafo unico. Verificada a mora, pu-
dera a maioria dos demais s6cios prefe-
rir, a indenizm;ao, a exclusiio do socio
remisso, ou reduzir-lhe aquotaao mon-
tante ja realizadu, aplicando-se, em am-
bos os casos, o disposto no § 1° do art.
1.031.
199 CODIGO CIVIL BILINOUE
Art. 1.005. 0 s6cio que, a tftulo de quo-
ta social, transmitir domfnio, posse ou
uso, responde pela eviq:iio; e pela sol-
vencia do devedor, aquele que transfe-
rir credito.
Art. 1.006. 0 socio, cuja contribuir;iiu
"Cunsista em servi<;os, niiu pude, salvo
cunvenr;iio em contrario, empregar-se
em atividade estranha a sociedadc, sub
pena de ser privado de scus lucros e
dela exclufdo.
Art. 1.007. Salvo cstipula<;1io em con-
trario, 0 socio participa dos lucros e das
perdas, na propon;ao das respectivas
quotas, mas aquele, cuja contribuii;ao
consiste em servi1;os, somente participa
dos lucros na propori;ao da media do
valordas quotas.
Art. 1.008. Enula a estipular;ao cuntra-
tual que exclua qualquer s6ciu de parti-
cipar dos lucros e das perdas.
Art. 1.009. Adistribui\:i'io de lucros ili-
citos ou fictfcios acarreta responsabili-
dade solidaria dos administradores que
a realizarem e dos s6cios que us recebe-
rem, conhecendu ou devendo conhe-
cer-lhes a ilegitimidade.
Se<;ao III - Da Administra1:ao
Art. 1.010; Quando, por lei ou pelo
contrato social, cumpetir aus s6cios de-
cidir sobre os neg6cios da sociedade, as
deliberar;oes serao tomadas pur maioria
de votos, cuntados segundo o valor das
quotas de cada um.
§ I 0 Para formar;iio da maioria absuluta
sao necessarios vutos corrcspundentes
a mais de metade do capital.
Art. 1.005-1.010
Art. 1005. Any partner who contributes
ownership, possession or use of property as
his quota in the capital of the partnership is
liable for the partnership's eviction from
the contributed property; any partner who
contributes the right to debts is liable for the
solvency of the debtor.
Art. 1006. Any partner whose contribution
to the partnership consists in services may
not, unless otherwise expressly stipulated,
engage in activities foreign to those of the
partnership, on pain of being deprived of
his profits and expelled from the
partnership.
Art. 1007. Unless otherwise stipulated,
partners share in the profits and losses of
the partnership in proportion to their
respective quotas, but a partner whose
contribution consists of services shares in
profits only in proportion to the average of
the value of the quotas.
Art. 1008. A contractual provision that
excludes any partner from sharing in profits
and losses is null.
Art. 1009. Administrators who distribute
illicit or fictitious profits, and partners who
received such profits and who·knew or
ought to have known of their illegitimate
nature, are solidarily liable therefor.
Section II - Administration
Art. 1010. Where by law or under the
partnership agreement the.partners have the
power to adopt resolutions concerning the
business of the partnership, their decisions
shall be made by majority of votes,
weighted according to the value of the
quotas of each partner.
§ 1. An absolute majority is formed by votes
corresponding to more than one half of the
capital of the partnership.
Art. 1.001-1.013 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. In the event of a tie, the decision of the
greater number of partners shall prevail. If
the tie persists, a judge shall decide.
§3. Any partner who, having a conflict of
interests with the partnership, participates
in a decision that is adopted because of his
vote is liable for any losses and damage.
Art. 1001. An administrator of the
partnership shall use, in the exercise of his
office, the care and diligence that any active
and honest man would use in managing his
own affairs.
§1. Persons under impediment imposed by
special legislation, persons sentenced to
penalties that prohibit them from holding
public office, even temporarily, and
persons adjudged guilty of bankruptcy
crimes, abuse of public office, subomment,
bribery, solicitation of bribes, fraud in
public office, crimes against the economy,
crimes against the national financial
system, crimes against competition,
consumer crimes, crimes against public
faith or crimes against property may not be
administrators of the partnership while the
sentence or judgment has effect.
§2. To the extent applicable, the provisions
governing mandate shall apply to the
activities of administrators of partnerships.
Art. 1012. An administrator who is
appointed.under a separate instrument shall
annotate that instrument in the margin of
the registration of the partnership and he
shall be personally and solidarity liable
with the partnership for any acts performed
prior to such annotation.
Art. 1013. Where the partnership
agreement is silent, each of the partners has
full powers to manage the partnership.
200
§ 2° Prevalece a decisao sufragada por
maior mimero de s6cios no caso de ern-
pate, e, se este persistir, decidira o juiz.
§ 3° Responde por perdas e danos o so-
cio quc, tendo em algurna operai;,:ao in-
teresse contnirio ao da sociedade, parti-
cipar da delibera1;ao que a aprove gra-
1;as a seu voto.
Art. 1.011. 0 administrador da socie-
dade devera ter, no exercicio de suas
fun1;oes, o cuidado e a diligencia que
todo homem ativo e probo costuma em-
pregar na administrar;:ao de seus pr6-
prios neg6cios.
0
§ I Nao podem ser adrninistradores,
alem das pessoas irnpedidas por lei es-
pecial, os condenados a pena que vede,
ainda que ternporariamente., o acesso a
cargos publicos; ou por crime falimen-
tar, de prevaricar;:iio, peita ou subomo,
concussao, pcculato; ou contra a econo-
mia popular, contra o sistcma financei-
ro nacional, contra as normas de defesa
da concorrencia, contra as rcla1roes de
consumo, a re piiblica ou a propriedade,
enquanto perdurarem os efeitos da con-
dena1;iio.
§ 2° Aplicam-se a atividade dos admi-
nistradores. no que couber, as disposi-
r;:oes concementes ao mandato.
Art. 1.012. 0 adrninistrador, nomeado
por instrurnento em separado, deve
averba-lo a margern da inscri~ao da so-
ciedade, e, pelos atos que praticar. antes
de requercr a averba~ao, responde pes-
soal e solidariamente com a sociedade.
Art. 1.013. A administrar;:iio da socieda-
de, nada dispondo o contrato social, com-
pete separadamente a cada um dos s6cios.
201 CODlGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
§ 1° Se a administra~ao competir sepa-
radamente a varios administradores,
cada um pode impugnar opera\'ao pre-
tendida por outro, cabendo a decisao
aos .s6cios, por rnaioria de votos.
§ 2° Responde por perdas e dm1os pe-
rante a sociedadc o administrador que
realizar opera~oes, sabendo ou deven-
do saber que estava agindo em desacor-
do com a rnaioria.
Art. 1.014. Nos atos de competencia
conjunta de varios administradores,
torna-se necessario o concurso de to-
dos, salvo nos casos urgentes, em que a
omissao ou retardo das providencias
possa ocasionar dano irrepanivel ou
grave.
Art. 1.015. No silencio do contrato, os
administradores podem praticar todos
OS atos pertinentes a gestiio da socieda-
de; nao constituindo objeto social, a
onera9ao ou a venda de hens im6veis
depende do que a maioria dos s6cios
decid.ir.
Paragrafo iinico. 0 excesso por parte
dos administradores somente pode ser
oposto a terceiros se ocorrer pelo me-
nos uma das seguintes hip6teses:
I - se a limitar;:ao de poderes estiver ins-
crita ou averbada no registro pr6prio da
sociedade;
II - provandocse que era.conhecida do
terceiro;
III - tratando-se de opera\;'.iiO evidente-
mcnte estranha aos neg6cios da socie-
dade.
Art.1.016. Os administradores respon-
dem solidariarrtente perante a socieda-
de c os terceiros prejudicados, por cul-
pa no desempenho de suas furn;oes.
Art. 1.014-1.016
§ 1. If several administrators each have
powers of administration over the
partnership, any of them may contest a
transaction proposed by another, in which
case the partners shall decide by majority
vote.
§2. Any administrator who carries out
transactions and who knows or ought to
know that he is acting against the majority
is liable for any losses and damage to the
partnership.
Art. 1014. Where several administrators
have joint powers, they must act in concert
except in urgent cases where an omission or
delay in acting would cause serious or
irreparable damage.
Art. 1015. Where the partnership
agreement is silent, the administrators may
perform all acts relevant to the
management of the partnership; the
encumbrance or sale of real property
depends on the decision of a majority of the
partners, unless that is the business of the
partnership.
Sole paragraph. Acts performed by an
administrator in excess of his powers bind
the partnership vis-a-vis third parties
unless:
I - the limitation of powers was entered or
annotated in the registration of the
partnership;
II - it is proved that the third party knew of
the limitation; or
II - the transaction was obviously foreign to
the business of the partnership.
Art. 1016. The administrators are
solidarily liable to the partnership and to
injured third parties for fault in the exercise
of their powers and duties.
Art. 1.017-1.021 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1017. Any administrator who, without
the written consent of the partners, uses
rights or property of the partnership to his
own advantage or to that of third parties,
shall restitute such rights and property to
the partnership, or pay the equivalent, with
all profits derived therefrom and, if loss
occurs, he shall be liable therefor.
Sole paragraph. Any administrator who,
having a conflict of interests with the
partnership, takes part in a decision relating
to that interest shall be subject to sanction.
Art. 1018. An administrator is prohibited
from causing another to replace him in his
powers and duties, although he may, within
the limits of his powers, constitute
mandataries to act on behalf of the
partnership in acts and transactions
specified in the. instrument of mandate.
Art. 1019. The powers of a partner who is
invested in the administration of the
partnership by express provision of the
partnership agreement are irrevocable
except for just cause, as declared by a judge
upon application by any of the partners.
Sole paragraph. Powers conferred upon a
partner by separate instrument or upon
someone other than a partrier are revocable
at any time.
Art. 1020. The administrators shall render
detaiied account of their administration to
the partners and shall submit to the partners
annually an inventory. balance sheet and
profit and loss statement.
Art. 1021. Unless a specific time is
stipulated, any partner may at any time
examine the books and documents of the
partnership, the s.tate of its cash and
cash-equivalent funds, and its investment
portfolio.
202
Art. 1.017. 0 administrador que, sem
consentimento escrito dos s6cios, apli-
car creditos ou bens sociais em proveito
proprio ou de terceiros, tera de restitu{-
los asociedade, OU pagar 0 equivalente,
com todos os lucros resultantes, e, se
houver prcjufzo, por ele tambem res-
pondera.
Paragrafo unico. Fica sujeito as san~oes
o administrador que, tendo em qualquer
opera~ao interesse contrario ao da so-
ciedade, tome parte na correspondente
deliberai;ao.
Art. 1.018. Ao administrador e vedado
fazer-se substituir no exercfcio de suas
fuh\:5es, sendo-lhe facultado, nos limi-
tes de seus poderes, constituir mandata-
rios da sociedade, especificados no ins-
trumento os atos e operar;aes que pode-
riio praticar.
Art.1.019. Sao irrevogaveis os poderes
do socio investido na administrar;ao por
clausula expressa do contrato social,
salvo justa causa, reconhecida judicial-
mente, a pedido de qualquer dos s6cios.
Paragrafo unico. Sao revogaveis, a
qualquer tempo, os poderes confericlos ,
a socio por ato separado, ou a quern nao
sejasocio.
Art. 1.020. Os administradores siio
ohrigados a prestar aos socios contas
justificadas de sua administra\!iio, e
apresentar-lhes o inventario anualmen-
te, hem como o balanr;o patrimonial e o
de resultado economico.
Art. 1.021. Salvo estipular;ao que de-
termine epoca propria, 0 socio pode, a
qualquer tempo, examinar os livros e
documentos, e o estaclo da caixa e da
carteira da sociedade.
203 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Ser;ao IV - Das Rela\:oes com
Terceiros
Art. 1.022. A sociedade adquire direi-
tos, assume obrigar;oes e procede judi-
cialmente, por meio de administradores
com poderes especiais. ou, niio os ha-
vendo, por interrneclio de qualquer ad-
ministrador.
Art.1.023. Se OS hens da socieclade nao
lhe cobrirem as dfvidas, respondem os
s6cios pelo saldo, na propors;iio em que
participem das perdas sociais, salvo
clausula de responsabilidade solidaria.
Art. 1.024. Os hens particulares dos s6-
cios nao podem ser executados por df-
vidas da sociedade, senao depois de
executados ns hens sociais.
Art.1.025. 0 socio, admitido em socie-
dade jaconstitufda, nao se exime clas di-
vidas sociais anteriores aadmissao.
Art. 1.026. 0 credor particular de socio
pode, na insuficiencia de outros bens do
devedor, fazer recair a execu9ao sabre o
que a este couber nos lucros da sociedade,
ou na parte que lhe tocar em liquida1;1io,
Paragrafo linico. Se a sociedade niio es-
tiver dissolvida, pode o credor requerer
a liquicla11ao da quota do .devedor, cujo
valor, apura.do na forma do art. 1.031,
sera depositado em dinheiro, no juizo
da execu~ao. ate noventa dias ap6s
aquela liquidai;ao.
Art.1.027. Os herdeiros do conjuge de
socio, ou o conjuge do que se separou
judicialmente, nao podem exigir desde
logo a parte que !hes couber na quota
social, mas concorrer adivisao peri6di-
ca dos lucros, ate que se liquide a socie-
dade.
Art. 1.022-1.027
Section IV - Relations with Third
Parties
Art. 1022. A partnership acts through
administrators with special powers or, if it
has none, through any administrator, in
acquiring rights, assuming obligations and
in judicial proceedings.
Art. to23. If the property of the partnership
is not sufficient to cover its debts, the
partners shall be liable for the balance,
according to their share in the losses of the
partnership, unless the partnership
agreement stipulates solidary liability.
Art. 1024. The separate property of the
partners is not subject to execution for the
debts of the partnership until the property of
the partnership has been executed.
Art.1025. A partner admitted to an existing
partnership is not excluded from liability
for debt<; of the partnership incurred prior to
admission.
Art. 1026. A creditor of a partner may, in
the event that the other property of the
partner is insufficient, cause the execution
to fall upon the partner's share in the profits
of the partnership or upon his interest upon
liquidation of the partnership.
Sole paragraph. If the partnership is not
dissolved, the creditor may require
liquidation of the debtor's quota in the
partnership. The value of that quota,
determined in accordance with art. 1031,
shall be deposited in money in the court of
the execution, within ninety days following
the liquidation.
Art. 1027. The heirs of a partner's spouse
and a spouse from whom a partner is
judicially separated may not immediately
demand their part of the partner's quota in
the partnership, but they may participate in
periodic distribution of profits, until such
time as the partnership is dissolved.
Art. l.028-1.030 BILINGUAL CIVIL .CODE
Section V - Dissociation from the
Partnership
Art. 1028. A partner's quota in the
partnership shall be liquidated upon his
death unless:
I - the partnership agreement provides
otherwise;
II - the remaining partners elect to .dissolve
the partnership;
III - the deceased partner is replaced, by
agreement with the heirs.
Art. 1029. In addition to the cases provided
for by law or in the partnership agreement,
any partner may dissociate from the
partnership by notice given to the
remaining partners at least 60 days in
advance, if the partnership is for an
undefined term, or by proof, in judicial
proceedings, of just cause for dissociation,
if the partnership is for a defined term.
Sole paragraph. The remaining partners
may elect to dissolve the partnership within
the 30 days following the partner's notice
of dissociation.
Art. 1030. Subject to the provisions of art.
1004, a partner may be expelled from the
partnership at the initiative of a majority of
the remaining partners for serious fault in
the performance of the partner's
obligations or because of supervening
incapacity of the partner.
Sole paragraph. A partner who is declared
bankrupt or whose quota in the partnership
has been liquidated under the terms of the
sole paragraph of art. 1026 shall, by
operation of Jaw, be expelled from the
partnership.
204
Sei;iio V - Da Resolm,;iio da
Sociedade em Relm;iio a um S6cio
Art. 1.028. No caso de morte de socio.
liquidar-se-ii sua quota, salvo:
I - se o contrato dispuser diferentemen-
te;
II - se os socios remanescentes optarem
pela dissolu"iio da sociedade;
III - se, por acordo com os herdeiros, re-
gular-Se a substituiirao do socio falecido.
Art. 1.029. Alem dos casos previstos
na lei ou no contrato, qualquer socio
pode retirar-se da sociedade; se de pra-
zo indeterminado, mediante notifica-
\:iiO aos demais s6cios, com anteceden-
cia minima de sessenta dias; se de prazo
determinado, provando judicialmente
justa causa.
Paragrafo unico. Nos trinta dias subse-
qUentes a notifica\!iiO, podem OS demais
socios optar pela dissolu"iio da socieda-
de.
Art. 1.030. Ressalvado o disposto no
art. 1.004 e seu pariigrafo unico, pode o
socio ser exclufdo judicialmente, me-
diante iniciativa da maioria dos demais
socios, por falta grave no cumprimento
de suas obriga\:iles, ou, ainda, por inca-
pacidade superveniente.
Paragrafo unico. Sera de pleno direito
exclufdo da sociedade 0 socio declara-
do falido, ou aquele cuja quota tenha
sido liquidada nos termos do paragrafo
unico do art. 1.026.
205 CODIGOCIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.031. Nos casos em que a socie-
dade se resolver em rela\:iio a um socio,
o valor da sua quota, considerada pelo
montante efetivamente realizado, liqui-
dar-se-a, salvo disposii;iio contratual
em contriirio, com base na situm;iio pa-
trimonial da sociedade, a data da reso-
lm;iio, verificada em balam;;o especial-
mente Jevantado.
§ l 0 O capital social sofomi a corres-
pondente redu\!iio, salvo se os demais
s6cios suprirem o valor da quota.
§ 2° A quota liquidada sera paga em di-
nheiro, no prazo de noventa dias. a par-
tir da liquidm;ao, salvo acordo, ou esti-
pulaqiio contratual em contriirio.
Art. 1.032. A retirada, exclusiio ou
morte do socio, nao o exime, ou a seus
herdeiros, da responsabilidade pelas
obriga~oes sociais anteriores, ate dois
anos apos averbada a resolui;:iio da so-
ciedade; nem nos dois primeiros casos,
pelas posteriores e em igual prazo, en-
quanto niio se requerer a averba~iio.
Sei;Jio VI- Da Dissolu~iio
Art. 1.033. Dissolve-Se a sociedade
quando ocorrer:
I - o vencimento do prazo de dura9iio,
salvo se, vencido este e sem oposi\:iio
de socio, niio entrar a sociedade em li-
quidaqiio, caso em que se prorrogara
por tempo indeterminado;
Art. 1.031-1.033
Art. 1031. In the event a partnership is
terminated with respect to a partner, the
value of the partner's quota, determined by
the contribution effectively paid in by the
partner, shall be liquidated on the basis of
the net worth of the partnership on the date
of death, dissociation or expulsion, as the
case may be, as shown on a balance sheet
especially drawn up for that purpose, unless
the partnership agreement provides
otherwise.
§ l. The capital of the partnership shall be
reduced accordingly, unless the remaining
partners pay in the value of the former
partner's quota.
§2. The liquidated quota shall be paid in
cash within 90 days from the date of
liquidation unless the partners and the
former partner otherwise agree or the
partnership agreement otherwise provides.
Art. 1032. A dissociated or expelled
partner and the heirs of a deceased partner
remain liable for obligations incurred by
the partnership prior to the termination of
the partnership with respect to former
partner, for a period of two years from the
date on which the partial termination of the
partnership is registered. They also are
liable for partnership obligations, for a like
period, incurred before application to
register the partial termination is made.
Section VI - Dissolution
Art. 1033. A partnership is dissolved upon
the occurrence of any of the following
events:
I - expiry of the term of duration of the
partnership unless, after expiry and without
opposition by any partner, the partnership
does not enter into liquidation, in which
case the partnership continues for an
undefined term;
Art. 1.034- 1.037 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - unanimpus decision of the partners to
dissolve the partnership;
III - in a partnership for an undefined term,
a decision by an absolute majority of the
partners to dissolve the partnership;
IV - the existence of only one partner, if not
remedied within a period of 180 days;
V - extinction, in the cases provided for by
law, of the partnership's authorization to
operate.
Art. 1034. A partnership may be dissolved
by order of the court, at the request of any
of the partners if:
I - the formation of the partnership is
annulled;
II - the purpose of the partnership is
exhausted or in:ipossible to perform.
Art.1035. The partnership agreement may
provide for other causes of dissolution,
which shall be determined by the court if
contested.
Art. 1036. Upon dissolution, the
administrators of the partnership shall
immediately appoint a liquidator and shall
restrict their management to business that
cannot be deferred. The administrators are
prohibited from engaging in new business,
for which they shall have solidary and
unlimited liability.
Sole paragraph. Where the partnership is
dissolved by operation of law, any partner
may immediately request judicial
liquidation of the partnership.
Art. 1037. In the event provided for in art.
1033(V), the Public Ministry, immediately
upon notice of the event by the competent
authority, shall commence an action for the
judicial liquidation of the partnership, ifthe
administrators have not done so in the 30
days following loss of authorization or if no
partner has exercised the right conferred in
the sole paragraph of the preceding article.
206
II - o consenso uniinime dos s6cios;
III - a delibera\:lio dos s6cios, par maio-
ria absoluta, na sociedade de prazo in-
determinado;
IV - a faltade pluralidade de s6cios, nao
reconstitufda no prazo de cento e oitcn-
ta dias;
V - a extini;:ao, na forma da lei, de auto-
rizagao para funcionar.
Art. 1.034. A sociedade pode ser dis-
solvida judicialmente, a requerimcnto
de qualquer dos s6cios, quando:
I - anulada a sua constituii;:ao;
II - exaurido o fim social, ou verificada
a sua inexeqiiibilidade.
Art. 1.035. 0 contrato pode prever ou-
tras causas de dissolu\:ao, a serem veri-
ficadas judicialmente quando contes-
tadas.
Art. 1.036. Ocorrida a dissoluqao,
cmrtpre aos administradores providen-
ciar imediatamerite a investidura do li-
quidante, e restringir a gestao pr6pria
aos neg6cids inadiaveis, vedadas novas
opera\:i'ies, pelas quais responderao so-
lidaria e ilimitadamente.
Paragrafo unico. Dissolvida de pleno
direito a sociedade, pode o socio reque-
rer, desde logo, a liquidai;:ao judicial.
Art. 1.037. Ocorrendo a hip6tese pre-
vista no inciso V do art. 1.033, o Minis-
terio Publico, tao logo !he comunique a
autoridade competente, promovera a li-
quida~ao judicial da sociedade, se os
administradores nao o tiverem feito nos
a
trinta dias seguintes perda da autori-
za~ao, ou se o socio nao houver exerci-
do a faculdade assegurada no paragrafo
unico do artigo antecedente.
207 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. Caso o Ministerio Pu-
blico nao promova a liquidaqao judicial
da sociedade nos quinze dias subse-
qiientes ao recebimento da comunica-
i,;iio, a autoridade competente para con-
ceder a autorizar;ao nomeara interven-
tor com poderes para requerer a medida
e administrar a sociedade ate que seja
nomcado o liquidante.
Art.1.038. Se niio estiver designado no
contrato social, o liquidante sera eleito
por delibera1;ao dos s6cios, podendo a
a
escolha recair em pessoa estranha so-
ciedade.
§ I 0 O liquidante pode ser destitufdo, a
todotempo:
I - se eleito pela forma previstaneste ar-
tigo, mediante deliberar;:iio dos s6cios;
II - em qualquer caso, par viajudicial. a
requerimento de um ou mais s6cios,
ocorrendo justa causa.
§ 2° A liquidai;;ao da sociedade se pro-
cessa de conformidade com o disposto
no Capftulo IX, deste Subtftulo.
Capitulo II - Da Sociedade em
Nome Coletivo
Art.1.039. Somente pessoas ffsicas po-
dem tomar parte na sociedade em name
coletivo, respondendo todos os s6cios,
solidaria e ilimitadamente, pelas obri-
gai,:iies sociais.
Paragrafo unico. Sem prejufzo da res-
ponsabilidade perante terceiros, podem
os s6cios, no ato constitutive, ou par
uniinime conveni;:ao posterior, limitar
entre si a responsabilidade de cada um.
Art.1.040. A sociedade em name cole-
tivo se rege pelas normas deste Capftu-
lo e, no que seja omisso, pelas do Capf-
tulo antecedente.
Art. 1.038-1.040
Sole paragraph. If the Public Ministry does
not commence an action for the judicial
liquidation for the partnership within the 15
days following receipt of the notice, the
authority responsible for granting the
authorization may appoint an intervenor
with powers to apply for liquidation of the
partnership and to manage its business until
a liquidator is appointed.
Art. 1038. If a liquidator is not designated
in the partnership agreement, the liquidator
shall be elected by the partners and may be
a person foreign to the partnership.
§ 1. The liquidator may be removed at any
time:
I - by resolution adopted by the partners, if
the liquidator was elected by the partners in
the manner provided for in this article;
II - by judicial decision, for just cause, at
the request of any of the partners.
§2. The liquidation of the partnership shall
be carried out in accordance with the
provisions of Chapter IX of this Subtitle.
Chapter II - Partnership under a Firm
Name
Art. 1039. Only natural persons may be
part of a partnership under a firm name.
Each of the partners has solidary and
unlimited liability for the obligations of the
partnership.
Sole paragraph. Without prejudice to their
liability to third parties, the partners may, at
the time of formation of the partnership or
by later unanimous agreement, limit, as
between themselves, the liability of each
partner.
Art. 1040. Partnerships under a firm name
are governed by the provisions of this
Chapter and, where this Chapter is silent,
by the provisions of the preceding Chapter.
Art. l.041•1.045 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1041. The partnership agreement must
state, in addition to the information set out
in art. 997, the firm name of the partnership.
Art. 1042. The partnership shall be
managed exclusively by the partners and
only those partners who have been· given
powers to act in the name of the partnership
may do so, within the limits established by
the partnership agreement.
Art. 1043. A private creditor of a partner
may not cause liquidation of the partner's
quota before dissolution of the partnership.
Sole paragraph. The creditor may cause
liquidation of the partner's quota when:
I - the term of duration of the partnership
has been tacitly extended;
II - the term of duration of the partnership
has been extended by agreement and the
court has granted the creditor's opposition
to the extension, which must be filed within
90 days of the date on which the instrument
extending the term of duration was
registered.
Art. 1044. The partnership shall be
dissolved by operation of law upon
occurrence of any of the events set out in
art. 1033 and, if t.he partnership is a
bus.iness partnership, upon decree of
bankruptcy.
Chapter III - Limited Partnership
Art. 1045. A limited partnership is formed
of two categories of partners: active
partners, who are natural persons and have
solidary and unlimited liability for the
obligations of the partnership, and limited
partners, whose liability is limited to the
value of their partnership quota.
Sole paragraph. The partnership agreement
must identify the active and limited
partners.
208
Art.1.041. 0 contrato deve mencionar,
alem das indicai;:oes refcridas no art.
997, a firma social.
Art. 1.042. A administra9ao da socie·
dade compete exclusivamente a s6cios.
sendo o uso da firma. nos limites do
contrato, privativo dos que tenham os
necessarios poderes.
Art.1.043. O erector particular de socio
nao pode, antes de dissolver-sea socie-
dade, pretender a liquida\:lIO da quota
do devedor.
Paragrafo unico. Podera faze·lo quan·
do:
I · a sociedade houver sido prorrogada
tacitamente;
II - tendo ocorrido prorroga1rao contra-
tual, for acolhida judicialmente oposi·
1rao do erector, levantada no prazo de
noventa dias, contado da publicai;:ao do
ato dilatorio.
Art. 1.044. A sociedade se dissolve de
pleno direito por qualquer das causas
enumeradas no art. 1.033 e, se empresa-
ria, tambem pela declarar;ao da falen-
cia.
Capitulo III - Da Sociedade em
Comandita Simples
Art. 1.045. Na sociedade em comandi-
ta simples tomam parte s6cios de duas
categorias: os comanditados, pessoas
ffsicas, responsaveis solidaria e ilimita-
damente pelas obriga\:oes sociais; e os
comanditarios, obrigados somente pelo
valor de sua quota.
Paragrafo unico. 0 contrato deve dis-
criminar os comanditados e os coman-
ditarios.
209 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
Art.1.046. Aplicam-se asociedade em
comandita simples as normas da socie-
dade em nome coletivo, no que forem
compatfveis com as deste Capftulo.
Paragrafo unico. Aos comanditados ca-
bem os mesmos direitos e obriga1;oes
dos s6cios da sociedade em name cole·
tivo.
Art. 1.047. Sem prejufzo da faculdade
de participar das deliberm;oes da socie-
dade e de lhe fiscalizar as operac;oes,
nao pode o comanditario praticar qual-
quer ato de gestao, nem ter o nome na
firma social, sob pena de ficar sujeito as
responsabilidades de socio comandi-
tado. ·
Paragrafo unico. Pode o comanditario
ser constitufdo procurador da socieda-
de, para negocio determinado e com
poderes especiais.
Art. 1.048. Somente apos averbada a
modifica9iio do contrato, produz efelto,
quanta a terceiros, a diminuir;ao da
quota do comanditario, em conseqtien-
cia de ter sido reduzido o capital social,
sempre sem prejufzo dos credores pree·
xistentes.
Art. 1.049. 0 socio comanditario nao e
obrigado a reposi9ao de Jucros recebi-
dos de boa-fee de acordo com o balan-
1ro.
Paragrafo unico. Diminuido o capital
social por perdas supervenientes, nao
pode o comanditario receber quaisquer
Jucros, antes de reintegrado aquele.
Art. 1.050. No caso de morte de socio
comanditario, a sociedade, salvo dispo-
si9ao do contrato, continuara com os
seus sucessores, que designarao quern
os represente.
Art. l.046-1.050
Art. 1046. To the extent compatible with
this Chapter, the provisions applicable to
partnerships under a firm name. shall also
apply to limited partnerships.
Sole paragraph. Active partners have the
same rights and obligations as the partners
of a partnership under a firm name.
Art. 1047. Without prejudice to a limited
partner's right to participate in the
decisions of the partnership and to inspect
its business, a limited partner may not
perform any management act or have his
name appear in the firm name of the
partnership, on pain of assuming the
liability of an active partner.
Sole paragraph. A limited partner may be
given special powers of attorney to act on
behalf of the partnership in a specific
transaction.
Art. 1048. The reduction of a limited
partner's quota in the partnership, as a
consequence of a reduction in the capital of
the partnership, has effect against third
parties only after the amendment to the
partnership agreement has been registered,
and always without prejudice to existing
creditors.
Art.1049. A limited partner is not required
to repay profits received in good faith and
in accordance with the balance sheet.
Sole paragraph. Where the capital of the
partnership is reduced by supervening
losses, a limited partner may not receive
any profits until the capital is restored.
Art. 1050. Unless the partnership
agreement provides otherwise, in the event
of the death of a limited partner, the
partnership shall continue with the
successors of the deceased and the
successors shall appoint a representative.
Art. 1.051-1.055 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1051. The partnership is dissolved by
operation of law:
I - upon any of the events provided for in
art. 1044;
II - when the absence of one category of
partner persists for more than 180 days.
Sole paragraph. In the absence of active
partners, the limited partners may appoint a
provisional administrator, who shall
manage the business of the partnership
during the period referred to in item II
above, but without becoming a partner.
Chapter IV - Limited Liability
Partnership
Section I - Preliminary Provisions
Art.1052. In a limited liability partnership,
the liability of each partner is limited to the
value of his quotas, but all partners are
solidarily liable for the paying-in of the
capital of the partnership.
Art. 1053'. Limited liability partnerships
are governed by the rules applicable to
general partnerships, where this Chapter is
silent.
Sole paragraph. The partnership agreement
may provide that the rules applicable to
corporations shall govern the partnership in
a supplementary manner.
Ar~ 1054. The partnership agreement shall
state, where applicable, the information set
out in art. 997 and the firm name of the
partnership, if any.
Section II - Quotas
Art. 1055. The capital of the partnership is
divided into equal or unequal quotas, with
each partner holding one or more quotas.
210
Art.1.051. Dissolve~se de pleno dircito
a sociedade:
I - por qualquer das causas previstas no
art. l.044;
II - quando por mais de cento e oitenta
dias perdurar a falta de uma das catego-
rias de s6cio.
Paragrafo iinico. Na falta de socio co-
manditado, os comanditarios nomeariio
administrador provisorio para praticar,
durante o perfodo referido no inciso II e
sem assumir a condii;:iio de socio, os
atos de administra~iio.
Capitulo IV - Da Socicdadc
Limitada
Sei;:iio I - Disposii;:iies Preliminarcs
Art. 1.052. Na sociedade limitada, a
e
responsabilidade de cada socio restri-
ta ao valor de suas quotas, mas todos
respondem solidariamente pela integra-
lizai;:ao do capital social.
Art. 1.053. A sociedade limitada rege-
se, nas omissi'ies deste Capftulo, pela5
normas da sociedade simples.
Paragrafo unico. O contrato social po-
dera prever a regencia supletiva da so-
ciedade limitada pelas normas da socie-
dade anonima.
Art 1.054. 0 contrato mencionara, no
quecouber, as indica\:i'ies do art. 997, e,
se for o caso, a firma social.
Sei;:iio II - Das Quotas
Art. 1.055. 0 capital social dividc-se
em quotas, iguais ou desiguais, cabcn-
do uma ou diversas a cada socio.
211 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
I0 Pela exata estimai;:ao de hens con-
feridos ao capital social respondem so-
lidariamente todos os socios, ate o pra-
zo de cinco anos da data do regislro da
sociedade.
§ 2° Evedadacontribuigiio que consista
em prest~giio de servi\OS.
Art.1.056. A quota e indivisivel em re-
a
lm;:iio sociedade, salvo para efeito de
transferencia, caso em que se observara
o disposto no artigo seguinte.
§ l 0 No caso de condomfnio de quota.
os direitos a ela inerentes somente po-
dem ser exercidos pelo condomino re-
presentante, ou pelo inventariame do
espolio de socio falecido.
§ 2° Sem prejufzo do disposto no art.
1.052, os condominos de quota indivisa
respondem solidariamente pelas presta-
a
i;:oes necessarias sua integralizai;iio.
Art. 1.057. Na omissao do contrato, o
socio pode ceder sua quota, total ou
parcialmcnte. a quern seja socio, inde-
pendentemente de audiencia dos ou-
tros. ou a estranho, se niio houver opo-
si<,:iio de titulares de mais de um quarto
do capital social.
Paragrafo unico. A cessiio tera eftcacia
quanto a sociedade e terceiros, inclusi-
ve para OS fins do paragrafo unico do
art. 1.003, a partir da averhai;:ao do res-
pectivo instrumento, subscrito pelos
socios anuentes.
Art. 1.058. Nao integralizada a quota
de socio remisso, os outros socios po-
dem, sem prejuizo do disposto no art.
1.004 e seu paragrafo unico, toma-la
para si ou transferi-la a tercciros, ex-
cluindo o primitivo titular e devolven-
do-lhe o que houver pago, deduzidos os
juros da mora, as prestai,:oes estabeleci-
das no contrato mais as despesas.
Art. 1.056-1.058
§1. All the partners shall have solidary
liability, for a period of five years from the
date on which the partnership was
registered, for the exact value at which
property was contributed to the capital of
the partnership.
§2. Contributions to capital consisting of
services are prohibited.
Art. 1056. Each quota is indivisible in
relation to the partnership, except in cases
of transfer, to which the provisions of the
following article shall apply.
§ 1. In cases of co-ownership of a quota, the
rights attached to the quota may be
exercised only by the representative
co-owner or by the administrator of the
deceased partner's property.
§2. Without prejudice to the provisions of
art. I 052, the co-owners of an undivided
quota are solidarily liable for paying in the
quota.
Art. 1057. Where the partnership
agreement is silent, a partner may assign his
quota, in whole or in part, to another partner
without consulting the remaining partners,
or to a person who is not a partner if the
assignment is not opposed by partners
holding more than one-quarter of the
capital of the partnership.
Sole paragraph. The assignment shall have
effect against the partnership and third
parties, including for the purposes of art.
1003, from the date of registration of the
instrument of assignment, executed by the
consenting partners.
Art. 1058. If a partner fails to pay in his
quota, the other partners may, without
prejudice to the provisions of art. 1004,
transfer the quota to themselves or to third
parties, expelling the original partner and
reimbursing to him what he paid, after
deducting interest for late payment, the
payments stipulated in the partnership
agreement, and expenses.
 Art. J.059-1.062 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1059. The partners are obligated to
repay profits and other amounts withdrawn
from the partnership for al1y reason, even
where authorized by the partnership
agreement, if such profits or amounts were
distributed to the prejudice of the capital of
the partnership.
Section III - Administration
Art. 1060. A limited liability partnership is
administered by one or more persons
designated in the partnership agreement or
in a separate instrument.
Sole paragraph. Powers of administration
conferred upon all tqe partners by the
partnership agreement do not extend by
operation of law to partners who are
admitted later.
Art. 1061. Where the partnership
agreement permits administrators who are
not partners, the administrators must be
appointed by unanimous approval of the
partners, while the capital is not fully paid
in, and by approval of at least two-thirds,
after the capital has been paid in.
Art. ~ff62. An administrator appbinted
under a separate instrument shall be
invested in office upon signing an
instrument of investiture in the book of
minutes of the administration.
§ l. If the instrument of investiture is not
signed within 30 days of appointment, the
appointment shall become without effect.
§2. Within the ten days following
investiture in office, the administrator shall
request entry of his appointment in the
appropriate register, stating his name,
nationality, civil status and residence,
accompanied by a document of identity, the
instrtiment and the date of appointment and
the term of his management.
212
Art. 1.059. Os s6cios serao obrigados a
reposivao dos lucros e das quantias reti-
radas, a qualquer tftulo, ainda que auto-
rizados pelo contrato, quando tais lu-
cros ou quantia se distribuirem com
prejufzo do capital.
Sc1;iio III- Da Administra\;iiO
Art. 1.060. A sociedade limitada e ad-
ministrada por uma ou ma is pessoas dc-
signadas no contrato social ou em ato
separado. .
Paragrafo unico. A adminis~ao atri-
bufda no contrato a todos os s6cios nao
se estende de pleno direito aos que pos-
teriormente adquiram essa qualidade.
Art. 1.061. Se o contrato permitir ad-
ministradores nao socios, a designavao
deles dependera de aprovas;ao da unani-
midade dos socios, enquanto o capital
nao estiver integralizado, e de dois ter-
~os, no mfnimo, ap6s a integralizac;ao.
Art. 1.062. 0 administrador designado
em ato separado investir-se-a no cargo
mediante termo de posse no livro de
atas da administra<;ao.
§ I 0 Se o termo nao for assinado nos
trinta dias seguintes adesigna~i'io,.esta
se tornara sem efeito.
§ 2° Nos dez dias seguintes ao da inves-
tidura, deve o administrador requerer
seja averbada sua nomeas;ao no registro
competente, mencionando o seu nome,
nacionalidade, estado civil, residencia,
com exibiyao de documento de identi-
dade, o ato e a data da nomea9ao e o
prazo de gcstao.
213 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Art. 1.063. 0 exercicio do cargo de ad-
ministrador cessa pela destituis;ao, em
qualquer tempo, do titular, ou pelo ter-
mino do prazo se, fixado no contrato ou
em ato separado, nao houver recon-
du9ao.
§ l 0 Tratando-se de socio nomeado ad-
ministrador no contrato, sua destitui1;fio
somente se opera pela aprovayao de ti-
tulares de quotas correspondentes, no
mfnimo, a dois ten;:os do capital social,
salvo disposi~ao contratual diversa.
§ 2° A cessai;ao do exercfcio do cargo
de administrador deve ser averbada no
registro competente, mediante requeri-
mento apresentado nos dez dias seguin-
tes ao da ocorrencia
§ 3° A renuncia de administrador torna-
se eficaz, em rela1rao asociedade, desde
o momento em que esta toma conheci-
mcnto da comunica1rao escrita do re-
nunciante; e, em relavao a terceiros,
apos a averba1rao e pub! ica9ao.
Art. 1.064. 0 uso da firma ou denomi-
nai;:ao social eprivativo dos administra-
dores que tenham os necessarios pode-
res.
Art. 1.065. Ao termino de cada exerci-
cio social, proceder-se-a a elaborai;ao
do inventario, do balaniro patrimonial e
do bal<ms;o de resultado economico.
Sc\;iiO IV - Do Consclho Fiscal
Art. 1.066. Sem prejufzo dos poderes
da assembleia dos socios, pode o con-
trato instituir conselho fiscal composto
de tres ou mais membros e respectivos
suplentes, s6cios ou nao, residentes no
Pars, eleitos na assembleia anual pre-
vista no art. l.078.
Art. 1.063-1.066
Art. 1063. An administrator ceases to
exercise his office upon removal, at any
time, or upon expiry of the term of office
fixed in the partnership agreement or
separate instrument, if he is not
reappointed.
§ l. In the case of a partner who is appointed
as administrator in the partnership
agreement. the partner may be removed as
administrator only with the approval of
partners who hold quotas representing at
least two-thirds of the capital of the
partnership, unless the partnership
agreement provides otherwise.
§2. The termination of an administrator's
appointment shall be entered in the
appropriate register, by request submitted
within the ten days following the event of
termination.
§3. Resignation by an administrator
becomes effective with respect to the
partnership upon receipt of a written
communication by the resigning
administrator to that effect and with respect
to third parties, upon registration and
publication of the resignation.
Art. 1064. Only administrators who have
the required powers may act in the firm or
corporate name of the partnership.
Art. 1065. At the end of each financial
year, an inventory, a balance sheet and a
profit and loss statement shall be drawn up.
Section IV - Fiscal Council
Art. 1066. Without prejudice to the powers
exercised by the partners in assembly, the
partnership agreement may create a fiscal
council, composed of three or more
members and their alternates, who may, but
need not, be partners, all resident in the
country and elected at the annual assembly
provided for in art. 1078.
Art. 1.067-1.069 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. Aside from the ineligible persons
enumerated in art. 1011§1, the following
persons may not be members of the fiscal
council: members of the other management
bodies of the partnership or of another
partnership or company controlled by the
partnership; employees of the partnership
or its controlled companies or partnerships,
or of an administrator of any them; and
spouses and relatives up to the third degree
of the aforementioned persons.
§2. Minority partners who represent at least
one-fifth of the partnership capital have the
right to elect, in a separate election, at least
one of the members of the fiscal council and
the member's al temate.
Art.1067. An elected member or alternate
shall be invested in office upon signing an
instrument of investiture in office drawn up
in the book of minutes of the meetings and
opinions of the fiscal council, which
instrument shall set out the member or
alternate's name, nationality, civil status
and date of election. The member or
alternate shall exercise such office until the
next following annual assembly, unless the
member or alternate ceases to exercise
office earlier.
Sole paragraph. If the term of investiture in
office is not signed within the thirty days
following the election, the election. shall
become ineffective.
Art. 1068. The remuneration of the
members of the fiscal council shall be fixed
annually by the partners, at the assembly at
which the members were elected.
Art.1069. Aside from the other powers and
duties attributed to them by law or the
partnership agreement, the members of the
fiscal council, individually or together,
have the following duties:
214
§ I0 Nao podem fazer parte do conselho
fiscal, alem dos inelegfveis enumerados
no§ 1° do art. l.Oll, os membros dos
demais 6rgaos da sociedade ou de outra
por ela controlada, os empregados de
quaisquer delas ou dos respectivos ad-
ministradores, o c6njuge ou parente
destes ate o terceiro grau.
§ 2° E assegurado aos s6cios minoritii-
rios, que representarem pelo menos um
quinto do capital social, o direito deele-
ger, separadamente, um dos membros
do conselho fiscal e o respectivo su-
plente.
Art. 1.067. 0 membro ou suplente elei-
to, assinando termo de posse lavrado no
Iivro de atas e pareceres do conselho
fiscal, em que se mencione o seu nome,
nacionalidade, estado civil, residencia e
a data da escolha, ficara investido nas
suas fum;:iies, que exercer.l, salvo cessa-
i;ao anterior, ate a subseqliente assem-
bleia anual.
Paragrafo unico. Se o termo nao for as-
sinado nos trinta dias seguintes ao da
elei\:iio, esta se tornara sem efeito.
Art. 1.068. A remunerai;:ao dos mem-
bros do conselho fiscal serii fixada,
anualmente, pela assembleia dos s6cios
que os eleger.
Art. 1.069. Alem de outras atribuis;oes
determinadas na lei ou no contrato so-
cial, aos membros do conselho fiscal in-
cumbem, individual ou conjuntamente,
os deveres seguintes:
215 CODIGO CIVIL BILJNGlJE
I - examinar, pelo menos trimestral-
mente, os Jivros e papeis <la sociedade e
o estado da caixa e da carteira, devendo
os administradores ou liquidantes pres-
tar-Jhes as informm;:oes solicitadas;
II- lavrar no Iivro de atas e pareceres do
conselho fiscal o resultado dos exames
refcridos no inciso I <leste artigo;
III - exarar no mesmo livro e apresentar
aassembleia anual dos s6cios parccer
sobre os neg6cios e as operar;oes so-
ciais do exetcfcio em que servirem, 10-
mando por base o balam;;o patrimonial e
o de resultado econ6mico;
IV - denunciar os erros, fraudes ou cri-
mes que descobrirem, sugerindo provi-
dencias uteis asociedade;
V - convocar a assembleia dos s6cios se
a diretoria retardar por mais de trinta
dias a sua convocai;ao annal, ou sempre
que ocorram motivos graves e urgentes;
VI - praticar, durante o perfodo da liqui-
da9ao da sociedade, os atos a que sere-
fere este artigo, tendo em vista as dispo-
sii;:oes especiais reguladoras da Jiquida-
~ao.
Art. 1.070. As atribui~oes e poderes
conferidos pela lei ao conselho fiscal
nao podem ser outorgados a outro 6r-
gao da sociedade, e a responsabilidade
de sens membros obedece a regra que
define a dos administradores (art.
1.016).
Paragrafo unico. 0 conselho fiscal po-
derii escolher para assisti-lo no exame
dos livros, dos balan\!OS e das contas,
contabilista legalmenfo habilitado, me-
diante remunerai;ao aprovada pela as-
sembleia dos s6cios.
Art. l.070
I- to examine, at least once in every
quarter, the books and papers of the
partnership and the status of its cash,
cash-equivalent funds and portfolio, and
the administrators or liquidators of the
partnership shall give the members of the
fiscal council the information requested of
them;
II - to record, in the book of minutes of the
meetings and opinions of the fiscal council,
the results of the examination referred to in
item I of this article;
III- to draw up, in that book, and present to
the annual partners' assembly, an opinion
on the business and operations of the
partnership in the year in which they served
on the fiscal council, based on the balance
sheet and profit and loss statement.
IV - to make known to the partnership the
errors, frauds or crimes that they discover,
suggesting practical measures to be taken;
V - to call an assembly of partners. if the
officers delay more than thirty days in
calling the annual assembly, and whenever
there is urgent and serious reason to call a
partners' assembly;
VI - during the period of liquidation of the
partnership, to perform the duties referred
to in this article in light of the special
provisions governing liquidation.
Art.1070. The powers and duties conferred
by law on the fiscal council may not be
conferred on any other management body
of the partnership. The liability of the
members of the fiscal council is governed
by the rules applicable to administrators
(art. 1016).
Sole paragraph. The fiscal council may
choose a legally accredited accountant to
assist it in the examination of the books,
balance sheets and accounts, paying the
accountant the remuneration approved by
the partners in assembly.
Art. 1.071 - 1.072 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Section V - Resolutions of
the Partners
Art. 1071. In addition to the other matters
specified by law or in the partnership
agreement, the following matters must be
approved by resolution adopted by the
partners:
I - approval of the administration's
accounts;
II - appointment of administrators, when
made by separate instrument;
III - removal of administrators;
IV - the manner of the administrators'
remuneration, when not established in the
partnership agreement;
V - amendment of the partnership
agreement;
VI - m~rger, split and dissolution of the
partnership, and cessation of liquidation of
the partnership;
VII - the appointment and removal of
liquidators and decision on liquidators'
accounts;
VIII - petition for composition with
creditors.
Art. 1072. Subject to the provisions of art.
1010, resolutions of the partners shall be
adopted at a meeting or assembly,
whichever the partnership agreement may
contemplate, called by the administrators in
the cases provided for by law or in the
partnership agreement.
§1. Resolutions must be adopted at an
assembly if the number of partners is
greater than ten.
§2. The formalities for calling an assembly,
provided for in art. 1152§3, may be
dispensed with if all partners are present at
the assembly or declare, in writing, that
they are aware of the place, date, time and
agenda for the assembly.
216
Se~ao V - Das Dcliberm;oes dos
S6cios
Art. 1.071. Dependem da deliberrn;:ao
dos s6cios, alem de outras materias in-
dicadas na lei ou no contrato:
I - a aprovai;:ao das contas da adminis-
tra\:ao;
II - a designai,:1io dos administradores,
quando feita em ato separado;
III - a destituii;:ao dos administradores;
IV - o modo de sua remunera~ao. quan-
do nao estabclecido no contrato;
V - a modificm;:ao do contrato social;
VI - a incorporai;:ao. a fusao ea dissolu-
i;:ao da sociedade, ou a cessai;:ao do esta-
do de Iiquidai;:ao;
VII - a nomeai;:ao e destituic;ao dos li-
quidantes e o julgamento das suas con-
tas;
VIII - o pedido de concordata.
Art. 1.072. As delibera~oes dos s6cios,
obedecido o disposto no art. 1.010, se-
riio tomadas em reuniiio ou em asscm-
bleia, conforme previsto no contrato
social, devendo ser convocadas pelos
administradores nos casos previstos em
lei ou no contrato.
§ I 0 A deliberai;;iio em assembleia sen.i
obrigat6ria se o numero dos s6cios for
superior a dez.
§ 2° Dispensam-se as formalidades de
convocai.:ao previstas no § 3° do art.
1.152, quando todos os s6cios compare-
cerem ou se declararem, por escrito, cien-
tes do local, data, hora e ordem do dia
217 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
§ 3° A reuniiio ou a assembleia tomam-
se dispensaveis quando todos os s6cios
decidirem, por escrito, sobre a materia
que seria objeto delas.
§ 4° No caso do inciso VIII do artigo an-
tecedente, os administradores, se hou-
ver urgencia e com autorizai;:ap de titu-
lares de mais da metade do capital so-
cial, podem requerer concordata pre-
ventiva
§ 5° As deliberac;oes tomadas de con-
formidade com a lei e o contrato vincu-
lam todos os s6cios, ainda que ausentes
ou dissidentes.
§ 6° Aplica-se as reunioes dos s6cios,
nos casos omissos no contrato, o dis-
posto na presente Se~ao sobre a assem-
bleia.
Art. 1.073. A reuniao ou a assembleia
podem tambem ser convocadas:
I - por s6cio, quando os admihistrado-
res retardarem a convocac;ao, por mais
de sessema dias, nos casos previstos em
lei ou no comrato, ou por titulares de
mais de um quinto do capital, quando
nao atendido, no prazo de oito dias, pe-
dido de convocai;;ao fundamentado,
com indica~ao das materias a serem tra-
tadas;
II - pelo conselho fiscal, se houver, nos
casos a que se refere o inciso V do art.
l.069.
Art. 1.074. A assembleia dos s6cios
instala-se com a presen\'a, em primeira
convocagao, de titulares de no mfnimo
tres quartos do capital social, e, em se-
gunda, com qualquer numero.
Art. 1.073-1.074
§3. A meeting or assembly of the partners
may be dispensed with if the partners adopt
a written decision on the matter that would
be considered at the meeting or assembly.
§4. In the case provided for in item VIII of
the preceding article, where there is a need
for immediate action the administrators
may, with the authorization of partners
representing more than one half of the
capital of the partnership, petition for
preventive composition with creditors.
§5. Resolutions adopted in accordance with
the law and the partnership agreement bind
all partners, even if they were absent from
the meeting or assembly or dissented from
the resolution.
§6. Where the partnership agreement is
silent, the provisions of this Section on
assemblies apply to meetings of partners.
Art. 1073. An assembly or meeting may
also be called:
I - by a partner, when the administrators
fail to call the meeting or assembly within
sixty days from the day provided for by law
or in the partnership agreement, or by
partners holding more than one-fifth of the
capital of the partnership, when the
administrators fail to call a meeting or
assembly in response to a request that sets
out the reasons for calling a meeting and the
matters to be dealt with;
II - by the fiscal council, if any, in the cases
referred to in art. 1069(V).
Art. 1074. The quorum for the assembly
shall be partners holding at least
three-quarters of the capital of the
partnership, at the first call, and any number
of partners, at the second.
Art. 1.075- l.076 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. A partner may be represented at the
assembly by another partner or by an
attorney-at-law, under a mandate
specifying the acts that the representative is
authorized to perform. The instrument of
mandate shall be registered along with the
minutes of the assembly.
§2. No partner, in his own capacity or as
mandataty, m·ay vote on a matter that
relates directly to him.
Art. 1075. The assembly shall have a
chai.rman and a secretary chosen from
among the partners present at the meeting.
§1. Minutes of the work of the assembly,
and of the resolutions adopted, shall be
drawn up in the book of minutes of
assemblies, which shall be signed by the
chairman, the secretary and a number of
partners sufficient for the validity of the
resolutions adopted, although any partner
present at the assembly may sign the
minutes.
§2. A copy of the minutes, certified by the
administrators or by the chairman and
secretary of the assembly, shall be
submitted for registration td the Public
Register of Mercantile Enterprises, within
the twenty days following the meeting.
§3. A certified copy of the minutes shall be
delivered to any partner who so requests.
Art. 1076. Subject to the provisions of art.
1061 and art. 163§1, resolutions by the
partners shall be adopted:
I - by votes corresponding to at least
three-quarters of the capital of the
partnership, in the cases provided for in art.
1071(V) and (VI);
II - by votes corresponding to at least
one-half of the capital of the paitnership, in
the cases provided for in art. 1071 (II), (III),
(IV) and (VIII);
218
§ I 0 0 socio pode ser representado na
assemblCia por outro socio, on por ad-
vogado, mediante outorga de mandato
com especificm;iio dos atos autoriza-
dos, devendo o instrumento ser lcvado
a registro, juntamente com a ata.
§ 2° Nenhum socio, por si ou na condi-
<,;iio de mandatario, pode votar materia
que lhe diga respeito diretamcme.
Art.1.075. A assembleia seni presidida
e secretariada por socios escolhidos cn-
tre os presentes.
§ I 0 Dos trabalhos e deliberaci'ies sera
lavrada, no livro de atas da assembleia.
ata assinada pelos membros da mesa e
por socios participantes da reuniao,
quantos basteni avalidade das delibera-
<,;Oes, mas sem prejufzo dos que quei-
ram assina-la.
§ 2° C6pia da ata autenticada pclos ad-
ministradores. ou pela mesa. sera, nos
a
vinte dias subseqUentes reuniao, apre-
sentada ao Registro Publico de Empre-
sas Mercantis para arquivamento
averbai;iio.
§ 3° Ao socio, que a solicitar, seraentre-
gue copia autenticada da ata.
Art. 1.076. Ressalvado o disposm no
art. 1.061 e no§ 1° do art. l.063, as dc-
liberai;i'ies dos socios seriio tomadas:
I - pelos votos correspondentes, no mf-
nimo. a tres quartos do capital social,
nos casos previstos nos incisos V e VI
do art. 1.071:
II - pel os votos correspondentcs a ma is
de metade do capital social, nos casos
previstos nos incisos If, III, IV e Vil! do
art. 1.071;
219 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
III - pela maioria de votos dos presen-
tes, nos demais casos previstos na lei ou
no contrato, se este niio exigir maioria
mais elevada.
Art. 1.077. Quando houver modifica-
c;:iio do contrato, fusao da sociedade, in-
corpora~ao de outra, ou dela por outra,
teni 0 socio que dissentiu 0 direito de
retirar-se da sociedade, nos rrinta dias
subseqtiemes a reuniiio, aplicando-se,
no silencio do contrato social antes vi-
gente, o disposto no art. 1.031.
Art. 1.078. A assembleia dos socios
deve realizar-se ao menos uma vez por
ano, nos quatro meses seguintes ao a months following the end of the corporate
termino do exercfcio social, com o ob-
jetivo de:
I • tomar as comas dos administradores
e deliberar sobre o balani;o patrimonial
e ode resultado economico;
II - designar administradores, quando
foro caso;
III - tratar de qualquer outro assunto
constante da ordem do dia.
§ I 0 Ate trinta dias antes da data marca-
da para a assembleia, os documentos
referidos no inciso I deste artigo devem
ser postos, por escrito, e com a prova do
a
respectivo recebimento, disposi1;ao
dos socios que nao exer<,;am a adminis-
tra<,;iio.
§ 2° Instalada a assembleia, proceder-
a
se-a leitura dos documentos referidos
no paragrafo antecedente, os quais se-
riio submetidos, pelo presidente, a dis-
cussao e votar;:ao, nesta niio podendo to-
marparte os membros da administrai;:iio
e, se houver, os do conselho fiscal.
Art. 1.077-1.078
III - by a majority of the votes of those
present at the meeting, in all other cases
provided for by law or in the partnership
agreement, unless a greater majority is
required under the paitnership agreement.
Art.1077. A partner who dissented from an
amendment to the partnership agreement or
from the amalgamation or merger of the
. partnership shall have the right to
dissociate from the partnership within the
thirty days following the meeting and,
where the partnership agreement that was
in effect prior to amendment is silent, the
provisions of art. 1031 shall apply.
Art.1078. An assembly of partners shall be
held at least once a year, within the four
year, for the purpose of:
I - receiving the accounts of the
administrators and deliberating on the
balance sheet and profit and loss statement;
II - appointing administrators, where
applicable;
III - considering any other matter on the
agenda.
§ 1. At least thirty days prior to the date
fixed for the assembly, the documents
referred to in item I of this article shall be
made available in writing to the partners
who are not part of the administration of the
partnership, together with proof of receipt
of such documents.
§2. Immediately after the assembly is
called to order, the documents referred to in
the preceding paragraph shall be read and
shall be submitted by the chairman to
discussion and a vote. Members of the
administration and of the fiscal council, if
any, shall not take part in the vote.
Art 1.079-1.082 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§3. Approval without reservation of the
balance sheet and profit and loss statement
releases the members of the administration
and of the fiscal council, if any;from
liability, except in cases of error or fraud.
§4. The right to annul the approval referred
to in the preceding paragraph is
extinguished upon the expiry of two years
from the date of approval.
Art. 1079. The provisions of this Section
concerning assemblies shall apply, where
the partnership agreement is silent, to
meetings of the partners, subject to the
provisions of art. 1072§ I.
Art. 1080. Resolutions adopted contrary to
the partnership agreement or the law result
in unlimited liability for those who
expressly approved such resolutions.
Section VI - Increase and Reduction of
Capital
Art. 1081. Subject to special legislation,
the capital of the partnership, after having
been fully paid in, may be increased by
amendment to the partnership agreement.
§ 1. During the thirty days following the
resolution, the partners have a preemptive
right to participate in the increase, in
proportion to the quotas they hold.
§2. The provisions of the introductory
paragraph of art. 1057 apply to assignment
of preemptive rights.
§3. Upon expiry of the preemptive period
and assumption of the entire increase by
partners or third parties, a meeting or
assembly shall be called to approve the
amendment to the partnership agreement.
Art. 1082. The partnership may reduce its
capital, by amendment to the partnership
agreement:
220
§ 3° A aprovai;:ao, sem reserva. do ba-
lani;:o patrimonial e do de resulcado eco-
nomico, salvo erro, dolo ou simulac;ao,
exonera de responsabilidade os mem-
bros da administrai;:ao e, se houver, os
do conselho fiscal.
§ 4° Extingue-se em dois anos o direito
de anular a aprovm;ao a que se refere o
paragrafo anteccdente.
Art. 1.079. Aplica-se as reunifies dos
s6cios, nos casos omissos no contrato, o
estabelecido nesta Sei;:ao sobre a as-
semb!eia, obedecido o disposto no § I 0
do art. 1.072.
Art. 1.080. As delibera91ies infringen-
tes do contrato ou da lei tornam ilimita-
da a responsabilidade dos que expressa-
mente as aprovaram.
Sc~iio VI - Do Aumcnto e da
Redu~iio do Capital
Art. 1.081. Ressalvado o disposto em
lei especial, integralizadas as quotas,
pode ser o capital aumentado, com a
correspondente modificai;:ao do con-
trato.
§ I 0 Ate trinta dias ap6s a delibera~ao,
terlio os s6cios preferencia para partici-
par do aumento, na propon;:lio das quo-
tas de que sejam titulares.
§ 2° A cesslio do direito de preferencia,
aplica-se o disposto no caput do art.
1.057,
§ 3° Decorrido o prazo da preferencia, e
assumida pelos s6cios, ou por teri:eiros, a
totalidade do aumento, havera reunilio ou
assembleia dos s6cios, para que seja
aprovada a modificar;:lio do contrato.
Art. 1.082. Pode a sociedade reduzir o
capital, mediante a correspondente mo-
dificai;:ao do contrato:
221 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
I - depois de integralizado. se houver
pcrdas irreparaveis;
II se excessivo em relai;:lio ao objeto da
societlade.
Art. 1.083. No caso do inciso I do arti-
go antecedente, a rcdu~ao do capital
sera realizada com a diminui1:1io pro-
porcional do valor nominal das quotas.
tornand.o-se e(etiva a partir da averba-
91io, no Registro Publico de Empresas
Mercantis, da ata da Dssembleia que a
tenha aprovado.
Art. 1.084. No caso do inciso II do art
l .082, a redm,:ao do capital sent feita
restituindo-se parte do valor das quotas
aos s6cios, ou dispensandocse as pres-
ta<;:5es ainda devidas, com diminuii;;lio
proporcional, em ambos·os casos, do
valor nominal das quotas.
§ I 0 No prazo de noventa dias, contado
da data da publicm;ao da ata da assem-
bleia que aprovar a redm;ao, o credor
quirografario, por tftulo liquido ante-
rior a essa data, podera opor-se ao deli-
berado.
§ 2° A redui;;ao somente se tornara efi-
caz se, no prazo estabelecido no para-
grafo antecedente, nao for impugnada,
ou se provado o pagamento da dfvida
ou o dep6sito judicial do respectivo va-
lor.
§ 3° Satisfeitas as condii;;1ies estabeleci-
das no paragrafo antecedente, proce-
der-se-a a averbai;:ao, no Registro Pu-
blico de Empresas Mercantis, da ata
que tenha aprovado a redui;;lio.
Art 1.083- 1.084
I - after the capital has been paid in, if
irreparable losses have occurred;
II - if the capital is excessive in relation to
the purposes of the partnership.
Art. 1083. In the case provided for in item
I of the preceding article, the reduction of
capital shall be made through a
proportional reduction in the value of the
quotas and shall become effective upon
entry, in the Public Register of Mercantile
Enterprises, of the minutes of the assembly
that approved the reduction.
Art. 1084. In the case provided for in item
II of art. 1082, the reduction in capital shall
be made by reimbursing part of the value of
the quotas to the partners or by waiving
contributions still owed, with a
corresponding reduction in the nominal
value of quotas, in both cases.
§ l. Within ninety days from the date of
publication of the minutes of the assembly
that approved the reduction, ordinary
creditors under liquid debt instruments
issued prior to that date may oppose the
reduction.
§2. The reduction shall become effective
only if, within the period established in the
above paragraph, the reduction is not
opposed or, if opposed, payment of the debt
is proved or the amount of the debt is
deposited into court.
§3. Upon satisfaction of the conditions
established in the preceding paragraph, the
minutes approving the reduction shall be
entered in the Public Register of Mercantile
Enterprises.
Art. 1.085-1.089 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Section VII-'Expulsion of Minority
Partners
Art. 1085. Subject to art. 1030, when a
majority of the partners, representing at
least one-half of the capital of the
partnership, believe that one or more
partners are putting the continued existence
of the partnership at risk through acts of
evident seriousness, the majority may expel
such partners from the partnership, by
amendment to the partnership agreement,
provided that the agreement contemplates
expulsion for just cause.
Sole paragraph. A decision to expel may
oI).ly ~e made at a meeting or assembly
especially called for that purpose, with
notice to the accused partner given
sufficieq,tly in advance to permit him to
attend the meeting or assembly and
exercise his right of defense.
Art. 1086. Upon registration of the
amendment to the partnership agreement,
the provisions of art. 1031 and 1032 shall
apply.·
Section VIII - Dissolution
Art.1087. The partnership is dissolved, by
operation of law, in any of the events
provided for in art. 1044.
Chapter V - Corporations
Sole Section - Definition
Art. 1088. In corporations or companies,
the capital is divided into shares and each
member of the company or shareholder is
liable only for the issue price of the shares
that he subscribes or acquires.
Art. 1089. Corporations are governed by
special legislation, supplemented by this
Code where the legislation is silent.
222
Se1;i'io VII - Da Resolu1;i'io da
Sociedade em Rela1;i'io a Socios
Minoritarios
Art. 1.085. Ressalvado o disposto no
art. 1.030, quando a maioria dos s6cios,
representativa de mais da metade do ca-
pital social, enterider que um ou mais
s6cios est11o pondo em risco a continui-
dade da empresa, em virtude de atos de
inegavel gravidade, podera excluf-los
da sociedade, mediante altera\!110 do
contrato social, desde que prevista nes-
te a exclus11o por justa causa.
Paragrafo unico. A exclusao somente
podeni ser determinada em reuniao ou
assembleia especialmente convocada
para esse fim, ciente o acusado em tem-
po Mbil para permitir seu compareci-
mento e o exercfcio do direito de de-
fesa.
Art. 1.086. Efetuado o registro da alte-
ra\!11o contratual, aplicar-se-a o dispos-
to nos arts. 1.031 e 1.032.
Se1;ao VIII - Da Dissolu1;i'io
Art 1.087. A sociedade dissolve-se, de
pleno direito, por qualquer das causas
previstas no art. 1.044.
Capitulo V - Da Sociedade Anonima
Se1;i'io Unica - Da Caracteriza1;1io
Art. 1.088. Na sociedade anonima OU
companhia, o capital divide-se em
a\!fies, obrigando-se cad a socio ou acio-
nista somente pelo pre\:O de emissao
das ai;:oes que subscrever ou adquirir.
Art. 1.089. A sociedade anonima rege-
se por lei especial, aplicando-se-lhe,
nos casos omissos, as disposi11oes deste
C6digo.
223 C6DIGO CIVIL BILI NGUE
Capltulo VI - Da Sociedade em
Comandita por A1;iies
Art. 1.090, A sociedade em comandita
por m;:oes tern o capital dividido em
a"oes, regendo-se pelas normas relati-
vas asociedade anonima, sem prejufzo
das modificai;:oes constantes deste Ca-
pitulo, e opera sob firma ou denomi-
nairao.
Art. 1.091. Somente o acionista tern
qualidade para administrar a sociedade
e, como diretor, responde subsidiaria e
ilimitadamente pelas obrigm<fies da so-
ciedade.
§ I 0 Se houver mais de um diretor, serao
solidariamente responsaveis, depois de
esgotados os bens sociais.
§ 2° Os diretores serao nomeados no ato
constitutivo da sociedade, sem limita-
i;:ao de tempo, e somente poderao ser
destitufdos por deliberai;:ao de acionis-
tas que representem no mfnimo dois
ter\(OS do capital social.
§ 3° 0 diretor destituido ou exonerado
continua, durante dois anos, responsa-
vel pelas obriga~oes sociais contrafdas
sob sua administrai,:110.
Art. 1.092. A assembleia geral niio
pode, sem o consentimento dos direto-
res, mudar o objeto essencial da socie-
dade, prorrogar-lhe o prazo de dura\!iio,
aumentar ou diminuir o capital social,
criar debentures, ou partes beneficia-
rias.
Capitulo VII - Da Sociedade
Cooperativa
Arr. 1.093. A sociedade cooperativa re-
ger-se-a pelo disposto no presente Ca-
pftulo, ressalvada a legislac;:ao especial.
Art. l.090-1.093
Chapter VI -Joint Stock
Companies
Art. 1090. The capital of a joint stock
company is divided into shares. Joint stock
companies are governed by the rules
applicable to corporations, subject to the
modifications made by this Chapter, and
operate under a firm name or corporate
name.
Art. 1091. Only a shareholder may
administer the company and, as officer, has
subsidiary but unlimited liability for the
company's obligations.
§I - If there is more than one officer, they
shall be solidarily liable, after the property
of the company is exhausted.
§2 - The officers shall be appointed in the
constituting instrument of the company, for
an undefined term, and may be removed
only by resolution adopted by shareholders
representing at least two-thirds of the
capital of the company.
§3 - An officer who has resigned or been
removed continues to have liability for
obligations contracted by the company
during his administration for a period of
two years from his resignation or removal.
Art. 1092. The general assembly of
shareholders may not, without the consent
of the officers, change the essential purpose
of the company, extend its term of duration,
increase or decrease its capital, or create
debentures or participation certificates.
Chapter VII - Cooperatives
Art. 1093. Cooperatives are governed by
the provisions of this Chapter, subject to
special legislation.
Art. 1.094-1.095 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1094. The following are
characteristics of cooperatives:
I - variable or no capital;
II - members in a number that is, at a
minimum, required to form the
administration of the cooperative, but
without limitation on the maximum
number of members;
III - a limit on the t.otal value of the quotas
in the capital of the cooperative that each
member may hold;
IV - non-transferability of quotas in the
capital of the cooperative to persons who
are not members, even by inheritance;
V - a quorum for the general assembly of
members based on the number of members
present at the meeting and not on the capital
represented;
VI - the right of each member to a single
vote on r~solutions, whether or not the
cooperative has any capital and regardless
of the value of the member's interest in the
capital;
VII- distribution ofprofits in proportion to
the value of operations performed by the
cooperative through the cooperative,
although fixed interest .on paid-in capital
maybe paid;
VIII.., a reserve fund that cannot be divided
among the members, even in the case of
dissolution of the cooperative.
Art. 1095. The liability of members in a
cooperative may be limited or unlimited.
§I. Liability is limited in a cooperative in
which each member is liable only for the
value of his quotas and for losses from the
operations of the cooperative, in proportion
to the member's participation in such
operations.
224
Art.1.094. Sao caracterfsticas da socic-
dade cooperativa:
I - variabilidade, ou dispensa do capital
social;
II - concurso de s6cios em numero mf-
nimo necessario a compor a a<lministra-
c;ao da sociedade, sem limitac;ao de n(1-
mero miiximo;
Ill- limitar,:ao do valor <la soma de quo-
tas do capital social que ca<la socio po-
dera tomar:
IV - intransferibili<lade <las quotas do
capital a tercciros estranhos a socieda-
<le, ainda que por hcranc;a:
V - quorum, para a assembleia geral
funcionar e deliberar, fundado no 116-
a
mero de s6cios presentes reunifio. e
nao no capital social representado;
VI - direito de cada socio a um s6 voto
nas deliberar,:oes, tenha ou nao capital a
sociedade, e qualquer que seja o valor
de sua participai;:ao;
II - distribui~ao dos resultados, propor-
cionahnente ao valor das opera1t6es
efetuadas pelo socio com a sociedade,
podendo ser atribufdo juro fixo ao capi-
tal realizado;
VIII - indivisibilida<le do fundo de re-
serva entre os s6cios, ainda que em caso
de dissoluirao da sociedade.
Art.1.095. Na sociedade cooperativa, a
responsabilidade dos s6cios pode ser li-
mitada ou ilimitada.
§ 1° E limitada a responsabilidade na
cooperativa em que o socio respon<le
somente pelo valor de suas quotas e
pelo prejufzo verificado nas operas.:oes
sociais, guardada a propon;;ao de sua
participairao nas mesmas operar,;oes.
225 CODIOO CIVIL BILlNGUE
§ 2° E ilimitada a responsabilidade. na
cooperativa em que o socio responde
soli<lariae ilimitadamente pelas obriga-
c;oes sociais.
Art. 1.096; No que a lei for omissa,
aplicam-se as disposi<roes referentes a provisions respecting general partnerships
sociedade simples, resguardadas as ca-
racterfstica~ estabelecidas no art. 1.094.
Capitulo VIII - Das Sociedades
Coligadas
Art: 1.097. Consideram-se coligadas as
socie<lades que. em suas relai;:oes de ca-
p it al. sao controladas, filiadas, ou de
simples participa\;ifo, na forma dos arti-
gos seguintes.
Art. 1.098. E controlada:
I - a sociedade de cujo capital outra so-
ciedade possua a maioria dos votos nas
deliberac;oes dos quotistas ou da asscm-
bleia geral e o poder de eleger a maioria
dos administradores;
II - a sociedade cujo controle. referido
no inciso antecedente, esteja em poder
de outra, mediante ac;oes ou quotas pos-
sufdas por sociedades ou sociedades
por esta ja controladas.
Art.1.099. Diz-se coligada ou filiada a
sociedade de cujo capital outra socieda-
de participa com dez por cento ou mais.
do capital da outra, sem controla-la.
Art. 1.100. Ede simples patticipm,;1io a
sociedade de cujo capital outra socieda-
de possua menos de dez por cento do
capital com direito de voto.
Art. 1.101. Salvo disposic;ao especial
de lei, a sociedade nao pode participar
de outra, que seja sua s6cia, por mon-
tante superior, segun<lo o balan~o. ao
das proprias reservas, exclufda a reser-
va legal.
Art. L096-l.101
§2. Liability is unlimited in a cooperative in
which each member is solidarily liable,
without limit, for the obligations of the
cooperative.
Art. 1096. Where the law is silent, the
shall apply, subject to the provisions of art.
1094.
Chapter VIII - Related Companies
Art.1097. Companies are considered to be
related where, by reason of holdings in their
capital, they are controlled, affiliates or
simply companies in which another holds
an interest, in the manner described in the
following articles:
Art. 1098. A company is controlled where:
I - another company holds, through the
capital of the controlled company, a
majority of votes on resolutions put to
meetings or to the assembly of partners,
members or shareholders, as the case may
be, and the power to elect a majority of the
administrators of the controlled company;
II - control over the company referred to in
the preceding item is held by another
company, through shares or interests held
through other controlled companies.
Art. 1099. A company in which another
company holds ten percent or more of its
capital, but does not control it, is said to be
a related or affiliated company.
Art. 1100. A company in which another
company holds less than ten percent of the
voting capital is simply a company in which
the other holds an interest.
Art. 1101. Unless otherwise specifically
provided for by law, one company may not
hold an interest in another in an amount
greater than its own reserves, excluding ihe
legal reserve, as shown on its balance sheet.
Art 1.102-1.103 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. Upon approval of a balance
sheet that shows that this limit has been
exceeded, the association may not exercise
the voting rights corresponding to the
shares or quotas in excess, which shall be
alienated in the 180 days following the
approval of the balance sheet.
Chapter IX - Liquidation of Companies
Art. 1102. Upon dissolution of a company
and appointment of a liquidator in the
manner provided for in this Book, the
company shall be liquidated in accordance
with the principles of this Chapter, subject
to the provisions of the company's
constituting act or instrument of
dissolution.
Sole paragraph. The liquidator, if not an
administrator of the company, shall be
inve&ted in his duties upon entry of his
appointment in the appropriate register.
Art. 1103. The following are duties of the
liquidator:
I - to register and publish the act, judgment
or instrument of dissolution of the
company;
II - to take the property, books and
documents of the company, wherever they
may be, into his keeping;
III - to proceed, within the fifteen days
following his investiture and with the
assistance of the administrators, whenever
possible, to draw up an inventory and
general balance sheet of assets and
liabilities;
IV - to terminate the business of the
company, realize its assets, pay its
liabilities and divide the remaining assets
among the partners, members or
shareholders;
226
Paragrafo unico. Aprovado o balan\;O
em que se verifique ter sido excedido
esse limite, a sociedade nao podeni
exercer o direito de voto corresponden-
te as a<;:oes ou quotas em excesso, as
quais devem ser alienadas nos cento e
oitenta dias seguintes aquela apro-
va11ao.
Capftulo IX- Da Liquida1;ao da
Sociedade
Art. 1.102. Dissolvida a sociedade e
nomeado o liquidante na forma do dis-
posto neste Livro, procede-se a sua li-
quida\(ao, de conformidade com os pre-
ceitos deste Capitulo, ressalvado o dis-
posto no ato constitutivo ou no instru-
mento da dissolu\(1io.
Paragrafo unico. 0 liquidante, que nao
seja administrador da sociedade, inves-
tir-se-:i nas fun11oes, averbada a sua no-
mea11ao no registro pr6prio.
Art. 1.103. Constituem deveres do li-
quidante:
I - averbar e publicar a ata, sentern;a ou
instrumento de dissolu1;1io da socie-
dade;
II - arrecadar os bens, livros e docu-
mentos da sociedade, onde quer que es-
tejam;
III - proceder, nos quinze dias seguintes
ao da sua investidura e com a assisten-
cia, sempre que possfvel, dos adminis-
tradores, a eJabora\:UO do invent:irio e
do balan\(o geral do ativo e do passivo;
IV - ultimar os neg6cios da sociedade,
realizar o ativo, pagar o passivo e parti-
lhar o remanescente entre os s6cios ou
acionista5;
227 c6moo CIVIL BILJNGUE
V - ex igir dos quotistas, quando insufi-
ciente 0 ativo asolu~ao do passivo, a in-
tegraliza~ao de suas quotas e, se for o
caso, as quantias necess:irias, nos limi-
tes da responsabilidade de cada um e
proporcionalmente arespectiva partici-
pa~fio nas perdas, repartindo-se, entre
os s6cios solventes e na mesma propor-
t;ao, o devido pelo insolvente;
VI - convocar a5sembleia dos quotistas,
cada seis meses, para apresentar relat6-
rio e balarn(o do estado da liquidm<1io,
prestando conta dos atos praticados du-
rante o semestre, ou sempre que neces-
S<irio;
VII - confessar a falencia da sociedade
e pedir concordata, de acordo com as
formalidades prescritas para o tipo de
sociedade liquidanda;
VIII- finda aliquida9ao, apresentar aos
s6cios o relat6rio da liquida1;ao e as
sua5 contas finais;
IX - averbar a ata da reuniao ou da a5-
sembleia, ou o instrumento firmado pe-
los s6cios, que considerar encerrada a
liquida1;ao.
Par:igrafo iinico. Em todos os atos, do-
cumentos ou publica\;5es, o liquidante
empregar:i a firma,ou denomhm\(1io so-
cial sempre seguida da cl:iusula "em li-
quida\:ao" e de sua assinatura indivi-
dual, com a declara11ao de sua quali-
dade.
Art. 1.104. As obriga\(oes e a responsa-
bilidade do liquidante regem-se pelos
preceitos peculiares as dos administra-
dores da sociedade liquidanda.
Art. 1.104
V - when the assets are insufficient to meet
the liabilities of the company, to require
that the members or partners pay in their
quotas in the capital of the company and
such other amounts as may be necessary,
within the limits on the liability of each
member or partner and in proportion to
their re spec ti ve shares in the losses,
dividing among the solvent members or
partners, in the same proportions, that
which is owed by insolvent members or
partners;
VI - to call an assembly of the members or
partners, every six months or whenever
necessary, to present his report and the
balance sheet showing the status of the
liquidation, rendering account of all acts
performed during the six-month period;
VII - to confess the bankruptcy of the
company and petition for composition with
creditors, in accordance with the
formalities prescribed for the form of
company under liquidation;
VIII - at the end of the liquidation, to
present to the members or partners the
liquidation report and final accounts;
IX - to register the minutes of the meeting
or assembly, or the instrument signed by
the members or partners, that holds the
liquidation to have been completed.
Sole paragraph. In all acts, documents and
publications, in which the liquidator acts on
behalf of the company, he shall add, after
the firm or corporate name, the words
"under liquidation" and his individual
signature, with a description of his
capacity.
Art. 1104. The obligations and liability of
the liquidator shall be governed by the
principles specific to the administrators of
the company under liquidation.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
An. 1.105-1.109
Art. 1105. The liquidator has powers to
represent the company and to perform all
acts necessary to its liquidation, including
alienation of movable and immovable
property, concluding settlements and
receiving and giving receipts and
acquittances.
Sole paragraph. Unless expressly
authorized under the contract of association
or by the favor:able vote of a majority of the
members or partners, the liquidator may not
enct1mber movable or immovable property,
contract loans, except where indispensable
for the payment of obligations that cannot
be postponed, or carry on the company's
business, even in order to facilitate the
liquidation.
Art. 1106. After payment of preferred
creditors, the liquidator shall pay the debts
owed by the company pro rata, without
distinction between debts due and debts not
yet due, although debts not yet due shall be
paid at a discount.
Sole paragraph. If the assets are greater
than the liabilities, the liquidator may, at his
personal liability, pay in full debts not yet
due.
Art. 1107. The members or partners may
resolve, by majority vote, before the
liquidation is terminated but after the
creditors have been paid, that the liquidator
sh'all divide the remaining assets of the
company in advance, as and when the
company's remaining assets are
determined and realized.
Art. 1108. Upon payment of liabilities and
division of the remaining assets among the
members or partners, the liquidator shall
call an assembly of the members or partners
for the rendering of final accounts.
Art. 1109. Upon approval of the final
accounts, the liquidation shall be
terminated and the company shall be
extinguished upon entry in the appropriate
register of the minutes of the assembly.
228
Art. 1.105. Compete ao Iiquidante re-
presentar a sociedade e praticar todos
a
os atos neccssarios sua Jiquida\:ao, in-
clusive alienar bens m6veis ou im6veis,
transigir, receber e dar quita~ao.
Panigrafo unico. Sem estar expressa-
mente autorizado pelo contrato social,
ou pelo voto da maioria dos s6cios, nao
pode o liquidante gravar de onus reais
os m6veis e im6veis. contrair emprcsti-
mos, salvo quando indispensaveis ao
pagamento de obrigai;:oes inadiaveis.
nem prosseguir. embora para facilitar a
liquidai;:i'io, na atividade social.
Art. 1.106. Respeitados os direitos dos
credores prefcrenciais, pagara o liqui-
dante as dfvidas socials proporcional-
mente, sem distini;;ao enrre vencidas e
vincendas, mas. em relai;:ao aestas. com
desconto.
Paragrafo unico. Seo ativo for superior
ao passivo, pode o liquidante, sob sua
responsabilidade pessoal, pagar inte-
gmlmente as dfvidas vencidas.
Art. 1.107. Os s6cios podem resolver,
por maioria de votos, antes de ultimada
a !iquida\;liO, mas depois de pagos os
credores, que o liquidante far,;a rateios
por antecipa\:i'iO da partiJha. a medida
que se apurem os haveres socials.
Art. 1.108. Pago o passivo e partilhado
o remanescente, convocara o liquidante
assembleia dos s6cios para a prestm,:ao
final de contas.
Art.1.109. Aprovadas as contas, encer-
ra-se a liquidm;;ao, ea sociedade se ex-
tingue, ao ser averbada no registro pr6-
prio a ata da assembleia.
229 CODIOO CIVIL BILiNOUE
Paragrafo unico. 0 dissidentc tern o
prazo de trinta dias, a contar da publica-
i;:ao da ata, dcvidamente averbada, para
promovcr a m;ao quc coubcr.
Art. l.110. Enccrrada a liquidai;i'io. o
credor nao satisfeito s6 tera direilo a
exigir dos s6cios. individualmente. o
pagamento do seu crcdito, ate o limite
da soma por eles reccbida em partilha, e
a propor contra o liquidante ai;:ao de
pcrdas e danos.
Art. I.111. No caso de liquidar;:i'io judi-
cial, scra observado o disposto na lei
prdcessuaL
Art. l.112. No curso de liquidiu;uo ju-
dicial. o juiz convocar<i, se necessario,
reuniao ou asscmbleia para deliberar
sobre os interesses da liquida~ao, e as
presidira, resolvendo sumariamente as
questOes suscitadas.
Paragrafo unico. As atas das assem-
b!Cias serao, em c6pia autcntica. apen-
sadas ao processo judicial.
Capitulo X - Da Transf'ormat;fio, da
Incorporai,;ao, da Fusi'io e da Cisao
das Sociedades
Art. 1.113. 0 ato de transforma\:fio in-
dcpende de dissolw;ao ou liquidai;ao da
sociedade, e obedecera aos preccitos
reguladores da constitui~ao e inscri\:i'io
pr6prios do 'tipo em que vai converter-
sc.
Art. 1.114. A transformm;;ao depende
do consentimento de todos os s6cios,
salvo se prevista no ato constitutivo,
caso em que o dissidente podera retirar-
se da sodedade, aplicando-se, no silen-
cio do estatuto ou do contrato social, o
disposto no art. 1.03 !.
Art. 1.1 IO- l.114
Sole paragraph. A dissident member or
partner shall have a period of thirty days,
from publication of the duly registered
minutes, to bring any action.
Art. 1110. Upon termination of the
liquidation, an unsatisfied creditor has the
right only to demand from the members or
partners. individually, payment of the debt,
limited to the amount received by them in
the di vision of the company's assets and to
bring action for damages against the
liquidator.
Art. 1111. In the case of judicial
liquidation. the provisions of procedural
law shall apply.
Art. 1112. In the course of judicial
liquidation, the judge shall call, if
necessary, a meeting or assembly of
members or partners to consider matters
related to the liquidation, shall preside over
the meeting or assembly, and shall resolve,
summarily, all questions raised.
Sole paragraph. An authenticated copy of
the minutes of the assembly shall be
attached to the record of the judicial
liquidation proceeding.
Chapter X - Transformation, Merger,
Consolidation and Split of
Companies
Art. 1113. Transformation of a company
shall not require or result in its dissolution
or liquidation and shall comply with the
principles that govern the constitution and
registration of the form of company into
which it is to be is transformed.
Art. 1114. Transformation of a company
requires the conse11t of all its members or
partners, unless otherwise provided for in
its constituting documents, in which case
any dissenting member or partner may
dissociate and, where the corporate statute
or contract of association is silent, the
provisions of art. I 031 shall apply.
Art. I.I 15-1.118 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1115. Transformation shall not in any
case modify or injure the rights of creditors.
Sole paragraph. Bankruptcy of a
transfonned company shall produce effects
only in relation to those members or
partners who, in the earlier form, were
subject to such effects, if so requested by
creditors holding debts antedating the
transfonnation, and shall benefit only such
creditors.
Art. 1116. In a merger, one or more
companies are absorbed into another,
which succeeds the merged companies in
all their rights and obligations. The merger
must be approved by all the companies, in
the manner provided for their respective
fonns.
Art. 1117. The resolution adopted by the
members or partners of a company that is to
be absorbed must approve the bases of the
transaction and the draft of the amended
constituting act of the post-merger
company.
§ 1. The company that is to be absorbed
shall examine the draft constituting act and,
if the act is approved, shall authorize its
administrators to do all things necessary to
carry out the merger, including the
subscription of capital, by transfer of
property, in an amount equal to the
difference between the assets and the
liabilities,
§2.Theresolution adopted by the members
or partners of the absorbing company shall
include the appointment of experts to
evaluate the net worth of the company to be
absorbed.
Art. 1118. Upon approval of the
instruments of the merger, the absorbing
company shall declare the absorbed
company to be extinguished and shall cause
an entry to that effect to be m.ade in the
appropriate register.
230
Art.1.115. A transfonna~1io nao modi-
ficarii nem prejudicarii, em qualquer
caso, os direitos dos credores.
Pariigrafo unico. A falencia da socieda-
de transformada somente produzira
efeitos em rela~ao aos s6cios que, no
ti po anterior, a eles estariam sujeitos, se
0 pedirem OS titu)ares de creditOS ante-
a
riores transforma~ao, e somente a es-
tes beneftciarii.
Art. 1.116. Na incorpora~ao, uma ou
viirias sociedades s1io absorvidas por
outra, que !hes sucede em todos os di-
reitos e obriga~oes, devendo todas
aprovii-la, na forma estabelecida para
os respectivos tipos.
Art.1.117. A delibera\:ao dos s6cios da
sociedade incorporada deverii aprovar
as bases da operai;ao e o projeto de re-
forma do ato constitutivo.
§ 1° A sociedade que houver de ser in-
corporada tomarii conhecimento desse
ato, e, se o aprovar, autorizara os admi-
nistradores a praticar o necessiirio ain-
corporm,:ao, inclusive a subscrii;:ao em
bens pelo valor da diferen\;a que se ve-
rificar entre o ativo e o passivo.
§ 2° A deliberac;:ao dos s6cios da socie-
dade incorporadora compreendera a
nomea\;iiO dos peritos para a avalia~ao
do patrim6nio lfquido da sociedade,
que tenha de ser incorporada.
ArL 1.118. Aprovados os atos da incor-
porac;:ao, a incorporadora declararii ex-
tinta a incorporada, e promovera a res-
pectiva averbac;:ao no registro pr6prio.
231 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.119. A fusao detennina a extin-
\:lio das sociedades que se unem, para
formar sociedade nova, que a elas suce-
dera nos direitos e obrigac;:oes.
Art. 1.120. A fusiio serii decidida, na
forma estabelecida para os respectivos
tipos, pelas sociedades que pretendam
unir-se.
§ l 0 Em reuniao oll assembleia dos s6-
cios de cada sociedade, deliberada a fu-
s1io e aprovado o projeto do ato consti-
tutivo da nova sociedade, bem coma o
piano de distribuic;:ao do capital social,
ser1io nomeados os perjtos para a ava-
liac;:ao do patrim6nio da sociedade.
§ 2° Apresentados os Jaudos, os admi-
nistradores convocarao reuniao ou as-
sembleia dos s6cios para tomar conhe-
cimento deles, decidindo sobre a cons-
tituic;:ao definitiva da nova sociedade.
§ 3° E vedado aos s6cios votar o laudo
de avalia\:aO do patrim6nio da socieda-
de de que fa1rrun parte.
Art. 1.121. Constitufda anova socieda-
de, aos administradores incumbe fazer
inscrever, no registro pr6prio da sede,
a
OS atos reJatiVOS fusao.
Art. 1.122. Ate noventa dias ap6s pu-
a
blicados OS atos relativos incorpora-
i;ao, fusao ou cisao, o credor anterior,
por ela prejudicado, poderii promover
judicialmente a anulai;ao deles.
§ I 0 A consignm;:ao em pagamento pre-
judicara a anulac;:ao pleiteada.
Art. l.l 19-l.l22
Art. 1119. Consolidation brings about the
extinction of the companies that join to
form a new company, which shall succeed
them in their rights and obligations.
Art.1120. Consolidation shall be approved
by the companies that are to be joined, in
the manner established for their respective
fonn.
§ 1. At the meeting or assembly of members
or partners of each company, after the
consolidation, the draft constituting act of
the new company and the proposed division
of the capital of the company have been
approved, experts shall be appointed to
evaluate the assets and liabilities of the
company.
§2. Upon submission of the valuation
reports, the administrators shall call a
meeting or assembly of the members or
partners to examine the reports and decide
on the definite constitution of a new
company.
§3. Members or partners are prohibited
from voting on the report on the assets and
liabilities of the company to which they
befong.
Art. 1121. Upon constitution of the new
company, the administrators shall cause the
instruments of consolidation to be recorded
in the register for the place at which the new
company has the seat of its administration.
Art. 1122. During a period of ninety days
from publication of the instruments of
merger, consolidation or split, a prior
creditor who has been injured by the
merger, consolidation or split may file a
judicial action to have the instruments
annulled.
§ 1. Deposit into court of the debt shall be
grounds to dismiss the action for
declaration of nullity.
Art. Ll23-Ll25 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. If the debt is not liquid, the company
may provide security for payment, which
shall suspend the action for declaration of
nullity.
§3. If within the time period established in
this article, the absorbing company, the
new company or the split company
becomes bankrupt, any prior creditor shall
have the right to request that the
patrimonies of the companies be separated,
in order to have his debts paid from the
mass of property belonging to the former
companies.
Chapter XI - Companies Requiring
Authorization
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 1123. A company that requires
authorization from the Executive Branch of
Government in order to operate shall be
governed by this title, without prejudice to
provisions under special legislation.
Sole paragraph. Power to grant
authorization shall always be in the
Executive Branch of the Federal
Government.
Art. 1124. If no other time period is
stipulated in legislation or an act issued by
the government, authorization shall be
deemed to have expired if the company
does not commence operating within
twelve months from publication of the
authorization.
Art. 1125. The Executive Branch may, at
any time, cancel authorization granted to a
national or foreign company that infringes
any provision of public order or performs
acts contrary to the purposes declared in its
corporate statute.
232
§ 2° Sendo iliquida a dfvida. a socteda-
de podera garantir-lhe a execrn;ao. sus-
pendendo-se o processo de anulrn;:ao.
§ 3° Ocorrendo. no prazo deste artigo, a
falencia dasociedadc incorporadora, da
sociedade nova ou da cindida, qualquer
credor imterior tera direito a pedir a se-
parai,;ao dos patrimonios, para o fim de
serem os creditos pagos pelos bcns das
respectivas massas.
Capitulo XI- Da Socicdadc
Dependente de Autorizai,;ao
Sei,;iio I - Disposii,;oes Gerais
Art. 1.123. A sociedade que dependade
autoriza~ao do Poder Executivo para
funcionar reger-se-:i por este titulo. sem
prejuizo do disposto em lei especial.
Paragrafo unico. A competcncia para a
autorizai;ao sera sempre do Poder Exc-
cutivo federal.
Art. 1.124. Na falta de prazo estipulado
em lei ou em ato do poder publico, scra
considerada caduca a autorizai;ao se a
sociedade nao entrar em funcionamen-
to nos doze meses seguintes arespecti-
va publica~ao.
Art. 1.125. Ao Poder Executivo e fa-
cultado, a qualquer tempo, cassar a au-
torizai;ao concedida a sociedadc nacio-
nal ou estrangeira que infringir disposi-
\:UO de ordem publica ou praticar atos
contrarios aos fins declarados no seu
estatuto.
233 CODIGO CIVIL BlLINGUE
Sei,;ao II - Da Sociedade Nacional
Art. 1.126. E nacional a sociedade or-
ganizada de conformidade com a lei
brasileira e que tenha no Pafs a sede de
sua adminisrrai;:ao.
Paragrafo unico. Quando a lei cxigir
que todos ou alguns s6cios sejam brasi-
leiros, as m;:oes da sociedade anonima
revestirao, no silencio da lei, a forma
nominativa. Qualquer que seja o ti po da
sociedade, na sua sede ficara arquivada
c6pia autentica do documento compro-
bat6rio da nacionalidade dos s6cios.
Art.1.127. Nao havera mudim<;a de na-
cionalidade de sociedade brasileira sem
o consentimento unanime dos s6cios
ou acionistas.
Art. 1.128. 0 requerimento de autori-
zai;ao de sociedade nacional deve ser
acompanhado de c6pia do contrato, as-
sinada por todos os s6cios, ou, tratando-
se de sociedade imonima, de c6pia, au-
tenticada pelos fundadores, dos docu-
mentos exigidos pela lei especial.
Paragrafo unico. Se a sociedade tiver
sido constitui'da por escritura publica,
bastara juntar-se ao requerimento a res-
pectiva certidao.
Art. 1.129. Ao Poder Executivo e fa-
cultado exigir que se proccdam a altera-
i;oes ou aditamcnto no contrato ou no
estatuto, devendo os s6cios, ou. tratan-
do-se de sociedade anonima, os funda-
dores, cumprir as formalidades legais
para revisao dos atos constitutivos, e
juntar ao processo prova regular.
Art. 1.130. Ao Poder Executivo e fa-
cultado recusar a autoriza\:aO, se a so-
ciedade nao atender as condi;;:oes eco-
nomicas, financeiras OU jurfdicas espe-
cificadas em lei.
Art. 1.126-1.130
Section II - National Companies
Art. 1126. A company that is organized
under Brazilian law and that has the seat of
its administration in the country is a
national company.
Sole paragraph. Where the legislation
requires that all or some of the members of
the company be Brazilian, the shares in the
corporation shall be nominative, unless the
legislation otherwise provides. Regardless
of the form of the company, an
authenticated copy of the document that
evidences the nationality of its members
shall be filed at the seat of the company's
administration.
Art. 1127. The nationality of a Brazilian
company may not be changed without the
unanimous consent of its members or
shareholders.
Art.1128. An application for authorization
by a national company shall be
accompanied by a copy of its contract of
association, signed by all the members, or,
in the case of a corporation, by a copy,
certified by the founders, of those
documents required by special legislation.
Sole paragraph. If the company was
constituted by public writing, it is sufficient
to attach the corresponding certificate to
the application.
Art. 1129. The Executive Branch may
require that amendments be made to .the
contract of association or corporate statute
and the members or, in the case of a
corporation, the founders, shall comply
with the legal formalities for amending the
constituting instruments of the company
and submit proof of amendment.
Art. 1130. The Executive Branch may
refuse to grant authorization if the company
does not meet the economic, financial or
legal conditions specified by legislation.
 Art. 1.131-1.134 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1131. Upon issue of the decree of
authorization, the company shall publish
the instruments referred to in arts. 1128 and
1129, within thirty days, in the official
gazette of the Union. A copy of the
published instruments shall represent proof
for the purposes of registration, in the
~ppropriate register, of the constituting
mstruments of the company.
Sole paragraph. The company shall also
publish the certificate of registration in the
official gazette of the Union within a period
of thirty days.
Art. 1132. National corporations that
require authorization to operate shall not be
constituted until authorization is obtained
ifthe founders intend to form the capital of
the corporation through public
subscription.
§I. The founders must attach to the
application authenticated copies of the
draft corporate statute and prospectus.
§2. Once authorization has been obtained
and the corporation constituted, the
constit1,1ting instruments of the corporation
sliall be registered. · § 2° Os documentos serao autenticados,
Art. 1133. Amendment of the contract of
associ.ation or corporate statute of a
company subject to authorization by the
Executive Branch is also subject to
approval, unless the amendment results
from an increase in capital due to
capitalization of reserves or revaluation of
assets.
Section III - Foreign
Companies
Art. 1134~ A foreign company, regardless
of its purpose, may not operate in the
country without the authorization of the
Exec1,1tive Branch, even through
subordinate establishments, although it
may, except in those cases expressly
provided for by law, be a shareholder·of a
Brazilian corporation.
234
Art.1.131. Expedido o decreto de auto-
a
riz~ao, cumprira sociedade publicar
os atos referidos nos arcs. 1.128 e !.129.
em trinta dias, no 6rgao oficial da
Uniao, cujo exemplar representani pro-
va para inscri9ao, no registro pr6prio,
dos atos constitutivos da sociedade:
Paragrafo (mico. A sociedade promo-
vera, tambem no 6rgao oficial da Uniiio
e no prazo de trinta dias, a publicai;ao
do termo de inscri9ao.
Art. 1.132. As sociedades anonimas nacio-
nais, que dependam de autoriza~ao do Poder
Executivo para funcionar, nao se constitui-
rao sem obte-la, quando seus fundadores
pretenderem recorrer a subscriqao pt'iblica
para a forma9iio do capital.
§ 1° Os fundadores deverao juntar ao
requerimento c6pias autenticas do pro-
jeto do estatuto e do prospecto.
§ 2° Obtida a autoriza~ao e constitulda
a
a sociedade, proceder-se-a inscric;ao
dos seus atos constitutivos.
Art. 1.133. Dependem de aprova91io as
modificac;5es do contrato ou do estatuto
de sociedade sujeita a autorizac;ao do
Poder Executivo, salvo se decorrerem
de aumento do capital social, em virtu-
de de utilizac;ao de reservas ou reavalia-
c;ao do ativo.
Se~o III- Da Sociedade
Estrangeira
Art. 1.134. A sociedade estrangeira,
qualquer que seja o seu objeto, nao
pode, sem autoriza9ao do Poder Execu-
tivo, funcionar no Pals, ainda q ue por
estabelecimentos subordinados, poden-
do, todavia, ressalvados os casos ex-
pressos em lei, ser acionista de socieda-
de anonima brasileira.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
235
§ 1° Ao requerimento de autorizai;ao
devem juntar-se:
I - prova de se achar a sociedade consti-
tuida conforme a lei de seu pais;
II - inteiro teor do contrato ou do esta-
tuto;
III - relac;ao dos membros de todos os
6rg1ios da administrai;;ao da sociedade,
com nome, nacionalidade, profissao,
domicflio e, salvo quanto a a9iies ao
portador, o valor da participai;:ao de
cada um no capital da sociedade;
IV - c6pia do ato que autorizou o fun-
cionamento no Brasil e fixou o capital
as
destinado oper~iies no territ6rio na-
cional;
V - prova de nomeac;ao do repre-
seutante no Brasil, com poderes expres-
sos para aceitar as condic;iies exigidas
para a autoriza9ao;
VI - ultimo balani;o.
de conformidade com a lei nacional da
sociedade requerente, legalizados no
consulado brasileiro da respectiva sede
e acompanhados de tradu9iio em vermi-
culo.
Art. 1.135. E facultado ao Poder Exe-
cutivo, para conceder a autorizai;ao, es-
tabelecer condi9oes convenientes a de-
fesa dos interesses nacionais.
Paragrafo unico. Aceitas as condi~oes,
expedira o Poder Executivo decreto de
autoriza9ao, do qua! constara o mon-
tante de capital destinado as opera9iies
a
no Pafs, cabendo sociedade promover
a pub!ica~ao dos atos referidos no art.
1.131eno§1° do art. l.134.
Art. 1.135
§ 1. The following documents shall be
attached to the application for
authorization:
I - proof that the company is constituted in
accordance with the laws of its country;
II - the entire text of its contract of
association or corporate statute;
III - a list of all the members of the
management bodies of the company, with
their name, nationality, profession,
domicile and, with the exception of bearer
shares, the amount of capital held by each
of them in the company;
IV - a copy of the instrument that
authorized operations in Brazil and fixed
the capital allocated to operations in the
country;
V - proof of appointment of a
representative in Brazil, with express
powers to accept conditions imposed for
the grant of authorization;
VI - the most recent balance sheet.
§2. The documents shall be authenticated in
accordance with the law of the country of
the applicant company, certified by the
Brazilian consulate with jurisdiction over
the seat of the company's administration,
and accompanied by a translation into the
Brazilian Portuguese language.
Art. 1135. The Executive Branch may
impose on the grant of authorization such
conditions as it considers convenient to the
defense of national interests.
Sole paragraph. Upon acceptance of the
conditions, the Executive Branch shall
issue a decree of authorization, in which
shall be stated the amount of capital
allocated to operations in Brazil, and the
company shall cause the instruments
referred to in art. 1131 and art. 1134§ l to be
published.
Art. 1.136-1.137 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1136. An authorized company may not
begin operations before it has been registered
in the competent register for the place in
which the company will establish itself.
§1. The application for registration shall be
accompanied by a copy of the publication
mentioned in the sole paragraph of the
preceding article and proof of deposit in an
official banking establishment of the
capital mentioned therein, in cash.
§2. Upon filing of such documents,
registration shall be made by entry in a
special book for foreign companies, with
all registered companies numbered
consecutively; the entry shall state:
I - the name, purpose and duration of the
company and the seat of its administration
outside Brazil;
II- the place of the branch, agency or office
in the Country;
ill - the date and number of the decree of
authorization;
IV - the capital allocated to operations in
the CouQtry;
V - the particulars of the company's
permanent representative.
§3. Upon registration, the company shall
cause its registration to be published in
accordance with the provisions of the sole
paragraph of art. 1131.
Art. li37. A foreign company authorized
to operate in Brazil shall be subject to
Brazilian laws and courts with respect to
acts and transactions performed in Brazil.
Sole paragraph. The foreign company shall
operate in Brazil under the name that it has
in its country of origin, although it may add
the words "of Brazil" or "for Brazil".
236
Art. 1.136. A sociedade autorizada nao
pode iniciar sua atividade antes de ins-
crita no registro pr6prio do lugar em
que se deva estabelecer.
§ I 0 0 requerimento de inscri1;ao sera
instrufdo com exemplar da publicar;ao
exigida no paragrafo iinico do artigo
antecedente, acompanhado de docu-
mento do dep6sito em dinheiro, em es-
tabelecimento bancario oficial, do capi-
tal ali mencionado.
§ 2° Arquivados esses documentos, a
inscrii;ao sera feita por termo em livro
especial para as sociedades estrangei-
ras, com niimero de ordem contfnuo
para todas as sociedades inscritas; no
termo constarao:
I - name, objeto, dura1;1io e sede da so-
ciedade no estrangeiro;
II - lugar da sucursal, filial ou agencia,
no Pais;
III - data e niimero do decreto de autori-
za1;ao;
IV - capital destinado as opera1;oes no
Pais;
V - individua1;ao do seu representante
permanente.
§ 3° Inscrita a sociedade, promover-se-
a a publica~ao determinada no paragra-
fo iinico do art. 1.131.
Art.1.137. A sociedade estrangeira au-
torizada a funcionar ficara sujeita as
leis e aos tribunais brasileiros, quanta
aos atos ou opera~oes praticados no
Brasil.
Paragrafo iinico. A sociedade estran-
geira funcionara no territ6rio nacional
com o nome que tiver em seu pals de
origem, podendo acrescentar as pala-
vras "do Brasil" ou "parao Brasil".
237 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.138. A sociedade esrrangeira au-
torizada a funcionar e obrigada a ter,
permanentemente, representante no
Brasil, com poderes para resolver
quaisquer questoes e receber citac;ao ju-
dicial pela sociedade.
Pan!grafo unico. 0 representante so-
mente pode agir perante terceiros de-
pois de arquivado e averbado o instru-
mento de sua nomea~ao.
Art. 1.139. Qualquer modilica1;1io no
contrato ou no estatutn dependeni da
aprova1;ao do Poder Exect.itivo, para
produzir efeitos no tcrrit6rio nacional.
Art. 1.140. A sociedade estrangeira
devc, sob pcna de !he ser cassada a au-
toriza1;ao, reproduzir no 6rgao oficial
da Uniiio, c do Estado, se for o caso, as
publicai;oes que, segundo a sua lei na-
cional. seja obrigada a fazer relativa-
mente ao balam;:o patrimonial e ao de
resultado econ6mico, bem como aos
atos de sua adminisrra1;ao.
Paragrafo iinico. Sob pena, tambem, de
!he ser cassada a autoriza~ao, a socieda-
de esirangeira devera publicar o balan-
~o patrimonial e o de resultado econ6-
mico das sucursais, filiais ou agencias
existentes no Pafs.
Art. 1.141. Mediante autoriza1;ao do
Poder Executivo, a sociedade estran-
geira admitida a funcionar no Pals pode
nacionalizar-se, transferindo sua sede
para o Brasil.
§ I 0 Para o firµ previsto neste artigo, de-
ve ra a sociedade, por seus repre-
sentantes, oferecer, com o requerimen-
to, os documentos exigidos no.art.
1.134, e ainda a prova da realiza1;ao do
capital, pela forma declarada no contra-
to, ou no estatuto, e do ato em que foi
deliberada a nacionalizac;ao.
Art. Ll38-l.141
Art. 1138. A foreign company authorized
to operate in Brazil must have a permanent
representative in Brazil, with powers to
decide any matter and receive citation in
judicial proceedings in Brazil.
Sole paragraph. The representative may
exercise his powers with respect to third
parties only after the instrument of his
appointment has been registered.
Art. 1139. In order to produce effects in
Brazil, any change in the contract of
association or corporate statute of the
foreign company shall be subject to
approval by the Executive Branch.
Art. 1140. The foreign company must, on
pain of cancellation of its authorization,
reproduce in the official gazette of the
Union all publicatiOns that it is required to
make under the laws of its country of origin
in connection with it<; balance sheet, profit
and loss statement and the acts of its
administration.
Sole paragraph. The foreign company must
also publish, on pain of cancellation of its
authorization, the balance sheet and profit
and loss statement for its branches,
agencies and offices in the Country.
Art.1141. By authorization granted by the
Executive Branch, a foreign company
having permission to operate in Brazil may
be nationalized, transferring the seat of its
administration to Brazil.
§ 1. For the purposes of this article, the
company, through its representatives, shall
submit with the application the documents
required under art. 1134, together with
proof that the capital has been paid in in the
manner stated in the contract of association
or corporate statute and proof of the act by
which nationalization of the company was
approved.

Art, 1.142- 1.146 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. The Executive Branch may impose
conditions on the nationalization of the
company that it deems to be convenient to
the defense of national interests.
§3. Upon acceptance of the conditions, the
Executive Branch shall issue a decree of
atithoriz11tion,. whereupon the company
shall be registered and the registration shall
be published.
Title III - Establishments
Sole Chapter - General Provisions
Art.1142. Any complex of assets organized
by a business proprietor or a business
company for the purpose of carrying on an
enterprise is an establishment. . rio, ou por sociedade empresaria.
Art. 1143. An establishment, considered as
a unit, may be the object of rights and of
juridical transactions, either translative or
cpnstitutive, which are compatible with its
nature.
Art. 1144. Any contract intended to
alienate, grant usufruct in or lease an
establishment produces effects against third
parties only after it has been entered in the
margin of the record of the business
proprietor or business company in the Public
Register of Mercantile Erlferprises and has
been puolished.in the official gazette.
Art. 1145. If the alienor does not have
sufficient assets to meet his liabilities, the
efficacy of the alienation of the
establishment depends on payment of all
creditors or on the consent of such
creditors, either express or tacit, within 30
days from their notification.
Art. 1146. The acquiror of the
establishment is liable for the payment of
all debts prior to the transfer, provided that
such debts have been duly entered in the
accounts. The original debtor remains
solidarily liable for a period of one year
from the date of publication, with respect to
debts that have fallen due, and from the due
date, with respect to all other debts.
238
§ 2° 0 Poder Executivo podcrii impor as
condi~iies que julgar convenientesade-
fesa dos interesses nacionais.
§ 3° Aceitas as condi91ies pelo repre-
sentante, proceder-se-a, ap6s a expedi-
9ao do decreto de autoriza9ao, a inscri-
9ao da sociedade e publica9ao do res-
pectivo termo.
Titulo III - Do Estabelecimento
Capftulo Unico - Disposi9oes Gerais
Art. 1.142. Considera-se estabelecimen-
to todo complexo de bens organizado,
para exercicio da empresa, por empresa-
Art. 1.143. Pode o estabelecimento ser
objeto unitario de direitos e de neg6cios
jurfdicos, translativos ou constitutivos,
que sejam compatfveis com a sua natu-
reza.
Art. 1.144. 0 contrato que tenha por
objeto a alien~iio, o usufruto ou arrenda-
mento do estabelecimento, s6 produzira
efeitos quanta a terceiros depois de aver-
bado amargem da inscri9ao do empre-
slirio, ou d.a sociedade empresaria, no
Registro Pt'.iblico de Empresas Mercanc
tis, e de publicado na imprensa oficial.
Art. 1.145. Se ao alienante nao resta-
rem bens suficientes para solver o seu
passivo, a eficacia da alien~ao do esta-
belecimento depende do pagamento de
todos os credores, ou do consentimento
destes, de modo expresso ou tacito, em
trinta dias a partir de sua notificar,:ao.
Art. 1.146. 0 adquirente do estabeleci-
mento responde pelo pagamento dos
debitos anteriores a transferencia, des-
de que regularmente contabilizados,
continuando o devedor primitivo soli-
dariamente obrigado pelo prazo de um
ano, a partir, quanta aos creditos venci-
dos, da publicar;:ao, e, quanto aos ou-
tros, da data do vencimento.
239 CODIGO CIVIL BILING(JE
Art. 1.147. Nao havendo autorizai;:ao
expressa, o alienante do estabelecimen-
to nao pode fazer concorrencia ao ad-
quirente, nos cinco anos subseqtientes a
transferencia.
Paragrafo unico. No caso de arrenda-
mento ou usufruto do estabelechnento.
a proibi9ao prevista neste artigo persis-
tira durante o prazo do contrato.
Art. 1.148. Salvo disposir;:ao em con-
trario,,a transferencia importa a sub-ro-
ga1rao do adquirente nos contratos esti-
pulados para explora9ao do estabeleci-
mento, se nao tiverem carater pessoal,
pod en do os terceiros rescindir o contra-
to em noventa dias a contar da publica-
9ao da transferencia, se ocorrer justa
causa, ressalvada, neste. caso, a respon-
sabilidade do alienante.
Art. 1.149, A cessao dos creditos refe-
rentes ao estabelecimento transferido
produzira efeito em relm;:ao aos respec-
tivos devedores, desde o momento da
publicar;:ao da transferencia. mas o de-
vedor ficara exonerado se de boa-fe pa-
gar ao cedente.
Titulo IV - Dos Institutos
Complementares
Capitulo I - Do Registro
Art. 1,150. 0 empreslirio e a sociedade
empresaria vinculam-se ao Registro
Publico de Empresas Mercantis a cargo
das Juntas Comerciais, ea sociedade
simples ao Registro Civil das Pessoas
Jurfdicas, 0 qual devera obedecer as
norma.~ fixadas para aquele registro, se
a sociedade simples adotar um dos tipos
de sociedade empresaria.
Art. 1.147-1.150
Art.1147. Unless expressly authorized, the
alienor of an establishment may not
compete with the acquiror during the five
years following the transfer.
Sole paragraph. In the case of lease or
usufruct of an establishment, the
prohibition contained in this article shall
have effect during the term of the contract.
Art. 1148. Unless otherwise provided for,
transfer shall subrogate the acquiror in
contracts entered into for the operation of
the establishment, if they are not personal
in nature. The other party may terminate the
contract within ninety days of publication
of the transfer if there is just cause to do so
and, in that case, the transferor remains
liable.
Art. 1149. An assignment of debts related
to the establishment shall produce effects.
with respect to the debtors of the assigned
debts from publication of the transfer, but
the debtor shall be released if, in good faith,
he pays the assignor.
Title IV - Complementary
Institutes
Chapter I - Registration
Art. 1150. Business proprietors and
business companies are subject to
registration in the Public Register of
Mercantile Enterprises under the
responsibility of the Boards of Trade.
Simple companies are subject to
registration in the Civil Register of Legal
Persons, which shall be subjectto the rules
established for the Public Register of
Mercantile Enterprises, if the simple
company adopts one of the forms of a
business company.
Art. 1.151-1.152 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1151. The recording of instruments
subject to the formality imposed by the
preceding article shall be applied for by the
persons obliged by law to do so or, in cases
of omission or delay, by a member of the
company or any interested party.
§ 1. The documents necessary for
registration of instruments shall be
presented within thirty days from the date
on which the instrument was drawn up.
§2. If registration is applied for after expiry
of the period of time provided for in this
article, the registration shall produce
effects only from the date it is granted.
§3. The persons obligated to apply for
registration are liable in damages in the
event of omission or delay.
Art. 1152. The government agency
responsible for the register shall verify that
the publications required by law have been
duly made, in accordance with the
paragraphs of this article.
§1. Unless expressly otherwise provided
for, any p1,1b1ication required under this
Book shall be made in the official gazette of
the Union or the State, according to the
place of the seat of the business proprietor's
or company's administration, and in a
widely-circulated newspaper.
§2. Publication to be made by foreign
companies shall be made in the official
gazette of the Union and of the State in
which they have branches, offices or
agencies.
§3. Notice of an assembly of the partners or
members of a company shall be published
at least three times, with at least eight days
between the date of the first publication of
the notice and the date of the meeting, for
the first call, and at least five days, for
subsequent calls.
240
Art. 1.151. 0 registro dos atos sujeitos
aformalidade exigida no artigo antece-
dcnte sera requerido pela pessoa ohri-
gada em lei, e, no caso de omissao au
demora, pelo socio OU qualquer interes-
sado.
§ 1° Os documentos necessarios ao rc-
gistro dcverao ser apresentados no pra-
zo de trinta dias. contado da lavratura
dos atos respectivos.
§ 2° Requerido alem do prazo prcvisto
neste artigo, a registro somente produ-
zira efeito a partir da data de sua con-
cessao.
§ 3° As pessoas obrigadas a requcrer a
registro responderao par perdas e da-
nos, em caso de omissao ou demora.
Art. 1.152. Cabe ao 6rgao incumbido
do registro verificar a regularidade das
puhlica~oes determinadas em lei, de
acordo com o disposto nos paragrafos
deste artigo.
§ l • Salvo exce~ao expressa, as puhli-
ca<;:oes ordenadas neste Livro serao fei-
tas no 6rgao oficial da Uniao au do Es-
tado, conforme o local da sede do em-
presario au da sociedade, e em jomal de
grande circulac;ao.
§ 2° As publica~oes das sociedades es-
trangeiras serao feitas nos 6rgaos ofi-
ciais da Uniao e do Estado onde tiverem
sucursais, filiais au agendas.
§ 3° 0 anuncio de convoca~ao da as-
semhleia de s6cios seni puhlicado por
tres vezes, ao menos, devendo mediar,
entre a data da primeira inser~ao e a da
realiza91io da assemhleia, a prazo mini-
ma de oito dias, para a primeira convo-
ca~ao, e de cinco dias, para as poste-
riores.
241 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.153. Cumpre a autoridade com-
petente, antes de efetivar a registro, ve-
rificar a autenticidade e a Iegitimidade
do signatario do requerimento, hem
coma fiscalizar a observancia das pres-
crii;:oes Iegais concementes ao ato au
aos documentos apresentados.
Paragrafo unico. Das irregularidades
encontradas deve ser notificado o re-
q uerente, que, se for o caso, podera
Sana-las, obedecendo as formalidades
dalei.
Art. 1.154. 0 ato sujeito a registro, res-
salvadas disposi~oes especiais da lei,
nao pode, antes do cumprimento das
respectivas formalidades, ser oposto a
terceiro, salvo prova de que este a co-
nhecia.
Paragrafo unico. 0 terceiro nao pode
alegar ignorancia, desde que cumpridas
as referidas formalidades.
Capitulo II - Do Nome Empresarial
Art. 1.155. Considera-se name empre-
sarial a firma au a denominac;:ao adota-
da, de conformidade com este Capftulo,
para a exercfcio de empresa.
Paragrafo unico. Equipara-se ao name
empresarial, para as efeitos da prote~ao
da lei, a denominac;:ao das sociedades
simples, associac;:oes e fundai,:oes.
Art. 1.156. 0 empresario opera sob fir-
ma constitufda par seu name, completo
au ahreviado, aditando-Ihe, se quiser,
designa~ao mais precisa da sua pessoa
ou do genera de atividade.
Art. 1.157. A sociedade em que houver
s6cios de responsahilidade ilimitada
operant sob firma, na qua! somente os
names daqueles poderao figurar, lias-
tando para forma-la aditar ao name de
um deles a expressao "e companhia" au
sua abreviatura.
Art. 1.153-1.157
Art. 1153. The competent authority shall,
before making the entry in the register,
verify the authenticity and legitimacy of the
person signing the application for
registration and ensure that the instruments
and documents presented comply with the
law.
Sole paragraph. Any defects or omissions
shall be notified to the applicant, who shall,
if possible, cure the defect or omission,
complying with the formalities prescribed
bylaw.
Art. 1154. Unless otherwise specifically
provided for by law, an instrument subject
to registration cannot be opposed to third
parties until the formalities prescribed by
law have been fulfilled, unless the third
party is proved to have been aware of the
instrument.
Sole paragraph. A third party may not
allege ignorance of the instrument if the
said formalities have been fulfilled.
Chapter IT - Business Name
Art. 1155. A business name is any firm
name or corporate name adopted in
accordance with tlie provisions of this
Chapter for the purpose of engaging in an
enterprise.
Sole paragraph. The name of simple
companies, associations and foundations
has the same protection given by law to a
business name.
Art. 1156. A business proprietor operates
under a firm name composed of his name,
in full or abbreviated, together with, if he
wishes; a more precise description of his
person or type of business.
Art. 1157. A company that has partners
with unlimited liability shall operate under
a firm name in which only the names of
such partners may appear, together with the
expression "and company" or an
abbreviation thereof.

Art. 1.158-1.161 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. Any person whose name
appears in the firm name referred to in this
article has solidary and unlimited liability
for all obligations contracted in the firm
name.
Art. 1158. A limited liability partnership
may adopt a firm name or corporate name
ending with the word "limited'' or an
abbreviation thereof.
§ 1. The firm name may be composed of the
names of one or more partners, provided
that they are natural persons, so as to
indicate their association.
§2. A corporate name shall indicate the
purpose of the partnership, and may contain
the name or one or more partners.
§3. Failure to include the word "limited"
results in solidary and unlimited liability
for the administrators who so employed the
firm name or corporate name of the
company.
Art. 1159. A cooperative operates under a
corporate name that i.ncludes the word
"cooperative",
Art. 1160. A corporation operates under a
corporate name that indicates the purpose
of the corporation and includes the
expressions "corporation" or "company"
in full or in abbreviated form.
Sole paragraph. The corporate name may
contain the name of a founder, shareholder
or person who contributed to the successful
formation of the business.
Art. 1161. A joint stock company may,
instead of a firm name, adopt a corporate
name that indicates its corporate purpose
and includes the expression "joint stock
company".
242
Paragrafo unico. Ficam solidaria e i!i-
mitadamente responsaveis pelas obri-
gai;;oes contrafdas sob a firma social
aqueles que, por seus nomes, figurarem
na firma da sociedade de que trata este
artigo.
Art. 1.158. Pode a sociedade limitada
adotar firma ou denomina1rifo, integra-
das pela palavra final "limitada" ou a
sua abreviatura
§ 1° A firma sera composta com o nome
de um ou mais s6cios, desde que pes-
soas ffsicas, de modo indicativo darela-
1rao social.
§ 2° A denomina1rao deve designar o
objeto da sociedade, sendo permitido
nela figurar o nome de um ou mais so-
cios.
§ 3° A omissao da palavra "Jimitada"
determina a responsabilidade solid{iria
e ilimitada dos administradores que as-
sim empregarem a firma ou a denomi-
na1;ao da sociedade.
Art. 1.159. A sociedade cooperativa
funciona sob denominal(ao integrada
pelo vocabulo "cooperativa".
Art.1.160. A sociedade anonima opera
sob denomina1;ao designativa do objeto
social, integrada pelas expressoes "so-
ciedade anonima" OU "companhia", por
extenso ou abreviadamente.
Paragrafo unico. Pode constar da deno-
mina1rao o nome do fundador, acionis-
ta, ou pessoa que haja concorrido para o
born t:xito da formai;:ao da empresa.
Art. 1.161. A sociedade em comandita
por a1;oes pode, em lugar de firma, ado-
tar denomina1;ao designativa do objew
social, aditada da expressao "comandi-
ta por ar;oes".
CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
243
Art. 1.162. A sociedade em coma de
participa\:liO IlUO pode ter firma OU de-
nomina(,!UO.
Art.1.163. 0 nome de empresario dcve
distinguir-se de qualquer outro ja ins-
crito no mesmo registro.
Paragrafo unico. Se o emprcsario tiver
nome idcntico ao de outrosja inscritos,
devera acrescentar designao;:ao que o
distinga.
Art. 1.164. 0 nome empresarial nao
pode ser objeto de aliena1rao.
Paragrafo unico. O adquirente de esta-
belecimento, por ato entre vivos, pode,
se o contrato o permitir, usar o nmne do
alienante, precedido do seu pr6prio.
com a qualificar;ao de sucessor.
Art.1.165. 0 nome de s6cio que vier a
falecer, for exclufdo ou se retirar, niio
pode ser conservado na firma social.
Art. 1.166. A inscril;ao do empresario,
ou dos atos constitutivos das pessoas
jurfdicas, ou as respectivas averba96es,
no registro pr6prio, asseguram o uso
exclusivo do nome nos limites do res-
pectivo Estado.
Paragrafo unico. 0 uso previsto neste
arti"o estender-se-a a todo o ten-it6rio
naclonal, se registrado na forma da lei
especial.
Art.1.167. Cabe ao prejudicado, a
qualquer tempo, a~ao para anular a ins-
cril(aO do nome empresarial feita com
violagiio da lei ou do contrato.
Art. 1.168. A inscric;ao do nome em-
presarial sera cancelada, a requerimen-
to de qualquer interessado, quando ces-
sar o exercfcio da atividade para que foi
adotado, ou quando ultimar-se a liqui-
dru;:ao da sociedade que o inscreveu.
Art. LI 62- LI 68
Art. 1162. An undeclared partnership may
not have a firm name or corporate name.
Art. 1163. The name of a business
proprietor must be distinguishable from
any other entered in the same register.
Sole paragraph. If a business proprietor'.s
name is identical to that of another that 1s
already registered, the business proprietor
must add a word or words to distinguish his
name.
Art. 1164. A business name may not be
alienated.
Sole paragraph. The acquiror of an
establishment by inter vivos act may, if the
contract so permits, use the name of the
transferor, preceded by his own, described
as successor.
Art. 1165. The name of a member or
partner who has died, or who has be~n
expelled or dissociated, may not be kept m
the firm name.
Art. 1166. Registration of a business
proprietor or of the constit~ti~g
instruments of legal persons. or entnes m
the appropriate register, give exclusive use
of the name within the boundaries of the
State in question.
Sole paragraph. The exclusive use refen;ed
to in this article extends to the entire
territory of the country, if registered in
accordance with special legislation.
Art. 1167. An injured party may, at any
time, bring action to annul the registration
of a business name made contrary to the law
or contract.
Art. 1168. Registration of a business name
shall be cancelled, on application by any
interested party, when the business for
which it was adopted has ceased or the
company that registered it has been
liquidated.
Art. l.169-1.l 7 4 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
ChQpter III- Delegates
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 1169. A delegate may not, without
written authorization, sub-delegate his
duties, dn pain of incurring personal
liability for the sub-delegate's acts and the
obligations contracted by him.
Art. 1170. A delegate may not; unless he
has express authorization, do business on
his own or a third party's behalf or
participate, even indirectly, in a transaction
of the same type that was committe.d to him,
on pain of incurring personal liability for
damages and retention by his principal of
the profits of the transaction.
Art.1171. Delivery of papers, property and
amounts to the delegate appointed by the
principal shall be deemed to be perfect ifhe
received them without protest, unless a
period of time for protest is established.
Section II--. Managers
Art. 1172. A delegate permanently
engaged in the operation of an enterprise,
whether at its seat of administration or at a
branch, agency or office, is dee.med to be a
manager.
Art.1173. Wliere the law does not require
special powers, a manager is deemed to be
authorized to perform all acts necessary to
exercise the po}Vers conferred upon him.
Sole paragraph. Unless otherwise
stipulated, powers conferred on two or
more managers are deemed to be joint
powers.
Art. 1174. Limitations contained in the
grant of powers are not opposable to third
parties unless the instrument has been filed
and registered in the Public Register of
Mercantile Enterprises, except where it is
proved that the limitations were known to
the person who dealt with the manager.
244
Capltulo III - Dos Prcpostos
Se1;ao I - Disposi\;iies Gerais
Art. 1.169. 0 preposto nao pode. sem
autorizac;;ao escrita, fazer-se substituir
no desempenho da preposic;;ao, sob
pena de responder pesscialmente pelos
atos do substituto e pelas obriga~oes
par ele contrafdas.
Art.1.170. 0 preposto, salvo autoriza-
\:UO expressa. nao pode negociar por
conta pr6pria ou de terceiro, nem parti-
cipar, embora indiretamente, de opera-
c;;ao do mesmo genera da que !he foi co-
metida. sob pena de responder por per-
das e danos e de serem retidos pelo pre-
ponente os lucros da operm;;ao.
Art.1.171. Considera-se perfeita a en-
trega de papeis, bens ou valores ao pre-
posto, encarregado pelo preponente, se
os recebeu sem protesto. salvo nos ca-
sos em que haja prazo para reclamac;ao.
Se~o II- Do Gerente
Art. 1.172. Considera-se gerente o pre-
posto permanente no exercfcio da em-
presa, na sede desta. ou em sucursal, fi-
lial ou agencia.
Art.1.173. Quando a lei nao exigir po-
deres especiais, considera-se o gerente
autorizado a praticar todos os atos ne-
cessarios ao exercfcio dos poderes que
!he foram outorgados.
Paragrafo unico. Na faltade estipular;:ao
diversa, consideram-se solidarios os
podcres conferidos a dois ou mais ge-
rentes.
Art. 1.174. As limita~oes contidas na
outorga de poderes, para serem opostas
a terceiros, dependem do arquivamento
e averbai;ao do instrumento no Registro
Publico de Empresas Mercantis, salvo
se provado serem conhecidas da pessoa
que tratou com o gerente.
245 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Panigrafo unico. Parao mesmo efeito e
com idcntica ressalva, deve a modifica-
\:UO ou revogac;:ao do mandato ser arqui-
vada e averbada no Registro PUblico de
Empresas Mercantis.
Art. 1.175. 0 preponente responde
com o gerente pelos atos que este prati-
que em seu pr6prici ncime, mas a conta
daquele.
Art.1.176. 0 gerente pode estaremjuf-
zo em nome do preponente, pelas obri-
ga<;5es resul tantes do exercfcio da sua
fun"iio.
Se~iio III - Do Contabilista e outros
Auxiliares
Art.1.177. Os assentos lani;ados nos li-
vros ou fichas do preponente, por qual-
quer dos prepostos encarregados de sua
escritura\:1iO, produzem, salvo se hou-
ver procedido de ma-fe, os mesmos
efeitos como se o fossem por aquele.
Paragrafo unico. No exercicio de suas
fum;oes, OS prepostos Sao pessoalmente
responsaveis, perante os preponentes,
pelos atos culposos; e, perante tercei-
ros, solidariamente com o preponente,
pelos atos dolosos.
Art.1.178. Os prepimentes sao respon-
saveis pelos atos de quaisquer prepos-
tos. praticados nos seus estabelecimen-
tos e relativos a atividade da empresa,
ainda que niio autorizados por escrito.
Paragrafo unico. Quando tais atos fo-
rem praticados fora do estabelecimen-
to, somente obrigarao o preponente nos
limites dos poderes conferidos por es-
crito, cujo instrumento pode ser suprido
pela certidao ou c6pia autentica do seu
teor.
Art. 1.17 5-1.178
Sole paragraph. For the same effects and
subject to the same exception, any change
or revocation of the mandate must be filed
and entered in the Public Register of
Mercantile Enterprises.
Art. 1175. The principal is liable, together
with the manager, for acts that the manager
performs in his own name but on behalf of
the principal.
Art. 1176. The manager may represent the
principal in court for obligations resulting
from the exercise of his powers and duties.
Section III - Book keepers and other
Assistants
Art. 1177. Entries made in the books and
records of the principal by any of the
delegates charged with making the entries
produce the same effects that they would if
made by the principal, unless they were
made_ in bad faith.
Sole paragraph. In the exercise of their
duties and powers, the delegates are
personally liable to their principals for acts
for which they are at fault; and they are
solidarily liable with the principal to third
parties for their wrongful acts.
Art. 1178. Principals are liable for the acts
of any of their delegates, if performed at the
principals' establishments and in
connection with the enterprise, even though
the acts were not authorized in writing.
Sole paragraph. When such acts were
performed outside the principals'
establishments, they shall bind the
principal only within the limits of powers
conferred in writing, which may be
established by a certificate or authenticated
copy of the contents of the written
instrument
Art. 1.179•1.182 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter IV - Bookkeeping
Art. 1179. Business proprietors and
business companies must follow an
accounting system, mechanized or not,
based on uniform entries in their books
corresponding to the underlying
documentation, and must draw up,
annually, a balance sheet and a profit and
loss statement.
§ 1. Subject to the provisions of art. 1180,
the number and type of books may be
decided by the interested parties.
§2. Small business proprietors referred to in
art. 970 are exempted from the
requirements of this article.
Art. 1180. In addition to other books
required by law, a Journal must be kept,
although it may be replaced by ledger
sheets where bookkeeping is mechanized
or electronic.
Sole paragraph. Even where ledger sheets
are used, the annual balance sheet and
profit and loss statement must be entered in
a book kept for that purpose.
Art. 1181. Unless otherwise specifically
provided by law, the required books and, if
applicable, the ledger cards, must be
authenticated in the Public Register of
Mercantile Enterprises before being used.
Sole paragraph. Books and ledger cards
shall not be authenticated unless the
business proprietor or business company
has been registered. The business
proprietor or business company may also
cause non-mandatary books to be
authenticated.
Art. 1182. Without prejudice to the
provisions of art. 1174, bookkeeping shall
be under the responsibility of a legally
accredited accountant, unless there is none
in the area.
246
Capltulo IV - Da Escriturnl,!iiO
Art. 1.179. 0 empresiirio e a socicdade
empresiiria siio obrigados a seguir um
sistema de contabilidade, mecanizado
ou niio, com base na escritural,!iio uni-
forme de seus Jivros, em corresponden-
cia com a documenta~iio respectiva. e a
levantar anualll)ente o balan~o patrimo-
nial e ode resultado econonio:o.
§ 1° Salvo o disposto no art. l.180, o nu-
mero e a especie de livros ficam a crite-
rio dos interessados.
§ 2° E dispensado das exigencias deste
artigo o pequeno empres:irio a quc se
refere o art. 970.
Art. I.180. Alem dos dcmais livros exi-
gidos por lei, e indispensavel () Di:irio.
que pode ser substitufdo por fichas no
caso de escriturac;ao mecanizada ou
eletronica.
Paragrafo unico. A ado~ao de fichas
niio dispensa o uso de livro apropriado
para o lam,:amento do balanr,;o patrimo-
nial e do de resultado economico.
Art. LISI. Salvo disposir,;ao especial
de lei, os livros obrigatorios e, se for o
caso, as fichas, antes de postos em uso,
devem ser autenticados no Registro Pu-
blico de Empresas Mercantis.
Par:igrafo unico. A autenticac;iio nao se
fara sem que esteja inscrito o empres:i-
rio, ou a sociedade empresiiria, que po-
dcrii fazer autenticai livros nao obriga-
t6rios.
Art. 1.182. Sem prejuizo do disposto
no art. 1.174, a escriturac;iio ficara sob a
rcsponsabilidade de contabilista legal-
mente habilitado, salvo se nenhum hou-
ver na localidade.
247 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE
Art.1.183. A escritura~iio serii feita em
idioma e moeda corrente nacionais c
em forma cont:ibil, por ordem cronol6-
gica de dia, mes e ano, sem intcrvalos
em branco, nem entrelinhas, borriies,
rasuras, emendas ou transportes para as
margens.
Par:igrafo t'.mico. E permitido o uso de
c6digo de numeros ou de abreviaturas,
que constem de livro pr6prio, regular-
mente autenticado.
Art. 1.184. No Di:irio serao lanyadas,
com individuar,;iio, clareza e caracteri-
zac;ao do documef!tO rcspectivo, dia a
dia, por escrita direta ou reproduc;iio, to-
das as opera\;OeS relativas ao exercicio
daempresa.
§ I 0 Admitc-se a escriturac;:iio resumida
do Diiirio, com totais que nao excedam
o perfodo de trinta dias, relativamente a
contas cujas operac;:oes sejam numero-
sas ou realizadas fora da sede do estabe-
lecimento, desde que utilizados livros
auxiliares regularmente autenticados,
para registro individualizado, e conser-
vados os documentos que permitam a
sua perfeita verificac;iio.
§ 2° Seriio lan~ados no Di:irio o balanc;:o
patrimonial e o de resultado economi-
co, devendo ambos ser assinados par
tecnico em Ciencias Contabcis legal-
mentc habilitado e pelo empresario ou
sociedade empresaria.
Art. l.185. 0 empresiirio ou sociedade
empres:iria que adotar o sistema de fi-
chas de lan~amentos poderii substituir o
livro Diario pelo livro Balancetes Diii-
rios e Balan9os, observadas as mesmas
formalidades extrfnsecas exigidas para
aquele.
Art. 1.186. 0 livro Balancetes Di:irios
e Balan9os sera escriturado de rnodo
que registre:
Art. l.183- l.J 86
Art. 1183. The books shall be kept in the
language and currency of the country, and
in accounting form, in chronological order
by day, month and year, without blank
spaces, spaces between lines, overwritten
text, modifications or extensions of text
into the margins.
Sole paragraph. The use of numerical codes
or abbreviations set out in the duly
authenticated book is permitted.
Art. 1184. Clear, individual entries, with
reference to original documents, shall be
made in the Journal, either directly or by
reproduction, on a daily basis, for all
transactions related to the business.
§ 1. Summary entries may be made in the
Journal, covering periods of no more than
thirty days, for accounts containing
numerous transactions or transactions
carried out away from the establishment's
seat of administration, provided that duly
authenticated supplementary books
containing the individual entries are kept
and that the documents required for
complete verification of the entries are
maintained.
§2. The balance sheet and the profit and
loss statement shall be entered in the
Journal and both shall be signed by a legally
accredited technician in Accounting
Science and by the business proprietor or
the business company.
Art. 1185. A business proprietor or
business company that uses a ledger sheet
accounting system may replace the Journal
with a book of Daily Trial Balances and
Balance Sheets, subject, to the extent
applicable, to the formalities established
for keeping Journals.
Art. 1186. The book of Daily Trial
Balances and Balance Sheets shall record:
Art. 1.187 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I - the daily position of each account and its
balance, in the form of a daily trial balance;
II - the annual balance sheet and profit and
loss statement, at the end of the fiscal year.
Art.1187. The following valuation criteria
shall apply to inventory:
I - assets used in the operation of the
business shall be valued at the cost of
acquisition, and the devaluation of assets
that are subject to wear or depreciation shall
be recorded, with the creation of
amortization funds to ensure the
replacement or conservation of such assets;
II - securities, raw materials. goods
intended for sale or that are products or
articles of the business may be valued at the
cost of acquisition or manufacture or at the
current price, where the current price is less
than cost price; where the current price is
greater than the cost of acquisition or
manufacture and the assets were valuated at
the current price, the difference between
the current price and cost shall not be taken
into account in the distribution of profits or
for percentages in connection with reserve
funds;
III - the value of shares and fixed income
instruments may be based on the quoted
price on the Stock Exchange; shares and
instruments that are not quoted and
interests other than shareholdings shall be
valued at their acquisition price;
248
I - a posic,:ao diiiria de cada uma das
contas ou tftulos contiibeis, pelo rcspec-
tivo saldo. em forma de balancetes dia-
rios;
II- o balanr;o patrimonial e ode resulta-
do economico, no encerramento do
exercfcio.
Art. 1.187. Na coleta dos elementos
para o inventario serao observados os
criterios de avaliar;ao a seguir determi-
nados:
I - OS hens destinados a explorac;ao d<t
atividade serao avaliados pelo custo de
aquisir;ao, devendo, na avaliac,:ao dos
que se desgastam ou depreciam com o
uso, pela ar;ao do tempo ou outros fato-
a
rcs, atender-se desvalorizac;ao respec-
tiva, criando-se fundos de amortizar;ao
para assegurar-lhes a substituic;ao ou a
conservac;ao do valor;
II - os valores mobiliarios, materia-pri-
ma, hens destinados aalienac,:ao, OU que
constituem produtos ou artigos da in-
dustria ou comercio da empresa, podem
ser estimados pelo custo de aquisic;ao
ou de fabricac;ao, ou pelo prer;:o corren-
te, sempre que este for inferior ao preqo
de custo, e quando o prer;:o corrente ou
venal estiver acima do valor do custo de
aquisic;ao, ou fabricar;:ao, e os hens fo-
rem avaliados pelo prer;:o corrente, a di-
ferenr,:a entre este e o prer;:o de custo nao
seni levada em con ta para a distribuii;:ao
de lucros, nem para as percentagens re-
ferentes a fun dos de reserva;
III - o valor das ar;:oes e dos tftulos de
renda fixa pode ser determinado com
base na respectiva cotai;ao da Bolsa de
Valores; os nao cotados e as participa-
c;oes nao acionarias serao considerados
pelo seu valor de aqu isir;:ao;
249 CODIOO CIVIL BILINGUE
IV - os creditos serao considerados de
conformidade com o presuinfvel valor
de realizac;ao, nao se levando em coma
os prescritos ou <le dificil liqi.iida9ao,
salvo SC houver, quanta !lOS Ultimas.
previsao equivalente.
Par:.!grafo unico. Entre OS valores <lo
ativo podem figurar, desde que se pre-
a
ceda, anualmente, sua amortizac,:ao:
I - as despesas de instala<;:ao da socieda-
de. ate o limite correspondente a dez
por cento do capital social;
II - os juros pagos aos acionistas da so-
ciedade anonima, no perfodo antece-
dente ao infcio das opera96cs sociais. a commencement of operations. at a rate of
taxa nao superior a doze por cento ao
ano, fixada no estatuto;
III - a quantia efetivamente paga a tftulo
de aviamento de estabelecimento ad-
quirido pelo empresario ou sociedade.
Art. 1.188. 0 balanr;:o patrimonial de-
vera ex primir, com fidelidade e clareza,
a situac;ao real da empresa e, atendidas
as peculiaridades desta, hem coma as
disposii.;5es das leis especiais, indicara,
distintamente, o ativo e o passivo.
Pantgrafo unico. Lei especial dispora
sabre as informac;oes que acompanha-
rao o balanc;o patrimonial, em caso de
sociedades coligadas.
Art.1.189. 0 balan~o de resultado eco-
nomico, ou demonstrac;ao da conta de
lucros e perdas, acompanharao balan~o
patrimonial e dele constarao credito e
debito, na forma da lei especial.
Art. 1.190. Ressalvados os casos pre-
vistos em lei, nenhuma autoridade, juiz
ou tribunal, sob qualquer pretexto, po-
dera fazer ou ordenar diligencia para
verificar se o empresario ou a sociedade
empresaria observam, ou nao, em seus
livros e fichas, as formalidades prescri-
tas em lei.
Art. 1.180-1.189
IV - debts shall be recorded at their
presumed realizable value; unrecoverable
debts and bad debts shall not be recorded
unless, in the case of the latter, an
equivalent provision is made.
Sole paragraph. The following items may
be recorded as assets, provided that such
items are amortized annually:
I - expenses incurred in setting up the
company, to a limit of ten percent of the
capital of the company;
II - interest paid to the shareholders of a
corporation in the period preceding
no more than twelve percent per annum, as
fixed in the corporate statute;
III - the amount effectively paid for the
goodwill of an establishment acquired by
the business proprietor or company.
Art. 1188. The balance sheet shall set out,
accurately and clearly, the actual situation
of the enterprise and, subject to the
peculiarities of the enterprise and the
provisions of special legislation, its assets
and liabilities.
Sole paragraph. Special legislation shall
provide for the information that shall
accompany the balance sheet in the case of
related companies.
Art. 1189. The profit and loss statement or
profit and loss accounts shall accompany
the balance sheet and shall set out credits
and debits, in the manner prescribed by
special legislation.
Art. 1190. Except in the cases provided for
by law, no authority.judge or tribunal may,
on any pretext, perform or cause to be
performed an audit in order to determine if
a business proprietor or business company
keeps its books and records in accordance
with the formalities prescribed by law.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. Ll91-J.I94
Art. 1191. A judge may order complete
disclosure of books and bookkeeping
records only when it is necessary to resolve
questions relating to inheritance,
co-ownership or companies, administration
or management on behalf of another, and in
cases of bankruptcy.
§ 1. The judge or tribunal in an application
for a preliminary or precautionary measure
or in an action may, at the request of a party
or ex officio, order that the books of either
of the parties, or both, be examined in the
presence of the business proprietor or
business company to which they belong, or
in the presence of persons named by them,
in order that the relevant information be
extracted.
§2. If the books are located in another
jurisdiction, .the examination shall be made
in that jurisdiction, before the appropriate
judge.
Art. 1192; in the event of a refusal to
present the books, in the cases described· in
the preceding article, the books shall be
seized and, in the case described in § 1 of the
preceding article, the allegations of the
adverse party that were to be proved by the
books shall be taken to be true.
Sole paragraph. The admission of facts
resulting from refusal may be overturned
by documentary proof.to the contrary.
Art. 1193. The restrictions established in
this Chapter on the examination of books,
in part or in whole, do not apply to tax
authorities in the exercise of their duties of
inspection regarding the payment of taxes,
within the strict terms of applicable special
legislation.
Art. 1194. Business proptietors and
business companies are required to
maintain and keep in good order all the
books, correspondence and other papers
related to their business, for so Jong as
action may be brought in connection with
the transactions recorded therein.
250
Art. 1.191. 0 juiz s6 podera autorizar a
exibi1;ao integral dos livros e papeis de
escdtura~lio quando necessaria para re-
solver questiies relativas .a sucessao, co-
munhlio ou sociedade, administrm;ao
ou gestao a con ta de outrem. ou em caso
de falencia.
§ l 0 0 juiz ou tribunal que conhecer de
medida cautelar ou de a1;ao pode, a re-
querimento ou de offcio, ordenar que os
livros de qualquer das partes, ou de amc
bas, sejam examinados na presern;:a do
empresario ou da sociedade empresaria
a que pertencerem, ou de pessoa.~ por
estes nomeadas, para deles se extrair o
que interessar a questao.
§ 2° Achando-se os livtos em outra ju-
risdi~iio, nela se fara o exame, perante o
respectivo juiz.
Art. 1.192. Recusada a apresenta1;ao
dos livros, nos casos do artigo antece·
dente, seriio apreendidos judicialmente
e, no do seu § l 0 , ter-se-a como verda-
deiro o alegado pela parte contraria
para se provar pelos livros.
Pariigrafo unico. A confissiio resultante
da recusa pode serelidida por prov a do-
cumental em contrario.
Art. 1.193. As restri~oes estabelecida.~
neste Capftulo ao exame da escritura-
i;ao, em parte ou por inteiro, nlio se apli-
cam as autoridades fazendarias. no
exercfcio da: fiscaliza9ao do pagamento
de impastos, nos termos estritos das
respectivas leis especiais.
Art. 1.194. 0 empresario e a sociedade
empresaria sao obrigados a conservar
em boa guarda toda a escritura~ao, cor-
respondencia e mais papeis concernen-
a
tes sua atividade, enquanto nao ocor-
rer prescri~iio ou decadencia no tocante
aos atos neles consignados.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
251
Art. 1.195. As disposi~oes deste Capf-
tulo aplicam-se as sucursais, fil iais ou
agencias, no Brasil, do empresario ou
sociedade com sede em pals estran-
geiro.
Livro III- Do Direito das Coisas
Titulo I- Da posse
Capitulo l - Da Posse e sua
Classifica1;iio
Art. I.196. Considera-se possuidor
todo aquele que tern de fato o exercicio,
pleno ou niio, de algum dos poderes
a
inerentes propriedade.
Art. 1.197. A posse direta, de pessoa
que tern a coisa em seu poder, tempora-
riamente, em virtude de direito pessoal,
ou real, nao anula a indireta, de quern
aquela foi havida, podendo o possuidor
direto defender a sua posse contra o in-
direto.
Art. 1.198. Considera-se detentor
aquele que, achando-se em rela~iio de
dependencia para com outro, conserva
a posse em nome deste e em cumpri-
mento de ordens ou instruc;:iii:s suas.
Paragrafo unico. Aquele que comec;:ou
a comportar-se do modo como prescre-
ve este artigo, em rela\:iio ao bem ea ou-
tra pessoa, presume-se detentor, ate que
prove o contriirio.
Art. 1.199. Se duas ou mais pessoas
possufrem coisa ihdivisa, poderii cada
uma exercer sobre ela atos possess6-
rios, contanto que niio excluam os dos
outros compossuidores.
Art. 1.200. Ejusta a posse que niio for
violenta, clandestina ou precaria.
Art. 1.201. E de boa-fe a posse, se o
possuidor ignora o vfcio, ou o obstaculo
que impede a aquisi~ao da coisa.
Art. 1.195-1.201
Art. 1195. The provisions of this Chapter
apply to branches, agencies and offices in
Brazil of a business proprietor or company
having the seat of its administration in a
foreign country.
Book Ill-The Law of Things
Title I - Possession
Chapter I - Possession and its
Classification
Art. 1196. Anyone who in fact has the
exercise, full or not, of any of the powers
inherent in ownership is considered to be a
possessor.
Art. 1197. Direct possession by a person
who has a thing temporarily in his power by
reason of a personal or real right does not
annul indirect possession by the person
from whom the direct possession was had;
the direct possessor may defend his
possession against the indirect possessor.
Art. 1198. Anyone who, finding himself in
a relationship of dependency with respect
to another, conserves possession in the
name of that other person and in fulfillment
of his orders or instructions is considered to
be a holder.
Sole paragraph. Anyone who has begun to
conduct himself in the manner described in
this article in relation to the thing and to the
other person is presumed to be a holder,
until the contrary is proved.
Art. 1199. If two or more persons possess
an undivided thing, each may perform
possessory acts with respect to the thing,
provided that the acts do not exClude those
of the other co-possessors.
Art. 1200. Possession that is not violent,
clandestine or precarious is just.
Art. 1201. Possession is in good faith if the
possessor is ignorant of the vice or obstacle
that impedes acquisition of the thing.
 Art. l.202-1.209 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
So_le paragraph. A possessor with just title
enjoys a pre~umption of good faith, unless
the contrary I~ proved or the law expressly
does not admit the presumption.
Art. 1202. Good faith possession only
cea~es to be so if, and from the time at
which, th_e circumstances lead to the
presumpt10n that the possessor is not
unaware that his possession is undue.
Art, 12_03•. Savin~ proof to the contrary,
possession I~ considered to retain the nature
it had when 1t was acquired.
Chapter II -Acquisition of Possession
~rt. 1204. Possession is acquired from the
time at ,which the exercise, in the
possesso~. s own name, of any of the powers
mherent m ownership becomes possible.
Art. 1205. Possession may be acquired:
I - by the person who claims it or by his
representative;
II -: by a thi~d party without a mandate,
subject to ratification.
Ar_t. 1206. Possession is transmitted to the
he1~s o_r legatees of the possessor, and
retams Its nature and characteristics.
Art.1207. Auniversal successor continues
the ppsses~ion of his .antecessor by force of
la\\'.; ~ Piutic~Jar successor has the option of
unttrng his possession with the
antecessor' s, for all legal effects.
Art. 1208. Acts of mere permission or
t~lerance do not result in possession, just as
y1olent ?r. ~landestine acts do not authorize
its acqm~1~1on, except after the violence or
clandestm1ty has ceased.
Art. 1209. Until proof to the contrary
possessi?n of an immovable creates ~
pr~suII?ptmn of possession of the movable
thmgs m and on it. · moveis que nele estiverem.
252
Paragrafo t1nico. 0 possuidorcomjusto
tftulo tern por si a presunr;ao de boa-fo,
salvo prova em contrario, ou quando a
lei expressamente nao admite esta pre-
sunr;ao.
Art. 1.202. A posse de boa-fe s6 perde
este carater no caso e desde 0 momento
ei:i que as circunstiincias fai;:am presu-
m1r que o possuidor nao ignora que
possui indevidamente.
Art. 1.203. Salvo prova em contrario,
entende-se manter a posse 0 mesmo ca-
rater com que foi adquirida.
Capitulo II - Da Aqtiisi1;ao da Posse
Art. 1.204. Adquire-se a posse desde 0
momento em que se. torna possfvel o
exercfcio, em nome pr6prio, de qual-
a
quer dos poderes inerentes proprieda-
de.
Art. 1.205. A posse pode ser adquirida:
I- pela pr6pria pessoa que a pretende ou
por seu representante;
II - por terceiro sem mandato, depen-
dendo de ratificar;ao.
Art. 1.206. A posse transmite-se aos
herdeiros ou legatarios do possuidor
com os mesmos caracteres.
Art.1.207. 0 sucessor universal conti-
nua de direito a posse do seu anteces-
sor; e ao sucessor singular e facultado
unir SUa posse ado antecessor, para OS
efeitos legais.
Art. 1.208. Nao induzem posse os ams
de mera permissao ou toleriincia assim
como nao autorizam a sua aquisi~ao os
atos violentos, ou clandestinos, senao
depois de cessar a violencia ou a clan-
destinidade.
Art•. 1.20?. A posse do im6vel faz pre-
sum1r, ate prova contraria, a das coisas
253 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Capitulo III - Dos Efcitos da Posse
Art. 1.210. 0 possuidor tern direito a
scr mantido na posse em caso de turba-
i;:ao, restitufdo no de esbulho, e segura-
do de violencia iminente, se tiver justo
receio de ser molestado.
§ I 0 0 possuidor turbado, ou esbulhado,
pod era manter-se ou restitu ir-se por sua
pr6pria fon;:a, contanto que o fa9a logo;
os ams de defesa, ou de desfor\:o. nao
pmlem ir alem do indispensavel a ma-
rturen1;ao, ou restitui<;ao da posse.
§ 2° Nao obsta a manuten~ao ou reinte-
gra~ao na posse a alegar;ao de proprie-
dade, ou de outro direito sobre a coisa.
Art. 1.211. Quando mais de uma pes-
soa se disser possuidora, manter-se-a
provisoriamente a que tiver a coisa, se
nao estiver manifesto que a obteve de
alguma das outras por modo vicioso.
Art. 1.212. 0 possuidor pode intentar a
ai;ao de esbulho, ou a de indeniza1,:ao,
contra o terceiro, que recebeu a coisa
esbulhada sabendo que o era.
Art.1.213. 0 disposto nos artigos !lnte-
cedentes nao se aplica as servidoes nao
aparentes, salvo quando os respectivos
tftulos provierem do possuidor do pre-
dio serviente, ou daqueles de quern este
o houve.
Art. 1.214. 0 possuidor de boa-fe tern
direito, enquanto ela durar, aos frntos
percebidos.
Paragrafo t1nico. Os frutos pendentes
ao tempo em que cessar a boa-fe devem
ser restitufdos, depois de deduzidas as
despesas da produ\:iiO e custeio; devem
ser tambem restitufdos os frutos colhi-
dos com antecipa~ao.
Art. 1.210-1.214
Chapter III - Effects of Possession
Art. 1210. A possessor has the right to be
maintained in possession in the case of
disturbance, restored in the case of
wrongful dispossession and kept safe from
imminent violence, if he has a reasonable
fear that he will be molested.
§ l. A possessor who is disturbed in his
possession, or wrongfully dispossessed,
can keep or restore himself in possession by
his own force, provided he does so at once;
the acts of defense or retaking may not go
beyond what is indispensable for the
maintenance or restoration of possession.
§ 2. An allegation of ownership or other
right over the thing d.oes not impede the
maintenance or restoration of possession.
Art. 1211. When more than one person
claims to be possessor, the one who has the
thing shall be provisionally maintained in
possession, if it is not obvious that he
obtained it from one of the others in a
wrongful manner.
Art.1212. A possessor may bring an action
for dispossession, or for indemnification,
against a third party who received the
wrongfully dispossessed thing knowing
that it was so.
Art. 1213. The provisions of the preceding
articles do not apply to non-apparent
servitudes, except when the respective
titles derive from the possessor of the
servient immovable or from those from
whom he received it.
Art.1214. A possessor in good faith has the
right, for so long as good-faith possession
lasts, to gathered fruits.
Sole paragraph. Fruits ungathered at the
time good faith ceases must be restituted,
after deducting the costs and expenses of
production; fruits gathered early must also
be restituted.

Art. 1.215-1.222 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1215, Natural and industrial fruits are
deemed to be harvested and gathered as
soon as they are separated; civil fruits are
deemed to be gathered day by day.
Art.1216. A possessor in bad faith is liable
for au harvested and gathered fruits, and for
those which by his fault he failed to gather,
from the time at which he became a bad
faith possessor; be has the right to the costs
arid expenses of production.
Art. 1217. A possessor in good faith is not
liable for the loss or deterioration of the
thing, if he did not cause it.
Art~ 1218. A possessor in bad faith is liable
for the lpss or dete'rio.ration of the thing,
even if accidental, unless he proves that it
woµJd have occurred anyway, if the thing
had beenin the possession of the claimant.
Art. 1Zl9. A possessor in good faith has the
right to indemnification for necessary and
useful improvements and, with respect to
voluntary improvements, if he is not paid
for them, the right to remove them, if he can
do so without detrimentto the thing; he has
a rig.ht of retention for the value of
necessary and useful improvements.
Art. 1220. A possessor in bad faith will be
reimbursed only for necessary
improvements; he does not have a right of
retention for the value of necessary
improvements; or the right to remove those
that are voluntary.
Art. 1221. Improvements are compensated
against damage, and only give rise to the
obligation to reimburse if they still exist at
the time of eviction.
Art. 1222. A claimant who is obligated to
indemnify a bad-faith possessor for
improvements has the right to opt between
their current value and their cost; he shall
indemnify a good-faith possessor for their
current value.
254
Art. 1.215. Os frutos naturais e indus-
triais reputain-se colhidos e percebidos,
logo que siio separados; os civis repu-
tam-se percebidos dia por dia.
Art. 1.216. 0 possuidor de ma-re res-
ponde por todos os frutos colhidos e
percebidos, hem como pelos que. por
culpa sua, deixou de perceber, desde o
momento em que se constituiu de ma-
re; tern direito as despesas da produ~ao
e custeio.
Art. 1.217. 0 possuidor de boa-fe nao
responde pela perda ou deteriora~ao da
coisa, a que n,iio der causa.
Art. 1.218. 0 possuidor de ma-fe res-
ponde pela perda, ou deteriorayiio da
coisa, ainda que acidentais, salvo se
provar que de igual modo se teriam
dado, estando ela na posse do reivindi-
cante.
Art. 1.219. 0 possuidor de boa-fe tern
direito a indenizar;:iio das benfeitorias
necessarias e iiteis, hem como, quanto
as voluptuarias, se niio the forem pagas.
a levanta-las, quando o puder sem detri-
mento da coisa, e podera exercer o di-
reito de retenyiio pelo valor das benfei-
torias necessanas e iiteis.
Art. 1.220. Ao possuidor de ma-fe se-
rao ressarcidas somente as benfeitorias
necessarias; niio the assiste o direito de
retenyao pela importfincia destas, nem o
de levantaras voluptuarias.
Art. 1.221. As benfeitorias compen-
samcse com os danos, e so
obrigam ao
ressarcimento se ao tempo da evici;:ao
ainda existirem.
Art. 1.222. 0 reivindicante, obrigado a
indenizar as benfeitorias ao possuidor
de ma-fe, tern 0 direito de optar entre 0
seu valor atual e o seu custo; ao possui-
dor de boa-fe indenizara pelo valor
atual.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
255
Capitulo IV - Da Perda da Posse
Art. 1.223. Perde-se a posse quando
cessa, embora contra a vontade do pos-
suidor, o poder sabre o bem, ao qua! se
refere o art. L 196.
Art. 1.224. S6 se considera perdida a
posse para quern nfio presenciou o es-
bulho, quando, tendo notfcia dele, se
abstem de retomar a coisa, ou, tentando
recupera-la, e violentamente repelido.
Titulo II-Dos Direitos Reais
Capitulo Unico -Disposi~iies Gerais
Art. I.225. Sao direitos reais:
I - a propriedade;
II - a superffcie;
III - as servidoes;
IV- o ustlfruto;
V-ouso;
VI- a habitayiio;
VII - o direito do promitente comprador
doim6vel;
VIII - o penhor;
IX -ahipoteca;
X - a anticrese.
Art. 1.226. Os direitos reais sobre coi-
sas m6veis, quando constitufdos, ou
transmitidos por atos entre vivos, s6 se
adquirem com a tradii;iio.
Art.1.227. Os direitos reais sobre im6-
veis constitufdos, ou transmitidos por
atos entre vivos, s6 se adquirem com o
registro no Cart6rio de Registro de
Im6veis dos referidos titulos (arts.
1.245 a 1.247), salvo os casos expres-
sos neste C6digo.
Art. 1.223-1.227
Chapter IV - Loss of Possession
Art. 1223. Possession is lost when the
power over the thing, referred to in .ar_t.
1196, ceases to exist, even though 1t 1s
against the will of the possessor. ·
Art. 1224. Possession is only considered to
be lost by a person who was not presen~ at
the dispossession. when, after becommg
aware of the dispossession, he refrains from
retaking the thing or, in attempting to
recover it, he is violently repelled.
Title II - Real Rights
Sole Chapter - General Provisions
Art. 1225. The following are real rights:
I - ownership;
II - superficies;
m- servitudes;
IV - usufruct;
V-use;
VI - habitation;
VII - the right of the promissor-purchaser
of an immovable;
VIII - pledge;
IX - hypothec;
X- antichresis.
Art.1226. Real rights over movable things,
when constituted or transmitted by inter
vivos acts, are acquired only on delivery of
the thing.
Art. 1227. Real rights over immovables
constituted or transmitted by inter vivos
acts are acquired only on registration in the
Immovable Property Registry Office for
the relevant instruments of title (arts. 1245
to 1247), except in the cases set out in this
Code.
 Art, 1.228 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Title III - Ownership
Chapter I - Owne~ship in
General
Section I - Preliminary Provisions
A~t. 1228. ~n owner has the power to use,
enJoy and ~1spose of the thing, and the right
to recover It from the power of anyone who
wrongfully possesses or holds it
§ 1. ?-'he !ight of ownership must be
exercised m a manner consistent with its
economic and social ends and in
conformity with the provisions of sp6cial
legislation, so as to preserve the flora,
fau?~· _natural beauty, ecological
equ1hbnum and artistic and historical
patrimony, avoiding pollution of the air and
water.
§ 2. Acts which do not result in any
co":venience or utility to the owner and
'."'~Ich are prompted by the intention to
Injure others are prohibited.
~3. The owner may be deprived of a thing,
m cas~s of expropriation by reason of
necessity, public utility or s9cial interest as
well as in the case of requisition, in the
event of imminent public danger.
§~. T~e ow!ler may also be deprived of a
thmg tf the immovable elaimed consists of
an extensive area that has been in the
uninterrupted, good-faith possession of a
consi~erable number of persons for more
than. five years, and those persons, either
together or separately, have carried out
works and services that the judge considers
to be of relevant social and economic
interest. · vante.
§5. I~ the case contemplated in the
precedmg paragraph, the judge shall fix the
fair indemnification owed to the owner;
once 0e price is paid, the judgment shall
constitute title for registration of the
immovable in the name of the possessors.
256
Tltulo III.,... Da Propricdade
Capitulo I - Da Propriedade em
Geral
Se\!ffo I- Disposi«;oes Preliminares
Art. 1.228. 0 propriettlrio tern a facul-
dade de usar, gozar c dispor da coisa, e
0 direito de reave-la do poder de quern
quer que injustamente a possua ou dete-
nha.
0
§ I 0 direito de propriedade deve ser
exercido em consonancia com as suas
finalidades econiimicas e sociais e de
modo que sejam preservados, de con-
formidade com o estabelecido em lei
especial, a flora, a fauna, as belezas na-
turais, o equilibria ecol6gico e o patri-
miinio hist6rico .e artfstico, bem como
evitada a poluiyao do are das {tguas.
§ 2° Sao defesos os atos que nao trazem
ao proprietiirio qualquer comodidade.
ou utilidade, e sejam animados pela in~
tenyao de prejudicar outrem.
§ 3° 0 proprietiirio pode ser privado da
coisa, nos casos de desaproprias;ao, por
necessidade ou utilidade pliblica ou inte-
resse social, bem coma no de requisiyiio,
em caso de perigo publico iminente.
§ 4° 0 propriettlrio tambem pode ser
privado da coisa se o im6vel reivindica-
do consistir em extensa iirea, na posse
ininterrupta e de boa-fe, por mais de
cinco anos, de considertlvel nlimero de
pessoas, e estas nela houverem realiza-
do, em conjunto ou separadamente,
obras e servis;os considerados pelo juiz
de interesse social e econiimico re!e-
§ 5° No caso do paragrafo antecedente,
o jtiiz fixarii ajusta indenizas;ao devida
ao proprietiirio; pago o pres;o, valer{t a
sentens;a coma tftulo para o registro do
im6vel em name dos possuidores.
257 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.229. A propriedade do solo
abrange a do espayo aereo e subsolo
correspondentes, em altura e profundi-
dade litcis ao seu exercicio, nao poden-
do o propriettlrio opor-se a atividades
que sejam realizadas, por terceiros, a
uma altura ou profundidade tais, que
nao tenha eh: interesse Jegftimo em im-
pedi-las.
Art. 1.230. A propriedade do solo nao
abrange as jazidas, minas e demais re-
cursos minerais, os potenciais de,ener-
gia hidriiulica, os monumentos arqueo-
16gicos e outros bens referidos par leis
especiais.
Partlgrafo unico. 0 propriettlrio do solo
tern o direito de explorar os recursos
minerais de emprego imediato na cons-
trus;ao civil, desdc que nao submetidos
a transformas;ao industrial, obedecido o
disposto em lei especial.
Art. 1.231. A propriedade presume-se
plena e exclusiva, ate prova em contrii-
rio.
Art. 1.232. Os frutos e mais produtos
da coisa pertencem, ainda quando sepa-
rados, ao seu proprietario, salvo se, por
preceito jurfdico especial, couberem a
outrem.
Se«;iio II - Da Descoberta
Art. 1.233. Quern quer que ache coisa
alheia perdida ha de restituf-Ia ao dono
ou legftimo possuidor.
Partlgrafo unico. Nao o conhecendo, o
descobridor far{t por encontra-lo, e, se
nao o encontrar, entregar{t a coisa acha-
da a autoridade competente.
Art. l.230-1.233
Art. 1229. Ownership of land extends to
the corresponding air space and subsoil, to
a height and depth that are useful to the
exercise of ownership, but the owner may
not oppose activities that are carried out by
third parties at such a height or depth that he
has no legitimate interest in preventing
such activities.
Art. 1230. Ownership of land does not
extend to natural deposits, mines and other
mineral resources, potential hydraulic
energy, archaeological monuments and
other property referred to by special
legislation.
Sole paragraph. An owner of land.has the
right to exploit mineral resources for
immediate use in civil construction,
provided they are not transformed through
industrial processes, subject to the
provisions of special legislation.
Art. 1231. Until proof to the contrary,
ownership is presumed to be full and
exclusive.
Art. 1232. The fruits and other products of
a thing, even when separated, belong to the
owner, unless, by specific legal rule,
another is entitled to them.
Section II - Found Things
Art. 1.233. Whoever finds a lost thing that
belongs to another is bound to return it to its
owner or legitimate possessor.
Sole paragraph. If the finder does not know
the owner or legitimate possessor, he shall
attempt to locate him and, ifhe does not, he
shall deliver the thing found to the
competent authority.
Art. l.230-1.233 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1.234. Anyone who returns a found
thing, within the terms of the preceding
article, shall have the right to a reward of
not less than five percent of its value, and to
indemnification for the expenses he
incurred in preserving and transporting the
thing, if the owner does not prefer to
abandon it.
Sole paragraph. In determining the amount
of the reward, the effort made by the finder
to locate the owner or legitimate possessor,
the latter's prospects of finding the thing
and the economic situation of both piirties
shall be taken into consideration.
Art.1235. The finder is liable for the losses
caused to the owner or legitimate
possessor, if the finder acted wrongfully.
Art. 1236. The competent authority shall
give notice of the finding in the press or
other means of informa.tiort; proclamations
shall be issued only if appropriate given the
value of the thing.
Art.1237. If, upon the expiry of sixty days
from disclosure of the finding in the press
or publication ofthe proclamation, no one
has appeared who can ,prove ownership of
the thing, it shall be sold at public auction
and, after the finder's expenses and the
reward have been deducted, the balance of
the price shall belong to the Municipality
within whose borders the lost object was
encountered.
Sole paragraph. If the thing is of slight
value, the Municipality may abandon it in
favor of the person who found it.
258
Art. 1.234. Aquele que restituir a coisa
achada, nos termos do artigo antece-
dente, teni direito a uma recompensa
niio inferior a cinco por cento do sen va-
a
lor, e indeniZa\:iiO pelas despesas que
houver feito com a conserva\:iio e trans-
porte da coisa, se o dono niio preferir
abandoml.-Ja.
Paragrafo tlnico. Na determina~iio do
montante da recompensa, considerar-
se-a o esfor\:O desenvolvido pelo desco-
bridor para encontrar o dono, ou o legf-
timo possuidor, as possibilidades que
teria este de encontrar a coisa e a situa-
\:i'io economica de ambos.
Art. 1.235. 0 descobridor responde pe-
los prejufzos causados ao proprietario
on possuidor Jegitimo, quando tiver
procedido com dolo.
Art. 1.236. A autoridade competente
dara conhecimento da descoberta atra-
ves da imprensa e outros meios de in-
forma\:iio, somente expedindo editais
se o seu valor os comportar.
Art. 1.237. Decorridos sessenta dias da
divulgayiio da notfcia pela imprensa, ou
do edital, nao se apresentando quern
comprove a propriedade sobre a coisa,
sera esta vendida em hasta ptlblica e,
deduzidas do pre\:o as despesas. mais a
recompensa do descobridor, pertencera
o remarlescente ao Municfpio 'em cuja
circunscri\:ao se deparou o objeto per-
dido.
Paragrafo tlnico. Sendo de diminuto va-
lor, podera o Municfpio abandonar a
coisa em favor de quern a achou.
259 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
Capitulo II - Da Aquisi\:iio da
Propriedade Im6vcl
Sc~iio I - Da Usucapiao
Art. 1.238. Aquele que, por quinze
anos, sem interrup9iio, nem oposi1;iio,
possuir como seu um im6vel, adquire-
lhe a propriedade, independentemente
de tftulo e boa-fe; podendo requerer ao
juiz que assim o declare por sentern.;a, a
qua! servira de tftulo para o registro no
Cart6rio de Registro de Im6veis.
Paragrafo tlnico. 0 prazo estabelecido
neste artigo reduzir-se-a a dez anos se o
possuidor houver estabelecido no im6-
vel a sua moradia habitual, ou nele rea-
Jizado obras ou servii;;os de carater pro-
dutivo.
Art. 1.239. Aquele que, niio sendo pro-
prietario de im6vel rural ou urbano,
possua como sua, por cinco anos inin-
terruptos, sem oposi\:iio, area de terra
em zona rural nao superior ,a cinqiienta
hectares, tomando-a produtiva por sen
trabalho ou de sua familia, tendo nela
sua moradia, adquirir-Jhe-a a proprie-
dade.
Art. 1.240. Aquele que possuir, como
sua, area urbana de ate duzentos e cin-
qiienta metros quadrados, por cinco
anos ininterruptamente e sem oposi\:iiO,
utilizando-a para sua moradia on de sua
famflia, adquirir-Jhe-a o domfnio, des-
de que niio seja proprietario de outro
im6vel urbane ou rural.
§ I 0 0 tltulo de domfnio e a concessao
de uso seriio conferidos ao homem ou a grant of use shall be conferred on the man
mulher, ou a anibos, independentemen-
te do estado civil.
§ 2° O direito previsto no paragrafo an-
tecedente niio sera reconhecido ao mes-
mo possuidor mais de uma vez.
Art. 1.238-1.240
Chapter II - Acquisition of Ownership
of Immovable Property
Section I - Usucapion
Art. 1238. A person who possesses an
immovable as his own for fifteen years,
without intem1ption or opposition, acquires
ownership of it, regardless of title or good
faith; he may apply to the judge to so
declare by judgment, which shall serve as
title for registration in the Immovable
Property Registry Office.
Sole paragraph. The period of time
established in this article shall be reduced
to ten years if the possessor has habitually
dwelled in or on the immovable or has
carried out productive works or services
upon it.
Art.1239. A person who owns neither rural
nor urban immovable property and who
possesses as his own an area of land not
greater than fifty hectares, located in a rural
zone, for five years without interruption or
opposition, making that area productive
through his labor or that of his family, and
dwelling upon it, acquires ownership of the
area.
Art. 1240. A person who possesses as his
own an urban area of up to two hundred and
fifty square meters for five years without
interruption or opposition, using it for his
own or his family's dwelling, acquires
ownership of it, provided he is not the
owner of another urban or rural immovable
property.
§ 1. The instrument of title of ownership or
or the woman, or on both, regardless of
their civil status.
§ 2. The right provided for in the preceding
paragraph shall not be recognized in the
same possessor more than once.
 Art. I.241-1.245 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1241. A possessor may apply to a
jud!?e for a declaration that ownership of
the unmovable has been acquired through
usucapion.
Sole paragraph. A declaration obtained in
the manner provided for in this article
constitutes good title fot registration in the
Immovable Property Registry Office.
Art. 1242. A person who, with just title and
in good faith, possesses an immovable
property continuously and without
contestation for ten years also acquires
ownership of it.
Sole paragraph. The time period provided
for in this article shall be five years if the
immovable was acquired onerously, based
on ~ registration in the appropriate registry
office that was later cancelled, provided
that the possessors have. established their
dwelling on the immovable or have made
investments in it of social or economic
interest.
Art. 1243. The possessor may, for the
purposes of counting the time required
under the preceding articles, add his
antecedents' possession (art. 1207) to his
own, counting all periods of continuous,
peaceful possession and, in the cases
contemplated in art. 1242, those with just
title and in good faith.
Art.1244. The provisions of this Code with
respect to debtors, concerning the causes
that ~re~ent, suspend or interrupt
prescnpt1on, extend to possessors, and
apply also to usucapion.
Section II - Acquisition by Registration
of Instruments of Title
Art. 1245. Ownership is transferred
between living persons by registration of
the instrument of transfer in the Immovable
Property Register.
260
Art. 1.241. Podeni o possuidor reque-
rerao juiz sejadeclarada adquirida, me-
diante usucapiao, a propriedade im6-
vet.
Paragrafo unico. A declarac;ao obtida
na forma deste artigo constituira titulo
ha.bi! para o registro no Cart6rio de Re-
gistro de lrh6veis.
Art. 1.242. Adquire tambem a proprie-
dade do im6vel aquele que, continua e
incontestadamente; com justo t!tulo c
boa-fe, o possuir por dez anos.
Paragrafo unico. Sera de cinco anos o
prazo previsto neste artigo se o im6vel
houver sido adquirido, onerosamente,
com base no registro constante do res-
pectivo cart6rio, cancelada posterior~
mente, desde que os possuidores nele
tiverem estabelecido a sua moradia, ou
realizado investimentos de interesse so-
cial e economico.
Art. 1.243. 0 possuidor pode, para o
fim de contar o tempo exigido pelos ar-
tigos antecedentes, acrescentar a sua
posse a dos seus antecessores (art.
1.207), contanto que todas sejam contl-
nuas, pacfficas e, nos casos do art.
1.242, comjusto tftulo e de boa-fe.
Art. 1.244. Estende-se ao possuidor o
disposto quanta ao devedor acerca das
causas que obstam, suspendem ou in-
terrompem a prescrir;iio, as quais tam-
bem se aplicam ausucapiao.
Se1;iio II - Da Aquisi1;iio pelo
Registro do Titulo
Art. 1.245. Transfere-se entre vivos a
propriedade mediante o registro do tftu-
lo translativo no Registro de Im6veis.
261 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
§ I 0 Enquanro nao se registrar o tftulo
translaLivo, o alienante continua a ser
havido como dono do im6vel.
§ 2° Enquanto nao se promover, por
mcio de ar;ao pr6pria, a decretac;:ao de
invalidade do registro, e o respectivo
cancelamento, o adquirente continua a
ser havido como dono do im6vel.
Art. 1.246. 0 reg istro e eficaz desde o
momenta em que se apresentar o titulo
ao oficial do registro. e este o prenotar
no protocolo.
Art.1.247. Seo teor do registro nao ex-
primir a verdade, podeni o interessado
reclamar que se retifique ou anule.
Paragrafo unico"'Cancelado o registro,
podera o proprietario reivindicar o im6-
vel, independentemente da boa-fe ou
do titulo do terceiro adquirentc.
Se1;ao III - Da Aquisi1;iio por
Acessiio
Art. 1.248. A acessao pode dar-se:
I - por forma1<1io de ilhas;
II - por aluviao;
lll - por avulsao;
IV - por abandono de alveo;
V - por plantac;:oes ou constmc;oes.
Subsei;iio I - Das Ilhas
Art.1.249. As ilhas que se formarem em
correntes comuns ou particulares penen-
cem aos proprictaribs ribeirinhos frontei-
ros, observadas as regra~ seguintes:
l - as que se formarem no meio do do
consideram"se acrescimos sobrevindos
aos tcrrertos ribeirinhos fronteiros de
ambas as margens, na proporr;ao de
suas testadas, ate a lirtha que dividir o
alveo em duas partes iguais;
Art. 1.246-1.249
§1. Until the instrument of transfer is
registered, the aliener continues to be held
to be the owner of the immovable.
§2. Until a declaration of the invalidity of
the registration is obtained through the
appropriate action, and the registration is
cancelled, the acquiror continues to be held
to be the owner of the immovable.
Art. 1246. Registration is effective from
the moment the instrument of transfer is
presented to the registry official, and he
makes a notation of it in the preliminary
record.
Art.1247. lf the contents of the registration
do not express the truth, an interested party
may demand rectification or annulment of
the registration.
Sole paragraph. If the registration is
cancelled, the owner may claim the
immovable, regardless of the good faith or
title of the third-party acquiror.
Section III - Acquisition by
Accession
Art. 1248. Accession may occur:
I - through formation of islands;
1I - through alluvion;
III - through avulsion;
IV - through dereliction of alveus;
V - through planting or building,
Subsection I - Islands
Art. 1249. Islands that form in common or
private running water belong to the riparian
owners facing the island, subject to the
following rules:
I - islands formed in the middle of a river
are considered to be accretions to the
riparian lands on both banks facing the
island, in proportion to their frontages, up
to the line that divides the riverbed into two
equal parts;
 Art. 1.250-1.252 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - islands formed oetween the line
referred to above and one of the banks are
considered to be accretions to the riparian
lands on that same side;
III- islands formed by the creation of a new
branch of the river continue to belong to the
owners of the lands from which they were
formed.
Subsection H- Alluvion
Art. 1250. Accretions formed gradually
and imperceptibly by natural deposits
along the banks of running water, or by a
change in the course of the waters, belong
tb the owners of the lands along the banks,
without indemnification.
Sole paragraph. Alluvial lands that form in
front of properties having different owners
are divided amorig them in proportion to the
frontage of each property along the old
batik.
Subsection III - Avulsion
Art. 1251. When, by a violent natural force,
a piece of land is separated from a property
and is joined to another, the owner of the
latter acquires ownership of the accretion if
he indemnifies the owner of the first; he
acquires it without indemnification, if after
one year no one has claimed it.
Sole paragraph. If he refuses to pay
indemnification, the owner of the property
to which tlie piece of land was joined must
acquiesce in the removal of the accreted
part.
Subsection IV - Dereliction
of Alveus
Art. 1252. The bed abandoned by running
water belongs to the riparian owners on
both banks, without indemnification to the
owners of the lands on which the waters
opened their new course, and the properties
along the bank.s are deemed to extend to the
middle of the bed.
262
II - as que se formarem entre a referida
linha e uma das margens consideram-se
acrescimos aos terrenos ribeirinhos
fronteiros desse mesmo Jada;
III - as que se formarem pelo desdobra-
mento de um nova brm;:o do rio conti-
nuam a pertencer aos proprietarios dos
terrenos acusta dos quais se constirufrarn.
Subse~lio II - Da Aluvilio
Art.1.250. Os acrescimos formados, su-
cessiva e imperceptivelmente, por dep6-
sitos e aterros narurais ao Jongo das mar-
gens das correntes, ou pelo desvio das
aguas destas, pertencem aos donas dos
terrenos marginais, sem indenizm;ao.
Paragrafo unico. 0 terreno aluvial, que
se formar em frente de predios de pro-
prietarios diferentes, dividir-se-a entre
eles, na propor\!ao da testada de cada
um sobre a antiga margem.
Subse~lio ID- Da Avulsifo
Art. 1.251. Quando, por for\:a natural
violenta, uma por\:iiO de terra se desta-
car de um predio e se juntar a outro, o
dono deste adquirira a propriedade do
acrescimo, se indenizar o dona do pri-
meiro ou, sem indeniza~ao, se, cm um
ano, ninguem houver reclamado.
Panigrafo unico. Recusando-se ao pa-
gamento de indeniza\:ao, o dono do pre-
dio a que se juntou a por\:iio de te1ra de-
vera aquiescer a que se remova a parte
acrescida.
Subse~iio IV - Do Atveo
Abandonado
Art. 1.252. 0 alveo abandonado de Cor-
rente pertence aos proprietarios ribeiri-
nhos das duas margens, sem que tenham
indeniza\:iiO os .donos dos terrenos por
onde as aguas abrirem novo curso, enten-
dendo-se que os predios marginais se es-
tendem ate 0 meio do alveo.
263 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Subse(,'.lio V - Das Constrm;iies e
Planta~iies
Art. 1.253. Toda constru~ao ou planta-
i;ao existente em um lerreno presume-
se feita pelo proprietario e a sua custa,
ate que se prove o contrario.
Art. 1.254. Aquele que semeia. planta
ou edifica em terreno pr6prio com se-
mentes, plantas ciu materiais alheios.
adquire a propriedade destes; mas flea
obrigado a pagar-Jhes o valor, atem de
responder por perdas e danos, se agiu
de ma-fe.
Art. 1.255. Aquele que semeia, planta
ou ediflca em te1reno alheio perde, em
proveito do proprietario, as sementes,
plantas e constrw;:oes; se ptocecleu de
boa-fe, tera direito a indenizac;ao.
Paragrafo unico. Se a constru~iio ou a
plantac;iio exceder consideravelmente o
valor do terreno, aquele que, de boa-fe,
plantou ou edificou, adquirira a pro-
priedade do solo, mediante pagamento
da indeniza\:ao fixadajudicialmente, se
nao houver acordo.
Art. 1.256. Se de arnbas as partes hou-
ve ma-fe, adquirira o proprietario a~ se-
mentes, plantas e constru\:oes, devendo
ressarcit o valor das acessoes.
Paragrafo unico. Presume-se ma-fe no
proprietario, quando o trabalho <le
constru\:iiO, ou Iavoura, se fez em sua
presen~a e sem impugna1;ao sua.
Art.1.257. 0 disposto no artigo antece-
dente aplica-se ao caso de nao pertence-
rem as sementes, plantas ou materiais a
quern de boa-fe os empregou em solo
alheio.
Paragrafo unico. 0 proprietario das se-
mentes, plantas ou materiais podera co-
brar do proprietario do solo a indeniza-
~iio devida, quando nao puder have-la
do plantador ou construtor.
Art. 1.253-1.257
Subsection V - Buildings and
Plantations
A1·t. 1253. Until the contrary is proved, all
buildings and plantations existing on land
are presumed to have been made by the
owner and at his expense.
Art. 1254. A person who sows, plants or
builds on his own land with seeds, plants or
materials belonging to another acquires
ownership of them; but he is obligated to
pay their value, in addition to being liable
for losses and damage, if he acted in bad
faith.
Art. 1255. A person who sows, plants or
builds on another's land loses the seeds,
plants and buildings to the owner of the
land; but if he acted in good faith, he will
have the right to indemnification.
Sole paragr3cph. If the building or plantation
considerably exceeds the value of the land,
the person who planted or built in good
faith acquires ownership of the soil, against
payment of indemnification fixed by a
judge, if there is no agreement.
Art.1256. If both parties were in bad faith,
the owner will acquire the seeds, plants and
buildings, but must reimburse the other for
the value of the accessions.
Sole paragraph. Bad faith on the part of the
owner is presumed when the work of
building or planting was done in his
presence and without opposition on his
part.
Art.1257. The provisions of the preceding
article apply to the case where the seeds,
plants or material do not belong to the
person who in good faith used them on
another's land.
Sole paragraph. The owner of the seeds,
plants or materials may demand due
indemnification from the owner of the land,
if he cannot obtain it from the planter or
builder.
 Art. 1.258-1.261 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art: 1258. If a building constructed
partially on the owner's land invades the
land of another to an extent not greater than
a twentieth part of the other's land, the
goo?-faith builder acquires .ownership of
the mvaded part of the land, 1f the value of
the building exceeds that of the invaded
part, and is liable for indemnification
representiJlg both the value of the lost area
and the devaluation of tl}e remaining a.rea.
Sole paragraph. By paying ten times the
losses and damage provided for in this
article, a. builder in bad faith acquires
ownership of that part of the soi I he
invaded, if the invaded part is not more than
a twentieth of the whole, the value of the
building considerably exceeds the invaded
part and the invading portion cannot be
de'.110.Iished without serious damage to the
bmldmg. ·
Art. 1259. If a builder is in good faith and
the invasion of the other's land exce~ds a
twentieth part of the whole, he acquires
ownership of the invaded part of the land
and is lia~le for losses and damage
encompassmg the value that the invasion
added to the building, the value of lost area
~nd th.e ~evaluation of the remaining area;
if he 1s m bad faith, he is obligated to
demolish. what he constructed on the
other's land and to pay double the losses
and damage that the other is found to have
suffered.
Chapter III -Acquisition of Ownership
of Movable Property
Section I - Usucapion
Art. 1260. A person who possesses a
m?vable thing as h!s own continuously and
without contestat10n during three years,
with just title and in good faith, acquires
ownership of it.
Art. 1261. If possession of the movable
thing extends to five years, it will produce
usucapion, regardless of title or good faith.
264
Art. 1.258. Se a consuw;ao, fcita par-
cialmcnte em solo proprio, invade solo
a
alheio cm proporr;ao nao superior vi-
gesima parte deste, adquire o construtor
de boa-fe a propriedade da parte do solo
invadido. se o valor da constru9ao ex-
ceder o dessa parte, e responde por in-
denizar;ao que represente, tambem, o
valor da area perdida ea. desvalorizar;ao
da area remanescente.
Paragrafo unico. Pagando em decuplo
as perdas e danos previstos neste arcigo,
o construtor de ma-fe adquire a proprie-
dade da parte do solo quc invadiu, seem
a
proporr;ao vigesima parte deste c 0 va-
lor da constrw;:ao excederconsideravcl-
mente o dessa partc e nao se puder de-
molir a porr;ao invasora scm grave pre-
jufzo para a construc;:ao.
Art. 1.259. Se o construtor estiver de
boa-re. ea invasao do solo alheio cxce-
der a vigesima parte deste, adquire a
propriedade da parte do solo invadido,
e responde por perdas e danos que
abranjam o valor que a invasao acrescer
aconstruc;:ao, mais 0 da area perdida e 0
da desvalorizac;:ao da area remanesccn-
te; SC de ma-fe, e obrigado a demoJir 0
que ncle construiu, pagando as perdas e
danos apurados, que serao devidos em
do bro.
Capltulo ill-Da Aquisi~lio da
Propriedade Move!
Serrao I - Da Usucapilio
Art. 1.260. Aquele quc possuir coisa
move! como sua, continua e incon-
testadamente durante tres anos, com
justo tftulo e boa-fe. adquirir-lhe-a a
propriedade.
Art.1.261. Se a posse da coisa move! se
prolongar por cinco anos, produzira
usucapiao, independentemente de lftu-
lo ou boa-re.
265 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.262. Aplica-se a usucapiao das
coisas m6veis o disposto nos arts. 1.243
e 1.244:
Se~lioil - Da Ocupa~lio
Art. 1.263. Quern se assenhorear de
coisa sem dono para logo !he adquire a
propriedade, nao sendo essa ocupac;:ao
defesa por lei.
Se~lio III - Do Achado do Tesouro
Art. 1.264. 0 dep6sito antigo de coisas
preciosas. oculto e de cujo dono nao
haja mem6ria. sera dividido por igual
entre o proprietario do predio e o que
achar o tesouro casualmente.
Art.1.265. 0 tesouro pertencerii por in-
teiro ao proprietario do predio, se for
achado por ele, ou em pesquisa que or-
denou, ou por terceiro nao autorizado.
Art.1.266. Achando-se em terreno afo-
rado, 0 tesouro sera dividido por igual
entre o descobridor e o cnfiteuta, ou
sera .deste por inteiro quando ele mes-
mo seja o descobridor.
Serrao IV - Da Tradi~lio
Art. 1.267. A propriedade das coisas
nao se transfere pelos neg6cios jurfdi-
cos antes da tradir;ao.
Paragrafo unico. Subcntende-se a tradi-
c;:ao quando o transmitente continua a
possuir pelo constituto possessorio;
quando cede ao adquirente (} dircito a delivery; when he assigns to the acquirer
restituir;:ao da coisa, que seen contra em
poder de terceiro; ou quando o adqui-
rente ja esta na posse da coisa, por oca-
siao do neg6cio jurfdico.
Art. 1.262-1.267
Art. 1262~ The provisions of arts. 1243 and
1244 apply to usucapion of movable things.
Section II - Occupation
Art.1263. A person who asserts ownership
of an ownerless thing immediately acquires
ownership, if the occupation is not
prohibited by law.
Section III - Finding of Treasure
Art. 1264. A cache of precious things
hidden long ago, of whose owner there is no
memory, shall be divided equally between
the owner of the immovable property on
which it is located and the person who finds
the treasure by chance.
Art.1265. Treasure shall belong entirely to
the owner of the immovable property on
which it is located, if it is found by him, or
in the course of an exploration that he
ordered, or by an unauthorized third party.
Art. 1266. If found on land under
emphyteusis, treasure shall be divided
equally between the discoverer and the
emphyteutic lessee; if the latter is the
discoverer, it will belong to him alone.
Section IV - Delivery
Art. 1267. Ownership of things is not
transferred by legal transactions prior to
delivery.
Sole paragraph. Delivery is understood to
occur when the transmitter continues in
possession under a pact constituting
the right to restitution of the thing, being in
the power of a third party; or when the
acquirer is already in possession of the
thing at the time of the legal transaction.
Art. 1.268-1.270 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1268. If a thing is delivered by a
person who is not the owner of it, delivery
does not alienate ownership of the thing,
except if it is .offered to the public at an
auction or in a commercial establishment,
and is transferred in such circumstances
that the alienor appears to the good-faith
acqulrer, as to any other person, to be the
owner.
§ 1. If the acquirer is in good faith and the
alienor later acquires ownership of the
thing, the. transfer shall be considered to
have been made at the moment when
delivery occurred.
§2. Delivery does not transfer ownership
when it arises out of a void legal
transaction.
Section V - Specification
Art. 1269. A person who, working with
raw material that belongs in part to another,
obtains a thing of a new kind, he will be
owner of it, if it cannot be restored to its
original form.
Art. 1270. If all the material belongs to
another, and it cannot be reduced to its
earlier form, the new thing shall belong to
the person who in good faith made it.
§ 1. If it is practicable to reduce the material
to its original form, or if the new thing was
obtained in bad faith, it shall belong to the
owner of the raw material.
§2. In any case, including the case of a
painting in relation to the canvas, and of
sculpture, writing and any other graphic
work in relation to the raw material, the
new thing shall belong to the maker, if its
value considerably exceeds that of the raw
material.
266
Art. 1.268. Feita por quern nao seja
proprietario, a tradi1;ao nao alienaa pro-
priedade, exceto se a coisa, oferecida ao
publico, em leilao ou estabelecirnento
cornercial, for transferida em circuns-
tancias tais que. ao adquircnte de boa-
fe, como a qualquer pessoa, o alienantc
se afigurar dono.
§ I 0 Seo adquirente estiver de boa-fee
o alienante adquirir depois a proprieda-
de, considera-se realiznda a transferen-
cia desde o mornento ~in que ocorreu a
tradi1;ao. · posslvel separa-las sem·detei"iorac;ao.
§ 2° Nao transfere a propriedade a tradi-
i;ao, quando tiver por tftulo um neg6cio
jurfdico nulo.
Se"iio V - Da Especifica"iio
Art. l.269. Aquele que, trabalhando em
materia-prima em parte alheia, obtiver
especie nova, desta sera proprietario, se
a
nao se puder restituir forma anterior.
Art; 1.270. Se toda a materia for alheia.
e nao se puder reduzir aforma prcce-
dente, serii do especiftcador de boa-fe a
especie nova.
§ 1° Sendo praticiivel a redui;ao, ou
quando irnpraticiivel, se a especie nova
se obteve de mii-fe, pertencera ao dono
da materia-prima.
§ 2° Em qualquer caso, inclusive o da
pintura em relll\;aO a tela, da escultura,
escritura e outro qualquer trabalho gra-
a
fico em relai;ao materia-prima, a espe-
cie nova sera do. especiftcador, se o seu
valor exceder consideravelmente o da
rnateria-prima.
267 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Art.1.271. Aos prejudicados, nas hip6-
teses dos arts. 1.269 e 1.270, se ressar-
cira o dano que sofrerem, m"enos ao es-
pecificador de ma-fe, no caso do § I 0 do
artigo antecedente, quando irredutfvel a
especiftcac;ao.
Se"ao VI - Da Confusiio, da
Comissiio e da Adjum;lio
Art.1.272. As coisas pertencentes a di-
versos donos, confundidas, misturadas
ou adjuntadas sern o consentimento de-
les, continuam a pertencer-lhes, sendo
§ I 0 Nao sendo possivel a separac;ao das
coisas, ou exigindo dispendio excessi-
vo, subsiste indiviso o todo, cabendo a
cada urn dos donos quinhao proporcio-
nal ao valor da coisa corn que entrou
para a mistura ou agregado.
§ 2° Se uma das coisa~ puder conside-
rar-se principal, o dono se-lo-a do todo,
indenizando os outros.
Art. 1.273. Se a confusao, comissao ou
a
adjuni;ao se operou de mii-fe, o_utra
parte cabera escolher entre adquirir a
propriedade do todo, pagando o que
nao for seu, abatida a indenizm;:ao que
!he for devida, ou renunciar ao que lhe
pertencer, caso em que seni indenizado.
Art. 1.274. Seda upiao de materias de
natureza diversa se formar especie
a
nova, confusao, comissao ou adjun-
i;ao aplicam-se as normas dos arts.
1.272 e 1.273.
Capitulo IV - Da Perda da
Propriedade
Art.1.275. Alem das causa.~ considera-
das neste Cod igo, perde-se a proprie-
dade:
Art. 1.271-1.274
Art. 1271. In the cases contemplated in
arts. 1269 and 1270, when the new thing
cannot be reduced to its raw materials, the
damage suffered by the injured parties shall
be paid to them, with the exception of the
bad-faith maker in the case contemplated in
§ l of the preceding article.
Section VI - Confusion, Commixture
and Adjunction
Art. 1272. Things belonging to various
owners that are confused, commixed or
adjoined without the owners' consent
continue to. belong to them i_f it is possible
to separate the things without deterioration.
§ 1. If separation of the things is not
possible, or requires excessive expenditure,
the whole subsists undivided, and to each of
the owners falls a share proportionate to the
value of the thing he contributed to the
mixture or aggregate.
§2. If one of the things can be considered .to
be the principal thing, the owner of it shall
be the owner of the whole and shall
indemnify the other owners.
Art. 1273. If the confusion, commixture or
adjunction came about ,ju bad faith, the
other party shall have the choice between
acquiring ownership of the whole, paying
for that which is not his, after deduction of
the indemnification that is due to him, or
renouncing his share, in which case he shall
be indemnified.
Art.1274. If a new thing is formed from the
union of materials of different natures, the
rules in arts. 1272 and 1273 shall apply to
the conflision, commixture or adjuhction.
Chapter IV - Loss of
Ownership
Art. 1275. In addition to the causes
considered in this Code, ownership is lost:

Art. 1.276-1.277 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I - by alienation;
II - by renunciation;
III - by abandonment;
IV - by perishinent of the thing;
V - by expropriation.
Sole paragraph.. In tj1e cases contemplated
in items I and II, the effects of loss of
ownership of an immovable shall be subject
to registration of the instrument of transfer
or the act of renunciation in the Register Of
Immovables.
Art; 1276. An urban immovable that the.
owner abandons with the intention of no
longer keeping it in his patrimony, and that
is not in the possession of another, may be
tiiken into keeping as vacant property by the
Municipality <;>r the Federal District within
whose boundaries it is found and shall pass,
three years later, into its ownership.
§ LAn immovable situated in a rural zone,
which is abandm1ed in the same
circumstances, may .be taken into keeping
by the Union as vacant property and shall
pass, three years later, into its ownership,
regarqless of where the immovable is
l.ocated.
§ 2. The intention to which this article
refers shall be presumed absolutely when
acts of possession have ceased and the
owner fails to satisfy the tax burdens.
Chapter V - Rights ofVicinage
Section I -Abnormal Use
of Property
Art. 1277. If the use of an immovable
property interferes with the safety,
tranquility or health of those who inhabit a
neighboring property, the owner or
possessor of the neighboring property has
the right to cause the interference to cease.
268
I - par aliena9iio;
II - pela rem1ncia;
III - por abandono;
IV - por perecimento da coisa;
V - por desapropriagao.
Paragrafo unico. Nos casos dos incises
I e II. os efeitos da perda da propriedade
im6vel seriio subordinados ao registro
do tftulo transmissivo ou do ato renun-
ciative no Registro de Im6veis.
Art.1.276. 0 im6vel urbano que o pro-
prietario abandonar, com aintenr;iio de
nao mais o conservar em seu patrimo-
nio, e quc se nao encontrar.na posse de
outrem, podera ser arrecadado, como
bem vago, e passar, tres anos depois, a
propriedade do Municfpio OU a do Dis-
trito Federal, se se achar nas respectivas
circunscrir;oes.
§ I0 0 im6vel situado na zona rural,
abandonado nas mesmas circunstan-
cias, podera.ser arrecadado, coma bem
vago, e passar, tres anos depois, a pro-
priedade da Uniiio, onde quer que ele se
localize.
§ 2° Presumir-se-a de modo abso!uto a
inten9iio a que se refere este artigo,
quando, cessados os atos de posse, dei-
xar o proprietario de satisfazer os onus
fiscais.
Capitulo V - Dos Direitos de
Vizinhari\;a
Se\;iiO I-Do UsoAnormal da
Propriedade
Art.1.277. 0 proprietario ou o possui-
dor de um predio tern o direito de fazer
cessar as interferencias prejudiciais a
seguran\;a. ao sossego ea saude dos que
o habitam, provocadas pela utiliza~ao
de propriedade vizinha.
269 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. Profbem-se as interfe-
rencias considerando-se a naturcza da
utilizacao, a localizar;ao do predio,
atendidas m; normas quc distribuem as
edifica1,:oes em zonas. e os Jimites ordi-
mirios de tolcrancia dos moradores da
vizinhan1,:a.
Art. 1.278. 0 dircito a que se refere o
artigo antecedente nao prevalece quan-
do as intcrferencias forem justificadas
par interesse publico. caso em que o
proprietario ou o possuidor, causador
delas, pagani ao vizinho indeniza9iio
cabal.
Art.1.279. Ainda que por decisao judi-
cial devam ser toleradas as intcrferen-
cias, podeni o vizinho exigir a sua rcdu-
~ao, ou elimina\:iiO, quando cstas se tor-
narem possiveis.
Art. 1.280. O proprietario ou o possui-
dor tern direito a exigir do dono do pre-
dio vizinho a demoli~ao, ou a repara~ao
deste, quando ameace ruina. bem como
que !he preste cau9iio pelo dano imi-
nente.
Art. 1.281. 0 proprietario ou o possui-
dor de um predio. em que alguem tenha
direito de fazer obras, pode, no caso de
dano iminente, exigir do autor delas as
necessarias garantias contra o prejufzo
eventual.
Se\;iio II- Das Arvores Limitrofes
Art. 1.282. A arvorc. cujo tronco esti-
ver na linha divis6ria, presume-se per-
tencer em comum aos donos dos pre-
dios conflnantes.
Art. 1.283. As rafzes e os ramos de ar-
vore, que ultrapassarem a estrema do
predio, poderiio ser cortados, ate o pia-
no vertical divis6rio, pelo proprietario
do terreno invadido.
Art. 1.278-1.283
Sole paragraph. In determining whether
interferences are prohibited. the nature of
the use, the location of the property,
respecting building and zoning rules, and
the ordinary limits of tolerance of those
living in the neighborhood shall be taken
into consideration.
Art. 1278. The right referred to in the
preceding article does not prevail when the
interferences are justified by the public
interest, in which case the owner or
possessor who causes them shall pay proper
indemnification to the neighbor.
Art. 1279. Even if by judicial decision
interferences must be tolerated, a neighbor
may demand reduction or elimination of
theni, whenever that becomes possible.
Art. 1280. If a building threatens to
collapse. the owner or possessor of a
neighboring property has the right to
demand that the owner of the building
demolish or repair it, and to demand that he
give security for imminent damage.
Art. 1281. The owner or possessor of a
building on which someone has the right to
carry out works, may, in the case of
imminent danger, demand that the person
responsible for the works provide the
necessary security against possible
damage.
Section II - Boundary Trees
Art.1282. A tree whose trunk is a boundary
is presumed to belong in common to the
owners of the adjoining properties.
Art. 1283. The roots and branches of a tree
that go beyond the boundary of a property
may be cut, up to the vertical plane dividing
the properties, by the owner of the invaded
property.

Art, 1.284-1.286 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1284. Fruits fallen from a tree located
on a neighboring property belong to the
owner of the land onto which they fall, if
the land is privately owned.
Section III - Forced Passage
Art. 1285. The owner of a property that
does not have access to a public way, water
source or port rpay, against payment of
appropriate indemnification, require his
neighbor to give him passage, and, if
necessary; the passageway shall be fixed by
a judge.
§ 1. The neighbor whose property most
naturally and easily lends itself to passage
shall suffer the requirement.
§2. If partial alienation of the. property
occurs, such that one of the parts loses
access to a public way, water source or port,
the owner of the other part must tolerate the
passage.
§3. The provisions of the preceding
paragraph apply even when, prior to the
alienation, passage through a neighboring
property existed; the owner of the
neighboring property is not required
afterwards to give another.
Section IV - Passage of Cables
and Pipes
Art. 1286. Against receipt of
indemnification that also redresses the
devaluation of the remaining area, an
owner is bound to tolerate the passage
through his property of cables, pipes and
other underground conduits for services of
public utility, to the benefit of neighboring
owners, when it would otherwise be
impossible or excessively burdensome.
Sole paragraph. The injured owner may
require that the utility systems be installed
in the manner least injurious to the
encumbered property, and, afterwards, may
also demand that the installed systems be
removed, at his cost, to another place on the
property.
270
Art. 1.284. Os frutos cafdos de arvore
do terreno vizinho pertencem ao dono
do solo onde cafram, se este for de pro-
priedade particular.
Se~iio ill - Da Passagem For~ada
Al\. 1.285. 0 dono do predio que nao ti-
ver acesso a via publica, nascente ou
porto; pode, mediarite pagamento de in-
deniza!;iio cabal, constranger o vizinho
a !he dar passagem, cujo rumo seraju-
dicialmente fixado, se necessario.
§ 1° Sofreni o constrangimento o vizi-
nho cujo im6vel mais natural e facil-
mente se prestar a passagem.
§ 2° Se ocorrer aliena!rlio parcial do pre-
dio, de modo que uma <las partes perca
o acesso a via publica, nascente ou por-
to, o propriet:irio da outra deve tolerar a
passagem.
§ 3° Aplica-se o disposto no par:igrafo
antecedente ainda quando, antes da
aliena!;iiO, existia passagem atraves de
im6vel vizinho, nao estando o proprie-
t:irio deste constrangido, depois, a dar
umaoutra.
S~iio IV - Da Passagem de Cabos e
Tubula~iies
Art. 1.286. Mediante recebimento de
indeniza~ao que atenda, tambem, ades-
valoriZa!;1iO da area remanescente, o
propriet:irio e obrigado a tolerar a pas-
sagem, atraves de seu im6vel, de cabos,
tubulayoes e outros condutos subterra-
neos de serviyos de utilidade publica,
em proveito de propriet:irios vizinhos,
quando de outro modo for impassive!
ou excessivamente onerosa.
Paragrafo unico. 0 propriet:irio preju-
dicado pode exigir que a instala~ao seja
feita de modo menos gravoso ao predio
onerado, hem como, depois, seja remo-
vida, a sua custa, para outro local do
im6vel.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
271
Art. 1.287. Se as instala~oes oferece-
rem grave risco, sera facultado ao pro-
priet:irio do predio onerado exigir area-
liza\:ao de obras de segurani;:a.
Se~iio V - Das Aguas
Art. 1.288. 0 dona ou o possuidor do
predio inferior e obrigado a reccber as
aguas que correm naturalmente do su-
perior, nao podcndo realizar obras que
embaracem o seu fluxo; porem a condi-
yiio natural e anterior do predio inferior
nao pode ser agravada por obras feitas
pelo dono ou possuidor do predio supe-
rior.
Art. 1.289. Quando as aguas, artificial-
mente Jevadas ao predio superior, ou ai
colhidas, correrem dele para o inferior,
podera o dona deste reclamar que se
desviem, ou se !he indenize o prejuizo
que sofrer.
Par:igrafo unico. Da indeniza!;iiO ser:i
deduzido o valor do beneficio obtido.
Art. 1.290. 0 propriet:irio de nascente,
ou do solo onde caem iiguas pluviais,
satisfeitas as necessidades de seu con-
sumo, nao pode impedir, ou desviar o
curso narural das aguas remanescentes
pelos predios inferiores.
Art. 1.291. 0 possuidor do im6vel su-
perior nao podera poluir as aguas indis-
pensaveis as primeiras necessidades da
vida dos possuidores dos im6veis infe-
riores; as demais, que poluir, devera re-
cuperar, ressarcindo os danos que estes
sofrerem, se nao for passive! a recupe-
rayao ou o desvio do curso artificial das
aguas.
Art. 1.288-1.291
Art. 1287. If the installed systems offer
serious risk, the owner of the encumbered
property may demand that safety works be
carried out.
Section V - Waters
Art. 1288. The owner or possessor of a
lower property is bound to receive the
waters that flow naturally from the higher,
and may not carry out works that impede
the flow; however, the prior natural
condition of the lower property may not be
worsened by works carried out by the
owner or possessor of the higher property.
Art. 1289. When waters artificially
brought to the higher property, or coHected
there, flow from it to the lower property, the
owner of the latter may demand that the
waters be deviated or that he be
indemnified for any injury that he may
suffer.
Sole paragraph. The value of the benefit
obtained shall be deducted from the
indemnification.
Art. 1290. Once what is needed for his
consumption is satisfied, the owner of a
spring, or of land where rainwater falls,
cannot prevent or deviate the natural course
of the remaining waters over the lower
properties.
Art. 1291. The possessor of the higher
property may not poll~te the wat~~s that ~e
indispensable to th\! first necessities ~flif'.e
of the possessors of the lower properties; if
he pollutes the other waters, he must restore
them, or pay the damage that the owners of
the lower properties suffer, if it is not
possible to restore the waters or deviate
them from their artificial course.
Art 1.292-1.295 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1292. An owner has the right to
construct barriers, dams and other works to
hold in waters on his property; if the waters
so held invade the property of another, the
owner of the invaded property shall be
indemnified for the damage suffered,
deducting the value of the benefit obtained.
Art. 1293. Anyone may, against prior
indemnification of the injured property
owners, construct channels through others'
property in order to receive waters to which
he has the right and that are indispensable
to the first necessities of life and, provided
it does not cause considerable harm to
agriculture or industry, for the run-off of
superfluous or accumulated waters, or the
draining of land.
§ 1. The injured owner, in such a case, also
has the right :to
compensation for any
damage that i;nay occur in the future by
reason of the infiltration or overflow of the
waters, or from the deterioration of the
works intended to channel the waters.
§2. The injured owner may demand that
channels that cross constructed areas,
patios, gardens or yards be underground.
§3. Any water channel shall be constructed
so as to cause the least injury to the owners
of the neighboring properties and at the
expense of the owner of the channel, who
shall also bear the expenses of its upkeep.
Art.1294. The provisions of arts. 1286 and
1287 apply to the right to channel water.
Art. 1295. A water channel shall not
prevent owners from fencing their
properties or building on them, without
impairing the safety and preservation of the
water channel: the owners of the properties
may use the waters of the channel for the
first necessities of life.
272
Art. 1.292. 0 proprietario tem direito
de construir barragens, rn;:udes, ou ou-
tras obras para represamemo de agua
em seu predio; se as aguas represadas
invadirem prcdio alheio, sera o seu pro-
prictiirio indenizado pelo dano sofrido,
deduzido o valor do beneficio obtido.
Art. 1.293. E permitido a quern quer
que seja, mediante previa indeniza~ao
aos proprietarios prejudicados, cons-
truir canais, atraves de predios alheios,
para receher as aguas a que tenha direi-
to, indispensaveis as primeiras necess1-
dades da vida, e, desde que nao cause
prejuizo consideravel a agricultura e a
industria, bem como para o escoamento
de aguas superlluas ou acumuladas, ou
a drenagem de terrenos.
§ 1° Ao proprietiirio prejudicado, em ta!
caso, tambem assiste direito a ressarci-
mento pelos danos que de futuro !he ad-
venham da infiltra<;ao ou irrup~ao das
aguas, bem como da deteriorai;:ao das
obras destinadas a canaliza-las.
§ 2° 0 proprietario prejudicado podcra
exigir que seja subterranea a canaliza-
<;iio que atravessa areas edificadas. pa-
tios, hortas; jardins ou quintais.
§ 3° 0 aqueduto sera construfdo de ma-
neira que cause o menor prejuizo aos
proprietarios dos im6veis vizinhos, e a
expensas do seu dono, a quern incum-
bem tamhem as despesas de conserva-
<;ao.
Art. 1.294. Aplica-se ao direito de
aqueduto o disposto nos arts. 1.286 e
1.287.
Art. 1.295. 0 aqueduto nao impedira
que os proprietarios cerquem os im6-
veis e construam sobre ele, sem prejuf-
zo para a sua seguran9a e conserva9ao;
os propriet.iirios dos im6veis poderao
usar das aguas do aqueduto para as pri-
meiras necessidades da vida.
273 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.296. Havendo no aqueduto
aguas superfluas, outros poderiio cana-
liza-las, para os fins previstos no art.
1.293, mediante pagamento de indeni-
za9ao aos proprietiirios prejudicados e
ao.dono do aqueduto, de importancia
equivalente as despesas que entao se-
riam necessarias para a condu9iio das
agua5 ate 0 ponto de derivai;ao.
Paragrafo unico. Tern preferencia OS
proprietiirios dos im6veis atravessados
pelo aqueduto.
Se<;iio VI - Dos Limites entre
Predios e do Direito de Tapagcm
Art. 1.297. 0 proprietario tern direito a
cercar. murar, vruar ou tapar de qual-
quer modo o seu predio, urbano ou ru-
ral, e pode constrangero seu confinante
a proceder com ele a d'emarca9ao cntre
os dois predios, a aviventar rumos apa-
gados e a renovar marcos destruidos ou
arruinados, repartindo-se proporciohal-
mente entre os iilteressados as respecti-
va5 despesas.
§ ! 0 0s intervalos, muros, cercaseos ta-
pumes divis6rios, tais como sebes vi-
vas. cercas de arame ou de madeira, va-
l as ou banquetas, p~esumem-se, ate
prova em contrario. pertencer a arubos
os proprietiirios confinantes, sendo es-
tes obrigados, de conformidade com os
costumes da localidade, a concorrer,
em partes iguais, para as despesas de
sua constru<;iio e conserva1rao.
§ 2° As sebes vivas, as arvores, ou plan-
tas quaisquer, que servem de marco di-
visorio, s6 podem ser cortadas,ou ar-
rancadas, de comum acordo entre pro-
prietarios.
§ 3° A constru1rao de tapumes especiais
para impedir a passagem de animais de
pequeno porte, ou para outro fim, pode
ser exigida de quern provocou a necessi-
dade deles, pelo proprietiirio, que niio esta
obrigado a concorrer para as despesas.
Art. 1.296-1.297
Art.1296. If there are superfluous waters in
the channel, others may channel them, for
the purposes contemplated in art. 1293,
upon payment of indemnification to the
injured owners and the owner of the water
channel, in an amount equal to the expenses
that would at that time be necessary to
conduct the waters to the deviation point.
Sole paragraph. The owners of the
properties crossed by the water channel
have preference.
Section VI- Boundaries between
Properties and the Right of Enclosure
Art. 1297. An owner has the right to fence,
wall, ditch or otherwise enclose his
property, whether urban or rural, and may
compel the adjoining owner to proceed
with him to mark the boundary between the
two properties, to restore indistinct lines
and to renew destroyed or ruined mar\<ers,
with the expenses being divided
proportionally between the interested
parties.
§ 1. Cleared space, walls, fences and
enclosures, such as hedges, wire or wood
fences, and ditches and banks, lying along
the boundary of properties are presumed,
until the contrary is proved, to belong to
both adjoining owners, who are obligated,
in conformity with the customs of the place,
to contribute in equal shares to the expenses
of their construction and upkeep.
§2. Hedges, trees or other plants that serve
as boundary markers may only be cut down
or pulled up by agreement between the
owners.
§3. An owner may require the construction
of special enclosures to prevent the passage
of small animals, or for other purposes,
from the person who caused such
enclosures to be necessary, and the owner is
not obligated to contribute to the cost of the
enclosures.
Art. 1.298-1.302 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1298. If the boundaries between
properties are unclear, they shall be
determined according to just possession, in
the absence of other means; and if just
possession cannot be proved; the contested
land shall be divided equally between the
properties or, if such division is not
practical, it shall be adjudged to one of
them, against indemnification of the other.
Section VII - The Right to Build
Art. 1299. An owner may raise on his land
such buildings as he pleases, subject to the
neighbors' rights and administrative
regulations.
Art, 1300. The owner shall build in such a
way that his property does not cast water
directly onto the 11eighboring property.
Art.1301. It is forbidden to make
windows, patios, terraces and verandas at a
distance of less than one and a half meters
from the neighboring land.
§ 1. Windows that do not overlook the
property line and those that are
perpendicular may not be made at a
distance of less than seventy-five
centirneters.
§ 2. The provisions of this article do not
apply to openings for light or ventilation
that are not larger than ten centimeters wide
by twenty high, made at a height of more
than two meters from, each floor.
Art. 1302. An owner may, within the
period of one year and one day after the end
of the works, require that the window,
projection, t~rrace or gutter over his
property be removed; after expiry of the
period, he !Jlay not build without
complying with the provisions of the
preceding irrticle, nor prevent or hinder the
flow of water from the gutter if harmful to
the neighboring property.
274
Art. 1.298. Sendo confusos, os limites,
em falta de outro meio, sedeterminariio
de conforITlidade com a posse justa; e,
niio se achando ela provada, o terreno
contestado se dividira por partes iguais
entre os predios, ou, niio sendo possfvel
a divisiio comoda, se adjudicara a um
deles, mediante indeniza<;ao ao outro.
Se\;iio VII - Do Direito de Construir
Art. 1.299. 0 proprietario pode levan-
tar em seu terreno as constrni;oes que
!he aprouver, salvo o direito dos vizi-
nhos e os regulamentos administrati-
vos.
Art.1.300. 0 proprietario construira de
maneira que o seu predio nao despeje
aguas, diretamente, sobre 0 predio vizi-
nho.
Art. 1.301. E defeso abrir janelas, ou
fazer eirado; terra<;o ou varanda, a me-
nos de metro e meio do terreno vizinho.
§ 1° As janelas cuja visao nao incida so-
bre a linha divis6ria, bem como as per-
pendiculares, nao poderao ser abertas a
menos de setenta e cinco centfmetros.
§ 2° As disposii;oes deste artigo nao
abrangem as aberturas para luz ou ven-
tilai;:ao, nao maiores de dez centfmetros
de largura sobre vinte de comprimento
e construfdas a .mais de dois metros de
altura de cada plso.
Art. 1.302. 0 proprietario pode, no lap-
so de ano e dia ap6s a conclusiio da
obra, exigir que se desfa\:a janela, saca-
da, terrai;:o ou goteira sobre o seu pre-
dio; escoado o prazo, nao podera, por
sua vez, edificar sem atender ao dispos-
to no artigo antecedente, nem impedir,
ou dificultar, o escoamento das aguas
da goteira, com prejulzo para o predio
vizinho.
275 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo unico. Em se tratando de
viios, ou aberturas para luz, seja qua! for
a quantidade, altura e disposii;ao, o vi-
zinho podera, a todo tempo, levantar a
sua edificai;:ao, ou contramuro, ainda
que !hes vede a claridade.
Art. 1.303. Na zona mral, nao sera per-
mitido levantar edificrn;:oes a menos de
tres metros do terreno vizinho.
Art. 1.304. Nas cidades, vilas e povoa-
dos cujaedifica\!ao estiver adstrita a ali-
nhart1ento, o dono de um terreno pode
nele edificar, madeirando na parede di-
vis6ria do predio contiguo, se ela su-
portar a nova construi;:iio; mas tera de
embolsar ao vizinho metade do valor da
parede e do chao correspondentes.
Art. 1.305. 0 confinante, que primeiro
construir, pode assentar a parede divi-
s6ria ate meia espessura no terreno con-
tiguo, sem perder por isso o direito a ha-
ver meio valor dela se o vizinho a trave-
jar, caso em que o primeiro fixara a lar-
gura e a profundidade do alicerce.
Paragrafo unico. Se a parede divis6ria
pertencer a um dos vizinhos, e nao tiver
capacidade para ser travejada pelo ou-
tro, nao podera este fazer-lhe alicerce
ao pe sem prestar cam;:ao aquele, pelo
risco a que expoe.aconstru<;ao anterior.
Art. 1.306. 0 condomino da parede-
meia pode utiliza-la ate ao meio da es-
pessura, nao pondo em risco a seguran-
1:a ou a separai;:ao dos dois predios, e
avisando previamente o outro condo-
mino das obras que ali tenciona fazer;
nao pode sem consentimento do outro,
fazer, na parede-meia, armarios, ou
obras semelhantes, correspondendo a
outras, da mesma natureza, ja feitas do
!ado oposto.
Art. 1.303-1.306
Sole paragraph. 'in the case of spans or
openings for light, regardless of their
number, height and disposition, the
neighbor may construct his building or
counter wall at any time, even if it blocks
the light to such spans or openings.
Art. 1303. In rural zones, it shall not be
permitted to construct buildings at a
distance of less than three meters from the
neighboring land.
Art. 1304. In cities, towns, villages and
settlements in which buildings are aligned
in rows, the owner of a plot of land may
build by framing against the boundary wall
of the adjoining property, if it will support
the new construction; but he must pay to tl1e
neighbor one-half of the value of the
corresponding wall and ground.
Art. 1305. The first adjoining owner to
build may place the boundary wall so that
up to one-half of its thickness rests on the
bordering property, without thereby losing
the right to receive one-half of the value of
the wall from the neighbor if he uses it to
support timbers; and in that case, the first
adjoining owner shall fix the width and
depth of the foundations.
Sole paragraph. If the boundary wall
belongs to one of the neighbors, and it may
not be used by the other to support timbers,
the othet neighbor may not lay foundations
at the wall's foot without giving security to
the first for the risk to which he exposes the
earlier construction.
Art. 1306. A co-owner of a boundary wall
may use up to one-half of the wall's
thickness if he does not put the safety or
separation of the two buildings at risk and if
he gives advance notice to the other
co-owner of the work he intends to do; he
may not, without the consent of the other,
make closets or similar works
corresponding to others of the same kind
already made on the other side.
Art. 1.307-1.312. BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1307. Either of the adjoining owners
may increase the height of the boundary
wall, reconstructing it if necessary to
support the increased height; he shall bear
all the expenses, including maintenance
expenses, or half of them only, if the
neighbor also acquires a one-half interest of
the increased part.
Art.1308. It is not lawful to rest against the
boundary wall chimneys, stoves, ovens or
any other appliances or storage devices
capable of producing infiltrations or
interference harmful to the neighbor;
Sole paragraph. The preceding provision
does not apply to ordinary chimneys and
kitchen stoves,
Art. 1309. Constructions are prohibited if
they are capable of polluting or spoiling for
ordinary use the water of another person's
well or spring, if it existed prior to the
construction.
Art. 1310. It is not permitted to excavate or
carry out any other works that take water
from another person's well or spring that is
indispensable to normal necessities.
Art. 1311. It is not permitted to carry out
any work or service that is capable of
causing earth to collapse or be dislodged, or
that may compromise the safety of the
neighboring building, unless preventative
works have first been made.
Sole paragraph. The owner of the
neighboring property has the right to
compensation for damage suffered, even if
preventative works were carried out.
Art. 1312. Anyone who violates the
prohibitions established in this Section is
obligated to demolish the construction and
is liable for losses and damage.
276
Art. 1.3117. Qualquer dos confinantes
pode al tear a parede divis6ria. se neces-
siirio reconstru in do-a, para suportar o
alteamento: arcara com todas as dcspc-
sas. inclusive de conserva9ao, ou com
metade, se o vizinho adquirir mea9ao
tambCm na parte aumentada.
Art. 1.308. Nao e lfcito encostar apare-
de divis6ria chamines, fogoes, fornos
ou quaisquer aparelhos ou dep6sitos
suscetfveis de produzir infiltrai;oes ou
interferencias prejudiciais ao vizinho.
Paragrafo unico. A disposh;:ao anterior
nao abrange as chamines ordinarias e os
fogoes de cozinha.
Art. 1.309. Sao proibidas constru9oes
capazes de poluir, ou inutilizar, para
uso ordinario. a agua do po90, ou nas-
cente alheia, a elas preexistentes.
Art. 1.310. Nao e permitido fazer esca-
vm;:oes ou quaisquer obras que tirem ao
pOl(O OU anascente de Olltrem a agua in-
dispensavel as suas necessidades nor-
mais.
Art.1.311. Nao epermitida a execw;:ao
de qualquer obra ou servi\;O suscetfvel
de provocar desmoronamento ou deslo-
ca9ao de terra, ou que comprometa a se-
guran9a do predio vizinho, senao apos
haverem sido feitas as obras acautelat6-
rias.
Paragrafo unico. 0 proprietiirio do pre-
dio vizinho tern direito a ressarcimento
pelos prejufzos que sofrer, nao obstante
haverem sido realizadas as obras acau-
telat6rias.
Art. 1.312. Todo aquele que violar as
proihi9oes estabelecidas nesta Se9ao e
obrigado a demolir as constru~oes fei-
tas, respondendo por perdas e danos.
277 CODI GO CIVIL BILI NGUE
Art. 1.313. 0 proprietiirio ou ocupante
do imovel e obrigado a tolerar que 0 vi-
zinho entre no predio, mediante previo
aviso, para:
I - dele temporariamente usar. quando
indispensavel a repara9ao, construc;ao.
reconstrn9ao ou limpeza de sua casa ou
do muro divis6rio;
II - apoderar-se de coisas suas. inclusi-
ve animais que af se encontrem casual-
mentc.
§ I0 0 disposto neste artigo aplica-se
:ms casos de limpeza ou reparac;ao de
esgotos, goteiras, aparelhos higicnicos,
poc;os e nascentes e ao aparo de cerca
viva.
§ 2° Na hipotese do inciso II, uma vez
entregnes as coisas buscadas pelo vizi-
nho, podera ser impedida a sua entrnda
no imovel.
§ 3° Se do exercfcio do direito assegura-
do neste artigo provier dano, teni o pre-
judicado direito a ressarcimento.
Capltulo VI - Do Condominio Geral
Sec;iio I - Do Condominio
Voluntario
Subsec;ao I - Dos Direitos e Deveres
dos Condominos
Art. 1.314. Cada condomino pode usar
da coisa conforme sua destinar;:ao, so-
bre ela exercer todos os direitos compa-
tfveis com a indivisao, reivindicii-la de
terceiro, defender a sua posse e al hear a
respectiva parte ideal. ou gravt1-la.
Pariigrafo unico. Nenhum dos condo-
minos pode alterar a destinai;:ao da coi-
sa comum, nem dar posse, uso ou gozo
dela a estranhos, sem o consenso dos
outros.
Art. 1.313-1.314
Art. 1313. The owner or occupant of an
immovable property is obligated to tolerate
the neighbor's entry onto the property, on
advance notice, in order to:
I - use the property temporarily, if the use
is indispensable to the repair, construction,
reconstruction or cleaning of his house or
the boundary wall;
II - take possession of things that are his,
including animals that strayed onto the
property.
§ I. The provisions of this article apply to
the cleaning and repair of sewers, gutters,
sanitary appliances, wells and springs, and
to the trimming of hedges.
§ 2. In the case contemplated in item II,
once the things sought by the neighbor are
delivered, his entry onto the immovable
may be prevented.
§ 3. If the exercise of the right provided for
in this article results in damage, the injured
party has the right to compensation.
Chapter VI - General Co-ownership
Section I - Voluntary
Co-ownership
Subsection I - The Rights and Duties of
Co-owners
Art. 1314. Each co-owner may use the
thing in accordance with its purpose,
exercise over it all those rights compatible
with undivided ownership, claim it from
third parties, defend his possession and
alienate or encumber his undivided share.
Sole paragraph. None of the co-owners
may alter the purpose of the common thing,
nor give possession, use or enjoyment of it
to strangers without the consent of the
others.
Art. 1.315-1.320 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1315. A co-owner is obligated, in
proportion to his share, to contribute to the
expenses of maintaining or dividing the
thing, and to bear the onuses to which it is
subject.
Sole paragraph. The undivided shares of
the co-owners are presumed to be equal.
Art. 1316. A co-owner may exclude
himself from payment of expenses and
debts by renouncing his undivided share.
§ 1. If the other co-owners assume the
expenses and debts, the renunciation
operates to their benefit, and they acquire
the undivided share of the one who
renounced it, in proportion to the payments
they make.
§2. If none of the co-owners make the
payments, the common thing shall be
divic\ed.
Art. 1317. If a debt was contracted by all
the co~owners, without distinguishing the
share of each in the obligation and without
stipulating solidarity, they are understood
to have obligated themselves in proportion
to their shares in the common thing.
Art. 1318. Debts contracted by one of the
co-owners to the benefit of, and during, the
co-ownership obligate the contracting
co-owner; but he has a right of recourse
against the others.
Art. 1319. Each co-owner is liable to the
others for the fruits that he has from the
thiD:g and for the damage that he causes to
it.
Art. )320. It is lawful at all times for a
co-owner to demand division of the
common thing, with the share of each
co-owner being liable for the expenses of
division.
278
Art. 1.315. O condomino e obrigado,
na propor\:ao de sua parte, a concorrer
para as despesas de conserva\:ao ou di-
visao da coisa, e a suportar os onus a
que estiver sujeita.
Paragrafo unico. Presumem-se iguais
as partes ideais dos condominos.
Art. 1.316. Pode o condomino eximir-
se do pagamento das despesas e dfvi-
das, renunciando aparte ide-al.
§ 1° Se os demais condominos assu-
mem as despesas e as dfvidas, a ren(m-
cia !hes aproveita, adquirindo a parte
ideal de quern renunciou, na propon;:ao
dos pagamentos que fizerem.
§ 2° Se nao ha condomino que fa\:a os
pagamentos, a coisa comum sera divi-
dida.
Art. 1.317. Quando a dfvida houver
sido contrafda por todos os condomi-
nos, sem.se discriminar a parte de cada
um na obriga\:ao, nem se estipular soli-
dariedade, entende-se que cada qua! se
obrigou proporcionalmente ao seu qui-
nhiio na coisa comum.
Art. 1.318. As dfvidas contrafdas por
um dos condominos em proveito da co-
munhao, e durante ela, obrigam o con-
tratante; mas tera este a\:ao regressiva
contra os demais.
Art. 1.319. Cada condomino responde
aos outros pelos frutos que percebeu da
coisa e pelo dano que !he causou.
Art. 1.320. A todo tempo sera lfcito ao
condomino exigir a divisao da coisa co-
m um, respondendo o quinhao de cada
um pela sua parte nas despesas da divi-
sao.
279 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
§ 1° Podem os condominos acordar que
fique indivisa a coisa comum por prazo
nao maior de cinco anos, suscetfvel de
prorroga1;ao ulterior.
§ 2° Nao podera exceder de cinco anos
a indivisao estabelecida pelo doador ou
pelo testador.
§ 3° A requerimento de qualquer inte-
ressado e se graves razoes o aconselha-
rem, pode o juiz detertninar a divisao da
coisa comum antes do prazo.
Art. 1.321. Aplicam-se a divisao do
condomfnio, no que couber, as regras
de partilha de heran9a (arts. 2.013 a
2.022).
Art. 1.322. Quando a coisa for indivisf-
vel, e os consortes nao quiserem adjudi-
ca-la a um so, indenizando os outros,
sera vendida e repartido o apurado, pre-
ferindo-se, na venda, em condi\:oes
iguais de oferta, o condomino ao estra-
nho, e entre os condominos aquele que
tiver na coisa benfeitorias mais valio-
sas, e, nao as havendo, o de quinhao
maior.
Paragrafo unico. Se nenhum dos con-
dominos tern benfeitorias na coisa co-
mum e participam todos do condomfnio
em partes iguais, realizar-se-a licita\:ao
entre estranhos e, antes de adjudicada a
coisa aquele que ofereceti maior lan1;0,
a
proceder-se-a licita\:aO entre OS COn-
dilminos, a fim de que a coisa seja adju-
dicada a quern afinal oferecer melhor
lan~o, preferindo, em condii;:oes iguais,
o condilmino ao estranho.
Art. 1.321-1.322
§ 1. The co-owners may agree that the
common thing shall remain undivided for a
period no greater than five years, which
may later be extended.
§2. Indivision established by a donor or
testator may not exceed five years.
§3. On application by any interested party
and if serious reasons support it, the judge
may order division of the common thing
prior to the expiry of the period.
Art. 1321. The rules for division of
inheritances apply, to the extent
compatible, to division of co-ownership
(arts. 2013 to 2022).
Art. 1322. When the thing is indivisible,
and the parties do not wish to award it to
one party alone, who shall indemnify the
others, the thing shall be sold and the
product of sale shared out; at the sale, if the
offers are otherwise equal, a co-owner shall
be preferred to a stranger, and among the
co-owners the one who made the more
valuable improvements shall be preferred,
and if there are no improvements, then the
one who has the largest share shall be
preferred.
Sole paragraph. If none of the co-owners
has improvements in the common thing and
all have equal shares in the co-ownership, a
public auction among strangers shall be
held and, before the thing is awarded to the
person who offered the highest bid, an
auction shall be held among the co-owners
so that the thing may be the one to awarded
who, in the end~ makes a better bid, with a
co-owner being preferred to the stranger, if
the conditions are otherwise equal.

Art. 1.323-1.328 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Subsection II -Administration of
Co-ownership
Art. 1323. The administrator of the
common thing shall be chosen by
resolution adopted by the majority; the
administrator may be a stranger to the
co-ownership, but ifthe majority resolve to
lease the thing, a co-owner shall be
preferred to one who i$ not, if the
conditions are otherwise equal.
Art.1324. A co-owner who administers the
thing without opppsition by the others is
presumed to be their common
representative.
Art. 1325. The majority shall be calculated
by the value of the shares.
§ 1. Resolutions are binding, if adopted by
an absolute majority.
§2. If a~ absolute majority cannot be
reached, on application by any co~owner
the judge shall decide, after hearing the
others.
§3. If.there is doubt as to the value of a
share,· it shall be assessed j uqiciall y.
Art. 1326. Th~ fruits of the common thing
shail be divid~d in proportjon to the shares,
if there is no stipulation or disposition by
testament to the contrary.
Section ll - Necessary
Co-ownership
. '
Art.1327. CQ.-ownership by halves of
walls, fences, hedges and ditches is
governed by the provisio~s of this Code
(arts.1297 and.1298; 1304.to 1307).
Art. 1328. An owner who has the right to
demarcate a pwperty with walls, fences,
hedges. ditches or barriers also has the right
to acquire half of the neighbor's wall,
masonry fence or barrier, paying the
neighbor one half of the current value of the
work and the land occupied by it (art.
1297).
280
Subse9io II- Da Administra~iio do
Condominio
Art. 1.323. Deliberando a maioria so-
bre a administrai;;ao da coisa comum.
escolhera o administrador. que podera
ser estranho ao condomfnio; resolven-
do aluga-la. prefcrir-se-i em condii;iies
iguais, 0 condomino ao que nao 0 e.
Art.1.324. 0 condomino que adminis-
trar sem oposii;ao dos outros presume-
se representante comum.
Art. 1.325. A maioria sera c.alculada
pelo valor dos quinlioes.
§ 1° As deliberai;;oes seriio obrigat6rilt~.
sendo tomadas par maioria absoluta.
§ 2° Nao sendo possfvel alcani;;ar maio-
ria absoluta. decidira o juiz, a requeri-
mento de qualquer condom\no, ouvidos
os outros.
§ 3° Havendo duvidaquanto ao valor do
quinhao, ser:i este avaliad.o judicial-
mente.
Art. I.326. Os frutos da coisa comum,
nao havendo em contnirio estipulai;;ao
ou disposii;;ao de Ultima vontade, seriio
partilhados na propori;;ao dos quinh6es.
Se~o II - Do Condomlnio
Necessario
Art. 1.327. 0 condomfnio por meai;;ao
de paredes, cercas, muros e valas regu-
la-se pelo disposto neste C6digo (arts.
1.297 e 1.298; 1.304 a 1.307).
Art. 1.328. 0 proprietario que tiver di-
reito a estremar um im6vel com pare-
des, cercas, muros, val.as ou valados, tc-
lo-a igualmente a adquirir mear.:ao na
parede, muro, valado ou cerca do vizi-
nho, embolsando-lhe metade do que
atualmente valer a obra e o terreno por
ela ocupado (art. 1.297).
j
281 CODJGO CIVIL BlLfNGUE
' Art. 1329-1.331
1[
Art. 1.329. Nao convindo os dois no
l
pre;;:o da obra. sera este arbitrado por
peritos, a expensas de ambos os confi-
nantes.
I Art. 1.330. Qualquer que seja o valor
l da meai;;ao, enquanto aquele que pre-
tender a divisao nao o pagar ou deposi-
I
tar, nenhum uso podera fazer na parede.
muro, vala, cerca ou qualquer outra
obra divis6ria.
I Capftulo VII - Do Condominio
' Edilicio
Se~o I- Disposi~i'ies Gcrais
Art.1.331. Pode haver, em edifica~iies,
partes que siio propriedade exclusiva. e
partes que sao propriedade comum dos
condominos.
§ I 0 As partes suscetfveis de utilizar;ao
independente, tais como apartamentos,
escrit6rios, salas, Iojas, sobrelojas ou
abrigos para vefculos. com as respecti-
vas frai;iies ideais no solo e nas outras
partes comuns, sujeitam-se a proprie-
dade exclusiva. podendo ser alienadas e
gravadas livremertte por seus proprieta-
rios.
§ 2° 0 solo, a estrutura do predio. o te-
lhado, a rede geral de distribuir.:ao de
agua. esgoto, gas e eletricidade, a cal.e-
far.:ao e refrigerai;;ao centrais, e as de-
mais partes comuns, inclusive o acesso
ao logradouro publico, sao utilizados
em comum pelos condominos, nao po-
dendo ser alienados separadamente, ou
div)didos.
§ 3° A cada unidade imobili:iria cabera,
como parte inseparavel, uma fra;;:ao
ideal no solo e nas outras·panes co-
muns, que sera identificada em forma
decimal ou ordin:iria no instrumento de
instituir.:ao do condomfnio. (l~edai;;iio
dadapelaLei 1\0 10.931. de 2004)
Art. 1329. If the two cannot agree on the
price of the work, it shall be assessed by
experts, at the expense of both the adjoining
property owners.
Art. 1330. Regardless of the value of the
one..:half interest, until the person who
wishes to acquire the interest has paid or
deposited that amount, he may not make
use of the wall, masonry fence, ditch, fence
or other dividing work.
Chapter VII - Co-ownership of
Buildings (Condominiums)
Section I - General Provisions
Art.. 1331. In buildings there may be parts
th.at are the exclusive property and parts
that are the common property of the
co-owners.
§ 1. Parts that may be used independently,
such as apartments, offices, rooms, shops,
stores and shelters for vehicles, together
with their respective fractional undivided
interest in the soil and other common parts.
are subject to exclusive ownership and may
be free! y alienated and encumbered by their
owners.
§2. The soil, the structure pf the building,
the roof, the general system for distribution
of water, sewage, gas and electricity, the
central heating and cooling systems and
other common parts, including access to the
public area of the building, are used in
common by the co-owners and cannot be
alienated separately or divided.
§3. Each condominium unit shall be
entitled, as ah inseparable part, to a
fractional undivided interest in the soil and
other common parts, which shall be
identified in the form of a decimal or
ordinary fraction in the instrument that
institutes co-ownership of the building. (As
amended by Law 10,931 of2004)
Art. 1.332- 1.334 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§4. No condominium unit may be deprived
of access to the public area.
§5. The rooftop terrace is a common part,
unless the instrument that constitutes
co-ownership of the building otherwise
provides.
Art. 1332. Co-ownership of buildings is
created by inter vivos act or by testament
registered in the Immovable Property
Registry Office, and the act shall set out, in
addition to the matters provided for by
special legislation:
I - a distinguishing description of the units
under exclusive ownership, each delimited
with respect to the others and the common
parts;
II-. the determination of the fractional
undivided interest attributed to each unit,
with respect to the land and the common
portions;
III - the purpose for which the units are
intended.
Art. 1333. The convention that constitutes
the co-ownership of the building must be
signed by the owners of at least two-thirds
of the fractional undivided interests and
immediately becomes binding for the
rightful owners of the units or for as many
as have possession of them or hold them.
Sole paragraph. In order to be opposable to
third parties, the co-ownership convention
must be registered in the Immovable
Property Registry Office.
Art. 1334. In addition to the provisions
referred to in art. 1332 and such others as
the interested parties may have seen fit to
stipulate, the convention shall determine:
282
§ 4° Nenhuma unidade imobiliaria pode
ser privada do acesso ao logradouro pu-
blico.
§ 5° 0 terra~o de cobertura e parte co-
mum, salvo disposii;ao contraria da es-
critura de constituii;ao do condomfnio.
Art. 1.332. Institui-se o condomfnio
edilfcio por ato entre vivos ou testa-
mento, registrado no Cart6rio de Regis-
tro de lm6veis, devendo constar daque-
le ato, alem do disposto em lei especial:
I - a discriminai;ao e individualizai;ao
das unidades de propriedade exclusiva,
estremadas uma das outras e das partes
comuns;
Il - a determinai;ao da frar;ao ideal atri-
bufda a cada unidade, relativamente ao
terreno e partes comuns;
III - o fim a que as unidades se desti-
nam.
Art. 1.333. A convenr;ao que constitui
o condmnfnio edilicio deve ser subscri-
ta pelos titulares de, no minimo, dois
terr;os das frai;:oes ideais e torna-se, des-
de logo, obrigat6ria para os titulares de
direito sob re as unidades, ou para quan-
tos sobre elas tenham posse ou deten-
r;ao.
Paragrafo unico. Para ser oponfvel con-
tra terceiros, a convenr;ao do condoml-
nio devera ser registrada no Cart6rio de
Registro de Im6veis.
Art. 1.334. Akim das clausulas referi-
das no art. l.332 e das que os interessa-
dos houverem por bem estipular, a con-
venr;ao deterrninara:
283 CODIGO CIVIL BlLlNGUE
I - a quota proporcional e o modo de pa-
gamento das contribui~oes dos condo-
minos para atender as despesas ordina-
rias e extraordinarias do condominio;
II - sua forma de administrai;ao;
llI - a competencia das assembleias,
forma de sua convocai;;ao e quomm exi-
gido para as deliberar;oes;
IV - as sanr;oes a que estiio sujeitos os
condilminos, ou possuidores; ' possessors are subject;
V - o regimento interno.
§ I A conven~ao podcra ser feil;t por
0
escritura publica ou por instru~ento
particular.
§ 2° Sao equiparados aos proprietarios,
para os fins deste artigo, salvo disposi-
~ao em contrario. os promitentes com-
pradores e os cessionarios de direitos
relativos as unidades autonomas.
Art. 1.335. Sao direitos do condomino:
I - usar, fruir e livreinente dispor das
suas unidades;
II - usar das partes comuns, conforme a
sua destina~ao, e contanto que nao ex-
clua a utilizar;ao dos demais compos-
suidores;
Ill - votar 'nas deliberar;oes da assem-
bleia e delas participar, estando quite.
Art. 1.336. Sao deveres do condomino:
I - contribuir para as despesas do con-
domfnio na proporr;ao das suas frai;iies
ideais, salvo disposir;ao em contrario na
convenr;ao; (Reda~ao dada pela Lei n°
10.931, de 2004)
Art. 1.335-1.336
I - the proportional share and the manner of
payment of the contributions of the
co-owners to meet the ordinary and
extraordinary expenses of the
condominium;
II - the form of administration of the
condominium;
III - the authority of the assembly of
co-owners, the manner in which meetings
of the assembly shall be called and the
majority required to adopt resolutions;
IV - the sanctions to which co-owners or
V - the internal regulations.
§I. The convention may be made by public
writing or by private instrument.
§2. For the purposes of this article, unless
otherwise provided, promissor-buyers and
assignees of rights with respect to the
independent units shall be equated to
owners.
Art. 1335. A co-owner has the following
rights:
I - to use, enjoy and dispose freely of his
units;
II - to use the common parts in conformity
with their purpose, provided that this does
not exclude their use by the other
co-possessors;
III - to vote on resolutions at meetings of
the assembly and participate in assemblies,
if his debts to the condominium are paid.
Art. 1336. A co-owner has the following
duties:
I - to contribute to the expenses of the
condominium, in proportion to his
fractional undivided interests, saving
provision to the contrary in the convention;
(As amended by Law 10,931 of2004)
Art. 1.337 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - not to carry out works that could
compromise the safety of the building;
III - not to alter the form or color of the
fa9ade, the external parts of the building or
the external doors, frames, sashes, railings
and the like;
IV - to use his parts for the purpose given
to the building; and not to use such parts in
a manner that is harmful to the peace, health
or safety of the possessors or to good
conduct
§ 1. A co-owner who fails to pay his
contribution shall be subject to the
late-payment interest fixed in the
condominium convention or, if no
provision has been made, to interest of one
percent per month and a fine of up to two
percent over the amount due.
§2. A co-owner who fails to fulfill any of
the duties established in items II to IV shall
pay the rme provided for in the constituting
instrument or the convention, which' may
not be greater than five times the amount of
his monthly contributions, in addition to
any losses and damage found to exist; if
there is no express provision, the general
assembly, by resolution adopted by at least
two-thirds of the remaining co-owners,
may decide on the fine to be imposed.
Art. 1337. A co-owner or possessor who
repeatedly fails to fulfill his duties toward
the condominium may, by resolu.tion
adopted by three-quarters of the remaining
co-owners, be compelled to pay a fine of up
to five tiines the amount attributed to his
contribution to the expenses of the
condominium, in accordance with the
seriousness of his misconduct and the
number of times it has occurred, in addition
to 'any losses and damagefound to exist.
284
II - nao realizar obras que comprome-
tam asegurarn;:a da edificru;ao;
III - nao alterar a forma e a cor da facha-
da, das partes e esquadrias extemas;
IV - dar as suas partes a mesma destina-
~ao que tern a edificru;ao, e nao as utili-
zar de maneira prejudicial ao sossego,
salubridade e seguran~a dos possuido-
res, ou aos hons costumes.
0
§ I O condomino que nao pi\gar a sua
contribui~ao ficara sujeito aos juros
morat6rios convencionados ou, nao
sendo previstos, os de um por cento ao
mes e multa de ate dois por cento sobre
o dcbito.
§ 2° O condomino, que nao cumprir
qualquer dos deveres ~stabelecidos nos
incisos II a IV, pagara a mu Ita prevista
no ato constitutivo ou na convern;:ao,
nao podendo elasersuperior acinco ve-
zes ovalor de suas contribui\!iies men-
sais, independentemente das perdas e
danos que se apurarem; nao havendo
disposi~ao expressa, cabera a assem-
bleia geral, por dais ter~os no mfnimo
dos ccindominos restantes. de! iberar so-
b re a cobtan~a da multa,
Art. 1.337. 0 cond6mino, ou possui-
dor, que nao cumpre reiteradamente
com os seus 'deveres perante.o condo-
minio poder<i, por delibera\!i'io de tres
quartos dos condominos restantes. ser
constrangido a pagar multa correspon-
dente ate ao quintuplo do valor atribuf-
do a contribui~ao para as despesas con-
dominiais, conforme a gravidade das
faltas ea reiterru;ao, independentemen-
te das perdas e danos que se apurem.
285 C6DIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Paragrafo unico. 0 cond6mino ou pos-
I
suldor que, por seu reiterado compona-
I mento anti-social, gerar incompatibili-
dade de convivencia com os demais
cond6mlnos ou possuidores. podera ser
I constrangido a pagar multa correspon-
dente ao decuplo do valor atribuido.a
I
contribui\!i'iO para as despesas condomi-
niais, ate ulterior deliberai;ao da assem-
b!eia
Art. 1.338. Resolvendo o condomino
alugar area no abrigo para vefculos,
preferir"se-a, em condi\!iies iguais,
qualquer dos condominos a estranhos,
e, entre· todos, os possuidores.
Art. 1.339. Os direitos de cada condo-
mioo as partes co muns sao inseparaveis
de sua propriedade exclusiva; sao tarn-
bem inseparaveis das fra\!iies ideais
correspondentes as unidades imobilia-
rias, com as suas partes acess6rias.
§ 1° Nos casos deste artigo e proibido
alienar ou gravar os bens em separado.
§ 2° Epertnitido ao condomino alienar
parte acess6ria de sua unidade imobi-
liaria a outro condomino, s6 podendo
faze-lo a terceiro se essa faculdade
constar do ato constitutivo do condomi-
nio, e se a'ela nao se opuser arespectiva
assembleia geral.
Art.1.340. As despesas relativas a par-
tes comuns de uso exclusivo de um con-
domino, ou de alguns deles, incumbem
a quern delas se serve.
Art. 1.341. A realiza~ao de obras no
condomfnio depende:
I - se voluptuarias, de voto de dais ter-
\!OS dos condominos;
II - se uteis, de voto da maioria dos con-
dominos.
Art 1.338-1.341
Sole paragraph: A co-owner or possessor,
who by his repeated anti-social behavior
creates incompatibility between himself
and the remaining co-owners or possessors,
may be compelled to pay a fine often times
the amount attributed to his contribution to
the expenses of the condominium, until
such time as the co-owners in assembly
decide otherwise.
Art.1338. If a co-owner decides to offer for
lease a space in the shelier for vehicles,
where the conditions are otherwise equal, a
co-owner shall be preferred to a stranger and,
among the co-owners, one in possession shall
be·preferred to one who is not.
Art. 1339. The rights of each co-owner to the
common parts are inseparable from their
exclusive property; they are also inseparable
from the fractional undivided interests
corresponding to the condominium units and
their accessory parts.
§ 1. In the cases contemplated in this article
it is prohibited to alienate or encumber the
items of property separately.
§2. It is permitted for a co-owner to alienate
an accessory part of his.condominium unit
to another co-owner, but he may do so to a
third party only if that option is provided for
under the constituting instrument of the
condominium and the general assembly of
co-owners does not oppose it.
Art. 1340. Expenses related to common
parts that are used exclusively by one
co-owner, or by some of them, are borne by
thos.e who benefit from them.
Art. 1341. The carrying-out of works on
the condominium depends on:
I - the favorable vote of two-thirds of the
co-owners, if the work is voluntary;
II - the favorable vote of a majority of the
co-owners, if the work is useful.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1.342-1.344
§ 1. Necessary works and repairs may be
carried out, regardless of authorization, by
the syndic or, if the syndic fails or is unable
to so, by any co-owner.
§2. If the necessary works or repairs are
urgent and will result in excessive expense,
once it has been determined that they shall
be carried out, the syndic or co-owner who
initiated them shall inform the assembly of
co.-owners, which shall immediately be
called to a meeting.
§3. If they are not urgent, necessary works
and repairs that will result in excessive
expense may only be carried out after
authorization by the assembly, which shall
be called to meet for that purpose by the
syndic or, if the syndic fails or is unable to
so, by any of the co-owners.
§4. A co-owner who carries out necessary
works or repairs shall be reimbursed for the
expenses he incurs, without right to
reimbuq;ement of expenses incurred for
works or repairs of any other nature, even if
they are in the common interest.
Art.1342. The carrying-out of works in
common parts, in addition to existing
works, in order to facilitate or increase their
use, depends on approval by two-thirds of
the co-owners' votes; constructions on the
common parts that are susceptible of
interfering with any of the co-owners' use
of their own or the common ·parts are not
permitted.
Art. 1343. Construction of a new storey or
construction of a new building on common
soil, intended to contain new condominium
units, depends on the unanimous approval
of the co-owners.
Art.1344. The owner of the rooftop terrace
is responsible. for the expense of
maintaining it so that there is no damage to
the condominium units below.
286
§ I• As obras ou repara96es necessarias
podem ser realizadas, independente-
mente de autoriza9ao, pelo sindico, ou,
em caso de omissao ou impedimento
deste, por qualquer condomino.
§ 2° Se as obras ou reparos necessarios
forem urgentes e importarem em despe-
sas excessivas, determinada sua reali-
za9ao, o sfndico ou o condomino que
tomou a iniciativa delas dara ciencia a Condomlnio
assembleia, que devera ser convocada
imediatamente.
§ 3° Nao sendo urgentes, as obras ou re-
paros necessarios, que importarem em
despesas excessivas, somente poderao
ser efetuadas ap6s autoriza9ao da as-
sembleia, especialmente convocada
pelo sfndico, ou, em caso de omissao ou
impedimenta deste, por qualquer dos
condominos.
§ 4° O condomino que realizar obras ou
reparos necessarios sera reembolsado
das despesas que efetuar, nao tendo di-
reito a restitui9ao das que fizer com
obras ou reparos de outra natureza, em-
bora de interesse comum.
Art. 1.342. A realiza9ao de obras, em
partes comuns, em acrescimo as ja exis-
tentes, a fim de !hes facilitar ou aumen-
tar a utiliza~o. depende da aprov~ao de
dois ter9os dos votos dos condominos,
nao sendo permitidas constru96es, nas
partes comuns, suscetfveis de prejudicar a
utilizm;:ao, por qualquer dos condomi-
nos, das partes pr6prias, ou comuns.
Art. 1.343. A constru9iio de outro pavi-
mento, ou, no solo comum, de outro
ediffcio, destinado a canter novas uni-
dades imobiliarias, depende da aprova-
9ao da unanimidade dos condominos.
Art. 1.344. Ao proprietario do terra~o
de cobertura incumbem as despesas da
sua conserva9iio, de modo que nao haja
danos as unidades imobiliarias inferio-
res.
287 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1,345. 0 adquirente de unidade
responde pelos debitos do alienante, em
rela<riio ao condominio, inclusive mul-
tas e juros morat6rios.
Art. 1.346. E obrigat6rio o seguro de
toda a edifica9ao contra o risco de in-
cendio OU destrui9ao, total OU parcial.
S~ao II - Da Administrai;ao do
Art. 1.347. A assembleia escolhera um
sfndico, que podera nao ser condomino,
para administrar o condomfnio, por
prazo nao superior a dois anos, o qua!
poderii renovar-se.
Art. 1.348. Compete ao sfndico:
I - convocar a assembleia dos condomi-
nos;
II - representar, ativa e passivamente, o
condomfnio, praticando, em jufzo ou
fora dele, os atos necessarios a defesa
dos interesses comuns;
III - dar imediato conhecimento as- a
sembleia da existencia de procedimen-
to judicial ou administrativo, de interes-
se do condomfnio;
IV - cumprir e fazer cumprir a conven-
1;ao, o regimento intemo e as determi-
na~oes da assembleia;
V - diligenciar a conserva9ao ea guarda
das partes comuns e zelar pela presta-
9ao dos servii;os que interessem aos
possuidores;
VI - elaborar o or9amento da receita e
da despesa relativa a cada ano;
VII - cobrar dos condominos as suas
contribui9oes, bem como impor e co-
brar as multas devidas;
a
VIII - prestar contas assembleia,
anualmente e quando exigidas;
Art. 1.345-1.348
Art. 1345. The acquirer of a unit is liable
for the debts of the alienor with respect to
the condominium, including fines and late
payment interest.
Art. 1346. Insurance of the entire building
against the risk of fire and total or partial
destruction is mandatory.
Section II -Administration of the
Condominium
Art. 1347. The assembly shall choose a
syndic, who need not be a co-owner, to
administer the condominium for a period of
not more than two years, which may be
renewed.
Art. 1348. The syndic has the authority:
I - to call meetings of the assembly of
co-owners;
II - to represent the condominium, and to
perform, before the courts and elsewhere,
such acts as are necessary to defend
common interests;
III- immediately to inform the assembly of
co-owners of the existence of judicial or
administrative proceedings of interest to
the condominium;
IV - to comply with the convention, the
internal regulations and the decisions of the
assembly and to cause them to be complied
with;
V - diligently to work for the maintenance
and safeguarding of the common parts and
for the provision of services that are in the
possessors' interests;
VI - to prepare a budget of revenues and
expenses for each year;
VII - to collect their contributions from the
co-owners, and to impose and collect fines
owed;
VIII - to render accounts to the assembly of
co-owners, annually and whenever
demanded;
 Art. 1.349-1.351 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
IX - to cause the building to be insured.
§ 1. The assembly of co-owners may invest
powers of representation in another person,
in the syndic's stead.
§2. The syndic may transfer to another, in
whole or in part, his powers of
representation or administrative functions,
upon approval by the assembly of
co-owners, unless the convention
otherwise provides.
Art. 1349. The assembly of co-owners, at a
meeting called especially for the purpose
referred to in §2 of the preceding article,
may, by vote of an absolute majority of its
members, remove a syndic who performs
irregular acts, does not render accounts or
does not properly administer the
condominium.
Art. 1350. The syndic shall call annually a
nieetirig of the assembly of co-owners, in
the manner provided for in the convention,
for the purpose of approving the expense
budget, the contributions of the co-owners
and the rendering of accounts and, if
applicable, electing a new syndic and
amending the internal regulations.
§ 1. If the syndic does not call the meeting
of the assembly, a quarter of the co-owners
may do so.
§2. If the assembly does not meet, a judge
shall decide, on application by any
co-owner.
Art. 1351. Amendments to the convention
depend on approval by two-thirds (213) of
the votes of the co-owners; a change in the
purpose of the building or of the
condominium units depends on unanimous
approval by the co-owners. (As amended
by Law 10,931 of2004)
-----------------------·----·-·------------
288
IX - realizar o seguro da edifica9ao.
§ I Podera a assembleia investir outra
0
pessoa, em lugar do sfndico, em pode-
res de representa9ao.
§ 2° 0 sfndico pode transferir a outrcm,
total ou parcialmentc, os podercs de
representar;ao ou a~ furn;iies adminis-
trativas, mediante aprovai;:ao da assem-
bleia, salvo disposir;:ao em contrario da
conveni;:ao.
Art.1.349. A assembleia, especialmen-
te convocada para o fim estabelecido no
§ 2 o do artigo antecedente, podera,
pelo voto da maioria absoluta de seus
membros, destittiir o sfndico que prati-
car irregularidades, nao prestar contas,
ou nao administrar convenientemente o
condomfnio.
Art.1.350. Convocara o sindico, anual-
mente, reuniao da assembleia dos con-
dominos, na forma prevista na conven-
r;ao, a fim de aprovar o or9amento das
despesas, as contribui1;iies dos condo-
minos e a prestar;ao de contas, e even-
tualmen'te eleger-lhe o substiiuto e alte-
rar o regimento interno.
§ I 0 Se d sfndico niio convocar a assem-
bleia, um quarto dos condominos pode-
ni faze-lo.
§ 2° Se a assembleia nao se reunir, o juiz
decidira, a requerimento de qualquer
condomino.
Art. 1.351. Depende da aprovac;ao de
213 (dais terr;os) dos votos dos condo-
minos a altera~ao da convenr;ao; a mu-
darn;;a da destinar;ao do ediffcio, ou da
unidade imobiliaria, depende da apro-
va~ao pela unanimidade dos condomi-
nos. (Redar;ao dada pela Lei n° 10.931,
de2004)
289 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.352. Salvo quando exigido quo-
rum especial, as deliberai;;oes da assem-
bleia serao tomadas, em primeira con-
vocar;ao, por maioria de votos dos con-
dominos presentes que representem
pelo menos metade das fra9i'ies ideais.
Paragrafo unico. Os votos serao pro-
porcionais as fra~iies ideais no solo e
nas outras partes comuns pertencentcs a
cada condomino, salvo disposii;;ao di-
versa da conveni;;ao de constituic,,:ao do
condomfnio.
Art.1.353. Em segunda convocai;;ao, a
assembleia podeni deliberar .por maio-
ria dos votos dos presentes, salvo quan-
do exigido quorum especial.
Art. 1.354. A assembleia nao podera
deliberar se todos os condominos nao
forem convocados para a reuniao.
Art. 1.355. Assembleias extraordina-
rias poderao ser convocadas pelo sfndi-
co ou por um quarto dos condominos.
Art. 1.356. Podera haver no condomf-
nio um conselho fiscal, composto de
tres membros, eleitos pela assembleia,
por prazo nao superior a dois anos, ao
qua! compete dar parecer sabre a~ con-
tas do sfndico.
Se~o ill-Da Extini;;lio do
Condominio
Art. 1.357. Se a edificai;;ao for total ou
consideravelmente destrufda, ou amea-
ce rufna, os condominos deliberarao em
assembleia sobre a reconstrui;;ao, ou
venda, por votos que representem me-
tade mais uma das frai;:oes ideais.
§ l 0 Deliberada a reconstruc;ao, podera
o condomino eximir-se do pagamento
das despesas respectivas, alienando os
seus direitos a outros condominos, me-
diante avaliai;:ao judicial.
Art. 1.353-1.357
Art. 1352. Except when a special majority
is required, the deCisions of the assembly
shall be taken, at first call, by a majority of
votes of the co-owners present, who shall
represent at least one-half of the fractional
undivided interests.
Sole paragraph. The votes shall be
proportional to the fractional undivided
interests of each co-owner in the soil and in
the other common parts, unless the
constituting convention provides
otherwise.
Art.1353. At the second call, the assembly
may adopt resolutions by a majority of the
votes of those present, unless a special
majority is required.
Art. 1354. The assembly may not
deliberate if all the co-owners were not
called to the meeting.
Art. 1355. Extraordinary meetings of the
assembly may be called by the syndic or by
one-quarter of the co-owners.
Art. 1356. The condominium may have a
fiscal council composed of three members
elected by the assembly for a term of not
more than two years, with the authority to
give its opinion on the accounts of the
syndic.
Section III - Extinction of
Co-ownership
Art. 1357. If the building is totally or
substantially destroyed, or threatens to fall
into ruin, the assembly of co-owners shall
decide on its reconstruction or sale, by
votes that represent more than one-half of
the fractional undivided interests.
§ 1. If they decide on reconstruction, a
co-owner may exempt himself from
payment of the related expenses by selling
his rights to other co-owners by means of a
judicial assessment.
Art. 1.358-1.361 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. Upon sale, at which another co-owner
shall be preferred to a. stranger, all other
things being equal, the product shall be
divided among the co-owners, in
proportion to the value of their
condominium units.
Art. 1358. If expropriation occurs, the
indemnification shall be divided in the
proportions referred to in §2 of the
preceding article.
Chapter VIlI -Terminable
Ownership
Art.1359. Upon termination of ownership
by reason of implementation of a condition
or expiry of a term, the real rights granted
during the terminable ownership shall also be
deemed to have terminated, and the owner in
whose favor the termination operated may
claim the thing from the power of
whomsoever shall possess or hold it.
Art. 1360. If ownership terminates for
another supervening cause, a possessor
who has acquired title prior to the
termination shall be considered to be the
absoltite owner, and the person to whose
benefit the termination occurred has an
action against the persori whose ownership
terminatetl, to recover tlie thing itself or its
value.
Chapter IX..., Fiduciary
Ownership
Art. 1361. Terminable ownership of a
non-fungible movable thing that a debtor
transfers to a creditor to serve as security is
deemetl to be fiduciary.
§I. Fiduciary ownership is constituted
upon registration of the contract, made by
private or public instrument, that serves as
title in the Register of Titles and
Documents of the debtor's domicile or,
where vehieles are concerned, in the
department responsible for licensing, by
making note of it on the certificate of
registration.
290
§ 2° Realizada a venda, em que se pre-
ferira, em condiy5es iguais de oferta, o
condomino ao estranho, sera repartido
o apurado entre os condominos, pro-
porcionalmente ao valor das suas uni-
dades imobiliarias.
Art. 1.358. Se ocorrer desapropria1;1io,
a indenizayiio sera repartida na propor-
o;:ao a que se refere o § 2° do artigo ante-
cedente.
Capitulo VIII - Da Propricdade
Rcsoluvcl
Art. 1.359. Resolvida a propriedade
pelo implemento da condio;:ao ou pelo
advento do termo, entendem-se tam-
bem resolvidos os direitos reais conce-
didos na sua pendencia, e o proprieta-
rio, em cujo favor se opera a resolm;;ao,
pode reivindicar a coisa do poder de
quern a possua ou detenha.
Art.1.360. Se a propriedade se resolver
por outra causa superveniente, o pos-
suidor, que a tiver adquirido por tftulo
anterior a sua resolui;:iio, sera conside-
rado proprietario perfeito, restando a
pessoa, em cujo beneffcio houve a reso-
luo;:ao, a1;ao contra aquele cuja proprie-
dade se resolveu para haver a pr6pria
coisa ou o seu valor.
Capitulo IX - Da Propriedade
Fiduciiiria
Art. 1.361. Considera-se fiduciaria a
propriedade resoluvel de coisa move!
infungfvel que o devedor, com escopo
de garantia, transfere ao credor,
§ I ° Constitui-se a propriedade fiducia-
ria com o registro do contrato, celebra-
do por instrumento publico ou particu-
lar, que !he serve de tftulo, no Registro
de Tftulos e Documentos do domicflio
do devedor, ou, em se tratando de vef-
culos, na repartio;:ao competente para o
licenciamento, fazendo-se a anma~ao
no certificado de registro.
291 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGOE
§ 2° Com a constituii;ao da propriedade
fiduciaria, da-se o desdobramento da
posse, tomando-se o devedorpossuidor
direto da coisa.
§ 3° A propriedade superveniente, ad-
quirida pelo devedor, toma eficaz, des-
de o arquivamento, a transferencia da
propriedade fiduciaria.
Art. 1.362. 0 contrato, que serve de ti-
tulo apropriedade fiduciaria. contera:
I - o total da dfvida, ou sua estimativa;
II - 0 prazo, OU a epoca do pagamento;
III - a taxa de juros, se houver;
IV - a descri9iio da coisa objeto da
transferencia, com os elementos indis-
pensaveis asua identifica1;ao.
Art. 1.363. Antes de vencida a dfvida, o
devedor, a suas expensas e risco, pode
usar a coisa segundo sua destinao;:ao,
sendo obrigado, como depositario:
I - a empregar na guarda da coisa a dili-
gencia exigida por sua natureza;
II - a entrega-la ao credor, sea dfvida
nao for paga no vencimento.
Art. 1.364. Vencida a dfvida. e nao
paga, fica o credor obrigado a vender,
judicial ou extrajudicialmente, acoisaa
terceiros, a aplicar o preo;:o no pagamen-
to de seu credito e das despesas de co-
bram;a, ea entregar o saldo, se houver,
ao devedor.
Art. 1.365. E nula a clausula que auto-
riza o propriet<irio fiduciario a ficar
com a coisa alienada em garantia, se a
divida nao for paga no vencimento.
Paragrafo unico. 0 devedor pode, com
a anuenci;i do credor, dar seu direito
eventual. acoisl\ em pagamento da dfvi-
da, ap6s o vencimento desta.
Art. 1.362-1.365
§2. Upon constitution of fiduciary
ownership, possession shall be divided and
the debtor shall become the direct
possessor of the thing.
§3. Ownership acquired later by the debtor
makes an earlier transfer of fiduciary
ownership effective, from the date on
which registration was applied for.
Art. 1362. The contract that serves as title
to fiduciary ownership shall contain:
I - the total amount of the debt, or an
estimate thereof;
II - the term or time of payment;
III - the rate of interest, if any;
IV - a description of the thing transferred,
including the elements that are
indispensable for its identification.
Art. 1363. Prior to maturity of the debt, the
debtor may, at his expense and risk, use the
thing according to its purpose; he is
obligated, as depositary:
I -in keeping the thing, to employ the
diligence required by the thing's nature;
II - to deliver it to the creditor, if the debt is
not paid at maturity.
Art. 1364; If the debt matures and is not
paid, the creditor is obligated to sell the
thing, judicially or extrajudicially, to a third
party, to apply the price to the payment of
the debt and the expenses of collection and
to deliver the balance, if any, to the debtor.
Art. 1365. A clause that authorizes the
fiduciary owner to keep the thing given as
security if the debt is not paid on maturity is
null.
Sole paragraph. The debtor may, with the
creditor's consent, give any right to the
thing that he may have in payment of the
debt, after it matures.
Art. 1.366-1.372 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1366. When, after sale of the thing, the
product of sale is not enough to pay the debt
and the expenses of collection, the debtor
shall continue to be liable for the remaining
amount.
Art. 1367. The provisions of arts. 1421,
1425, 1426, 1427 and 1436 apply, to the
extent compatible, to fiduciary ownership.
Art.1368. A third party, whether interested
or not, who pays the debt is subrogated of
right in the debt and in the fiduciary
ownership.
Art. 1368-A. Other types of fiduciary
ownership and fiduciary interests are
subject to the specific rules contained in
special legislation, and the provisions of
this Code shall apply only to the extent they
are not incompatible with the special
legislation. (Added by Law 10,931 of 2004)
Title IV - Superficies
Art. 1369. An owner may grant to another
person the right to construct or to plant on
his land for a certain period of time, by
public instrument duly registered in the
Immovable Property Registry Office.
Sole paragraph. The right of superficies
does not authorize works in the subsoil,
unless they are inherent in the purpose of
the grant.
Art. 1370. A grant of superficies may be
gratuitous or onerous; if onerous, the
parties shall stipulate whether payment
shall be made in a lump sum or in
installmeµts.
Art. 1371. The holder of the right of
superficies is liable for the charges and
taxes attaching to the property.
Art. 1372. The right of superficies may be
transferred to third parties and, by reason of
the death of the holder of the right, to his
heirs.
292
Art. 1.366. Quando, vendida a coisa, o
produto n1io bastar para o pagamento da
dfvida e das despesas de cobran~a. con-
tinuara o devedor obrigado pelo restan-
te.
Art. 1.367. Aplica-se apropriedade fi-
duciliria, no que couber. o disposto nos
arts. 1.421, 1.425, 1.426, 1.427 e 1.436.
Art. 1.368. 0 terceiro, interessado ou
niio, que pagar a dfvida, se sub-rogara
de pleno direito no credito e na proprie-
dade fiduciaria.
Art. 1.368-A. As demais especies de
propriedade fiduciaria ou de titularida-
a
de ftduciaria submetem-se disciplina
especifica das respectivas leis espe-
ciais, somente se aplicando as disposi-
~oes deste C6digo naquilo que nao for
incompatfvel com a legisla~1io especial.
(lnclufdo pela Lei n° 10.931, de 2004)
Titulo IV - Da Superficie
Art. 1.369. 0 proprietario pode conce-
der a outreni o direito de construir ou de
plantar em seu terreno, por tempo de-
terminado, mediante escritura piiblica
devidamente registrada no Cart6rio de
Registro de Im6veis.
Paragrafo iinico. 0 direito de superficie
n1io autoriza obra no subsolo, salvo se
for inerente ao objeto da concessao.
Art. 1.370. A concess1io da superffcie
seni gratuita ou onerosa; se onerosa, es-
tipularao as partes se o pagamento sera
feito de uma s6 vez, ou parceladamente.
Art. 1.371. 0 superficiario respondera
pelos encargos e tributos que incidirem
sobre o im6vel.
Art.1.372. 0 direito de superffcie pode
transferir-se a terteiros e, por morte do
superficiario, aos seus herdeiros.
293 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo iinico. Nao podera ser estipu-
lado pelo concedente. a nenhum titulo,
qualquer pagamento pela transfercncia.
Art. 1.373. Em caso de aliena~ao do
im6vel ou do direito de superffcie, o su-
perficiario ou o proprietario tern direito
de preferencia, em igualdade de condi-
~oes.
Art. 1.374. Antes do termo final, resol-
ver-Se-a a concess1io se o superficiario
der ao terreno destina~ao diversa da-
quela para que foi concedida.
Art. 1.375. Extinta a concess1io, o pro-
prietario passara a ter a propriedade
plena sobre o terreno, constru~1io ou
planta~1io, independentemente de inde-
nizm;ao, se as partcs nao houverem es-
tipulado o contrario.
Art. 1.376. No caso de extin~1io do di-
reito de superffcie em conseqiiencia de
desapropria~ao, a indeniz~1io cabe ao
proprietlirio e ao superficiario, no valor
correspondente ao direito real de cada
um.
Art. 1.377. 0 direito de superflcie,
constitufdo por pessoa jurfdica de direi-
to piiblico interno, rege-se por este C6-
digo, no que n1io for diversamente dis-
ciplinado em lei especial.
Titulo V - Das Servidoes
Capitulo I- Da Constitui~o das
Servi does
Art. 1.378. A servid1io proporciona uti-
lidade para o predio dominante, e grava
o predio serviente, que pertence a di-
verso dono, e constitui-se mediante de-
clam~ao expressa dos proprietarios, ou
por testamento, e subseqilente registro
no Cart6rio de Registro de Im6veis.
Art. 1.373-1.378
Sole paragraph. The grantor may not, for
any reason, stipulate any payment for the
transfer.
Art. 1373. In cases of alienation of the
property or of the right of superficies, the
holder of the right or the owner has a right
of preference, on the same terms and
conditions.
Art. 1374. The grant shall terminate prior
to expiry of the term if the holder of the
right uses the land for a purpose other than
that for which it was granted.
Art.1375. Upon extinction of the grant, the
owner has full ownership of the land,
building or plantation, without
indemnifying the holder of the grant, if the
parties have not stipulated otherwise.
Art. 1376. In the case of extinction of the
right of superficies by reason of
expropriation, the indemnification belongs
to the owner and to the holder of the right of
superficies, in amounts corresponding to
the real right of each.
Art. 1377. A right of superficies
constituted by a legal person of national
public law is governed by this Code, to the
extent not otherwise provided for under
special legislation.
Title V - Servitudes
Chapter I - Constitution
of Servitudes
Art. 1378. A servitude provides a utility to
the dominant property and encumbers the
servient property, which belongs to a
different owner, and is constituted by
express declaration of the owners, or by
testament, and subsequent registration in
the Immovable Property Registry Office.
 Art. 1.379-1.384 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1379. The uncontested and continuous
exercise of an apparent servitude for ten
years, within the terms of art. 1242,
authorizes the interested party to register it
in his name in the Immovable Property
Registry Office, and the judgment
determining that usucapion has occurred
shall serve as title to do so.
Sole paragraph. If the possessor does not
have title, the time period for usucapion
shall be twenty years.
Chapter II - Exercise of Servitudes
Art. 1380. The owner of a servitude may
carry out all the works necessary to its
maintenance and use and, if the servitude
belongs to more than one property, the
expenses shall be shared among the
owners.
Art. 1381. The works referred to in the
preceding article shall be carried out by the
. owner of the dominant property, unless the
title expressly provides otherwise.
Art. 1382. When the obligation falls to the
owner of the servient property, he may
exempt himself from it by abandoning
ownership, iq whole or in part, to the owner
of the dominant property.
Sole paragraph. If the. owner of the
dominant property refuses to receive the
ownership of the servient property, or part
of it, he shall bear the cost ofthe works.
Art. 1383. The owner of the servient
property may not in any.way hinder the
lawful exercise of the servitude.
Art. 1384. A servitude may be moved from
one place to another by the owner of the
servient property, at his cost, if the
relocation in no way diminishes the
advantages of the dominant property, or by
the owner of the dominant property, at his
cost, if there will be a considerable increase
in utility and the relocation does not
damage the servient property.
294
Art. 1.379. 0 exercfcio incontestado e
continua de uma servidao aparente, por
dez anos, nos termos do art. 1.242, au-
toriza o interessado a registni-la em seu
nome no Registro de Im6veis, valendo-
lhe como tftulo a senten~a que julgar
consumado a usucapiao.
Pariigrafo unico. Se o possuidor nao ti-
ver tftulo, o prazo da usucapiao scrii de
vinte anos.
Capituio II- Do Exercicio das
Servidiies
Art. 1.380. 0 dono de uma servidao
pode fazer todas as obras necessiirias a
sua conserva~ao e uso, e, se a servidao
pertencer a mais de um predio, serao as
despesas rateadas entre os respectivos
do nos.
Art. 1.381. As obras a que se refere o
artigo antecedente devem ser feitas
pelo dono do predio dominante, se o
contriirio nao dispuser expressamente o
tftulo.
Art.1.382. Quando a obrig~ao incum-
bir ao dono do predio serviente, este po-
deni exonerar-se, abandonando, total
ou parcialmente, a propriedade ao dono
do dominante.
Pariigrafo unico. Se o proprietiirio do
predio dominante se recusar a receber a
propriedade do serviente, ou parte dela,
caber-the-a custear as obras.
Art. 1.383. 0 dono do predio serviente
nao pod era embara~ar de modo al gum o
exercfcio legftimo daservidao.
Art. 1.384. A servidao pode ser remo-
vida, de um local para outro, pelo dono
do predio serviente e ii sua custa, se em
nada diminuir as vantagens do predio
dominante, OU pelo dono deste e a sua
custa, se houver consideravel incre-
mento da utilidade e nao prejudicar o
predio serviente.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
295
Art. 1.385. Restringir-se-a o exercfcio
da servidao as necessidades do predio
dominante, evitando-se, quanta possf-
vel, agravar o encargo ao predio ser-
viente.
§ 1° Constitufda para certo fim, a servi-
dao nao se pode ampliar a outro.
§ 2° Nas servidoes de transito, a de
maior inclui a de menor onus, ea menor
exclui a mais onerosa.
§ 3° Se as necessidades da cultura, ou da
industria, do predio dominante impuse-
rem a servidao maior Jargueza, o dono
do serviente e obrigado a sofre-la; mas
tern direito a ser indenizado pelo exces-
so.
Art. 1.386. As servidoes prediais sao
indivisfveis, e subsistem, no caso de di-
visao dos im6veis, em beneffcio de
cada uma das por~oes do predio domi-
nante, e continuam a gravar cada uma
das do predio serviente, salvo se, por
natureza, ou destino, s6 se aplicarem a
certa parte de um ou de outro.
Capituio III - Da Extin~ao das
Servidoes
Art. 1.387. Salvo nas desapropriai;:oes,
a servidao, uma vez registrada, s6 se ex-
tingue, com respeito a terceiros, quando
cancelada.
Panigrafo unico. Seo predio dominante
estiver hipotecado, ea servidao semen-
cionar no tftulo hipoteciirio, serii tam-
bem preciso, para a cancelar, o consen-
timento do erector.
Art. 1.388. 0 dono do predio serviente
tern direito, pelos meios judiciais, ao
C(lncelamento do registro, embora o
dono do predio dominante !ho impug-
ne:
Art. 1.385-1.387
Art. 1385. Exercise of a servitude shall be
restricted to the necessities of the dominant
property, avoiding, to the extent possible,
aggravation of the charge on the servient
property.
§ 1. If constituted for a certain purpose, the
servitude may not be extended to another.
§2. In servitudes of passage, the more
burdensome includes the less burdensome
and the less burdensome excludes the more
burdensome.
§3. If the necessities of cultivation or
industry on the dominant property require a
more extensive servitude, the owner of the
servient property is obligated to suffer it;
but he has the right to be indemnified for the
excess.
Art. 1386. Servitudes on immovable
property are indivisible and subsist, in the
case of division of the immovable
properties, to the benefit of each one of the
portions of the dominant property and
continue to encumber each one of portions
of the servient property unless, by their
nature or purpose, they apply only to a
certain part of one or the other.
Chapter III - Extinction
of Servitudes
Art. 1387. Except in cases of
expropriation, a servitude, once registered,
is extinguished with respect to third parties
only when cancelled.
Sole paragraph. If the dominant property is
hypothecated, and the servitude is
mentioned in the instrument of
hypothecation, the creditor's consent shall
also be necessary in order to cancel it.
Art.1388. The owner of a servient property
has the right, by judicial means, to cancel
the registration, even though the owner of
the dominant property contests it:
Art. 1.390-1.392 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I - when the holder of the servitude
renounces it;
II - when the utility or convenience to the
dominant property that led to the
constitution of the servitude has ceased;
III - when the owner of the servient
property redeems the servitude.
Art.1389. A servitude is also extinguished,
and the owner of the servient property may
cause it to be cancelled, upon proof of
extinction:
I - by reason of the two properties coming
under the ownership of the same person;
II - by suppression of the respective works
by effect of contract or other express title;
III - by non-use, during ten continuous
years.
Title VI - Usufruct
Chapter I-' General Provisions
Art. 1390. Usufruct may be over one or
more properties, movable or immovable,
over an entire patrimony or part of it,
encompassing, in whole or in part, the fruits
and benefits.
Art. 1391. Usufruct of immovables, when
it does not result from usucapion, is
constituted by registration in the
Immovable Property Registry Office.
Art. 1392. Saving provision to the
contrary, us ufruct· extends to the
accessories of the thing and its accretions.
§ 1. If there are consumable things among
the accessories and the accretions, the
usufructuary shall, at the end of the
usufruct, have the duty to restitute those
that still exist and, for those that do not, the
equivalent in kind, quality and quantity or,
if that is not possible, their value, estimated
at the time of restitution.
296
I - quando o titular houver renunciado a
sua servidao;
II - quando tiver cessado, para o predio
dominante, a utilidade ou a comodida-
de, que determinou a constituii;ao da
servidao;
III - quando o dono do predio serviente
resgatar a servidao.
Art. 1.389. Tambem se extingue a scr-
vidao, ficando ao dono do predio ser-
viente a faculdade de faze-la cancelar,
med iante a prov a da extini;ao:
I - pela reuniao dos dois predios no do-
mfnio da mesma pessoa;
II - pela supressao das respectivas ohms
por efeito de contrato, ou de outro tftulo
expresso;
III - pelo nao uso, durantc dez anos con-
tfnuos.
Titulo VI - Do Usuf'ruto
Capltulo I - Disposii;ocs Gcrais
Art. 1.390. 0 usufruto pode rccair em
um ou mais hens, m6veis ou im6veis,
em um patrimonio inteiro, ou parte des-
te, ahrangendo-Jhe, no !Odo OU em par-
te, os frutos e utilidades.
Art. 1.391. 0 usufruto de im6veis,
quando nao resulte de usucapiao, cons-
tituir-se-ii mediante registro no Cart6-
rio de Registro de lm6veis.
Art. 1.392. Salvo disposi~ao em con-
trario, o usufruto estende-se aos acess6-
rios da coisa e seus acrescidos.
§ 1° Se, entre os acess6rios e os acresci-
dos, houver coisas consumfveis. terii o
usufrutuario o dever de restituir, findo o
usufruto. as que ainda houver e, das ou-
tras, o equivalente em genero, qualida-
de e quantidade, ou, nao sendo possf-
vel, o seu valor, estimado ao tempo da
restitui~ao.
297 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
§ 2° Se ha no predio em que recai o usu-
fruto florestas ou os recursos minerais a
que se refere o art. 1.230, devem o dono
e o usufrutuiirio prefixar-lhe a extensao
do gozo ea maneira de explorai;:ao.
3 o Seo usufruto recai sohre universali-
dade ou quota-parte de hens, o usufru-
tuiirio tern direito a parte do tesouro
achado por outrem, e ao prei;:o pago
pelo vizinho do predio usufruldo, para
ohter mcai;:ao em parede, cerca, muro,
vala ou valado.
Art. 1.393. Nao se pode transferir o
usufruto por alienm;:ao; mas o seu exer-
cfcio pode ceder-se por tftulo gratuito
ou oneroso.
Capltulo II- Dos Dircitos do
Usufrutuario
Art.1.394. 0 usufrutuario tem direito a
posse, uso, administrai;ao e percepi;:ao
dos frutos.
Art.1.395. Quando o usufnito recai em
tftulos de credito. 0 usufrutuario tern di-
reito a perceher os frutos e a cohrar as
respectivas dfvidas.
Paragrafo unico. Cobradas as dfvidas, o
usufrutuario aplicara, de imediato, a
importil.ncia em tftulos da mesma natu-
reza, ou em titulos da dfvida puhlica fe-
deral, com clausula de atualiza~ao mo-
netaria segundo indices oficiais regu-
larmente estahelecidos.
Art. 1.396. Salvo direito adquirido por
outrem, o usufrutuiirio faz seus os fru-
tos naturais, pendentes ao come~ar o
usufruto, sem encargo de pagar as des-
pesas de produ~ao.
Paragrafo unico. Os frutos naturais,
pendentes ao tempo em que cessa o
usufruto, pertenccm ao dono, tambem
sem compensai;ao das despesas.
Art. 1.393-1.396
§2. If there are forests and mineral
resources referred to in art. 1230 on the
immovable property subject to usufruct, the
owner and the usufructuary shall fix, in
advance, the extent of the usufructuary's
enjoyment of them and the manner in which
they shall be exploited.
§3. If the usufruct is over a universality or a
share of property, the usufructuary has the
right to a share of the treasure found by
another, and to the price paid by the
neighbor of the property subject to usufruct
to obtain a half-interest in a wall, hedge,
fence, ditch or barrier.
Art. 1393. Usufruct may not be transferred
by alienation; but the exercise of it may be
granted by gratuitous or onerous title.
Chapter II - Rights of the
Usufructuary
Art. 1394. A usufructuary has the right to
possess, use, administer and gather fruits.
Art. 1395. When the usufruct is over debt
instruments, the usufructuary has the right
to receive the fruits and to collect the
related debts.
Sole paragraph. Upon collection of the
debts, the usufructuary shall immediately
invest the amount in instruments of the
same nature or in federal government debt
instruments, containing a clause for
mon~tary correction according to regularly
established official indices.
Art. 1396. Saving the rights acquired by
another, fruits ungathered at the beginning
of the usufruct belong to the usufructuary,
without charge for the expenses of
production.
Sole paragraph. Natural fruits ungathered
at the time the usufruct ceases belong to the
owner, likewise without compensation for
expenses.
Art. 1.397-1.402 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1397. The offspring of animals belong
to the usufructuary, after deduction of so
many as may be necessary to make whole
the herd existing at the beginning of the
usufruct.
Art.1398. Civil fruits that have matured on
the date on which the usufruct begins
belong to the owner, and to the
usufructuary those that have matured on the
date on which the usufruct ceases.
Art. 1399. The usufructuary may use an
immovable property in person, or by
leasing it, but may not change its economic
purpose without the express authorization
of the owner.
Chapter III - Duties of the
Usufructuary
Art. 1400. Before assuming a usufruct, the
usufructuary shall, at his own expense,
make an inventory of the property he
receives, determining the state in which the
property is found, and shall give personal or
real security, if required by the owner, for
hjs preservation of the property, and shall
deliver the property at the end of the
usufruct.
Sole paragraph. A donor who reserves to
himself a usufruct over the thing given is
not required to give security.
Art. 1401. A usufructuary who does not
wish to, or cannot, give sufficient security
loses the right to administer the usufruct; in
this case, the property sh.all be administered
by the owner, who is obligated, by means of
the grant of security, to deliver to the
usufructuary the yield from the property,
after deduction of the expenses of
administration, which shall include an
amount fixed by the judge as the
administrator's remuneration.
Art. 1402. The usufructuary is not
obligated to pay for deterioration resulting
from the proper exercise of the usufruct.
298
Art. 1.397. As crias dos animais per-
tencem ao usufrutuario, deduzidas
quantas bastem para inteirar as cabe!(as
de gado existentes ao comei;:ar o usu-
fruto.
Art.1.398. Os frutos civis, vencidos na
data inicial do usufruto, pertencem ao
proprietario, e ao usufrutuario os venci-
dos na data em que cessa o usufruto.
Art. 1.399. O usufrutuario pode usu-
fruir em pessoa. ou mediante arrenda-
mento, o predio, mas nao mudar-lhe a
destinai;:ao economica. scm expressa
autorizai;:ao do proprietario.
Capitulo III- Dos Devercs do
Usufrutuario
Art. 1.400. 0 usufrutuario. antes de as-
sumir o usufruto, inventariara, a sua
custa. os hens que receber, determinan-
do o estado em que se acham, e dara
cau~ao, fidejuss6ria ou real, se Iha exi-
gir o dono, de velar-Jhes pela conserva-
i;:ao, e entrega-los findo o usufruto.
Paragrafo unico. Nao eohrigado acau-
i;:ao o doador que se reservar o usufruto
da coisa doada.
Art.1.401. O usufrutuario que nao qui-
ser ou nao puder dar caui;:ao suficiente
perdera o direito de administrar o usu-
fruto; e, neste caso, os hens serao admi-
nistrados pelo proprietario, que ficara
obrigado, mediante caw;:ao, a entregar
ao usufrutuario o rendimento deles, de-
duzidas as despesas de administra~ao,
entre as quais se incluira a quantia fixa-
da pelo juiz como remunerm;:ao do ad-
ministrador.
Art. 1.402. 0 usufrutuario nao e ohri-
gado a pagar as deteriorai,:oes resultan-
tes do exercfcio regular do usufruto.
299 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.403 Incumhem ao usufrutuario:
I - as despesas ordinarias de conserva-
i;iio dos hens no estado em que os rcce-
heu;
II - as presta~oes e os trihutos devidos
pela posse ou rehdimento <la coisa usu-
frulda.
Art.1.404. Incumhem ao dona as repa-
ra.;;oes extraordinarias e as que nao fo-
rem de custo m6dico; mas o usufrutua-
rio !he pagara os juros do capital des-
pendido com as que forem necessaria~
aconserva~ao, ou aumentarem o rendi-
mento da coisa usufrufda.
§ l 0 Nao se considcram m6dicas as dcs-
pesas superiores a dois ter~os do lfqui-
do rendimento em um ano.
§ 2° Se o dono nao fizer as rcpara\:6Cs a
que esta obrigado. e que sao indispen-
saveis aconservai;:ao da coisa, o usufru-
tuario pode realiza-las, cohrando da-
quele a importancia despendida
Art. 1.405. Se o usufruto recair num
patrimonio, ou partc deste, sera o usu-
frutuario obrigado aos juros da dfvida
que onerar o patrimonio ou a parte dele.
Art. 1.406. 0 usufrutuario eobrigado a
dar ciencia ao dono de qualquer lesao
produzida contra a posse da coisa, ou os
direitos deste.
Art. 1.407. Se a coisa estiver segurada,
incumbe ao usufrutuario pagar, durante
o usufruto, as contribui\:oes do seguro.
§ I0 Seo usufrutuario fizer o seguro, ao
proprietario cahera o direito dele resul-
tante contra o segurador.
Art. 1.403-1.407
Art. 1403. The usufmctuary is responsible
for:
I - the ordinary expenses of maintaining the
property in the state in which it was
received;
II -' the obligations and taxes owed by
reason of the possession or the yield of the
thing subject to usufruct.
Art. 1404. The owner is responsible for
extraordinary repairs and repairs that
cannot be made at a modest cost; but the
usufructuary shall pay him interest on the
capital expended on repairs that are
necessary to maintain, or to increase the
yield of, the thing subject to usufruct.
§ 1. Expenses that are greater than
two-thirds of the net yield in a year are
deemed not to be modest.
§2. If the owner does not make the repairs
that he is obligated to. and that are
indispensable to the maintenance of the
thing, the usufructuary may make them,
and collect the amount expended from the
owner.
Art. 1405. If the usufruct is over a
patrimony, or part of it, the usufructuary
shall be obligated to pay the interest on any
debt with which the patrimony or the part of
it is charged.
Art. 1406. The usufructuary is obligated to
inform the owner of any injury that may
occur to possession of the thing, or to the
owner's rights.
Art. 1407. If the thing is insured, the
usufructuary is responsible for paying the
insurance contributions during the
usufruct.
§ 1. If the usufructuary contracts the
insurance, the owner is entitled to the right
against the insurer.
Art. 1.408-1.410 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. In any case, the usufructuary' s right
attaches to the amount of the indemnity
under the insurance.
Art. 1408. If a building subject to usufruct
is destroyed without fault on the part of the
owner, he shall not be obligated to rebuild
it, nor to re-establish the usufruct, if the
owner rebuilds the building at his own cost;
but if the indemnity under the insurance is
used to rebui.ld the building, the usufruct
shall be re-estabiished.
Art. 1409. The usufruct also attaches to the
indemnification paid for the property, if it is
expropriated, and to the amount of damages
paid by the liable third party, in the case of
damage or loss.
Chapter IV - Extinction
ofUsufruct
Art. 1410. Usufruct is extinguished, and
the registration in the Immovable Property
Registry Office is cancelled:
I - by the usufructuary's renunciation or
death;
II - by expiry of its term of duration;
III - by extinction .of the legal person in
favor of which the usufruct was constituted
or, if the legal person continues in
existence, by the lapse of thirty years from
the date on which exercise of the usufruct
began;
IV - by cessation of the motive that gave
rise to the usufruct;
V - by destruction of the thing, subject to
the provisions of arts. 1407, 1408, 2nd part,
and 1409;
VI - by consolidation;
300
§ 2° Em qualquer hip6tese. o direito do
usufrntuiirio fica sub-rogado no valor
da indenizai;:1io do seguro.
Art.1.408. Se um ediffcio sujeito a usu-
fruto for destrufdo sem culpa do pro-
prietiirio, niio serii este obrigado a re-
construf-lo, nem o usufruto se restabe-
lecerii. se o proprietario reconstruir a
suacustao predio; mas sea indenizac;1io
do seguro for aplicada a reconstrur;ao
do predio, restabelecer-se-a o usufruto.
Art. 1.409. Tambem fica sub-rogada
no onus do usufruto, em Jugar do pre-
dio, a indenizai;:iio paga, se ele for desa-
propriado, ou a importancia do dano,
ressarcido pelo terceiro responsavel no
caso de danificai;:1io ou perda.
Capitulo IV - Da Extin~ao do
Usufruto
Art. 1.410. 0 usufruto extingue-se,
cancelando-se o registro no Cart6rio de
Registro de Im6veis:
I - pela renuncia ou rnorte do usufrutuii-
rio;
II - pelo terrno de sua durar;ao;
lil - pela extinr;ao da pessoa jurfdica,
em favor de quern o usufruto foi consti-
tufdo, ou, se ela perdurar, pelo decurso
de trinta anos da data em que se come-
i;:ou a exercer;
IV - pela cessai;:ao do motivo de que se
origina;
V - pela destruii;:ao da coisa, guardadas
as disposii;:oes dos arts. 1.407, 1.408, 2•
parte, e 1.409;
VI - pela consolidai;:ao;
301 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
VII - por culpa do usufrutuiirio, quando
aliena, deteriora, ou deixa arruinar os
hens, n1io lhes acudindo corn os reparos
de conservai;ao, ou quando, no usufruto
de tftulos de Credito, niio da as impor-
tancias recebidas a aplicai;:1io prevista
no pariigrafo (mico do art. 1.395;
VIII - Pelo n1io uso. ou niio fruii;:ao. da
coisa em que o usufruto recai (arts.
1.390 e 1.399).
Art. 1.411. Constitufdo o usufruto em
favor de duas ou mais pessoas, cxtin-
guir-se-a a partc em relai;:1io a cada urna
das que falecerem. salvo se, por estipu-
lai;ao expressa, o quinhiio <lesses cou-
ber ao sobrevivente.
Titulo VII- Do Uso
Art. 1.412. 0 usuiirio usara da coisa e
perceberii os seus frutos, quanto o exi-
glrem as necessidades suas e de sua fa-
milia.
§ 1° Avaliar-se-1io as necessidades pes-
soais do usuiirio ci:mforme a sua condi-
i;1io social e o Jugar onde viver.
§ 2° As necessidades da famflia do
usuiirio cornpreendern as de seu conju-
ge, dos filhos solteiros e das pessoas de
seu servi\;O domestico.
Art. 1.413. Sao aplicaveis ao uso, no
que niio for contrario asua natureza, as
disposi1;oes relativas ao usufruto.
Titulo VIII - Da Habita~o
Art. 1.414. Quando o uso consistir no
direito de habitar gratuitamente casa
alheia, 0 titular deste direito nao a pode
alugar, nem emprestar, mas simples-
mente ocupa-Ja com sua familia.
Art. 1.411-1.414
vn - by the fault of the usufructuary' when
he alienates, deteriorates or lets the
property fall into ruin, neglecting to make
the repairs necessary for its maintenance, or
when, in the case of usufruct over debt
instruments, he does not invest the amounts
received in the manner provided for in the
sole paragraph of art. 1395;
VIII - by the failure to use or to enjoy the
thing subject to the usufruct (arts. 1390 and
1399).
Art. 1411. Where the usufruct is
constituted in favor of two or more people,
the part related to each one who dies shall
be extinguished, unless, by express
stipulation, their share falls to the survivor.
Title VII-Right of Use
Art.1412. The holder of a right of use shall
make use of the thing and receive its fruits,
when his and his family's necessities so
require.
§ 1. The personal necessities of the holder of
the right of use shall be assessed in
conformity with his social condition and
the place where he lives.
§2. The necessities of the family of the
holder of the right of use comprise those of
his spouse, his unmarried children and the
persons in his domestic service.
Art. 1413. The provisions regarding
usufruct are applicable to the right of use, to
the extent they are not contrary to its nature.
Title VIII - Habitation
Art. 1414. When a right of use consists in
the right to dwell without charge in a house
belonging to another, the holder of the right
may not lease, or loan, the house but may
simply occupy it, with his family.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1.415-1.420
Art. 1415. If the real right of habitation is
conferred on more th.an one person, any of
them who alone dwells in the house need
not pay rent to the other or others, but he
cannot prevent them from exercising, if
they wish, the right to dwell in it, which also
belongs to them.
Art. 1416. The provisions regarding
usufruct are applicable to the right of
habitation, to the extent they are not
contrary to its nature.
Title IX - Right of a
Promissor·Buyer
Art. 1417. By a promise of purchase and
sale, in which the parties did not agree to a
right of recession, made by private or
public instrument and registered in the
Immovable Property Registry Office, the
promissor-buyer acquires a real right to the
acquisition of the immovable.
Art. 1418. The promissor-buyer, holder of
a real right, may demand from the
promissor-seller, or from third parties to
whom the promissor-seller' s rights were
assigned, the grant of the definitive
instrument of purchase and sale, in
accc:ii;dance with the provisions o.f the
preliminary instrument; and, if refused, he
may apply to a judge to have the immovable
adjudged to him.
Title X - Pledge, Hypothec and
Antichresis
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 1419. In debts secured by pledge,
antichresis or hypothec, the property given
as security is made subject, by real lien, to
performance of the obligation.
Art. 1420. Only a person who may alienate
may pledge, hypothecate or give in
antichresis; only property that may be
alienated may be given in pledge,
antichresis or hypothec.
302
Art. 1.415. Se o direito real de hahita-
~ao for conferido a mais de uma pessoa,
qualquer delas que sozinha habite a
casa nao tera de pagar aluguel a outra,
ou as outras, mas nao as pode inibir de
exercerem, querendo, o direito, que
tambem lhes compete, de habita-la.
Art. 1.41G. Sao aplicaveis a habitw;ao,
no que nao for contrario asua natureza,
as disposi~oes relativas ao usufmto.
Titulo IX - Do Direito do
Promitente Comprador
Art. 1.417. Mediante promessa de
compra e venda, em que se nao pactuou
arrependimento, celebrada por instm-
mento publico ou particular, e registra-
da no Cartorio de Registro de Imoveis,
adquire o promitente comprador direito
real aaquisi\!iio do imovel.
Art. 1.418. 0 promitente comprador,
titular de direito real, pode exigir do
promitente vendedor, ou de terceiros, a
quern os direitos destc forem cedidos, a
outorga da escritura definitiva de com-
pra e venda, conforme o disposto no
instmmento preliminar; e, se houver re-
cusa, requerer ao juiz a adjudica;;ao do
imovel.
TITULO X- Do Penhor, da
ffipoteca e da Anticrese
Capitulo I- Disposii;oes Gerais
Art. 1.419. Nas dfvidas garantidas por
penhor, anticrese ou hipoteca, o bem
dado em garantia flea sujeito, por vfn-
culo real, ao cumprimento da obri-
gac;:iio.
Art.1.420. So aquele que pode alienar
podera empenhar, hipotecar ou dar cm
anticrese; so os bens que se podem alie-
nar poderao ser dados em penhor, anti-
crese ou hipoteca.
303 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
§ l 0 A propriedade superveniente torna
eficaz, desde o registro, as garantias
reais estabelecidas por quern ni'io era
dono.
§ 2° A coisa comum a dois ou mais pro-
prietaries nao pode ser dad a em garan-
tia real, na sua totalidade, sem o con-
sentimento de todos; mas cada um pode
individualmente dar em garantia real a
parte que tiver.
Art. 1.421. 0 pagamento de uma ou
mais prestai;.;oes da dfvida nao importa
exonerm;i'io correspondente da garan-
tia, ainda que esta compreenda varios
bens, salvo disposii;,;ao expressa no titu-
lo ou na quitm;:ao.
Art. 1.422. 0 credor hiporecario e o
pignoratfcio tern o direito de excutir a
coisa hipotecada ou empenhada, e pre-
ferir, no pagamento, a outros credores,
observada, quanto a hipoteca, a priori-
dade no registro.
Paragrafo unico. Excetuam-se da regra
estabelecida neste artigo as dfvidas que,
em virtude de outras leis, devam ser pa-
gas precipuamente a quaisquer outros
creditos.
Art. 1.423. 0 credor anticretico tern di-
reito a reter em seu poder o bem, en-
quanto a dfvida nao for paga; extingue-
se esse direito decorridos quinze anos
da data de sua constituir;ao.
Art. 1.424. Os contratos de penhor, an-
ticrese ou hipoteca dcclarariio, sob pena
de niio terem eficacia:
I - o valor do credito, sua estimm;iio, ou
valor maximo;
II -o prazo fix ado para pagamento;
III - a taxa dos juros, se houver;
Art. 1.421-1.424
§ 1. Subsequent acquisition of ownership
makes effective, from the date of
registration, the real security established by
a person who was not then owner.
§2. A thing common to two or more owners
cannot be given as real security in its
entirety without the consent of all; but each
one may individually give real security
over his share.
Art. 1421. Payment of one or more
installments of the debt does not result in a
corresponding release of the security, even
if it covers various items of property, unless
otherwise expressly provided for in the
instrument creating the security or in the
acquittance.
Art. 1422•.A hypothecary creditor and a
pledge creditor have the right to enforce the
debt on the hypothecated or pledged thing
and to have preference in payment over
other creditors, subject, in the case of
hypothec, to priority in registration.
Sole paragraph. Debts that, by virtue of
other legislation, must be paid before any
other debts are excepted from the rule
established in this article.
Art. 1423. An antichretic creditor has the
right to keep the property in his power until
the debt is paid; the right is extinguished
upon expiry of fifteen years from the date it
was constituted.
Art. 1424. Contracts of pledge, antichresis
and hypothec shall state, on pain of
inefficacy:
I - the amount of the debt, its estimated
amount, or its maximum amount;
II - the term fixed for payment;
III - the interest rate, if any;
Art. 1.425-1.426 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
IV -the property given as security, with its
specifications.
Art. 1425. The debt is deemed to have
matured:
I-:- if the property given as security
deteriorates or depreciates and the debtor,
on being notified, does not reinforce or
replace the security;
II - if the debtor becomes insolvent or goes
bankrupt;
III - if the installments are not punctually
paid, whenever payment is so stipulated. In
this case, subsequent receipt of the late
installment results in waiver by the creditor
of his right to immediate execution;
IV - if the property given as security
perishes and is not replaced;
V - if the property given as security is
expropriated, in which.case the portion of
the price necessary for full payment of the
creditor shall be deposited.
§ 1. In cases in which the thing given as
security perishes, the security shall attach
to the insurance indemnity or to the
compensation for the damage, to the benefit
of the creditor, who shall have a preference
over it until he is fully reimbursed.
§2. In the cases contemplated in items IV
and V, the hypothec shall only mature
before the stipulated term if the perishment
or expropriation affects the property given
as security and the security does not cover
other property; otherwise, the reduced debt
shall subsist, as shall the related security
over the remaining property that has not
been expropriated or destroyed~
Art. 1426. Interest with respect to time that
has not run is not included in the cases of
early maturity of the debt contemplated in
the preceding article.
304
IV - o bem dado em garantia com as
suas especifica~oes.
Art. 1.425. A dlvida considera-se ven-
cida:
I - se, deteriorando-se. ou depreciando-
se o bem dado em seguran~a. desfalcar
a garantia, e o devedor, intimado, nao a
refor~ar ou substituir;
II - se o devedor cair em insolvencia ou
falir;
III - se as presta~oes nao forem pontual-
mente pagas, toda vez que deste modo
se achar estipulado o pagamento. Neste
caso, o recebimento posterior da presta-
~iio atrasada importa renuncia do cre-
dor ao seu direito de execur;:ao ime-
diata;
IV - se perecer o bem dado em garantia,
e nao for substituido;
V - se se desapropriar o bem dado em
garantia, hip6tese na qua! se depositara
a parte do pre~o que for necessiiria para
o pagamento integral do credor.
§ 1° Nos casos de perecimento da coisa
dada em garantia, esta se sub-rogara na
indeniza~ao do seguro. ou no ressarci-
mento do dano, em beneficio do crcdor,
a quern assistira sabre ela preferencia
ate seu completo rcembolso.
§ 2° Nos casos dos incisos IV e V, s6 se
vencera a hipoteca antes do prazo esti-
pulado, se o perecimento, ou a desapro-
pria~1io recair sabre o bem dado em ga-
rantia, e esta nao abranger outras; sub-
sistindo, no caso contrario, a dfvida re-
duzida, com a respectiva garantia sobre
OS demais hens, nao desapropriados OU
destrufdos.
Art. 1.426. Nas hip6teses do artigo an-
terior, de vencimento antecipado da df-
vida, nao se compreendem os juros cor-
respondentes ao tempo ainda n1io de-
corrido.
305 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.427. Salvo clausula expressa, o
terceiro que presta garantia real por df-
vida alheia n1io flea obrigado a substi-
tuf-la, ou reforc;a-la, quando, sem culpa
sua, se perca, deteriore, ou desvalorize.
Art. 1.428. E nula a clausula que auto-
riza o credor pignoratfcio, anticretico
ou hipoteciirio a ficar com o objeto da
garantia, se a divida nao for paga no
vencimento.
Paragrafo unico. Ap6s o vencimento,
podera o devedor dar a coisa em paga-
mento da dfvida.
Art. 1.429. Os sucessores do devedor
n1io podem remir parcialmente o pe-
nhor ou a hipoteca na propor~ao dos
seus quinhoes; qualquer deles, porem,
pode faze-lo no todo.
Paragrafo unico. O herdeiro ou suces-
sor que fizer a remi~iio flea sub-rogado
nos direitos do credor pelas quotas que
houver satisfeito.
Art.1.430. Quando, excutido o penhor,
ou executada a hipoteca, o produto nao
bastar para pagamento da dlvida e des-
pesas judiciais, continuara o devedor
obrigado pessoalmente pelo restante.
Capitulo II - Do Penhor
Sei;iio I - Da Constitui~iio do Penhor
Art. 1.431. Constitui-se o penhor pela
transferencia efetiva da posse que, em
garantia do debito ao credor ou a quern
o represente, faz o devedor, ou alguem
por ele, de uma coisa move!, suscetfvel
de aliena~ao.
Paragrafo unico. No penhor rural, in-
dustrial, mercantile de vefculos, as coi-
sas empenhadas continuam em poder
do devedor, que as deve guardar e con-
servar.
Art. l.427-1.431
Art. 1427. Except by express provision, a
third party who gives real security for the
debt of another is not obligated to replace it
or reinforce it when, through no fault of his,
it perishes, deteriorates or devalues.
Art. 1428. A provision that authorizes a
pledge creditor, antichretic creditor or
hypothecary creditor to keep the thing
given as security if the debt is not paid on
maturity is null.
Sole paragraph. After maturity, the debtor
may give the thing in payment of the debt.
Art.1429. The debtor's successors may not
redeem the pledge or hypothec in
proportion to their shares in the inheritance;
but any of them may redeem the whole.
Sole paragraph. An heir or successor who
redeems the security is subrogated in the
creditor's rights for the shares that he
satisfied.
Art. 1430. When upon enforcement of the
pledge or execution of the hypothec, the
proceeds are not sufficient to pay the debt
and the judicial expenses, the debtor
continues to be personally obligated for the
remainder.
Chapter II - Pledge
Section I- Constitution of Pledges
Art. 1431. A pledge is constituted by the
effective transfer of possession of a
movable thing that is susceptible of
alienation, made by the debtor or by
someone on his behalf to the creditor or to
his representative, as security for a debt.
Sole paragraph. In rural, industrial and
mercantile pledges and in pledges of
vehicles, the pledged things continue in the
power of the debtor, who must safeguard
and maintain them.
Art. 1.432-1.434 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1432. The instrument of pledge must
be registered by either of the contracting
parties; an instrument of common pledge
shall be registered in the Office of Titles
and Documents.
Section II - Rights of Pledge
Creditors
Art. 1433. A pledge creditor has the right:
I - to possession of the thing pledged;
II - to retention of the thing, until he is
indemnified for the duly justified expenses
he has incurred, if they were riot occasioned
by his fault;
III - to reparation of any injury he has
suffered by reason of defect in the pledged
thing;
IV - to proceed to judicial execution, or
amicable sale, if the contract expressly
permits it or the debtor authorizes it by
means of a pr:ocuration;
V - to appropriate the fruits of the pledged
thing that is in his power;
VI - to proceed to early sale, upon prior
judicial authorization, whenever there is
good reason to fear that the pkdged thing
will perish or deteriorate, with deposit of
the price obtained. The owner of the
pledged thing may prevent the early sale by
replacing it or offering other suitable real
security.
Art. 1434. The creditor may not be
compelled to return the pledged thing; or
any part of it, before he is paid in full; a
Judge, .on application by the owner, may
determine that only one of the things, or a
part of the pledged thing, sufficient to pay
the creditor, be sold.
306
Art. 1.432. 0 instrumento do penhor
devera ser levado a registro, por qual-
quer dos contratantes; o do penhor co-
mum scni registrado no Cart6rio de Ti-
tulos e Documentos.
Sei;iioII -DosDireitos do Crcdor
Pignoraticio
Art. 1.433. 0 credor pignoratfcio tern
direito:
I - aposse da coisa empenhuda;
II - areten~ao dela, ate que o indenizem
das dcspesas devidamente justificadas,
que tiver feito, nao sendo ocasionadas
por culpa sua;
III - ao ressarcimento do prejuizo que
houver sofrido por vfcio da coisa empc-
nhada;
IV - a promover a execw;ao judicial, ou
a venda amigavcl, se lhe permitir ex-
pressamente o contrato, ou lhc autori-
zar o devedor mediante procurm;ao;
V - a apropriar-se dos frutos da coisa em-
penhada que se encontra em seu poder;
VI - a promover a venda antecipada,
mediante previa autorizai;ao judicial,
sempre que haja receio fundado de que
a coisa empenhada se perca ou deterio-
re, devendo o pre~o ser depositado. 0
dono da coisa empenhada pode impedir
a venda antecipada, substituindo-a, ou
oferecendo outra garantia real idonea.
Art.1.434. 0 credor nao pode ser cons-
trangido a devolver a coisa empenhada,
ou uma parte dela, antes de ser integral-
mente pago, podendo o juiz, a requeri-
mento do proprietario, determinar que
seja vendida apenas uma das coisas, ou
parte da coisa empenhada, suficiente
para o pagamento do crcdor.
307 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Sei;iio III - Das Obriga1;ocs do
Crcdor Pignoraticio
Art. 1.435. 0 crcdor pignoratfcio e Art. 1435. A pledge creditor is obligated:
obrigado:
I - a cust6dia da coisa. coma cleposita-
rio, ea ressarcir ao demo a perda ou de-
teriorai;ao de que for culpado, podendo
ser compensadana clfvida, ate a concor-
rcnte quantia, a importiincia da respon-
sabilidade;
II- adefesada posse dacoisaempenha-
da ea dar cicncia, ao dono dela, <las cir-
cunstiincias quc tornarcm necessario o
exercfcio de ll\:UO possess6ria;
III - a imputar o valor dos frutos, de que
se apropriar (art. 1.433, inciso V) nas
despesas de guarda c conservm;ao, nos
juros e no capital da obrigm;ao garanti-
da. sucessivamente;
IV - a restituf-la, com os rcspcctivos
frutos e acessoes, uma vcz paga a df-
vida;
V - a entregar o que sobeje do prei;:o,
quando a dfvida for paga, no caso do in-
ciso IV do art l.433. · contemplated in art. 1433.
Se~iio IV - Da Extini;lio do Penhor
Art. 1.436. Extingue-se o penhor:
I - extinguindo-se a obrigm;:ao;
II - perecendo a coisa;
III - renunciando o credor;
JV - confundindo-se na mesma pessoa
as qualidades de credor e de dono da
coisa;
V - dando-se a adjudicai,;ao judicial, a
remissao ou a venda da coisa empenha-
da, feita pelo credor ou por ele autori-
zada.
Art. 1.435-1.436
Section III - Obligations of Pledge
Creditors
I - to keep custody of the thing, as
depositary, and to reimburse the owner for
loss or deterioration that is his fault; the
amount of the liability may be compensated
against the debt, up to the amount of the
latter;
II - to defend possession of the pledged
thing and to notify the thing's owner of
circumstances that make it necessary to
bring a possessory action;
III - to apply the value of the fruits he
appropriates (art. 1433, item V) to the
expenses of safekeeping and maintenance,
interest, and capital of the secured
obligation, in that order;
IV - to return it, with its fruits and
accretions, once the debt is paid;
V - to deliver the remaining amount of the
price, after the debt is paid, in the case
Section IV -Extinction of Pledge
Art. 1436. A pledge is extinguished:
I - if the obligation is extinguished;
II - if the thing perishes;
ill - if the creditor renounces it;
IV - if the qualities of creditor and owner of
the thing are confused in the same person;
V - upon adjudgment by a judge,
redemption or sale of the pledged thing,
done by the creditor or with his
authorization.
Art. 1.437-1.439 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. The creditor's renunciation is presumed
when he consents to a private sale of the
pledge without a reserve price, when he
returns possession to the debtor or when he
consents to its replacement by another
security.
§2. If confusion occurs only as to part of the
debt secured by pledge, the pledge shall
subsist in its entirety as to the rest.
Art. 1437. The extinction of the pledge
produces effects after cancellation of
registration is recorded, upon production of
proof of extinction.
Section V - Rural Pledge
Subsection I - General Provisions
Art. 1438. A 11.lral pledge is constituted by
means o.f a public or private instrument,
registered in the Immovable Property
Registry Office of the jurisdiction in which
the pledged things are situated.
Sole paragraph. If the debtor has promised
to pay in cash the debt secured by the rural
pledge, he may issue, in favor of the
creditor, a rural pledge certificate, in the
form established by special legislation.
Art. 1439. An agricultural pledge and a
pledge of livestock can be contracted only
for a term of no more than thtee and four
years, respectively, which may be extended
once only, for a like period of time.
§ 1. Even though the term has expired, the
security remains for so long as the property
that constitutes it subsists.
§2. Extension of the term may be entered in
the margin of the registration of the pledge,
upon request by the creditor and the debtor.
308
§ l 0 Presume-se a rent'.incia do credor
quando consentir na venda particular
do penhor sem reserva de prei,:o, quan-
do restil:Uir a sua posse ao devedor, ou
a
quando anuir sua substituic;ao por ou-
tra garantia.
§ 2° Operando-se a confusao tao-so-
mente quanto a parte da dfvida pignora-
tfcia. stibsistira inteiro o pcnhor quanto
ao resto.
Art. 1.437. Produz efeitos a extim;ao
do penhor depois de averbado o cance-
Jamento do registro, avista da respecli-
va prova.
Sec;ao V - Do Penhor Rural
Subsec;ao I - Disposi-;0es Gcrais
Art. 1.438. Constitui-se o penhor rural
mediante instrumento pt'.iblico ou parti-
cular, registrado no Cart6rio de Regis-
tro de Im6veis da circunscrii,:ao em que
estiverem situadas as coisas empenha-
das.
Paragrafo unico. Prometendo pagar em
dinheiro a dfvida, que garante com pe-
nhor rural, o devedor podera emitir, em
favor do credor, cedula rural pignoratf-
cia, na forma determinada em lei espe-
cial.
Art. 1.439. 0 penhor agrfcola e o pe-
nhor pecuario somente podem ser con-
vencionados, respectivamente, pelos
prazos maximos de tres e quatro anos.
prorrogaveis, uma s6 vez, ate o limite
de igual tempo.
§ I 0 Embora vencidos os prazos. per-
manece a garantia, enquanto subsisti-
rem os hens que a constituem.
§ 2° A prorrogai,:ao deve ser averbada a
margem do registro respectivo, me-
diante requerimento do credor e do de-
vedor.
309 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 1.440. Se o predio estiver hipote-
cado, o penhor rural podera constituir-
se independentemente da anuencia do
credor hipotecario, mas nao !he preju-
dica o direito de preferencia, nem res-
tringe a extensao da hipoteca, ao ser
executada.
Art. 1.441. Tem o credor direito a veri-
ficar o estado das coisas empenhadas,
inspecionando-as onde se acharem, por
si ou por pessoa que credenciar.
Subsec;:ao II - Do Penhor Agricola
Art. 1.442. Podem ser objeto de pe-
nhor:
I - maquinas e instrumentos de agricul-
tura;
II - colheitas pendentes, ou em via de
forma~ao;
Ill - frutos acondicionados ou armaze-
nados;
IV - lenha cortada e carvao vegetal;
V - animais do servi~o ordinario de es-
tabelecimento agrfcola.
Art. 1.443. 0 penhor agrfcola que recai
sobre colheita pendente, ou em via de
formai,:ao, abrange a imediatan1ente se-
guinte, no caso de frnstrar-se ou ser in-
suficiente a que se deu em garantia.
Paragrafo unico. Seo credor nao finan-
ciar a nova safra, podera o devedor
constituir com outrem novo penhor, em
quantia maxima equivalente a do pri-
meiro; o segundo penhor tera preferen-
cia sobre o primeiro, abrangendo este
apenas o excesso apurado na colheita
seguinte.
Subsec;:ao III - Do Penhor Pecuario
Art. 1.444. Podem ser objeto de penhor
os animais que integram a atividade
pastoril, agricola ou de Jacticfnios.
Art. l.440-1.444
Art. 1440. If the immovable property is
hypothecated, a rural pledge may be
constituted without the consent of the
hypothecary creditor, but it does not affect
his right of preference, nor restrict the
extent of the hypothec when it is executed.
Art. 1441. The creditor has the right to
verify the state of the pledged things by
inspecting them wherever they may be,
either in person or through another person
accredited by him.
Subsection II - Agricultural Pledge
Art. 1442. The following may be pledged:
I - agricultural machines and instruments;
II - growing or unharvested crops;
III - processed or stored produce;
IV - cut firewood and vegetable charcoal;
V - ordinary work animals of an
agricultural establishment.
Art. 1443. An agricultural pledge over an
unharvested or growing crop extends to the
immediately following crop, if the first
crop is frustrated or is insufficient.
Sole paragraph. If the creditor does not
finance the new crop, the debtor may
constitute a new pledge with another
person, in an amount not greater than the
first pledge; the second pledge has
preference over the first, which covers only
the excess obtained in the following
harvest.
Subsection III - Pledge of Livestock
Art. 1444. Animals that are part of animal
husbandry and agricultural activities may
be pledged.
Art. 1.445-1.448 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1445. The debtor may not alienate the
pledged animals without the prior written
consent of the creditor.
Sole paragraph. When the debtor intends to
alienate the pledged herd or, through
negligence, threatens to injure the creditor,
the creditor may apply for deposit of the
animals in the care of a third party, or
demand that the debt be paid to him
immediately.
Art. 1446. The pledge attaches to animals
of the same kind that are bought to replace
those that have died.
Sole paragraph. The replacement
contemplated in this article is presumed,
but it does not have effect against third
parties unless a mention thereof is added to
the contract and entered in the register.
Section VI - Industrial and Mercantile
Pledge
Art. 1447. The following may be pledged:
installed and operating machines, appliances,
materials and instruments, with or without
their accessories; animals used in industry;
salt and property intended for use in the
exploitation of.saltworks; pig farming
products, animals intended for the industrial
production of meat and meat products; raw
materials and manufactured products.
Sole paragraph. Pledge of merchandise
deposited in warehouses is governed by the
provisions regarding general warehouses.
Art. 1448. An industrial or mercantile
pledge is constituted by a public or private
instrument registered in the Immovable
Property Registry Office of the jurisdiction
in which the pledged things are situated.
3l0
Art. 1.445. 0 devedor nao podeni alie-
nar os animais empenhados sem previo
consentimento, por escrito, do credoc
Paragrafo unico. Quando o dcvedor
pretende alienar o gado empenhado ou.
por negligencia, ameace prejudicar o
credor, podera este requercr se dcposi-
tem os animais sob a guarda de terceiro.
ou exigir que se !he pague a divida de
imediato.
Art.1.446. Os animais da mesma espe-
cie, comprados para substituir os mor-
tos, ficam sub-rogados no penhor.
Paragrafo unico. Presume-se a substitui-
o;:ao prevista neste artigo, ma~ nan tern efi-
cacia contra terceiros, se nao constar de
meno;:ao adicional ao respectivo contrato.
a qual deveni ser averbada
Sei;ao VI - Do Penhor Industrial e
Mercantil
Art. 1.447. Podem serobjeto de penhor
maquinas, aparelhos, materiais, instru-
mentos, instalados e em funcionamen-
to, com os acess6rios ou sem eles; ani-
mais, utilizados na industria; sal e bens
destinados a explorao;:ao das salinas;
produtos de suinocultura. animais des-
tinados a industrializao;:ao de carnes e
derivados; materias-primas e produtos
industrializados.
Paragrafo unico. Regula-se pelas dis-
posi~i'ies relativas aos armazens gerais
o penhor das mercadorias neles deposi-
tadas.
Art. 1.448. Constitui-se o penhor in-
dustrial. ou o mercantil, mediante ins-
trumento publico ou particular, regis-
trado no Cart6rio de Registro de Im6-
veis da circunscri1;ao onde estiverem si-
tuadas as coisas empenhadas.
311 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Paragrafo unico. Prometendo pagar em
dinheiro a dfvida, que garante com pe-
nhor industrial ou mer\:antil, o devedor
podera cmitir, em favor do credor, ce-
dula do respectivo credito, na forma e
para os fins que a lei especial determi-
nar.
Art. 1.449. 0 devedor nao pode. sem o
consentimento por escrito do credor, al-
terar as coisas empenhadas ou mudar-
lhes a situao;:ao, nem delas dispor. 0 de-
vedor que, anuindo o erector, alicnar as
coisas empenhadas, devera repor ou-
tros bens da mesma naturcza, que fica-
rao sub-rogados no penhor.
Art. 1.450. Tern o credor direito a veri-
ficar o estado das coisas empenhadas,
inspecionando-as onde se acharem, por
si ou por pessoa que credenciar.
Sel;Jio VII - Do Penhor de Direitos e
Tltulos de Credito
Art.1.451. Podem serobjeto de penhor
direitos, suscet(veis de cessiio, sobre
coisas m6veis.
Art.1.452. Constitui-se o penhor de di-
reito mediante instrumento publico ou
particular, registrado no Registro de Tf-
tulos e Documentos.
Paragrafo unico. 0 titular de direito
empenhado devera entregar ao credor
pignoratfcio os documentos comproba-
t6rios desse direito, salvo se tiver inte-
resse legitimo em conserva-los.
Art. 1.453. 0 penhor de Credito nao
tem eficacia seniio quando notificado
ao devedor; por notificado tem-se ode-
vedor que, em instrumento publico ou
particular, declarar-se ciente da exis-
tencia do penhor.
Art. l.449- l.453
Sole paragraph. If the debtor has promised
to pay in cash the debt secured by the
industrial or rural pledge, he may issue, in
favor of the creditor, a certificate for the
corresponding debt, in the form and for the
purposes established by special legislation.
Art. 1449. The debtor may not, without the
written consent of the creditor, alter the
pledged things, remove them to another
place or dispose of them. A debtor who
alienates the pledged things with the
creditor's consent shall replace them with
other property of the same kind, to which
the pledge shall attach.
Art. 1450. The creditor has the right to
verify the state of the pledged things by
inspecting them wherever they may be,
either in person or through another person
accredited by him.
Section VII- Pledge of Rights and Debt
Instruments
Art. 1451. Assignable rights over movable
things may be pledged.
Art. 1452. A pledge of rights is constituted
by public or private instrument registered
in the Register of Titles and Documents.
Sole paragraph. The holder of the pledged
right shall deliver the documents
evidencing the right to the pledge creditor,
unless he has a legitimate interest in
keeping them.
Art. 1453. The pledge of a debt is not
effective until the debtor is notified; a
debtor who acknowledges, in a public or
private instrument, that he is aware of the
existence of the pledge is deemed to have
been notified.
Art. l.454-1.459 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1454. The pledge creditor must
perform those acts necessary to maintain
and defend the pledged right and to collect
interest and other accessory obligations
included in the security.
Art.1455. The pledge creditor must collect
the pledged debt as soon. as performance
may be demanded. If the pledged debt
consists of the payment of money, he shall
deposit the amount received, as agreed with
the pledge debtor, or wherever the judge
determines; if it consis.ts of delivery of a
thing, the pledge 1>hall attach to that thing.
Sole paragraph. When the pledged debt
matures, the creditor has the right to retain
what is owed to him from the amount
received, returning the balance to the
debtor; or to enforce the pledge over the
thing that was delivered to him.
Art. 1456. If one debt is subject to various
pledges, the debtor shall make payment
only to the pledge creditor whose right has
preference over the others; the preferred
creditor is liable to the other creditors for
losses and damage if, after notification by
any of them, he does not pursue collection
of the debt in a timely fashion.
Art. 1457. The holder of the pledged debt
may only receive payment with the written
consent of the pledge creditor, in which
cas.ethe.pledge is extinguished.
Art. 1458. A pledge of a debt instrument is
constituted by public or private instrument
or by pledge endorsement, with delivery of
the instrument to the pledge creditor, and is
governed by the General Provisions of this
Title and, to the extent applicable, by this
Section.
Art. 1459. The pledge creditor of a debt
instrument has the right:
312
Art. 1.454. 0 credor pignoratfcio deve
praticar os atos necessarios aconserva-
c;;ao e defesa do direito empenhado e co-
brar os juros e mais presta\:oes acess6-
rias compreendidas na garantia.
Art. 1.455. Devera o credor pignoratf-
cio cobrar o credito empenhado, assim
que se tome exigfvel. Se este consistir
numa presta\:ao pecuniaria, depositan'i
a importiincia recebida, de acordo com
o devedor pignoratfcio, ou onde o juiz
determinar; se consistir na enrrega da
coisa, nesta se sub-rogara o penhor.
Paragrafo unico. Estando vencido o
credito pignoratfcio, tern o credor direi-
to a reter, da quantia recehida. o q~1e !he
edevido, restituindo o restante ao deve-
dor; ou a excutir a coisa a ele entregue.
Art. 1.456. Seo mesmo credito fljlr ob-
jeto de varios penhores. s6 ao ,~dor
pignoratfcio, cujo direito prefiraab§ de-
mais, o devedor deve pagar; resitf>nde
por perdas e danos aos demais cre'Bores
o credor preferente que, notificado por
qualquer um deles, niio promover opor-
tunamente a cobran\:a.
Art. 1.457. 0 titular do credito empe-
nhado s6 pode receber o pagamento
com a anuencia. por escrito. do erector
pignoratfcio, caso em que o penhor se
extinguira.
Art. 1.458. 0 penhor, que recai sobre
tftulo de credito, constitui-se mediante
instrumento publico ou particular ou
endosso pignoratfcio, com a tradii;:1io do
tftulo ao credor, regendo-se pelas Dis-
posii;:oes Gerais deste Tftulo e, no que
couber, pela presente Sei;:1io.
Art.1.459. Ao credor, em penhor de ti-
tulo de credito, compete 0 direito de:
313 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE
I - conservar a posse do tftulo e recupe-
r:i-Ja de quem quer que o detenha;
II - usar dos meios judiciais convenien-
tes para assegurar os seus direitos, e os
do credor do tftulo empenhado;
Ill - fazer intimar ao devedor do tftulo
que nao pague ao seu credor, enquanto
durar o penhor;
IV - receber a importfincia consubstan-
ciada no titulo e os respectivos juros, se
exigfveis, restituindo o tftulo ao deve-
dor, quando este solver a obrigac;:1io.
Art. 1.460. 0 devedor do titulo empe-
nhado que receber a intima91io prevista
ho inciso III do artigo antecedente, ou
se der por ciente do penhor, nao podera
pagar ao seu credor. Seo fizer, respon-
dera solidariamente por este, par perdas
e danos, perante o credor pignoratfcio.
Paragrafo unico. Se o credor der quita-
\:ao ao devedor do tftulo empenhado,
devera saldar imediatamente a dfvida,
em cuja garantia se constituiu o penhor.
Se!;iio VIlI .-. Do Penhor de Veiculos
Art.1.461. Podem ser objeto de penhor
os vefculos empregados em qualquer
especie de transporte ou condw;:ao.
Art.1.462. Constitui-se o penhor, a que
se refere o artigo antecedente, mediante
instrumento publico ou particular, re-
gistrado no Cart6rio de Tftulos e Docu-
mentos do domicflio do devedor, e ano-
tado no certificado de propriedade.
Paragrafo unico. Prometendo pagar em
dinheiro a dfvida garantida com o pe-
nhor, podera 0 devedor emitir cedula de
credito. na formae para os fins que a lei
especial determinar.
Art. 1.460-1.462
I - to keep possession of the instrument and
to recover it from anyone who holds it;
II - to use appropriate judicial means to
secure his rights and those of the creditor
under the pledged instrument;
III - to cause the debtor of the instrument to
be notified not to make payment to his
creditor, while the pledge is in effect;
IV - to receive the amount evidenced by the
instrument and the interest thereon, if
payment may be demanded, returning the
instrument to the debtor when he has
acquitted his obligation.
Art. 1460. The debtor of a pledged
instrument who receives the notification
contemplated in item III of the preceding
article, or who acknowledges the existence
of the pledge, may not make payment to his
creditor. If he does, he shall be solidarily
liable with his creditor for losses and
damage to the pledge creditor.
Sole paragraph. If the creditor gives
acquittance to the debtor under the pledged
instrument, he shall immediately repay the
debt secured by the pledge.
Section VIII - Pledge of Vehicles
Art.1461. Vehicles employed in any kind
of transportation may be pledged.
Art. 1462. The pledge referred to in the
preceding article is constituted by public or
private instrument registered in the Office
of Titles and Documents of the debtor's
domicile and annotated on the certificate of
ownership.
Sole paragraph. If the debtor has promised
to pay in cash the debt secured by the
pledge, he may issue a debt certificate, in
the form and for the purposes established
by special legislation.

Art. l.463-1.468 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1463. Vehicles may not be pledged
unless they have been insured against theft,
damage, loss, destruction and damage
caused to third parties.
Art. 1464. The creditor has the right to
verify the state of the pledged vehicle by
inspecting it wherever it may be, either in
person O"r through another person
accredited by him.
Art. 1465. The alienation or removal of the
pledged vehicle without first notifying the
creditor results in the early maturity of the
debt secured by the pledge.
Art. 1466. A pledge of vehicles may only
be contracted for a term of no more than
two years, which may be extended for a
period not exceeding the same amount of
time, with the extension being annotated on
the margin of the registered record of the
pledge. ·
Section IX - Legal Pledge
Art. 1467. The following are pledge
creditors, without need for any contract to
that effect:
I - innkeepers and suppliers of lodgings or
food and drink, over the baggage, movable
property, jewelry and money that their
consumers or clients have with them in the
inn or establishment, for the expenses
incurred and the food and drink consumed
there;
II - owners of rural or urban property, over
the movable property with which lessees
have furnished the property, for the rent.
Art.1468. The account of the debts listed in
item I of the preceding article shall be made
on the basis of a printed table, previously
and ostentatiously displayed in the
establishment, showing the prices of the
lodgings, board or food and drink supplied,
on pain of nullity of the pledge.
314
Art. 1.463. Nao se farii o penhor de vcf-
culos sem quc estejam previamente se-
gurados contra furto, avaria, pcreci-
mento e danos causados a terceiros.
Art. 1.464. Tern o credor direito a veri-
ficar o estado do veiculo empenhado.
inspecionando-o onde se achar. par si
ou por pessoa que credenciar.
Art. 1.465. A aliena\:ao, ou a mudan~a.
do vefculo empenhado sem previa co-
munical.!aO ao credor importa no venci-
mento antecipado do crcdito pignora-
tfcio.
Art. 1.466. 0 penhor de veiculos s6 se
pode convencionar pelo prazo miiximo
de dais anos, prorrogiivel ate o limite de
igual tempo. averbada a prorrogm;:ao a
margem do registro respectivo.
Se~o IX - Do Penhor Legal
Art. 1.467. Sao credores pignoratfcios,
independentemente de convens;ao:
I - os hospedeiros, ou fornecedores de
pousada ou alimento, sabre as baga-
gens, m6veis, j6ias ou dinheiro que os
seus consumidores ou fregueses tive-
rem consigo nas respectivas casas ou
estabelecimentos, pelas despesas ou
consumo que ai tiverem feito;
II - o dona do predio n:istico ou urbano,
sabre os hens m6v.eis que o rendeiro ou
inquilino tiver guarnecendo o mcsmo
predio, pelos alugueis ou rendas.
Art.1.468. Acoma das dfvidas enume-
radas no inciso I do artigo antecedente
seni extrafda conforme a tabela imprcs-
sa, previa e ostensivamente exposta na
casa. dos pres;os de hospedagem, da
pensao ou dos generos fornecidos, sob
pena de nulidade do penhor.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
315
Art. 1.469. Em cada um dos casos do
art; l.467, o credor podera tomar em
garantia um ou mais objetos ate o valor
dadfvida.
Art. 1.470. Os credores; compreendi-
dos no art. 1.467, podem fazerefetivo o
penhor, antes de recorrerem aautorida-
de judiciaria, sempre que haja perigo na
demora, dando aos devedores compro-
vante dos hens de que se apossarem.
Art. 1.471. Tornado o penhor. requere-
ra o credor, ato contfnuo. a sua homolo- · creditor shall immediately apply for its
ga\'.ao judicial.
Art. 1.472. Pode o locatiirio impedir a
constitui\;ao do penhor mediante cau-
~ao idonea.
Capitulo III - Da Hipotcca
Se1;iio I - Disposi1;iies Gerais
Art.1.473. Podem ser objeto de hipote-
ca:
I - os im6veis e os acess6rios dos im6-
veis conjuntamente com eles;
II - o domlnio direto;
Ill - 0 domlnio util;
IV - as estradas de ferro;
V - os recursos naturais a que se refere
o art. 1.230, independentemente do
solo onde se acham;
VI - os navios;
VII - as aeronaves.
Paragrafo unico. A hipoteca dos navios
e das aeronaves reger-se-a pelo dispos-
to em lei especial.
Art. 1.469-1.473
Art. 1469. In each of the cases
contemplated in art. 1467, the creditor may
take one or more objects as security, up to
the amount of the debt.
Art. 1470. The creditors referred to in art.
1467 may make the pledge effective before
having recourse to the judicial authority
whenever there is risk in delay, and shall
give the debtors a document to evidence the
goods they have taken into their possession.
Art. 1471. Upon taking the pledge, the
judicial homologation.
Art. 1472. A lessee may prevent
constitution of the pledge by giving other
suitable security.
Chapter Ill - Hypothec
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 1473. The following may be
hypothecated:
I- immovables, and their accessories
together with them;
II - naked ownership of an immovable
property;
III - the real right to the use and enjoyment
of an immovable property;
IV - railroads;
V - the natural resources referred to in art.
1230, separately from the land on which
they are located;
VI-ships;
VII - aircraft.
Sole paragraph. Hypothec of ships and
aircraft is governed by the provisions of
special legislation.
 Art. 1.474-1.478
BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1 ~74. A hypothec covers all the
accret10~s and improvements to, and
construct10ns on, the immovable. Real
enc~mbrances constituted and registered
agamst the same immovable prior to .the
hypothec .subsist. · a
Art. 1475. Any provision that prohibits the
?wner from alienating the hypothecated
immovable is null.
Sole paragraph. The parties to the hypothec
may ag~ee th.at the hypothecary debt will
mature if the lffimovable is alienated.
~rt.1476. The owner of the hypothecated
immovable may constitute another
~ypothec against it, by means of a new
mstr.umeht, in favor of the same or another
creditor.
Art. 1477. Except in the case of the
debtor's insolvency, the creditor of the
secoiltl hypothec, even if it has matured
~ay not enforce the hypothec against th~
immovable before the first hypothec has
matured.
Sole.paragraph. Th<;! debtor shall not be
co?sidered to be insolvent by reason of his
failure to pay obligations secured by
hypotllecs subsequent to the first.
Art. 1478. If the debtor of the obligation
secur~d ~y the first hypothec does not offer,
at maturity, to pay it, the creditor of the
secon~ ~ypothec may seek its extinction by
~epositi~g the amount and notifying the
frrst.cr~ditor to receive it and the debtor to
pay ~t; if the debt?r does not pay, the second
~redito:, on makmg payment, is subrogated
m ~e :ights of the prior hypothec, without
pre~udice to any other rights he may have
agamst the common debtor.
316
Art.1.474. A hipoteca abrange todas as
acessoes, melhoramentos ou constru-
i;oes do im6vel. Subsistem OS onus
reais constitufdos e registrados, ante-
riormente hipoteca, sobre 0 mesmo
im6vel.
Art.1.475. Enu la aclausula que proibe
ao proprietario alienar im6vel hipore-
cado.
Panigrafo unico. Pode convencionar-se
que vencera o credito hipotecario se 0
im6vel for alienado. ' Art. 1.480. 0 adquirente notificara o
Art.1.476. 0 dono do im6vel hipoteca-
do pode constituir outra hipoteca sobre
ele, mediante novo tftulo, em favor do
mesmo au de outro credor.
Art.1.477. Salvo o caso de insolvencia
do devedor, o credor da segunda hipo-
teca, embora vencida, niio podera exe-
cutar o imovel antes de vencida a pri-
meira.
Paragrafo unico. Nao se considera in-
solvente o devedor por faltar ao paga-
mento das obrigar,:iies garantidas por hi-
a
potecas posteriores primeira.
Art. 1.478. Se o devedor da obrigar,:iio
garantida pela primeira hipoteca niio se
oferecer, no vencimento, para paga-la,
o credor da segunda pode promover-lhe
a extinr,:iio, consignando a importiincia
e citando o primeiro credor para recebe-
la e 0 devedor para paga-Ia; se este niio
pagar, o segundo credor, efetuando 0
pagamento, se sub-rogara nos direitos
da hipoteca anterior, sem prejufzo dos
que lhe competirem contra 0 devedor
com um.
317 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Pariigrafo unico. Se o primeiro credor
estiver promovendo a execui,:ao da hi-
poteca, o credor da segunda depositarii
a importancia do debito e as despesas
judiciais.
Art. 1.479. 0 adquirente do imovel hi-
potecado, desde que nao se tenha obri-
gado pessoalmente a pagar as dfvidas
aos credores hipoteciirios. podera exo-
nerar-se da hipoteca, abandonando-
lhes o im6vel.
vendedor e os credores hipotecarios,
deferindo-lhes, conjuntamente, a posse
do im6vel, ou o depositarii em juizo.
Paragrafo unico. Podera o adquirente
exercer a faculdade de abandonar o
im6vel hipotecado, ate as vinte e quatro
horas subseqtientes a cita~iio, com que
se inicia o procedimento executivo.
Art. 1.481. Dentro em trinta dias. con-
tados do registro do titulo aquisitivo.
tern o adquirente do im6vel hipotecado
o direito de remi-lo, citando os credores
hipotecarios e propondo importancia
nao inferior ao pre~o por que o adqui-
riu.
§ I 0 Se o credor impugnar o prei,:o da
aqilisi~iioau a importancia oferecida,
realizar-se-a licita~ao, efetuando-se a
venda judicial a quern oferecer maior
pre~o. assegurada preferencia ao adqui-
rente do im6vel.
§ 2° Niio impugnado pelo credor, o pre-
i;:o da aquish;:iio ou .o pre1;0 proposto
pelo adquirente, haver-se-a par defini-
tivamente fixado para a remissiio do
im6vel, que ficara livre de hipoteca,
uma vez pago ou depositado o pre90.
Art. 1.479-1.481
Sole paragraph. If the first creditor is
pursuing enforcement of his hypothec, the
creditor of the second hypothec shall
deposit the amount of the debt and the
judicial expenses.
Art.1479. An acquiror of the hypothecated
immovable, if he did not assume a personal
obligation to pay the debts to the
hypothecary creditors, may release himself
from the hypothec by abandoning the
immovable to the hypothecary creditors.
Art. 1480. The acquiror shall notify the
seller and the hypothecary creditors, giving
them joint possession of the immovable, or
shall deposit the immovable into court.
Sole paragraph. The acquiror may exercise
the option of abandoning the hypothecated
immovable within the twenty-four hours
following the citation with which the
enforcement proceedings commenced.
Art. 1481. Within thirty days from
registration of the instrument of
acquisition, the acquiror of the
hypothecated immovable has the right to
redeem it, notifying the hypothecary
creditors and proposing an amount not less
than the price for which he acquired the
immovable.
§I. If the creditor contests the acquisition
price or the amount offered, an auction
shall be held for the judicial sale of the
immovable to whomever offers the highest
price, with preference being given to the
acquiror of the immovable.
§ 2, If the creditor does not contest it, the
acquisition price or the price proposed by the
acquiror shall be deemed to have been
definitively fixed for the redemption of the
immovable, which shall be free ofhypothecs,
upon payment or deposit of the price.

Art. 1.482-1.484 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§3. If the acquiror fails to redeem the
immovable, thus subjecting it to execution,
he shall be obligated to compensate the
hypothecary creditors for any devaluation
the immovable suffered through his fault,
in addition to the judicial expenses of the
execution.
§4. Any acquiror who is deprived of the
immovable by reason of public auction or
attachment, who pays the hypothec, who by
reason of adjudgment or auction disburses
more for the payment of the hypothec than
he paid for the purchase or who bears
judicial costs and expenses has a right of
recourse against the seller.
Art.1482. After the public sale, the
execution debtor may, at any time prior to
signature of the act of public sale or
ptlblication of the judgment awarding the
immovable, redeem the hypothecated
immovable by offering a price equal to the
assessed price if there were no bidders, or to
the highest bid offered. The spouse,
descendents and ascendants of the
execution debtor have the same right..
Art. 1483. In the case of bankruptcy or
insolvency of the hypothecary debtor, the
right of redemption is conferred on the
mass or on the concourse of creditors, and
the hypothecary creditor may not refuse the
assessed price of the immovable.
Sole paragraph. The hypothecary creditor,
to obtaih payment qf the debt he holds, may
demand that an immovable assessed at a
value less than the debt be adjudged to him,
provided he gives acquittance for the whole
of the debt.
Art.1484. It is licit for the parties to set out,
in the written instruments, the value agreed
between them of hypothecated
immovables, which value, duly adjusted for
inflation, shall serve as a basis for public
sales, adjudications and redemptions, thus
dispensing with assessment.
318
§ 3° Se o adquirente deixar de remir o
im6vel; sujeitando-o a execu~iio, ficani
obrigado a ressarcir os credores hipote-
carios da desvalorizai;ao que, por sua
culpa, o mesmo vier a sofrer, alem das
despesas judiciais da execu"ao.
§ 4°Disponi de ai;ao regressiva contra o
vendedor o adquirente que ficar priva-
do do im6vel em conseqiiencia de lici-
ta"ao ou penhora. o que pagar a hipote-
ca, o que, por causa de adjudicm;ao ou
licita~ao, desembolsarcom o pagamcn-
to da hipoteca importancia excedente a
da compra e o que suportar cusras e des-
pesas judiciais.
Art.1.482. Realizada a pra~a. o execu~
tado poder<i, ate a assinatura do auto de
arrematai;ao ou ate que seja publicada a
senteni;a de adjudica~ao, remir o im6vel
hipotecado, oferecendo pre~o igual ao da
avalia~ao, se nao liver havido Jicitantes,
ou ao do maior lance oferecido. Igual di-
reito cabera ao conjuge, aos descendentes
ou ascendentes do executado.
Art. 1.483. No caso de fa!encia, ou in-
solvencia, do devedor hipotecario. o di-
reito de remi~ao defere-se a massa, ou
aos credores em concurso, nao podendo
o credor recusar o pre~o daavalia~ao do
im6vel.
Paragrafo t1nico. Pode o erector hipote-
cario, para pagamento de Sell Credito,
requerer a adjudicai,:ao do im6vel ava-
liado em quantia inferior aquele, desde
que de quita~ao pela sua totalidade.
Art. 1.484. EHcito aos interessados fa-
zer constar das escrituras o valor entre
si ajustado dos im6veis hipotecados, o
qua!, devidamente atualizado, sera a
base para as arrematai,:oes, adjudica-
~oes e remii,:oes, dispensada a ava-
lia~iio.
CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGOE
319
Art.1.485. Mediante simples averba~ao,
rcquerida por ambas as partes, poderii
prorrogar-se a hipoteca, ate 30 (trinta)
anos da data do contrato. Desde que per-
fa~aesse prazo, s6 poderii subsistir o con-
trato de hipoteca reconstituindo-se por
novo tftulo e novo registro; e, nesse caso.
lhe sern mantida a precedencia, que enrao
!he competir. (Red~ao dada pela Lei n°
10.931, de 2004)
Art. 1.486. Podem o credor e o deve-
dor, no ato constitutivo da hipoteca, au-
torizar a emissao da correspondente ce-
dula hipotecaria, na forma e para os fins
previstos em lei especial.
Art.1.487. A hipoteca pode ser consti-
tufda para garantia de dfvida futura ou
condicionada, desde que determinado o
valor maxima do credito a ser garan-
tido.
§ 1° Nos casos deste artigo, a execus;ao
da hipoteca dependerii de previa e ex-
pressa concordancia do devedor quanto
averificai,:ao da condii;ao, ou ao mon-
taote da dfvida.
§ 2° Havendo divergencia entre o ere-
ctor e 0 devedor, cabera aquele fazer
prova de seu crectito. Reconhecido este,
o devedor respondera, inclusive, por
perdas e danos, em razao da superve-
niente desvaloriza~ao do im6vel.
Art. 1.488. Se o im6vel, dado em ga-
rantia hipoteciiria, vier a ser loteado, ou
se nele se constituir condominio edilf-
cio, poderiio onus ser dividido, gravan-
do cada lore ou unidade autonoma, se o
requererem ao juiz o credor, o devedor
ou os donos, obedecida a propor"ao en-
tre 0 valor de cada um deles e 0 credito.
Art. 1.485-1.488
Art. 1485. The term of a hypothec may be
extended by simple entry in the register, at
the request of both the parties, but shall not
exceed thirty years from the date of the
contract. If this term is reached, the contract
of hypothec shall subsist only if it Is
reconstituted by a new instrument and a
new registration; and .in that event the
priority that it had shall be maintained. (As
amended by Law 10,931 of2004)
Art.1486. The creditor and the debtor may,
in the instrument that constitutes the
hypothec, authorize the issuing of a
hypothecary certificate, in the form and for
the purposes contemplated in special
legislation.
Art.1487. A hypothec may be constituted
to secure a future or conditional debt,
provided that the maximum amount of the
debt to be secured is detennined.
§ 1. In the cases contemplated in this article,
enforcement of the hypothec shall depend
upon the debtor's prior express agreement
as to the fulfillment of the condition or the
amount of the debt.
§2. If the creditor and the debtor do not
agree, the creditor shall have the burden of
proving the debt he holds. If the debt
claimed by the creditor is found to exist, the
debtor's liability shall include losses and
damage resulting from supervening
devaluation of the immovable.
Art. 1488. If the immovable given as
security by hypothec is subdivided or a
condominium is constituted over it, the
charge may be divided, upon application to
the judge by the creditor, the debtor or the
owners, attaching to the lots or independent
units in proportion to the value of each.
 Art. 1.489-1.490 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. The creditor may only oppose the
application for dismemberment of the
charge if he proves that it will diminish his
security.
§2. Unless there is agreement to the
contrary, all the judicial or extrajudicial
expenses required for dismemberment of
the charge shall be borne by the party who
applies for it.
§3. Dismemberment of the charge does hot
release the original debtor from the liability
referred to in art. 1430, except with the
creditor's consent.
Section II - Legal Hypothec
Art. 1489. The law creates a hypothec in
favor of:
I - legal persons of internal public law (art.
41), over the immovables belonging to
those charged with the collection,
safekeeping or administration of the
respective funds and incomes;
II - children, over the immovables of a
father dr mother whp marries again before
making the inventory of the prior union;
III - injured parties, or their heirs, over the
immovables of the wrongdoer, for
satisfaction of the. damage caused by the
wrongful act and payment of judicial
expenses;
IV - coheir~. as security for their share in
the partition or the return of property to the
partition, on the immovable adjudged to the
heir making the return;
V - creditors, over immo.vables sold in a
public sale, as security for payment of the
balance of the sale price.
Ant.1490. The creditor of a legal hypothec,
or the person who represents him, may, on
proof that the specified immovables are
insufficient, require that the debtor
reinforce the hypothec with other
immovables.
320
§ 1° 0 credor so podera se opor ao pedi-
do de desmembramento do onus, pro-
vando que o mesmo importa em dimi-
nuiyiio de sua garantia.
§ 2° Salvo conven~ao em contrario, to-
das as despcsas judiciais ou extrajudi-
ciais necessarias ao desmembramento
do onus correm por con ta de quem o re-
querer.
§ 3° 0 desmembramento do onus nao
exonera o devedor originario dares-
ponsabil idade a que se refcre o art.
1.430. salvo anuencia do credor.
Se~lio II - Da Hipoteca Legal
Art. 1.489. A lei confere hipotcca:
I - as pessoas de direito publico intemo
(art. 41) sobre os im6veis pertencentes
aos encarregados da cobranya, guarda
ou administrm;:ao dos respectivos fun-
dos e rendas;
II - aos filhos, sobre os im6veis do pai
OU da miie que passar a Outras nupcias,
antes de fazer o inventario do casal an-
terior;
II! - no ofendido, ou aos seus herdeiros,
sobre os im6veis do delinqliente, para
satisfa\:liO do dano causado pelo delito e
pagamento das despesas judiciais;
IV - ao co-herdeiro, para garantia do
seu quinhao ou torna da partilha, sabre
o im6vel adjudicado ao herdeiro repo-
nente;
V - ao credor sabre o im6vel arremata-
do. para garantia do pagamento do res-
tante do prei;:o da arremara1:iio.
Art. 1.490. 0 credor da hipoteca legal,
ou quem o represente, poderii, provan-
do a insuficiencia dos im6veis especia-
Jizados, exigir do devedor que seja re-
for~ado com outros.
321 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.491. A hipoteca legal pode ser
substitufda por cau9iio de tftulos da df-
vida publica federal ou estadual, rece-
bidos pelo valor de suacotai;:ao minima
no ano corrente; ou por outra garantia, a
criteria do juiz, a requerimento do de-
vedor.
Se~iio III - Do Registro da Hipoteca
Art. 1.492. As hipotecas serao registra-
das no cart6rio do lugar do im6vel, ou
no de cada um deles, se o tftulo se refe-
rir a mais de um.
Paragrafo unico. Compete aos interes-
sados, exibido o tftulo, requerer o regis-
tro da hipoteca.
Art. 1.493. Os registros e averba\:oes
seguirao a ordem em que forem reque-
ridas, verificando-se ela pela da sua nu-
mera~ao sucessiva no protocolo.
Paragrafo unico; 0 numero de ordem
determina a prioridade, e esta a prefe-
rencia entre as hipotecas.
Art. 1.494. Nao se registrarao no mes-
mo dia duas hipotecas, ou umahipoteca
e outro direito real, sobre o mesmo im6-
vel, em favor de pessoas diversas, salvo
se as escrituras, do mesmo dia, indica-
rem a hara em que foram lavradas.
Art. 1.495. Quando se apresentar ao
oficial do registro tftulo de hipoteca que
mencione a constituii;:ao de anterior,
nao registrada, sobrestara ele na inscri-
9ao da nova, depois de a prenotar, ate
trinta dias, aguardando que o interessa-
do inscreva a precedente; esgotado o
prazo, sem que se requeira a inscri9ao
desta, a hipoteca ulterior sera registrada
e obtera preferencia.
Art. 1.491-1.495
Art. 1491. A legal hypothec may be
substituted by the grant of a security
interest in federal or state public debt
instruments, received at the value of their
lowest quotation in the current year, or by
another type of security, at the judge's
discretion, on application by the debtor.
Section III - Registration of Hypothecs
Art. 1492. Hypothecs are registered at the
office of the place of the immovable, or in
each office, if the instrument of hypothec
refers to more than one.
Sole paragraph. Any of the interested
parties may, upon presentation of the
instrument of hypothec, apply for
registration.
Art. 1.493. Registrations and entries shall
follow the order in which they were applied
for; that order shall be ascertained by the
number of the protocol, which shall be
assigned in successive order.
Sole paragraph, The number indicating the
order shall determine priority, and the
priority shall determine the preference
among the hypothecs.
Art.1494. Two hypothecs, or one hypothec
and another real right, shall not be
registered on the same day against the same
immovable in favor of different persons
unless the written instruments, made on the
same day, indicate the time at which they
were drawn up.
Art.1495. When an instrument ofhypothec
which mentions the creation of an earlier,
unregistered hypothec is presented to the
registry official, he shall suspend
registration of the new hypothec, after
making preliminary note of it, for 30 da¥s,
while awaiting registration of the earher
hypothec by the interested party; if
registration of the earlier hypothec has not
been applied for at the expiry of this period,
the later hypothec shall be registered and
shall have preference.
 Art. 1.496-1.499 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1496. If there is a question as to the
legality of the registration applied for, the
official shall nonetheless make preliminary
note of the application. If within ninety
days the question is judged to be without
foundation, the registration shall be made
with the same number that it would have
had on the date of the preliminary note;
otherwise, the preliminary note shall be
cancelled and the registration shall have the
number corresponding to the date on which
new application for registration is made.
Art. 1497. Legal hypothecs of any nature
shall be registered and specified.
§1. T~ose who are obligated to provide.the
secu~tt)'.
are responsible for registering and
spec1fymg legal hypothecs, but interested
parties may cause them to be registered, or
request that the Public Ministry do so.
§2. Those who are responsible for the
registration and specification of legal
hypothecs are liable to pay losses and
damage arising out of their failure to do so.
~rt. 1~98. The registration of the hypothec
1s valid fbr so long as the obligation
continues in existence; but the specification
must be renewed on the expiry of a period
of twenty years.
Section IV - Extinction of Hypothecs
Art. 1499. Hypothecs are extinguished:
I - by the extinction of the principal
obligation;
II - by the perishment of the thing;
III - by the end of terminable ownership;
IV - by renunciation by the creditor;
V - by remission;
VI - by public auction or adjudgment
322
Art. 1.496. Se tiver diivida sobre a le-
galidade do registro requerido, o oficial
fara, ainda assim. a prenotar,:ao do pedi-
do. Se a diivida, dentro em noventa
dias, for julgada improcedente, o regis-
tro efetuar-se-a com o mesmo niimero
que teria na data da prenotar,:ao; no caso
contrario. cancelada esta, recebera o re-
gistro o niimero correspondente a data
em que se tomar a requerer.
Art. 1.497. As hipotecas Jcgais, de
qualquer natureza. deveriio ser registra-
das e especializadas.
§ 1°0 registro e aespecializar,:ao das hi-
potecas legais incumbem a quern csta
obrigado a prestar a garantia, mas os in-
teressados podem promover a inscrir,:ao
delas, ou solicitar ao Ministerio Piiblico
que o far,:a.
§ 2° As pessoas, as quais incumbir ore-
gistro e a especializar,:ao das hipotecas
legais, estao sujeitas a perdas e danos
pela omissao.
Art. 1.498. Vale o registro da hipoteca,
enquanto a obrigar,:ao perdurar; mas a
especializar,:ao, em completando vinte
anos, deve ser renovada.
Ser,:iio IV - Da Extin1;ao da Hipoteca
Art. 1.499. A hipoteca extingue-se:
I - pela extinr,:1io da obrigas;ao principal;
II - pelo perecimento da coisa;
III - pela resolur,:ao da propriedade;
IV - pela reniincia do credor;
V - pelaremis;ao;
VI- pela arremata~1io ou adjudicar,:1io.
323 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.500. Extingue-se ainda a hipote-
ca com a averba1tiio, no Registro de
Im6veis. do cancelamento do registro. a
vista da respectiva prova.
Art. 1.501. Nao extinguira a hipoteca.
devidamente registrada, a arremata1;1io
ou adjudicai;:ao. sem que tenham sido
notificados judicialmente os respecti-
vos credores hipotecarios, que nao fo-
rem de qualquer modo partes na execu-
;;:ao.
Sc1;1io V - Da Hipoteca de Vias
Fcrreas
Art. 1.502. As hipotecas sobre as estra-
das de ferro seriio registradas no Municf-
pio da esta~iio inicial da respectiva linha
Art. 1.503. Os credores hipotecarios
nao podem embarai;:ar a explora9ao da
linha, nem co11trariar as modificar,:oes.
que a administrai;:ao deliberar, no leito
da estrada, em suas dependencias, ou
no seu material.
Art.1.504. A hipoteca sera circunscrita
alinha ou il.s linhas especificadas na es-
critura e ao respectivo material de ex-
plora\:fiO, no estado em que ao tempo da
execui(ao estiverem; mas os credores
hipotecarios poderiio opor-se a venda
da estrada, ade suas linhas. de seus ra-
mais ou de parte consideravcl do mate-
rial de exploras;ao; bem como afusao
com outra empresa, sempre que com
isso a garantia do debito enfraquecer.
Art. 1.505. Na execur,:ao das hipotecas
sera intimado o representante da Uniiio
ou do Estado, para, dentro em quinze
dias, remir a estrada de ferro hipoteca-
da, pagando o pre1;0 da arremata91io ou
da adjudicar,:ao.
Art. 1.500-1.505
Art.1500. Hypothecs are also extinguished
by the entry, in the Immovable Property
Register, of the cancellation of the
registration, upon presentation of the
appropriate evidence.
Art. 1501. A duly registered hypothec is
not extinguished by public auction or
adjudgment unless the hypothecary
creditors who were not in some way party
to the execution had been judicially
notified of the proceedings.
Section V - Hypothec of
Railways
Art. 1502. Hypothecs over railways are
registered in the Municipality of the station
at which the hypothecated line begins.
Art. 1503. Hypothecary creditors may not
obstruct operation of the line, or interfere
with changes to the roadbed, to the
railway's accessory buildings and
properties or to its equipment and material
which have been decided on by the
administration of the railway.
Art. 1504. The hypothec shall be limited to
the line or lines specified in the written
instrument and to the corresponding
operating equipment and materials, in the
condition they are found at the time of
enforcement; but the hypothecary creditors
may oppose the sale bf the railway, of its
main or branch lines and of any significant
part of its operating equipment and
materials, as well as the merger of the
railway with another company, whenever
such transactions would weaken the
security given for the debt.
Art. 1505. In proceedings for enforcement
of hypothecs of railways, the representative
of the Union or the State shall be given
notice to redeem the hypothecated railway
by paying the price determined in the public
auction or adjudgment.
Art. 1.506-1.508 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter IV - Antichresis
Art. 1506. A debtor, or another person
acting for him, may, by delivering the
immovable to the creditor, assign to him the
right to receive its fruits and income, in
payment of the debt.
§ 1. It is permitted to stipulate that the fruits
and income from the immovable shall be
received on account of interest, but if the
amount of fruits and income exceeds the
highest rate permitted by law for financial
transactions, the excess shall be imputed to
capital.
§2. If the antichresis attaches to immovable
property, the property may be hypothecated
by the debtor to the antichretic creditor, or
to third parties, just as an hypothecated
immovable may be given in aritichresis.
Art. 1507. The antichretic creditor may
administer the property given in antichresis
and enjoy its fruits and utilities, but he must
present an accurate and faithful annual
balance of his administration.
§ 1. If the antichretic debtor does not agree
with the contents of the balance, because
they are inaccurate, or because the
antichretic creditor's. administration of the
property is wasteful, he may contest it or, if
he wishes, demand that the antichresis be
transformed into a lease, with the judge
fixing th.e monthly amount of rent, which
may be adjusted for inflation annually.
§2. Saving agreement to the contrary, the
antichretic creditor may lease the property
given in antichresis to a third party,
maintaining the right to retain the
immovable.until he is paid, although the
rent from the lease is not binding on the
antichretic debtor.
Art. 1508. The antichretic creditor is liable
for deterioration suffered by the
immovable through his fault, and for the
fruits and income that, through negligence,
he failed to gather.
324
Capitulo IV - Da Anticrcsc
Art. 1.506. Pode o devedor ou outrem.
por ele. com a entrega do im6vel ao crc-
dor, ceder-the o direito de perceber, em
compensai;iio da dfvida, os frutos e ren-
dimentos.
§ 1° Epermitido estipular que os frutos
e rendimentos do im6vel sejam perce-
bidos pelo credor a conta de juros, mas
se o seu valorultrapassar a taxa m{lJCima
permitida em lei para as operai;:oes fi-
nanceiras, o remanescente sera imputa-
do ao capital.
§ 2° Quando a anticrese recair sobre
bem im6vel, este poder:i ser hipotecado
pelo devedor ao credor anticretico, ou a
terceiros, assim como o im6vel hipote-
cado podera ser dado em anticrese.
Art. 1.507. 0 credor anticretico pode
administrar os hens dados em anticrese
e fruir seus frutos e utilidades, mas de-
ver:i apresentar anualmente balani;o,
exato e fie!, de sua administra\;ao.
§ I 0 Se o devedor anticretico nao con-
cordar com o que se contem no balan~o,
por ser inexato, ou ruinosa a adminis-
trai;iio, poder:i impugna-lo, e, se o qui-
ser, requerer a transformal(ao em arren-
damento, fixando o juiz o valor mensa!
do aluguel, o qua! poder:i ser corrigido
anualmente.
§ 2° 0 credor anticretico pode, salvo
pacto em sentido contr:irio, arrendar os
bens dados em anticrese a terceiro,
mantendo, ate ser pago, direito de re-
teni;ao do im6vel, embora o aluguel
desse arrendamento nao seja vinculati-
vo para o devedor.
Art. 1.508. 0 credor anticretico res-
ponde pelas deterioral(5es que, por cul-
pa sua, o im6vel vier a sofrer, e pelos
frutos e rendimentos que, por smrnegli-
gencia, deixar de perceber.
325 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGOE
Art. 1.509. 0 credor anticretico pode
vindicar os seus direitos contra o adqui-
rente dos hens, os credores quirografa-
rios e os hipotecarios posteriores ao re-
gistro da anticrese.
§ 1° Se executar os bens por faltade pa-
gamento da dfvida, ou permitir cjue ou-
tro credor o execute, sem opor o seu di-
reito de reten1;ao ao exeqilente, niio tera
preferencia sobre o prel(o.
§ 2° 0 credor ancicretico nao tenl prefe-
rcm:ia sobre a indcniza9ao do seguro,
qu~ndo o predio seja destrufdo, ncm, sc
forem desapropriados os bens, com re-
la~ao adesaproprial(iiO.
Art. 1.510. 0 adquirente dos bens da-
dos em anticrese poder:i remi-los. antes
do vencimento da dfvida, pagan do a sua
totalidade a data do pedido de remic;iio
e imitir-se-:i, se for o caso, na sua posse.
Livro IV - Do Direito de Familia
Titulo I - Do Direito Pessoa!
Subtitulo I- Do Casamento
Capitulo I - Disposi1riies Gerais
Art. 1.511. 0 casamento estabelece co-
munhao plena de vida, com base na igual-
dade de direitos e deveres dos conjuges.
Art. 1.512. 0 casamento e civil e gra-
tuita a sua celebrai;iio.
Par:igrafo unico. A habilitai;ao para o
casamento, o registro ea primeira certi-
dao seriio isentos de selos, emolumen-
tos e custas, para as pessoas cuja pobrc-
za for declarada, sob as penas da lei.
Art. 1.513. Edefeso a qualquer pessoa,
de direito publico ou privado, interferir na
comunhao de vida institufda pela fam1Jia.
Art. 1.509-1.513
Art. 1509. The antichretic creditor may
enforce his rights against an acquiror of the
property, common creditors and
hypothecary creditors subsequent to the
registration of the antichresis.
§ 1. If the antichretic creditor executes the
property for default in payment of the debt,
or permits another creditor to do so without
contesting the execution by reason of his
right of retention, the antichretic creditor
will not have preference over the price.
§2. The antichretic creditor has no
preference over indemnification paid under
insurance when a building is destroyed, nor
with respect to expropriation, if the
property is expropriated.
Art. 1510. An acquirer of property given in
antichresis may redeem it, prior to maturity
of the debt, by paying the whole of the debt
as it stands on the date of the application for
remission, and the acquiror shall then be
put into possession of the property.
Book IV - Family Law
Title I - The Law Governing Persons
Subtitle I - Marriage
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 1511. Marriage establishes full
community in life, based on equality in the
rights and duties of the spouses.
Art. 1512. Marriage is civil and is
solemnized without charge.
Sole paragraph. The license for marriage,
the registration of marriage and the first
marriage certificate are free of seals,
emoluments and costs for persons whose
poverty is declared, subject to the penalties
imposed by law.
Art.1513. It is prohibited for any person, of
either public or private law, to interfere in
the community of life created by a family.

Art. 1.514- 1.517 BILJNGUAL CJVIL CODE
Art. 1514. Marriage occurs at the moment
when a man and a woman express their will
to establish a conjugal relationship before a
judge and the judge declares them to be
married.
Art. 1515. A religious marriage that meets
the legal requirements for validity of a civil
marriage is equated to the latter and
produces effects from the date of its
solemnization, provided that the marriage
is recorded in the appropriate register.
Art. 1516. The registration of a religious
marriage is subject to .the same
requirements imposed for a civil marriage.
§ 1. The civil registration of a religious
marriage shall be made within 90 days from
its solemnization, by means of a
communication by the person who
solemnized it to the competent official, or
at the initiative of any interested party,
provided that the 1icense for marriage
governed by this Code has been previously
homologated. After expiry of the said
90-day period, registration will depend
upon a new license.
§2. A religious marriage that is solemnized
without observing the formalities required
by this Code will have civil effects if, on
application made by the cotiple, the
marriage is registered in the civil register, at
any time after obtaining a license to marry
granted by the competent authority, subject
to the time period established in art. 1532.
§3. The civil registration of a religious
marriage will be null if, prior to the
marriage, either of the parties had
contracted civil marriage with another.
Chapter Il - Capacity
to Marry
Art. 1517. Men and women who are
sixteen years of age may marry; prior to the
age of legal majority, authorization from
both parents, or their legal representatives,
is required.
326
Art. 1.514. 0 casamento se realiza no
momenta em que o homem e a mulher
manifestam, perante o juiz, a sua vonta-
de de estabelecer vinculo conjugal. e o
juiz os declara casados.
Art. 1.515. 0 casamento religioso, que
atendcr as exigencias da lei para a vali-
dade do casamento civil, equipara-se a
este, desde que registrado no registro
pr6prio, produzindo efeitos a partir da
data de sua celebra~1io.
Art.1.516. 0 registro do casamento re-
ligioso submete-se aos mesmos requisi-
tos exigidos para o casamento civil.
§ J0 0 registro civil do casamento reli-
gioso dcvera ser promovido dentro de
noventa dias de sua realiza~ao. median-
te comunica~ao do celebrante ao oficio
competente, ou par iniciativa de qual-
quer interessado, desde que haja sido
homologada previamente a habilitat;1io
regulada neste C6digo. Ap6s o referido
prazo, o registro dependeni de nova ha-
bilitai;ao.
§ 2° 0 casamento religioso, celebrado
sem as formalidades exigidas neste C6-
digo, tera efeitos civis se, a requerimen-
to do casal, for registrado, a qualquer
tempo, no registro civil, mediante pre-
via habilitai;:ao perante a autoridade
competente e observado o prazo do art.
1.532.
§ 3° Sera nulo o registro civil do .casa-
mento religioso se, antes dele, qualquer
dos consorciados houver contrafdo
com outrem casamento civil.
Capltulo II - Da Capacidade para o
Casamento
Art. 1.517. 0 homem e a mulher com
dezesseis anos podem casar, exigindo-
se autorizai;:ao de ambos os pais, ou de
seus representantes legais, enquanto
nao atingida a maioridade civil.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
327
Paragrafo unico. Se houver divergencia
entre os pais, aplica-se o disposto no
paragrafo unico do art. 1.631.
Art. 1.518. Ate a celebrai;1io do casa-
mento podem os pais. tutores ou cura-
dores revogar a autoriza9ao.
Art. 1.519. A denegaqiio do consenti-
mento, quando injusta, pode ser suprida
pelojuiz.
Art. 1.520. Excepcionalmente, sera
permitido o casamcnto de quern ainda
nao alcan~ou a idade nubil (art. 1.517),
para evitar imposi~ao ou cumprimento
de pena criminal ou em caso de gravi-
dez.
Capitulo III - Dos Impedimentos
Art. I.521. Nao podem casar:
I - os a~cendentes com os descendentcs,
seja o parentesco natural ou civil;
II - os afins em Jinha reta;
Ill - o adotante com quern foi ciinjuge
do adotado e o adotado com quern o foi
do adotante;
IV - os irm1ios. unilaterais ou bilaterais,
e demais colaterais. ate o terceiro grau
inclusive;
V - o adotado com o filho do adotante;
VI - as pessoas casadas;
VII - o ciinjuge sobrevivente com o
condenado por homicfdio ou tentativa
de homicidio contra o seu consorte.
Art. 1.522. Os impedimentos podem
ser opostos, ate o momenta da celebra-
\;:llO do casamento, por qualquer pessoa
capaz.
Art. 1.518-1,522
Sole paragraph. If the parents do not agree,
the provisions of the sole paragraph of art.
1631 shall apply.
Art. 1518. The parents, tutors or curators
may revoke the authorization at ~ny time
prior to solemnization of the marrtage.
Art. 1519. The refusal to consent, when
unjust, may be supplied by the judge.
Art.1520. Exceptionally, a person who has
not yet reached marriageable age (art.
1517) shall be permitted to marry, in order
to avoid the imposition or fulfillment of a
criminal penalty, or in case of pregnancy.
Chapter III - Impediments
Art. 1521. The following may not marry:
I - ascendants with descendents, regardless
of whether their relationship is natural or
civil;
II - relatives by affinity in the direct line;
III - an adoptive parent with the former
spouse of the adoptee, and the adoptee with
the former spouse of the adoptive parent;
IV - full and half sisters and brothers, and
other relatives in the collateral line, to and
including the third degree;
V- an adoptee with a son or daughter of the
adoptive parent;
VI- married persons;
VII - the surviving spouse with a person
found guilty of homicide or attempted
homicide against his or her consort.
Art. 1522. Impediments may be raised by
any capable person, up to the moment of
solemnization of the marriage.
Art. 1.523-1.524 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. If the judge or the registry
official is aware of an impediment, he is
obligated to declare it.
Chapter IV - Suspensive
Causes
Art.1523. The following should not marry:
I - a widower or widow who has had a child
with the deceased spouse, until the property
of the couple has been inventoried and
partition among the heirs has been made;
II - a widow, or a woman whose marriage
was dissolved because it was null or was
annulled, until ten months after .the
beginning of her widowhood or of the
dissolution of the conjugal relationship;
ID - a person who has been divorced, until
partition of the property of the couple has
been homologated or decided;
IV - a tutor or a curator and his
descendents, ascendants, brothers, sisters,
brothers-in-law, sisters-in-law and nieces
and nephews, with the persons under
tutorship or curatorship, until the tutorship
or curatorship has ceased and the respective
accounts have been settled.
Sole paragraph. It is permitted for intended
spouses to apply to a judge, requesting that
the suspensive causes contemplated in
items I, III and IV of this article not be
applied to them. upon proof of the absence
of injury to, respectively, the heir, the
former spouse or the person under tutorship
or curatorship; in the case of item II, the
woman must prove the birth of a child, or
the absence of pregnancy, over the course
of the tim~ period.
Art. 1524. The causes that suspend
solemnization of marriage may be argued
by relatives in direct line of either of the
intended spouses, whether by
consanguinity or by affinity, and by
collateral relatives to the second degree,
again by consanguinity or by affinity.
328
Paragrafo unico. Se 0 juiz, OU 0 oficial
de registro, tiver conhecimento da exis-
tencia de algum impedimento. sera
obrigado a declara-lo.
Capitulo IV - Das causas
suspensivas
Art. 1.523. Nao devem casar:
I - o viuvo ou a viuva que tiver filho do
conjuge falecido, enquanto nao fizer in-
ventario dos bens do casal e der parlilha
aos herdeiros;
II - a viuva, ou a mulher cujo casamento
se desfez por ser nulo ou ter sido anula-
do, ate dez meses depois do comei.;o da
viuvez, ou da dissolu~ao da sociedade
conjugal;
III - o divorciado, enquanto nao houver
sido homologada ou decidida a partilha
dos bens do casal;
IV - o tutor ou o curador e os sens de-
scendentes. ascendentes, irmaos, cu-
nhados ou sobrinhos, com a pessoa tu-
telada ou curatelada, enquanto nao ces-
sar a tutela ou curatela, e nao estiverem
saldadas as respectivas contas.
Paragrafo unico. Epermitido aos nu-
bentes solicitar ao juiz que nao !hes se-
jam aplicadas as causas suspensivas
previstas nos incisos I, III e IV deste ar-
tigo, provando-se a inexistencia de pre-
jufzo, respectivamente, para o herdeiro,
para o ex-conjuge e para a pessoa mte-
lada ou curatelada; no caso do inciso II,
a nubente devera provar nascimento de
filho, ou inexistencia de gravidez. na
lluenciado prazo.
Art. 1.524. As causas suspensivas da
cclebra~ao do casamento podem ser ar-
giiidas pelos parentes em linha reta de
um dos nubentes, sejam consangiifneos
ou afins, e pelos colaterais em segundo
grau, sejam tambem consangiifneos ou
afins.
329 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Capitulo V - Do Processo de
Habilitai,;ao para o Casamento
Art.1.525. 0 requerimento de habilita-
"'ao para o casamento sera firmado por
ambos os nubentes, de pr6prio punho,
ou, a seu pedido, por procurador, e deve
ser instrufdo com os seguintes docu-
mentos:
I - certidao de nascimento ou documen-
to equivalente;
II - autoriza1.=ao por escrito das pessoas
sob cuja dependencia legal estivcrcm,
ou ato judicial que a supra;
III - declara~ao de duas testemunhas
maiores, parentes ou nao, que atestem
conhece-los e afirmem nao existir im-
pedimenta que os inibade casar;
IV - declara~ao do estado civil, do do-
micflio e da residencia atual dos con-
traentes e de seus pais, se forem conhe-
cidos;
V - certidao de 6bito do conjuge faleci-
do, de senten~a declarat6ria de nulida-
de ou de anula~ao de casamento, transi-
tada em julgado, ou do registro da sen-
ten"'a de div6rcio.
Art. 1.526. A habilita~ao sera feita pe-
rante o oficial do Registro Civil e, ap6s
a audiencia do Ministerio Ptlblico, sera
homologada pelo juiz.
Art. 1.527. Estando em ordem a docu-
mentai,;ao, o oficial extraira o edital,
que se afixara durante quinze dias nas
circunscri~oes do Registro Civil de am-
bos os nubentes, e, obrigatoriamente, se
publicara na imprensa local, se houver.
Paragrafo unico. A autoridade compe-
tente, havendo urgencia, podera dis-
pensar a publica~ao.
Art. 1.525-1.527
Chapter V - Proceedings for Obtaining
License to Marry
Art. 1525. An application for license to
marry shall be signed by both the intended
spouses, in their own hand, or, at their
request, by procurator, and shal.l be
accompanied by the following documents:
I - their birth certificates or equivalent
documents;
II - written authorization from the persons
who have the legal care of the intended
spouses, or the judicial act that supplies
such authorization;
III - a declaration by two witnesses who
have attained the age of majority, relatives
or not. attesting that they know the intended
spouses and affirming the absence of
impediments to their marriage;
IV - a declaration of the civil status,
domicile and current residence of the
contracting parties and their parents, if they
are known;
V - the certificate of death of the deceased
spouse, the certificate of final judgment
declaring null or annulling the marriage, or
the certificate of registration of the
judgment of divorce.
Art. 1~26. The licensing shall be done
before the official of the Civil Register and,
after hearing the Public Ministry, shall be
homologated by the judge.
Art.1527. If the documentation is in order,
the official shall extract from it a notice,
which shall be posted, during fifteen days,
in the jurisdictions of the Civil Register of
both the intended spouses and shall be
published in the local press, if one exists.
Sole paragraph. In cases of urgency, the
competent authority may waive
publication.
 Art. 1.528-1.533 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1528. It is the duty of the registry
official to inform the intended spouses of
the facts that can cause marriage to be
inv.alid, and of the various property
regimes.
Art. 1529. Any opposition to the marriage
by reason of impediment or suspensive
cause shall be made by a written, signed
declaration, accompanied by evidence of
the alleged fact or by an indication of the
place where such evidence can be obtained.
Art. 1530. The registry official shall give
the intended spouses or their
representatives a note concerning the
opposition, indicating the grounds, the
evidence and the name of the person· who
made it.
Sole paragraph. The intended spouses may
apply for the grant of a reasonable period of
time to present evidence to contradict the
facts alleged and to bring civil and criminal
actions against any bad faith opponent.
Art. 1531. Upon completion of the
formalities set out ih arts. 1526 and 1527,
and verification of the absence. of any
ob~t~cle to !he marriage, the registry
off1cial shall 1ssue the marriage license.
Art. 1532. The marriage license shidl be
validfdrninety days from the date on which
it was issued.
Chapter VI - Solemnization of
Marriage
Art.1533. Marriage shall be solemnized on
the day and at the time and place designated
by the authority which will preside over the
ceremony, on application by the intended
spouses, who have obtained the license to
marry referred to in art. 1531.
330
Art. 1.528. E<lever do oficial do regis-
tro esclarecer os nubentes a rcspeito dos
fatos que podem ocasionar a invalidade
do casamento, bem como sobrc os di-
versos regimes de bens.
Art. 1.529. Tanto os impedimcntos
quanto as causas suspcnsivas seriio
opostos em declara11ao cscrita c assina-
da, instrufda com as provas do faro ale-
gado, ou com a indica~iio do lugar onde
possam ser obtidas.
Art. 1.530. 0 oficial do registro dara
aos nubentes ou a scus representantes
nota da oposir,:ao, indicando os funda-
mentos, a~ provas e o nome de quern a
ofcreccu.
Panigrafo unico. Podcm os nubentcs re-
querer prazo razoavel para fazcr prova
contraria aos fatos alegados, c promo-
ver as ai;:oes civis e criminais contra o
oponente de ma-fe.
Art. 1.531. Cumpridas as fomialidades
dos arts. 1.526 e 1.527 e verificada a
inexistencia de fato obstativo, o oficial
do registro extraira o certificado de ha-
bilita~iio.
Art. 1.532. A eficacia da habilitac;iio
sera de noventa dias, a contar da data
em que foi extrafdo o ce1tificado.
Capitulo VI - Da Celebrac;iio do
Casamento
Art. 1.533. Celebrar-se-a o casamcnto,
no dia, hora e lugar previamente desig-
nados pela autoridade que houver de
presidir o ato, mediante petii;:ao dos
contraentes, que se mostrem habilita-
dos com a certidao do art. 1.531.
331 CODIGO CIVIL B!LINGOE
Art. 1.534. A solenidade realizar-se-a
na sede do cart6rio, com toda publici-
dade, a portas abertas, presentes pclo
mcnos duas testemunhas, parentes ou
nao dos contracntes, ou, querendo as
partes e consentindo a autoridade cele-
brante, noutro edificio publico ou parti-
cular.
§ l 0 Quando o casamento for em edifi-
cio particular, ficara este de portas aber-
tas durante o ato.
§ 2~ Seriio quatro as testemunhas na hi-
potese do paragrafo anterior e se algum
dos contraentes niio soubcr ou niio pu-
der escrever.
Art. 1.535. Prescntes os comraentes,
em pessoa ou por procurador especial,
juntamente com as testemunhas e o ofi-
cial do registro, o presidente do ato, ou-
vida aos nubentes a afirmai;:ao de que
pretendem casar por livre.e espontanea
vontade, declarara efetuado o casamen-
to, nestes termos:"De acordo com a
vontade que ambos acabais de afirmar
perante mim, de vos receberdes por ma-
rido e mulher, eu, em nome da lei, vos
declaro casados."
Art. 1.536. Do casamento, logo depois
de celebrado, lavrar-se-a o assento no
livro de registro. No assento, assinado
pelo presidente db ato, pelos conjuges,
as testcmunhas, e o oficial do regisrro,
seriio exarados:
I - os prenomes, sobrenomes. datas de
nascimento, profissiio, domicflio e resi-
dencia atual dos conjuges;
II - os prenomes, sobrertomes, datas de
nascimento ou de morte, domicflio ere-
sidencia atual dos pais;
Art. 1.534-1.536
Art. 1534. The solemnity shall be held
publicly at the seat of the notarial office,
with its doors open, and with at least two
witnesses present who may, but need not,
be relatives of the intended spouses. If the
parties wish and the celebrating authority
consents, the marriage may be solemnized
in another public or private building;
§ 1. When the marriage is solemnized in a
private building, its doors shall remain
open during the ceremony.
§2. In the case contemplated in the
preceding paragraph, or if one of the
intended spouses does not know how to
write, or cannot write, there shall be four
witnesses.
Art. 1535. In the presence of the intended
spouses, in person or by special procurator,
the witnesses and the registry official, the
president of the ceremony, after hearing the
intended spouses' affirmation that they
intend to marry of their free and
spontaneous will, shall declare the
marriage to have been made, in the
following terms: "According to the will of
you both, who have affirmed before me that
you accept each other as husband and wife,
I, in the name of the law, declare you to be
married."
Art. 1536. Immediately after the marriage
is celebrated, it shall be entered in the
register. The entry, which shall be signed
by the president of the ceremony, shall
record:
I - the names, surnames, birth dates,
profession, domicile and current residence
of the spouses;
II - the names, surnames, dates of birth or
death, domicile and current residence of
their parents;

Art. 1.537-1.539 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
III - the name and surname of any previous
spouse and the date of dissolution of the
previous marriage;
IV - the date of publication of the bans and
the date of celebration of the marriage;
V - the recital of the documents presented
to the registry official;
VI - the name, surname, profession,
domicile and current residence of the
witnesses;
VII,..... the marital property regime, declaring
the date. and the notarial office in which the
prenuptial agreement was made, when the
regime is not partial community of property
or a mandatory regime.
Art. 1537. The instrument authorizing the
marriage shall be transcribed in full into the
p~enuptial agreement.
Art. 1538. Celebration of the marriage
shall immediately be suspended if one of
the intended spouses:
I - refuses to make a solemn affirmation of
his or her will to marry;
II-'- declares that his or her will is not free
and spontaneous;
III - shows himself or herself to have
repented.
Sok paragraph. The intended spouse who
caµses the marriage to be suspended for one
ofthe reasons mentioned in this article shall
not be permitted to contract the marriage on
that day.
Art. 1539. In the case of serious ailment of
one of the intended spouses, the president
of the ceremony shall celebrate it wherever
the ailing intended spouse is located, if
urgent, even at night, before two witnesses
who know how to read and write.
332
III- o prenome e sobrenome do c6njuge
precedentee a data da dissolu\:iio do ca-
samento anterior;
IV - a data da publicar,:ao dos proclamas
e da celehra\:iiO do casamento;
V - a rela~ao dos documentos apresen-
tados ao oficial do registro;
VI - o prenome, sobrenome, profissao,
domicflio e residencia atual das tesre-
munhas;
VII - o regime do casamento, com a de-
clarai;:ao da data e do cart6rio em cujas
notas foi Javrai:la a escritura antenup-
cial, quando o regime niio for o da co-
munhao parcial, ou o ohrigatoriamente
estabelecido.
Art. 1.537. 0 instrumento da autoriza-
i;:ao para casar transcrever-se-a inte-
gralmente na escritura antenupcial.
Art. 1.538. A celehra1;iio do casamento
ser:i imediatamente suspensa se algum
dos contraentes:
I - recusar a solene afirmai;:ao da sua
von.tade;
II- dei:larar que esta nli.o elivre e espon-
tanea;
III - manifestar-se arrependido.
Paragrafo iinico. 0 nuhente que, por al-
gum dos fatos mencionados neste arri-
a
go, der causa suspensiio do ato, niio
sera admitido a retratar-se no mesmo
dia.
Art. 1.539. No caso de molestia grave
de um dos nubentes, o presidente do ato
ir:i celebra-lo onde se encontrar o impe-
a
dido, sendo urgente, ai.nda que noite,
perante duas testemunhas que saibam
!ere escrever.
333 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
§ 1° A falta ou impedimento da autori-
dade competente para presidir o casa-
mento suprir-se"a por qualquer dos
seus substitutos Iegais, e a do oficial do
Registro Civil por outro ad hoc, nomea-
do pelo presidente do ato.
§ 2° 0 termo avulso. Javrado pelo ofi-
cial ad hoc, sera registrado no respccti-
vo registro dentro em cinco dias, peran-
te duas testemunhas, ficando arqui-
vado.
Art. 1.540. Quando algum dos con-
traentes estiver em iminente risco de
vida, nap obtendo a preseni;a da autori-
dade aqua! incumba presidir 0 ato, nem
ade seu substituto, poderao casamento
ser celebrado na preseni;:a de seis teste-
munhas, que com os nuhentes nli.o te-
nham parentesco em Jinha reta, ou, na
colateral, ate segundo grau.
Art. 1.541. Realizado o casamento, de-
vem as testemunhas comparecer peran-
te a autoridadejudicial mais pr6xima,
dentro em dez dias, pedindo que !hes
tome por termo a declarar,:ao de:
I - que forarn convocadas por parte do
enfermo;
II - que este parecia em perigo de vida,
mas em seu juizo;
Ill - que, em sua presern;:a. declararam
os contraentes, livre e esponraneamen-
te, receber-se por marido e mulher.
§ J0 Autuado o pedido e tomadas as de-
clarai;oes, 0 juiz procedera as diligen-
cias necessarias para verificar se os
contraentes podiam ter-se habilitado,
na forma ordiniiria, ouvidos os interes-
sados que o requererem, dentro em
quinze dias.
Art. 1.540-1.541
§ 1. In cases of absence or impediment of
the authority who is competent to preside
over the marriage, his legal substitutes shall
act in his stead; and in the absence or
impediment of the Civil Register official,
the president of the ceremony shall appoint
another official ad hoc.
§2. The record of marriage drawn up in a
separate document by the ad hoc official
shall be registered in the appropriate
register within five days, in the presence of
two witnesses, and shall be kept at the
registry office.
Art. 1540. When the life of one of the
contracting parties is at imminent risk, and
the presence of the authority who is
competent to preside over the marriage, or
of his substitute, cannot be obtained, the
marriage may be celebrated in the presence
of six witnesses, with whom the intended
spouses have no relationship in the direct
line, or in the collateral line to the second
degree.
Art.1541. Once the marriage is celebrated,
the witnesses shall, within 10 days, appear
before the nearest judicial authority,
requesting that the record of the marriage
be taken from their declaration that:
I - they were called by the infirm party;
II - that the life of the infirm party appeared
to be at risk, but that he was in possession
of his or her mental faculties;
III - that, in their presence, the contracting
parties freely and spontaneously declared
that they received each other as husband
and wife.
§ L Once a record of the petition has been
opened and the declarations have been
taken, the judge shall take such action as
may be necessary to ascertain whether the
contracting parties could have obtained
license to marry in the ordinary way, and
shall hear such interested parties as may
request it, within I 5 days.
Art. 1.542-1.543 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§2. If it is determined that the spouses were
fit to marry, the competent authority shall
so decide, although the parties may appeal
the decision.
§3. If the decis.ion is not appealed, or it
becomes final despite the appeals brought
against it, the judge shall order that it be
registered in the Register of Marriages.
§4. The entry thus made shall have § 4° 0 assento assim lavrado retrotraira
retroactive effect as to the status of the os efeitos do casamento, quanta ao esta-
spouses, to the date of celebration of the . do dos conjuges, adata da cele.brai;ao.
marriage.
§5. The formalities of this and the
preceding article shall be waived if the
infirm party convalesces and is able to
ratify the marriage in the presence of the
competent authorrty and the registry
official.
Art. 1542. Marriage may be celebrated by
procuration constituted by a public
instrument granting special powers.
§ 1. Revocation of the mandate need not
come to the mandatary's knowledge; but if
the marriage is celebrated without the
mandatary or the other contracting party
having knowledge of 'the revocation, the
mandator shall be liable for losses and
damage.
§2: An intended spouse whose life is not at
imminent risk may be represented by
another in a nuncupative marriage.
§3. The term of the mandate shall not be
more than 90 days.
§4. The mandate may be revoked only by
public instrument.
Chapter VII - Proof of
Marriage
Art. 1543. A marriage celebrated in Brazil
is proved by the certificate of registration.
334
§ 2° Verificada a idoneidade dos conju-
ges para o casarnento, assim o decidira
a autoridade competente, com recurso
voluntario as partes.
§ 3° Se da decisao nao se tiver recorri-
do, ou se ela passar em julgado, apesar
dos recursos interpostos, o juiz manda-
ni registra-la no livro do Registro dos
Casamentos.
§ 5° Serao dispensadas as formalidades
deste e do artigo antecedente, se o en-
fermo convalescer e puder ratificar o
casamento na presen~a da autoridade
competente e do oficial do registro.
Art.1.542. 0 casamento pode celebrar-
se mediante procurai;ao, par instrumen-
to publico, com poderes especiais.
§ 1° A revoga~ao do mandato nao ne-
cess ita chegar ao conhecimento do
mandatario; mas, celebrado o casamen-
to sem que o mandatario ou o outro con-
traente tivessem ciencia da revoga1;1io,
respondera o mandante par perdas e da-
nos.
§ 2° 0 nubente que nao estiver em imi-
nente risco de vida podera fazer-se re-
presentar no casamento nuncupativo.
§ 3° A eficacia do mandato nao ultra-
passara noventa dias.
§ 4° S6 por instrumento publico se po-
dera revogar o mandato.
Capitulo VII - Das Provas do
Casamento
Art. 1.543. 0 casamento celebrado no
Brasil prova-se pela certidao do regis-
tro.
335 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Paragrafo unico. Justificada a falta OU
perda do registro civil, e admissfvel
qualquer outra especie de prova.
Art. 1.544. 0 casamento de brasileiro,
celebrado no estrangeiro, perante as
respectivas autoridades ou os consules
brasileiros, devera ser registrado em
cento e oitenta dias, a contar da volta de
um ou de ambos os conjuges ao Brasil,
no cart6rio do respectivo domicilio, ou,
em sua falta, no 1° Oficio da Capital do
Estado em que passarem a residir.
Art. 1.545. 0 casamento de pessoas
que, na posse do estado de casadas, nao
possam manifestar vontade, ou tenham
falecido, nfio se pode contestar em pre-
jufzo da prole comum, salvo mediante
certidao do Registro Civil que prove
que ja era casada alguma delas, quando
contraiu o casamento impugnado.
Art. 1.546. Quando a prova da celebra-
\:UO legal do casamento resultar de pro-
cesso judicial, o registro da senten\:a no
livro do Registro Civil produzira, tanto
no que toca aos conjuges coma no que
respeita aos filhos, todos os efeitos civis
desde a data do casamento.
Art.1.547. Na diivida entre as provas
favoraveis e contrarias, julgar-se-a pelo
casamento, se as conjuges, cujo.casa-
mento se impug~a, viverem ou tiverem
vivido na posse do estado de casados.
Capltulo VIII- Da Invalidade do
Casamento
Art. 1.548. Enulo o casamento contraf-
do:
I - pelo enfermo mental sem o necessa-
rio discernimento para os atos da vida
civil;
II - par infringencia de impedimenta.
Art. 1.544-1.548
Sole paragraph. In cases of justified
absence or loss of the civil registration,
proof by any other means is admissible.
Art. 1544. The marriage of a Brazilian
celebrated outside Brazil before the foreign
authorities or Brazilian consuls shall be
registered within one hundred and eighty
days from the return of one or both of the
spouses to Brazil, at the notarial office of
the domicile of the returning spouse or, if
there is none, at the 1stOffice of the Capital
of the State in which they take up residence.
Art. 1545. The marriage of persons who
possess the status of married persons but
cannot manifest their will or have died,
cannot be contested to the prejudice of their
common offspring except by means of a
certificate of the Civil Register proving that
one of them was married at the time he or
she contracted the contested marriage..
Art. 1546. When the proof of the legal
celebration of the marriage results from a
judicial proceeding, the registration of the
judgment in the Civil Register shall
produce all its civil effects from the date of
the marriage, with respect both to the
spouses and to their children.
Art. 1547. In case of doubt between
favorable and contrary evidence, judgment
shall be made in favor of the marriage if the
spouses whose marriage is contested are
living or lived in possession of the status of
married persons.
Chapter Vill - Invalidity
of Marriage
Art.1548. A marriage is null if contracted:
I - by a person who is mentally infirm and
does not have the necessary discernment to
perform the acts of civil life;
II - in violation of an impediment.

Art. 1.549-1.553 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Ar.t. 1549. Declaration of the nullity of a
marriage for the reasons contemplated in
the preceding article may be pursued by
means of a direct action by any interested
party or by the Public Ministry.
Art~ 1550. A marriage is voidable:
I - if one of the parties had not reached the
minimum age requfred to marry;
II - if one of the parties was a minor of
marriageable age but was not authorized by
his or her legal representative;
III - for defect of consent, within the terms
of arts. 1556 to 1558;
IV - if one of the parties was incapable of
consenting or of expressing his or her
consent in ~ 1.Jnmistakable manner;
V - if it was made by a mahdatary and
neither he nor· the other party knew of the
revocation of the mandate, provided the
spouses did not cohabit after the marriage;
VI -for lack of power in the authority that
celebrated the marriage.
Sole paragraph. Judicial declarati<:m of the
invalidity of the mandate is equated to
revocation.
Art. 1551. A marriage that resulted in
pregnancy shall not be annulled by reason
of age.
Art. 1552. Annulment of the marriage of a
person under sixteen years of age shall be
requested:
I - by the minor spouse;
II - by his or her legal representatives;
III - by his or her ascendants.
Art. 1553. A minor who was not of
marriage age may, after reaching it,
confirm his or her marriage, with the
?onsent of his or her legal representatives,
tf necessary, or with judicial authorization.
336
Art. 1.549. A decreta9ao de nulidade
de casamcnto, pelos motivos previstos
no artigo antecedente, pode ser promo-
vida mediante m;ao direta, por qualquer
interessado, ou pelo Ministerio Pu-
blico.
Art. 1.550. Eanuliivel o casamcnto:
I - de quem nao completou a idade mi-
nima para casar;
II - do menor em idade nlibil, quando
nao autorizado por seu representante le-
gal:
III - por vfcio da vontade, nos tennos
dos arts. 1.556 a 1.558;
IV - do incapaz de consentir ou mani-
festar, de modo inequlvoco, o consenti·
mento;
V - realizado pelo mandatiirio, sem que
ele ou o outro contracnte soubesse da
revoga~ao do mandato, e nao sobrcvin-
do coabitm;ao entre os conjuges;
VI - por incompetcncia da autoridade
celebrante.
Paragrafo linico; Equipara-se arcvoga-
~ao a invalidade do mandato judicial-
mente decretada.
Art. 1.551. Nao se anulara, por motivo
de idade, o casamento de que resultou
gravidez.
Art. 1.552. A anula~ao do casamento
dos menores de dezesseis ai10s serii re-
querida:
I - pelo pr6prio conjuge menor;
II - por seus representantes Jegitis;
III - por seus ascendentes.
Art. 1.553. 0 menor que nao atingiu a
idade nlibil podera, depois de comple-
tii-la, confinnar seu casamento, com a
autoriza9ao de seus representantes le-
gais, se necessiiria, ou com suprimento
judicial.
337 CODIGO ClVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.554. Subsiste o casan1ento cele-
brado por aquele que, sem possuir a
competcncia exigida na lei, exercer pu-
blicamente as fun9oes de juiz de casa-
mentos e, nessa qualidade, tiver regis-
trado o ato no Registro Civil.
Art. 1.555. 0 casamento do menor em
idade nlibil, quando nao autorizado por
seu representante legal, s6 poderii ser
anulado sea a!fao for proposta em cento
e oitenta dias, por iniciativa do incapaz,
ao deixar de se-Jo, de seus repre-
sentantes legais ou de seus herdeiros
necessarios.
§ 1° 0 prazo estabelecido neste artigo
serii contado do dia em que cessou a in-
capacidade, no primeiro caso; a partir
do casamento, no segundo; e, no tercei-
ro, da morte do incapaz.
§ 2° Nao se anulara o casamento quan-
do asua celebra~ao houverem assistido
os representantes lega.is do incapaz, ou
tiverem, por qualquer modo, manifesta-
do sua aprova~ao.
Art. 1.556. 0 casamento pode ser anu-
lado por vfcio da vontade, se houve por
parte de um dos nubentes, ao consentir,
erro esscncial quanta apessoa do outro.
Art. 1.557. Considera-se erro essencial
sabre a pessoa do outro conjuge:
I - o que diz respeito asua identidade,
sua honra e boa fama, sendo esse erro
ta! que o seu conhecimento ulterior tor-
ne insuportiivel a vida em comum ao
conjuge enganado;
II - a ignorancia de crime, anterior ao
casamento, que, por sua natureza, tome
insuportavel a vida conjugal;
Art. 1.554-1.557
Art.1554. A marriage shall subsist if it was
celebrated by a person who, although he
does not have the power required by law,
publicly exercises the functions of a judge
of marriages and, in that capacity,
registered the act in the Civil Register.
Art. 1555. The marriage of a person not of
marriageable age, if not authorized by his
or her legal representative, may only be
annulled if the action is brought within one
hundred and eighty days, at the initiative of
the incapable person, when his or her
incapacity ceases, of his or her legal
representatives or of his or h.er necessary
heirs.
§ 1. The time period established in this
article shall be counted from the day on
which the incapacity ceased, in the first
case; from the marriage, in the second; and
in the third, from the death of the incapable
person.
§2. The marriage shall not be annulled if the
legal representatives of the incapable
person were present at its celebration or in
any other way expressed their approval.
Art. 1556. A marriage may be annulled for
defect of consent if, when one of the parties
consented to the marriage, he or she was in
essential error as to the person of the other
party.
Art.1557. The following are considered to
be essential errors as to the person of the
other spouse:
1- error as to his or her identity, honor or
good reputation, where the error is such that
subsequent knowledge of it makes life
together unbearable for the spouse in error;
II - ignorance of a crime prior to the
marriage that, by its nature, makes conjugal
life unbearable;
 Art. 1.558-1.560 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
III - ignorance, prior to the marriage, of an
irremediable physical defect, or a serious
illness, transmissible by contagion or
heredity, capable of putting the health of
the other spouse or his or her descendents at
risk;
IV - ignorance, prior to the marriage, of a
serious mental illness that. by its nature,
makes life together unbearable to the
spouse in error.
Art. 1558. A marriage is voidable for
coercion, when the consent of one or both
of the spouses was obtained by justified
fear of a considerable and imminent harm
to the life, health or honor of the spouse or
his or her family members.
Art. 1559. Only the spouse who was in
error or who suffered coercion may demand
annulment of the marriage; but
cohabitation with knowledge of the defect
validates the marriage, except in the cases
contemplated iri items III and IV of art.
1557.
Art. 1560. The time period for bringing an
action for annulment of the marriage.
counting from the date of its solemnization,
is:
I - one hundred and eighty days, in the case
of item IV of art. 1550;
II - two years, if the authority that
celebrated the marriage lacked power to do
so;
ill - three years, in the case of items I and
IV of art. 1557;
IV - four years, where there is .coercion.
§I. The right to annul the marriage of
persons of less than sixteen years of age is
extinguished in one hundred and eighty
days, counted from the day on which he or
she attains that age, for the minor, and from
the date of the marriage, for his or her legal
representatives and ascendants.
338
III - a ignorancia, anterior ao casamen-
to, de defeito fisico irremedi<ivel, ou de
molestia grave e transmissfvel, pelo
contagio ou heranr;:a, capaz de por em
risco a saude do outro conjuge ou de sua
descendencia;
IV - a ignoriincia, anterior ao .Casamen-
to, de doem;:a mental grave que, par sua
natureza, tome insuportavel a vida em
comum ao conjuge enganado.
Art.1.558. Eanulavel o casamento em
virtude de coar;:ao, quando o consenti-
mento de um ou de anibos os conjuges
houver sido captado mediante fundado
temor de mal consideravel e iminentc
para a vida, a sm:ide e a honra, sua ou de
seus familiares.
Art. 1.559. Somente o conjuge que in-
cidiu em erro, ou sofreu coar;:ao. pode
demandar a anular;:iio do casamento;
mas a coabitar;:ao, havendo ciencia do
vfcio, validao ato, ressalvadas as hipo-
teses dos incisos III e IV do art. 1.557.
Art.1.560. 0 prazo para ser intentada a
ar;:ao de anular;:iio do casamento, a con-
tar da data da celebrar;:iio, e de:
I - cento e oitenta dias, no caso do inciso
IV do art. 1.550;
II - dois anos, se incompetente a autori-
dade celebrante;
III - tres anos, nos casos dos incisos I a
IV do art. 1.557;
IV - quatro anos, se houver coar;:ao.
§ 1° Extingue-se, em cento e oitenta
dias. o direito de anular o casamento
dos menores de dezesseis anos, contado
o prazo para o menor do dia em quc per-
fei essa idade; e da data do casamento,
para seus representantes legais ou as-
cendentes.
339 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
§ 2° Na hip6tese do inciso V do art.
1.550, o prazo para anulai;:ao do casa-
mento e de cento e oitenta dias, a partir
da data em que o mandante tiver conhe-
cimento da cclebra~iio.
Art.1.561. Embora anulavel ou mesmo
nulo, se contrafdo de boa-fe por ambos
os conjuges, o casamenlo, em relar,:ao a
estes como aos filhos, produz todos os
efeitos ate o dia da sentenr;:a anulatoria
§ I 0 Se um dos conjuges estava de boa-
fe ao celebrar o casamento. os seus efei-
tos civis so a ele e aos filhos aproveita-
rao.
§ 2° Se ambos os cfmjuges estavam de
ma-fe ao celebrar o casamento, os seus
efeitos civis so aos filhos aproveitariio.
Art. 1.562. Antes de mover a m;:iio de
nulidade do casamento, a de anula\:iio, a
de separm,;ao judicial, a de divorcio di-
relo ou a de dissolu~ao de uniao estavel,
podera requerer a parre, comprovando
sua necessidade, a separm;;ao de corpos.
que seni concedida pelo juiz com a pos-
sfvel brevidade.
Art. 1.563. A sentenr;:a que decretar a
nul idade do casamento retroagira adata
da sua celebrar;ao, sem prejudicar a
aquisir;iio de direitos, a tftulo oneroso,
por terceiros de boa-fe, nem a resultan-
te de sehte111;;a transitada em julgado.
Art. 1.564. Quando o casamento for
anulado por culpa de um dos conjuges,
este incorrera:
I - na perda de todas as vantagens havi-
das do conjuge inocente;
II - na obrigar;:ao de cumprir as promes-
sas que !he fez no contrato antenupcial.
Art. J.561-1.564
§2. In the case contemplated in item V of
article 1550, the time period for annulment
of the marriage is one hundred and eighty
days, from the date on which the mandator
became aware of the solemnization of the
marriage.
Art. 1561. Although voidable or even null,
if the marriage was contracted in good faith
by both spouses, it produces all its effects
with respect to both them and their
children, until the day of the judgment that
annuls it.
§I. If one of the spouses celebrated the
marriage in good faith, its civil effects
benefit only that spouse and the children.
§2. If both the spouses celebrated the
marriage in bad faith, its civil effects
benefit only the children.
Art. 1562. Before bringing an action for a
declaration of nullity of the marriage, or for
annulment, judicial separation, direct
divorce or dissolution of a stable union, the
party may request, upon proving necessity,
separation as to bed and board, which shall
be granted by the judge as quickly as
possible.
Art. 1563. The judgment that declares the
nullity of a marriage is retroactive to the
date of its solemnization, without prejudice
to rights acquired by onerous title by third
parties in good faith or those resulting from
a judgment that has become final.
Art. 1564. When the marriage is annulled
by reason of the fault of one of the spouses,
he or she shall incur:
I - the loss of all advantages had from the
innocent spouse;
II - the obligation to fulfill the promises
that he or she made to the innocent spouse
in t11e prenuptial agreement.
Art. 1.565- 1.568 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter IX - The Effects
of Marriage
Art. 1565. Through marriage, a man and a
woman mutually assume the condition of
consorts and companions and together are
responsible for family duties.
§ 1. Either spouse may, if he or she wishes,
add the surname of the other spouse to his
or her own.
§2. Family planning is a matter of free
choice for the couple, and the State has the
duty to provide educational and financial
resources for the exercise of that right,
prohibiting any type of coercion by private
or public institutions.
Art.1566. Both spouses have the following
duties:
I - reciprocal fidelity;
II - shared life, in the conjugal domicile;
III - mutual aid;
IV - maintenance, custody and education
of their children;
V - mutual respect and consideration.
Art. 1567. The conjugal society shall be
directed by the husband. and the wife in
collaboration, always in the interest of the
couple and their children.
Sole paragraph. In the case of controversy,
either of the spouses may have recourse to
a judge, who will decide in view of those
interests.
Art. 1568. The spouses are obligated to
contribute, in proportion to their property
and their earnings from work, to the
maintenance of the family and the
education of the children, regardless of
their matrimonial property regime.
340
Capitulo IX - Da Eficacia do
Casamento
Art. 1.565. Pelo casamento, homem e
mulher assumem mutuamente a condi-
i;:ao de consortes, companheiros e res-
ponsaveis pelos encargos da familia.
§ I 0 Qualquer dos nubentes, querendo,
podera acrescer ao seu o sobrenome do
outro.
§ 2° 0 planejamento familiar ede livre
decisao do casal, competindo ao Estado
propiciar recursos educacionais e fi-
nanceiros para o exercfcio desse direito,
vcdado qualquer tipo de coen;:ao por
parte de instituii;:oes privadas ou publi-
cas.
Art. 1.566. Sao deveres de ambos os
conjuges;
I - fidelidade recfproca;
II - vida em comum, no domicflio con-
jugal;
III - mutua assistencia;
IV - sustento, guarda e educa\:ao dos fi-
lhos;
V - respeito e considera~ao mutuos.
Art. 1.567. A direi;:ao da sociedade
conjugal sera exercida, em colabora-
\:ao, pelo marido e pela mulher, sempre
no interesse do casal e dos filhos.
Paragrafo unico. Havendo divergencia,
qualquer dos conjuges podera recorrer
ao juiz, que decidira tendo em conside-
ra\:ao aqueles interesses.
Art. 1.568. Os conjuges sao obrigados
a concorrer, na propor9ao de seus hens
e dos rendimentos do trabalho, para o
sustento da famflia e a educa9ao dos fi-
lhos, qualquer que seja o regime patri-
monial.
341 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.569. 0 domicflio do casal seni
escolhido por ambos os conjuges, mas
um e outro podem ausentar-se do domi-
cilio conjugal para atender a encargos
pt'.iblicos, ao exercfcio de sua profissao,
ou a interesses particulares rclevantes.
Art.1.570. Se qualquer dos conjuges
cstiver em lugar remoto ou nao subido,
encarcerado por mais de ccnto e oitenta
dias, interditado judicialmente ou pri-
vado. episodicamente, de conscicncia,
em virtude de enfermidade ou de aci-
dente, o outro exercera com exclusivi-
dade a dire~ao da famflia, cabendo-lhe
a administrar;ao dos bens.
Capitulo X - Da Dissolu9iio da
Sociedade e do vincuio Conjugal
Art. 1.571. A sociedade conjugal ter-
mina:
I - pela morte de um dos conjugcs;
II - pela nulidade ou anula;;ao do casa-
mento;
Ill - pcla separa9ao judicial:
IV - pelo div6rcio.
§ I 0 casamento valido s6 se dissolve
0 §I. A valid marriage is dissolved only by
pela morte de um dos conjuges ou pelo
div6rcio, aplicando-se a presun9ao es-
tabelecida neste C6digo quanta ao au-
sente.
§ 2° Dissolvido o casamento pelo div6r-
cio direto ou por conversao, o c6njuge
podera mantcro nome de casado; salvo,
no segundo caso. dispondo em contra-
rio a sentenr;a de separar;ao judicial.
Art. 1.572. Qualquer dos conjuges po-
dera propor a ai;ao de separar;ao judi-
cial, imputando ao outro qualquer ato
que importe grave violar;ao dos deveres
do casamento e tome insuportavel a
vida em comum.
Art. 1.569-1.572
Art. 1569. The couple's domicile shall be
chosen by both the spouses, but one of them
may absent himself from the conjugal
domicile to attend to public office, the
exercise of his profession or to important
private interests.
Art. 1570. If either of the spouses is in a
remote or unknown place, imprisoned for
more than one hundred and eighty days,
judicially interdicted or episodically
deprived of consciousness by reason of
illness or accident, the other spouse shall
alone direct the family, and shall have the
administration of the property.
Chapter X - Dissolution of Conjugal
Society and Conjugal Bonds
Art. 1571. Conjugal society ends:
I - with the death of one of the spouses;
II - with the nullity or annulment of the
marriage;
Ill - by judicial separation;
IV - by divorce.
the death of one of the spouses or by
divorce, and the presumption established in
this Code as to absentees shall apply.
§2. Upon dissolution of the marriage by
direct divorce or by conversion, a spouse
may maintain his or her married name
unless, in the second case, the judgment of
judicial separation provides otherwise.
Art. 1572. Either of the spouses may bring
an action for judicial separation, imputing
to the other any act that results in a serious
violation of the duties of marriage and that
makes life together unbearable.
Art. 1.573-1.574 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ l. Judicial separation may also be applied
for if one of the spouses proves that there
has been a rupture in their life together for
more than one year and that there is no
possibility of reestablishing life together.
§2. A spouse may also request judicial
separation when the other is affected with a
serious mental illness that manifested itself
after the marriage and that makes it
impossible,to continue living together,
provided that, after a period of two years, it
has been acknowledged that a cure for the
illness is improbable.
§3. In the case of paragraph 2, there shall
revert to the infirm spouse, who did not
request judicial separation, the remainder
of the property that he or she took into the
marriage and, if the matrimonial property
regime permits it, one half of the property
acquired while the conjugal society lasted.
Art. 1573. The following reasons go to
establish that life together is impossible:
I - adultery;
II - attempted killing;
III - serious mistreatment or injury;
IV - voluntary abandonment of the
conjugal home, continuously for one year;
V - sentence of guilty for an infamous
crime;
VI - dishonorable conduct.
Sole paragraph. The judge may consider
other facts that make life together
impossible.
Art. 1574. Judicial separation by mutual
consent of the spouses shall be granted if
they have been married for more than one
year and declare their c.onsent before the
judge, who shall duly homologate their
agreement.
342
§ J0 A separa1;ao judicial pode tambem
ser pedida se um dos conjugcs provar
ruptura da vida em comum ha mais de
um ano e a impossibilidade de sua re·
constituii;:ao.
§ 2° 0 conjuge pode ainda pedir a sepa-
rai;:ao judicial quando o outro estiver
acometido de doen1ra mental grave, ma·
nifestada ap6s o casamento, que tome
impossfvel a continua1;ao da vida em
comum, desde que, ap6s uma' dura1rao
de dois anos, a enfermidade tcilha sido
reconhecida de cura improvavel.
§ 3° No caso do panigrafo 2°, revcrteriio
ao conjuge enfermo. que nilo houver
pedido a separa~ao judicial, os rema-
nescentcs dos bens que levou para o ca-
samento, e se o regime dos bens adota-
do o permitir, a meac;ao dos adquiridos
na constancia da sociedade conjugal.
Art. 1.573. Podem caracterizar a im-
possibilidade da comunhao de vida a
ocorrencia de algum dos seguintes mo-
tivos:
I - adulterio;
II - tentativa de morte;
III - sevfcia ou injuria grave;
IV - abandono voluntario do Jar conju-
gal, durante um ano continuo;
V - condena1;ao por crime infamante;
VI - conduta desonrosa.
Panigrafo unico. 0 juiz podera conside-
rar outros fatos que tomem evidente a
impossibilidade da vida em comum.
Art. 1.574. Dar-se-a a separac;ao judi-
cial por mutuo consentimento dos con-
juges se forem casados por mais de um
ano e o manifestarem perante o juiz,
sendo por ele devidamente homologada
aconven\:ao.
343 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
Paragrafo lmico. 0 juiz pode recusar a
homologa~iio e nao decretar a separa-
i;:ao judicial se apurar que a conven~ao
nao preserva suficientemente os inte-
resses dos filhos ou de um dos conju-
ges.
Art.1.575. A sentem;:a de separa9ao ju-
dicial importa a separa~ao de corpos ea
partilha de bens.
Panigrafo unico. A partilha de bens po-
denl ser feita mediante proposta dos
COnjuges e homoJogada pefo juiz OU por
este decidida.
Art. 1.576. A separac;ao judicial poe
termo aos deveres de coabita~ao e fide-
lidade redproca e ao regime de bens.
Panigrafo tlnico. 0 procedimento judi-
cial da separa1;ao cabera somente aos
conjuges. e, no caso de incapacidade,
seriio representados pelo curador, pelo
ascendente ou pelo irmao.
Art. 1.577. Seja qua! for a causa da se-
para~iio judicial e o modo como esta se
fai;a, e lfcito aos conjuges restabelecer,
a todo tempo, a sociedade conjugal, por
ato regular em jufzo.
Paragrafo unico. A reconcilia~ao em
nada prejudicara o direito de terceiros,
adquirido antes e durante o estado de
separado, seja qua! for o regime de
bens.
Art.1.578. 0 conjuge declarado culpa-
do na ai;:ao de separai;:ao judicial perde
o direito de usar o sobrenome do outro,
desde que expressamente requerido
pelo conjuge inocente e se a altera1;ao
niio acarretar:
I - evidente prejuizo para a sua identifi-
cai;:iio;
Art. 1.575-1.578
Sole paragraph. The judge may refuse
homologation and not grant judicial
separation if he determines that the
agreement does not sufficiently preserve
the interests of the children or of one of the
spouses.
Art. 1575. The judgment granting judicial
separation results in separation as to bed
and board and the partition of property.
Sole paragraph. The partition of property
may be proposed by the spouses and
homologated by the judge, or may be
decided by the judge.
Art. 1576. Judicial separation puts an end
to the duties of cohabitation and reciprocal
fidelity and to the matrimonial property
regime.
Sole paragraph. The procedure for judicial
separation may be initiated only by the
spouses and, in cases of incapacity, they
shall be represented by a curator, an
ascendant or a brother or sister.
Art. 1577. Regardless of the cause of
judicial separation and the manner in which
it is done, it is licit for the spouses to
re-establish conjugal society at any time, by
means of a proper instrument submitted to
the judge.
Sole paragraph. Reconciliation in no way
prejudices the rights of third parties
acquired before or during the separation,
regardless of the matrimonial property
regime.
Art. 1578. A spouse who is declared to be
at fault in the action for judicial separation
lose.s the right to use the other spouse's
surname, provided the innocent spouse
expressly so requests and the change does
not bring about:
I- obvious difficulty in the identification of
the spouse;
Art. 1.579-1.582 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - a clear distinction between his or her
family name and that of the children
resulting from the dissolved union;
III - serious injury, acknowledged in the
judicial decision.
§ 1. In an action for judicial separation, the
innocent spouse may at any time waive his
or her right to use the surname of the other.
§2. In all other cases, the spouses may opt
to retain their married name.
Art. 1579. Divorce does not modify the
parents' rights and duties in relation to their
children.
Sole paragraph. A new marriage by either
parent, or of both, shall not restrict the
rights and. duties contemplated in this
article.
Art. 1580. One year after the judgment that
granted judicial separation, or the decision
that granted a preliminary request for
separation as to bed and board, has become
final, either of the parties may request that
it be converted into a divorce.
§ l. Conversion of judicial separation into
divorce of the spouses shall be decreed by
judgment, which shall make no reference to
the cause of the divorce.
§2. Divorce may be requested by one or
both spouses where separation in fact for
more than two years is proved.
Art.1581. Divorce may be granted without
a prior partition of property.
Art. 1582. Divorce may be requested only
by the spouses.
Sole paragraph. If a spouse is incapable of
bringing the action or contesting it, the
curator, an ascendant or a brother or sister
may do so.
344
II - manifesta distini;:ao entre o seu
nome de famflia e o dos filhos havldos
da unilio dissolvida;
III - dano grave reconhecido na decislio
judicial.
§ J0 0 conjuge inocente na ai;:iio de se-
parai;:lio judicial podera renunciar, a
qualquer momento, ao dircito de usar o
sobrenomc do outro.
§ 2° Nos demais casos cabera a opl(iiO
pela conservm;:iio do nome de casado.
Art. 1.579. 0 div6rcio nlio modificara
os direitos e devercs dos pais em rela-
i;:ao aos filhos.
Paragrafo iinico. Novo casamento de
qualquer dos pais, ou de ambos, nail po-
dera importar rcstrii;:iies aos dircitos e
deveres previstos neste artigo.
Art. 1.580. Decorrido um ano do triin-
sito em julgado da senteni;:a que houver
decretado a separai;:lio judicial, ou da
decisao concessiva da medida cautelar
de separaylio de corpos, qualquer das
partes podera requerer sua conversao
em div6rcio.
§ I 0 A conversao em div6rcio da sepa-
rayao judicial dos conjuges sera decre-
tada por sentenya, da qua! nlio constan1
referenda acausa que a determinou.
§ 2° 0 div6rcio poderii ser requerido,
por um ou por ambos os conjuges, no
caso de comprovada separm,,:lio de fato
por mais de dois anos.
Art. 1.581. 0 div6rcio pode ser conce-
dido sem que haja previa partilha de
hens.
Art. 1.582. 0 pedido de div6rcio so-
mente competira aos conjuges.
Paragrafo iinico. Seo conjuge for inca-
paz para propor a m;:1io ou defender-Se,
poderii faze-Io o curador, o ascendente
ouo irmao.
345 CODIGO CIVIL BILINOUE
Capitulo XI- Da Prote~o da
Pessoa dos Filhos
Art. 1.583. No caso de dissoluylio da
sodedade ou do vfnculo conjugal pela
separai;:ao judicial por miituo consenti-
mento ou pelo div6rcio direto consen-
sual, observar-se-ii o que os c6njuges
acordarem sobre a guarda dos filhos.
Art.1.584. Decretada a separac;ao judi-
cial ou o div6rcio, sem que hajaentre as
partes acordo quanto a guarda dos fi-
lhos, seni ela atribuida a quern revelar
melhores condii,;1ies para exerce-la.
Paragrafo iinico. Verificando que os fi-
lhos n1io devem permanecer sob a guar-
d a do pai ou da mae, o juiz deferiraa sua
guarda apessoa que revele compatibili-
dade com a natureza da medida, de pre-
ferencia Ievando em conta o grau de pa-
rentesco e relai;;lio de afinidade e afoti-
vidade, de acordo com o disposto na lei
especffica.
Art.1.585. Em sede de medidacautelar
de separai;;iio de corpos, apl ica-se quan-
ta aguarda dos filhos as disposic;oes do
artigo antecedente.
Art. 1.586. Havendo motivos graves,
podera o juiz, em qualquer caso, a hem
dos filhos, regular de maneira diferente
da estabelecida nos artigos anteceden-
tes a situa1:ao deles para com os pais.
Art. 1.587. No caso de invalidade do
casamento, havendo filhos comuns, ob-
servar-se-a o disposto nos arts. 1.584 e
1.586.
Art. 1.583-1.587
Chapter XI - Protection of the Persons
of Children
Art. 1583. In dissolution of conjugal
society or bonds by reason of judicial
separation by mutual consent or by direct
consensual divorce, the agreement of the
spouses as to the custody of their children
shall be observed.
Art. 1584. When judicial separation or
divorce is decreed without agreement
between the parties as to the custody of
their children, custody shall be assigned to
the party who is shown to have the best
conditions to exercise it.
Sole paragraph. If the judge finds that the
children should not remain in the custody of
either the father or the mother, he shall
grant custody to a person who is shown to
be suitable for such a measure, given its
nature, preferably taking into account the
degree of relationship and the bonds of
affinity and affection between the person
and the children, in accordance with the
provisions of specific legislation.
Art. 1585. In a preliminary or
precautionary proceeding for separation as
to bed and board, the provisions of the
preceding article shall apply with respect to
the custody of the children.
Art. 1586. In any case where there is
serious cause, the judge may, for the good
of the children, regulate their situation with
respect to their parents in a manner
different from that established in the
preceding articles.
Art. 1587. Where there are common
children of an invalid marriage, the
provisions of arts. 1584 and 1586 shall
apply.
Art. 1.588-1.595 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1588. A father or a mother who
contracts a new marriage does not lose the
right to have the children in his or her
company. The children may be removed
only by judicial warrant, upon proof that
they are not being treated appropriately.
Art.1589. A father or mother who does not
have custody of the children may visit them
and have them in his or her company,
according to agreement with the other
spouse or the judge's decision, and to
monitor their maintenance and education.
Art. 1590. The provisions regarding
custody and payment of support to minor
children extend to incapable children who
have reached the age of majority.
Subtitle II - The Degrees
of Kinship
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 1591. Persons who descend one from
the other are relatives in the direct line.
Art. 1592. Persons who originate in a
common stock, without descending one
from the other, are relatives in the collateral
or transversal line, to the fourth degree.
Art. 1593. Kinship is natural or civil,
depending on whether it results from
consanguinity or from another source.
Art. 1594. In the direct line, degrees of
kinship are counted by the number of
generations; and so also in the collateral
line, counting the number of generations up
from one relative to the common ancestor
and then down until reaching the other
relative.
Art. 1595. Each spouse or companion is
related by affinity to the relatives of the
other.
346
Art. 1.588. 0 pai cm a mac que contrair
novas nl1pcias nao perde o dircito de rer
consigo os filhos, que so !he poclerao
ser retirados por mandado judicial. pro-
vado que nao sao tratados conveniente-
mente.
Art. 1.589. 0 pai ou a mac, em cuja
guarda nao estejam os filhos. podera vi-
sita-los e te-los em sua companhia, se-
gundo o que acordarcom o outro c6nju-
ge, ou for fixado pelo juiz. bem como
fiscal izar sua manuten~ao e cducm;ao.
Art. 1.590. As disposi~oes rclativas a
guarda e prcsta~iio de alimcntos aos fi-
lhos menores estendem-se aos maiores
incapazes.
Subtitulo II - Das Rela~iies de
Pareutesco
Capitulo I - Disposi~iies Gerais
Art. l.591. Sao parentes cm l inha reta
as pessoas que estao umas para com as
outras na rela~ao de ascendentes e de-
scendentes.
Art. 1.592. Sao parentes em Jinha cola-
teral ou transversal, ale o quarto grau,
as pessoas provenientes de um so tron-
co, sem descenderem uma da outra.
Art. 1.593. 0 parentesco e natural OU
civil, eonforme resulte de consangiiini-
dade ou outra origem.
Art. 1.594. Contam-se, na linha reta, os
graus de parentesco pelo numero de ge-
rai;oes, e, na colateral, tambem pelo nu-
mero delas, subindo de um dos parentes
ate ao ascendente comum, e descendo
ate encontrar o outro parente.
Art. 1.595. Cada c6njuge ou compa-
nheiro e aliado aos parentes do outro
pelo vfnculo da afinidade.
347 CODIGO CIVIL B!LINGOE
§ 1° O parentesco por afinidacle limita-
se aos aseendentes, aos descendentes e
aos irmaos do conjuge ou companheiro.
§ 2" Na linha reta, a afinidade nao se ex-
tingue com a dissolui;ao do casamento
ou da uniaci estavel.
Capitulo II - Da Filia~o
Art.1.596. Os filhos, havidos ou niio da
rela9ao de easamento, ou por ado9ao,
terao os mesmos direitos e qualifica-
~oes, proibidas quaisquer designm;oes
discriminat6rias relativas afiliai;ao.
Art. 1.597. Presumem-se concebidos
na constancia do casamento os filhos:
I - nascidos cento e oitenta dias, pelo
menos, depois de estabelecida a convi-
vencia conjugal;
II - nascidos nos trezentos dias sub-
sequentes a dissolui;ao da sociedade
conjugal, por morte, separa9ao judicial,
nulidade e artula9ao do casamento;
III - havidos por fccundai,;ao artificial
homologa, mesmo que falecido o mari-
do;
IV - havidos, a qualquer tempo, quando
se tratar de embri6es excedentiirios, de-
correntes de concep!(UO artificial hom6-
loga;
V - havidos por insemina9ao artificial
heterologa, desde que tenha previa au-
toriza1;ao do marido.
Art. 1.598. Salvo prova em contriirio,
se, antes de decorrido o prazo previsto
no inciso II do art. 1.523, a mulhercon-
trair novas nupeias e lhe nascer algum
filho, este se presume do primeiro ma-
rido, se nascido dentro dos trezentos
dias a eontar da data do falecimento
deste e, do segundo, se o nascimento
ocorrer apos esse perfodo e ja decorrido
o prazo a que se refere o ineiso I do art.
1597.
Art. J.596- l.598
§ 1. Kinship by affinity is limited to the
ascendants, descendents and the brothers
and sisters of the spouse or companion.
§2. Affinity in the direct line is not
extinguished with the dissolution of the
marriage or stable union.
Chapter II - Filiation
Art. 1596. Children, whether or not they
are had within a married relationship, or by
adoption, have the same rights and
qualities, and any and all discriminatory
designations with respect to filiation are
prohibited.
Art. 1597. Children are presumed to have
been conceived during marriage .if:
I - they are born at least one hundred and
eighty days after conjugal cohabitation is
established;
II - they are born within the three hundred
days following dissolution of conjugal
society by reason of death, judicial
separation, nullity or annulment of the
marriage;
III - they are had by means of homologous
artificial fertilization, even if the husband
has died;
IV - they are had at any time, in the case of
excess embryos resulting from
homologous artificial conception;
V - they are had by means of heterologous
artificial insemination, provided the
husband has given prior authorization.
Art. 1598. Unless there is proof to the
contrary, if a woman contracts a new
marriage prior to the expiry of the period of
time contemplated in item II of art. 1523
and a child is born to her, it shall be
presumed to be the first husband's if born
within the three hundred days subsequent to
the date of his death and the second
husband's if the birth occurs after that time
period and after expiry of the time period
referred to in item I of art. 1597.
 Art. 1.599-1.606 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1599. Proof of the spouse's impotence
at the time of conception overcomes the
presumption of paternity.
Art. 1600. The wife's adultery, even if
confessed, is not sufficient to overcome the
legal presumption of paternity. · dir a presun9ao legal da paternidade.
Art. 1601. The husband has the. right to
contest the paternity of children born of his
wife, and the action is not subject to
prescription.
Sole paragraph. Once filiation is contested,
the heirs of the contesting party have the
right to pursue the action.
Art. 1602. Confession by the mother is not
sufficient to exclude paternity.
Art. 1603. Filiation is proved by a
certificate of the record of the birth
registered ih the Civil Register.
Art. 1604. No one may claim a state
contrary to that whicli results from tlie
registration of birth, unless tlie register is
woved to be in error or false.
Art.1605. In tlie absence of registration, or
in tlie case of defective registration,
filiation may be prnved by any means
admissible by Jaw:
I - wlien tliere is a beginning of written
proof, made by tlie parents, together or
separately;
II - wlien there are compelling
presumptions resulting from facto; already
certain. . · mento, reconhecido por um dos conju-
Art. 1606. Tlie action for proof of filiation
belongs to tlie cliild, while lie lives, and
passes to liis lieirs, if he dies wliile a minor
or incapable.
Sole paragrapli. If tlie action is begun by tlie
cliild, the heirs may continue it, unless tlie
proceeding is extinguislied.
348
Art. 1.599. A prova da impotencia do
conjuge para gerar, aepoca da concep-
9ao, Hide a presun\:ao da patemidade.
Art. 1.600. Nao basta o adulterio da
mulher, ainda que confessado, para ili-
Art.1.601. Cabe ao marido o direito de
contestar a paternidade dos filhos· nas-
cidos de sua mulher, sendo ta! ai;ao im-
prescrit!vel.
Paragrafo unico. Contestada a filirn;:ao,
os herdeiros do impugnante tem direito
de prosseguir na ai;ao.
Art. 1.602. Nao basta a confissao ma-
terna para excluir a paternidade.
Art. 1.603. A filia9ao prova-se pela
certidao do termo de nascimento regis-
trada no Registro Civil.
Art. 1.604. Ninguem pode vindicar es-
tado contriirio ao que resulta do registro
de nascimento, salvo provando-se erro
ou falsidade do registro.
Art. 1.605. Na falta, ou defeito, doter-
mo de nascimento, podera provar-se a
filia\:ao por qualquer modo admissfvel
em direito:
I - quando houver come90 de prova por
escrito, proveniente dos pais, conjunta
ou separadamente;
II - quando existirem veementes pre-
sun9iies resultantes de fatos ja certos.
Art. 1.606. A a~ao de prova de filia\:ao
compete ao filho; enquanto viver, pas-
sando aos herdeiros, se ele morrer me-
nor ou incapaz.
Paragrafo tlnico. Se iniciada a aifao pelo
filho, os herdeiros poderao continua-la,
salvo se julgado extinto o processo.
349 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
Capitulo Ill - Do Rcconhecimento
dosFilhos
Art. 1.607. 0 filho havido fora do casa-
rnento pode scr reconhecido pelos pais,
conjuntaou separadamcntc.
Art. 1.608. Quando a materuidade
constar do termo do nascimento do fi-
lho, a mae so podera contestii-la, pro-
vando a falsidade do termo, ou das de-
clarm;oes nele contidas.
Art. 1.609. 0 reconhecimento dos fi-
lhos havidos fora do casamento e irre-
vogavel e sera feito:
I - no registro do nascimento;
II por escritura publica ou escrito par-
ticular, a ser arquivado em cartorio;
III - por testamento, ainda que inciden-
talmente manifestado;
IV - por manifesta;rao direta e expressa
perante o juiz, ainda que o reconheci~
me1ito nao haja sido o objeto iinico e
principal do ato que o contem.
Pariigrafo tlnico. 0 reconhecimento
pode preceder o nascimento do. filho ou
ser posterior ao seu falecimento, se ele
deixar descendentes.
Art. 1.610. 0 reconhecimento nao
pode ser revogado, nem mesmo quando
feito em testamento.
Art. 1.611. 0 filho havido fora do casa-
ges, nao podera rcsidir no lar conjugal
sem o consentimento do outro.
Art. 1.612. 0 filho reconhecido, en-
quanto menor, ficara sob a guarda do
genitor que o reconheceu, e, se ambos o
reconheceram e nao houver acordo, sob
a de quern melhor atender aos interes-
ses do menor.
Art. 1.607-1.612
Chapter III - Acknowledgment of
Children
Art. 1607. A cliild had outside marriage
may be acknowledged by the parents, either
together or separately.
Art. 1608. Wlien the cliild's maternity is
stated in the record of the child's birth, the
mother may only contest it by provingtliat
tlie. record, or tlie declarations contained in
it, is false.
Art. 1609. Acknowledgment of children
liad outside the marriage is irrevocable and
is made:
I - in tlie record of the registration of the
birth;
II - by public or private writing, to be filed
in a notarial office;
III - by testament, even if expressed
incidentally;
IV - by di.rect and express declaration
before a judge, even if acknowledgment
was not the sole and principal purpose of
the act whicli contains tlie declaration.
Sole paragrapli. Acknowledgment may
precede the birth of the child or be posterior
to its death, if tlie cliild leaves descendents.
Art. 1610. Acknowledgment may not be
revoked, even wlien it is made in a
testament.
Art. 1611. A child wlio is Jiad outside
marriage, and is acknowledged by one of
the spouses, may not reside in tlie conjugal
home without tlie consent of the other.
Art.1612. An acknowledged cliild, wliile a
minor, sliall remain in tlie custody of the
parent who acknowledged it and, if both
liave acknowledged tlie cliild and tliere is
no agreement between them, tlie cliild sliall
remain in tlie custody of the parent wlio best
serves the interests of tlie minor.
Art. I. 613- l. 620 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1613. Conditions and terms included
in the act of acknowledgment of the child
are ineffective.
Art. 1614. An adult child may not be
acknowledged without his consent, and a
minor child may contest acknowledgment,
within the four years following attainment
of the age of majority or his emancipation.
Art.16l5. Any person who has just interest
may contest an action of investigation into
paternity or maternity.
Art. 1616. The judgment that grants the
action of investigation shall produce the
same effects as acknowledgment; but it
may order that the child be raised and
educated out of the company of the parents
or of the person who contested the child's
filiation. · qualidade.
Art. 1617. Maternal or paternal filiation
may result from a marriage that is declared
null, even if the conditions for putative
marriage have not be met.
Chapter IV - Adoption
Art. 1618. Only a person of more than
eighteen years of age may adopt.
Sole paragraph. Adoption by both spouses
or companions may be formalized,
provided that one of them has completed
eighteen years of age and the stability of the
family is proved.
Art. 1619. The adopter must be at least
sixteen years olcler than the adoptee.
Art. 1620. A tutor or curator may not adopt
his pupil or ward until he has rendered the
accouµts of his administration and settled
any debt.
350
Art.1.613. Sao ineficazes a condii;ao e
o termo apostos ao ato de reconheci-
mento do filho.
Art. 1.614. 0 filho maior niio pode ser
reconhecido sern o seu consentimento,
e o menor pode irnpugnar o reconhcci-
mento, nos quatro anos que se seguirem
a a
rnaioridade, OU ernancipar;ao.
Art. 1.615. Qualquer pessoa, que justo
interesse tenha, pode contestar a ai,:ao
de investiga~o de patemidade, ou rna-
ternidade.
Art. 1.616. A sentern,:a que julgar pro-
cedente a ai;:iio de investigai;:iio produzi-
ra os mesrnos efeitos do reconhecimen-
to; mas podera ordenar que o filho se
crie e eduque fora da companhia dos
pais ou daquele que lhe contestou essa
Art.1.617. A filiai;iio matemaou pater-
na pode resultar de casarnento declara-
do nulo, ai.nda mesmo sem as condi<;:iies
do putativo.
Capitulo IV - Da A.do~o
Art.1.618. S6 a pessoa maior de dezoi-
to anos pode adotar.
Paragrafo unico. A adoi;:ao por amhos
os conjuges ou companheiros podera
ser formalizada, desde que um deles te-
nha completado dezoito anos de idade,
comprovada a estabilidade da familia.
Art. 1.619. 0 adotante ha de ser pelo
menos dezesseis anos mais velho que o
adotado.
Art.1.620. Enquanto niio der contas de
sua administrai;iio e nao saldar o dehito,
niio podera o tutor ou o curador adotar o
pupilo ou o curatelado.
C6DIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
351
Art. 1.621. A ado\;iiO depende de con-
sen ti men to dos pais ou dos repre-
sentantes legais, de quern se deseja ado-
tar, e da concordiincia deste, se contar
mais de doze anos.
§ 1° O consentimento sera dispensado
em relai;;iio acriani,:a ou adolescente cu-
jos pais sejam desconhecidos ou te-
nham sido destitufdos do poder fami-
liar.
§ 2° 0 consentimento previsto no caput
e revogavel ate a puhlica1;ao da senten-
t,:a constitutiva da adrn;iio.
Art. 1.622. Ninguem pode ser adotado
por duas pessoas, salvo se forem mari-
do e mulher, ou se viverem em uniiio
estavel.
Paragrafo unico. Os divorciados e.os
judicial)Uente separados poderiio ado-
tar conjuntamente, contanto que acor-
dem sohre a guarda e o regime de visi-
tas, e desde que o estagio de conviven-
cia tenha sido iniciado na constiincia da
sociedade conjugal.
Art. 1.623. A adoi;;iio obedecera a pro-
cesso judicial, ohservados os requisitos
estahelecidos neste C6digo.
Paragrafo unico. A adoi;ao de maiores
de dezoito anos dependera, igualmente,
da assistencia efetivado Poder Publico
e de sentem;:a constitutiva.
Art. 1.624. Nao ha necessidade do con-
sentimento do representante legal do
rnenor, se provado que se trata de infan-
te exposto, ou de menor cujos pais se-
jam desconhecidos, estejam desapare"
cidos, ou tenham sido destitufdos do
poder familiar, sem nomeairao de tutor;
ou de 6rffio niio reclamado por qualquer
parente, por mais de um ano.
Art. 1.621-1.624
Art. 1621. Adoption depends on the
consent of the parents or legal
representatives of the person who is to be
adopted, and on his agreement, if he is of
more than twelve years of age.
§ 1. Consent shall be waived with respect to
a child or adolescent whose parents are
unknown or who have been deprived of
family authority.
§2. The consent contemplated in the
introductory paragraph of this article is
revocable until publication of the judgment
that constitutes the adoption.
Art. 1622. No one may be adopted by two
persons unless they are husband and wife,
or live in a stable union.·
Sole paragraph. Divorced and judicially
separated spouses may adopt together,
provided they agree on custody and
visitation, and the adoptee lived together
with them while the conjugal society
existed.
Art. 1623. Adoption follows judicial
procedure, subject to the requirements
established in this Code.
Sole paragraph. Adoption of persons of
more than eighteen years of age shall also
depend on effective intervention in the
proceeding by the State and on judgment
constituting the adoption.
Art. 1624. There is no need for the consent
of a minor's legal representative if it is
proved that the child is an abandoned
infant, that the child is a minor whose
parents are unknown or have disappeared
or have been deprived of family authority,
without a tutor being named, or that the
child is an orphan who has not been claimed
by any relative for more than one year.
 Art. 1.625-1.63 I BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1625. Adoption will only be admitted
if it constitutes an effective benefit for the
adoptee.
Art. 1626. A.doption attributes to the
adoptee the situation of a son or daughter,
undoing all bonds with parents and
relatives by consanguinity, except with
respect to impediments to marriage.
Sole paragraph. If one of the spouses or
companions adopts the child of the other,
the bonds of filiation between the adoptee
and the adopter's spouse or companion and
his or her relatives are maintained.
Art. 1627. The decision confers on the
adoptee. the adopter's surname, and may
order the change of the adoptee's first
name, if he is a minor, at the request of the
adopter or the adoptee.
Art. 1628. The effects of adoption
commence when the judgment becomes
final, unless the adopter dies while the
proceeding is pending, in which case it
shall have retroactive effect to the date of
death. Kinship is established not only
between the adopter and the adoptee, but
also between the adopter and the adoptee' s
descendents and between the adoptee and
all the adopter's relativ.es.
Art. 1629. Adoption by a foreigner shall
conform to the cases and conditions
established by law.
Chapter V - Family Authority
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 1630. While children are minors, they
are subject to family authority.
Art.1631. In a marriage and a stable union,
family authority belongs to the parents; in
the absence or impediment of one of the
parents, it shall be exercised exclusively by
the other.
352
Art. 1.625. Somente sera admitida a
adrn;ao que constituir efetivo beneffcio
para o adotando.
Art. 1.626. A ador;ao atribui a sirum;;ao
de filho ao adotado, desligando-o de
qualquervlnculo com os pais e parentes
consangiilneos, salvo quanto aos impe-
dimentos para o casamento.
Paragrafo unico. Se um dos conjuges
ou companheiros adota o filho do outro.
mantem-se os vfnculos de filia\:aO entre
o adotado e o conjuge ou companheiro
do adotame e os respectivos parentes.
Art. 1.627. A decisao confere ao adota-
do o sobrenome do adotante, podendo
determinar a modificar;ao de scu preno-
me, se menor, a pedido do adotante ou
do adotado.
Art.1.628. Os efeitos da ador;ao come-
iram a partir do trlinsito em julgado da
sentenira. exceto se o adotante vier a fa-
lecer no curso do procedimento, caso
em que tera fon;:a retroativa a data do
obito. As relar;oes de parentesco se es-
tabelecem nao so entre o adotante e o
adotado, comMambem entre aquele e
os descendentes deste e entre o adotado
e todos os parentes do adotante.
Art. 1.629. A ador;ao por estrangeiro
obedecera aos casos e condiirocs que
forem estabelecidos em lei.
Capitulo V - Do Poder Familiar
Se1;ao I - Disposiiriics Gerais
Art. 1.630. Os filhos estao sujeitos ao
poder familiar, enquanto menores.
Art. 1.631. Durante o casamento e a
uniiio estavel. compete o poder familiar
aos pais; na falta ou impedimento de
um deles, o outro o exercera com cxclu-
sividade.
353 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Paragrafo iinico. Divergindo os pais
quanto ao exercfcio do poderfamiliar, e
assegurado a qualquer deles recorrer ao
juiz para solu~ao do desacordo.
Art. 1.632. A separar;ao judicial, o di-
v6rcio e hdissolm<iio da uniao estavel
niio a!teram as relac;oes entre pais e fi-
lhos senao quanto ao direito, que aos
primeiros cabe, de terem em sua com-
panhia os segundos.
Art. 1.633. 0 filho, nao reconhecido
pelo pai, fica sob poder familiar exclu-
sivo da mae; se a mae nao for conhecida
ou capaz de cxerce-lo, dar-se-a tutor ao
menor.
Se1;ao II - Do Exercicio do Podcr
Familiar
Art. 1.634. Compete aos pais. quanta a
pessoa dos filhos menores:
I - dirigir-lhes a criar;ao e educairao;
II - te-Jos em sua companhia e guarda;
III - conceder-lhes ou negar-lhes con-
sentimento para casarem;
IV - nomear-lhes tutor por testamento
ou documento autentico, se o outro dos
pais nao Jhe sobreviver, ou o sobrevivo
nao puder exercer o pnder familiar;
V - representa-los, ate a.os dezesseis
anos, nos atos da vida civil, e assisti-Jos,
apos essa idade, nos atos em que forem
partes, suprindo-lhes o consentimento;
VI - reclama-fos de quern ilegalmente
osdetenha;
VII - exigir que !hes prestem obedien-
cia, respeito e os servii;:os proprios de
sua idade e condic;ao.
Art. !.632-1.634
Sole paragraph. If the parents diverge as to
the exercise of family authority, each of
them has the right to have recourse to a
judge to resolve the disagreement.
Art.1632. Judicial separation, divorce and
dissolution of a stable union do not alter the
relationship between parents and children,
except with respect to the parents' right to
have their children in their company.
Art. 1633. A child who is not
acknowledged by the father is under the
family authority of the mother exclusively;
if the mother is unknown or incapable of
exercising family authority, a tutor shall be
given to the minor.
Section II - The Exercise of Family
Authority
Art. 1634. As to the persons of their minor
children, the parents have the power and
duty to:
I - direct their upbringing and education;
II - have them in their company and
custody;
III - grant or deny them consent to marry;
IV - appoint a tutor for them by testament
or authentic document, if the other parent
does not survive the first, or the survivor
cannot exercise family authority;
V - represent them in the acts of civil life,
until they attain sixteen years of age and,
thereafter, to assist them in the acts to
which they are party, by supplying consent;
VI - reclaim them from those who illegally
detain them;
VII - require that they give obedience,
respect and the services appropriate to their
age and condition.
Art. 1.635-1.637 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Section III- Suspension and.Extinction
of Family authority
Art. 1635. Family authority is
extinguished:
I -by the death of the parents or the child;
II - by emancipation, within the terms of
art. 5, sole paragraph;
III - by attainment of the age of majority;
IV - by adoption;
V - by judicial decision, in the manner
provided for in article 1638.
Art 1636. A father or a mother who
contracts a new marriage or establishes a
stable union does not lose the right to
family authority with respect to his or her
children from the previous relationship,
and shall exercise such rights without
interference of any kind by the new spouse
or companion.
Sole paragraph. The. precept established in
this article applies to a single father or
mother who marries or establishes a stable
union.
Art.1637. If the father or mother abuses his
or her authority and fails in the duties
inherent in their status or wastes the
property of his or her children, a judge may,
upon application by a relative or the Public
Ministry, adopt such measure as appears to
him to be called for to ensure the security of
the minor and his property, and may even
suspend family authority, where
appropriate.
Sole paragraph. A mother's or father's
exercise of family authority is also
suspended where he or she has been found
guilty by final judgment of a crime
sanctioned by more than two years of
imprisonment.
354
Set;iio III - Da Suspensiio e
Extint;iio do Poder Familiar
Art. 1.635. Extingue-se o poder fami-
liar:
I - pela morte dos pais ou do filho;
II - pela emancipa~ao. nos tennos do
art. 5°, paragrafo iinico;
III - pela maioridade;
IV - pela ado~ao;
V - por decisao judicial, na forma do
art. 1.638.
Art 1.636. O pai. ou a mae que contrai
novas niipcias, ou estabelece uniao es-
tavel, nao perde. quanto aos filhos do
relaCionamento anterior, os direitos ao
poder familiar, exercendo-os sem qual-
quer interferencia do nova conjuge ou
companheiro.
Paragrafo iinico. Igual preceito ao esta-
belecido neste artigo aplica-se ao pai ou
a mae solteiros que casarem ou estabe-
lecerem uniiio estavel.
Art. 1.637. Seo pai, ou a mfie, abusar
de sua autoridade, faltando aos deveres
a eles inerentes ou arruinando os bens
dos filhos, cabe ao juiz, requerendo al-
gum parente, ou o Ministerio Piiblico,
adotar a medida que !he pare\:a recla-
mada pela seguran~a do menor e seus
haveres, ate suspendendo o poder fami-
liar, quando convenha.
Paragrafo iinico. Suspende-se igual-
mente o exercfcio do poder familiar ao
pai ou a mae condenados por senten~a
irrecorrivel, em virtude de crime cuja
pena exceda a dais anos de prisao.
355 CODIGO CIVIL BILINOUE
Art. 1.638. Perdera por ato judicial o
poder familiar 0 pai OU a mae que:
I - castigar imoderadamente o filho;
II - deixar o filho em abandono;
III · praticar atos contrdrios a moral e
aos bons costumes;
IV - incidir, reiteradamente, nas faltas
previstas no artigo antecedente.
Titulo Il - Do Direito Patrimonial
Subtitulo I- Do Regime de Bens
entre os Conjuges
Capitulo I - Disposit;oes Gerais
Art. 1.639. E licito aos nubentes, antes
de celebrado o casamento, estipular,
quanto aos seus bens, o que !hes aprou-
ver.
§ 1° 0 regime de bens entre os conjuges
come\'.a a vigorar desde a data do casa-
mento.
§ 2° E admissfvel altera\'.ao do regime
de bens, mediante autoriza\:ao judicial
em pedido motivado de ambos os con-
juges, apurada a procedencia das razoes
invocadas e ressalvados os direitos de
terceiros.
Art. 1.640. Nao havendo conven\:ao,
ou sendo ela nuh1 ou ineficaz, vigorara,
quanto aos bens entre os c6njuges, o re-
gime da comunhao parcial.
Paragrafo iinico. Poderiio os nubentes,
no processo de habilita~ao, optar por
qualquer dos regimes que este c6digo
regula. Quanto a forma, reduzir-se-a a
termo a Op\:l'iO pela comunhao parcial,
fazendo-se o pacto antenupcial por es-
critura piiblica, nas demais escolhas.
Art. 1.641. E obrigat6rio o regime da
separa9ao de bens no casamento:
Art. 1.638-1.641
Art. 1638. A father or a mother shall lose
family authority by judicial act if he or she:
I - immoderately punishes the child;
II - abandons the child;
III - performs acts contrary to morality and
good conduct;
IV - repeatedly commits the faults
contemplated in the preceding article.
Title II - The Law Governing Property
Subtitle I-The Regime of Property
between Spouses
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 1639. It is licit for intended spouses,
before the marriage is celebrated, to make
such stipulations as they wish with respect
to their property.
§ 1. The property regime between the
spouses has effect from the date of their
marriage.
§2. Saving the rights of third parties, the
property regime may be altered with
judicial authorization granted upon
application by both the spouses, setting out
the motives for the alteration, after the
reasons invoked have been determihed to
be well founded.
Art.1640. If there is no agreement, or if the
agreement is null or ineffective, the regime
of partial community shall apply between
the spouses with respect to their property.
Sole paragraph. The intended spouses may,
during the licensing process, opt for any of
the regimes governed by this code. As to
form, a record shall be made of the option
for partial community, and a prenuptial
agreement shall be made by public writing
in all other cases.
Art. 1641. The regime of separation as to
property is mandatory in a marriage:
Art. 1.642-1.643 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I - between persons who marry contrary to
the causes that suspend the solemnization
of marriage;
II - of a person of more than sixty years of
age;
II1 - of all persons who depend on judicial
authorization in order to marry.
Art. 1642. Regardless of the property
regime, both the husband and the wife may
freely:
I - perform all acts of disposition and
administration required to exercise their
profession, within the limits established in
item I of art. 1647;
II - administer their own property;
III - disencumber or claim immovable
property that was encumbered or alienated
without their consent or judicial
authorization;
IV - demand the rescission of guaranties
and gifts, and the invalidation of aval
guaranties, made by the other spouse,
contrary to items III and IV of art. 1647;
V - claim common property, both movable
and immovable, given or transferred by the
other spouse to his concubine, upon proof
that the prpperty was not acquired by the
common effort of the spouse and the
concubine, if the couple has been separated
in fact for more than five years;
VI - perform all acts that are not expressly
prohibited to them.
Art. 1643. Either spouse, even without the
authorization of the other, may:
I - buy, even on credit, things that are
necessary to the household economy;
356
I - das pessoas que o contrafrem com
inobserviincia das causas suspensivas
da celebra\:ao do casamento;
II - da pessoa maior de sesscnta anos;
III - de todos os que dependercm, para
casar, de suprimento judicial.
Art. 1.642. Qualquer quc seja o regime
de bens, tanto o marido quanta a mulher
podem livremente:
I - praticar todos os atos de disposii;ao e
de administra\'.ao neccssarios ao de-
sempenho de sua profissao, com as li-
mitai;oes estabelecida no inciso I do art.
1.647;
II - administrar os bens proprios:
1II - desobrigar ou reivindicar os im6-
veis que tenham sido gravados ou alie-
nados sem o seu consentimehto ou sem
suprimento judicial;
IV - demandar a rescisao dos contratos
de fian\'.a e doar.;ao, ou a invalida9ao do
aval, realizados pelo ontro conjuge com
infrar.;ao do disposto nos incisos III e IV
do art. 1.647;
V - reivindicar os bens comuns, m6veis
ou im6veis, doados ou transferidos pelo
outro conjuge ao concubino, desde que
provado que os bens nao foram adquiri-
dos pelo esfor\!o comum destes, se o ca-
sal estiver separado de fato por mais de
cinco anos;
VI - praticar todos os atos que nao !hes
forem vedados expressamente.
Art. 1.643. Podem os conjuges, inde-
pendentemente de autoriza\:iiO um do
outro:
I - comprar, ainda a credito, as coisas
a
necessarias economia domestica;
357 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
II - obter, por emprestimo, as quantias
que a aquisi9ao dessas coisas possa exi-
gir.
Art. 1.(144. As dfvidas contrafdas para
os fins do artigo antecedente obrigam
solidariamente ambos os conjuges.
Art. l.645. As ai,:oes fundadas nos inci-
sos III. IV e V do art. 1.642 competem
ao conjuge prejudicado e a seus herdei-
ros.
Art. 1.646. No caso dos incisos Ill c IV
do art. l.642, o tcrceiro, prejudicado
com a sentem;:a favoravel ao alllor, tera
direito regressivo contra o conjuge, que
realizou o neg6cio jurfdico, ou scus
herdeiros.
Art. 1.647. Ressalvado o disposto no
art. l.648, nenhum dos conjugcs pode,
sem autorizairao do outro, exceto no re-
gime da separai;:ao absoluta:
I - alienar ou gravar de onus real os bens
im6veis;
II - pleitear, como autor ou rcu, acerca
desses bens ou direitos;
III - prestar fianc;a ou aval;
IV - fazer doai;ao, nao sendo remunera-
t6ria. de bens comuns, ou dos que pos-
sam integrar futura meai;:ao.
Paragrafo unico. Sao validas as doa-
c;oes nupciais feitas aos filhos quando
casarem ou estabelecerem cconomia
separada.
Art. 1.648. Cabe ao juiz, nos casos do
artigo antecedente, suprir a outorga,
quando um dos conjuges a denegue
sem motivo justo, ou !he seja impossf-
vel concede-la.
Art. 1.644" 1.648
II - obtain by loan such amounts as may be
required to acquire those things.
Art. 1644. Both spouses are solidarily
liable for debts contracted for the purposes
of the preceding article.
Art. 1645. Actions based on items III, IV or
V of art. 1642 may be brought by the
injured spouse or his or her heirs.
Art. 1646. In the cases contemplated in
items III and IV of art. 1642, a third party
injured by a decision in favorofthe plaintiff
shall have a right of recourse against the
spouse that made the transactions, or his or
her heirs.
Art. 1647. Saving the provisions of art.
1648, and excepting the regime of absolute
separation, neither of the spouses may,
without the authorization of the other:
I - alienate, or create real encumbrances
against, immovable property;
II - make any plea, either as plaintiff or as
defendant, regarding such property and
rights;
III - grant guaranties or aval guaranties;
IV - make gifts, other than remuneratory
gifts, of common property or of property
that may be part of a future partition.
Sole paragraph. Nuptial gifts made to
children when they marry or establish a
separate household are valid.
Art. 1648. In the cases contemplated in the
preceding article, the judge may supply the
authorization if one of the spouses denies it
without good reason, or it is impossible for
the spouse to grant it.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. l.649-1.652
Art. 1649. Lack of authorization, if not
supplied by a judge when necessary (art.
1647) makes the act voidable, and the other
spouse may demand its annulment at any
time up to two years after the conjugal
society terminates.
Sole paragraph. Approval makes the act
valid, if given in a public instnmient or by
authenticated private instrument.
Art. 1650. The declaration of invalidity of
acts performed without authority, without
consent or without the authorization of a
judge may only be demanded by the spouse
who was entitled to grant the authority, or
by his or her heirs.
Art. 1651. When one of the spouses is
unable to exercise the administration of the
property to which he or she is entitled under
the property regime, the other may:
I - manage the common property and that
of his consort;
II - alienate common movable property;
III - with judicial authorization, alienate
common immovable property and the
movable and immovable property of the
consort.
Art.1652. A spouse who is in possession of
the other's separate property shall be liable
to the other spouse and his or her heirs:
I - as usufructuary, if the earnings are
common property;
II - as mandatary, if he has an express or
tacit mandate to administer the property;
III - as depositary, if he is neither
usufructuary nor administrator.
358
Art. 1.649. A falta de autoriza91io, nao
suprida pelo juiz, quando necessiiria
(art. 1.647), tomarii amlliivel o ato pra-
ticado, podendo o outro conjuge plei-
tear-lhe aanula11ao, ate dois anos depois
de terminada a sociedade conjugal.
Pariigrafo unico. A aprovagao torna vii-
lido o ato, desde que feita por instru-
mento puhlico, ou particular, autenti-
cado.
Art. 1.650. A decretai;:ao de invalidade
dos atos praticados sem outorga, sem
consentimento, ou sem suprimento do
juiz, s6 poderii ser demandada pelo
conjuge a quern cahia concede-la, ou
por seus herdeiros.
Art. 1.651. Quando um dos conjuges
nao puder exercer a administrm;ao dos
hens que !he incumhe, segundo o regi-
me de hens, cahera ao outro:
I - gerir os hens comuns e os do con-
sorte;
II - alienar os hens m6veis comuns;
III- alienar os im6veis cilmuns e os m6-
veis ou im6veis do consorte, mediante
autoriza91io judicial.
Art. 1.652. 0 conjuge, que estiver na
posse dos hens particulares do outro,
serii para com este e seus herdeiros res-
ponsiivel:
I - como usufrutuiirio, se o rendimento
forcomuin;
II - como procurador, se tiver mandato
expresso ou tiicito para os administrar;
III - como depositiirio, se nao for usu-
frutuiirio, nem administrador.
359 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Cap(tulo II - Do Pacto Antenupcial
Art. 1.653. E nulo o pacto antenupcial
se nao for feito por escritura puhlica, e
ineficaz se ni'io the seguir o casamento.
Art. 1.654. A efidtcia do pacto ante-
nupcial, realizado por menor, fica con-
dicionada a aprova91io de seu repre-
sentante legal, salvo as hip6teses de re-
gime obrigat6rio de separayi'io de bens.
Art. 1.655. Enula a convenr,;ao ou chiu-
sula dCla que contravenha disposir,;ao
ahsolutade lei.
Art. 1.656. No pacto antenupcial, que
adotar o regime de participar,;ao final
nos aqilestos, poder-se-ii convencionar
a livre disposir,;ao dos hens im6veis,
desde que particulares.
Art. 1.657. As convenr,;oes antenup-
ciais nao teri'io efeito perante terceiros
senao depois de registradas. em livro
especial. pelo oficial do Registro de
Im6veis do domicflio dos conjuges.
Capltulo III- Do Regime de
Comunhao Parda!
Art. 1.658. No regime de comunhao
parcial, comunicam-se os hens que so-
hrevierem ao casal, na constancia do
casamento, com as exce96es dos arti-
gos seguintes.
Art.1.659. Excluem-se da comunhao:
1- os hens que cada conjuge possuir ao
casar, e os que !he sohrevierem, na
constiincia do casamento, por doa91io
ou sucessao, e os suh-rogados em seu
lugar;
II - os hens adquiridos com valores ex-
cl usivamente pertencentes a um dos
conjuges em sub-rogar,;ao dos hens par-
ticulares;
Art. 1.653-1.659
Chapter II - Prenuptial Agreements
Art.1653. A prenuptial agreement is null if
it is not made by public writing and
ineffective if is not followed by marriage.
Art. 1654. The efficacy of a prenuptial
agreement made by a minor is conditional
upon approval by his legal representative,
except in cases where the regime of
separation as to property is mandatory.
Art.1655. Any agreement or clause therein
that contravenes an absolute provision of
the law is null.
Art.1656. In a prenuptial agreement which
adopts the regime of sharing of acquests,
the parties may agree to the free disposition
of immovable property, provided it is
separate.
Art.1657. Prenuptial agreements shall not
have effect against third parties until they
have been registered, in a special book, by
the official of the Registry of Immovable
Property for the spouses' domicile.
Chapter III - The Regime of Partial
Community
Art. 1658. In the regime of partial
community, property acquired by the
couple during the marriage is common to
them, with the exceptions made in the
following articles.
Art. 1659. The following are excluded
from the community:
I - the property that each spouse possesses
when he or she marries, and property that a
spouse acquires during marriage by gift or
succession, as well as property subrogated
in such gifts and inheritances;
II - property acquired with amounts
belonging exclusively to one of the
spouses, in subrogation of separate
property;
Art. 1.660-1.662 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
III - obligations predating the marriage;
IV - obligations arising out of illicit acts,
unless they revert to the advantage of the
couple;
V - property for personal use, and
professional books and instruments;
VI - the proceeds of the personal work of
each spouse;
VII:.... pensions, military survivors'
pensions, public servants' survivors'
pensions and similar incomes.
Art. 1660. The following enter the
community:
I - property acquired by onerous title
during the marriage, even if in the name of
only one of the spouses;
II - property acquired through the
occurrence of a chance or contingent event,
with or without:a prior contribution of work
or expense;
III - property acquired by gift, inheritance
or legacy in favor of both spouses;
IV - improvement:s to the separate property
of each spouse;
V - the fruits of common property, or of the
separate property of the spouses, gathered
during the marriage or ungathered at the
time the community ceases.
Art. 1661. Property acquired by title
arising prior to the marriage is not common
property.
Art. 1662. In the regime of partial
community, movable property is presumed
to have been acquired during marriage
when it is not proved to have been acquired
earlier.
360
III - as obrigagoes anteriores ao casa-
mento;
IV - as ohrigm;:oes provenientes de atos
ilfcitos, salvo reversao em proveito do
casal;
V - os bens de uso pessoal, os livros e
instrumentos de profissao;
VI - os proventos do trabalho pessoal de
cada conjuge;
Vll - as pensoes, meios-soldos, monte-
pios e outras rendas semelhantes.
Art.1.660. Entram nacomunhiio:
I - os hens adquiridos na constancia do
casamento por tftulo oneroso, ainda que
s6 em nome de um dos conjugcs;
II - os bens adquiridos por fato even-
tual, com ou sem o concurso de traba-
lho ou dcspesa anterior;
III - os hens adquiridos por dom;:ao, he-
ranga ou legado, em favor de arribos os
conjuges;
IV - as henfeitorias em hens particula-
res de cada conjuge;
V - os frutos dos hens comuns. ou dos
particulares de cada conjuge, percehi-
dos na constancia do casamcnto, ou
pendentes ao tempo de cessar a comu-
nhao.
Art. 1.661. Sao incomunicaveis os
hens cuja aquisil(fio tiver por tftulo uma
causa anterior ao casamento.
Art. 1.662. No regime da comunhao
parcial, presumem-se adquiridos na
constancia do casamento os bens mo-
veis, quando nao se provar que o foram
em data anterior.
361 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 1.663. A administra1;iio do patri-
monio comum compete a qualquer dos
conjuges.
§ 1° As dfvidas contrafdas no exercfcio
da administragao ohrigam os hens co-
muns e particulares do conjuge que os
administra, e os do outro na razfio do
proveito que houver auferido.
§ 2° A anuencia de amhos OS conjuges e
necessaria para os atos, a tftulo gratuito,
que impliquem cessao do uso ou gozo
dos bens comuns.
§ 3° Em caso de malversa\:fio dos hens,
o juiz podera arribuir a administragao a
apenas um dos conjuges.
Art. 1.664. Os hens da comunhfio res-
pond em pelas ohrigal(oes contrafdas
pelo marido ou pela mulher para aten-
der aos encargos da famflia, as despesas
de administra\(iiO e as decorrentes de
imposi1;ao legal.
Art. 1.665. A administragao e a dispo-
sil,'.iio dos hens constitutivos do patri-
milnio particular competem ao conjuge
proprietario, salvo convengfio diversa
em pacto antenupcial.
Art. 1.666. As dfvidas, contrafdas por
qualquer dos conjuges na administra-
i;;ao de seus hens particulares e em be-
neficio destes, nfio ohrigam os bens co-
muns.
Capitulo IV - Do Regime de
Comunhao Universal
Art.1.667. 0 regime de comunhao uni-
versal importa a comunica1t1io de todos
OS hens presentes e futuros dos COlljU-
ges e slia5 dfvidas passivas, com as ex-
cei;:oes do artigo seguinte.
Art. 1.668. Sao exclufdos da comu-
nhiio:
Art. 1.663-1.668
Art. 1663. Either of the spouses may
administer the common property.
§I. The common property and the separate
property of the administering spouse are
subject to debts contracted in the exercise
of the administration, as is the property of
the other spouse, to the extent of his or her
profit.
§2. The consent of both spouses is required
for all gratuitous acts that result in the grant
of the use or enjoyment of common
property.
§3. In case of misappropriation of property,
the judge may attribute administration to
only one of the spouses.
Art. 1664. The community property is
liable for obligations contracted by the
husband or by the wife to meet family
charges, the expenses of administration and
those imposed by law.
Art. 1665. The administration and
disposition of items of separate property
belongs to.the spouse who owns them,
unless the prenuptial agreement provides
otherwise.
Art. 1666. The common property is not
subject to debts contracted by either of the
spouses in the administration of his or her
separate property, to the benefit of that
property.
Chapter IV -The Regime of Universal
Community
Art. 1667. Under the regime of universal
community of property, all property,
present and future, of the spouses, and their
debts, are common to the spouses, with the
exceptions made in the following article.
Art. 1668. The following are excluded
from the community:
 Art. 1.669-1.672 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I - property acquired by gift or inheritance
subject to a clause of incommunicability,
and property that is subrogated in such
gifted or inherited property;
II - property subject to fidei commissa, and
the right of fideicommissary heirs before
the suspensive condition occurs;
III - debts prior to the marriage, unless they
arise out of expenses made in preparation
for the marriage or revert to the common
advantage;
IV - prenuptial gifts made by one of the
spouses to the other, under a clause of
incommunicability;
V - the property referred to in items V to
VII of art. 1659.
Art. 1669. The incommunicability of the
property enumerated in the preceding
article does not extend to its fruits, when
they are gathered or mature during the
marriage.
Art. '1670. The provisions of the preceding
Chapter with respect to the administration
of property apply to the regime of universal
community. · ·
Art. 1671. Upon extinction of the
community and division of the assets and
the liabilities, the liability of each spouse to
the creditors of the other ceases.
Chapter V - The Regime of Sharing of
Ac quests
Art. 1672. Under the regime of sharing of
acquests, each spouse has his or her own
patrimony, as provided for in the following
article, and, at the time of the dissolution of
the conjugal society, the right to one half of
the property acquired by the couple by
onerous title during the marriage.
362
I - os bens doados ou herdados com a
clausula de incomunicabilidade e os
sub-rogados em seu lugar;
II - os bens gravados de fideicomisso e
o direito do herdeiro fideicomissano,
antes de realizada a condi{:ao suspcn-
siva;
III - as dlvidas anteriores ao casamento.
salvo se provierem de despesas com
seus aprestos, ou reverterem em provei-
to comum;
IV - as dow;,:oes antenupciais feitas por
um dos cilnjuges ao outro com aclausu-
la de incomunicabilidade;
V - Os bens referidos nos incisos V a
VII do art. 1.659.
Art. 1.669. A incomunicabilidade dos
bens enumerados no artigo antccedente
nao se estende aos frutos. quando sc
percebam ou ve1wam durante o casa-
mento.
Art. 1.670. Aplica-se ao regime daco-
munhiio universal o disposto no Capl-
a
tulo antecedente, quanta administra-
{:lio dos bens.
Art. 1.671. Extinta a comunhilo, e efe-
tuada .a divisao do ativo e do passivo,
cessara a responsabilidade de cada um
dos conjuges para com OS credores do
outro.
Capitulo V - Do Regime de
Participa~o Final nos Aqiiestos
Art. 1.672. No regime de participa~ao
final nos aqtiestos, cada ciinjuge possui
patrimiinio pr6prio, consoante disposto
a
no artigo seguinte, e lhe cabe, epoca
da dissolw;:ao da sociedade conjugal,
a
direito metade dos bens adquiridos
pelo casal, a titulo oneroso, na constan-
cia do casamento.
363 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.673. Jntegram o patrimonio pr6-
prio os bens que cada cilnjuge possufa
ao casar eos por ele adquiridos, a qual-
quer tftulo, na constancia do casa-
mento.
Paragrafo unico. A administra~ao des-
ses hens e exclusiva de cada conjuge,
que os podera livremente alienar, se fo-
rem m6veis.
Art. 1.674. Sobrevindo a dissolu9ao da
sociedade conjugal, apurar-se-a o mon-
tante dos aqiiestos, excluindo-se da
soma dos patrimilnios pr6prios:
I - os bens anteriores ao casamento e os
que em seu lugar se slib-rogaram;
II - os que sobrevieram a cada conjuge
por sucessiio ou liberalidade;
III - as dfvidas relativas a esses bens.
Paragrafo unico. Salvo prova em con-
trario, presumem-se adquiridos durante
o casamento os bens m6veis.
Art. 1.675. Ao determinar-se o mon-
tante dos aqiiestos, computar-se-a o va-
lor das doll{:6es feitas por um .dos ciin-
juges, sem a necessaria autoriza\:ao do
outro; nesse caso, o bem podeni ser rei-
vindicado pelo cilnjuge prejudicado ou
por seus lierdeiros, ou declarado no
monte partilhavel, por valor equivalen-
te ao da epoca da dissOJU{:aO.
Art.1.676.Incorpora-se ao monte ova-
lor dos bens alienados em detrimento
da mea~ao, se nao houver preferencia
do cilnjuge lesado, ou de seus herdei-
ros, de os reivindicar.
Art. l.677. Pelas dlvidas posteriores ao
casamento, contrafdas por um dos ciln-
juges, somente este respondera, salvo
prova de terem revertido, parcial ou to-
talmente, em beneffcio do outro.
Art. 1.673-1.677
Art. 1673. The property that each spouse
had at the time he or she married and the
property that he or she acquired by any title
during the marriage form part of the
spouse's separate patrimony.
Sole paragraph. Each spouse has exclusive
administration of such property, and may
freely dispose of it, if it is movable.
Art. 1674. If the conjugal society is
dissolved, the amount of the acquests shall
be determined by excluding from the sum
of the separate patrimonies:
I - property acquired prior to the marriage
and thatwhich was subrogated in it;
II - property acquired by each spouse by
succession or gift;
III - the debts related to the
abovementioned property.
Sole paragraph. Saving proof to the
contrary, movable property is presumed to
have been acquired during the marriage.
Art.1675. In determining the amount of the
acquests, the value of the gifts made by one
of the spouses without the required
authorization of the other shall be
computed; and in such a case, the item of
property may be claimed by the injured
spouse or his or her heirs, or may ?e
declared to be part of the acquests, at 1ts
value at the time of dissolution.
Art. 1676. The value of property disposed
of to the detriment of the partition shall be
included in the amount of acquests, unless
the injured spouse, or his or her heirs, prefer
to claim it.
Art. 1677. In the case of debts contracted
after the marriage by one of the spouses,
only the spouse who contracted them shall
be liable, saving proof that the debts
reverted in whole or in part to the benefit of
the other.

Art. 1.678-1.684 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1678. If one of the spouses paid a debt
of the other with his or her separate
pr~perty, the value of the payment shall be
adjusted for inflation and imputedi at the
date of dissolution, to the share of the other
spouse.
Ar~. ~679. In the case of property acquired
by JOmt work, each of the spouses shall
have an equal share in the common
property or the credit thereby established.
Art.1680. Movable property, with respect
to third parties, is presumed to belong to the
debtor spouse, unless the item of property is
of the personal use of the other spouse.
Art. 1681. Immovable property is owned
by ~he spouse whose name appears in the
register.
Sole paragraph. If ownership is contested,
the spouse who is owner has the burden of
proving that the property was lawfully
acquired.
Art. 1682, The right to {lartition cannot be
waived; assigned or pledged while the
matrimonial regime is in effect.
Art. 1683. In the case of dissolution of the
regime by reason of judicial separation or
divorce, the amount of the acquests shall be
determined at the date on which life
together ceased.. · vencia.
Art. 1684. If it is neither possible nor
convenient to partition all the property in
kind, the value. of some or all the property
shall be calculated, in order to compensate
the non-owning spouse in money.
Sole P¥agraph. If compensation in money
cannot be made, as much property as
~e~e~sary shall be assessed and, upon
JUd1c1al authorization, sold.
364
Art. 1.678. Se um dos conjuges solveu
uma dfvida do outro com bens do seu
patrimonio, o valor do pagamento deve
ser atualizado e imputado, na data da
dissoJw;ao, amea\!fiO do outro conjuge.
Art.1.679. No.caso de bens adquiridos
pelo trabalho conjunto, tera cada um
dos conjuges uma quota igual no con-
domfnio ou no credito por aquele modo
estabelecido.
Art. 1.680. As coisas m6veis, em face
de terceiros, presumem-se do domfnio
do conjuge devedor, salvo se o bern for
de uso pessoal do outro.
Art.1.681. Os bens irn6veis sao de pro-
priedade do conjuge cujo nome constar
no registro.
Paragrafo unico. Impugnada a titulari-
dade, cabera ao conjuge proprietario
provar a aquisi1.=ao regular dos hens.
Art•. 1.682. 0 direito amea~ao nao ere-
nunciavel, cessfvel ou penhoravel na
vigencia do regime matrimonial.
Art.1.683. Na dissolu\!iio do regime de
bens por separa\!aO judicial ou por di-
v6rcio, verificar-se-a o montante dos
aqiiestos adata em que cessou a convi-
Art. 1.684. Se nao for possfvel nem
conveniente a divisao de todos os bens
em natureza, calcular-se-a o valor de al-
guns ou de todos para reposi~ao em di-
nheiro ao conjuge nlio-proprietario.
Paragrafo unico. Nao se podendo reali-
zar a reposi1.=ao em dinheiro, serlio ava-
liados e, mediante autoriza1rao judicial,
alienados tantos bens quantos bas-
tarem.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE Art. 1.685-1.690
365
Art. 1.685. Na dissoluc;:ao da sociedade
Art. 1685. In the case of dissolution of the
conjugal society by reason of death, the
conjugal por morte, verificar-se-a a
share of the surviving spouse shall be
mea1rao do conjuge sobrevivente de
determined in conformity with the
conforrnidade com os artigos antece-
preceding articles, and the inheritance shall
dentes, deferindo-se a heram,;a aus her-
pass to the heirs in the manner established
deiros na forrna estabelecida neste C6-
in this Code.
digo.
Art. 1686. The debts of one of the spouses,
Art. 1.686. As dfvidas de um dos con-
if greater than his or her share, do not
juges, quando stiperiores asua mem;:ao,
obligate the other spouse, or his or her heirs.
nao obrigam ao outro, ou a seus her-
deiros.
Capitulo VI- Do Regime de
Chapter VI - The Regime of
Separa\;iiO de Bens
Separation of Property
Art. 1.687. Estipulada a separm;:iio de
Art. 1687. If separation of property is
hens. estes perrnanecerao sob a admi-
stipulated, each spouse's property shall
remain under his or her exclusive
nistrai;fio exclusiva de cada um dos
conjuges, que OS podera livremente administration, and the owner may freely
al ienar ou gravar de onus real.
dispose of his or her property and create
real encumbrances over it.
Art. 1.688. Ambos os conjuges sao · Art. 1688. Both spouses are obligated to
obrigados a contribuir para as dcspesas
contribute to the expenses of the couple in
do casal na propon;:ao dos rendirnentos proportion to the income from their work
de seu trabalho e de seus bens, salvo es-
and their property, saving stipulation to the
tipulai;iio cm contrario no pacto ante- contrary in the prenuptial agreement.
nupciaL
Subtitulo II - Do Usufruto e da
Subtitle U - Usufruct and
Administra~ao dos Bens de Filhos
Administration of the Property of
Menores Minor Children
Art. 1.689. 0 pai ea mile, enquanto no
Art.1689. The father and the mother, in the
exercfcio do poder familiar: exercise of family authority:
I - are usufructuaries of their children's
I - sao usufrutuarios dos hens dos fi-
lhos; property;
II - have the administration of the property
II- tern a administra\!ao dos bens dos fi-
of minor children under their authority.
lhos menores sob sua autoridade.
Art. 1.690. Compete aos pais'.e na falta Art. 1690. The parents, and in the absence
de urn deles ao outro. com exdusivida- of one of them, the other, have exclusive
power to represent their children who are
de, representar os filhos menores de de-
under the age of sixteen years, and to assist
zesseis anos, bem como assisti-los ate
them until they have reached the age of
completarem a maioridade ou serem
majority or are emancipated.
ernancipados.
Art. 1.691-1.693 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. The parents shall decide
together questions related to their children
and their chHdren's property; in case of
divergence between them, either may have
recourse to a judge to obtain the required
solution.
Art. 1691. The parents may not alienate, or
create real encumbrances against, their
children's immovable property, nor
contract, in their names, obligations beyond
the limits of the simple administration of
their property, except by reason of
necessity or in the manifest interest of their
offspring, with prior authorization by ·a
judge.
Sole paragraph. The following may
demand that the acts contemplated in this
article be declared null:
I - the children;
II - the heirs;
III - the legal representative.
Art. 1692. Whenever, in the exercise.of
family authority, the parents' interest
conflicts with the child's, the juqge shall, at
the request of the child or of the Public
Ministry, appoint a special curator to the
child.
Art. 1693. The following are excluded
from the parents' usiifruCt an.d
administration:
I - property acquired by a child born
outside the marriage, prior to
acknowledgement of the child;
II - amounts earned by a child of more than
sixteen years of age through employment or
the exercise of a professional activity, and
property acquired with such amounts;
III - property left or gifted to the child on
the condition that it shall be not sµbject to
the usufruct or administration of the
parents;
366
Paragrafo unico. Os pais devem decidir
em comum as questoes relativas aos fi-
lhos e a seus bens; havendo divergen-
cia, podera qualquer delcs recorrer ao
juiz para a soluyao necessliria.
Art. 1.691. Nao podem os pais alienar,
OU gravar de OnUS real OS irn6veis dos
filhos, nem contrair, em nome deles,
obrigai;:o~s que ultrapassem os limit.es
da simples administrayao, salvo por ne-
cessidade ou evidente interesse da pro-
le, rnediante previa autorizayao do juiz.
Paragrafo unico. Podem pleitear a de-
clara1;ao de nulidade dos atos previstos
neste artigo:
I - os filhos;
II - os herdeiros;
III - o representante legal.
Art.1.692. Sempre que no exercfcio do
poder familiar colidir o interesse dos
pais com o do filho. a requerlrnento
deste ou do Ministerio PUblico o juiz
!he dara curador especial.
Art. 1.693. Excluern-se do usufruto e
da administra1;ao dos pais:
I - os hens adquiridos pelo filho havido
fora do casarnento, antes do reconheci-
rnento;
II- os valores auferidos pelo filho
rnaior de dezesseis anos, no exerdcio
de atividade profissional e os hens corn
tais recursos adquiridos;
III - os bens deixados ou doados ao fi-
lho, sob a condi1;lio de nao serem usu-
fruldos, ou administrados, pelos pais;
367 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGUE
IV - os hens qile aos filhos couberem na
heran~a, quando os pais forern excluf-
dos da sucessao.
Subtitulo III - Dos Alimentos
Art.1.694. Pod em OS parentes, OS coaju-
ges ou cornpanheiros pedir uns aos outros
os alimentos de que necessitem para viver
de modo compatlvel com a sua condit;ao
social, inclusive para atender as necessi-
dades de sua educa1;ao.
§ I0 Os alimentos devern ser f1Xados na
propo~ao das necessidades do reclaman-
te e dos recursos da pessoa obrigada.
§ 2° Os alimentos serao apenas os indis-
pensaveis a subsistencia, quando a si-
tuayao de necessidade resultar de culpa
de quern os pleiteia.
Art. 1.695. Sao devidos os alirnentos
quando quern OS pretende nao tern hens
suficientes, nem pode prover, pelo seu
trabalho, apr6pria manten9a. e aquele,
de quern se reclamam, pode fornece-
los, sem desfalque do necessario ao seu
sustento.
Art. 1.696. 0 direito apresta9ao de ali-
rnentos erecfproco entre pais e filhos, e
extensivo a todos os ascendentes, re-
caindo a obriga~lio nos mais pr6ximos
em grau, uns em falta de outros.
Art. 1.697. Na falta dos ascendentes
cabe a obriga11ao aos descendentes,
guardada a ordem de sucessao e, faltan-
do estes, aos irrnaos, assim gerrnanos
coma unilaterais.
Art. 1.698. Se o parente, que deve ali-
rnentos em primeiro Ingar, nao estiver
em condiyoes de suportar totalmente o
encargo, serao chamados a concorrer os
de grau imediato; sendo varias as pes-
soas obrigadas a prestar alirnentos, to-
das devem concorrer na propor~ao dos
respectivos recursos, e, intentada a9ao
contra uma delas, poderao as demais
ser chamadas a integrar a Iide.
Art. 1.694-1.698
IV - property to which the children are
entitled by inheritance, when the parents
are excluded from the succession.
Subtitle III - Support
Art. 1694. Relatives, spouses and
companions may claim support from one
another, in the amount needed to live in a
matter compatible with their social
condition, including their educational
needs.
§ 1. Support shall be fixed in proportion to
the claimant's needs and to the resources of
the person obligated to pay it.
§2. The support shall be only that which is
indispensable to subsistence, if the
situation of need results from the
claimant's fault.
Art. 1695. Support is owed when the
claimant does not have sufficient property.
and cannot provide through his work, for
his own maintenance and the person from
whom support is claimed can pay it without
forfeiting what is necessary for his own
sustenance.
Art. 1.696. The right to support is
reciprocal between parents and children,
and extends to all the ascendents; the
obligation falls to those nearest in degree,
in order.
Art.1697. In the absence of ascendents, the
obligation falls to the descendents, in the
order of succession, and in the absence of
descendents, to the siblings, both full and
half.
Art. 1698. If the relative on whom the
obligation to pay support first falls cannot
bear the full burden, the relatives in the
immediate degree shall be called upon to
contribute; if various persons are bound to
pay support, each of them shall contribute
in proportion to his resources and if action
is brougfit against one of them, the others
may be joined in the action.
Art. 1.699-1. 704 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1699. If after the support is fixed there
is a change in the financial situation of the
person who pays it, or the person who
receives it, the interested party may claim
from the judge exoneration, reduction or
increase of the charge.
Art.1700.The obligation to pay support is
transmitted to the debtor's heirs, in
accordance with art. 1694.
Art. 1701. The person obligated to provide
suppoit may pay a pension to the supported
person or give him lodging and board,
without prejudice to the duty to provide
what is necessary for his education, if a
minor.
Sole paragraph. If the circumstances so
require, the judge shall fix the manner in
which the support is to be provided.
Art. 1702. In the case of a litigious judicial
separation, where one of the spouses is
innocent and without resources, the other
spouse shall pay a pension in the amount
fixed by the judge, in accordance with the
criteria established in art. 1694.
Art. 1703. Spouses who are judicially
separated shall contribute in proportion to
their resources to the maintenance of their
children.
Art. 1704. If one of the judicially separated
spouses comes to have need of support, the
other shall be obligated to provide it by
payment of a pension in the amount fixed
by the judge, if he or she has not been
declared to be the party at fault in the action
for judicial separation.
Sole paragraph. If the spouse who was
declared to be the party at fault comes to
need support, and does not have relatives
who are able to provide it, nor the ability to
work, the other spouse shall be obligated to
ensure his or her support, with the judge
fixing an amount indispensable to his
survival.
368
Art. 1.699. Se, fixados os alimentos,
sobrevier mudam;:a na situai;iio finan-
ceira de quern os supre, ou na de quern
os recebe, podera o interessado recla-
mar ao juiz. conforme as circunstan-
cias, exonera~iio, reduc;iio ou majora-
1;1io do encargo.
Art. 1.700; A obriga9ao de pres tar ali-
inentos transmite-se aos herdeiros do
devedor, na forma do art. 1.694.
Art. 1.701. A pessoa obrigada a suprir
alimentos podera pensionar o alimentan-
do, ou dar-lhe hospedagem e sustento,
sem prcjufzo do dever de prestar o neces-
siirlo asua educ~iio, quando mcnor.
Paragrafo (mico. Compete ao juiz, seas
circunstancias o exigircm, fixar a forma
do cumprimento da presta~iio.
Art. 1.702. Na separa~iio judicial liti-
giosa, sendo um dos c6njuges inocente
e desprovido de recursos, prestar-lhe-a
o outro a p,ensiio alimentfcia que o juiz
fixar, obedecidos os criterios estabele-
cidos no art. 1.694.
Art. 1.703. Para a manutenc;ao dos fi-
lhos, os c6njuges separados judicial-
mente contribuiriio na propori;ao de
seus recursos.
Art.1.704. Se um dos c6njuges separa-
dos judicialmente vier a necessitar de
alimentos, sera o outro obrigado a pres-
ta-Ios 1nediante pensiio a ser fixada pclo
juiz, caso niio tenha sido declarado cul-
pado na a1rao de separa9iio judicial.
Paragrafo unico. Se o c6njuge declara-
do culpado vier a necessitar de alimen-
tos, e niio tiver parentes em condh;:oes
de presta-los. nem aptidiio para o traba-
lho, o outro c6njuge sera obrigado a as-
segura-los, fixando o juiz o valor indis-
pensavel asobrevivencia.
369 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.705. Para obter alimentos, o fi-
lho havido fora do casamento pode
acionar o genitor, sendo facultado ao
juiz determinar, a pedido de qualquer
das partes, que a a1;iio se processe em
segredo de justic;a.
Art. 1.706. Os alimentos provisionais
serao fixados pelo juiz, nos termos da
lei processual.
Art. 1.707. Pode o credor niio exercer,
porem !he e vedado renunciar o direito
a alimentos, sendo o respectivo credito
insuscetfvel de cessiio, compensa1rao
ou penhora.
Art. 1.708. Com o casamento, a uniao
estavel ou o concubinato do credor,
cessa o dever de prestar alimentos.
Paragrafo unico. Com rela9ao ao credor
cessa, tambem, o direito a alimentos, se
tiver procedimento indigno em relai;:ao
ao devcdor.
Art. 1.709. 0 novo casamento do c6n-
juge devedor niio extingue a obrigai;iio
constante da sente111;a de div6rcio.
Art. 1.710. As prestai;:oes alimentfcias,
de qualquer natureza, seriio atualizadas
segundo indice oficial regularmente es-
tabelecido.
Subtitulo IV - Do Bern de Familia
Art. 1.711. Podem os c6njuges, ou a
entidade familiar, mediante escritura
piiblica ou testamento, destinar parte de
seu patrim6nio para instituir bem de fa-
milia, desde que niio ultrapasse um ter-
1;0 do patrimonio lfquido existente ao
tempo da institui~iio, mantidas as regras
sohre a impenhorabilidade do im6vel
residencial estabelecida em lei especial.
Art. 1.705-1.711
Art. 1705. In order to obtain support, a
child born out of the marriage may take
action against his parent, and the judge may
determine; at the request of either of the
parties, that the proceeding be closed to the
public.
Art. 1706. Provisional support shall be
fixed by the judge, in accordance with the
legislation governing procedure.
Art. 1707. The creditor may choose not to
exercise the right to support, but he may not
renounce it; and the debt arising out of the
obligation of support is not subject to
assignment, compensation or attachment.
Art. 1708. The duty to provide support
ends with the marriage, stable union or
concubinage of the creditor.
Sole paragraph. The creditor's right to
support also ends in case of ingratitude
toward the debtor.
Art.1709. A new marriage by the debtor
spouse does not extinguish an obligation to
provide support contained in the judgment
of divorce.
Art. 1710. Support payments of any kind
shall be adjusted according to a regularly
established official index.
Subtitle IV - Family Property
Art.1711. The spouses, or the family unit,
may, by public writing or testament,
dedicate a part of their patrimony to
institute a family property, provided that it
does not exceed one third of the net
patrimony existing at the time of
institution, and subject to the rules against
pledge of the family residence established
by special legislation.
Art. 1.712-1.714 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. A third party may also
institute a family property by testament or
gift; the effectiveness of the act depends on
the express acceptance of both benefited
spouses or the benefited family unit.
Art. 1712. The family property shall
consist of an urban or rural residential
immovable property, with its belongings
and accessories, in both cases. to be used as
the family domicile, and may extend to
securities intended to produce income to be
applied to the maintenance of the property
and the support of the family.
Art. 1713. The securities to be used for the
purposes contemplated in the preceding
article may not exceed the value of the
immovable property instituted as a family
property, at the time of institution.
§ l. The securities shall be duly and
individually identified in the instrument of
institution of the family property.
§2.The institution of registered securities
as family property shall be entered in the
relevant registers.
§3. The institutor may determine that the
securities shall be administered by a
financial institution, and may determine the
manner in which income from the
securities shall be paid to the beneficiaries,
in which case the administrators' liability
shall be governed by the rules in the
contract of deposit.
Art.1714. The family property, regardless
of whether it is instituted by the spouses or
by a third party, is constituted by
registration of the instituting instrument in
the Registry of Immovable Property.
370
Paragrafo unico. 0 terceiro podeni
igualmente instituir bem de familia por
testamento ou dom;:ao, dependendo a
eficacia do ato da aceita~ao expressa de
ambos OS conjuges beneficiados OU da
entidade familiar beneficiada.
Art. 1.712. 0 bem de familia consistira
em predio residencial urbano ou rural,
com suas perten~as e acess6rios, desti-
nando-se em ambos os casos a domid-
Jio familiar, e pociera abranger valores
mobiliarios, cuja rend a sera aplicada na
conserva1;iio do im6vel e no sustento da
famflia.
Art.1.713. Os valores mobiliarios, des-
tinados aos fins previstos no artigo an-
tecedente, niio poderiio exceder o valor
do predio institufdo em bem de familia,
aepoca de sua institui~iio.
§ I0 Deveriio os valores mobiliarios ser
devidamente individualizados no instru-
mento de institui~iio do bem de familia.
§ 2° Se se tratar de tltulos nominativos,
a stia instituii;:ao como bem de familia
devera constar dos respectivos Iivros de
registro.
§ 3° 0 instituidor podera determinur
que a administra1;ao dos valores mobi-
liarios seja confiada a instituir;:ao finan-
ceira, bem como disciplinur a forma de
pagamento da respectiva renda aos be-
neficiarios, casd em que a responsabili-
dade dos administradores obedecera as
regras do contrato de dep6sito.
Art.1.714. 0 bem de famflia, quer ins-
titufdo pelos conjuges OU por terceiro,
constitui-se pelo registro de seu titulo
no Registro de Im6veis.
371 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art.1.715. 0 bem de familia eisento de
execu~ao por dfvidas posteriores a sua
institui1.:ao, salvo as que provierem de
tributos relativos ao predio, ou de des-
pesas de condominio.
Paragrafo unico. No caso de execw;:ao
pelas dividas referidas neste artigo. o
.saldo existente sera aplicado em outro
predio, como bem de famflia, ou em.tf-
tulos da dfvida publica, para sustento
familiar, salvo se motivos relevantes
aconselharem outra solu1;ao, a criteria
dojuiz.
Art. 1.716. A isenr;:iio de que trata o ar-
tigo antecedente durara enquanto viver
um dos conjuges, ou, na falta destes, ate
que os filhos completem a maioridade.
Art.1.717. 0 predio e os valores mobi-
1iarios, constituidos como bem da fami-
lia, niio podem ter destino diverso do
previsto no art. 1.712 ou serem aliena-
dos sem o consentimento dos interessa-
dos e seus representantes legais, ouvido
o Ministerio Publico.
Art. 1.718. Qualquer forma de liquida-
r;:iio da entidade admioistradora, a que
se refereo § 3°doart. l.713, nao atingi-
ra os valores aela confiados, ordenando
o juiz a sua transferencia para outra ins-
titui<;:ao semelhante, obedecendo-se, no
caso de falencia, ao disposto sobre pe-
dido de restituii;:ao.
Art.1.719. Comprovada a impossibili-
dade da manuteni;:ao do bem de familia
nas condii;oes em que foi instituido, po-
der.i o juiz, a requerimento dos interes-
sados, extingui-lo ou autotizar a sub-
rogai;:ao dos bens que o constiu1em em
outros, ouvidos o instituidor e o Minis-
terio Publico.
Art. 1.715-1.719
Art. 1715. A family property is exempt
from execution for debts subsequent to its
institution, with the exception of debts
arising out of taxes related to the property,
and condominium expenses.
Sole paragraph. In the case of execution for
the debts referred to in this article, the
remaining balance shall be applied to
acquire another immovable property, as a
family property, or invested in public debt
instruments to support the family, unless
relevant reasons suggest another solution
satisfactory to the judge.
Art.1716. The exemption referred to in the
preceding article shall last for so long as
one of the spouses lives or, in the absence
of the spouses, until their children reach the
age of majority.
Art. 1717. The immovable property and
securities constituted as family property
may not be used for any purpose other than
that provided for in art. 1712, or be
alienated without the consent of the
interested parties and their legal
representatives, after hearing the Public
Ministry.
Art.1718. Liquidation of the administering
entity referred to in art. 1713 §3 shall not
affect the securities confided to it; the judge
shall order the transfer of the securities to a
like institution. In the case of bankruptcy,
the provisions regarding demands for
restitution shall apply.
Art.1719. Upon proof that it is impossible
to maintain the family property in the
conditions in which it was instituted, the
judge may, on application by the interested
parties, extinguish the family property or
authorize the substitution of the assets that
constitute the family property by others,
after hearing the institutor and the Public
Ministry.
 Art. 1.720-1.723 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1720. Saving provision to the contrary
in the instrument of institution, the
administration of the family property
belc;mgs to both the spouses; in the case of
divergence, a judge shall resolve the
dispute.
Sole paragraph. Upon the death of both
spouses, administration of the family
property shall pass to the oldest child, if he
has reached the age of majority, and if not,
td his tutor.
Art. 1721. Dissolution of the: conjugal
society does not extinguish the family
property.
Sole paragraph. Upon dissolution of the
conjugal society by death of one of the
spouses, the surviving spouse may apply
for extinction of the family property, if it is
the couple's only asset.
Art. 1722. The family property is
extinguished likewise upon the death of
both spouses and the attainment of the age
of majority of the children, provided they
are not subject to curatorship. · tos em tutela:
T.itle III - Stable Union
Art. 1723. A stable union between a man
and a woman, evidenced by public,
continuous and lasting cohabitation and
established with the objective of
constituting a family, is recognized as a
family unit.
§ 1. A stable union shall not be constituted
in the presence of the impediments in art.
1521, although the. impediment in item VI
shall not apply in the case of a married
person who is separated in fact or
judicially.
§2. The suspensive causes in art. 1523 do
not impede the existence of a stable union.
372
Art. 1.720. Salvo disposi<;iio em con-
trario do ato de instituir;:ao, a adminis-
tra~ao do hem de famfiia compete a am-
hos os conjuges, resolvendo o juiz em
caso de divergencia.
Paragrafo unico. Com o falecimento de
amhos cis conjuges, a administra<;iio
passani ao filho mais velho, se for
maior, e, do contnlrio, a seu tutor.
Art. 1.721. A dissolu.;:ao da sociedade
conjugal niio extingue o hem de familia.
Paragrafo unico. Dissolvida a socieda-
de conjugal pela morte de um dos con-
juges, o sohrevivente pod era pedira ex-
tim;;ao do hem de famflia, se for 0 unico
hemdocasal.
Art. 1.722. Extingue-se. igualmente, o
hem de famflia com a morte de ambos
os conjuges e a maioridade dos filhos,
desde que nao sujeitos a curatela.
Titulo ID - Da Uniiio Estavel
Art. I. 723. Ereconhecida co mo· emida-
de familiar a uniao estavel entre o ho-
mem ea mulher, tonfigurada na convi-
vencia publica, continua e duradoura e
estabelecida com o objetivo de consti-
tui1;ao de famflia.
0
§ l A uniao estavel nao se constituira
se ocorrerem os impedimentos do art.
1.521; nao se aplicando a incidencia do
inciso VI no caso de a pessoa casada se
achar separada de fato ou judicialmente.
§ 2° As causas suspensivas do arr. 1.523
niio impedirao a caracterizai;:1io da
uniao estavel.
373 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.724. As rela\:iies pessoais entre
os companheiros obedeceriio aos deve-
res de lealdade, respeito e assistencia, e
de guarda, sustento e educac;ao dos fi-
lhos.
Art.1.725. Na uniao estavel, salvo con-
tra to escrito entre os companheiros,
aplica-se as relac;iies patrimoniais, no
que couber, o regime da comunhao par-
cial de bens.
Art.1.726. A uni1io estavel podera con-
verter-se em casamento, mediante pe-
dido dos companheiros ao juiz e assen-
to no Registro Civil.
Art. 1.727. As rela\:iies niio eventuais
entre o homerh e a mulher, impedidos
de casar, constituem concubinato.
Titulo IV - Da Tutela e da Curatela
Capitulo I - Da Tutela
S~o I-Dos Tutores
Art. 1.728. Os filhos menores sao pos-
I - com o falecimento dos pais, ou sendo
estes julgados ausentes:
II - em caso de os pais decafrem do po-
der familiar.
Art. 1.729. 0 direito de nomear tutor
compete aos pais, em conjunto.
Paragrafo (mico. A nomea<;iio deve
constar de testamento ou de qualquer
outro documento autentico.
Art. 1.730. Enula a nomeai;:ao de tutor
pelo pai ou pela mae que, ao tempo de
sua morte, nao tinha o poder familiar.
Art. 1.731. Em falta de tutor nomeado
pelos pais incumbe a tuteia aos parentes
consanglifneos do menor, por esta or-
dem:
Art. 1.724-1.73 l
Art. 1724. The personal relationship
between the companions shall be subject to
the duties of loyalty, respect and assistance,
and of the custody, support and education
of their children.
Art. 1725. Unless the companions have
otherwise agreed in writing, the regime of
partial community of assets shall apply to
their patrimonial relationship.
Art.1726. A stable union may be converted
into marriage, upon application to a judge
by the companions and registration in the
Civil Register.
Art. 1727. Non-occasional relations
between a man and a woman who. are
impeded from marrying constitute
concubinage.
Title IV - Tutorship and Curatorship
Chapter I - Tutorship
Section I - Tutors
Art. 1728. Minor children are put under
tutorship:
I - upon death or declaration of absence of
their parents;
II - if the parents lose family authority.
Art. 1729. The right to appoint the tutor
belongs to the parents, acting together.
Sole paragraph. The appointment shall be
made in a testament or any other authentic
document.
Art. 1730. The appointment of a tutor by a
father or a mother who at the time of his or
her death did not have family authority is
null.
Art. 1731. In the absence of a tutor
appointed by the parents, the tutorship falls
to the minor child's relatives by
consanguinity, in the following order:
Art. 1.732-1.734 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
I -·to the ascendents, with preference to
those closest in degree over those farthest in
degree;
II - to the collateral relatives, up to and
including the third degree, with preference
to those closest in degree over those farthest
in degree and, within the same degree, to
the older over the younger; in any case, the
judge shall choose among them the person
most fit to exercise the tutorship in the
interests of the minor.
Art.1732. The judge shall name a suitable
tutor, resident in the domicile of the minor:
I - in the absence of a testamentary or
legitimate tutor;
II -when those persons have been excluded
or excused from the tutorship;
III - when the legitimate and the
testamentary tutor have been removed for
unsuitability.
Art. 1733. A single tutor shall be appointed
to orphan brothers and sisters.
§ 1. If more than one tutor is named by
testamentary provision, without indication
of precedence, the tutorship is deemed to
have been committed to the first, and the
others will succeed in the order of their
appointment, in the case of death,
incapacity, excuse or any other
impediment.
§2. Any person who institutes a minor heir
or legatee may name a special curator to
him for the property bequeathed, even
though the beneficiary is under family
authority or tutorship.
Art. 1734. Abandoned minors shall have
the tutors appointed by a judge, or shall be
put under the care of a public establishment
intended for that purpose and, in the
absence of such an establishment, they
shall remain under the tutorship of persons
who, voluntarily and without charge,
assume responsibility for their upbringing.
374
I - aos ascendentes, preferindo o de
grau mais pr6ximo ao mais remoto;
II - aos colaterais ate o terceiro grau,
preferindo os mais pr6ximos aos mais
remotos, e, no mesmo grau, os mais ve-
lhos aos mais mo9os; em qualquer dos
casos, o juiz escolhera entre eles o mais
apto a exercer a tutela em beneficio do
menor.
Art. 1.732. 0 juiz nomeara tutor idoneo
e residente no domicflio do menor:
I - na falta de tutor testamentario ou le-
gftimo;
II - quando estes forem exclufdos ou es-
cusados da tutela;
III - quando removidos por nao idoncos
o tutor legftimo e o testamentario.
Art. 1.733. Aos irmaos 6rftios dar-se-a
um so tutor.
0
§ I No caso de ser nomeado mais de
um tutor por disposir;:ao testamentaria
sem indicar;:ao de precedencia, entende-
se que a tu tel a foi cometida ao primeiro,
e que os outros lhe sucederao pela or-
dem de nomear;:ao, se ocorrer morte, in-
capacidade, escusa ou qualquer outro
impedimento.
§ 2° Quern institui um menor herdeiro,
ou legatario seu, podera nomear-lhe cu-
rador especial para os hens deixados,
ainda que o beneficiario se encontre sob
o poder familiar, ou tutela.
Art. 1.734. Os menores abandonados
terao tutores nomeados pelo juiz, ou se-
rao recolhidos a estabelecimento publi-
co para este fim destinadci, e, na falta
desse estabelecimento, ficam sob a tu-
tela das pessoas que, voluntaria e gra-
tuitamente, se encarregarem da sua
cria~ao.
375 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
Se~iio IT - Dos lncapazes de Exercer
a Tutela
Art. 1.735. Nao podem ser tutores e se-
rfio exonerados da tutela, caso a exer-
i;am:
I - aqueles que nao tiverem a livre admi-
nistra~ao de seus hens;
II- aqueles que, no momento de Ihes ser
deferida a tutela, se acharem constituf-
dos em obriga9ao para com o men or, ou
tiverem que fazer valer direitos contra
este, e aqueles cujos pais;filbos ou con-
juges tiverem demanda contra o menor;
III - os inimigos do menor, ou de seus
pais, ou que tiverem sido por estes ex-
pressamente exclufdos da tutela;
IV - os condenados por crime de furto,
roubo, estelionato, falsidade, contra a
famflia ou os costumes, tenham ou niio
cumprido pena; I sentence;
V - as pessoas de mau proceclimento, ou
falhas em probidade, e as culpadas de
abuso em tutorias anteriores;
VI - aqueles que exercerem funr;:ao pu-
blica incompatfvel com a boa adminis-
tra9ao da tutela.
Se~iio Ill - Da Escusa dos Tutores
Art.1.736. Podem escusar-se da tutela:
I - mulheres casadas;
II - maiores de sessenta anos;
III - aqueles que tiverem sob sua autori-
dade mais de tres filhos;
IV - os impossibilitados por enfermida-
de;
V - aqueles que habitarem longe do lu-
gar onde se haja de exercer a tutel a;
Art. 1.735-1.736
Section II - Those Incapable of
Exercising Tutorship
Art. 1735. The following may not be tutors
and shall be exonerated from tutorship if
they do exercise it:
I - those who do not have the free
administration of their own property;
II - those who, at the time tutorship is
conferred, are under obligation to the
minor, or must vindicate rights against him,
and those whose parents, children or
spouses have a claim against the minor;
III - the enemies of the minor or of his
parents, and those who have been expressly
excluded from tutorship;
IV - those found guilty of theft, robbery or
fraud against the family or good conduct,
whether or not they have served their
V - persons of bad conduct, or lack of
probity, and those guilty of abuse in
previous tutorships;
VI - those who exercise a public function
incompatible with the good administration
of the tutorship.
Section III - Excuse of Tutors
Art.1736. The following may be excused
from exercising tutorship:
I - married women;
II-persons of more than sixty-five years of
age;
III - persons who have more than three
children under their authority;
IV - persons unable to exercise tutorship by
reason of infirmity;
V - persons who live far from the place
where the tutorship must be exercised;
Art. 1.737-1.741 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
VI - persons who already exercise a
tutorship or curatorship;
VII - military personnel in service.
Art. 1737. A person who is not a relative of
the minor cannot be obligated to accept the
tutorship if there is, in the place where the
tutorship is to be exercised, a suitable
relative by consanguinity or affinity able to
exercise it.
Art. 1738. The excuse shall be submitted
within the ten days following the
appointment, on pain of the right to allege it
being deemed to have been waived; if the
reason for excuse occurs after the tutorship
is accepted, the ten. days begin to run from
the day on which the reason arises.
Art. 1739. If the judge does not admit the
excuse, the appointed tutor shall exercise
the tutorship for so long as the appeal is
undecided, and shall be immediately liable
for any losses and damage the minor may
suffer.
Section IV - The Exercise of Tutorship
Art. 1740. As to the person of the minor,
the tutor shall:
I - direct him in his education, defend him
and give him support, in accordance with
his means and condition;
II - request that the judge make such orders
as he may find appropriate, when the minor
is in need of correction;
III - fulfill the other duties that normally
fall to the parents, after hearing the minor's
opinion, if he has completed twelve years
of age.
Art. 1741. The tutor shall, under the
supervision of the judge, administer the
minor's property, to the minor's benefit,
fulfilling his duties diligently and in good
faith.
376
VI - aqueles que ja exercerem tutela ou
curatela;
VII - militares em servigo.
Art. 1.737. Quern nao for parente do
me nor nao podera ser obrigado a aceitar
a tutela, se houver no lugar parente ido-
neo, consanglifneo o\J afim, em condi-
1;oes de exerce-la.
Art. 1.738. A escusa apresentar-se-a
nos dez dias subseqtientes a designa-
~ao, sob pena de entender-se remmcia-
do o direito de alega-la; se o motivo es-
cusm6rio ocorrer depois de aceita a tu-
tela, os dez dias contar-se-ao do em que
ele sobrevier.
Art.1.739. Seo juiz nao admitir aescu-
sa, exercera o.nomeado a tutela, en-
quanto o recurso interposto nao tiver
provimento, e respondera desde logo
pelas perdas e danos que o menorvenha
asofrer.
Sei,;iio IV - Do Excrcicio cla Tutela
Art. 1.740. Incurnbe ao tutor, quanto a Paragrafo iinico. Se o patrim6nio do
pessoa do menor:
I - dirigir-lhe a educai,;ao, defende-lo e
prestar-lhe alimentos, conforrne os seus
haveres e condir;:ao;
II - reclarnar do juiz que providcncie.
coma houver por bem, quando o menor
haja mister correr;:ao;
III - adimplir os dernais deveres que
normalrnente cabern aos pais, ouvida a
opiniao do menor, se este ja contar doze
anos de idade.
Art.1.741. Incumbe ao tutor, sob a ins-
pe~ao do juiz, administrar os bens do
tutelado, em proveito deste, cumprindo
seus deveres com zelo e boa-re.
377 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.742. Para fiscalizai;:ao dos atos
do tutor, pode o juiz nomear urn protu-
tor.
Art. 1.743. Se os bens e interesses ad-
ministrativos exigirem conhecimentos
tecnicos, forem complexos, ou realiza-
dos em lugares distantes do domicilio
do tutor, podeni este, rnediante aprova-
1;ao judicial, delegar a outras pessoas ff-
sicas ou jurfdicas o exercfcio parcial da
tutela.
Art. 1.744. A responsabilidade do juiz
seni:
I- diretae pessoal, quando nao tiverno-
meado o tutor, ou nao o houver feito
oportunamente;
II - subsidiaria, quando nao tiver exigi-
do garantia legal do tutor, ncm o remo-
vido, tanto que se tornou suspeito.
Art. 1.745. Os hens do menor serao en-
tregues ao tutor mediante termo especi-
ficado deles e seus valores, ainda que os
pais o tenham dispensado.
menor for de valor consideravel, pode-
ra 0 juiz .condicionar 0 exercicio da tu-
a
tcla prestar;:ao de cau~ao ba~tante, po-
dendo dispensa-la se o mtor for de reco-
nhecida idoneidade.
Art. 1.746. Seo menor possuir hens,
sera sustentado e educado a expensas
deles, arbitrando o juiz para fa! fim as
quantias que !he pare1<am necessarias,
considerado o rendimento da fortuna
do pupilo qua11do o pai ou a rnae nlio as
houver fixado.
Art.1.747. Compete mais ao tutor:
I - representar o rneuor, ate os dezesseis
anos, nos atos da vida civil, e assisti-lo.
ap6s essa idade, nos atos em que for
parte;
Art. 1.742-1.747
Art. 1742. The judge may appoint a
protutor to inspect the exercise of the
tutorship.
Art. 1743. If the property and
administrative interests require technical
knowledge, are complex or are to be carried
out in places far from the tutor's domicile,
the tutor may, with judicial approval,
delegate partial exercise of the tutorship to
other natural or legal persons.
Art. 1744. The responsibility of the judge
shall be:
I - direct and personal, when he has not
appointed a tutor or did not do so
opportunely;
II - secondary, when he did not require the
legal security from the tutor, nor remove
him as soon as he became suspect.
Art. 1745. The minor's property shall be
delivered to the tutor against an instrument
identifying the items of property and their
value, even if the parents have waived it.
Sole paragraph. If the minor's property is of
considerable value, the judge may make
exercise of the tutorship conditional upon
the giving of sufficient security, but the
security may be waived if the tutor is
widely recognized as a fit and suitable
person.
Art.1746. If the minor has property, he will
be supported and educated out of his
property, and the judge shall determine the
amounts that are necessary for those
purposes, considering the earnings from the
pupil's fortune, when the father or mother
did not fix those amounts.
Art.1747. The tutor shall also:
I - represent the minor, until he attains
sixteen years of age, in the acts of civil life
and thereafter advise the minor in those acts
to which he is a party;

Art. 1.748-1.749 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
II - receive the minor's income and
pensions, and amounts owed to him;
III - make, on his behalf, expenditures for
his support and education, and those for the
administration, preservation and
improvement of his property;
IV - alienate such property of the minor as
is .intended for sale;
V - arrange, on his behalf, for the lease of
land, at an appropriate price.
Art. 1748. The tutor shall also, with the
judge's authorization:
I - pay the minor's debts;
II - accept on his behalf inheritances,
legacies and gifts, even if there are charges
attached to them;
III - enter into settlements;
IV - sell, on his behalf, movable property
that it is not convenient to keep, and
immovable property, in the cases in which
it is permitted to do so;
V - bring action before the courts, or assist
the minor in such actions, and pursue all
measures that are in the minor's interest, as
well as defend him in the claims brought
against him.
Sole paragraph. In the absence of
authorization, the effjcacy of the tutor's
acts depends on subsequent approval by the
judge.
Art. 1749. Even with judicial
authorization, the tutor may not, on pain of
nullity:
I - by private instrument acquire for
himself, or through an intermediary,
movable or immovable property belonging
to the minor;
378
II - receber as rendas e pensocs do me-
nor, e as quantias a ele devidas;
III - fazer-lhe as despesas de subsisten-
cia e educa~ao, bem como as de admi-
nistrai;ao, conservai;:ao e melhoramen-
tos de seus bens:
IV - alienar os hens do menor dcstina-
dos a venda;
V - promover-Ihe, mediante pre~o con-
veniente, o arrendamento de hens de
raiz.
Art. 1.748. Compete tambCm ao rutor,
com autoriza~ao do juiz:
I - pagar as dividas do menor;
II - aceitar por clc heran~as, legados ou
dom;:oes, ainda que com encargos:
III - transigir;
IV - vender-lhe os hens m6veis. cuja
conserva~ao nao convier, e os im6veis
nos casos em que for permitido;
V - propor em jufzo as ~oes, ou nelas
assistir o menor, e promover todas as
diligencias a hem deste, assim como de-
fende-lo nos pleitos contra ele movi-
dos.
Paragrafo iinico. No caso de falta de au-
toriza~ao, a eficacia de ato do tutor de-
pende da aprov~ao ulterior do juiz.
Art. 1.749. Ainda com a autorizm;:ao
judicial, nao pode 0 tutor, sob pena de
nulidade:
I - adquirir por si, ou por interposra pes-
soa, mediante contrato particular, hens
m6veis ou im6veis pertencentes ao me-
nor;
379 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGOE
II - dispor dos hens do menor a titulo
gratuito:
ill· constituir-se ccssionario de crcdito
ou de dircito, contra o menor.
Art. 1.750. Os im6veis pertcncentcs
aos mcnorcs sob rutcla somente podcm
scr vendidos quando houver manifcsta
vanrngem, mediante prcvia avaliai,:ao
judicial e aprovai;ao do juiz.
Art. 1.751. Antes de assumir a tutela. o
tutor dcclarani tudo o que o menor lhc
dcva. sob pcna de nao. lhe poder cobrar.
cnquanto cxen;:a a tutoria. salvo pro-
vando que nao conhecia o dcbito quan-
do a assumiu.
Art.1.752. 0 tutor rcsponde pelos prc-
juizos que, por culpa, ou dolo. causar ao
tutelado; mas tern dircito a ser pago
pclo quc realmcntc despendcr no cxcr-
cicio da tutcla. salvo no caso do arL
1.734, ea perccber rcmunenwao pro-
a
porcional importi\ncia dos hens admi-
nistrados.
§ 1° Ao protutor ser:i arbitruda uma gra·
tifica~ao m6dica pela fiscaliza~ao efc-
mada.
§ 2° Sao solidariamente responsaveis
pelos prejufzos as pessoas as quais
compctia fiscalizar a atividadc do tutor.
c as quc concorrcram para o dano.
Sei;lio V - Dos Bens do Tutelado
Art. 1.753. Os tutores nao podem con-
servar cm seu poder dinhciro dos tutela·
dos, alem do necesst1rio para as dcspcsas
ordin:\rias com o seu sustento. a sua cdu-
cm;;ao e a administra~ao de seus hens.
Art. I. 750- l.753
II - dispose of the minor's property
gratuitously;
III - make himself assignee of a debt or
right against the minor.
Art. 1750. Immovable property belonging
to minors under tutorship may only be sold
when there is manifest advantage in doing
so, upon prior judicial assessment and the
approval of the judge.
Art. 1751. Before assuming the tutorship,
the tutor shall declare everything that the
minor owes to him, on pain of being unable
to collect from the minor while in exercise
of the tutorship, unless he proves that he did
not know of the debt when the tutorship was
assumed.
Art. 1752. The tutor is liable for the losses
that through fault or fraud he causes to the
pupil; but he has the right to be paid that
which he actually expended in the exercise
of the tutorship, except in the case
contemplated in a11. 1734, and to receive
remuneration proportional to the value of
the administered property.
§I. A modest gratification shall be awarded
to the protutor for the inspection performed
by him.
§2. The persons responsible for inspecting
the tutor's activities are solidarily liable for
losses, as are those who contributed to the
damage.
Section V - The Property of the l 1 upil
Art. 1753. Tutors may not keep their
pupils' money in their power, other than
that which is necessary for ordinary
expenses for the pupils' support, education
and the administration of their property.
 Art. 1.754 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. If necessary, gold and silver objects,
precious gems and movable property shall
be evaluated by a suitable person and, after
judicial authorization, shall be sold, and the
product converted into instruments, debt
and bills payable directly or indirectly by
the Union or the States, giving preference
to generation of income, deposited with an
official l:>anking establishment, or used to
acquire immovable property, as the judge
may determine.
§2, Money from any other source shall be
invei;ted in the manner provided for in .the
preceding paragraph.
§3. Tutors are liable for any delay in
investing the amounts referred to above and
shall pay interest at the legal rate from the
day on which they should have made the
investment; this does not exempt them
from the obligation to make the investment,
which the judge shall enforce.
Art.1754. Amounts deposited in an official
bankirtg establishment, as provided for in
the preceding article, may not be
withdrawn except OI1 order of the judge and
then only: .
I - to pay for the expenses of the pupil's
support and education and the
administration of his property;
II - to buy immovable property and
instruments, debt or bills, on the conditions
contemplated in§ 1 of the preceding article;
ill- to be employed in the manner provided
for by the person who gave or left the
amounts;
IV -to be delivered to the orphans, when
they are emancipated or have attained their
majority, or, if they are dead, to their heirs.
380
§ 1° Se houver necessidade, os objetos
de ouro e prata, pedras preciosas e m6-
veis seriio avaliados por pessoa id6nea
e, ap6s autorizai;:ao judicial, alienados,
e o seu produto convertido em tftulos,
obrigai;:5es e letras de responsabilidade
direta ou indireta da Uniao ou dos Esra-
dos, atendendo-se preferentemente a
rentabilidade, e recolhidos ao estabele-
cimento bancario oficial ou aplicado na
aquisii;:iio de im6veis, confonne for de-
terminado pelo juiz.
§ 2° 0 mesmo destino previsto no pani-
grafo antecedente teni o dinheiro prove-
niente de qualquer outraprocedencia.
§ 3° Os tutores respondem pela demora
na aplicai;:iio dos valores acima referi-
dos, pagando os juros legais desde o dia
em que deveriam dar esse destino, o que
niio os exime da ohriga1:ao, que o juiz
fara efetiva, da referida aplicai;:ao.
Art. 1.754. Os valores que existirem
em estahelecimento hancario oficial, na
forma do artigo antecedente, niio se po-
derao retirar, seniio mediante ordem do
juiz, e somente:
I - para as despesas com o sustento e
educai;:iio do tutelado, ou a administra-
~iio de seus hens;
II - para se compi'arem hens im6veis e
titulos, ohrigai;:oes ou letras, nas condi-
i;:oes previstas no § lo do artigo antece-
dente;
III - para se empregarem em confonni-
dade com o disposto por quern os hou-
ver doado, ou deixado;
IV - para se entregarem aos 6rfiios,
quando emancipados, ou maiores, ou,
mortos eles, aos seus herdeiros.
381 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Se~iio VI - Da Prestac;iio de Contas
Art. 1.755. Os tutores, embora o con-
trario tivessem disposto os pais dos tu-
telados, sao ohrigados a prestar contas
da sua administrm;ao. ·
Art. 1.756. No fim de cada ano de ad-
ministrar;ao, os tutores submeterao ao
juiz o halam;o respeclivo, que, depois
de aprovado,'se ancxara aos autos do
inventario.
Art. 1.757. Os tutores prestariio contas
de dais em dois ancs, e tambCm quan-
do, por qualquer motivo, deixarem o
exerci'cio da tutela ou toda vez que o
juiz achar conveniente.
Partigrafo (mico. As contas seriio pres-
tadas em jufzo, e julgadas depois da au-
diencia dos interessados, recolhendo o
tutor imediatamente a estahelecimento
banctirio oficial os saldos, ou adquirin-
do hens im6vcis, ou tftulos, obrigai,;oes
ou letras, na formado § 1° do art. 1.753.
Art. 1.758. Finda a tutela pela emanci-
pai;:ao ou maioridade, a quitai,;ao do me-
nor nao produzira efeito antes de apro-
vadas as contas pelo juiz, suhsistindo
inteira, ate entfio, a responsahilidade do
tutor.
Art. 1.759. Nos casos de morte, ausen-
cia, ou interdi9iio do tutor, as contas se-
rfio prestadas por seus herdeiros ou re-
presentantes.
Art. 1.760. Serao levadas a credito do
tutor todas as dcspesas justificadas ere-
conhecidamente proveitosas ao menor.
Art. 1.761. As despesas com a presta-
~ao das contas serao pagas pelo ture-
lado.
Art. 1.755-1.761
Section VI - Rendering of Acconnts
Art. 1755. Even if the parents of the pupils
have otherwise determined, tutors are
obligated to render accounts of their
administration.
Art. 1756. At the end of each year of
administration, the tutor shall submit to the
judge a statement for the year, which, once
approved, shall be attached to the record of
the inventory.
Art. 1757. Tutors shall render accounts
once every two years, and also when they
cease to exercise the tutorship for any
reason and whenever the judge finds it to be
appropriate.
Sole paragraph. The accou_nts shall be
submitted to the court and Judged after
hearing the interested parties; the tutor shall
immediately deposit the amounts in an
official banking establishment, or acquire
immovable property, instruments, debt or
bills, in the manner provided for in art. 1753
§1.
Art. 1758. Upon termination of the
tutorship by reason of the .minor's
emancipation or his attainment of the age of
majority, release and acquittance given by
the minor shall not produce effect before
the accounts are approved by the judge and
until that time the tutor continues to have
full liability.
Art.1759. In the case of death, absence or
interdiction of the tutor, the accounts shall
be rendered by his heirs or representatives.
Art. 1760. The tutor shall be credited with
all justified expenses that are recognized to
be to the minor's advantage.
Art. 1761. The expenses incurred in
rendering accounts shall be paid by the
pupil.
 Art. 1.762-1.767 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1762. Any misappropriation by the
tutor, and any balance against the pupil, are
money debts and accrue interest from the
final judgment of the accounts.
Section VII-Termination of Tutorship
Art. 1763. A person ceases to be under
tutorship:
I - upon emancipation or attainment of the
age of majority;
II - when he falls under family authority, in
the case of acknowledgment or adoption.
Art.1764. The tutor's functions cease:
I - on the expiry of the term that he was
obligated to serve;
II - when a legitimate excuse arises;
III - on removal.
Art. 1765, A tutor .is obligated to serve for
a period oftwo years.
Sole paragraph. The tutor may continue in
the exercise of the tutorship after expiry of
the term provided for in this article if the
judge finds it to be in the minor's interest.
Art. 1766. A tutor shall be removed if he is
negligent, fails in llis duties or becomes
incapable.
Chapter II - Curatorship
Section I - Interdicted Persons
Art. 1767. The following are subject to
curatorship:
I - persons who, by reason of infirmity or
mental deficiency, do not have the
1 das pessoas a que se referem os incisos
discernment required for the acts of civil
life;
II - persons who, for some other lasting
ca4se, cannot express their will;
382
Art. 1.762. 0 aleance do tutor. hem
como o saldo cion:tr~q, tutelado. si:io df-
vidas de valor e ~epeem juros dcsde o
jillgamento d das contas.
Sc<;iio VII- <;iio da Tutela
Art. 1.763. Cessa a condi<;ilo de rntela-
do:
I - com a maioridade ou a emancipa9ilo
do menor;
II- ao cairo menorsoh o podcrfamiiiar.
no caso de reconhecimento ou ador;ao.
Art.1.764. Cessam as fmwocs do tutor:
I - ao cxpirar o tem10, cm que era obri-
gado a servir;
II - ao sobrcvir escusa legftima:
III - ao ser removido.
Art. 1.765. 0 tutor e obrigado a servir
por espai;o de dois anos.
Paragrafo unico. Pode o tutor continuar
no cxercfcio da tutcla. alem do prazo
previsto nestc artigo, se o quiscr e o juiz
julgar conveniente ao menor.
Art. 1.766. Sera destitufdo o tumr,
quando negligente, prcvaricador ou in-
curso em incapacidade.
Capltuio II - Da Curatcla
Sc~iio I - Dos Intcrditos
Art.1.767. Estiio sujeitos acuratela:
I- aqueles que, por enformidade ou de-
ficiencia mental, niio tivercm o neces-
siirio discernimento para os atos da vida
civil;
II - aquelcs que, por outra causa dura-
doura, niio pudcrcm exprimir a sua von-
tade;
383 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Ill - OS deficientes mentais. OS ebrios
habinmis e os viciados em t6xicos;
IV - os exccpcionais scm complcto de-
senvolvimento mental;
V - os pr6digos.
Art. 1.768. A interdi\:iiO deve scr pro-
movida:
I - pelos pais ou tutorcs:
II - pelo conjuge. OU por qualqucr pa-
rcnte:
Ill - pclo Ministerio Piiblico.
Art. 1.769. 0 Ministerio Publico s6
promovera interdi\:iio:
I - cm caso de doern;:a mental grave;
II - sc niio existir ou niio pro mover a in-
terdi<;ao alguma das pessoas dcsigna-
, das nos incisos I e II do rutigo antecc-
dente;
Ill - se, cxistindo. forem incapazes as
pcssoas mencionadas no inciso antecc-
dente.
Art. 1.770. Nos casos em que a interdi-
i;:ao for.promovida pclo Ministerio Pu-
blico, o juiz nomearii defensor ao su-
posto incapaz; nos dcmais casos o Mi-
niscerio Publico serii o defensor.
Art. 1.771. Antes de pronunciar-se
acerca da interd.i\!ao. o juiz. assistido
por especialistas, examinani pessoal-
mente o argiiido de incapacidade.
Art. 1.772. Pronunciada a interdi~i:io
Ill cIV do art. 1.767, ojuiz assinarii. se-
gundo o estado ou o delienvolvimcnto
mental do interdito, os Ii mites da cura-
tela. que poderao circunscrever-se as
restrii;:oes constantes do art. 1.782.
Art. 1.768-1.772
III - persons suffering from mental
deficiency, habitual inebriates and addicts
of toxic substances;
IV - exceptional persons without complete
mental development;
V - prodigals.
Art. 1768. Interdiction shall be applied for:
I - by parents or tutors;
II - by the spouse or any relative;
III- by the Public Ministry.
Art. 1769. The Public Ministry shall only
apply for interdiction:
I - in cases of serious mental illness;
II - if the persons designated in items I and
II of the preceding article do not exist or if
none of them apply for interdiction;
III - if the persons mentioned in the
preceding item are incapable.
Art.1770. In the cases in which !he Public
Ministry applies for interdiction, the judge
shall appoint a defender to the person
alleged to be incapable; in the other cases
the Public Ministry shall be the defender.
Art. 1771. Before pronouncing on the
interdiction, the judge, with the assistance
of specialists, shall personally examine the
person claimed to be incapable.
Art. 1772. Once interdiction of the persons
refe1Ted to in itemsJII and IV of art. 1767 is
pronounced, the judge shall determine the
limits of the curatorship, in accordance
with the state or mental development of the
interdicted person; the curatorship may be
restricted in the manner contemplated in
art. 1782.
 Art. l.773-1. 779 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
~rt. 1?7~. The judgment declaring the
mterd1ct10n shall produce immediate
effects, even if subject to appeal.
Art. 1 ?74. The provisions concerning
tutorship shall apply to curatorship, with
the modifications contained in the
following articles.
~rt.177s. The spouse or companion of an
!nt~~d1cte~ person, if not separated
JUdtcrally or m fact, is curator as ofright.
§ 1. In. the absence of a spouse or
compamon, the father or the mother is the
legal curator; in their absence, the legal
curator is the descendent who shows
himself to be most suitable.
§2. Among the descendents, the nearer
precede the more remote.
§3. In the absence of the persons mentioned
in this article, the judge shall choose the
curator.
Art.1776. If there are means to enable the
interdii;:ted person to recover, the curator
shall cause the treatment to be given in an
apprqpriate establishment.
Art. 1777. The interdicted persons referred
to in items I, III and IV of art. 1767 shall be
committed to suitable establishments, if
they do not adapt to home life.
Art. 1778. The curator's authority extends
~o th~ persons and property of the
mterdrcted person' s,children, subject to art.
5,
Section II- Curatorship of the Unborn
and oflnfirm Persons and Persons with
Physical Disabilities
Art. 1779. A curator shall be appointed to
an unborn child if the father dies while the
woman is pregnant, and she does not hold
family authority.
384
Art.1.773. A senten9a que declara a in-
terdi~ao produz efeitos desde logo, em-
bora sujeita a recurso.
a
Art. 1.774. Aplicam-se curatela as
disposi9oes concementes a tutela. com
as modifica9iies dos artigos seguintes.
Art.1.775. 0 conjuge ou companheiro,
nlio separado judicialmente ou de fato,
e, de direito, curador do outro, quando
interdito.
§ 1° Na falta do conjuge OU companhei-
ro, ecurador legftimo o pai ou a mac; na
falta destes, o descendente que se de-
monstrar mais apto.
§ 2° Entre os descendentes, os mais pr6-
ximos precedem aos mais remotos.
§ 3° Na falta das pessoas mencionadas
neste artigo; compete ao juiz a esculha
do curador.
Art.1.776. Havendo meiu de recuperar
o interdito, o curador promover-lhe-a o
tratamento em estabelecimento apro-
priado.
Art.1.777. Os interditos referidus nos
incisos I, III e IV do art I. 767 serao re-
colhidos em estabelecimentos adcqua-
dos, quando nao se adaptarem au cunvf-
vio domestico.
Art.1.778. A autoridade do curador es-
tende-se apessoa e aos hens dos filhos
do curatelado, observado o art. 5°.
Se~iio II - Da Curatela do Nascituro
e do Enfermo on Portador de
Deficicncia I<'isica
Art. 1.779. Dar-se-a curador ao nasci-
turo, se o pai falecer estando gravida a
rnulher, e niio tendo o puder familiar.
CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
385
Paragrafo t1nico. Se a mulher estiver in-
terdita, seu curador sera o do nascituro.
Art. 1.780. A requerimentu do enfermo
uu portador de deficiencia fisica, ou, na
impussibilidade de faze-lo, de qualquer
das pessoas a que se refere o art. l. 768,
dar-se-lhe-a curador para cuidar de to-
dos ou alguns de seus negocius uu bens.
Se~iio III- Do Exercicio da Curatela
Art. 1.781. As regras a respeito du
exercfcio da tutela aplicam-se ao da cu-
ratela, com a restri~au do art. 1.772 e as
desta Se1;ao.
Art. 1.782. A interdis;au du pr6digo s6
o privara de, sern curador, emprestar,
transigir, dar quitai;:iio, alienar, hipote-
car, demandar ou ser demand ado, e pra-
ticar, em geral, os atos que nao sejam de
mera administra~ao.
Art. 1.783. Quando u curador for o
conjuge e o regime de bens do casa-
mento for de cornunhiio universal, nao
sera obrigado a prestayao de contas,
salvo determinas;ao judicial.
Livro V - Do Direito das Sucessiies
Titulo I - Da Sucessiio em Geral
Capitulo I - Disposi~iies Gerais
Art. 1.784. Aberta a sucessao, a heran-
s;a transmite-se, desd.e logo, aos herdei-
ros legftimos e testamentarios.
Art.1.785. A sucessiio abre-se no lugar
do ultimo domicflio do falecido.
Art. 1.786. A sucessao da-se por lei ou
por disposi~au de t11tima vuntade.
Art. 1. 780-1. 786
Sole paragraph. If the woman is interdicted,
her curator shall be curator of the unborn
child.
Art. 1780. On application by an infirm
person or a person with a physical
disability, or if they are unable to make
application, by any of the persons referred
to in art. 1768, a curator shall be appointed
to take care of all or some of the person's
business and property.
Section III - The Exercise of
Curatorship
Art. 1781. The rules regarding the exercise
of tutorship apply to the exercise of
curatorship, with the restrictions set out in
art. 1772 and in this Section.
Art. 1782. The interdiction of a prodigal
shall only deprive him of the ability to make
loans and settlements, give acquittance,
alienate, hypothecate, make claims, defend
claims and, in general, perform acts that are
not merely administrative in nature,
without the assistance of the curator.
Art. 1783. When the curator is the spouse
and the matrimonial property regime is
universal community, the curator is not
obligated to render accounts except by
judicial order.
Book V - The Law of Successions
Title I - Successions in General
Chapter I - General Provisions
Art. 1784. Upon the opening of a
succession, the inheritance is transmitted
immediately to the legal and testamentary
heirs.
Art. 1785. The succession opens in the
place of the deceased' s last domicile.
Art. 1786. The succession takes place by
law or by disposition of last will.
Art. 1.787-1.791 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1787. The succession and the capacity
to succeed are governed by the law in force
at the time the succession opens.
Art. 1788. If a person dies without a
testament, the inheritance is transmitted to
the legal heirs; the same occurs with respect
to property that is not included in the
testament; and legal succession occurs if
the testament lapses, or is adjudged null.
Art. 1789. If there are necessary heirs, the
testator may only dispose of one-half of the
inheritance.
Art. 1790. The deceased' s com pan ion shall
have a share in the succession, with respect
to property acquired by onerous title dtiring
the stable union, on the following
conditions:
I-if the companion competes with children
common to the companion and the
deceased, the companion shall have the
right to a share equal to the share attributed
by law to the child;
II - if the companion competes with
descendents of the deceased only, the
companion shall be entitled to one-half of
that which falls to each of them;
III - if the companion competes with other
relatives capable of succeeding, the
companion shall have one-third of the
inheritance;
IV - if there are no other relatives capable
of succeeding, tlie companion shall have
the right to the whole of the inheritance.
Chapter II - The Inheritance and its
Administration
Art. 1791. An inheritance devolves as an
undivided whole, even if there are various
heirs.
386
Art.1.787. Regula a sucessao ea legi-
timai;ao para suceder a lei vigente ao
tempo da abertura daquela.
Art.1.788. Morrendo t1 pessoa 'cm tcs-
tamento. transmite a herarn;a ans hcr-
dciros legftimos; o mesmo ocorrera
quanto aos hens que nao forcm com-
prccndidos no testamcmo; c subsiste a
sucesslio lcgftima sc o testamento cadu-
car, ou for julgado nulo.
Art. 1.789. Havcndo herdeiros neces-
sarios, 0 testador sci podcra dispor da
metade du hcran9a.
Art. 1.790. A companhe1ra ou o com-
panhciro participan1 da succssao do ou-
tro. quanto aos bens adquiridos oncro-
samente na vigcncia da uniao cstavel,
nas condi9oes segu intes:
I - se concorrcr com.filhos comuns. tera
dircito a uma quota equivalente a que
por lei for atribufda ao filho;
II - se concorrcr com dcsccndentes s6
do autor du hcrani;a. tocar-lhe-a a mcta-
dc do que couber a cada um daqueles;
III - se concorrer com m1tros parcmcs
sucessfvcis, tera direito a um tcri;o du
herani;:a;
IV - niio havendo parcntes sucessfveis,
tera direito atotalidadc da heraJl\'.tl.
Capitulo II - Da Ileram;a e de sua
Administra"iio
Art. 1.791. A heran9a defere-se como
um todo unitario, ainda que viirios se-
jam os hcrdeiros.
387 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Paragrafo ilnico. Ate a partilha, o dirci-
to dos co-herdciros. quanto a proprie-
dade e posse da hernnc;a. ser;i indivisi-
vel, e rcgular-sc-:i pelas normas rclati-
vas ao condomfnio.
Art. 1.792. 0 herdciro nao responde
por encargos superiorcs as fon;as da he-
nm\'a; incumbc-lhe, porcm. a prova do
excesso, salvo se houver invcntiirio que
a cscuse, dcmonstrando o valor dos
bens hcrdados.
Art. 1.793. 0 direito asucessao aherta,
hem co moo quinhao de que disponha o
co-herdeiro, pode scr objeto de cessao
por escrilura p(tblica.
§ l 0 Os dircitos, conferidos ao herdciro
cm cotJseqUencia de substituic;ao ou de
direito de acrescer. presumcm-se nao
abrangidos pcla ccsslio fcita antcrior-
mentc.
§ 2° J3 inefo.:az a cessao, pc lo co-hcrdci-
ro, de scu dirclto hcreditilrio sob re qual-
quer hem da hcram;a considcrado sin-
gularmcmc.
§ 3° Inelicaz ea disposir;lio. sem prcvia
autorizat,;ao do juiz da succssao, por
qualquer herdeiro. de bem componentc
do acervo hercditario, pendente a indi-
visibilidade.
Art. 1.794. 0 co-herdeiro nao podera
ceder a sua quota hcreditaria a pessoa
estranha asuccssao, se outro co-herdci-
ro a quiser, tanto por tanto.
Art. 1.795. 0 co-hcrdeiro. a quem nao
se lier conhecimcnto da ccssi'io, podera.
depositado o prc<;o, haver para si a quo-
ta cedida a estranho, se o requerer ate
cento e oitenta dias ap6s a transmissao.
Paragrafo ilnico. Sendo varios OS co-
herdciros a cxcrcer a prefercncia, entrc
el es sc distribuira o quinhao cedido. na
propon;:ao das respcctivas quotas hcre-
ditarias.
Art. 1.792-1.795
Sole Paragraph, Until partition, the right of
the co-heirs, with respect to ownership and
possession of the inheritance, shall be
indivisible and shall be governed by the
rules regarding co-ownership.
Art.1792. An heir is not liable for charges
greater than the value of the inheritance; he
has. however, the burden of proving the
excess. unless there is an inventory
demonstrating the value of the inherited
property, and so excuses him from making
the proof.
Art.1793. The right to an open succession,
as well as the share to which a co-heir is
entitled, may be assigned by public writing.
§ l. Rights conferred on the heir as a
consequence of substitution or rights of
accretion are presumed not to be covered by
a prior assignment.
§ 2. Assignment by a co-heir of his rights to
inherit with respect to any single item of
property in the inheritance is invalid.
§ 3. Without prior authorization by the
judge of the succession, disposition by any
heir of an item of property within the mass
of the inheritance while it is still undivided
is invalid.
Art. 1794. A co-heir may not assign his
share in the inheritance to a person who is a
stranger to the succession if another co-heir
wishes to acquire it for the same price.
Art. 1795. A co-heir who was not made
aware of the assignment may, upon deposit
of the price, have the share assigned to the
stranger for himself, ifhe demands it within
180 days after the transmission.
Sole paragraph. If various co-heirs exercise
the right .of preference, the assigned share
shall be distributed among them in
proportion to their respective shares.
 Art. I. 796-1. 799 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1796. Within thirty days from the
opening of the succession, the inventory of
the deceased' s patrimony shall be
commenced before the competent court in
the place of the succession, for the purposes
ofliguidation and, if applicable, partition of
the inheritance.
Art. 1797. Prior to the administrator's
commitment to administer the succession,
administration of the inheritance shall fall,
successively:
I - to the spouse or companion, if he or she
lived with the deceased at the time the
succession opened; ' gem-sc pelas d isposic;oes concernentes
II - to the heir who has the possession and
admini.stration of the property and, if there
is more than one heir in such
circumstances, to the oldest;
m - to the executor of the testament;
IV - to a person trusted by the judge, in the
absence or excuse of the persons indicated
in the preceding items, or when they have
been removed for serious motives made
known to the judge.
Chapter III - Heirsbip
Art. 1798. Persons born or conceived at the
time the succession opens have the capacity
to inherit.
Art. 1799. In a ·testate succession, the
following may also inherit:
I - the children not yet conceived of the
persons designated by the testator,
provided the persons are alive at the time
the succession opens;
II - legal persons;
III - legal persons to be organized in the
form of a foundation, pursuant to the
dispositions of the testator.
388
Art. 1.796. No prazo de trinta dias, a
contar da abcrtura da sucessao, instau-
rar-se-a invent{irio do patrimonio here-
ditario, perante o jufzo competente no
lugar da sucessao, para fins de liquida-
i;ao e, quando for o caso, de partilha da
herani;a.
Art. 1.797. Ate o compromisso do in-
ventariante, a administrai;ao da heram;a
caherti, sucessivamente:
I - ao conjuge ou companheiro, se com
o outro convivia ao tempo da ahertura
da sucessao;
II - ao herdeiro que estiver na posse c
administra~ao dos hens, e, sc houver
mais de um nessas condii;oes, ao mais
velho;
III - ao testamenteiro;
IV - a pessoa de confian~a do juiz, na
falta ou escusa das indicadas nos inci-
sos antecedentes, ou quando tiverem de
ser afastadas por motivo grave levado
ao conhecimento do juiz.
Capitulo Ill - Da Voca~iio
Hercditaria
Art. 1.798. Legitimam-se a suceder as
pessoas nascidas ou ja concch id as no
momenta da ahertura da sucessao.
Art. 1.799. Na sucessao testamenttiria
podem ainda ser chamados a suceder:
I - os filhos, ainda nao concebidos. de
pessoas indicadas pelo testador, desde
que vivas estas ao abrir-se a sucessao;
II - as pessoas jurfdicas;
III - as pessoas jurfdicas, cuja organiza-
i;ao for determinada pelo testador sob a
forma de fundai;ao.
389 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.800. No caso do inciso I do arti-
go antecedente, os bens da heran1_:a se-
rao confiados, ap6s a liquida~ao ou par-
tilha, a curador nomea<lo pelo juiz.
§ I 0 Salvo disposic;ao testamentiiria em
contriirio, a curatela caberii a pessoa
cujo filho o testador esperava ter por
herdeiro, c, sucessivamente, as pessoas
indicadas no art. 1.775,
§ 2° Os poderes, deveres e responsabili-
dades do curador, assim nomeado, re-
acuratela dos incapazes, no que couber.
§ 3° Nascendo com vida o herdciro es-
pcrado, ser-lhe-a deferida a sucessao,
com os frutos e rendimentos relativos a
deixa, a partir da morte do testador.
§ 4° Se, decorridos dois anos ap6s a
abertura da sucessao, nao for concebido
o herdeiro esperado, os hens reserva-
dos, salvo disposii;:ao em contriirio do
testador, caberlio aos herdciros legfti-
mos.
Art. 1.801. Nao podem ser nomeados
herdeiros nem legatarios:
I - a pessoa que, a rogo, escreveu o tes-
tamento, nem o seu conjuge ou compa-
nheiro, ou os seus ascendentes e ir-
mlios;
II - as testemuhhas do testamento:
III - o concubino do testador casado,
salvo se este, sem culpa sua, estivcr se-
parado de fato do conjuge ha rnais de
cinco anos;
IV - o tabeliiio, civil ou militar, ou o co-
mandante ou escriviio, perante quern se
fizer. assim como o que fizer ou apro-
var o testarnento.
Art. 1.800-1.80 I
Art.1800. In the case contemplated in item
I of the preceding article, the property of the
inheritance, after liquidation or partition,
shall be confided to a curator appointed by
the judge.
§ I. Saving testamentary disposition to the
contrary, the curatorship shall fall to the
person whose child the testator expected to
be his heir and then, successively, to the
persons indicated in art. 1775.
§ 2. The powers, duties and liabilities of the
curator so appointed shall be governed by
the provisions concerning the curatorship
of incapables, to the extent applicable.
§ 3. In the event of live birth of the expected
heir. the succession shall devolve upon
him, together with the fruits and earnings of
the disposition in his favor, from the time of
the death of the testator.
§ 4. If the expected heir is not conceived
within two years after the opening of the
succession, the property reserved to him
shall go to the legal heirs, unless the testator
otherwise disposed.
Art. 1801. The following may not be
named as heirs or legatees:
I - a person who, at the testator's request,
wrote the testament, nor his spouse or
companion, ascendents or brothers and
sisters;
II - the witnesses to the testament;
III - the concubine of a married testator,
unless the testator, without fault on his part,
had been separated in fact from his spouse
for more than five years;
IV - the civil or military notary,
commander or clerk before whom the
testament was made, or who made or
approved the testament.
Art. 1.802-1.806 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1802. Testamentary dispositions in
favor of persons who do not have capacity
to inherit are null, even when they are made
in the form of an onerous contract or
through an intermediary.
Sole paragraph. The ascendents,
descendents, brothers, sisters and the
spouse or companion of a person incapable
of inheriting are presumed to be
intennediaries.
Art. 1803. A disposition in favor of the
child of a concubine is licit if the chlld is the
testator's.
Chapter IV - Acceptance and
Renunciatfon of Inheritances
Art. 1804. Upon acceptance of an
inheritance, its transmission to the heir
becomes definitive, with effect from the
opening of the succession.
Sole paragraph. The transmission is held
not to have taken place when the heir
renounces the inheritance.
Art. 1805. Acceptance of the inheritance,
when express, is made by written
declaration; when it is tacit, it must result
solely from acts that are peculiar to the
quality of heir.
§ 1. Useful acts, such as the deceased' s
funeral, merely conservatory acts and acts
of administration and provisional
safekeeping do not express acceptance of
the inheritance.
§ 2. Likewise, pure and simple gratuitous
assignment of the inheritance to the other
co-heirs does not imply acceptance.
Art. 1806. Renunciation of the inheritance
must be set out in a public instrument or
judicial act.
390
Art. 1.802. Sao nulas as disposii,;5es
testamentarias em favor de pessoas nao
legitimadas a succder. ainda quando si-
muladas sob a fornia de conlralo onero-
so, ou fcitas medianre intcrposra pcs-
soa.
Paragrafo (mico. Presumem-se pessoas
interptlstas os asccndcntcs, os dcsccn-
dcntes, os irmfios co dinjuge ou com-·
panhciro do nao legitimado a suceder.
Art. 1.803. Elicita a deixa ao filho do
concubino. quando tambem o for do
testador.
Capitulo IV - Da Accita1;iio e
Renuncia da Heran1;a
Art. 1.804. Aceita a heranl,!a. torna-se
definitiva a sua transmissao ao hcrdci-
ro. desde a abcrtura da sucessao.
Pan1grafo unico. A transmissao tem-;c
por nao verificada quando o hcrdeiro
renuncia aherlllll,!ll.
Art. 1.805. A aceita9ao da hernn9a.
quando expressa. faz-se por dcclarac;ao
escrita; quando tacita, ha de resultar
tao-somente de atos pr6prios da quali-
dade de hcrdeiro.
§ f 0 Nao exprimcm aceitac;ao de heran-
~a os mos oficiosos. como o funeral do
finado. os meramentc conservat6rios,
ou os de administral,!fiO e guarda provi-
s6ria.
§ 2° Nao importa igualmenlc aceilai;:ao
a cessao gratuita, pura e simples, da he-
ram;:a. aos demais co-herdeiros.
Art.1.806. A renuncia da heram;:a deve
constar expressamente de instmmento
publico ou termo judicial.
391 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art.1.807. 0 interessado em que o her-
deiro declare se aceita, ou nao, a heran-
9a. podera. vinte dias ap6s aberta a su-
cessao. requcrcr ao juiz prazo razoavel,
nao maior de trinta dias, para. nelc. se
pronunciar o hcrdeiro. sob pena de sc
haver a heran~a por aceila.
Art. 1.808. Nao sc pode aceitar ou rc-
nunciar a heran9a cm parte, sob condi-
i;:ao ou a termo.
§ I 0 0 hcrdeiro. a qucm sc tcstarcm Je-
gados, podc aceita-los, renunciando a
hcnmi,;a; ou, aceitando-a, repudia-los.
§ 2° 0 herdciro. chamado, na mesma
succssao. a mais de um quinhao hercdi-
tario, sob tftulos sucess6rios divcrsos.
pode livrcmente dcliberar quanto aos
quinh5cs que accita e aos que renuncia.
Art. 1.809. Faleccndo o herdciro antes
de dcclarar se accita a hcram;a. o podcr
de aceitar passa-lhe aos herdciros, a
mcnos que se tratc de vot:a<;iio adstrita a
uma condii,;ao suspensiva. ainda nao
veriDcada.
Paragrafo lmico. Os chamados asuccs-
slio do herdeiro falccido antes da aceita-
i;:ao, desdc que concordcm em rccebcr a
segunda heranr;a. poderao accitar ou re-
nunciar a primcira.
Art. 1.810. Na succssao legftima. a par-
te do renunciantc acresce a dos outros
herdeiros da mesma classe e. sendo ele
o unico desm. dcvolvc-se aos da subse-
qlicnte.
Art. 1.811. Ninguem podc suceder,
rcprcsentando herdeiro rcnunciante.
Sc, porem. ele for o unico legftimo da
sua classe, ou se lodos os ourros da
mesma classe renunciarem a heram,:a.
podcrao OS filhos vir a$UCCSSUO, por di-
reito pr6prio, e por cabe1;a.
Art. 1.807-1.811
Art.1807. A party interested in having the
heir declare that he accepts, or not. the
inheritance may, within 20 days after the
opening of the succession, apply to a judge
to establish ::i reasonable period of time, not
exceeding 30 days. for the heir to so declare
himself. on pain of being held to have
accepted the inheritance.
Art. UW8. An inheritance may not be
accepted or renounced in part. or subject to
a condition or term.
§ I. An heir to whom legacies have been
made by testament may accept them,
renouncing the inheritance; if the heir
accepts the inheritance, he repudiates the
legacies.
§ 2. An heir who is entitled to more than one
share in the same succession bv different
titles of succession may freely choose
which shares he accepts and which he
renounces.
Art. 1809. If an heir dies before declaring
whether he accepts the inheritance, the
power of acceptance passes to his heirs,
unless the deceased heir's capacity to
inherit was subject to a suspensive
condition which has not yet been fulfilled.
Sole paragraph. Those called to the
succession of the heir who died prior to
acceptance may accept orrenounce the first
inheritance, provided they agree to receive
the second.
Art. 1810. In legal successions, the share of
a renouncing hilr accretes to the other heirs
of the same~class; if he is the sole member
of the class, the share devolves to the heirs
of the next class.
Art. 1811. No one who represents a
renouncing heir may inherit. However, if
the renouncing heir was the sole member of
his class, or if all the other heirs of the same
class renounce the inheritance, the children
may come into the succession, in their own
right, by heads.
Art. 1.812-1.815 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1812. The acts of acceptance and
renunciation of inheritance are irrevocable.
Art. 1813. When an heir's renunciation
injures his creditors, they may, with the
judge's authorization, accept the
inheritance in the renouncing heir's name.
§ 1. The creditors shall submit their claim to
the judge within thirty days of their
becoming aware of the event.
§ 2. Once the debts of the renouncing heir
are paid, the renunciation prevails as to the
remainder, which devolves to the other
heirs.
Chapter V - Those Excluded from the
Succession
Art.1814. The following heirs and legatees
are excluded from the succession:
I - those who have committed, alone or
with others, or have participated in the
commission of, intentional homicide, or
attempted intentional homicide, against the
person of the deceased or of any of his
spouse, companion; ascendents or
descendents;
II - those who have brought, before the
courts, a calumnious charge against the
deceased or have committed a crime
against his honor or that of his spouse or
companion;
III - those who have, by violence or
fraudulent means, hindered or prevented
the deceased from freely disposing of his
property by last will.
Art. 1815. The exclusion of the heir or
legatee, in any of these cases of
unworthiness, shall be declared by
judgment.
Sole paragraph. The right to demand the
exclusion of an heir or legatee is
extinguished in four years from the opening
of the succession.
392
Art. 1.812. Sao irrevogaveis os atos de
aceita\:ao ou de renuncia da heran~a.
Art. 1.813. Quando o herdeiro prcjudi-
car os seus credores. rcnunciando ahe-
ran\:a. poderao eles, com autorizm;:ao
do juiz. aceita-la em nomc do rcnun-
ciante.
§ l 0 A habilita~1io dos credores se farii
no prazo de trinta dias seguintes ao co-
nhecimento do fato.
§ 2° Pagas as dfvidas do renunciante,
prevalece a rem'tncia quanta ao rema-
ncscente, quc sera devolvido aos de-
mais herdciros.
Capitulo V - Dos Excluidos da
Sucessiio
Art. 1.814. Sao exclufdos da sucessao
os herdeiros ou legatarios:
I - que houverem sido autores, co-au to-
res ou partfcipes de homicidio doloso,
ou tentativa deste, contra a pessoa de
cuja sucessao se tratar, seu conjuge,
companheiro, ascendente ou descen-
dente;
II • que houverem acusado caluniosa-
mente em jufzo o autor da herarn;a ou
iflcorrcrem em crime contra a sua hon-
ra, ou de seu conjuge ou companheiro;
Ill - que, por violencia ou meios fraudu-
lentos, inibirem ou obstarem o autor da
heran~a de dispor livremente de seus
bens por ato de t1ltima vontade.
Art. 1.815. A exclusao do herdeiro ou
legatario, em qualquer <lesses .casos de
indignidade, sera declarada por senten-
~a.
Paragrafo unico. 0 direito de demandar
a exclusao do herdeiro ou legatario ex-
tingue-se em quatro anos. contados da
abertura da sucessao.
393 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.816. Sao pessoais os efeitos da
exclusao; os descendentes do herdeiro
exclufdo sucedem, como se ele morto
fosse antes da abertura da sucessao.
Pariigrafo t1nico. 0 exclufdo da succs-
sao nao tera direito ao usufruto ou aad-
ministra~ao dos bens que a seus suces-
sores couberem na heran9a, nem a su-
cessao evenmal desses bens.
Art. 1.817. Sao validas as alienrn;:oes
onerosas de bens hercdittlrios a tercei-
ros de boa-fe, e os atos de administra-
~ao legalmente praticados pelo herdei-
ro, antes da scnten\;a de exclusao; mas
aos herdeiros subsiste, quando prejudi-
cados, o direito de demandar-lhe perdas
e danos.
Paragrafo unico. 0 exclufdo da suces-
sao e obrigado a restitu iros frutos e ren-
dimentos que dos hens da heran9a hou-
ver percebido. mas tem direito a ser in-
denizado das despesas com a consel"Va-
\;aO deles.
Art. 1.818. Aquele que incorreu em
atos que determinem a exclusao da he-
ra119a sera admitido a suceder. se o
ofendido o tiver expressamente reabili-
tado em testamento, ou em outro ato au-
tentico.
Paragrafo unico. Nao havendo reabili-
ta\;aO expressa, o indigno, contemplado
em testamento d·o ofendido, quando o
testador, ao testar, ja conhecia a causa
da indignidade, pode suceder no limite
da disposi1:ao testamentaria.
Capitulo VI - Da Heram;a Jacente
Art.1.819, Falecendo alguem sem dei-
xar testamento nem herdeiro legftimo
notoriamente conhecido, os bens da he-
rarn;:a. depois de arrccadados, ficarao
sob a guarda e administra~ao de um cu-
rador, ate a sua entrega ao sucessor de-
vidamehte habilitado OU a declara9ao
de sua vac1incia.
Art. 1816. The effects of exclusion are
personal; the descendents of the excluded
heir succeed him, as if he had died prior to
the opening of the succession.
Sole paragraph. A person excluded from
the succession shall not have the right to
usufruct or administration of the property
in the inheritance that falls to his
successors. nor to any succession of such
property.
Art. 1817. Onerous alienations of property
within the inheritance to good faith third
parties, as well as acts of administration
legally performed by the heir, prior to the
judgment of exclusion, are valid; but the
heirs, if injured, have the right to claim
losses and damage from him.
Sole paragraph. A person excluded from
the succession is bound to restitute the
fruits and earnings he received from the
property of the inheritance. but he has the
right to be indemnified for his expenses in
preserving the property.
Art. 1818. A person who has committed
acts that result in exclusion from
inheritance shall be permitted to succeed if
the victim expressly rehabilitated him in his
testament or other authentic act.
Sole paragraph. Where there is no express
rehabilitation, an unworthy heir or legatee
may succeed within the limits of the
testamentary disposition, if the testator,
when making the testament, knew of the
cause of the unworthiness.
Chapter VI- Vacant Inheritances
Art. 1819. If a person dies without leaving
a testament or generally known legal heir,
the property of the inheritance, after it has
been collected, shall remain in the keeping
and under the administration of a curator
until it is delivered to a duly qualified
successor or is declared vacant.
 Art. 1.820-1.825 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1820. After collection of the property
and completion of the inventory, notices
shall be issued in the manner provided for
under the legislation governing procedure
and if, after the lapse of one year from the
date notice was first published, there is no
heir who is recognized or in the process of
being recognized, the inheritance shall be
declared vacant.
Art. 1821. Creditors have the right to
demand payment of proven debts, within
the limits of the value of the inheritance.
Art. 1822. The declaration of vacancy of
the inheritance shall not prejudice h-eirs
who thereafter arc legally recognized; but
after the lapse of five years from the
opening of the succession. the collected
property shall pass into the dominion of the
Municipality or the. Federal District, if it is
located within their respective boundaries,
and.shall be incorporated into the dominion
of the Uni on if situated in federal territory.
Sole paragraph. Collateral relatives are
excluded from the succession if they are not
recognized before the declaration of
vacancy.
Art. 1823. When all those called to succeed
renounce the inheritance, it shall be
declared vacant immediately.
Chapter VII - Claim to
Inheritance
Att. 1824. An heir may, in an action of
claim to inheritance, demand that his right
to succeed be recognized in order to obtain
restitution of the inheritance or part of it,
against anyone who, in the quality of heir,
or even without right, possesses it.
Art. 1825. An action of claim to
inheritance, even if exercised by only one
of the heirs, may extend to all the property
of the inheritance.
394
Art.1.820. Praticadas as diligcncias de
arrecadm,;ao c ultimado o inventario. se-
rao expedidos editais na forrna da lei
processual. e, decorrido um mm de sua
prime1ra puhlicrn;ao, sem que ha1a her-
dciro habilitado, ou pemla hahilitrn;<lo.
seni a hera111:a declarada vacamc
Art.1.821.1~ assegurado am. crcdorc> o
direito de pedir o pagamento <las dfvi-
da~ rcconhecidas. nos limites das fon;as
da heran\;a.
Art. 1.822. A dcclara~ilo de vacilncm
da hcram,;a nilo prejudicani os herdeiros
quc lcgalmenle se habilitarem: mas, de-
corridos cinco anos da abertura da 'u-
cessiio. os bcns arrccadados passarao
ao domfnio do Municfpio ou do Distrito
Federal. se localizados nas rcspcctivas
circunscrii;oes, incorporamlo-sc ao do-
mfnio da Uniao quando situados em ter-
rit6rio federal.
Paragrnfo tinico. Nao se habilitando ate
a declarai;iio de vacfincia, os colaterais
ficariio exclufdos da succssao.
Art. 1.823. Quando todos os chamado'
a succder rcnunciarcrn a herarn;a, scra
csta desdc logo declarada vacame.
Capitulo Vil - Da pcfo,;iio de
hcran1;a
Art. 1.824. 0 herdeiro pode, em rn,;ao
de peti1.=ao de hcran9a. dcrnandar o rc-
conhecimento de seu direito sucesso-
rio. para obtcr a rcstitui~iio da hcram;a.
ou de partc dela. contra qucm. na quali-
dade de herdeiro. ou rncsmo scm titulo,
apossua
Art. 1.825. A ai;:iio de petii;:ao de hcran-
~a. ainda quc exercida por urn so dos
herdeiro~. podcra cornpreendcr todos
os hens hereditarios.
395 CODIGO CIVIL BlLINGUE
Art. 1.826. 0 possuidor da heram,:a esta
ohrigado a restitui1rao dos hens do acer-
vo. fixando-se-lhe a responsahilidade
scgundo a sua posse, ohservado o dis-
posto nos arts. l.214 a 1.222.
Paragrafo (mico. A partir da citai;:iio, a
responsahilidade do possuidor se ha de
aferir pelas regras concernentes a posse
de rna-fe ca mora.
Art. 1.827. 0 herdeiro pode demnndar
os bens da herani;:a. mcsmo em pod er de
terceiros, sern prejufzo da responsabili-
dade do possuidor originario pelo valor
dos hens alienados.
Paragrafo J'.mico. Sao eficazes as aliena-
i;oes feitas, a tftulo oneroso, pelo her-
deiro aparente a terceiro de boa-fe.
Art.1.828~ 0 herdeiro aparente, que de
boa-re houver pago urn lcgado, nao esta
obrigado a prestar o equivalente ao ver-
dadeiro sucessor, ressalvado aeste o di-
rcito de proccder contra quem o rece-
heu.
Titulo II - Da Sucessao Legitima
Capitulo 1-Da·Ordem da Voca~iio
Hereditaria
Art. 1.829. A sucessao !egftima defere-
se na ordem seguinte:
I - aos descendentes, em concorrencia
com o conjuge sohrevivente, salvo se
casado este com o falecido no regime
da cornunhao universal, ou no da sepa-
ra(,:iiO ohrigat6ria de heris (art. 1.640,
paragrafo unico); ou se, no regime da
cornunhiio parcial, o autor da heran~a
nao houver deixado hens particulares;
II - aos ascendentes, em concorrencia
corn o c6njuge;
Ill - ao conjuge sohreviventc;
Art. l.826-1.829
Art. 1826. The possessor of the inheritance
is obligated to restitute all the property of
the mass; liability attaches to him
according to the nature of his possession, in
accordance with the provisions of arts.
1214 to 1222.
Sole paragraph. From the.time of citation,
the liability of the possessor is determined
by the rules concerning bad faith
possession and default.
Art. 1827. The heir may demand the
property of the inheritance even if it is in the
power of third parties, without prejudice to
the liability of the original possessor for the
value of the alienated property.
Sole paragraph. Alienations made by
onerous title to a good faith third party by
an apparent heir are effective.
Art. 1828. An apparent heir who in good
faith paid a legacy is not obligated to pay
the equivalent to the true successor, saving
the true successor's right to proceed against
the person who received the legacy.
Title II - Legal Succession
Chapter I - The Order
ofHeirsbip
Art.1829.Legal succession devolves in the
following order:
I - to the descendents, together with the
surviving spouse, unless the surviving
spouse was married to the deceased under
the regime of universal community or of
mandatory separation of property (art.
1640, sole paragraph); or if, under the
regime of partial community, the deceased
did not leave individual property;
II - to the ascendents, together with the
spouse;
III - to the surviving spouse;
 Art. 1.830-1.836 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
IV - to the collateral relatives.
Art. 1830. The surviving spouse's right to
succeed is only recognized if, at the time of
death of the other spouse, they were not
judicially separated or separated in fact for
more than two years, saving proof, in the
latter case, that cohabitation became
impossible without fault on the part of tlie
survivor.
Art. 1831. Regardless of the matrimonial
property regime, the surviving spouse,
without prejudice to his or her share in the
inheritance, has a real right of habitation
with respect to the immovable used as the
family residence, provided that it is the only
immovable of that nature to be inventoried.
Art.1832. When the spouse competes with
the descehdents (art. 1829, item I), the
spouse shall be entitled to a share equal to
the share Of those who succeed by heads;
the spouse's share may not be less than a
quarter part of the ·inheritance, if the spouse
is an ascendent of the heirs with whom the
spouse competes.
Art. 1833. Among the descendents, those
of nearer degree exclude the more remote,
saving the right of representation.
Art. 1834. Descendents of the same class
have the same rights to the succession of
their ascendents.
Art. 1835. In the descending line, children
succeed by heads and the other descendents
by heads or per stirpes, depending on
whether they are in the same degree or not
Art. 1836. In the absence of descendants,
the ascendents, together with the surviving
spouse, are called to the succession.
3%
IV - aos colaterais.
Art. 1.830. Somente e reconhecido di-
reito sucess6rio ao conjuge sobreviven-
te se, ao tempo da morte do outro, nao
estavam separados judicialmente. nem
separados de fato ha mais de do is anos,
salvo prova, neste caso, de que essa
convivencia sc tornara impossfvel sem
culpa do sobrevivente.
Art. 1.831. Ao conjuge sobrevivente,
qualquer que seja o regime de hens, sera
assegurado, sem prejufzo da participa-
yao que lhe caiba na heranya, o direito
real de habitayao relativamente ao im6-
vel destinado a residencia da familia,
desde que sejao unico daquela natureza
a inventariar.
Art. 1.832. Em concorrencia com os
descendentes (art. 1.829, inciso I) cabe-
rii ao conjuge quinhao igual ao dos que
sucederem por cabe\:a. nao podendo a
a
sua quota ser inferior quarta parte da
heranya, se for ascendente dos herdei-
ros com que concorrer.
Art. 1.833. Entre os descendentes, os
em grau mais pr6ximo excluem os mais
remotos, salvo o direito de repre-
senta~ao.
Art. 1.834. Os descendentes da mesma
classe tern os mesmos direitos asuces-
sao de seus ascendentes.
Art. l.835. Na linha descendente, os fi-
lhos sucedem por cabeya, e os outros
descendentes, por cabei;:a ou por estir-
pe, conforme se achem ou nao no mes-
mo grau.
Art. 1.836. Na falta de descendentes,
sao chamados a sucessao os ascenden-
tes, em concorrencia com o conjuge so-
brevivente.
397 CODIGO CIVIL BILlNGOE
§ l 0 Na classe dos ascendentes, o grau
mais pr6ximo exclui o mais remote,
sem distirn;ao de linhas.
§ 2° Havendo igualdade em grau e di-
versidade em linha, os ascendentes da
linha patema herdam a metade, cabeti-
do a outra aos da Iinha materna. ·
Art. 1.837. Concorrendo com ascen-
dente em primeiro grau, ao conjuge to-
carii um ter1,:o da herani;:a; caber-lhe-a a
metade desta se houver um s6 ascen-
dente, ou se maior for aquele grau.
Art. 1.838. Em falta de descendentes e
ascendentes, sera deferida a sucessao
por inteiro ao conjuge sobrevivente.
Art. 1.839. Se nao houver conjuge so-
brevivente, nas condiyoes estabeleci-
das no art. 1.830, serao chamados a su-
ceder os colaterais ate o quarto grau.
Art. 1.840. Na classe dos colaterais, os
mais pr6ximos excluem os mil.is remo-
tos, salvo o direito de representayao
conccdido aos filhos de irmaos.
Art. 1.841. Concorrendo a heran9a do
falecldo irmaos bilaterais com irmaos
unilaterais, cada um destes herdarii me-
tade do que cada um daqueles herdar.
Art. 1.842. Nao concorrendoa herarn;a
irmao bilateral, herdarao, em partes
iguais, os utiilaterais.
Art. 1.843. Na falta de irmaos, herda-
rao OS filhos destes e, nao OS havendo,
os tios.
a
§ I 0 Se concorrerem heran~a somente
filhos de irmaos falecidos, herdarao por
cabe~a.
Art. 1.838-1.843
§ I. In the class of ascendents, the nearer
degree excludes the more remote, without
distinction as to line.
§ 2. If the degree is the same but the line is
different, the ascendents in the paternal line
inherit half, and the other half goes to those
of the maternal line.
Art. 1837. If the spouse competes with an
ascendent in the first degree, the spouse is
entitled to one-third of the inheritance; but
the spouse is entitled to one-half if there is
only one ascendent, or if the degree of
relationship is greater than the first.
Art. 1838. In the absence of descendents
and ascendents, the entire succession
devolves upon the surviving spouse.
Art. 1839. If there is no surviving spouse,
within the conditions established in art.
1830, collateral relatives to the fourth
degree shall be called to the succession.
Art. 1840. In the class of collateral
relatives, the nearer in degree exclude the
more remote, saving the right of
representation granted to the children of
siblings.
Art. 1841. If both full siblings and half
siblings compete in the inheritance, each of
the half siblings shall inherit one-half of
what each of the full siblings inherits.
Art.1842. If no full siblings compete in the
inheritance, the half siblings shall inherit in
equal shares.
Art. 1843. In the absence of siblings, the
children of the siblings shall inherit; if there
are none, the aunts and uncles shall inherit.
§ 1. If only the children of deceased siblings
compete in the inheritance, they inherit by
heads.

Art. 1.844-1.848 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 2. If the children of full siblings compete
with the children of half siblings, each of
the latter shall inherit one-half of what each
of the former inherits.
§ 3. If all are children .of full siblings, or all
of half siblings, they shall inherit equally.
Art.1844. If there is no surviving spouse or
companion, nor any relative capable of
succeeding, or all of them renounce the
inheritance, it shall devolve upon the
Municipality or the Federal District, if
located w_ithin their respective boundaries,
or upon the Union, if situated in federal
territory.
Chapter II - Necessary
Heirs
Art. 1845. Descendants, ascendents and
spouses are necessary hefrs.
Art. 1846. One-half of the property of the
inheritance belongs to the necessary heirs
as of iight, and constitutes the legal. share.
Art. 1847. The legal share is calculated
over the value of the property existing at the
time the succession opened, after deducting
the debts and funeral expenses, arid then
adding the value of property subject to
collation.
Art. 1848. Unless ther~ is just cause,
declared in the testament, the testator may
not stipulate that property within the legal
share shall be inalienable, that it shall not be
subject to attachment or that it shall not
become matrirricmal community property.
§ 1. The testator is not permitted to provide
for the conversion of property in the legal
share into property of another kind.
398
§ 2° Se concorrem filhos de innaos bi-
laterais com filhos de irmaos unilate-
rais, cada um destes herdara a metade
do que herdar cada um daqueles.
§ 3° Se todos forem filhos de irmaos bi-
laterais, ou todos de irmaos unilaterais,
herdarao por igual.
Art.1.844. Nao sobrevivendo conjuge,
ou companheiro, nem parente algum
sucessfvel, ou tendo eles renunciado a
heran9a, esta.se devolve ao Municfpio
ou ao Distrito Federal, se localizada nas
respectivas circunscri96es, OU aUniao,
quando situada em territ6rio federal.
Capitulo II -Dos Herdeiros
Necessarios
Art. 1.845. Sao herdeiros necessarios
os descendentes, os ascendentes e o
conjuge.
Art. 1.846. Pertence aos herdeiros ne-
cessarios, de pleno direito, a metade dos
bens da heram;a, constituindo a Jegftima.
Art.1.847. Calcula-se a legftima sobre
o valor dos hens existentes na abertura
da sucessao, abatidas as dfvidas e as
despesas do funeral, adicionando-se,
em seguida, o valor dos.hens sujeitos a
cola9ao.
Art. 1.848. Salvo se houver justa causa,
declarada no testarnento, nao pode o
testador estabelecer clausula de inalie-
nabilidade, irnpenhorabilidade. e de in-
cornunicabilidade, sobre os bens da le-
gftirna.
§ I 0 Nao epermitido ao testador estabe-
lecer a conversao dos bens da legftima
em outros de especie diversa.
CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
399
§ 2° Mediante autoriza<;ao judicial e ha-
vendo justa catisa, podem ser alienados
os bens gravados, convertendo-se o
produto em outros bens, que ficarao
sub-rogados nos onus dos prirneiros.
Art. 1.849. 0 herdeiro necessario, a
quern o testador deixar a sua pane dis-
ponivel, ou algum legado, nao perdera
0 direito alegftima.
Art. I.850. Para excluir da sucessao os
herdeiros colaterais, basta que o testa-
dor disponha de seu patrirnonio sem os
contemplar.
Capitulo ill - Do Direito de
Representa\;lio
Art. 1.851. Da-se o direito de repre-
sentac;ao, quando a lei charna certos pa-
rentes do falecido a suceder em todos os
direitos, em que ele sucederia, se vivo
fosse.
Art. 1.852. 0 direito de representm;:ao
da-se na linha fl'!ta descendente, mas
nunca na ascendente.
Art. 1.853. Na linha transv~rsal, so-
rnente se da o direito de representa~ao
em favor dos filhos de irmaos do faleci-
do, quando corn irrnaos deste concorre-
rern.
Art. 1.854. Os representantes s6 pod em
herdar, corno tais, o que herdaria o re-
presentado, se vivo fosse.
Art. 1.855. 0 quinhao do representado
partir-se-a por igual entre os repre-
sentantes.
Art. 1.856. 0 renunciante aheranc;a de
urna pessoa podera representa-la na su-
cessao de outra.
Art. 1.849-1.856
§ 2. If there is just cause and upon judicial
authorization, property encumbered with a
restriction referred to in this article may be
alienated and the product converted into
other property, to which the encumbrance
of the original property attaches.
Art. 1849. A necessary heir to whom the
testator leaves the disposable portion, or a
legacy, does not lose the right to the legal
share.
Art. 1850. In order to exclude collateral
heirs from the succession, it is sufficient
that the testator dispose of his patrimony
without considering them.
Chapter III - The Right of
Representation
Art. 1851. The right of representation
operates when the law calls certain
relatives of a deceased person to succeed in
all the rights in which the deceased would
succeed, if he were living.
Art. 1852. The right of representation
operates in the direct line descending, but
never in the ascending.
Art.1853. In the collateral line, the right of
representation operates only in favor of the
children of the siblings-of the deceased,
when the children compete with the
deceased's siblings.
Art. 1854. The representatives may only
inherit, as such, what the represented
person would. have inherited if he were
living.
Art. 1855. The share of the represented
person shall be divided equally among the
representatives. ·
Art. 1856. A person who renounces the
inheritance originating from one person
may represent him in the succession of
another.
 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
An. 1.857-1.862
Title III - Testate
Succession
Chapter I - Testaments
in General
Art. 1857. Every capable person may, by
test~ment, provide for the disposition of all
of his property, or part of it, after his death.
§ I. The legal share of the necessary heirs
may not be included in the testament.
§ 2. Testamentary dispositions that are not
patrimonial in nature are valid, even if the
testament is limited to such dispositions.
Art. 1858. A testament is an act that is
strictly personal in nature and may be
changed at any time.
Art. 1859. The right, to contest the validity
of a testament is extinguished five years
after the date of its registration.
Chapter II - The Capacity to Make
a Testament
Art.1860. Incapable persons may not make
a testament, not may those who, at the time
of making it, do not have full discernment.
Sole paragraph. Persons of more than
sixteen years of age may make a testament.
Art. 1861. The subsequent incapacity of
the testator does not invalidate the
test.ament, nor does subsequent capacity
validate the testament of an incapable
person.
Chapter III - The Ordinary Forms of
Testaments
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 1862. The following are ordinary
testaments:
400
Tftulo III - Da Succssao
Testamentaria
Capituio I - Do Testamento em
GeraI
Art. 1.857. Toda pessoa capaz pode
dispor, par testamento. da totalidade
dos seus bens. ou de parte delcs, para
depois de sua morte.
§ l 0 A legftima dos herdeiros necessa-
rios nlio podera ser inclufda no testa-
mento.
§ 2° Sao validas as disposii;oes tcsta-
mentlirias de carater n1io patrimonial,
ainda que o testador somente a elas se
tenha limitado.
Art. 1.858. 0 testamento e ato persona-
lfssimo, podendo ser mudado a qual-
quer tempo.
A.rt. 1.859. Extingue-se em cinco anos
o direito de impugnar a validade dotes-
tamento, contado o prazo da data do seu
registro.
Capftulo II- Da Capacidade de
Testar
Art. 1.860. Alem dos incapazes, nlio
podem testar os que. no ato de faze-lo,
n1io tiverem pleno discernimento.
Paragrafo unico. Podem testar OS maio-
res de dezesseis anos.
Art. 1.861. A incapacidade superve-
niente do testador nlio invalida o testa-
mento, nem o testamento do incapaz se
valida com a superveniencia da capaci-
dade.
Capftulo III - Das Formas
Ordinarias do Testamento
Sei;ao I - Disposii;oes Gerais
Art.1.862. Sao testamentos ordinarios:
401 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
I -o publico;
n -0 cerrado;
III - o particular.
Art. 1.863. E proibido o testamento
conjuntivo, seja simultlineo, recfproco
ou correspectivo.
Se~o II - Do Testamento Publico
Art.1.864. Sao requisitos essenciais do
testamento publico:
I - ser escrito par tabeliao ou por seu
substituto legal em seu livro de notas,
de acordo com as declarairoes do testa-
dor, podendo este servir-se de minuta,
notas ou apontamentos;
11 - lavrado o instrumemo, ser lido em
voz alta pelo tabelilio ao testador e a
duas testemunhas, a um s6 tempo; ou
pelo testador, se o quiser, na presens;a
destas e do oficial;
III - ser o instrumento, em seguida alei-
tura, assinado pelo testador, pelas teste-
munhas e pelo tabeliiio.
Paragrafo unico. 0 testamento publico
pode ser escrito manualmente ou meca-
nicamente, hem coma ser feito pela in-
ser\;ao da declara1_:ao de vontade em
partes impressas de livro de notas, des-
de que rubricadas todas as paginas pelo
testador, se mais de uma.
Art.1.865. Seo testador nao souber, ou
nao puder assinar, o tabeliao ou seu
substituto legal assim o declarara, assi-
nando. neste caso, pelo testador, e, a seu
rogo, uma das testemunhas instrumen-
tiirias.
Art. 1.866. 0 indivfduo inteiramente
surdo, sabendo !er, !era o seu testamen-
to, e, se nao o souber, designara quern o
leia em seu lugar, presentes as testemu-
nhas.
Art. 1.863-1.866
I - a public testament;
II - a sealed testament;
ill - a private testament.
Art. 1863. Joint testaments are prohibited,
whether simultaneous, reciprocal or
corresponding.
Section II-Public Testaments
Art. 1864. The essential requirements for a
public testament are:
I - that it be written by a notary or his legal
substitute in his book of notes, in
accordance with the declarations of the
testator, who may make use of a draft, notes
or memoranda;
II - that after being drawn up, the
instrument be read aloud by the notary to
the testator and two witnesses, all at the
same time, or by the testator, if he so
wishes, in the presence of the witnesses and
the notary;
III - that following the reading of the
instrument, it be signed by the testator, the
witnesses and the notary.
Sole paragraph. A public testament may be
written manually or mechanically, or made
by insertion of a declaration of will in
printed parts of the book ofnotes, provided
that all the pages are initialed by the
testator, if it contains more than one page.
Art. 1865. If the testator does not know
how to sign, or is unable to sign, the notary
or his legal substitute shall so declare and
shall sign for the testator, as shall one of the
witnesses to the instrument, at his request.
Art. 1866. An individual who is entirely
deaf but who is able to read shall read the
testament; if he cannot, he shall designate
someone to read it in his stead, in the
presence of the witnesses.

Art. 1.867-1.869 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art.1867. A blind person is only permitted
to make a public testament, which shall be
read ~o him aloud twice, once by the notary
or his legal substitute, and once by a
witness designated by the testator, and of
all of this detailed mention shall be made in
the testament.
Section Ill- Sealed Testaments
Art. 1868. A testament written by the
t~stator or by another at his request and
signed by the testator shall be valid if it is
approved by a not~ or his legal substitute,
subject to the following formalities:
I - that the testator delivers the testament to
the notary in the presence of two witnesses;
ll - that the testator d.eclares that it is his
testament and that he wishes it to be
approved;
III '- that the notary ~rrirriediately draws up
th~ act of approval, in the presence of two
witnesses, and thereupon reads it to the
testator and witnesses;
IV - that the act of approval is signed by the
notary, the witnesses and the testator.
Sol~ paragraph.A sealed testament may be
~ntten mechanically, provided the
signatory numbers all the pages and
authenticates each of them with his
signature.
Art. 1869. The notary shall begin the act of
approval immediately after the last word of
the testator, declaring, under oath that the
testator delivered the testament to him to be
approved in the presence of the witnesses,
~nd sealing and stitching the approved
instrument.
Sole paragraph. If there is not space on the
last page of the testament to begin the
approval, the notary shall affix his public
seal, and shall mention the fact in the act of
approval.
402
Art.1.867. Ao cego so se permite o tes-
tamento pt'.iblico, que !he sera lido, em
voz alta, duas vezes, uma pelo tabeli1io
ou por seu substituto legal, ca outni por
uma das testemunhas. designada pclo
testador, fazendo-se de tudo circuns-
tanciada menr;ao no testamento.
Sei;iio III - Do Testamento Cerrado
Art. 1.868. 0 testamento escrito pelo
testador, ou por outra pessoa, a seu
rogo, e por aquele assinado, sera valido
se aprovado pelo tabeliao ou seu substi-
tuto legal, observadas as seguintes for-
malidades:
I - que o testru:lor o entregue ao tabeliao
em presen\!a de duas testemunhas;
II - que o testador declare que aquele e
o seu testamento e quer que seja apro-
vado;
In - que o tabeliao Iavre, desde logo, o
auto de aprovai;:ao, na presem;a de duas
testemunhas, e o leia, em seguida, ao
testador e testemunhas;
IV - que o auto de aprova~ao seja assi-
nado pelo tabeliao, pelas testemunhas e
pelo testador.
Paragrafo t'.inico. 0 testamento cerrado
pode ser escrito mecanicamente, desde
que seu subscritor numere e autentique.
com a sua assinatura, todas as paginas.
Art. 1.869. 0 tabeliao deve come;;ar o
auto de aprova~ao imediatamente de-
pois da ultima palavra do testador, de-
clarando, sob sua fe, que o testador !he
entregou para ser aprovado na prcsen\!a
das testemunhas; passando a cerrar e
easer o instrumento aprovado.
Paragrafo iinico. Se nao houver espa~o
na t'.iltima folha do testamento, para inf-
cio da aprova~ao, o tabeliao apora nele
o seu sinal publico, mencionando a cir-
cunstancia no auto.
CODIGO CIVIL B!LINGUE
403
Art. 1.870. Se o tabeli1io tiver escrito o
testamento a rogo do testador. podera,
n1io obstante, aprova-lo.
Art. 1.871. 0 testamento pode ser es-
crito em lingua nacional ou estrangeira.
pelo pr6prio testador, ou por outrem. a
seu rogo.
Art. 1.872. Nao pode dispor de seus
bens em restamento cerrado quern nao
saiba ou nao possa !er.
Art. 1.873. Pode fazer testamento cer-
rado o surdo-mudo, contanto que o es-
creva todo, e o assine de sua mao, e que,
ao entrega-lo ao oficial pt'.iblico, ante as
duas testemunhas, escreva. na face ex-
terna do papel ou do envolt6rio, que
aquele eo seu testamento, cuja aprova-
i;ao lhe pede.
Art.1.874. Dcpois de aprovado e cerra-
do, sera o testamento entregue ao testa-
dor, e o tabeliao lam;ara, no seu livro,
nota do lugar. dia, mes e ano em que o
testamento foi aprovado e entregue.
Art. 1.875. Falecido o testador. o testa-
mento sera apresentado ao juiz, que o
abrira e o fara registrar, ordenando seja
cumprido, se nao achar vicio externo
que o torne eivado de nulidade ou sus-
peito de falsidade.
Se\!liO IV - Testamento Particular
Art. 1.876. 0 testamerito particular
pode ser escrito de pr6prio punho ou
mediante processo mecanico.
§ I 0 Se escrito de pr6prio punho, sao
requisitos essenciais asua validade seja
lido e assinado por quern o escreveu, na
presenc;:a de pelo menos tres testemu-
nhas. que o devem subscrever.
Art. 1.870-1.876
Art. 1870. Even if the notary has written
the testament at the testator's request, he
may nonetheless approve it.
Art. 1871. A testament may be written in
the national or in a foreign language, by the
testator himself or by another, at his
request.
Art. 1872. A person who does not know
how to read, or is unable to read, cannot
dispose of his property by sealed testament.
Art. 1873. A person who is deaf and mute
may make a sealed testament, provided that
he writes the whole and signs it in his hand
and that, in delivering it to the public
official, before two witnesses, he writes, on
the outside of the paper or envelope, that it
is his testament, which he requests the
official to approve.
Art. 1874. Once approved and sealed, the
testament shall be delivered to the testator,
and the notary shall enter, in his book, a
note of the place, day, month and year on
which the testament was approved and
delivered.
Art. 1875. Upon the testator's death, the
testament shall be presented to the judge,
who shall open it and shall cause it to be
recorded and shall order it to be fulfilled. if
he does not find an external defect that
taints it with nullity or suggests that it is
false.
Section IV - Private Testaments
Art. 1876. A private testament may be
written in the testator's own hand or by a
mechanical process.
§ 1. If it is written in the testator's own
hand, it must be read and signed by the one
who wrote it, in the presence of at least
three witnesses, who must sign it, all as
essential requirements to its validity.

Art. 1.877-1.882 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 2. If prepared by a mechanical process, it
must not contain erasures, struck-out text or
blank spaces, and must be signed by the
testator, after having been read in the
presence of at least three witnesses. who
shall sign it.
Art. 1877. Upon the death of the testator,
the testament shall be judicially published
and the legal heirs shall be cited.
Art. 1878. If the witnesses are consistent as
to the fact of the disposition, or at least as to
the reading of the disposition before them,
and if they acknowledge their own
signatures and that of the testator, the
testament shall be confirmed.
Sole paragraph. If witnesses are
unavailable, by reason of death or absence,
and if at least one of them acknowledges the
testament, it may be confirmed if, in the
opinion of the judge, there is sufficient
proof of its veracity.
Art •. 1879. In exceptional circumstances
declared in the instrument, a private
testament written in the testator's hand and
signed by him may be confirmyd. at the
judge's discretion.
Art. 18.80. A private testament may be
written in a foreign language, provided the
witnesses understand it.
Chapter IV - Codicils
Art.1881. Every person capable qf making
a testament may make, by his own dated
and signed private writing, special
dispositions concerning his burial,
charitable gifts in small amount;s to certain
and determined persons or to the poor of a
certain place, indiscriminately, and give by
legacy personal items of furniture, clothing
and jewelry that are of small value.
Art.1882. Saving the rights of third parties,
the acts referred to in the preceding article
shall have effect as codicils, whether or not
the testator leaves a testament.
404
§ 2° Se elaborado por processo meciini-
co, nao pode conter rasuras ou espa~os
em branco, devendo ser assinado pelo
testador, depois de o ter lido na presen-
9a de pelo menos tres testemunhas, que
o subscreveriio.
Art.1.877. Morto o testador, publicar-
se-a emjuizo o testamento, com cita~ao
dos herdeiros legitimos.
Art. 1.878. Se as testemunhas forem
contestes sobre o fato da disposi"ao, ou,
ao menos, sobre a sua leitura perante
elas, e se reconhecerem as pr6prias as-
sinaturas, assim como a do testador, o
testamento sera confirmado.
Paragrafo unico. Se faltarem testemu-
nhas, por morte ou ausencia, e se pelo
mcnos uma delas o reconhecer, o testa-
mento podeni ser co11firmado, se, a cri-
teria do juiz, houver prova suficie11te de
sua veracidade.
Art. 1.879. Em circu11stiincias excepcio-
nais declaradas 11a cedula, o testamento
particular de pr6prio punho e assi11ado
pelo testador, sem testemu11has, podera
ser confirmado, a criteria do juiz.
Art. 1.880. 0 testamento particular pode
ser escrito em lfngua estrangcira, co11tan-
to que as tcstemunhas a compreendam.
Capltulo IV - Dos Codicilos
Art. 1.881. Toda pessoa capaz de testar
podera, mediante escrito particular seu,
datado e assinado, fazer disposi(fiies es-
peciuis sobre o seu enterro, sabre esmo-
las de pouca monta a certas e determi-
11adas pessoas, ou, indetcrminadamen-
te, aos pobres de certo lugar, assim
como legar m6veis, roupas ou j6ias, de
pouco valor,.de seu uso pessoal.
Art. 1.882. Os atos a que se refere o ar-
tigo antecedente, salvo direito de tercei-
ro, valerao como codicilos, deixe ou
nao testamerito o au tor.
405 C6DIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 1.883. Pelo modo estabelecido 110
art. l.881, poder-se-ao nomearou subs-
tituir testamenteiros.
Art. 1.884. Os atos previstos nos arti-
gos a11tecede11tes revogam-se por atos
iguais, e consideram-se revogados, se.
havendo tesmmento posterior, de qual-
quer 11atureza, este os nao confirmar ou
modificar.
Art.1.885. Se estiver fechado o codici-
lo, abrir-se-a do mesmo modo que o
testamento cerrado.
Capitulo V - Dos Testamentos
Espcciais
Sc~ao I - Disposi~ocs Gcrais
Art. 1.886. Sao testamentos especiais:
I - o maritimo;
II - o aero11autico;
III-omilitar.
Art. 1.887. Nao se admitem outros tes-
tamentos especiais alem dos co11tem-
plados neste C6digo.
Sc~ao II- Do Tcstamento Marltimo
c do Testamento Aeronautico
Art. 1.888. Quern estiver em viagem, a
bordo de navio nacional, de guerra ou
merca11te, pode testar perante o coman-
da11te, em presen"a de duas testemu-
nhas, por forma que corresponda ao tes-
tamc11to publico ou ao cerrado.
Paragrafo u11ico. 0 registro do testa-
mento sera feito no diiirio de bordo.
Art. 1.889. Quern estiver em viagem, a
bordo de aero11ave militar ou comer-
cial, pode testar pera11te pessoa desig-
nada pelo comandante, observado o
disposto 110 artigo a11tecedente.
Art. l.883- l.889
Art. 1883. Executors of testaments may be
appointed or replaced in the manner
established in art. 1881.
Art. 1884. The acts contemplated in the
preceding articles are revoked by like acts,
and shall be deemed to be revoked if a later
testament of any kind does not confirm or
modify them.
Art. 1885. If a codicil is closed, it shall be
opened in the same way as a sealed
testament.
Chapter V - Special
Testaments
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 1886. The following are special
testaments:
I - maritime testaments;
II - aeronautic testaments;
III - military testaments.
Art. 1887. Special testaments other than
those contemplated in this Code are not
permitted.
Section II - Maritime and Aeronautic
Testaments
Art. 1888. Any person who is traveling on
board a national merchant ship or warship
ma;y make a testament before the
commander, in the presence of two
witnesses, in the form of a public or sealed
testament.
Sole paragraph. The testament shall be
registered in the ship's log.
Art. 1889. Any person who is traveling on
board a military or commercial aircraft may
make a testament before a person
designated by the commander, in
accordance with the provisions of the
preceding article;
 Art. 1.890- 1.893 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1890. The maritime or aeronautic
testament shall remain in the keeping of the
commander, who shall deliver it to the
administrative authorities of the first
national port or airport, against receipt
entered in the ship's or aircraft's log.
Art. 1891. A maritime or aeronautic
testament lapses if the testator does not die
during the voyage or within the ninety days
following his disembarkation onto land
where he may make a testament in ordinary
form.
Art. 1892. A maritime testa.ment shall not
be valid, even if made during a voyage, if at
the time it was made the ship was in a port
where the testator could have disembarked
and made a test~ent in ordinary form.
Section III - Military Testaments
Art. 1893. Military personnel and other
persons in the service of the Armed Forces,
while on campaign within the country or
outside it, or while in a place that is under
siege or where communications have been
interrupted, may, if there is no notary or
legal substitute, make a testament before
two witnesses, or three witnesses, if the
testator does not know how to or is unable
to sign, in which case one of the witnesses
shall sign for him. · ·
§ 1.. If the testator belongs to a detached
corps or corps section, the testament shall
be written by the commander of the
detachment, even though he holds a lesser
rank or position.
§ 2. If the testator is under treatment in a
hospital, the testament shall be written by
the medical officer or by the director of the
establishment.
§ 3. If the testator is an officer of higher
rank, the testament shall be written by the
officer who would replace him.
406
Art. 1.890. 0 testamento marltimo ou
aeromiutico ficani sob a guarda do co-
mandante, que o entregani as aurorida-
des administrativas do primciro porto
ou aeroporto nacional, contra recibo
averbado 110 diario de bordo.
Art. L891. Caducara o testame11to ma-
rftimo, ou aero11autico, se o testador 111io
morrer na viagem, 11em nos noventa
dirL5. subseqilentes ao seu desembarque
em terra, onde possa fazer. na forma or-
di11aria, outro testamento.
Art. 1.892. Nao valera o testamenro
marftimo, ainda que feito no curso de
uma viagem, se, ao tempo em que se
fez, o 11avio estava em porto onde o tes-
tador pudcsse desembarcar e testar 11a
forma ordinaria.
Se!;lio III - Do Testamento Militar
Art. 1.893. 0 testamento dos militares
e demais pessoas a servi~o das Forc;:as
Armadas em campanha, dentro do Pais
ou fora dele, assim co mo em pra1ra sitia-
da, ou que esteja de comunicm;;ocs in-
terrompidas, podera fazer-se, nao ha-
vendo tabeliao ou seu substituto legal,
ante duas, ou tres testemu11has, se o tes-
tador nao puder, ou nao souber assinar,
caso em que assinara por ele uma delas.
§ 1° Se o testador pertcncer a corpo ou
sec;:ao de corpo destacado, o testamento
sera escrito pelo respectivo comanda11-
te. ainda que de gradua~ao ou posto in-
ferior.
§ 2° Seo testador estiver em tratamento
em hospital, o testamento sera escrito
pelo respectivo oficial de saude, ou pelo
diretor do estabelecimento.
§ 3° Seo testador for o oficial mais gra-
duado, o testamento sera escrito por
aquele que o substituir.
407 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 1.894. Se o testador souber escre-
ver. podera fazer o testamenm de seu
punho. contanto que o date e assine por
extenso, e o apresente aberto ou cerra-
do, na presen~a de duas testemunhas ao
auditor, ou ao oficial de patentc, quc lhe
fa<;a as vezes nestc mister.
Paragrafo iinico. 0 auditor, ou o oficial
a quern o testamento se apresentc nota-
ra, em qualquer partc dele, lugar. dia.
mes e ano, em quc lhe for apresentado,
nota esta que sera assinada por ele e pe-
las testemunhas.
Art. 1.895. Caduca o testamento mili-
tar, desde que, depois dele, o testador
esteja. 11oventa dias seguidos, em lugar
onde possa testar na forma ordinaria,
salvo se esse testamento apresentar as
solenidades prescritas 110 parligrafo
iinico do artigo antecedente.
Art. 1.896. As pcssoas designadas no
art. 1.893, estando empenhadas em
combatc, ou feridas, podem testar oral-
mente, confiando a sua iiltima vontade
a duas testemunhas.
Paragrafo ii11ico. Nao teraefeito o testa-
mento se o testador nao morrer na guer-
ra ou convalescer do ferimento.
Capltulo VI-Das Disposi~1ies
Testamentarias
Art.1.897. A nomea~ao de herdeiro, ou
legatario, pode fazer-se pura e simples-
mente, sob co11di9ao, para certo fim ou
modo, ou por certo motivo.
Art. 1.898. A designai;:ao do tempo cm
que deva comepr ou cessar o direito do
herdciro, salvo nas disposi9oes fideico-
missarias, ter-se-a por 11ao escrita.
Art. 1.894-1.898
Art. 1894. If the testator knows how to
write, he may make his testament in his
own hand, provided he dates it and signs it
with his full name, and presents it either
open or sealed, in the presence of two
witnesses, to the military judge or to the
commissioned officer who performs this
service in the judge's stead.
Sole paragraph. The military judge, or the
officer to whom the testament is presented,
shall note anywhere on the testament, the
place, day, month and year in which it was
presented, and the note shall be signed by
him and by the witnesses.
Art. 1895. A military testament lapses if,
after making it, the testator is in a place, for
ninety consecutive days, where he may
make a testament in ordinary form, unless
the testament presents all the formalities set
out in the sole paragraph of the preceding
article.
Art. 1896. The persons designated in art.
1893, if engaged in combat or wounded,
may make an oral testament, confiding
their last will to two witnesses.
Sole paragraph. The testament shall not
have effect if the testator does not die in the
war or if he recovers from the wound.
Chapter VI...:. Testamentary
Dispositions
Art. 1.897. An heir or legatee may be
named purely and simply, under a
condition, for a certain purpose or means,
or for a certain reason.
Art. 1898. Except in fideicommissary
substitutions, a designation of the time at
which the right of an heir shall commence
or cease shall be deemed not to have been
written.
Art. 1.899-1.90 l BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1899. When a testamentary provision
is susceptible of different interpretations,
the interpretation that best assures
compliance with the testator's will shall
prevail.
Art. 1900. The following dispositions are
null:
I - that which institutes a heir or legatee on
the condition that he also make a
testamentary disposition to the benefit of
the testator or a third party;
II - that which refers to an uncertain person,
whose identity cannot be verified;
III _,that which is made in favor of an
uncertain person, committing the
determination of the person's identity to a
third party;
IV - that which leaves the fixing of the
amount of a legacy to the discretion of an
heir or other person;
V - that which is made in favor of persons
referred to in arts. 1801 and 1802.
Art. 1901. The following dispositions are
valid:
I - that in favor of an uncertain person to be
determined by athird party from among
two or more persons mentioned by the
testator, or belonging to a family, a
collective body or an establishment
designated by him;
II - that in remuneration for services
provided to the testator at the time he was
suffering from the illness or condition from
which he died, even though the amount of
the legacy is determined at the discretion of
an heir or another person.
408
Art. 1.899. Quando a clausula testa-
mentaria for suscetlvel de interpreta-
<;iies diferentes, prevalececi a que me-
lhor assegure a ohservancia da vomade
do testador.
Art.1.900. Enula a disposi;;:ao:
I - que institua herdeiro ou legatario sob
a condi<;iio captat6ria de que este dispo-
nha, tambem por testamento, em bene-
ffcio do testador, ou de terceiro;
II - que se refira a pessoa incerta. cuja
identidade nao se possa averiguar;
III - que favorei;a a pessoa incerta. co-
metendo a determina;;:ao de sua identi-
dade a terceiro:
IV - que dcixe a arbftrio do herdeiro, ou
de outrem, fixar o valor do legado;
V - que favorei;a as pessoas a que se re-
ferem os arts. 1.801 e J.802.
Art.1.901. Valera a disposi1;ao:
I - em favor de pessoa incerta que deva
ser determinada por terceiro, dentre
duas ou rnais pessoas rnencionadas pelo
testador, ou pertenccntes a uma familia,
ou a um corpo coletivo, ou a um estabe-
lecirnento por ele designado;
II - em remunera1;1io de servi11os presta-
dos ao testador, porocasiao da molestia
de que faleceu, ainda que fique ao arbf-
trio do herdeiro ou de outrem detenni-
nar o valor do legado.
409 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art.1.902. A disposigao geral em favor
dos pobres, dos estabelecimentos parti-
culares de caridade, ou dos de assisten-
cia pt1blica, entender-se-a relativa aos
pobres do lugar do dornicilio do testa-
dor ao tempo de sua rnorte, ou dos esta-
belecimentos af sitos, salvo se manifes-
tamente constar que tinha em mente be-
neficiar os de outra localidade.
Pacigrafo t1nico. Nos casos deste arli-
go, as institui<;iies particulares preferi-
rao sempre as publicas.
Art. 1.903. 0 erro na designai;ao da
pessoa do herdeiro, do legatario, ou da
coisa Iegada anula a disposii;:ao, salvo
se, pelo contexto do testamento, por ou-
tros docurnentos, ou por fatos inequfvo-
cos, se puder identificar a pessoa ou
coisa a que o testador queria referir-se.
Art. 1.904. Se o testarnento nornear
dais ou rnais herdeiros, sern discriminar
a parte de cada urn, partilhar-se-a por
igual, entre todos, a por1;ao disponfvel
do testador.
Art.1.905. Seo testador nomear certos
herdeiros individualmente e outros co-
Jetivamente, a heran;;:a sera dividida em
tantas quotas quantos forern os indivf-
duos e os grupos designados.
Art. 1.906. Se forern deterrninadas as
quotas de cada herdeiro, e nao absorve-
rem toda a heran;;:a, o remanescente
pertencera aos herdeiros legftimos, se-
gundo a ordern da vocac;ao hereditaria.
Art. 1.907. Se forern determinados os
quinhiies de uns e nao os de outros her-
deiros, distribuir-se-a por igual a estes
ultimas o que restar, depois de cornple-
tas as pori;oes hereditarias dos prirnei-
ros.
Art. 1.902-1.907
Art. 1902. A general disposition in favor of
the poor, or in favor of private charitable
establishments or public aid institutions,
shall be understood to be made to the poor
of the place of the testator's domicile at the
time of his death, or to the establishments
there situated, unless it is clear from the
provision that the testator intended to
benefit another location.
Sole paragraph. In the cases contemplated
in this article, private institutions shall
always be preferred over public
institutions.
Art. 1903. Error in the designation of the
p~rson of an heir, a legatee or the thing
given by legacy annuls the disposition
unless the person or thing to which the
testator wished to refer can be identified
from the context of the testament, other
documents or unequivocal facts.
Art. 1904. If a testament names two or
more heirs, without stating each heir's
share, they shall share equally in the
disposable portion left by the testator.
Art. 1905. If the testator named certain
heirs individually and others collectively,
the inheritance will be divided into as many
shares as there are individuals and groups
named.
Art. 1906. If each heir's share is
determined and they do not take up the
whole of the inheritance, the remainder
shall belong to the legal heirs, according to
the order of heirship.
Art. 1907. If the shares of some heirs are
determined and those of others are not,
what remains after the determined shares
have been completed shall be distributed
equally among the latter heirs.
Art. 1.908-1. 913 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1908. If the testator provides that a
certain and determined thing within an
inheritance shall not go to the instituted
heir, it shall go to the legal heirs.
Art. 1909. Testamentary dispositions
tainted with error, fraud or coercion are
voidable.
Sole paragraph. The right to annul the
disposition is extinguished in four years
from the time the interested party became
aware of the defect.
Art. 1910. The ineffectiveness of a
testamentary disposition results in the
ineffectiveness of other dispositions that
would not have been made by the testator
without the first.
Art. 1911. A provision making property
inaHenable, imposed in an instrument of
gift or testament, means, by implication,
that the property cannot be attached or form
part ofmatrimonial community property.
Sole parag~aph. In the case of expr?p~iation
of property subject to a prov1s10n of
inalienaoility, or alienation of such
property by reason of the donee's or the
heir's economic need, upon judicial
authorization, the product of the sale shall
be converted into other property, to which
the restrictions attached to the original
property shall apply.
Chapter VII - Legacies
Section I - General Provisions
Art. 1912. A legacy of a certain thing that
does not belong to the testator when the
succession opens is ineffective.
Art. 1913. If the testator instructs that an
heir or legatee deliver something owned by
him to another person, and the heir or
legatee does not do so, he shall be deemed
to have renounced the inheritance or
legacy.
410
Art. 1.908. Dispondo o testador que
nao caiba ao herdeiro institufdo certo e
determinado objeto, dentre os da heran-
ga, tocara ele aos herdeiros legftimos.
Art. 1.1)09. Sao anulaveis as disposi-
1,;oes testamentarias inquinadas de erro.
dolo ou coac;ao.
Paragrafo unico. Extingue-sc em qua-
tro anos o direito de anular a disposic;ao,
contados de quando o interessado tiver
conhecimento do vfcio.
Art. 1.910. A ineficacia de uma dispo-
sir,;ao testamentaria importa a das outras
que, sem aquela, nao teriam sido deter-
minadas pelo testador.
Art. 1.911. A clausula de inalienabili-
dade, imposta aos hens por ato de libe-
ralidade, implica impenhorabilidade e
incomunicabilidade.
Paragrafo unico. No caso de desapro-
prim;:ao de hens clausulados, ou de sua
alienai;:ao, por conveniencia econ6mica
do donatario ou do herdeiro, mediante
autorizai;:ao judicial, o produto da ven-
da converter-Se-a em outros hens, sabre
os quais incidirao as restrigiies apostas
aos primeiros.
Capitulo VII - Dos Legados
Se~o I - Disposii;:oes Gerais
Art. 1.912. Eineficaz o legado de coisa
certa que nao pertenga ao testador no
momento da abertura da sucessao.
Art. 1.913. Se o testador ordenar que o
herdeiro ou legatario entregue coisa de
sua propriedade a outrem, nao o cum-
prindo ele, entender-se-a que renunciou
aheram;a OU ao legado.
411 CODIGO CIVIL BILfNGUE
Art. 1.914. Se tao-somente em parte a
coisa legada pertencer ao testador, ou,
no caso do artigo antecedente, ao her-
deiro ou ao legatario, so quanta a essa
parte valerao legado.
Art. 1.915. Seo leg ado for de coisa que
se determine pelo genera, sera o mesmo
cumprido, ainda que ta! coisa nao exista
entre os hens deixados pelo testador.
Art. 1.916. Se o testador legar coisa
sua, singularizando-a, s6 tera eficacia o
!egado se, ao tempo do seu falecimento,
ela se achava entre os bcns da herani;:a;
sea coisa Iegad a existir entre os hens do
testador, mas em quantidade inferior a
do legado, este sera eficaz apenas quan-
ta aexistente.
Art. 1.917. 0 legado de coisa que deva
encontrar-se em determinado lugar s6
tera eficacia se nele for achada, salvo se
removida a tltulo transit6rio.
Art. 1.918. 0 legado de credito, OU de
quita'<ao de dfvida, tera eficacia somen-
te ate a importancia desta, ou daquele,
ao tempo da morte do testador.
§ 1° Cumpre-se o Jegado, entregando o
herdeiro ao legatario o tftulo respecti-
vo.
§ 2° Este legado nao compreende as df-
vidas posteriores adata do testamento.
Art.1.919. Nao o declarando expressa-
mente o testador, nao se reputara com-
pensa~ao da sua dlvida o legado que ele
fa~a ao credor.
Paragrafo unico. Subsistira integral-
mente o legado, se a dfvida lhe foi pos-
terior, e o restador a solveu antes de
morrer.
Art. 1.914-1.919
Art. 1914. If only part of the thing
bequeathed belongs to the testator or, in the
case contemplated in the preceding article,
to the heir or legatee, the legacy shall be
valid only as to that part.
Art. 1915. If the legacy is of a thing that is
determined by kind; it shall be fulfilled,
even though such a thing does not exist
among the property left by the testator.
Art. 1916. If a testator bequeaths a thing
belonging to him, and identifies it
individually, the legacy shall have effect
only if at the time of his death the thing is
found among the property of the
inheritance; if the bequeathed thing exists
among the testator's property, but in a
quantity less than that of the legacy, .the
legacy shall be effective only as to the
existing quantity.
Art. 1917. A legacy of a thing that should
be found in a certain place shall have effect
only if it is found there, unless it has been
removed temporarily.
Art. 1918. A legacy consisting of the
assignment or acquittance of a debt shall
have effect only as to the amount of the debt
at the time of the testator's death.
§ 1. The legacy is fulfilled by delivery of
the instrument of debt by the heir to the
legatee.
§ 2. The legacy does not encompass debts
subsequent to the date of the testament.
Art. 1919. Unless the testator expressly so
declares, compensation shall not operate
between a debt owed by the testator and a
legacy made to the creditor.
Sole paragraph. The legacy shall remain
entire if the debt arose after the legacy and
the testator acquitted it before dying.
Art. 1.920-1.925 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1920. A legacy of support encompasses
food, medical treatment, clothing and
housing for as long as the legatee lives, in
addition to education, if he is a minor.
Art. 1921. A legacy of a usufruct, without
a time fixed, is deemed to have been left to
the legatee for his entire life.
Art. 1922. If a person bequeaths an
immovable property and later adjoins to it
new acquisitions, they are not in.eluded in
the legacy, even if contiguous, unless the
testator expressly declares otherwise.
Sole paragraph. The provisions of this
article do not apply to necessary, useful or
voluntary improvements made to the
bequeathed immovable.
Section II-The Effects of Legacies and
their Payment
Art. 1923. A certain thing existing in the
mass of property belongs to the legatee
from the opening of the succession, unless
the legacy is made under a suspensive
condition.
§ 1. Possession of the thing is not granted
immediately to the legatee, nor may he
enter into possession on his own authority.
§ 2. The legacy of a certain thing existing in
the inheritance also transfers to the legatee
the fruits that it produces, from the
testator's death, unless the legacy depends
on a suspensive condition or an initial term.
Art. 1924. The right to demand the legacy
shall not be exercised while the validity of
the testament is disputed or, in the case of
legacies subject to a condition or a term,
while the condition is unfulfilled or the
term has not expired.
Art. 1925. Interest runs on a legacy in
money only from the day on which the
person bound to pay it is put into default.
412
Art. 1.920. 0 legado de alimentos
abrange o sustento, a cura, o vestuario e
a casa, enquanto o legatario viver. alem
da educar;:ao, se ele for menor.
Art. 1.921. 0 Jegado de usufruto, sem
fixar;:ao de tempo, entende-se deixado
ao legatano par toda a sua vida.
Art. 1.922. Se aquele que legar um
im6vel lhe ajuntar depois novas aquisi-
i;:oes, estas, ainda que contfguas, nao se
compreendem no Jegado, salvo expres-
sa declarar;:ao em contrario do testador.
Paragrafo unico. Nao se aplica o dis-
posto neste artigo as benfeitorias neces-
sarias, Uteis OU VO]Uptuarias feitas no
predio legado.
Se~o II - Dos Efeitos do Legado e
do seu Pagamento
Art. 1.923. Desde a abertura da suces-
sao, pertence ao Jegatario a coisa certa,
existente no acervo, salvo se o legado
estiver sob condi~ao suspensiva.
0
§ I Nao se defere de imediato a posse
da coisa, nem nela pode o Jegatario en-
trar por autoridade pr6pria.
§ 2° 0 legado de coisa certa existente na
heranr;:a transfere tambem ao legatario
os frutos que produzir, desde a morte do
testador, exceto se dependente de con-
dir;:ao suspensiva, ou de termo inicial.
Art 1.924. 0 direito de pedir o legado
nao se exercera, enquanto se Htigue so-
bre a validade do testamento, e, nos le-
gados condicionais, ou a prazo. en-
quanto esteja pendente a condii;;ao ou o
prazo nil.o se ven9a.
Art. 1.925. 0 legado em dinheiro s6
vence juros desde o dia em que se cons-
tituir em mora a pessoa obrigada a pres-
tii-lo.
413 CODIGO CIVIL BILiNGUE
Art. 1.926. Se o legado consistir em
renda vitalfcia ou pensao peri6dica, esta
ou aquela correra da morte do testador.
Art.1.927. Seo legado for de quantida-
des certas, em prestac;oes peri6dicas,
datara da morte do testador o primeiro
perfodo, e o legatario tera direito a cada
presta9ao, uma vez encetado cada um
dos perfodos sucessivos, ainda que ve-
nha a falecer antes do termo dele.
Art. 1.928. Sendo peri6dicas as presta-
c;oes, s6 no termo de cada perfodo se
poderao exigir.
Paragrafo iinico. Sc as prestac;oes fo-
rem deixadas a tftulo de alimentos, pa-
gar-se-ao no comec;o de cada perfodo.
sempre que ourra coisa nao tenha dis-
posto o iestador.
Art. 1.929. Se o legado consiste em
coisa detem1inada pelo genero, ao her-
deiro tocara escolhe-la, guardando o
meio-termo entre as congeneres dame-
lhor e pior qualidade.
Art.1.930. 6 estabelecido no artigo an-
tecedente sera observado, quando a es-
colha for deixada a arbftrio de terceiro;
c, se este nlio a quiser ou nao a puder
exercer, ao juiz compctira faze-la. guar-
dado 0 disposto na ultima parte do arti-
go antecedente.
Art. 1.931. Se a opr;:ao foi deixada ao
legatario, este podera escolher, do ge-
nera determinado, a melhor coisa que
houver na hetanc;a; e, se nesta nao exis-
tir coisa de ta! genero, dar-lhe-a de ou-
tra congenere o herdeiro, observada a
disposic;ao na iiltima parte do art. 1.929.
Art. 1.932. No legado altemativo, pre-
sume-Se deixada ao herdeiro a opc;ao.
Art. 1.933. Se o herdeiro ou Jegatario a
quern couber a opr;:ao falecer antes de
exerce-la, passara este poder aos seus
herdeiros.
Art 1. 926-1. 933
Art. 1926.. If the legacy consists of an
annuity or a periodic pension, it shall run
from the testator's death.
Art. 1927. If the legacy is for certain
amounts in periodic installments, the first
period shall begin on the date of the
testator's death and the legatee shall have
the right to each installment as soon as each
of the successive periods commences, even
if he dies before the end of the period.
Art. 1928. If the installments are periodic,
they may be demanded only at the end of
each period.
Sole paragraph. If the installments were
bequeathed as support, they shall be paid at
the beginning of each period, if the testator
did not otherwise provide.
Art. 1929. If the legacy consists of a thing
determined by kind, it shall fall to the heir
to choose the thing from among its like,
selecting neither the best nor the worst, but
a thing of middle quality.
Art. 1930. The provisions of the preceding
article shall apply when the choice is left to
the discretion of a third party; and ifhe does
not wish to, or cannot, do so, the judge shall
make the choice, observing the provisions
of the last part of the preceding article.
Art.1931. If the option is left to the legatee,
he may choose the best from among like
things in the inheritance; and if that kind of
thing does not exist in the inheritance, the
heir shall give him another like thing, in
accordance with the provisions of the last
part of art. 1929.
Art.1932. In an alternative legacy, the heir
is presumed to have the option.
Art. 1933. If the heir or legatee who has the
option dies before exercising it, the power
shall pass to his heirs.
 Art. 1.934-1.939 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1934. Where the testament is silent,
the fulfillment of the legacies falls to the
!f
~eirs and there are none, to the legatees,
m proportion to what they have inherited.
Sole paragraph. The charge established in
t~is a~t!cle, if there is no testamentary
d1spos1t10n to the contrary, falls to the heir
or legatee appointed by the testator to
execute the legacy; when more than one is
indicated, the persons charged shall divide
the burden among themselves, in
proportion to what they receive from the
inheritance.
Art. 1935. If a legacy consists of a thing
belongin~ to an heir ora legatee (art. 1913),
only he ts charged with fulfilling it, with
recourse against the co~heirs, in proportion
to the share of each, unless the testator
otherwise expressly provided.
Art. 1936, The expenses and the risk of
delivering the legacy are borne by the
legatee, unless the testator otherwise
provides. · testador.
Ar!· 1937. A bequeathed thing shall be
delivered, together with its accessories in
the place and state ill which it was found at
the testator's death, and all charges that
encumber it pass with it to the legatee.
Art. 1938. In legacies subject to a charge,
the p~ovisions of this Code pertaining to
donations of the same nature shall apply to
the legatee.
Section Ill - The Lapse of
Legacies
Art. 1939. A legacy shall lapse:
I - if, after making the testament, the
testator modifies the bequeathed thing to
the point that it no longer has the same form
and the name given to it no longer fits;
414
Art. 1.934. No silencio do testamento,
o cumprimento dos legados incumbe
aos herdeiros e, nao os havendo, aos Ie-
gatarios, na propor1:ao do que her~
daram.
Paragrafo unico. 0 encargo estabeleci-
do neste artigo, nao havendo disposi1:ao
testamentaria em contrario, cabera ao
herdeiro ou legatario incumbido pelo
testadordaexecur;ao do legado; quando
indicados mais de um, os onerados di-
vidirao entre si o onus, na propor\:aO do
que recebam da heranr;a
Art. 1.935. Se algum legado consistir
em coisa pertencente a herdeiro ou le-
gatario (art. 1.913), s6 a ele incumbini
cumpri-lo, com regresso contra os co-
herdeiros, pela quota de cada um, salvo
se o contrario expressamente dispos o
testador.
Art. 1.936. As despesas e os riscos da
entrega do legado correm aconta do le-
gatario, se nao dispuser diversamente 0
Art. l.937. A coisa legada entregar-se-
a, com seus·acess6rios, no lugar e esta-
do em que se achava ao falecer o testa-
dor, passando ao legatario com todos os
encargos que a onerarem.
Art. 1.938. Nos legados com encargo,
aplica-se ao legatario o disposto neste
C6digo quanto As doa9oes de igual na-
tureza
Se1;ao ID - Da Caducidade dos
Legados
Art.1.939. Caducara o legado:
I - se, depois do testamento, o testador
modificar a coisa legada, ao porito deja
niio ter a forma nem !he caber a denomi-
na\:ao que possuia;
415 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
II - se o testador, por qualquer tftulo,
alienar no to do ou em parte a coisa lega-
da; nesse caso, caducara ate onde ela
deixou de pertencer ao testador;
III - se a coisa perecer ou for evicta,
vivo ou morto o testador, sem culpa do
herdeiro ou legatario incumbido do scu
cumprimento;
IV - se o legatario for exclufdo da su-
cessao, nos termos do art. 1.815;
V - se o legatario falecer antes do testa-
dor.
Art. 1.940. Se o legado for de duas ou
mais coisas alternativamente, e algu-
mas delas perecerem, subsistira quanta
as restantes; perecendo parte de uma,
valera, quanto ao seu remanescente, o
legado.
Capitulo VIII - Do Direito de
Acrcsccr entrc Herdeiros c
Legatiirios
Art. 1.941. Quando varios herdeiros,
pela mesma disposi~ao testamentaria,
forem conjuntamente chamados a he-
ran9a em quinhOes niio determinados, e
qualquer deJes nao puder OU nao quiser
aceita-la, a sua parte acrescera ados co-
herdeiros, salvo o direito do substituto.
Art. 1.942. 0 direito de acrescer compe-
tira aos co-legatarios, quando nomeados
conjuntamente a respeito de uma s6 coisa,
determinada e certa, ou quando o objeto
do Iegado niio puderser dividido sem ris-
co de desvaloriza~ao.
Art. 1.943. Se um dos co-herdeiros ou
co-legatarios, nas condic;oes do artigo
antecedente, morrer antes do testador;
se renunciar a heranr;a ou Iegado, ou
destes for exclufdo, e, sea condic;ao sob
a qua! foi institufdo niio se verificar,
acrescera o seu quinhiio, salvo o direito
do substituto, a parte dos co-herdeii-os
ou co-legatarios conjuntos.
Art. 1.940-1.943
II - if the testator, for any reason, alienates
the thing in whole or in part; in latter case,
the legacy lapses to the extent that the thing
ceased to belong to the testator;
III - if the thing perishes or is lost through
eviction, either before or after the testator's
death, without fault on the part of the heir or
legatee charged with fulfilling the lcga.::y;
IV - if the legatee is excluded from the
succession, within the terms of art. 1815;
V - if the legatee dies before the testator.
Art. 1940. If the legacy is of two or more
things alternatively, and some of them
perish, the legacy shall subsist as to the
remainder; if part of a thing perishes, the
legacy shall be valid as to the remainder.
Chapter vlll - The Right of Accretion
between Heirs and Legatees
Art.1941. When various heirs by the same
testamentary disposition are called to the
inheritance in undetermined shares, and
any of them does not wish, or is unable, to
accept it, his share shall accrete to the
co-heirs, subject to the right of the
substitute, if any.
Art. 1942. The right of accretion shall
apply to co-legatees, when they are named
jointly in respect of a single certain and
determined thing, or when the object of the
legacy cannot be divided without risk of
devaluation.
Art. 1943. If one of the co-heirs or
co-legatees, in the circumstances referred
to in the preceding article, dies before the
testator; if he renounces the inheritance or
legacy, or is excluded therefrom; or if the
condition on which it was made is not
fulfilled, his share shall accrete to the
portion of the joint co-heirs or co-legatees,
subject to the right of the substitute, if any.
Art. 1.944-1.946 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. The co-heirs or co-legatees
who receive the share by accretion become
subject to the obligations and charges that
encumbered the accreted share.
Art.1944. When the right of accretion does
not operate, the vacant share is transmitted
to the legal heirs. · deiros legftimos a quota vaga do no-
Sole paragraph. If there is no right of
accretion among co-legatees, the share of
the failed legatee accretes to the heir or
legatee charged with satisfying the legacy,
or to all the heirs, in proportion to their
shares, if the legacy was deducted from the
inheritance.
Art. 1945. The beneficiary of the accretion
cannot repudiate it separately from the
inheritance or legacy that falls to him,
unless the accretion carries with it special
charges imposed by the testator; in that
case, the accretion, once repudiated, reverts
to the person in whose favor the charges
were created.
Art. 1946. If a single usufruct is
bequeathed to two or more persons jointly,
the share of the failed legatee accretes to the
co-legatees.
Sole paragraph. If the legacy was not made
to the co-legatees jointly, or if, although
made to them jointly, only a certain part of
the usufruct was bequeathed to them, the
shares of the failed legatees shall be
incorporated into the ownership of the
thing, as and when they fail to take up the
legacy.
416
Paragrafo unico. Os co-herdeiros OU
co-legatarios, aos quais acresceu o qui-
nh1io daquele que niio quis ou nao pode
suceder, ficam sujeitos as obrigat;oes
ou encargos que o oneravar1.
Art. 1.944. Quando nao se efetua o di-
reito de acrescer, transmite-sc aos her-
meado.
Par.igrafo unico. Nao existindo o dirci-
to de acrescer entre os co-legatarios, a
quota do que faltar acresce ao herdeiro
ou ao legatario incumbido de satisfazer
esse legado, ou a todos os herdeiros, na
proport;iio dos seus quinhoes, se o lega-
do se deduziu da herarn;:a.
Art. 1.945. Nao pode o beneficiario do
acrescimo repudia-lo separadameme da
hera111;:a ou legado que the caiba, salvo
se o acrescimo comportar encargos es-
peciais impostos pelo testador; nesse
caso, uma vez repudiado, reverte o
acrescimo para a pessoa a favor de
quern os encargos foram institufdos.
Art.1.946. Legado um s6 usufruto con-
juntamente a duas ou mais pessoas, a
parte da que faltar acresce aos co-lega-
tarios.
Paragrafo unico. Se riao houver conjun-
\:iio entre os co-legatarios, ou se. apesar
de conjuntos, s6 !hes foi legada ccrta
parte do usufruto, consolidar-se-ao na
propriedade as quotas dos que faltarem,
amedida que eles forem faltando.
417 c6mao CIVIL BILINGUE
Capltulo IX - Substitui~iies
Se,.Uo I- Da Substituit;lio Vulgar e
da Reciproca
Art. 1.947. 0 testador pode suhstituir
oulra pessoaao herdeiro ou ao legatario
nomeado, para o caso de um ou outro
nao querer ou nao poder aceitar a heran-
<;a ou o legado, presumindo-se que a
substituit;ao foi determinada para as
duas alternativas, ainda que o testador
s6 a uma se refira.
Art. 1.948. Tambem elfcito ao testador
substituir muitas pessoas por uma s6,
ou vice-versa, e ainda substituir com re-
ciprocidade ou sem ela.
Art. 1.949. 0 substituto flea sujeito a
condit;1io ou encargo imposto ao substi-
tufdo, quando nao for diversa a inten-
i;ao manifestada pelo testador, ou n1io
resultar outra coisa da natureza da con-
di.,ao ou do encargo.
Art. 1.950. Se, entre muitos co-herdei-
ros ou legatarios de partes desiguais,
for estabelecida substitui.,ao rccfproca,
a propor9ao dos quinhoes fixada na pri-
meira disposit;ao entender-se-a manti-
da na segunda; se, com as outras ante-
riormente nomeadas. for inclufda mais
alguma pessoa na substituit;1io. o qui-
nhao vago pertencera em partes iguais
aos substitutos.
Se9lio II- Da Substitui9ao
Fideicomissaria
Art. 1.951. Pode o testador instituir
herdeiros ou legatarios, estabelecendo
que. por ocasi1io de sua morte, a heran-
.,a ou o legado se transmita ao fiducia-
rio, resolvendo-se o direito deste, por
sua morte, a certo tempo ou sob certa
condic,;ao, em favor de outrem, que se
qualifica de fideicomissario.
Art. 1.947-1.951
Chapter IX - Substitutions
Section I - Vulgar and Reciprocal
Substitution
Art. 1947. A testator may substitute
another person for the named heir or
legatee, in case the one or the other does not
wish, or is unable, to accept the inheritance
or legacy; the substitution is presumed to
operate in both alternatives, even if the
testator refers to one only.
Art. 1948. It is also licit for the testator to
substitute many persons for one only, or
vice versa, and to make the substitution
reciprocal or not.
Art. 1949. The substitute is subject to any
condition or charge imposed on the
substituted heir or legatee, when the
testator does not express a different
intention, or a different result does not arise
from the nature of the condition or charge.
Art. 1950. If reciprocal substitution is
established among many co-heirs or
co-legatees with different shares,. the
proportion of the shares fixed in the first
disposition is deemed to be maintained in
the second; if another is included in the
substitution along with the earlier named
persons, the vacant share shall belong in
equal parts to the substitutes.
Section II - Fideicommissary
Substitution
Art. 1951. A testator may institute heirs or
legatees, establishing that, on his death, the
inheritance or legacy shall be transmitted to
the fiduciary, and that the fiduciary's right
shall terminate on his death, at a certain
time or on a certain condition, in favor of
another, who is the fideicommissary.
Art. 1.952-1.958 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1952. Fideicommissary substitution
may only be established in favor of persons
not yet conceived at the time of the
testator's death.
Sole paragraph. If, at the time of the
testator's death, the fideicommissary has
been born, he acquires ownership of the
property subject to the fideicommissary
substitution, and the right of the fiduciary is
converted into a usufruct.
Art. 1953. The fiduciary has ownership of
the inheritance or legacy, but it is restricted
and terminable.
Sole paragraph. The fiduciary is obligated
to proceed to an inventory of the
encumbered property, and to give security
for his restitution of the property, if the
fideicommissary so demands.
Art. 1954. Unless the testator otherwise
provided, if the fiduciary renounces the
inheritance or legacy, the power to accept
devolves upon the fideicommissary.
Art. 1955. The fideicommissary may
renounce the inheritance or legacy and in
that case the fideicommissary substitution
lapses, and the fiduciary's ownership
ceases to be terI11inable, unless the testator
otherwise provided.
Art. 1956. If the fideicommissary accepts
the inheritance or legacy, he shall have the
right to any portion that accretes to the
fiduciary.
Art. 1957. The fideicommissary is liable
for the charges on the inheritance that
remain at the time he comes into the
succession.
Art. 1958. The fideicommissary
substitution lapses if the fideicommissary
dies before the fiduciary or before
fulfillment of thy resolutory condition to
which the fiduciary's right is subject; in
that case, ownership is consolidated in the
fiduciary, as contemplated in art. 1955.
418
Art. 1.952. A substituil;ao fidcicomis-
saria somente se permite em favor dos
nao concebidos ao tempo da morte do
testador.
Paragrafo unico. Se, ao tempo da morte
do testador, ja houver nascido o fidei-
comissario. adquirira este a proprieda-
de dos hens fideicomelidos, converten-
do-se em usufruto o direito do fidu-
ciario.
Art. 1.953. O fiduciario tern a proprie-
dade da heran"a ou legado, mas restrita
e resoluvel.
Paragrafo unico. 0 fiduciario e obriga-
do a proceder ao inventario dos bens
gravados, e a prestar cauirao de restitui-
los se o exigir o fideicomissnrio.
Art. 1.954. Salvo disposii;:ao em con-
trario do testador, se o fiduciario renun-
ciar a heran1;a ou o legado, defere-se ao
fideicomissario o poder de aceitar.
Art. 1.955. 0 fideicomissario pode re-
riunciar a herarn;:a ou o legado, e, neste
caso, o fideicomisso caduca. deixando
de ser reso!Uvel a propriedadc do fidu-
ciario, se niio houver disposii;ao conrra-
ria do testador.
Art. 1.956. Se o fideicomissario aceitar
a herani;:a OU 0 legado, !era direito apar-
te que, ao fiduciario, em qualquer tem-
po acrescer.
Art.1.957. Ao sobrevir a sucessao, o fi-
deicomissario responde pelos encargos
da herani;a que ainda restarem.
Art. 1.958. Caduca o fideicomisso se o
fideicotnissario morrer antes do fidu-
ciario, ou antes de realizar-se a condi-
i;ao resolut6ria do direito deste ultimo;
nesse caso, a propriedade consolida-se
no fiduciario, nos termos do art. 1.955.
419 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.959. Sao nulos os fidcicomissos
alem do segundo grau.
Art. 1.960. A nulidade da substituic,;ao
ilegal nlio prejudica a iustituil;:ao, que
valera sem o encargo resolutorio.
Capitulo X - Da Deserda\;iiO
Art. 1.961. Os herdeiros necessarios
podem ser privados de sua legftima, ou
descrdados, em todos os casos em que
podem scr excluidos da succssao.
Art. 1.962. Alem das causas menciona-
da~ no art. 1.814. autorizam a deserda-
c,;ao dos descendentes por seus ascen-
dentes:
I - ofensa ffsica;
II - injuria grave;
III - relm;:oes ilfcitas com a madrasta ou
com o padrasto;
IV - dcsamparo do ascendente em alie-
na<;ao mental ou grave enfermidade.
Art. 1.963. Alem das causas enumera-
das no art. !.814, autorizam a deserda-
i;:ao dos ascendcntcs pelos descen-
demes:
1- ofensa ffsica;
II - injuria grave;
Ill - relac,;ocs ilfcitas com a mulher ou
companheira do filho ou a do neto, ou
com o marido ou companheiro da filha
ou o daneta;
IV - desamparo do filho ou neto com
deficiencia mental ou grave enfermi-
dade.
Art. 1.964. Somente com expressa de-
clarai;:lio de causa pode a deserda~ao ser
ordenada em testamento.
Art. 1.959-1.964
Art. 1959. Fideicommissary substitutions
beyond the second rank are null.
Art. 1960. The nullity of an illegal
substitution does not affect the institution
of the inheritance or legacy, which shall
take effect without the charge that
terminates it.
Chapter X - Disinheritance
Art. 1961. Necessary heirs may be
deprived of their legal share, or
disinherited, in all the cases in which they
may be excluded from the succession.
Art. 1962. In addition to the causes
mentioned in art. 1814, the following
authorize disinheritance of descendants by
their ascendents:
I - physical offense;
II - serious verbal offense;
III - illicit relations with the descendant's
stepmother or stepfather;
IV - abandonment of the ascendent when in
a state of mental derangement or serious
illness.
Art. 1963. In addition to the causes
mentioned in art. 1814, the following
authorize disinheritance of ascendents by
their descendants:
I - physical offense;
II - serious verbal offense;
III - illicit relations with the wife or
companion of a son or grandson, or with the
husband or companion of a daughter or
granddaughter;
IV - abandonment of a child or
grandchildren suffering mental deficiency
or serious illness.
Art. 1964. Disinheritance may be ordered
by testament only with an express
declaration of its cause.
 Art. 1.965-1.968 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1965. The burden of proving the truth
of the cause alleged by the testator falls to
the appointed heir or to the person who
benefits from the disinheritance.
Sole paragraph. The right to prove the Paragrafo unico. 0 direito de provar a
cause of disheritance is extinguished four · causa da deserdai;:ao extingue-se no
years from the date the succession opens.
Chapter XI - The Reduction of
Testamentary Dispositions
Art. 1966. When a testator disposes of only
part of the disposable portion, the
remainder belongs to the legal heirs.
Art. 1967. Dispositions that exceed the
disposable portion are reduced to the limits
of that portion, in conformity with the
provisions of the following paragraphs.
§ 1. Upon ascertaining that the
testamentary dispositions exceed the
disposable portion, the shares of the
appointed heir. or heirs shall be reduced
proportionately, and if the shares of the
appointed heir or heirs are not sufficient
the legacies shall also be reduced, i~
proportion to their value.
§ 2. If the testator foresees the case and
provides that certain heirs and legatees are
to have preference, the reduction shall be
made i? the other shares or legacies,
observmg the order established in the
preceding paragraph.
Art. 1968. When a legacy subject to
reduction consists of a divisible immovable
p~op~rty: the reduction shall be made by
d1v1dmg it proportionately.
420
Art. 1.965. Ao herdeiro institufdo, ou
aquele a quern aproveite a deserdac;ao,
incumbe provar a veracidade da causa
alegada pelo testador.
prazo de quatro anos, a contar da data
da abertura do testamento.
Capltulo XI- Da Redu1;ao das
Disposi1;iies Testameutarias
Art. 1.966. 0 remanescente pertencera
aos herdeiros legftimos, quando o testa-
dor s6 em parte dispuser da quota here-
ditaria disponfvel.
Art. 1.967. As disposi<;iies que excede-
rem a parte disponfvel reduzir-se-ao
aos limites dela, de conformidade com
o disposto nos paragrafos seguintes.
0 Art.1.969. 0 testamento pode ser revo-
§ I Em se verificando excederem as
disposi91ies testamentarias a pon;ao
disponfvel. serao proporcionalmente
reduzidas as quotas do herdeiro ou her-
deiros institufdos, ate onde baste, e. nao
bastando, tambem os legados, na pro-
por~ao do seu valor,
§ 2° Se o testador, prevenindo o caso,
dispuser que se inteirem. de preferen-
cia, certos herdeiros e legatiirios, a re-
du9ao far-se-a nos outros quinhiies ou
legados, observando-se a seu respeito a
ordem estabelecida no paragrafo ante-
cedente.
Art.1.968. Quando consistir em predio
divisive! o legado sujeito aredur;ao, far-
se-a esta dividindo-o proporcional-
mente.
421 c6orao CIVIL BILlNGUE
§ 1° Se nao for possfvcl a divisao, e o
excesso do legado montar a mais de um
quarto do valor do predio, o legatario
deixara inteird na heran~a o im6vel le-
gado, ficando com o direito de pedir aos
herdeiros o valor q ue cotlber na pane
disponfvel; se o excesso nao for de mais
de um quarto, aos herdeiros fara tornar
em dinheito o legatiirio, que ficara com
o predio.
§ 2° Se o legatario for ao mesmo tempo
herdeiro necessario, poderti inteirar sua
!egftima no mesmo im6vel, de prefe-
rencia aos outros, sempre que ela e a
parte subsistente do legado !he absorve-
rem o valor.
Capitulo XII - Da Revoga1;ao do
Testamento
gado pelo mesmo modo e forma como
pode ser feito.
Art. 1.970. A revoga91io do testamento
pode ser total ou parciaL
Paragrafo unico. Se parcial, OU se 0 tes-
tamento posterior n1io contiver clausula
revogat6ria expressa, o anterior su hsis-
te em tudo que nao for contrario ao pos-
terior.
Art.1.971. A revoga\:fio produzira seus
efeitos, ainda quando o testamento, que
a encerra, vier a caducar por exclusao,
incapacidade OU renuncia do herdeiro
nele nomeado; nao valera, se o testa-
mento revogat6rio for anulado por
omissao ou infra91io de solenidades es-
senciais ou por vfcios intr!nsecos.
Art. 1.972. 0 testamento cerrado que o
testador abrir ou dilacerar, ou for aberto
ou dilacerado com seu consentimento,
haver-se-a coma revogado.
Art. 1.969-1.972
§ I. If division is not possible, and the
excess of the legacy amounts to more than
one-quaner of the value of the property, the
legatee shall leave the entire bequeathed
property in the inheritance, keeping the
right to demand from the heirs the amount
to which the legatee is entitled in the
disposable portion; if the excess is not more
than one-quarter, the legatee shall pay the
excess in money to the heirs and keep the
property.
§ 2. If the legatee is also a necessary heir, he
may complete his legal share in the
bequeathed immovable property, in
preference to the others, whenever the legal
share and the remaining part of the legacy
are sufficient to cover the amount.
Chapter XII - Revocation of
Testaments
Art. 1969. A testament may be revoked in
the same manner and form that it can be
made.
Art. 1970. Revocation of a testament may
be total or partial.
Sole paragraph. If revocation is partial, or
the later testament does not contain an
express provision for revocation, the earlier
testament remains in effect to the extent
that is not contrary to the later testament.
Art. 1971. The revocation shall produce its
effects even if the testament that contains it
lapses by reason of the exclusion,
incapacity or renunciation of the heir
appointed in it; but it will not be valid if the
revoking testament is annulled for
omission or violation of essential
formalities or intrinsic defects.
Art. 1972. A testament that is opened or
tom by the testator, or with his consent, is
taken to have been revoked.
 Art. 1.973-1.979 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Chapter XIII - The Overturning of
Testaments
Art. 1973. If a descendent capable of
su:ceeding the testator later comes into
existence, and the testator did not have the
descendent, or did not know of him when
?e made his testament, the testament in all
its provisions shall be overturned if the
descendent survives the testator.
Art. 1974. A testament made in ignorance
of the fact that othernecessary heirs existed
shall also be overturned.
Art. 1975. A testament shall not be
overt~rned if the testator disposes of his
half without contemplating necessary heirs
of whom he was aware, or excludes them
from the disposable portion.
Chapter XIV - Testamentary Executors
Art. 1976. A testator may appoint one or
more testamentary executors, jointly or
s~verally: to carry out the dispositions of
his last will.
Art. 1977. The testator may give the
test~m.enta~y executor the possession and
~d~m1strat10h of the inheritance, or part of
it, !f he does not have a spouse or necessary
heirs.
~ole p~ragrap~ .. Any heir may demand
~mme~iate part1t10n or devolution of the
mhentance, giving the testamentary
executor the means required to fulfill the
legacies, or giving security for their
payment.
Art 1978. Wh~n the testamentary executor
has the possession and administration of the
property, it falls to him to apply for the
mventory and fulfill the testament.
Art. 1979. The appointed testamentary
executor, or any interested party may
request, and the judge may order ex officio
tha~ the ~older of the testament submit it fo;
reg1strat10n.
422
Capitulo XIII - Do Rompimento do
Testamento
Art. 1.973. Sobrevindo descendente
sucessivel ao testador, que niio o tinha
ou ni.io o conhecia quando testou, rom-
pe-se o testamento em todas as suas dis-
posi~oes, se esse descendcnre sobrevi-
ver ao testador.
Art. 1.974. Rompe~se tambem o testa-
mento feito na ignori.incia de existirem
outros herdeiros necessario;
Art. l.975. Nao se rompe o testamento,
se o testador dispuser da sua metade
nao contcmplando os herdeiros neces~
sarios de cuja existencia saiba, ou quan-
do os exclua dessa parte.
Capitulo XIV - Do Testamenteiro
Art. 1.976. 0 testador pode nomear um
ou mais testamenteiros, conjuntos ou
separados, para lhe darem cumprimen-
to as disposi1:=oes de ultima vontade.
Art. 1.977. 0 testador pode conceder
ao testamenteiro a posse ea administra-
~ao da heran~a, OU de parte de!a, nao
havendo ciinjuge au herdeiros necessa-
rios.
Paragrafo unico. Qualquer herdeiro
pode requerer partilha imediata, ou de-
volw;:ao da heran~a. habilitando o testa-
menteiro com os meios necessarios
para o cumprimento dos legados, ou
dando cau1:=ao de presta-los.
Art. 1.978. Tendo o testamenteiro a
posse e a administra~ao dos bens, in-
cumbe-lhe requerer inventario e cum-
prir o testamento.
Art. 1.979. 0 testamenteiro nomeado
ou qualquer parte interessada, pode re~
querer, assim coma o juiz pode ordenar,
de offcio, ao detentor do testamento,
que o !eve a registro.
423 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 1.980. 0 testamenteiro e obrigado
a cumprir as disposi1:=oes tcstamenta-
rias, no prazo marcado pelo testador, e
a dar contas do que recebeu e despen-
deu, subsistindo sua responsabilidade
enquanto durar a cxecuyi.io do testa-
mento.
Art. 1.981. Compete ao testamenteiro,
com ou sem o concurso do inventarian-
te e dos herdeiros instituidos, defender
a validade do testamento.
Art.1.982. Alem das atribuir;:oes exara-
das nos artigos antecedentes, tcra o tes-
tamenteiro as que !he conferir o testa-
dor, nos limites da lei.
Art. 1.983. Nao concedendo o testador
prazo maior, cnmprira o testamenteiro
o testamento e prestara contas em cento
e oltenta dias, contados da aceitai,:ao da
testamentaria.
Paragrafo unico. Pode esse prazo ser
prorrogado se houver motivo suficiente.
Art. 1.984. Na falta de testamenteiro
nomeado pelo testador, a execU<;ao tcs-
tamentaria compete a um dos cilnjuges,
e, em falta destes, ao herdeiro nomeado
pelojuiz.
Art. 1.985. 0 encargo da testamentaria
nao se transmite aos herdeiros do testa-
menteiro, nerri e delegavel; mas o testa-
menteiro pode fazer-se representar em
jufzo e fora dele, mediante mandatario
com poderes especiais.
Art. 1.986. Havendo simultaneamente
mais de um testamenteiro, que tenha
aceitado o cargo, podera cada qua!
exerce-lo, em falta dos outros; mas to-
dos ficam solidariamente obrigados a
dar conta dos bens qtie lhes forem con-
fiados, salvo se cada um tiver, pelo tes-
tamento, funyoes distintas, ea elas se li-
mitar.
Art. 1.980-1.986
Art. 1980. The testamentary executor is
bound to fulfill the testamentary
dispositions within the time period set by
the testator, and to give account for all that
he received and spent; his liability subsists
while the testament is being executed.
Art.1981. The testamentary executor, with
or without the support of the inventory
administrator and the appointed heirs, shall
defend the validity of the testament.
Art. 1982. In addition to the powers and
duties listed in the preceding articles, the
testamentary executor shall have those
conferred upon him by the testator, within
the limits of the law. ·
Art. 1983. Unless the testator grants a
longer period, the testamentary executor
shall fulfill the testament and render
accounts in one hundred and eighty days
from acceptance of his charge.
Sole paragraph. This period of time may be
extended if there is sufficient reason.
Art. 1984. In the absence of the
testamentary executor appointed by the
testator, execution ofthe testament shall
fall to one of the spouses, and in their
absence to an heir appointed by the judge.
Art. 1985. The charge of testamentary
executor is not transmitted to the
testamentary executor's heirs, nor may it be
delegated; but the testamentary executor
may appoint representatives to act for him
before the courts and elsewhere, by
mandate granting special powers.
Art.1986. If there are simultaneously more
than one testamentary executor who have
accepted the charge, each of them may
exercise it in the absence of the others; but
all have a solidary obligation to give
account of the property that was confided to
them, unless each of them, under the
testament, has distinct functions and limits
himself to them.
Art. l.987-1.992 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 1987. Unless there is a testamentary
disposition to the contrary. a testamentary
executor who is neither an heir nor a legatee
has the right to a premium which, if the
testator has not fixed the amount, shall be
from one to five percent, as determined by
the judge, of the net inheritance, in
accordance with the size. of the inheritance
and the greater or lesser difficulty of
executing the testament.
Sole paragraph. The premium so
determined shall be paid from the
disposable portion, if there is a necessary
heir.
Art. 1988. An heir or legatee appointed as
testamentary executor may choose the
premium over the inheritance or legacy.
Art. 1989. A premium lost by the
testamentary executor by reason of
removal or failure to fulfill the testament
shall revert to the inheritance.
Art. 1990. If the testator has distributed the
whole of the inheritance in legacies, the
testamentary executor shall exercise the
functions of an inventory administrator.
Title IV ..... Inventory and
Partition •
Chapter I - Inventory
Art. 1991. From signature of the
commitment until homologation of the
partition, the inventory administrator shall
administer the inheritance.
Chapter II - Concealed Property
Art. 1992. An heir who .conceals property
in the inheritance, failing to describe it in
the inventory when the property is in his
power or, to his knowledge, in the power of
another, who omits to collate the property
when he is required to do so or who fails to
restitute it, loses the right he had in the
property.
424
Art. 1.987. Salvo disposi91io testamen-
taria em contrario, o testamenteiro. que
nao seja herdeiro ou legatario, tera di-
reito a um premio, que, se o tesrador
nao o houver.fixado, sera de um a cinco
por cento, arhitrado pelo juiz. sabre a
heran9a lfquida, conforme a importiln-
cia dela e maior ou menor dificuldade
na cxecu9ao do testamento.
Paragrafo unico. 0 premio arhitrado
sera pago a conta da parle disponfvel,
quando houver herdeiro necessario.
Art. 1.988. 0 herdeiro ou o legatario
nomeado testamenteiro podera preferir
0 premio aheran9a OU ao legado.
Art. 1.989. Revertera a heran1;a o pre-
mio que o testamenteiro perdcr, por ser
removido ou por nao ter cumprido o
testamento.
Art. l.990. Seo testador tiver distribuf-
do toda a heran9a em Iegados, exercenl
o testamenteiro as fun95es de inventa-
riante.
Titulo IV - Do Invcntario c da
Partilha
Capitulo I - Do Inventario
Art. 1.991. Desde a assinatura do com-
promisso ate a homologa~ao da parti-
lha, a administra9ao da herarn;:a sera
exercida pelo inventariante.
Capitulo II - Dos Sonegados
Art.1.992. 0 herdeiro que sonegar hens
da herani;;a, nao os descrevendo no in-
ventario quando estejam em seu poder,
ou, com o seu conhecimento, no de ou-
trem, ou que os omitir na cola~ao, a que
os deva Ievar, ou que deixar de restituf-
Ios, perdera o direito que sobre eles !he
cabia.
425 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 1.993. Alem da pena cominada no
artigo antecedente, se o sonegador for o
proprio inventaria.nte, remover-se-a,
em se provando a sonegai;;iio, ou negan-
do ele a existencia dos hens, quando in-
dicados.
Art.1.994. A pena de sonegados so se
pode requercr e impor em ai;iio movida
pelos herdeiros ou pelos credores da he-
rani;;a.
Paragrafo unico. A sente119a que SC pro-
ferir na ai;ao de sonegados, movida por
qualquer dos herdeiros ou credores,
aproveita aos demais interessados.
Art. 1.995. Se niio SC restituirem OS
hens sonegados, por jii nao os ter o so-
negador em seu poder, pagara ele aim-
portilncia dos valores que ocultou, mais
as perdas e danos.
Art. 1.996. So se pode argiiir de sone-
ga9ao o inventariante depois de encer-
rada a descrii;;ao dos hens. com a decla-
rai;;ao, porele feita, de nao existirem ou-
tros por inventariare partir, assim como
argiiir o herdeiro, depois de declarar-se
no inventario que nao os possui.
Capitulo III - Do Pagamento das
Dividas
Art. 1.997. A herarn(a responde pelo
pagamento das dividas do falecido;
mas, feita a partilha, so respondem os
herdeiros, cada qua! em propon;iio da
parte que na herani;;a !he couhe.
Art. 1.993-1.997
Art. 1993. Aside from the penalty imposed
in the preceding article, if the concealing
heir is the inventory administrator, he shall
be removed if the concealment is proved,
or, where he denies the existence of the
property, when the property is indicated in
the inventory.
Art. 1994. The penalty for concealment of
property may only be demanded and
imposed in an action brought by the heirs or
by the creditors of the inheritance.
Sole paragraph. The judgment issued in the
action regarding concealment of property,
brought by any of the heirs or creditors,
benefits all other interested parties.
Art. 1995. If the concealed property is not
restituted because the concealing heir no
longer has it in his power, he shall pay the
value of what he hid, as well as lasses and
damage.
Art.1996. An inventory administrator may
only be accused of concealment of property
after the description of the property is
concluded with his declaration that no other
property exists to be inventoried and
partitioned; and an heir may only be
accused after he has declared in the
inventory that he does not possess the
property.
Chapter III - Payment
of Debts
Art. 1997. The inheritance is liable for
payment of a deceased person's debts; but
after partition, only the heirs are liable, each
in proportion to his share in the inheritance.
Art. l.998-2.001 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
§ 1. When, prior to partition, a demand is
made in the inventory for payment of debts
set out in documents in due legal form,
constituting sufficient evidence of the
obligation, and the obligation is contested,
with good evidence, on some basis other
than the allegation that payment has been
made, the judge may order that sufficient
property to settle the debt be reserved in the
power of the inventory administrator, on
which the debts may in due course be
executed.
§ 2. In the case contemplated in the
preceding paragraph, the creditor shall
commence the collection action within
thirty days; if he fails to do so, the measure
referred to above shall lose effect.
Art. 1998. Whether or not there are legal
heirs, funeral expenses shall come out of
the mass of the inheritance; but expenses of
offering prayers in suffrage for the
deceased obligate the inheritance only
when ordered in a testament or codicil.
Art.1999. Whenever some heirs exercise a
right of recourse against others, the share of
the insolvent co-heir is divided
p~oportionally among the rest.
Art. 2000. The legatees and the creditors of
the inheritance may demand that the
deceased's patrimony be separated from
the heir's and ·that their claims to payment
have preference over the competing claims
of the heir's creditors.
Art. 2001. If an heir is debtor to the mass,
his debt shall be divided equally among all
the heirs, unless the majority consent that
the debt shall be imputed entirely to the
debtor's share.
426
§ I 0 Quando, antes da partilha, for re-
querido no inventario o pagamento de
dividas constantes de documentos, re-
vestidos de formalidades legais, consti-
tuindo prova bastante da obrigrn;ao, e
houver impugna9ao, que nao se funde
na alega9ao de pagamento, acompa-
nhada de prova valiosa. o juiz mandara
reservar, em podcr do inventariantc,
bens suficientes para solu9ao do dcbito,
sobre os quais venha a recair oportuna-
mente a execu9ao.
§ 2° No caso previsto no pan'igrafo an-
tecedente, o credor sera obrigado a ini-
ciar a ai;:iio de cobran\:a no prazo de trin-
ta di as, sob pena de se tornar de nenhum
efeito a providencia indicada.
Art. 1.998. As despesas funerarias.
haja ou nao herdeiros legftimos. sairao
do monte da heram;:a; mas as de sufra-
gios por alma do falecido s6 obrigarao
a heram;a quando ordenadas em testa-
mento ou codicilo.
Art. l.999. Sempre que houver ai;ao re-
gressiva de uns contra outros herdeiros,
a parte do co-herdeiro insolvente divi-
dir-se-a em propor\:fio entre os demais.
Art. 2.000. Os legatarios e crcdores da
heran~a podem exigir que do patrimo-
nio do falecido se discrimine o do her-
deiro, e,· em COllCUfSO COffi OS credores
deste, ser-Jhes-ao preferidos no paga-
mento.
Art. 2.001. Se o herdeiro for devedor
ao esp6lio, sua dfvida sera partilhada
igualmente entre todos, salvo sea maio-
ria consentir que o debito seja imputado
inteiramente no quinhao do devedor.
427 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Capitulo IV - Da Cola1:ao
Art. 2.002. Os descendentes que con-
a
correrem sucessao do ascendcnte co-
mum silo obrigados, para igualar as le-
gftimas, a conferir o valor das doai;oes
que dele em vida rcceberam, sob pena
de sonegm,:ao.
Paragrafo unico. Para calculo da legfti-
ma, o valor dos bens conferidos sera
computado na parte indisponivel, sem
aumentar a dispon(vel.
Art. 2.003. A colm;fio tern por fan igua-
1ar, na propon,;ao estabelecida neste
Codigo, as legftimas dos descendentes
e do conjuge sobreviventc, obrigando
tambcm os donatarios que. ao tempo do
falecimento do doador, ja nlio possuf-
rem os bens doados.
Paragrnfo unico. Se. computados os va-
l ores das dom;:oes feitas em adianta-
mento de legftima, nao houvcr no acer-
vo hens suficientes para igualar as legf-
timas dos descendenies e do conjuge,
os bens assim doados seriio conferidos
em especie, ou, quando deles ja nao dis-
ponha o donatario, pelo seu valor ao
tempo da liberalidade.
Art. 2.004. 0 valor de cola1rao dos bens
do ados sera aqilele, certo ou estimativo,
que !hes atribuir o ato de liberalidadc.
§ l 0 Se do ato de dom;ao nao constar va-
lor certo, nem houver estima<,;iio feita
naquela epoca, os bens serao confori-
dos na partilha pelo que entao se calcu-
lar valessem ao tempo da liberalidade.
2° S6 o valor dos bens doados entrara
em cola~ao; niio assim o das benfeito-
rias acrescidas, as quais pertencerao ao
herdeiro donatario, correndo tambem a heir; to his account run earnings and profits,
conta deste os rendimentos ou lucros,
assim como os danos e perdas que eles
sofrerem.
Art. 2.002-2.004
Chapter IV - Collation
Art. 2002. Descendents who compete in the
succession of a common ascendent are
obligated to contribute the value of gifts
received from the ascendent during his life, in
order to make their legal shares equal, subject
to the penalties for concealment of property.
Sole paragraph. For the purposes of
calculating the legal share, the value of the
contributed property is computed in the
non-disposable portion, without increasing
the disposable portion.
Art. 2003. The purpose of collation is to
make the legal shares of the descendents
and the surviving spouse equal, in the
proportions established in this Code; it also
obligates donees who, at the time the donor
died, no longer possessed the property
given to them.
Sole paragraph. If, after computing the
value of gifts given as advances on the legal
shares, there is insufficient property in the
mass to complete the legal shares of the
descendents and the surviving spouse, the
gifted property shall be contributed in kind
or, when the donee no longer has the
property, by payment of its value at the time
of the gift was made.
Art. 2004. The collation value of the gifted
property shall be the value, either certain or
estimated, attributed to it in the instrument
of gift.
§ 1. If a certain value is not set out in the
instmment of gift and there is no estimate
made at that time, the property shall be
contributed to the partition at the value it is
calculated to have had at the time the gift
was made.
§ 2. Only the value of the gifted property is
subject to collation, not the value of added
improvements, which belong to the donee
as well as the damage and losses the
property suffers.
Art. 2.005-2.007 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 2005. Gifts that the donor determines
shall come out of the disposable portion are
exempted from collation, provided that
their value, computed at the time the gift
was made, does not exceed the disposable
portion.
Sole paragraph. A gift made to a
descendent who, at the time. the gift was
made, would not be called to the succession
as a necessary heir is presumed to come out
of the disposable portion.
Art. 2006. Exemption from collation may
be granted by the donor in his testament or
in the instrument of gift.
Art. 2007. Gifts that are determined to
exceed what the donor could dispose of at
the time of the gift are subject to reduction.
§ 1. The excess is determined on the basis
of the value that the gifted property had at
the time the gift was made.
§ 2. The gift is reduced by restitution to the
mass of the excess so determined;
restitution shall be in kind or, if the property
is no longer in the power of the do nee, in
money, according to the property's value at
the time the succession opened, observing,
to the extent applicable, the provisions of
this Code on reduction of testamentary
dispositions.
§ 3. That part of gifts made to necessary
heirs that exceeds the sum of their legal
share and the disposable portion is subject
to reduction in accordance with the
preceding paragraph.
§ 4. If various gifts have been made to the
necessary heirs, on different dates, they
shall be reduced starting with the last, until
the excess is eliminated.
428
Art. 2,005. Sao dispensadas da colai;;ao
as doar,:oes que o doador determinar
saiam da parte disponfvel, contanto que
nao a excedam, computado o seu valor
ao tempo da doar,:ao.
Paragrafo unico. Presume-se imputada
na parte disponfvel a liheralidade feita a
descendente que, ao tempo do ato, nao
seria chamado asucessao na qualidade
de herdeiro necessario.
Art. 2.006. A dispensa da colar,:ao pode
ser outorgada pelo doador em testa-
mcnto, ou no pr6prio tftulo de liberali-
dade.
Art. 2.007. Sao sujeitas a reduqao as
doa96es em que se apurar excesso
quanto ao que o doador poderia dispor,
no momento da liberalidade.
§ 1° 0 excesso secl apurado com base
no valor que os hens doados tinham, no
momento da Jiberalidade.
§ 2° A redw;:ao da liberalidade far-seca
pelarestitui9ao ao monte do excesso as-
sim apurado; a restitui9ao secl cm espe-
cie, ou, se nao mais existir o bem em
poder do donatario, em dinheiro, se-
gundo o seu valor ao tempo da abcnura
da sucessao, ohservadas, no que forem
aplicaveis, as regras deste C6digo sob re
a redu9ao das disposii.:oes testamenta-
rias.
§ 3° Sujeita-se a redu9ao. nos termos do
paragrafo antecedente, a parte da doa-
9ao feita a herdeiros necessarios que
ex ceder a legftima e mais a quota dispo-
nfvel.
§ 4° Sendo varias as doairoes a herdei-
ros necessarios, fcitas em diferentes da-
tas, serao elas reduzidas a partir da ulti-
ma, ate a eliminayao do excesso.
429 CODIGO CIVIL BlLlNGUE
Art. 2.008. Aquelc que renunciou a he-
rarn;:a ou dela foi exclufdo, deve, nao
ohstante, conferir as dom;oes recehidas,
para o fim de repor o que exceder o dis-
ponivel.
Art. 2.009. Quando os netos. repre-
sentando os seus pais, sucederem aos
avos, serao obrigados a trazer a cola-
i;ao, ainda que nao o hajam herdado, o
que os pais teriam de conferir.
Art. 2.010. Nao virao acola9ao os gas-
tos ordinarios do ascendente com o de-
scendente, enquanto menor, na sua edu-
ca<;1io, estudos, sustento, vestuario, tra-
tamento nas enfermidades, enxoval, as-
sim como as despesas de casamento, ou
as feitas no interesse de sua defesa em
processo-crime.
Art. 2.011. As doa\!oes remunerat6rias
de servi\!OS feitos ao ascendente tam-
bem nao estao sujeitas a colai;;ao.
Art. 2.012. Sendo feita a doa9ao por
ambos os conjuges, no inventario de
cada um se confericl por metade.
Capifo!O V - Da Partilha
Art. 2.013. 0 herdeiro pode sempre re-
querer a partilha, aindaque o testador o
profba, cahendo igual faculdade aos
seus cessionarios e credores.
Art. 2.014. Pode o testador indicar os
hens e valores que devem compor os
quinhoes hereditlirios, deliherando ele
proprio a partilha, que prevalecerii, sal-
vo se o valor dos hens nao corresponder
as quotas estabelecidas.
Art. 2.015. Se os herdeiros forem capa-
zes, poderao fazer partilha amigavel,
por escritura piiblica, termo nos autos
do inventario, ou escrito particular, ho-
mologado pelo juiz.
Art. 2.008-2.015
Art. 2008. An heir who renounces the
inheritance or was excluded from it must
nonetheless contribute the gifts he
received, in order to return the part that
exceeds the disposable portion.
Art. 2009. When grandchildren,
representing their parents, succeed their
grandparents, they are obligated to bring to
collation that which their parents would
have had to contribute, even though they
did not inherit.
Art. 2010. Expenditures ordinarily made
by an ascendent on a descendant while a
minor, for his education, studies, support,
clothing, medical treatment and trousseau,
do not come into collation, nor do wedding
expenses or expenses incurred to defend the
descendant in criminal proceedings.
Art. 2011. Gifts made to remunerate
services rendered to the ascendent are also
not subject to collation.
Art. 2012. If the gift is made by both
spouses, one half shall be contributed to the
inventory of each of them.
Chapter V - Partition
Art. 2013. An heir may always demand
partition, even if the testator prohibited it,
and so may the heir's assignees and
creditors.
Art. 2014. The testator may indicate the
property and amounts that should compose
the heirs' shares, determining the partition
himself; his determination shall prevail
unless the value of the property does not
correspond to the established shares.
Art. 2015. If the heirs are capable, they
may make an amicable partition by public
writing, by instrument in the record of the
inventory, or by private writing
homologated by the judge.
 Art. 2.016-2.020
BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Art. 2~16. The partition shall be judicial if
!he heirs do not agree or if any of them are
mcapable.
Art. 2017. The partition shall be made as
equally as possible, considering the value
nature and quality of the property. ' sobrepartilhas, sob a guarda e a admi-
Art. 2018. A partition made by an
ascendent b_Y ~nter ~ivos instrument or by
act of last w11l 1s vahd, provided.that it does
not prejudice the legal share of the
necessary heirs.
A.r!· 2019: ~terns of property that cannot
easily be d1v1ded and that do not fall into the
surviving spouse's half or to the share of a
single heir shall be sold judicially, and th~
amount obtained shall be partitioned
unless there is agreement that the items of
property shall be adjudicated to all the
mterested pai:ties.
§ I. Judicial sale shall not be made if the
surviving spouse or one or more of the heirs
re9u~sts that the item of property be
adjudicated to them, paying the difference
. to the others in money, after an evaluation
that reflects the property's current value.
§ 2. If adjudication is requested by more
than one heir, the procedure for public
auctions shall be followed.
Art. 202{). Heirs in possession of the
property of the. inheritance, the surviving
spouse and the mventory administrator are
obligated to bring into the mass the fruits
they have received from the time the
su?cession opened; they have the right to
reimbursement for necessary or useful
expenses they have incurred, and are liable
for damage they caused through their fault
or wrongful act.
430
Art. 2.016. Sera sempre judicial a par-
tilha, se os herdeiros divergirem, assim
como se algum deles for incapaz.
Art. 2.017. No partilhar os hens, obser-
var-se-a, quanto ao seu valor, natureza
e qualidade, a maior igualdade possf-
vel. '
Art. 2.018. Eva!ida a partilha feita por
ascendente, por ato entre vivos ou de
ultima vontade, contanto que nao preju-
dique a legftima dos herdeiros necessa-
rios.
Art. 2.019. Os hens insuscetfveis de di-
visao comoda, que nao couberem na
meayao do conjuge sobrevivente ou no
quinhiio de um s6 herdeiro, seriio ven-
didos judicialmente, partilhando-se o
valor apurado, a niio ser que haja acor-
do para serem adjudicados a todos.
0 no caso de evlcyao dos bens aquinhoa-
§ I Nao se fara a venda judicial se o
conjuge sobrevivente ou um ou mais
herdeiros requererem lhes seja adjudi-
cado o bem, repondo aos outros, em di-
nheiro, a diferenya, ap6s avaliayao
atualizada.
§ 2° Se a adjudic~iio for requerida por
mais de um herdeiro, observar-se-a o
processo da licitayao.
Art. 2.020. Os herdeiros em posse dos
hens da heranya, 0 conjuge sobreviven-
te e 0 inventariante sao obrigados a tra-
zer ao acervo os frutos que perceberam.
desde a abertura da sucessiio; tern direi-
to ao reembolso das despesas necessa-
rias e uteis que fizeram, e respondem
pelo dano a que, por dolo ou culpa, de-
ram causa.
431 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGUE
Art. 2.021. Quando parte da heran~a
consistir em hens remotos do lugar do
inventiirio, litigiosos, ou de liquidayao
morosa ou diffcil, podera proceder-se,
a
no prazo legal, partilha dos outros, re-
serv;mdo-se ;iqueles para uma ou mais
nistrayao do mesmo ou diverso inventa-
riante, e consentimento da maioria dos
herdeiros.
Art. 2.022. Ficam sujeitos a sohreparti-
lha os bens sonegados e quaisquer ou-
tros hens da heran\:a de que se tiver
ciencia ap6s a partilha.
Capitulo VI - Da Garantia dos
Quinhoes Hereditarios
Art. 2,023. J ulgada a partilha, flea o di-
reito de cada um dos herdeiros circuns-
crito aos hens do seu quinhiio.
Art, 2.024. Os co-herdeiros sao reci-
procamente obrigados a indenizar-se
dos.
Art. 2.025. Cessa a ohrigas;ao mutua
estabelecida no artigo antecedente, ha-
vendo conveh\'.l'io em corttriirio, e bem
assim dartdo-se a evici;:ao por culpa do
a
evicto, OU por fato posterior partilha.
Art. 2.026. 0 evicto sera indenizado
pelos co-herdeiros na proporyao de
suas quotas hereditiirias, mas, se algum
deles se achar insolvente, responderao
os demais na mesma propon;ao, pela
parte desse, menos a quota que corres-
ponderia ao indenizado.
Capitulo VII - Da Anula~iio da
Partilha
Art. 2.027. A partilha, uma vez feita e
julgada, s6 eanulavel pelos vfcios e de-
feitos que invalidam, em geral, os neg6-
cios jurfdicos.
Art. 2.021-2.027
Art. 2021. When part of the inheritance
consists of property that is located far from
the place of the inventory, is disputed or is
difficult or slow to liquidate, the other
property shall be partitioned within the
legal time period, and the first-mentioned
property may be reserved for one or more
additional partitions, under the keeping and
administration of the same or another
inventory administrator, with the consent
of a majority of the heirs.
Art. 2022. Concealed property and any
other property of the inheritance that is
learned of after partition are subject to a
later partition.
Chapter VI - Security for Shares in the
Inheritance
Art. 2023. Once partition has been
adjudged, each heir's right is circumscribed
to the prope1ty in his share.
Art. 2024. The co-heirs are reciprocally
obligated to indemnify each other in case of
eviction from the property allocated to the
shares.
Art. 2025. The mutual obligation
established in the preceding article ceases if
there is an agreement to the contrary or if
eviction occurs through the fault of the
evicted heir or by reason of facts
subsequent to the partition.
Art. 2026. The evicted heir shall be
indemnified by the co-heirs in proportion to
their shares in the inheritance; if one of
them is insolvent, the rest shall be liable in
the same proportion for the part of the
insolvent heir, less the share that would fall
to the indemnified heir.
Chapter Vil - Annulment
of Partition
Art. 2027. Partition, once made and
adjudged, can be annulled only for vices
and defects that, in general, invalidate legal
transactions.
 Art. 2.028-2.032 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE
Sole paragraph. The right to annul the
partition is extinguished in one year.
Complementary Book - Final and
Transitional Provisions
Art. 2028. Where a time period established
under the former legislation has been
reduced by this Code, and at the time this
Code comes into effect more than one-half
of the time period es.tablished under the
revoked legislation has run, the. time period
shall be that of the earlier legislation.
Art. 2029. For two years after the entry into
force of this Code, two years shall be added
to the time periods established in the sole
paragraph of art. 123 8 and the sole
paragraph of art. 1242, regardless of the
time run while the former Code, Law 3071
of January 1, 1916, was in effect.
Art. 2030. The additional time referred in
to the preceding article shall apply in the
cases referred to in art. 1228 §4.
Art. 2031. Associations, companies and
foundations constituted in the forms
provided for under 'former legislation shall
have a period of two (2.) years to conform to
the provisions of this Code, from the date it
comes into effect; a like period of time is
granted to busines.s proprietors. (As
amended by Law 10,838 of2004)
Sole paragraph .. The provisions of this
article do not apply to religious
organizations or political parties. (Added
by Law 10,825 of22/12/2003)
Art. 2032. Foundations created under the
former legislation, including foundations
whose purposes are different from those
contemplated in the sole paragraph of art.
62, are subject to the provisions of this
Code as to the manner in which they
function.
432
Paragrafo unico; Extingue-se em um
ano o direito de anular a partilha.
Livro Complementar - Das
Disposi~oes Finais
e Transit6rias
Art. 2.028. Serao os da lei anterior os
prazos, quando reduzidos por este C6-
digo, e se, na data·de sua entrada em vi-
gor, ja houver transcorrido mais dame-
tade do tempo estabelecido na lei revo-
gada.
Art. 2.029. Ate dois anos ap6s a entra-
da em vigor deste C6digo, os prazos es-
tabelecidos no paragrafo unico do art.
l.238 e no paragrafo unico do art. 1.242
serao acrescidos de dois anos, qualquer
que seja o tempo transcorrido na vigen-
cia do anterior, Lei n° 3.071, de 1° deja-
neiro de 1916.
Art. 2.030. 0 acrescimo de que trata o
artigo antecedente, sera feito nos casos
a que se refere o § 4° do art. l.228.
Art. 2.031. As associa1;5es, sociedades
e funda\:oes, constitufdas na forma das
leis anteriores, terao o prazo de 2 (dois)
as
anos para se adaptar disposi~oes des-
te C6digo, a partir de sua vigencia igual
prazo e concedido aos empresarios.
(Reda~ao dada pela Lei n° 10.838, de
2004)
Paragrafo unico. 0 disposto neste arti-
go nao se aplica ils organizai;oes reli-
giosas nem aos partidos politicos. (In-
cl u ido pela Lei 11° 10.825, de
22.12.2003)
Art. 2.032. As funda9oes, institufdas
segundo a legislai;ao anterior, inclusive
as de fins diversos dos previstos no pa-
ragrafo unico do art. 62, subordinam-
se, quanto ao seu funcionamento, ao
disposto neste C6digo.
433 CODIGO CIVIL BILINGOE
Art. 2.033. Salvo o disposto em lei es-
pecial, as modifica95es dos atos consti-
tutivos das pessoas jurfdicas referidas
no art. 44, bem como a sua transforma-
t;ao, incorpora9ao, cisao ou fusao, re-
gem-se desde logo por cste C6digo.
Art. 2.034. A dissolu~ao e a liquida\:iio
das pessoasjurfdicas referidas no artigo
antecedente, quando iniciadas antes da
vigencia deste C6digo, obedecerao ao
disposto nas leis anteriores.
Art. 2.035. A validade dos neg6cios e
demais atos juridicos, constitufdos an-
tes da entrada em vigor deste C6digo,
obedece ao disposto nas leis anteriores,
referidas no art. 2.045, mas os seus cfei-
tos, produzidos ap6s a vigencia deste
C6digo, aos preceitos dele se subordi-
nam, salvo se houver sido prevista pe-
Ias partes determinada forma de cxe-
Cll\:i'io.
Paragrafo unico. Nenhuma convem;:ao
prevalecera se contrariar prcceitos de
ordem pub! ica, tais co mo os estabeleci-
dos por este C6digo para assegurar a
fum;ao social da propriedade e dos con-
tratos.
Art. 2.036. A locai;:ao de predio urbano,
que esteja sujeitail lei especial, por esta
continua a ser regida.
Art. 2.037. Salvo disposigao em con-
trario; aplicam-se aos empres:irios e so-
ciedades empresarias as disposi~oes de
lei nao revogadas por este C6digo, refe-
rentes a comerciantes, ou a sociedades
comerciais, bem como a atividades
mercantis.
Art. 2.038. Fi ca proibida a cons ti tu ii;ao
de enfiteuses e subenfiteuses, subordi-
nando-se as existentes, ate sua extin-
t;iio, as disposii;:oes do C6digo Civil an-
terior, Lei n° 3.071. de 1° de janeiro de
1916, e leis posteriores.
Art. 2.033-2.038
Art. 2033. Saving provision to the contrary
in special legislation, the changes in the
constituting acts of the legal persons
referred to in art. 44, as well as their
transformation, merger, split or
amalgamation, are governed immediately
by this Code.
Art. 2034. The dissolution and liquidation
of the legal persons referred to in the
preceding article, when initiated before this
Code came into effect, shall follow the
provisions of the former legislation.
Art. 2035. The validity of transactions and
other legal acts made prior to the entry into
force of this Code is governed by the
provisions of the earlier legislation referred
to in art. 2045, but the effects they produce
after this Code is in effect shall be subject
to the rules contained herein, unless the
parties have provided for a certain form of
performance.
Sole paragraph. No agreement shall prevail
if it is contrary to rules of public order, such
as those established by this Code to ensure
the social function of property and
contracts.
Art. 2036. Lease of urban immovables that
is subject to special legislation continues to
be governed thereby.
Art. 2037. Saving provision to the
contrary, the legislative provisions
concerning merchants, commercial
companies and mercantile activities that
have not been revoked by the Code apply to
business proprietors and business
companies.
Art. 2038. The creation of emphyteutic
leases and subleases is prohibited; those
now existing are subject, until their
extinction, to the provisions of the former
Civil Code, Law 3071 of January 1, 1916,
and subsequent legislation.
Art. 2.039-2.042 BILINGUAL CIVIL CODE 434
435 CODIGO CIVIL BILii'1GUE Art. 2.043-2.046

§ 1. In the emphyteutic leases referred to in § 1° Nos aforamentos a que se refere

this article, it is prohibited to:
I - demand laudemium or similar payment
on transmission of the leased property, over
the value of buildings or plantations;
II - constitute emphyteutic subleases.
§ 2. Emphyteutic leases of public coastal
lands and accretions thereto are governed
by specific legislation.
Art. 2039. The property regime of
marriages celebrated while the former Civil
Code, Law 3071 of January 1, 1916, was in
effect is the regime established by the
former Code.
Art. 2040. Legal hypothecs on the property
of a tutor or ou.rator, registered in
accordance with art. 827 (IV) of the fonner
Civil Code, Law 3071 of January l, 1916,
may be cancelled, subject to the provisions
of the sole paragraph of art. 1745 of this
Code.
Art. 2041. The provisions of this Code
concerning the order of heirship (arts. 1829
to 1844) do not apply to successions that
opened before this Code came into effect;
the provisions of the former legislation
prevail (Law 3071ofJanuary1, 1916).
este artigo edefeso:
I - cobrar laudemio OU prestac;ao analo-
ga nas transmissoes de hem aforado,
sabre o valor das constrw;:oes ou plan-
tac;oes;
II - constituir subenfiteuse.
§ 2° A enfiteuse dos terrenos de mari-
nha e acrescidos regula-se par lei espe-
cial.
Art. 2.039. 0 regime de bens nos casa-
mentos celebrados na vigencia do C6-
digo Civil anterior, Lei n° 3.071, de 1°
de janeiro de 1916, e0 porele esrabele-
cido.
Art. 2.040. A hipoteca legal dos bens
do tutor ou curador, inscrita em confor-
midade com o inciso IV do art. 827 do
C6digo Civil anterior, Lei n° 3.071, de
1° de Janeiro de 1916. podera ser cance-
lada, obedecido o disposto no paragrafo
unico do art. 1.745 deste C6digo.
Art. 2.041. As disposi~oes deste C6digo
relativas ii ordem da vocac;ao hereditaria
(arts. 1.829 a 1.844) nao se aplicam asu-
cessao aberta antes de sua vigencia. pre-
valecendo o disposto na lei anterior (Lei
n° 3.071, de 1° de janeiro de 1916).
Art. 2.043. Ate que par outra forma se
disdplinem, continuam em vigor as
disposii;oes de natureza processual, ad-
ministratliia ou penal, constantes de leis
cujos preceitos de uatureza civil hajam
sido incorporadoS a este C6digo.
Art. 2.044. Este C6digo entrara em vi-
gor l (um) ano ap6s a sua publicac;ao.
Art. 2.045. Revogam-se a Lei n° 3.071,
de I• de janeiro de 1916 - Codi go Civil
e a Parte Primeira do C6digo Comer-
cial, Lei 11° 556, de 25 de junho de 1850.
Art. 2.046. Todas as remissoes, em di-
plomas Jegislativos, aos C6digos referi-
dos no artigo antecedente, consideram-
se feitas as disposil(oes corresponden-
tes deste C6digo.
Brasflia, l0dejaneirode2002; !8! 0 da
Independencia e 114° da Republica.
FERNANDO HENRIQUE CARDO-
SO
Aloysia Nunes Ferreira Filho
Art. 2043. Until otherwise provided for,
provisions of a procedural, administrative
or penai nature, set out in legislation whose
provisions of a civil nature have been
incorporated into this Code, shall remain in
force.
Art. 2044. This Code shall enter into force
one (1) year after its publication.
Art. 2045. Law 3071 of January I, 1916 -
Civil Code and the First Part of the
Commercial Code, Law 556 of June 25,
1850, are revoked.
Art. 2046. All references in legislative acts
to the Codes referred to in the preceding
article are deemed to be made to the
corresponding provisions of this Code.
Brasilia, January 10, 2002; the 181"1 year of
Independence and the 114°1 of the
Republic.
FERNANDO HENRIQUE CARDOSO
Aloysia Nunes Ferreira Filho

Art. 2042. The provisions of the
introductory paragraph of ari. 1848 apply
when a succession opens within the period
of one year after the coming into force of
this Code, even though the testament was
made while the earlier Code, Law 3071 of
January 1, 1916, was in effect; if within that
period the testator does not amend his
testament to declare the just cause for the
stipulation attached to the legal share, the
restriction will not have effect.
Art. 2.042. Aplica-se o disposto no ca-
put do art. 1.848, quando aberta a su-
cessao no prazo de um ano ap6s a entra-
da em vigor deste C6digo. ainda que o
testamento tenha sido feito na vigencia
do anterior, Lei n° 3.071, de 1° dejanei-
ro de 1916; se, no prazo, o testador nao
aditar o testamento para declarar ajusta
causa de clausula aposta aIegftima, nao
subsistira a restric;ao.
 lmpresso em offset nas oficinas da
FOLHA CARIOCA EDITORA LTDA.
Rua Joao Cardoso, 23- Tel,: 2253-2073
Fax,: 2233-5306-Rio de Janeiro - RJ- CEP 20220-060